# Trekkaro - all treks in full > Every Trekkaro trek: key facts, itinerary, inclusions, how to reach and FAQs (36 treks). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/all-treks . Prices and batch dates are updated through the season: confirm them on each trek page. Last updated: 2026-10-19 Contact: WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 · info@trekkaro.com ## Policies - **Free Trekking Gear:** Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, to use and return. ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge (+GST on washing) per person; the deposit is refunded by UPI within 2 working days of the gear check. Not on Chadar, Hampta Pass, Kashmir Great Lakes, Valley of Flowers, Bhrigu Lake and Rupin Pass: there Trekkaro gives free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge). Details: https://www.trekkaro.com/free-trekking-gear - **Transport:** not included in the trek fee. Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Exceptions: Hampta Pass includes Manali to Jobra, Chhatru to Chandratal and back, and Chhatru to Manali (travel to and from Manali is not included); Chadar includes Leh to the trek start and back (airport transfers are not included); Rupin Pass does not include transport, but shared cabs Shimla to Jiskun and Sangla to Shimla can be arranged at ₹3,500 per person for both ways, paid to the driver. - **Cancellation:** 30 days or more before departure: 70% refund. 15 to 29 days: 50% refund. 8 to 14 days: no cash refund, but a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), one free reschedule or a transfer to another trekker. In the 30+ and 15 to 29 day slabs the same voucher, reschedule or transfer can be taken instead of the cash refund. 7 days or less, or a no-show: no refund. Voucher, reschedule and transfer options close 8 days before departure. Full policy: https://www.trekkaro.com/terms#cancellation - **Group size and booking:** at most 20 trekkers per batch, with 1 trek leader or guide for every 8 trekkers. Online booking for a batch closes at 5 PM (India time) the day before it starts. - **Camping:** tents shared by 3 trekkers (men and women in separate tents) and -20°C sleeping bags. - **Price:** per person, plus 5% GST. # Aancha Top Trek > Aancha Top Trek is a 6-day easy–moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,818 m (12,525 ft). It covers about 22 km on foot and starts and ends at Ranachatti. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹9,400 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (57 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/aancha-top-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,818 m / 12,525 ft - **Trekking distance:** 22 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Ranachatti - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Spring-Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 12°C to 21°C, Night 5°C to 8°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day -2°C to 10°C, Night -15°C to -5°C - **Price:** ₹9,400 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (57 upcoming) ## Overview Near the top of a steep, rocky climb out of Ranachatti stands a large tree known locally as the Coin Tree. It is the first place on the trail where you can look up through the forest towards the Dinnala meadows, and from there Aancha Top keeps opening out: a wide meadow facing Bandarpoonch, three small glacial lakes lying still in the early light, and a narrow ridge to a summit at 3,818 m (12,525 ft), with the Garhwal Himalayas standing in every direction. It is a new trail, and on most days you share that summit with very few others. The Aancha Top trek is a compact summit trek above the Yamunotri valley that fits a remarkable amount into four days on foot. It climbs from the terraced fields of Ranachatti into oak and rhododendron forest, past the shepherd huts called chhanis and across the stream at Daloti Gad to Dinnala Bugyal, a wide meadow with Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini to the north and Kedarkantha and Phulara Ridge across the hills. Summit morning leads past three small glacial lakes to a 360° view: Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag (Black Peak) close by, Swargarohini, the Gangotri group, Srikanth and Jaonli further away, and the Dayara and Gidara meadows to the east. Aancha Top lies in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand, in the Yamunotri valley beyond Barkot. The trek starts and ends at Ranachatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft), a village on the road to Yamunotri Dham known for its wood-carved Someshwar Mahadev temple. The route climbs to camps at Bamsingh (2,804 m) and Dinnala (3,277 m), crosses the summit at 3,818 m (12,525 ft) and comes down to the Aancha campsite (3,475 m) before the final descent – a gain of about 1,700 m over three trekking days, and about 22 km on foot in all. Trekkaro runs it as a six-day trek from Dehradun, graded easy to moderate. Aancha Top is known as a quiet summit: its campsites and its top stay uncrowded even in peak season. In our experience, that quiet is as much a part of the trek as the view. ### Three Lakes and a Narrow Ridge – What Makes the Aancha Top Trek Unmissable What makes Aancha Top worth the journey is the shape of its summit day. In about 8 km and 6–7 hours it gives you the upper meadows, patches of rhododendron, three small glacial lakes, a ridge climb with real character and a full 360° panorama, and then, instead of turning back, it carries you on to a new campsite. For a trek graded easy to moderate, we find it a remarkably complete day in the mountains. Nothing about it is technical, but it asks for steady feet and patience, and it rewards both. You leave Dinnala early, after a light breakfast, with at least two litres of water in your pack, because there is none on the route today. The upper meadows are quiet at that hour. Then the first lake appears, small and clear, and on a calm morning nothing moves on its surface. Then the second, and the third. Beyond them the ridge begins. It narrows in places to rock and loose stone, a few sections are exposed, and your trek leader guides each step; when there is snow, microspikes and gaiters go on. You put your poles away when asked, keep your hands free and watch the ground in front of you. And then there is no more ridge to climb. The view opens all at once: Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag close at hand, Swargarohini beyond them, the Gangotri group, Srikanth and Jaonli on the far skyline, and the Dayara and Gidara meadows lying across the hills to the east. The evening before belongs to the same story. From the Dinnala campsite, the sunset over Bandarpoonch is, in our view, one of the most memorable sights of the trek. After time on the top, you come down to the Aancha campsite at about 3,475 m, still higher than Dinnala, with the summit ridge behind you and one more night in the high country ahead. ### The Trail Itself Aancha Top changes its surroundings almost by the hour. The trek begins right from the village, through terraced fields, and soon enters a forest of oak and rhododendron, passing the chhanis where local herders stay with their animals in the grazing season. One stretch is steep and rocky, and near its top the Coin Tree gives the first view towards Dinnala. Camp is at Bamsingh, a forest clearing at about 2,804 m. The next morning the trail drops to the stream crossing at Daloti Gad, then climbs steeply through the forest for about an hour, until the trees give way and Dinnala Bugyal opens out at 3,277 m – green and open in summer, under snow in winter, and short of water in every season. The descent shows you a different forest. From the Aancha campsite, the trail crosses open meadows and the clearing of Pokhari Thathar, then drops steeply through pine, silver birch and oak. On clear mornings the summit ridge stands out behind you, and the forest below is full of birdsong. You pass a few more shepherd huts, where you may meet herders with their animals, and as you lose height the sounds of the village and the river grow louder. Back in Ranachatti, the wood-carved Someshwar Mahadev temple is a reminder that this trail begins in a living village on the road to Yamunotri Dham. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Aancha Top trek is graded easy to moderate, and we recommend it for fit beginners; you do not need previous trekking experience. Trekking days run from 4 to 8 km. The first two are kept deliberately short – 4 km in 3–4 hours to Bamsingh, then 4 km in about 4 hours to Dinnala – though the second hides an hour of steep forest climbing. The hard day is the summit: about 8 km and 6–7 hours, with narrow, rocky and exposed ridge sections, loose stones and no water on the way. The final descent is 6 km in about 5 hours, long and steep in places. You should be comfortable walking 5–7 hours a day on uneven ground; as a benchmark, aim to jog 5 km in under 40 minutes, and allow 4–6 weeks of preparation. From March to June and from September to November, when the trail is snow-free, the trek suits beginners well; for a winter snow summit we recommend one earlier Himalayan trek, though it is not compulsory. Fit children aged 10 and above can join with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: September through to June. ### Key Highlights of the Aancha Top Trek - **A 360° summit view from 3,818 m (12,525 ft)** – Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag close by, with Swargarohini, the Gangotri group, Srikanth and Jaonli further away - **Three small glacial lakes** – passed on summit morning, still and clear on calm days - **Dinnala Bugyal at 3,277 m** – a wide meadow camp facing Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini, with Kedarkantha and Phulara Ridge in view - **Sunset over Bandarpoonch** – from the Dinnala campsite, the evening before the summit - **A real ridge to the top** – narrow, rocky sections that make the final push feel earned - **A quiet, new trail** – campsites and a summit that stay uncrowded even in peak season - **Forest and shepherd huts** – oak, rhododendron, pine and silver birch, the chhanis and the Coin Tree - **Ranachatti and the Someshwar Mahadev temple** – a wood-carved temple in a village on the road to Yamunotri Dham ### Best Time to Do the Aancha Top Trek Aancha Top has a long season, running from September right through to June, and within it the trek takes on three quite different characters. Snow lies from December to February and in some years into March. From April to November the trail is snow-free, though an early snowfall in late October or November is always possible. #### December to February – Winter (A Snow Summit) In winter, Aancha Top becomes a true snow trek. The Dinnala meadow and the summit ridge can lie under deep snow, the camps are very cold at night, and the ridge is climbed in microspikes and gaiters, one careful step at a time. Every day is harder and colder, and the reward matches the effort: a white meadow beneath Bandarpoonch, a snow-covered summit and a quiet trail at the coldest time of the year. - **Temperatures:** Day: -2°C to 10°C | Night: -15°C to -5°C at the higher camps - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the meadows and the summit ridge, deep at Dinnala and on top; microspikes and gaiters used. - **Best for:** A snow summit and white meadows; one earlier Himalayan trek recommended. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (Rhododendrons, Then Green Meadows) As the snow retreats, the forest takes centre stage. In March and April the rhododendrons bloom along the trail, while the last of the winter snow may linger on the high ground early in the season. By May and June the meadows are green and open, the days are warm and the nights mild for the altitude. In our view, this is the most comfortable time to walk the trail. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 21°C | Night: 5°C to 8°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow possible on top in March; snow-free from April, with green meadows by summer. - **Best for:** Rhododendrons in bloom, first-time trekkers and comfortable nights on the meadows. #### September to November – Autumn (Golden Meadows and Clear Skies) Autumn is, in our experience, when Aancha Top looks its sharpest. The skies clear, the meadows turn gold and red, and the summit panorama, from Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag to the Gangotri group, Srikanth and Jaonli, comes into hard focus. The days are pleasant and the nights at the higher camps drop to near freezing. - **Temperatures:** Day: pleasant | Night: near 0°C at the higher camps - **Trail conditions:** Snow-free under clear skies; an early snowfall is possible in late October or November. - **Best for:** The sharpest mountain views, golden meadows and clear light on the summit. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For a first Himalayan summit, book between March and June or between September and November. Choose March and April for rhododendrons, May and June for green meadows and the mildest nights, and September to November for golden grass and the clearest view from the top – our first choice for the summit panorama. If you have an earlier Himalayan trek behind you and want snow underfoot, a December to February batch turns Aancha Top into a quiet winter summit. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Ranachatti **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Ranachatti (~160 km, 6–7 hrs) | Altitude: 2,134 m (7,000 ft) | Stay: Homestay / guesthouse, Ranachatti** Day 1 is a travel day. You leave Dehradun in the morning and drive through Mussoorie and Naugaon, then up the Yamuna valley past Barkot. For much of the way the road follows the Yamuna River, with terraced villages on the slopes above. There is a lunch stop on the way. Barkot is the last place with an ATM, 1–1.5 hours before Ranachatti, so we recommend carrying the cash you need from Dehradun. Ranachatti is a village on the road to Yamunotri, at about 2,134 m. It is known for its wood-carved Someshwar Mahadev temple, one of the finest examples of traditional carving in the valley. In the evening, walk through the village and visit the temple. You stay in a homestay or guesthouse. Your trek leader holds a briefing and checks documents. Airtel and Jio work at Ranachatti, but there is little or no network on the trail after today. Tell your family you will be out of reach for the next three days. What to Expect: - Drive via Mussoorie, Naugaon and Barkot along the Yamuna River - Terraced villages on the slopes of the Yamuna valley - The wood-carved Someshwar Mahadev temple in Ranachatti - Evening briefing and document check - Last ATM at Barkot; little or no network beyond Ranachatti - Overnight: Ranachatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft) ### Day 2: Ranachatti to Bamsingh **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,134 m → 2,804 m (9,200 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Terrain: terraced fields, then oak and rhododendron forest, with one steep and rocky stretch | Stay: Tents at Bamsingh** The trek begins right from the village. You walk out of Ranachatti on a path through terraced fields, and within a short while the fields give way to a forest of oak and rhododendron. The village sounds fade behind you as the trees close in. On paper this is a short day, 4 km and 3–4 hours, but the trail gains height for most of the way. Find an easy rhythm early and keep it. Along the way you pass chhanis, the shepherd huts where local herders stay with their animals in the grazing season. There are streams on this lower part of the trail, but ask your trek leader before you refill your bottle from one. Lunch is packed and eaten on the trail, so you can stop wherever the group finds a good spot. One stretch of the trail is steep and rocky. This is the part of the day to take slowly. Shorten your step, use your trekking poles for balance and place your feet on firm ground rather than loose stones. Near the top of the climb stands a large tree known locally as the ‘Coin Tree’. It marks your first view towards the Dinnala meadows above, where you camp tomorrow. Bamsingh, at about 2,804 m, is a forest clearing and your first campsite. You arrive early, and hot tea and snacks are waiting. The short day is deliberate. The free afternoon helps your body adjust to the height, so use it to rest, not to rush around. Dinner is served early in the dining tent. In the evening your trek leader checks everyone’s oxygen level and pulse, a routine that continues every day of the trek. Forest nights are cool in summer and freezing in winter, so keep your thermals and woollen cap ready before the sun goes down. What to Expect: - Terraced fields above Ranachatti, then oak and rhododendron forest - Chhanis (shepherd huts) used by local herders in the grazing season - One steep, rocky stretch: slow steps and trekking poles make it easier - The ‘Coin Tree’ and your first view towards the Dinnala meadows - Early arrival, hot tea and the first evening oxygen and pulse check - Overnight: Bamsingh camp (2,804 m / 9,200 ft) ### Day 3: Bamsingh to Dinnala Meadow **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,804 m → 3,277 m (10,750 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 4 hrs | Terrain: short drop to a stream crossing, then about an hour of steep forest climbing onto open meadow | Stay: Tents at Dinnala Bugyal** Do not be fooled by the distance. Today is only 4 km, but it holds the steepest climb of the trek so far. From Bamsingh the trail first drops a little to a stream crossing at Daloti Gad. This short downhill is a gentle start before the work begins. Cross where your trek leader shows you and take it one step at a time. After the crossing comes the hardest part of the day: about an hour of steep climbing through the forest. Walk in a line behind your trek leader and keep a gap from the person in front. Step on solid ground rather than loose stones. Go slowly and take short breaks. In our experience, short and frequent pauses work far better on this climb than long stops. Above the climb, the forest suddenly opens onto the wide Dinnala Bugyal (meadow), at about 3,277 m. After an hour inside the trees, the open sky feels very wide. This is one of the finest campsites on the trek. Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini rise to the north, and you can see across to Kedarkantha and Phulara Ridge. In summer the meadow is green and open. In winter it is under snow, and the camp is very cold at night. Water is scarce at Dinnala. The team carries and manages it carefully and boils or treats what you drink, so please use it sparingly. Spend the afternoon resting and taking in the views. Whatever the season, the sunset over Bandarpoonch from here is one of the most memorable sights of the trek. In the evening your trek leader briefs the group on tomorrow’s summit climb and checks everyone’s oxygen levels. Fill your bottles at camp before you sleep, ready for the dry summit day. Eat a full dinner and go to sleep early. Summit day starts before sunrise. What to Expect: - Short drop to the stream crossing at Daloti Gad - About an hour of steep climbing through the forest, the hardest part of the day - The forest opening suddenly onto the wide Dinnala Bugyal - Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini to the north, with Kedarkantha and Phulara Ridge in view - Scarce water at camp, then the summit briefing and oxygen check - Overnight: Dinnala Bugyal camp (3,277 m / 10,750 ft) ### Day 4: Summit Day - Dinnala to Aancha Camp via Aancha Top **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,277 m → 3,818 m (12,525 ft) → 3,475 m | Distance: 8 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: upper meadows, rhododendron patches and three small glacial lakes, then a narrow, rocky ridge | Stay: Tents at Aancha camp** This is the longest and hardest day of the trek. The effort comes from two things: the length, about 8 km and 6–7 hours, and the ridge near the top. You start before sunrise, after a light breakfast. There is no water on the route today, so fill at least two litres from camp before you leave. The trail first crosses the upper meadows and patches of rhododendron. Then it passes three small glacial lakes, still and clear on calm mornings. This part of the walk is open, and you can take it at an easy pace. Save your energy for the ridge above. In winter the summit ridge can be under deep snow, and every step takes longer. The final climb to Aancha Top follows a ridge, and this is the section to respect. A few stretches are narrow, rocky and exposed, with loose stones underfoot. Your trek leader guides each step. Keep your hands free; if your trek leader asks, put your poles away on the rocky sections. In snow, we use microspikes and gaiters. Walk with a gap from the person in front so no one is crowded on the narrow parts. Move carefully, test each foothold and do not rush. The same care applies on the way down from the top, because the loose stones are just as loose in descent. From the summit, at 3,818 m (12,525 ft), the view opens in every direction. Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag rise close by. Further away stand Swargarohini, the Gangotri group, and Srikanth and Jaonli. To the east you can see across to the Dayara and Gidara meadows. Take your time at the top. After that, you descend to the Aancha campsite at about 3,475 m, your last camp of the trek. Your trek leader runs the usual evening oxygen and pulse check, and an early night is well earned. What to Expect: - Start before sunrise; carry at least 2 litres, as there is no water on the route - Upper meadows, rhododendron patches and three small glacial lakes - Narrow, rocky and exposed ridge sections with loose stones; microspikes and gaiters in snow - 360-degree summit view: Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag, Swargarohini, the Gangotri group, Srikanth and Jaonli - The Dayara and Gidara meadows across the hills to the east - Overnight: Aancha camp (3,475 m) ### Day 5: Aancha Camp to Ranachatti **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,475 m → 2,134 m (7,000 ft) | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 5 hrs | Terrain: open meadows, then a long descent through pine, silver birch and oak forest, steep in places | Stay: Homestay / guesthouse, Ranachatti** This is your last day on the trail, and nearly all of it runs downhill. After breakfast the trail crosses open meadows and passes the clearing of Pokhari Thathar. The meadows are open at first, a gentle way to start the day. On clear mornings the summit ridge stands out behind you. It is a good moment to stop, turn around and look back on the route you have walked over the last three days. Below the meadows, the trail drops steeply through pine, silver birch and oak forest back towards the valley. The descent is long and steep in places, so walk carefully and use your trekking poles. Shorten your step, keep your knees soft and let the poles take some of the load. Downhill is where tired legs make mistakes, so take a short break whenever your knees start to feel it. The forests here are full of birdsong. The trail passes a few shepherd huts and small clearings on the way down, where you may meet herders with their animals. As you get lower, the sounds of the village and the river below grow louder. This is where attention tends to drop. Take care on the last steep section into the village. Many slips happen when people relax at the end, so keep the same slow, careful pace until you are on the flat ground of the village. You reach Ranachatti by early afternoon. After three nights in tents, the hot water at the homestay is very welcome, and lunch follows the shower. The rest of the day is free. If you did not see the Someshwar Mahadev temple on Day 1, this is your chance; otherwise, simply rest. In the evening, the group celebrates the summit together. It is your last night in the valley before the drive home. What to Expect: - Open meadows and the clearing of Pokhari Thathar - Views back to the summit ridge on clear mornings - Long, steep descent through pine, silver birch and oak forest - Shepherd huts and small clearings, where you may meet herders with their animals - Hot shower and lunch at Ranachatti, then the summit celebration - Overnight: Ranachatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft) ### Day 6: Ranachatti to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Ranachatti → Dehradun (~160 km, 6–7 hrs) | Altitude: 2,134 m → 640 m | Stay: Trek ends in Dehradun** This is a travel day. After breakfast you drive back down the Yamuna valley, through Barkot, Naugaon and Mussoorie to Dehradun. The drive takes about 6–7 hours with short stops. It is the same road you came up on Day 1, with the Yamuna River beside you for much of the way and terraced villages on the slopes above. With the trek behind you, it is a quieter ride to watch the valley go by. Barkot is a good place to withdraw cash or pick up snacks on the way back. Keep water and a snack in your daypack as well, since the stops on the way are short. You reach Dehradun in the late afternoon or evening. Please book your onward travel for the late night or the next day. Mountain roads can be slow, and a little margin keeps your train or flight safe. The trek ends on arrival in Dehradun. What to Expect: - Return drive down the Yamuna valley via Barkot, Naugaon and Mussoorie - About 6–7 hours on the road with short stops - Barkot for cash and snacks on the way back - Arrival in Dehradun in the late afternoon or evening - Onward travel best booked for the late night or the next day - Trek ends at Ranachatti on Day 5; drop at Dehradun Railway Station ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: homestay or guesthouse in Ranachatti, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the camping nights - Dining and toilet tents at the campsites - First-aid kit, pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide for all 6 days - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Ranachatti and back. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle (up to 6 trekkers). - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Ranachatti #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun – about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Ranachatti leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Ranachatti:** about 160 km via Mussoorie, Naugaon and Barkot, 6–7 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle (up to 6 trekkers). The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes you from Ranachatti to Dehradun Railway Station by evening. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) – this is also the cab pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. Take the overnight train or arrive a day early so you are ready for the 6:30 AM departure; check current timings and book early in peak season. - **Overnight:** Nanda Devi Express from Delhi - **Day trains:** Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat – arrive the day before and stay in Dehradun **From Dehradun to Ranachatti:** about 160 km via Mussoorie, Naugaon and Barkot, 6–7 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle (up to 6 trekkers). The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes you from Ranachatti to Dehradun Railway Station by evening. Book a late-night train or travel the next day. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs; Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night. Board a government bus from inside ISBT, then take an auto or cab from Dehradun ISBT to Dehradun Railway Station for the 6:30 AM pickup – or arrive the evening before. - **Government Volvo or ordinary bus** – from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; check current timings - **On your own to the base** – an early bus from Dehradun to Barkot, then a shared jeep to Ranachatti (about 35 km) **From Dehradun to Ranachatti:** about 160 km via Mussoorie, Naugaon and Barkot, 6–7 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle (up to 6 trekkers). The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes you from Ranachatti to Dehradun Railway Station by evening. Book an overnight bus to Delhi for that night or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Barkot, 1–1.5 hours before Ranachatti, has the last ATM - Carry the cash you need from Dehradun - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Airtel and Jio work at Ranachatti - Little or no network on the trail after Day 1 - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Aancha Top trek, and where does it start? The Aancha Top trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Yamunotri valley beyond Barkot. It starts from Ranachatti, a village on the road to Yamunotri Dham, about 160 km (6–7 hours) by road from Dehradun. From Ranachatti the trail climbs through forest and shepherd huts to the Dinnala meadow, then up a ridge to the 12,525 ft summit. ### How many days is the Aancha Top trek? The Aancha Top trek takes 6 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 4 trekking days covering about 22 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Dehradun and Ranachatti (6–7 hours) - **Days 2–5:** trekking, 4–8 km a day - **Longest day:** summit day (Day 4), about 8 km and 6–7 hours ### What is the altitude of the Aancha Top trek? The highest point of the Aancha Top trek is the summit at 3,818 m (12,525 ft). The trek starts at Ranachatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft), so you gain about 1,700 m over three trekking days. - **Bamsingh camp:** 2,804 m - **Dinnala camp:** 3,277 m - **Aancha camp:** 3,475 m ### What is the difficulty level of the Aancha Top trek? The Aancha Top trek is graded Easy–Moderate and is suitable for fit beginners. The first two trekking days are short, but summit day is long and the ridge is narrow and rocky in places. - **Day 3:** a steep one-hour climb to Dinnala - **Summit day:** about 8 km with exposed, rocky ridge sections - **Winter:** snow makes every day harder and colder ### Is the Aancha Top trek good for beginners? Yes, the Aancha Top trek is suitable for beginners from March to June and September to November, when the trail is snow-free. You do not need trekking experience, but you do need good fitness for the long summit day. For a winter (snow) attempt, one earlier Himalayan trek is recommended but not compulsory. ### What fitness level do I need for the Aancha Top trek? For the Aancha Top trek you should be able to walk 5–7 hours a day on uneven ground, and aim to jog 5 km in under 40 minutes before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### Is the Aancha Top trek similar to the Kedarkantha trek? Yes – like Kedarkantha, the Aancha Top trek ends on a summit with a 360° view, and the height is almost the same (12,525 ft vs 12,500 ft). The big difference is the crowd: Aancha Top is a new trail, so campsites and the summit stay quiet even in peak season. If you have already done Kedarkantha, or want a summit without the queues, Aancha Top is the natural next trek. ### What is the best time to do the Aancha Top trek? The best time for the Aancha Top trek is March to June and September to November; December to February is the season for a snow summit. The trek is closed in July and August (monsoon). - **December–February/March:** winter snow summit, very cold nights - **March–June:** rhododendrons in March–April, then green meadows - **September–November:** clear skies, golden meadows, sharpest views ### Is there snow on the Aancha Top trek, and in which months? The Aancha Top trek has snow from December to February, and into March after a heavy winter. In winter the Dinnala meadow and the summit ridge can be under deep snow, and microspikes and gaiters are used. From April to November the trail is snow-free, though an early snowfall in late October or November is possible. ### How cold does it get on the Aancha Top trek? On the Aancha Top trek, spring and summer nights are 5–8°C, while winter nights drop to -15 to -5°C at the higher camps. - **March–June:** days 12–21°C, nights 5–8°C - **September–November:** pleasant days, nights near 0°C at the higher camps - **December–February:** days -2 to 10°C, nights -15 to -5°C ### Which mountains can you see on the Aancha Top trek? From the Aancha Top summit you get a 360° view of Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag (Black Peak) close by, with Swargarohini, the Gangotri group, Srikanth and Jaonli further away. Across the hills to the east you can see the Dayara and Gidara meadows, and from the Dinnala campsite Kedarkantha and Phulara Ridge are in view. ### What is the terrain like on the Aancha Top trek? The Aancha Top trail goes from village fields and oak–rhododendron forest to open meadows and a rocky summit ridge. - **Day 2:** fields, forest and one steep rocky stretch - **Day 3:** a stream crossing at Daloti Gad and a steep climb to Dinnala meadow - **Day 4:** meadows, three small glacial lakes and a narrow, rocky ridge - **Day 5:** a long, steep descent through pine, birch and oak forest ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Aancha Top trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Aancha Top trek is low to moderate, as the highest point is 3,818 m. The first two trekking days are kept short so your body can adjust. Your trek leader checks everyone’s oxygen level and pulse every evening. Report a headache, nausea, dizziness or breathlessness at once – rest and going lower are the best treatment. ### What is the minimum age for the Aancha Top trek? The minimum age for the Aancha Top trek is 10 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Aancha Top trek? To reach the Aancha Top trek, travel to Dehradun; the base village Ranachatti is about 160 km (6–7 hours) from Dehradun via Mussoorie, Naugaon and Barkot. - **Train:** Dehradun Railway Station (Nanda Devi Express, Jan Shatabdi from Delhi) - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun - **Bus:** Delhi to Dehradun overnight; on your own, Dehradun to Barkot, then a shared jeep to Ranachatti Plan to reach Dehradun the night before Day 1. ### Is transport included in the Aancha Top trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle (up to 6 trekkers). The cab runs from Dehradun Railway Station to Ranachatti and back. ### Where do we stay on the Aancha Top trek? On the Aancha Top trek you stay 2 nights in a homestay or guesthouse in Ranachatti (Day 1 and Day 5) and 3 nights in tents at Bamsingh, Dinnala and Aancha camp. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with a dining tent and toilet tent at every camp. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Aancha Top trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Aancha Top trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Aancha Top trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Aancha Top trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Aancha Top trek? On the Aancha Top trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Aancha Top trek? On the Aancha Top trek, carry at least 2 litres of water every day: there are streams on the lower trail, but water is scarce at Dinnala and there is none on summit day. Our team boils or treats the water at every campsite. Ask your trek leader before refilling from a stream. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Aancha Top trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Aancha Top trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Aancha Top trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Aancha Top trek costs ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Aancha Top trek? No doctor joins the Aancha Top trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Aancha Top trek? For the Aancha Top trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Aancha Top trek? Mobile network on the Aancha Top trek is available only at Ranachatti (Airtel and Jio); there is little or no signal on the trail after Day 1. The last ATM is in Barkot, 1–1.5 hours before Ranachatti. Carry the cash you need from Dehradun and tell your family you will be out of reach for three days. ### Is there any cultural or spiritual significance to the Aancha Top trek? Yes. Ranachatti, the base of the Aancha Top trek, has the wood-carved Someshwar Mahadev temple and lies on the road to Yamunotri Dham. On the trail you pass the huts (chhanis) of shepherds who bring their animals up to the meadows in summer. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 23 Nov 2026 to 28 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 10 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 17 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 24 Dec 2026 - 23 Dec 2026 to 28 Dec 2026 - 24 Dec 2026 to 29 Dec 2026 - … 45 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/aancha-top-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Ali Bedni Bugyal Trek > Ali Bedni Bugyal Trek is a 6-day easy–moderate trek in Chamoli, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,658 m (12,000 ft). It covers about 21 km on foot and starts and ends at Lohajung. Best time: March to June and October to November. Trekkaro price: ₹8,950 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (37 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/ali-bedni-bugyal-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,658 m / 12,000 ft - **Trekking distance:** 21 km - **Region:** Chamoli, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Lohajung - **Best time:** March to June and October to November - **Temperature:** Spring-Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 8°C to 15°C, Night 0°C to 7°C | Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day around 10°C, Night down to -8°C - **Price:** ₹8,950 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (37 upcoming) ## Overview For half an hour the path is stone steps, oak trunks and the low, dark roof of the rhododendron forest. Then, almost in a single line, the trees stop. The ground in front of you turns to open grass that rolls away in every direction, the sky widens, and the snow-clad peaks of the high Himalaya step out from behind the ridges. In our experience, few moments in the mountains of Uttarakhand change the feel of a trek as completely as that first step onto Ali Bugyal. The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is built around two of the highest alpine meadows in Uttarakhand. Ali Bugyal comes first, a wide green carpet of grassland dotted with wildflowers. Bedni Bugyal follows, rising gently to Bedni Bugyal Top at 3,658 m, where Mt Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth line the skyline. Just below the top lies Bedni Kund, also called Vaitarni Lake, a sacred lake that holds the reflection of Trishul on still days. Beneath the meadows runs the other half of the story: oak and rhododendron forest along the Neel Ganga River, wooden bridges, the Ranka Dhar ridge above Wan village, and a forest camp ringed by tall deodars. In six days, Trekkaro takes you up through that forest, across both meadows and back down to the village where the walking began. The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek lies in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand, on the border of Garhwal and Kumaon. It is a 6-day, Easy to Moderate trek of 21 km. It starts and ends at Lohajung (2,316 m), the base village where you stay on Day 1 and Day 5, with pickup and drop at Rishikesh; the walking starts and ends at Wan (2,438 m), one of the largest villages in Chamoli, 15 km by road from Lohajung. The two bugyals spread between roughly 3,354 m and 3,658 m, the highest camp is Abin Kharak (3,410 m), and the highest point is Bedni Bugyal Top (3,658 m / 12,000 ft). There are no technical sections; the climbing is steady, the days are short, and the reward is open meadow at real Himalayan height. The trek is known as one of the finest meadow walks in the Indian Himalayas, and for its wide view of Trishul. That reputation, in our experience, is well earned. ### Two Meadows Beneath Trishul – What Makes the Ali Bedni Bugyal Trek Unmissable Most meadow treks give you a single bugyal. This one gives you two, joined by a walk across open grassland above the tree line. Ali Bugyal arrives as a sudden reveal at the top of a steep forest climb, and once you are out on it the walking eases at once: gentle slopes, soft grass underfoot, colourful blooms and cool Himalayan breezes. A steady rise brings you to the ridge of Ali Bugyal, with the surrounding mountains spread out around you, and from there it is less than a kilometre to the camp at Abin Kharak. The tents sit out on the meadow itself, with grassland sweeping away on all sides and nothing between you and a starlit sky. The next morning belongs to Bedni. You leave Abin Kharak and walk across the rolling green of Ali into Bedni Bugyal, which we consider among the finest alpine meadows in Uttarakhand. The climb is moderate and the views open with every step. Then you stand on Bedni Bugyal Top, at 3,658 m. Trishul rises ahead of you at 7,120 m, with Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth along the horizon, and because the meadow is open and treeless, nothing stands between you and the snow. You walk down to Bedni Kund. The water is still. Trishul sits in it, upside down and perfectly clear. You find a dry patch of grass and sit. For a while, there is nothing to do but look. What gives this lake its weight is not only the view. Bedni Kund is a sacred site and a key halting point of the Nanda Devi Raj Jat Yatra, a ritual procession held once every 12 years, and it is known for the rare Brahma Kamal flower. Standing at its edge, with the mountain reflected at your feet, you are on ground that holds a real place in local faith. From the lake the trail drops gradually back to the tree line, reaching Ghairoli Patal by late afternoon. We find that this is what sets the trek apart: the walking days are short enough that you have time to sit with the meadows, to watch sunrise and sunset light move across the snow peaks, and to take the place in rather than march across it. ### The Forest Trail Itself Below the meadows, the forest is a journey of its own. The trek begins at Wan and climbs straight into dense oak and rhododendron. The Neel Ganga River runs beside the trail, crossed on wooden bridges, and the first couple of kilometres rise steadily to the Ranka Dhar ridge, with wide views back over Wan. By late afternoon the trail reaches Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m), a quiet clearing surrounded by tall deodars. The next morning begins on stone-paved steps through the trees, and it is this half hour of climbing in shade that makes the opening onto Ali Bugyal feel so sudden. On the way out the forest shows a different face. From Ghairoli Patal the trail winds down through oak, pine and rhododendron, alive with birdsong, before dropping steeply to the Neel Ganga, the place to stop and cool your feet in the icy water. A gentle climb brings you back to Ranka Dhar for a final look at the high peaks before the descent into Wan. Over four walking days the landscape moves from village to deep forest, from forest clearing to open meadow, and from meadow to a sacred lake beneath high snow peaks. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is graded Easy to Moderate, and where it sits on that scale depends mostly on snow. Without snow it is a simple walk for anyone of reasonable fitness; with snow on the meadows, the going is slower and needs more care. Walking days cover 4 to 6 km and take 3 to 5 hours, on forest paths, stone steps and open grass. The hardest day is the first one on foot, from Wan to Ghairoli Patal, which gains about 767 m over 6 km in 4 to 5 hours. The walk out, with its steep drop to the Neel Ganga, tests your knees. No previous Himalayan trek is needed, and we recommend this route as a first high-altitude trek for anyone who can walk 4 to 5 hours on hill trails. We recommend starting your preparation at least 4 to 6 weeks before departure. Minimum age: 8 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor’s medical certificate. Season: March to June, and October to November. ### Key Highlights of the Ali Bedni Bugyal Trek - **Two high meadows on one trek** – Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal, among the highest bugyals in Uttarakhand, joined by a walk across open grassland - **Bedni Bugyal Top at 3,658 m / 12,000 ft** – the highest point, with views of Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth - **Bedni Kund (Vaitarni Lake)** – a sacred lake that reflects Mt Trishul on still days, known for the rare Brahma Kamal - **Nanda Devi Raj Jat Yatra** – Bedni Kund is a key halt on this ritual procession, held once every 12 years - **The reveal of Ali Bugyal** – the forest ends suddenly after a short climb on stone-paved steps - **The Neel Ganga forest trail** – oak and rhododendron forest, wooden bridges and the Ranka Dhar ridge above Wan - **Camps in forest and on meadow** – Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m) among tall deodars, and Abin Kharak (3,410 m) out on the grass under a starlit sky - **Short walking days** – 3 to 5 hours on the trail, leaving time for sunrise and sunset over the snow peaks ### Best Time to Do the Ali Bedni Bugyal Trek The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek has two seasons, March to June and October to November, and the meadows look quite different in each. Spring opens with snow still on the high ground and moves into green grass and flowers; autumn turns the bugyals gold and brings the clearest mountain views of the year. #### March to Early April – Snow on the Bugyals The season opens with snow still lying across the higher meadows. Ali and Bedni take on a white, quiet look, and the walk across the grassland becomes slower and needs more care where snow lies on the trail. For trekkers who want a first taste of Himalayan snow on a gentle route with short days, it is a rewarding time to go. - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the higher meadows, slower walking, cold nights. - **Best for:** A first snow trek on a gentle route, and quiet white meadows beneath Trishul. #### April to June – Green Meadows and Spring Flowers As spring moves on, the bugyals come alive. The weather is pleasant, the meadows turn a lush green, and wild high-altitude flowers and herbs spread across the slopes of Ali and Bedni. Early April can still hold some snow on the high ground, but through the rest of the season the grassland walking is at its easiest, and the mild days make this the most comfortable window on the trek. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 15°C | Night: 0°C to 7°C - **Trail conditions:** Some snow possible in early April; green meadows and blooming alpine flowers through the season. - **Best for:** First-time trekkers, families with children aged 8 and above, and meadows in flower. #### October to November – Golden Grass and Clear Skies Autumn is when the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek shows its sharpest side. The air turns crisp, the skies clear, and the bugyals change from green to gold. Mountain visibility is at its best of the year, and Trishul, Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth stand out hard-edged above Bedni Bugyal Top. Nights at camp are cold. - **Trail conditions:** Crisp, clear weather, golden meadows, cold nights. - **Best for:** The clearest views of Trishul, golden meadows and mountain photography. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the gentlest conditions, green meadows and spring flowers, book an April to June batch; it is our first choice for first-time trekkers and families. For the clearest views of Trishul and the bugyals in gold, choose October or November, our top pick for photographers. If you want snow on the meadows with short, manageable days, March and early April are the window to book. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Lohajung **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Lohajung (about 250 km, 8–10 hrs) | Altitude: 2,316 m (7,600 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek starts with a full day on the road. Set off from Rishikesh early, around 6:30 AM, and you reach Lohajung by evening without pressure. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan at 6:30 AM. The hill road runs via Devprayag, Srinagar, Rudraprayag, Gauchar, Karnaprayag, Tharali and Dewal, through forest, river valleys and remote Garhwal villages with terraced fields. Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag are three of the Panch Prayags, the holy confluences on the Alaknanda. Stop at Devprayag if you can; this is where the Alaknanda and the Bhagirathi join to form the Ganga. Lohajung, at 2,316 m, is the base camp for Ali Bedni Bugyal, Roopkund and Brahmatal. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay, and dinner is served in the evening. The shops here are few and basic, so bring your trekking essentials with you. Withdraw cash at Dewal, the last reliable ATM, and make your calls at Lohajung, the last place with a stable mobile signal. What to Expect: - Early start from Rishikesh, around 6:30 AM - About 250 km hill drive past three of the Panch Prayags - Recommended halt at Devprayag, where the Ganga is formed - Dewal: last reliable ATM; Lohajung: last stable mobile network - Carry your essentials – Lohajung has only a few small shops - Overnight: Lohajung guesthouse / homestay (2,316 m / 7,600 ft) ### Day 2: Lohajung to Wan, then Trek to Ghairoli Patal **Route Details:** **Drive: Lohajung → Wan (15 km, ~1 hr) | Altitude: 2,438 m → 3,205 m (10,515 ft) | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: steady climb to Ranka Dhar, then oak and rhododendron forest along the Neel Ganga | Stay: Tents at Ghairoli Patal** The morning begins with a 15 km drive from Lohajung to Wan, about an hour. Wan is the starting point of the trek and one of the largest villages in Chamoli. From here you walk 6 km to Ghairoli Patal, gaining about 767 m (2,515 ft) in 4 to 5 hours. It is a steady climb rather than a steep one, and the right way to walk it is slowly. The first couple of kilometres climb steadily to Ranka Dhar, the ridge above Wan village, where the views open up for the first time. Pause here to catch your breath. The trail then continues into dense oak and rhododendron forest, full of diverse flora and fauna, and follows the lively Neel Ganga River, which you cross on wooden bridges. The river is a good place for a short rest. In camp, drinking water is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets, and on the trail your trek leader or guide will tell you where to refill your bottle. Keep sipping through the day; steady hydration is the simplest help you can give your body at altitude. By late afternoon you reach Ghairoli Patal at 3,205 m, a peaceful clearing in the forest surrounded by tall deodars. This is your first night in tents, and the trees keep the camp calm and quiet. Settle in, add a warm layer as the light fades and rest well. Tomorrow the forest opens onto the meadows. What to Expect: - 1-hour drive from Lohajung to Wan, the trailhead - Steady climb to Ranka Dhar ridge above Wan village - Oak and rhododendron forest along the Neel Ganga, with wooden bridge crossings - 6 km and about 767 m (2,515 ft) of gain – an easy pace works best - Ask your trek leader where to refill water; camp water is boiled or treated - Overnight: Tents at Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m / 10,515 ft) ### Day 3: Ghairoli Patal to Abin Kharak via Ali Bugyal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,205 m → 3,450 m (Ali Bugyal ridge) → 3,410 m (11,185 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: ~3 hrs | Terrain: steep stone-stepped forest climb, then open alpine meadow | Stay: Tents at Abin Kharak** Today is short, but it starts with work. For the first 30 minutes the trail climbs steeply out of Ghairoli Patal over stone-paved steps, through dense oak and rhododendron forest. Take it slowly. Short steps and a steady rhythm on the stones keep your breathing under control, and the steep part is over in about half an hour. Then the forest clears and Ali Bugyal opens in front of you, a vast spread of alpine grassland running away in every direction. It is known as Asia’s largest alpine meadow, and the change from closed forest to open sky is sudden. The gradient eases at once. You walk across gentle slopes dotted with wildflowers and colourful blooms, with a cool Himalayan breeze and wide mountain views on every side. The climb continues gently to the ridge of Ali Bugyal at 3,450 m (11,500 ft), the high point of the day. From the ridge the views of the surrounding mountains open wide. Stop here for a while. With only about 3 hours of walking today, there is no reason to rush, and time spent at this height helps your body adjust for tomorrow’s climb to Bedni Bugyal Top. From the ridge it is less than a kilometre to Abin Kharak at 3,410 m, your campsite for the night. The camp sits among sweeping meadows, and because the day is short you arrive with plenty of daylight left. Use the afternoon to rest, drink water and enjoy the open space around you. On a clear night the sky over the meadows fills with stars. What to Expect: - 30-minute steep climb on stone steps through oak and rhododendron forest - The forest opens suddenly onto Ali Bugyal, a vast alpine meadow - Gentle meadow walking with wildflowers in season and wide Himalayan views - Ridge of Ali Bugyal (3,450 m / 11,500 ft): the high point of the day - Short 4 km day of about 3 hours – plenty of time to rest at camp - Overnight: Tents at Abin Kharak (3,410 m / 11,185 ft) ### Day 4: Abin Kharak to Ghairoli Patal via Bedni Bugyal Top **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,410 m → 3,658 m (12,000 ft) → 3,205 m (10,515 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: ~4 hrs | Terrain: rolling meadow, moderate climb to Bedni Top, gradual descent into forest | Stay: Tents at Ghairoli Patal** This is the summit day of the trek, and a gentle one. From Abin Kharak the trail crosses the rolling green meadows of Ali and enters Bedni Bugyal, considered among the finest alpine meadows in Uttarakhand. The climb is moderate, about 248 m (815 ft) in all, and the grass underfoot makes for easy walking. Keep a steady pace and enjoy the open country. Bedni Bugyal Top at 3,658 m (12,000 ft) is the highest point of the trek. On a clear day the big peaks stand in a line in front of you: Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth. Spend time here. This wide view across the meadows to the snow peaks is the one the trek is known for. Close by is Bedni Kund, also called Vaitarni Lake, a sacred lake where Mt Trishul reflects on the water. It is a halting point of the Nanda Devi Raj Jat Yatra, a ritual procession held once every 12 years, and the area is known for the rare Brahma Kamal flower. Walk around it quietly; it is a place of worship as well as a viewpoint. From Bedni Bugyal the trail descends gradually towards the tree line, a drop of about 453 m (1,485 ft). Use your poles and keep your steps short on the way down. After a couple of hours you re-enter dense oak and rhododendron forest and reach Ghairoli Patal at 3,205 m by late afternoon. It is the same deodar-ringed clearing you camped in two nights ago, and its shelter feels welcome after the open meadows. What to Expect: - Rolling meadows of Ali and Bedni Bugyal, with a moderate climb of about 248 m (815 ft) - Bedni Bugyal Top (3,658 m / 12,000 ft): the highest point of the trek - Views of Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth - Bedni Kund (Vaitarni Lake), with Mt Trishul reflected on its surface - Gradual descent of about 453 m (1,485 ft) back into oak and rhododendron forest - Overnight: Tents at Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m / 10,515 ft) ### Day 5: Ghairoli Patal to Wan, Drive to Lohajung **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,205 m → 2,438 m (8,000 ft) | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: forest descent, steep drop to the Neel Ganga, gentle climb to Ranka Dhar, gradual descent to Wan | Drive: Wan → Lohajung (15 km, ~1 hr) | Stay: Guesthouse / hotel at Lohajung** The last trekking day retraces the route you climbed on Day 2. From Ghairoli Patal you descend through dense oak, pine and rhododendron forest, on a trail alive with birdsong and fresh mountain air. In all you lose about 767 m (2,515 ft) over 6 km, so keep your poles out and let your knees work gently. After a few kilometres the path drops steeply towards the Neel Ganga. This is the steepest part of the day. Slow down, shorten your stride and place your feet carefully. At the bottom the river makes a good rest stop, and you can take your boots off and soak your feet in its icy water before the last stretch. From the river the trail climbs gently to Ranka Dhar ridge, where you get a final look at the high Himalaya before the trek winds down. Then a gradual descent leads into Wan at 2,438 m, one of the largest villages in Chamoli. Your trek on foot ends here, and the warmth of the village is a fitting close to the walk. A shared cab, paid directly to the driver, takes you on the short drive of about an hour back to Lohajung. You stay in a guesthouse or hotel on triple or quad sharing. Freshen up, rest your legs and celebrate finishing the trek. Dinner is served in the evening. What to Expect: - Forest descent through oak, pine and rhododendron, about 767 m (2,515 ft) of height loss - Steep drop to the Neel Ganga – a good place to rest and cool your feet - Gentle climb to Ranka Dhar ridge for last views of the high Himalaya - Wan village (2,438 m / 8,000 ft), one of the largest in Chamoli - 15 km, 1-hour drive from Wan back to Lohajung - Overnight: Lohajung guesthouse / hotel (2,316 m / 7,600 ft) ### Day 6: Lohajung to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Lohajung → Rishikesh (about 250 km, 8–10 hrs) | Altitude: 2,316 m → 340 m (1,115 ft) | End: Rishikesh by evening** The trek closes with the long drive back to Rishikesh. The road retraces the way you came, via Dewal, Tharali, Karnaprayag, Gauchar, Rudraprayag, Srinagar and Devprayag, through valleys, along riverbanks and past mountain towns. Over the day you descend about 1,976 m (6,485 ft). Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. We recommend a short stop at Devprayag to watch the Bhagirathi and the Alaknanda meet and form the Ganga. After days in the meadows, it is a good last look at the rivers of these mountains. The cab reaches Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) by about 7:00 PM. Meals during the drive are not part of the trek, so carry snacks or plan a roadside stop. Leave a margin before any onward train, bus or flight; this is a full day on the road. What to Expect: - About 250 km drive back to Rishikesh, 8–10 hours - Route via Karnaprayag, Rudraprayag and Srinagar - Halt at Devprayag for the confluence of the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda - Shared cab from Lohajung, not included in the trek fee - Meals in transit are your own - Trek ends at Lohajung; drop at Rishikesh (340 m / 1,115 ft) by about 7:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: guesthouse or homestay in Lohajung, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Ghairoli Patal and Abin Kharak #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - Ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Transport (Rishikesh to Lohajung and back) is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 6-seater vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,500 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Lohajung #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under Inclusions is not part of the package; ask us in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun – about 20–25 km / around 45 min from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Lohajung leaves Rishikesh at 6:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Rishikesh. **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km, 8–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 the shared cab (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 7:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (~1 hr) from Rishikesh, is the best connected, with trains from Delhi including the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains. Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK) has only a few direct trains, so book well in advance and plan to reach Rishikesh the day before the 6:30 AM cab. - **To Haridwar:** Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or an overnight train from Delhi, then a cab or local transport to Tapovan - **To Rishikesh direct:** Yoga Express or Kalinga Utkal Express – check current timings **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km, 8–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 the shared cab (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 7:00 PM. Book a late-night train from Haridwar or travel the next day. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh, about 6–7 hrs, by overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways buses. Choose government buses from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate and avoid private buses that leave from outside it; most buses stop at Rishikesh Bus Stand, from where an app cab, auto rickshaw or shared three-wheeler takes you to Jumping Heights, Tapovan. **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km, 8–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 the shared cab (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 7:00 PM. Book an overnight bus to Delhi for that night or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Dewal has the last reliable ATM before Lohajung - Withdraw enough cash in Rishikesh or Dewal - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Lohajung is the last place with a stable mobile signal - Beyond Lohajung the network is patchy to non-existent - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek, and where does it start? The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand, and starts from Lohajung (2,316 m / 7,600 ft), about 250 km and 8–10 hours by road from Rishikesh. The trail begins at Wan village, a 15 km, one-hour drive from Lohajung. From Wan the route climbs through oak and rhododendron forest along the Neel Ganga to the open meadows of Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal. ### How many days is the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek takes 6 days from Rishikesh to Rishikesh, with 4 trekking days covering about 21 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung (about 250 km, 8–10 hours) - **Days 2–5:** trekking, 4–6 km and 3–5 hours a day - **Highest day:** Day 4, over Bedni Bugyal Top (3,658 m), about 5 km and 4 hours ### What is the altitude of the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? The highest point of the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is Bedni Bugyal Top at 3,658 m (12,000 ft). The trail starts at Wan (2,438 m / 8,000 ft), and the highest camp is Abin Kharak at 3,410 m (11,185 ft). - **Lohajung (base):** 2,316 m / 7,600 ft - **Ghairoli Patal camp:** 3,205 m / 10,515 ft - **Ali Bugyal ridge:** 3,450 m / 11,320 ft - **Abin Kharak camp:** 3,410 m / 11,185 ft ### How difficult is the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is graded Easy–Moderate, with short walking days of 3–5 hours. The hardest parts are the first-day climb from Wan and a short stone-stepped section below Ali Bugyal. - **Day 2:** 6 km with about 767 m (2,515 ft) of gain, 4–5 hours - **Day 3:** a steep 30-minute climb on stone steps, then gentle meadow walking - **Snow:** March–April can bring snow on the higher meadows, which makes walking harder ### Is the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek good for beginners? Yes, the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is well suited to beginners: it is graded Easy–Moderate, covers about 21 km over 4 trekking days, and no day is longer than about 5 hours. The main challenge is altitude, as three nights are spent above 3,200 m. ### What fitness level do I need for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? For the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek you should be able to walk 4–5 hours a day on uphill forest trails above 3,000 m. Good stamina makes the Day 2 climb of about 767 m much easier. - **Cardio:** brisk walks, jogging or stair climbing in the weeks before - **Strength:** squats and lunges for the steep descent to the Neel Ganga - **Practice:** walk with a loaded backpack ### What is the best time for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? The best time for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is spring (March to June) and autumn (October to November), the months the trek runs. It does not run during the July–August monsoon. - **March–April:** snow is still possible on the higher meadows - **May–June:** milder days of 8–15°C - **October–November:** autumn season with cold nights ### Is there snow on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Snow on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is most likely in March and April, when it can still lie on the higher meadows of Ali and Bedni Bugyal. In spring, pack for both dry trail and snow. When there is snow on the trail, gaiters and microspikes are provided free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear. ### How cold does it get on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Temperatures on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek range from about 10°C in the day to -8°C at night. From April to June, days are 8–15°C and nights 0–7°C. - **Layers:** 4 warm layers – thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers and the padded jacket - **March–April:** add a second thermal set and a balaclava - **Outer jacket:** a padded -10°C jacket is part of the Free Trekking Gear ### Which mountains and lakes can you see on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? From Bedni Bugyal Top (3,658 m) on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek you see Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhambha and Neelkanth. Bedni Kund, also called Vaitarni Lake, reflects Mt Trishul on its surface. - **Ali Bugyal:** a vast alpine meadow with wide Himalayan views - **Bedni Kund:** on the Day 4 route over Bedni Bugyal - **Ranka Dhar ridge:** last views of the high Himalaya on Day 5 ### What is the terrain like on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek starts in oak and rhododendron forest and opens onto wide, rolling alpine meadows. Most of the meadow walking is gentle, with a few steep forest sections. - **Forest:** oak, pine and rhododendron along the Neel Ganga, with wooden bridge crossings - **Stone steps:** a steep 30-minute climb below Ali Bugyal - **Meadows:** the rolling grassland of Ali and Bedni Bugyal - **Descent:** a steep drop to the Neel Ganga on Day 5, then a gentle climb to Ranka Dhar ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Altitude sickness is possible on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek, as it reaches 3,658 m and spends three nights above 3,200 m. Day 2 has the biggest gain, about 767 m from Wan to Ghairoli Patal, so an easy pace works best. - **Gradual plan:** Day 3 is a short 4 km day with plenty of time to rest at camp - **Safety kit:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - **Trained leaders:** trek leaders are aware of high-altitude issues ### What is the minimum age for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? The minimum age for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek base camp? To reach the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek, travel to Rishikesh; the cab to Lohajung leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM for the 8–10 hour drive of about 250 km. Reach Rishikesh the day before. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20–25 km and 45 minutes from Rishikesh - **By train:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km from Rishikesh, is best connected; Yog Nagari Rishikesh has only a few direct trains - **By bus:** overnight buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh take about 6–7 hours - **Return:** the cab leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM on Day 6 and reaches Rishikesh by about 7:00 PM ### Is transport from Rishikesh included in the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? No, transport between Rishikesh and Lohajung is not included in the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Onward:** 6:30 AM from Jumping Heights, Tapovan, Rishikesh on Day 1 - **Return:** 6:30 AM from Lohajung on Day 6, reaching Rishikesh by about 7:00 PM - **Trailhead drive:** the 15 km, one-hour drive between Lohajung and Wan on Days 2 and 5 is also by shared cab, paid directly to the driver ### Where do we stay on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? On the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek you stay two nights at Lohajung in a guesthouse, homestay or hotel, and three nights in tents at the trail camps. Trail tents are shared by three trekkers, and Lohajung rooms are on a triple or quad sharing basis. - **Day 1 and Day 5:** Lohajung (2,316 m) - **Day 2 and Day 4:** tents at Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m) - **Day 3:** tents at Abin Kharak (3,410 m) - **Camp setup:** large mess tents with tables; tents and sleeping bags are included - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek ### What is the group size on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek and who leads it? An Ali Bedni Bugyal trek batch has up to 20 trekkers, and a fixed departure needs at least 6. Each batch is led by a professional trek leader who has completed basic and advanced mountaineering courses and is trained in Wilderness First Aid. - **Support team:** local certified mountain guides, a chef, assistants and porters - **Private treks:** available for any group size ### Is the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is safe for women trekking alone, and the safety of women trekkers is a top priority. Guides and support staff are carefully selected, trustworthy and reliable. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other women - **Batches:** groups of up to 20 include both men and women - **Valuables:** keep your personal belongings secure ### What food is served on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? All meals on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner: simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food, with eggs available on request at the campsite. Tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly. - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so bring a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung - **Snacks:** carry dry fruits, energy bars and ORS sachets ### Is drinking water safe on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Yes, drinking water on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets at the camps. On the trail, ask the trek leader or guide where to refill your bottles. - **Bottles:** carry two 1 L bottles - **March–April:** make one bottle insulated so the water does not freeze ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Yes, the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes or a jacket. One refundable deposit of ₹3,000 plus a ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit. - **Shoes:** trekking shoes worth ₹6,999 - **Jacket:** padded jacket rated to -10°C, worth ₹3,299 - **Trekking poles:** save your knees on the descents - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes for snow ### Can I offload my backpack on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek costs ₹1,500 + 5% GST for the full trek. Book it at least 15 days in advance; last-minute requests made at Lohajung may cost more. - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Bag type:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a layer ### Is there a doctor on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? No doctor joins the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek, but trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid, understand high-altitude issues and carry a full first-aid kit and essential medicines. Medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher for emergency evacuation are available at every camp. - **Own medicines:** bring your regular and prescribed medicines - **Before the trek:** check your medical status, or get expert advice if unsure ### What documents do I need for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? For the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek you need an original government photo ID with a photocopy, and a travel insurance policy that covers high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. The ID is needed at forest check posts and for trek registration. - **ID:** passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID - **Storage:** keep the original and photocopy in a waterproof pouch - **Insurance:** mandatory and not included in the trek fee ### Do I need a permit for the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Yes, the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek needs permits, and all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the trek fee. You only need to carry your original photo ID and a photocopy for the forest check posts. The ID is also used for trek registration at the start. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? On the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek, Dewal is the last reliable ATM and Lohajung is the last point with a stable mobile signal. Beyond Lohajung the network is patchy to non-existent. - **Cash:** withdraw enough in Rishikesh or Dewal, including your share of the cab - **Shops:** Lohajung has only a few small shops, so carry your essentials - **Calls:** finish important calls at Lohajung and tell your family about limited connectivity ### What is Bedni Kund on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Bedni Kund, also known as Vaitarni Lake, is a lake on Bedni Bugyal that you reach on Day 4 of the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek. Mt Trishul (7,120 m) is reflected on its surface. The same day takes you over Bedni Bugyal Top (3,658 m), the highest point of the trek. ### What is the difference between Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal? Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal are two alpine meadows (bugyals) linked on the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek. Ali Bugyal (3,450 m) opens suddenly out of the forest on Day 3, while Bedni Bugyal rises to Bedni Bugyal Top (3,658 m), crossed on Day 4. - **Ali Bugyal:** a vast meadow with gentle walking, wildflowers in season and wide views - **Bedni Bugyal:** rolling meadow with Bedni Kund and views of Trishul, Nanda Ghunti and Chaukhambha - **Camp between them:** Abin Kharak (3,410 m) ### Can the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek itinerary be changed? The Ali Bedni Bugyal trek completion date always stays as scheduled, but the route plan can change, as this is a remote mountain trek where unexpected events happen. In such cases the trek leader provides the best alternate schedule, close to the original itinerary. The trek ends on Day 6 with the 8–10 hour drive to Rishikesh, so plan onward travel around that date. ### Can I book a private or customised Ali Bedni Bugyal trek? Yes, Trekkaro offers private and customised Ali Bedni Bugyal treks at your own pace and for any number of people. The cost depends on the group size, the duration and the type of trek. Fixed departures, by comparison, need at least 6 trekkers and take a maximum of 20. ### How do I book the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek and when should I book my travel? To book the Ali Bedni Bugyal trek, choose your date, fill in the booking form and complete the payment; all details are then emailed to you. Once payment is complete the booking shows as Paid in My Bookings, so you can book your travel right away. Plan to reach Rishikesh the day before the trek, as the cab to Lohajung leaves at 6:30 AM. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 13 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 20 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 27 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 4 Dec 2026 - … 25 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/ali-bedni-bugyal-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Bali Pass Trek > Bali Pass Trek is a 8-day difficult trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,950 m (16,241 ft). It covers about 59 km on foot and starts at Sankri and ends at Janki Chatti. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹18,750 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 15 May 2027 (9 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/bali-pass-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 8 days - **Difficulty:** Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,950 m / 16,241 ft - **Trekking distance:** 59 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Sankri / Janki Chatti - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** During the summer months (May to June), temperatures at lower altitudes range from 10 to 20 degrees Celsius during the day, but can drop to around 5 degrees Celsius at night. In the post-monsoon season (September to October), temperatures start dropping, with daytime temperatures ranging from 5 to 15 degrees Celsius. At higher altitudes, temperatures can drop below zero degrees Celsius at night. - **Price:** ₹18,750 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 15 May 2027 (9 upcoming) ## Overview It is still dark when you leave Bali Pass Base Camp. Somewhere above you, at 4,950 m, is the sharp ridgeline you watched through the previous afternoon, and the only way to the other side is over it. By the time daylight reaches Swargarohini, Bandarpoonch and Kalanag, you are on snow and rock, climbing towards a pass that joins two Himalayan valleys. A few hours later the ground falls away on the far side, and the valley you have walked up for five days is behind you for good. The Bali Pass trek is a journey across a mountain wall. It begins on the Har Ki Dun side, following the Supin River through forests of walnut, pine, deodar and chinar, over wooden bridges and past waterfalls to the camp at Seema, opposite the traditional village of Osla. It climbs to the wide alpine meadow of Devsu Thatch, reaches Ruinsara Tal, a glacial lake believed to be associated with the Pandavas of the Mahabharata, and then leaves the trees behind for moraine, scree and snowfields. At the top, Bali Pass opens a 360° view of Swargarohini, Bandarpoonch and Kalanag (Black Peak). Then the trail drops towards the Yamunotri Valley, through the meadows and forest of Lower Dhamni to Janki Chatti. Over about 59 km and eight days, you never walk the same ground twice. The Bali Pass trek is a difficult-grade, high-altitude crossover trek in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand. It starts at Sankri (1,950 m / 6,400 ft), a mountain village and the last road head, at the gateway to the Govind Pashu Vihar National Park and Sanctuary, and the walk itself begins at Taluka (2,107 m / 6,913 ft). From there the route climbs through Seema (2,560 m), Devsu Thatch (3,000 m), Ruinsara Tal (3,500 m), Odari (4,100 m) and Bali Pass Base Camp (4,600 m) to the pass at 4,950 m (16,241 ft), then descends to Lower Dhamni (3,400 m / 11,155 ft) and ends at Janki Chatti, near Yamunotri. It links the sacred Yamunotri Valley with the Har Ki Dun Valley, and it is considered one of the most offbeat and least explored trails in the Indian Himalayas. In our experience, the moment you step from one valley into the other is what makes every hard day before it worthwhile. ### Over the Ridge – What Makes the Bali Pass Trek Unmissable Bali Pass does not climb to a viewpoint and turn back. It goes over the top, and the whole trek builds towards that crossing. The same three mountains tie it together. Swargarohini, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch first appear across the Devsu Thatch meadow, standing on the far side of the valley. Near Ruinsara Tal the Swargarohini peaks I to IV rise above the alpine pastures. At Odari, the first camp above the tree line, they stand close on the skyline, and at Bali Pass Base Camp, in barren and rugged terrain, the Swargarohini massif, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch fill the view while the sharp ridgeline of the pass looms ahead. Day by day you watch the peaks grow larger, and day by day the landscape strips itself back, from forest to meadow to lake to moraine, until only snow, rock and sky are left. Ruinsara Tal is the quiet centre of the journey. The glacial lake lies at 3,500 m (11,482 ft) among alpine pastures and snow peaks, and the campsite sits near its shore. You reach it by afternoon, after a walk along the Supin through rhododendron, pine and birch. You walk around the water while the light shifts. You watch the mountains settle into its clear surface. The weather near the lake changes quickly, but on a calm evening it is one of the most peaceful places on the trek. The next morning the trail turns towards the high country, and the character of the trek changes completely. Then comes the crossing. You leave base camp before dawn, around 4:00–5:00 AM, for safer snow conditions and to clear the pass before the weather turns. The climb is steep, over snow slopes and rocky ridges, and the air is thin. You keep your eyes on the next step. The final ridge is narrow and needs careful footing, and then, at 4,950 m, there is nowhere higher to go. Swargarohini, Bandarpoonch and Kalanag stand all around you, with vast valleys stretching below on both sides: the one you came up, and the one you are about to enter. After the summit comes a long, steep descent on scree and snow patches, until the ground softens into alpine meadow and forest again at Lower Dhamni. It is about 14 km and 8–9 hours in all, and in our experience it is the day that stays with you longest. ### The Supin Valley Itself The lower trek is green and full of water. From Taluka the trail follows the Supin River through thick forests of walnut, chestnut, willow, chinar, pine, deodar and other conifers, with waterfalls dropping through the trees and wooden bridges over the streams. Early on you choose between a steep climb via Dhaatmeer village and a gentler path along the Karmanasha stream; both meet at Gangaar, a Himalayan settlement, before the trail rises gradually to Puani Seema. A steep, humid climb through pine, oak and rhododendron then brings you out onto Devsu Thatch, known as a mini Switzerland of the region: a vast meadow ringed by dense tree lines, carpeted with wildflowers in summer, with a 180° view of snow-clad peaks and a starry sky at night. Above Ruinsara Tal the valley changes its nature. The forest ends, the path crosses moraine and boulder fields, and vegetation thins until the ground is barren and rugged, with the snowline approaching. At the pass the trail runs over snowfields and a narrow ridge. On the far side the change runs in reverse, from scree and snow back into alpine meadow and forest. Over eight days the trek moves from river forest to high snow and back down again. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Bali Pass trek is graded Difficult and is meant only for experienced trekkers. You need at least one previous high-altitude trek above 4,000 m before you join, because this route combines steep ascents, sharp descents, narrow ridge walks and several nights of high-altitude camping. Most walking days cover 5–12 km in 4–7 hours, on terrain that moves from forest path to moraine, boulder fields and loose scree. The hard day is the crossing: about 14 km in 8–9 hours from a pre-dawn start, with a climb of about 350 m on snow and rock to the pass, a narrow ridge, and a long, steep descent of about 1,550 m to Lower Dhamni. You sleep at 4,100 m and 4,600 m before it, and snow is common on the upper trail, especially in May and June. Good physical and mental endurance are essential, because the hardest day comes after several days of effort at altitude. We recommend 10–12 weeks of serious preparation before departure. Daily trekking hours: 4–9 hours. Season: May to June and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Bali Pass Trek - **Bali Pass (4,950 m / 16,241 ft)** – snow slopes, a narrow ridge and a 360° view of Swargarohini, Bandarpoonch and Kalanag - **A true crossover** – from Sankri to Janki Chatti, linking the Har Ki Dun Valley with the Yamunotri Valley, with no retracing of steps - **Ruinsara Tal (3,500 m / 11,482 ft)** – a glacial lake believed to be associated with the Pandavas, with a campsite near its shore - **Devsu Thatch (3,000 m / 9,842 ft)** – a vast alpine meadow with wildflowers in summer and a 180° view of snow peaks - **Swargarohini I–IV, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch** – close on the skyline for most of the trek - **The Supin River trail** – waterfalls, wooden bridges and old forests of walnut, deodar and chinar - **Two high camps** – Odari at 4,100 m (13,451 ft) and Bali Pass Base Camp at 4,600 m (15,092 ft), in raw high country - **Mountain villages** – Gangaar on the trail and the camp at Seema facing the traditional village of Osla ### Best Time to Do the Bali Pass Trek The Bali Pass trek has two windows each year: May to June, before the monsoon, and September to October, after it. In both the weather is relatively stable, the trail is accessible and the views are wide, but the pass and the high camps feel quite different in each. #### May to June – Pre-Monsoon Season (Snow on the Pass) Early summer brings pleasant weather, clear views and the lower meadows into bloom. Devsu Thatch is carpeted with wildflowers. Higher up, this is the snowier window: snow patches lie on the moraine and boulder sections above Ruinsara Tal, and snow lies on the upper trail and near the pass. The crossing has its full high-mountain character. For trekkers who want Bali Pass as a snow crossing, with flowering meadows lower down, this is the window to choose. - **Temperatures:** Lower altitudes: Day: 10°C to 20°C | Night: around 5°C (much colder at the high camps) - **Trail conditions:** Snow at higher altitudes and on the pass; snow patches on moraine early in the season. - **Best for:** A snow crossing, flowering meadows and clear views. #### September to October – Post-Monsoon Season (Crisp Skies) After the monsoon the skies turn crisp and the weather becomes more stable. The trail carries less snow than in early summer, but the peaks are dusted with fresh snow, and Swargarohini, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch stand out against clear skies. Temperatures start to drop through this window, and nights at the high camps fall below freezing, so the cold becomes part of the challenge. In our experience, this is the window for trekkers who want the clearest skies on the pass. - **Temperatures:** Day: 5°C to 15°C | Night: below 0°C at higher altitudes - **Trail conditions:** Less snow on the trail; stable weather; colder nights. - **Best for:** Clear skies, stable weather and snow-dusted peaks from the pass. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For Bali Pass as a full snow crossing, with the meadows of Devsu Thatch in bloom, book a May to June batch. For more stable weather, clearer skies and a trail that carries less snow, September to October is our pick, provided you are ready for sub-zero nights at the high camps. In either window, we recommend this trek only once you have a previous trek above 4,000 m behind you. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Sankri **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Sankri (200 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 1,950 m (6,400 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a full day on the road. Aim to reach Dehradun early so the drive can start by 6:30 to 7:00 AM; that gets you to Sankri comfortably before dark. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. The 200 km route runs through Mussoorie, Damta, Naugaon, Purola, Mori and Naitwar. You pass green valleys, pine forest, terraced fields and rivers, with distant glimpses of snow peaks, and the road runs through the Govind National Park region. Purola is the last reliable ATM on the way, so withdraw the cash you need there. Sankri sits at 1,950 m in the Uttarkashi district. It is the last roadhead for the trek, the gateway to the Govind Pashu Vihar National Park and Sanctuary, and the base for Bali Pass, Har Ki Dun and Kedarkantha. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay, and dinner is served in the evening. Sankri is also the last place with a stable mobile signal, and even here only Jio works consistently. What to Expect: - Early start from Dehradun (6:30–7:00 AM) to reach Sankri before dark - 200 km drive via Mussoorie, Purola, Mori and Naitwar - Last reliable ATM at Purola - Last mobile signal at Sankri (only Jio works consistently) - Dinner and a night’s rest at Sankri, the trek base - Overnight: Sankri guesthouse / homestay (1,950 m / 6,400 ft) ### Day 2: Sankri to Taluka, Trek to Seema **Route Details:** **Drive: Sankri → Taluka (12 km, ~1 hr) | Altitude: 2,107 m → 2,560 m (8,399 ft) | Distance: 12 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: forest trail along the Supin River, wooden bridges, gradual climb | Stay: Tents at Seema** After an early breakfast you drive about an hour from Sankri to Taluka at 2,107 m. The road winds through forest and skirts the Supin River before it ends at Taluka, the real starting point of the trek. From here you walk 12 km, and with 6 to 7 hours on the trail it is a long first day. Carry a packed lunch and enough water, because there are few places to stop along the way. From Taluka the trail follows the Supin through thick forest of walnut, chestnut, willow, chinar, pine and deodar. You cross wooden bridges and pass waterfalls. The height gain is modest across the day, so the test today is distance, not gradient. Settle into a pace you can hold for hours and eat a little at every break. Partway along, the trail gives you a choice. You can take the steep climb via Dhaatmeer village for a harder workout, or follow the gentler path along the Karmanasha stream. We recommend the gentler route if you want to save your legs for the high camps later in the week. Both paths meet at Gangaar village, a scenic Himalayan settlement. Beyond Gangaar you continue along the Supin and climb gradually to the campsite at Puani Seema, on the riverside opposite the traditional village of Osla. You sleep in tents on triple sharing tonight. Rest your legs, refill your water and get to bed in good time. What to Expect: - 1-hour drive from Sankri to Taluka, the trailhead - Long 12 km walk along the Supin River through walnut, chestnut, chinar and deodar forest - Wooden bridges and waterfalls along the way - Choice of a steep route via Dhaatmeer village or a gentler path along the Karmanasha stream - Packed lunch and full water bottles – few stop points on the trail - Overnight: Tents at Seema (2,560 m / 8,399 ft) ### Day 3: Seema to Devsu Thatch **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,560 m → 3,000 m (9,842 ft) | Distance: ~6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: steep forest climb, then open alpine meadow | Stay: Tents at Devsu Thatch** Today is short but steep. From Puani Seema the trail climbs steadily into thick forest of pine, oak and rhododendron, and the gradient stays stiff for most of the way. The ascent is steep and humid under the trees. Carry plenty of water, drink before you feel thirsty, and break the climb into short stretches with brief pauses rather than long sit-downs. The reward comes all at once. The trees open and you step onto Devsu Thatch, a vast alpine meadow at 3,000 m with 180° views of snow-clad peaks. Swargarohini, Kalanag (Black Peak) and Bandarpoonch line the skyline. In summer the meadow is carpeted with wildflowers, and dense tree lines frame its edges. Camp is pitched on the meadow, and it is one of the most scenic campsites of the trek. With only 4 to 5 hours of walking you arrive with time to spare. The evening is at leisure. Sit out with the views of Swargarohini and Kalanag, then settle into your tent under a starry Himalayan night. This is also your first night at 3,000 m. Keep drinking water through the afternoon and evening, eat a full dinner and tell your trek leader early if you notice a headache. Small habits now make the high camps easier later in the week. What to Expect: - Short, steep climb of about 6 km through pine, oak and rhododendron forest - Humid ascent – carry plenty of water - Forest opens onto the vast Devsu Thatch meadow with 180° views - Swargarohini, Kalanag (Black Peak) and Bandarpoonch on the skyline - Wildflowers carpet the meadow in summer; evening at leisure - Overnight: Tents at Devsu Thatch (3,000 m / 9,842 ft) ### Day 4: Devsu Thatch to Ruinsara Tal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,000 m → 3,500 m (11,482 ft) | Distance: ~8–9 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: gradual forest descent to the Supin, then a gentle climb along the river | Stay: Tents near Ruinsara Tal** After breakfast you leave the meadows of Devsu Thatch and descend gradually through forest of rhododendron, pine and birch to rejoin the Supin River. Take the descent easy; it is a warm-up for the climb that follows, not a race. Back at the river, the trail climbs gently along the Supin for most of the day. The gradient is kind and the walking is steady, with glimpses of snow-clad peaks in the distance. All four Swargarohini peaks, Kalanag (Black Peak) and Bandarpoonch are the ones to look for. In our experience this is one of the more relaxed days of the trek, and a good one to settle your rhythm before the high camps. By afternoon you reach Ruinsara Tal at 3,500 m, a sacred glacial lake believed to be associated with the Pandavas of the Mahabharata. It sits among alpine pastures and snow peaks, and camp is pitched near the lake. Spend the evening walking around its surroundings or simply sitting by the water, watching the mountains reflected on its clear surface. The weather near the lake changes quickly. Keep your warm layers and rain gear within reach, not packed at the bottom of your bag. Tomorrow the trail leaves the forest behind and climbs above 4,000 m for the first time, so rest well tonight and keep drinking water through the evening. What to Expect: - Gradual descent through rhododendron, pine and birch forest to the Supin River - Gentle climb along the river with views of the Swargarohini peaks, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch - Ruinsara Tal (3,500 m): a sacred glacial lake linked to the Pandavas - Lakeside camp among alpine pastures - Fast-changing weather – keep warm layers and rain gear handy - Overnight: Tents near Ruinsara Tal (3,500 m / 11,482 ft) ### Day 5: Ruinsara Tal to Odari **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,500 m → 4,100 m (13,451 ft) | Distance: ~6 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: steady climb above the tree line, moraine and boulder fields, snow patches early in the season | Stay: Tents at Odari** After breakfast by Ruinsara Tal the trail leaves the forest behind and climbs steadily above the tree line into rugged high country. The walk is only about 6 km, but it takes 5 to 6 hours because the climb is steady and the ground is rough. This is the day the trek turns from forest walking into high mountain travel. Above the trees the path crosses moraine and boulder fields, with snow patches early in the season. Watch your footing on the boulders, test loose rocks before you trust them and use your poles for balance. Move at a pace at which you can still talk. If you are gasping, slow down. The views open with every step. Bandarpoonch, Kalanag (Black Peak) and the Swargarohini peaks stand close on the skyline, far nearer than they looked from the meadows below. Stop now and then to take them in; the pauses help your breathing as much as your photographs. By afternoon you reach Odari at 4,100 m, a high, open campsite below the approach to Bali Pass. This is your first day and first night above 4,000 m. Walk slowly around camp, drink plenty of water and tell your trek leader straight away about any headache or nausea. Spend the evening resting and acclimatising; the next two days take you to Bali Pass Base Camp and over the pass itself. What to Expect: - Steady climb above the tree line from Ruinsara Tal - Moraine and boulder fields, with snow patches early in the season - Close views of Bandarpoonch, Kalanag and the Swargarohini range - First day above 4,000 m – slow pace, plenty of water, report any symptoms - Open, high campsite at Odari below the approach to Bali Pass - Overnight: Tents at Odari (4,100 m / 13,451 ft) ### Day 6: Odari to Bali Pass Base Camp **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,100 m → 4,600 m (15,092 ft) | Distance: ~5 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: steep ascents on rocky moraine and loose scree, barren high ground | Stay: Tents at Bali Pass Base Camp** The trail today is demanding. You climb steeply over rocky moraine and loose scree, and the short distance hides how hard the effort is at this height. On scree, kick small steps, keep your weight over your feet and follow the line of the person in front. Do not rush the loose sections; steady and careful is faster in the end. As you gain height the vegetation thins out and gives way to barren, rugged ground. The snowline comes closer and the peaks begin to dominate the skyline. Take short pauses and keep drinking water as you climb. Then the Bali Pass ridgeline comes into view, your first close look at tomorrow’s crossing. By afternoon you reach Bali Pass Base Camp at 4,600 m, at the foot of the pass. It is a raw, high campsite with the Swargarohini massif, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch around it and the sharp ridge of Bali Pass right ahead. The weather here can be unpredictable. Keep enough layers on, stay hydrated and follow the trek leader’s instructions strictly. Spend the evening acclimatising and resting. Tomorrow is the toughest and most rewarding day of the trek, and it begins before dawn. Lay out your layers, gloves and water bottle before you sleep, so you are ready to move in the dark without fuss. What to Expect: - Steep ascents over rocky moraine and loose scree - Vegetation gives way to barren, rugged high ground near the snowline - First close-up view of the Bali Pass ridgeline - Swargarohini massif, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch around camp - Unpredictable weather – layers, water and the trek leader’s instructions - Overnight: Tents at Bali Pass Base Camp (4,600 m / 15,092 ft) ### Day 7: Summit Day - Bali Pass Base Camp to Lower Dhamni via Bali Pass **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,600 m → 4,950 m (16,241 ft) → 3,400 m (11,155 ft) | Distance: ~14 km | Duration: 8–9 hrs | Terrain: steep snow slopes and rocky ridges, a narrow ridge at the top, long steep descent on scree and snow | Stay: Tents at Lower Dhamni** This is the day the whole trek builds towards, and the hardest. Start before dawn, around 4:00 to 5:00 AM. The early hours give safer snow conditions for the climb, and an early start gets you over the pass before the weather turns. Expect 8 to 9 hours on your feet. The climb is steep, over snow slopes and rocky ridges. Near the top the ridge narrows and needs careful footing. Watch where you place each foot, move at the pace your trek leader sets and keep your attention on the ground until you are on safe footing. Ice axes, micro spikes and ropes are part of the team’s technical equipment for terrain like this. Bali Pass at 4,950 m (16,241 ft) is the highest point of the trek. The pass links the Har Ki Dun side with the Yamunotri valley, and from the top the view runs a full 360°: the Swargarohini peaks, Bandarpoonch and Kalanag, with vast valleys stretching below. Take your photographs, but keep your time at the top within what your trek leader allows. The descent is long and steep, on scree and snow patches. Your knees take the strain now, so use your poles and keep your steps short. Gradually you re-enter alpine meadows and then forest. By evening you reach Lower Dhamni at 3,400 m, a comfortable forest campsite, where you can finally rest after the biggest day of the trek. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn start (around 4:00–5:00 AM) for safe snow and a weather window - Steep climb over snow slopes and rocky ridges, with a narrow ridge near the top - Bali Pass (4,950 m / 16,241 ft): 360° views of Swargarohini, Bandarpoonch and Kalanag - Long, steep descent on scree and snow into alpine meadows and forest - About 14 km and 8–9 hours – the longest and hardest day of the trek - Overnight: Tents at Lower Dhamni (3,400 m / 11,155 ft) ### Day 8: Lower Dhamni to Janki Chatti via Yamunotri, Drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,400 m → 2,650 m (8,694 ft) | Distance: ~8 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: gradual, well-marked descent through oak and pine forest | Drive: Janki Chatti → Dehradun (~200 km, 8–9 hrs; Dehradun 655 m)** After breakfast you start the final descent from Lower Dhamni. The trail is well marked and runs down gradually through dense oak and pine forest and past Himalayan villages on the Yamunotri side. After yesterday the walking feels easy, but stay alert on the downhill; tired legs slip more easily. Keep your poles out until the very end. The trail ends at Janki Chatti at 2,650 m, the pilgrimage town known as the base for the Yamunotri Temple trek. Your trek on foot is complete here, and the day includes the distribution of trek completion certificates and a group farewell. From Janki Chatti a shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) takes you on the long drive of about 200 km back to Dehradun, which takes 8 to 9 hours. The road winds through hill towns, river valleys and pine-covered slopes. You reach Dehradun Railway Station by late evening. Accommodation tonight is not part of the trek. We recommend booking your onward train, bus or flight from Dehradun for after 11:00 PM, or for the next morning, so you are not racing the clock at the end of a long mountain drive. If the buffer day is used, everything shifts by one day. What to Expect: - Gradual 8 km descent through oak and pine forest and Himalayan villages - Walk ends at Janki Chatti (2,650 m / 8,694 ft), the base for the Yamunotri Temple trek - Trek completion certificates and a group farewell - Shared cab (not included in the trek fee, ₹1,000 per person) for the 8–9 hour drive to Dehradun - Book onward travel for after 11:00 PM or the next morning - Trek ends at Janki Chatti; drop at Dehradun Railway Station by late evening ### Day 9: Buffer Day **Route Details:** **Reserve day: used only for bad weather, heavy snowfall or unexpected delays | Decision: Trek Leader, based on weather and trail conditions | Charge if used: ₹2,100 + 5% GST** Day 9 is held in reserve. High passes do not keep to a fixed timetable, and bad weather or heavy snowfall can make the Bali Pass crossing unsafe on the planned day. The buffer day gives the team the flexibility to wait for a safe window instead of pushing on in poor conditions. The Trek Leader decides whether to use it, based only on the weather and trail conditions on the ground. If the buffer day is used, trekkers pay ₹2,100 + 5% GST, which the Trek Leader collects at that point. If it is not needed, you finish on Day 8 and can return a day earlier. We recommend keeping this day free in your travel plans anyway. With a spare day in hand, a weather delay never forces a rushed decision on the pass. What to Expect: - Reserved for bad weather, heavy snowfall or unexpected delays - Time for a safe Bali Pass crossing without cutting corners - Used only on the Trek Leader’s assessment of weather and trail conditions - Charge if used: ₹2,100 + 5% GST, collected by the Trek Leader - If not used, you return a day earlier - Drop at Dehradun one day later if the buffer day is used ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse or homestay in Sankri, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 7: camping in 3-person tents at Seema, Devsu Thatch, Ruinsara Tal, Odari, Bali Pass Base Camp and Lower Dhamni #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 8 breakfast - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - Ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Sankri, and Janki Chatti (near Yamunotri, where the trek ends) back to Dehradun. We help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way (₹2,000 return), paid directly to the driver. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive from Dehradun to Sankri and on the drive back to Dehradun #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹4,250 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Sankri #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under Inclusions is not part of the package; ask us in advance if you have any questions ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun – about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Sankri leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** about 200 km via Mussoorie, Purola, Mori and Naitwar, 8–9 hrs by road. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** The trek ends at Janki Chatti near Yamunotri, not Sankri: after the 8 km walk down, a shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) takes you on the 8–9 hr drive to Dehradun Railway Station. Book your flight for the next day, and keep one more day free in case the buffer day (Day 9) is used. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) – this is also the cab pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. Take the overnight train or arrive a day early so you are ready for the 6:30 AM departure; book early in the May–June and September–October seasons. - **Overnight:** Nanda Devi Express from Delhi – check current timings - **Day trains:** Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat – arrive the day before and stay in Dehradun **From Dehradun to Sankri:** about 200 km via Mussoorie, Purola, Mori and Naitwar, 8–9 hrs by road. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** The trek ends at Janki Chatti near Yamunotri, not Sankri: after the 8 km walk down, a shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) takes you on the 8–9 hr drive to Dehradun Railway Station. Book a late-night train or travel the next day, keeping a spare day in case the buffer day (Day 9) is used. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs; Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night. Choose government buses from inside ISBT and avoid private buses that leave from outside it; from Dehradun ISBT take an app cab, auto rickshaw or shared three-wheeler to Dehradun Railway Station for the pickup. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** about 200 km via Mussoorie, Purola, Mori and Naitwar, 8–9 hrs by road. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** The trek ends at Janki Chatti near Yamunotri, not Sankri: after the 8 km walk down, a shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) takes you on the 8–9 hr drive to Dehradun Railway Station. Take an overnight bus to Delhi that night or the next day, keeping a spare day in case the buffer day (Day 9) is used. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Purola has the last reliable ATM before Sankri - There is no ATM on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Sankri is the last place with a stable signal, and only Jio works consistently - There is no reliable mobile signal after Sankri - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Bali Pass trek, and where does it start? The Bali Pass trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand. It starts from Sankri village (1,950 m / 6,400 ft), about 200 km (8–9 hours) by road from Dehradun, and ends at Janki Chatti near Yamunotri. The trail follows the Supin River past Seema, Devsu Thatch and Ruinsara Tal, crosses the pass at 4,950 m (16,241 ft) and descends via Lower Dhamni and Yamunotri to Janki Chatti. ### How many days is the Bali Pass trek? The Bali Pass trek takes 8 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 7 trekking days covering about 59 km, plus one buffer day (Day 9) if needed. - **Day 1:** drive from Dehradun to Sankri (200 km, 8–9 hours) - **Days 2–7:** trekking from Taluka to Lower Dhamni, 4–9 hours a day - **Pass day:** Day 7, about 14 km in 8–9 hours, the longest and hardest day - **Day 8:** 8 km down to Janki Chatti, then the 8–9 hour drive to Dehradun ### What is the altitude of the Bali Pass trek? The highest point of the Bali Pass trek is the pass at 4,950 m (16,241 ft). The trek starts at Sankri (1,950 m), so you gain about 3,000 m over six trekking days. - **Ruinsara Tal camp:** 3,500 m (11,482 ft) - **Odari camp:** 4,100 m (13,451 ft) - **Bali Pass Base Camp:** 4,600 m (15,092 ft) - **Lower Dhamni camp:** 3,400 m (11,155 ft) ### What is the difficulty level of the Bali Pass trek? The Bali Pass trek is graded Difficult, with steep ascents, sharp descents, narrow ridges and high-altitude camping. It is recommended only for experienced trekkers who have trekked above 4,000 m before. - **Day 6:** steep ascents over rocky moraine and loose scree to Base Camp - **Day 7:** snow slopes, rocky ridges and a narrow ridge near the top - **Descent:** a long, steep descent on scree and snow to Lower Dhamni ### Is the Bali Pass trek good for beginners? No, the Bali Pass trek is not for beginners. You must have done at least one high-altitude trek above 4,000 m before joining. Good physical and mental endurance is required, as the terrain is demanding and pass day lasts 8–9 hours. ### What fitness level do I need for the Bali Pass trek? The Bali Pass trek needs strong fitness and endurance: you walk 4–9 hours a day for seven days, with a pre-dawn start and 8–9 hours on pass day. - **Day 2:** a long 12 km walk along the Supin River in 6–7 hours - **Pass day:** start around 4:00–5:00 AM, climb 350 m to the pass and descend about 1,550 m - **Train before the trek:** regular cardio and uphill walks with a loaded backpack ### What is the best time for the Bali Pass trek? The best time for the Bali Pass trek is May–June (pre-monsoon) and September–October (post-monsoon), when the weather is relatively stable and the trails are accessible. - **May–June:** more snow on the upper slopes; days of 10–20°C at lower altitudes - **September–October:** less snow and clearer skies; days of 5–15°C ### Is there snow on the Bali Pass trek? Yes, expect snow at higher altitudes on the Bali Pass trek, especially in May–June; September–October has less snow and clearer skies. - **Where:** snow patches from Odari early in the season and snow slopes on pass day - **Gear:** gaiters and microspikes come free; ice axes and ropes are included in the trek fee - **Eyes:** UV sunglasses are essential on snow to prevent snow blindness ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Bali Pass trek? On the Bali Pass trek, May–June days at lower altitudes are 10–20°C with nights around 5°C, and September–October days are 5–15°C. At the higher camps temperatures drop below 0°C at night. - **Layers:** thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers and a padded jacket - **Jacket:** a -10°C padded jacket comes free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear - **Pass day:** a balaclava and waterproof gloves for the cold and snow ### Which mountains can you see on the Bali Pass trek? On the Bali Pass trek you see Swargarohini, Kalanag (Black Peak) and Bandarpoonch, with 360° views of all three from the pass at 4,950 m. - **Devsu Thatch:** a wide meadow with 180° views of the same peaks - **Ruinsara Tal:** a sacred glacial lake at 3,500 m - **Bali Pass Base Camp:** the first close-up view of the Bali Pass ridgeline ### What is the terrain like on the Bali Pass trek? The Bali Pass trek moves from forest trail along the Supin River to alpine meadows, then to moraine, scree and snow on the high pass. - **Taluka to Seema:** walnut, chestnut, chinar and deodar forest, wooden bridges and waterfalls - **Devsu Thatch to Ruinsara Tal:** a forest descent to the river and a gentle climb along it - **Odari to Base Camp:** moraine, boulder fields and loose scree - **Pass and descent:** snow slopes and rocky ridges, then oak and pine forest down to Janki Chatti ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Bali Pass trek? Yes, the Bali Pass trek crosses 4,950 m and camps at 4,600 m, so altitude sickness is a real risk; the route gains height gradually over six days. - **Gradual gain:** camps at 2,560 m, 3,000 m, 3,500 m, 4,100 m and 4,600 m on successive nights - **Day 5:** first day above 4,000 m – walk slowly, drink plenty of water and report any symptoms - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher - **Buffer day:** allows a safe crossing without cutting corners ### Can trekkers above 60 do the Bali Pass trek? Trekkers above 60 face the same requirement as everyone on the Bali Pass trek: at least one earlier high-altitude trek above 4,000 m, plus strong physical and mental endurance. - **Doctor’s advice:** consult your doctor before a high-altitude trek - **Pass day:** 8–9 hours on snow, rocky ridges and steep scree - **Insurance:** mandatory, covering high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### How do I reach the Bali Pass trek base camp? The Bali Pass trek starts from Sankri, about 200 km (8–9 hours) from Dehradun via Mussoorie, Purola, Mori and Naitwar. The shared cab (₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver) leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM, so arrive the day before or by overnight train. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN), which is also the cab pickup point; the Nanda Devi Express runs overnight from Delhi - **By bus:** government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT (6–7 hours) - **Return:** the trek ends at Janki Chatti, 8–9 hours from Dehradun; book onward travel after 11:00 PM or the next day ### Is transport included in the Bali Pass trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Bali Pass trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Sankri and from Janki Chatti back to Dehradun at ₹1,000 per person each way (₹2,000 return). - **Payment:** paid directly to the driver - **Meals in transit:** not included on the drive days ### Where do we stay on the Bali Pass trek? On the Bali Pass trek you spend the first night in a guesthouse or homestay at Sankri and the next 6 nights in tents. - **Sankri (Day 1):** guesthouse or homestay, triple or quad sharing - **Camps (Days 2–7):** Seema, Devsu Thatch, Ruinsara Tal, Odari, Bali Pass Base Camp and Lower Dhamni - **Tents:** 3-person tents with mess tents and tables - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek ### Who leads the Bali Pass trek, and are local guides included? The Bali Pass trek is led by experienced Trek Leaders supported by local certified mountain guides, combining safety with local expertise. All technical equipment for the trek is included, from tents and sleeping bags to ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes. ### Is the Bali Pass trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, women can join the Bali Pass trek on their own: you trek in a group led by experienced Trek Leaders and local certified mountain guides. - **Tents:** shared 3-person tents, or a single tent for ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the whole trek - **Stay at Sankri:** guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis - **Connectivity:** call your family from Sankri, where only Jio works; there is no reliable signal after that ### What food is served on the Bali Pass trek? Meals on the Bali Pass trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 8 breakfast: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food. - **Through the day:** tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals during the drives to Sankri and from Janki Chatti ### Is drinking water available on the Bali Pass trek? On the Bali Pass trek carry two 1 L bottles and keep them full, as some days have few stop points on the trail. - **Day 2:** start with full bottles for the 12 km walk to Seema - **Day 3:** a humid forest climb, so carry plenty of water - **High camps:** make one bottle insulated for the cold ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Bali Pass trek? Yes, the Bali Pass trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear: trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and trekking poles, plus gaiters and microspikes for the snow sections, at no rental fee. - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Value:** shoes worth ₹6,999 and a jacket worth ₹3,299 - **Poles:** you will need both on the steep descent from the pass ### Is backpack offloading available on the Bali Pass trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Bali Pass trek costs ₹4,250 + 5% GST for the full trek, for a bag of up to 9 kg. - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Late requests:** charges may be higher if you ask for offloading at Sankri - **Day pack:** a 20–30 L day pack is needed if you offload ### Is there a doctor on the Bali Pass trek? No, a doctor is not part of the Bali Pass trek package. Safety is handled by experienced Trek Leaders and local certified mountain guides, with emergency support at every camp. - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders - **Evacuation:** stretchers at each campsite; your travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation - **Your part:** carry a personal medical kit and consult your doctor before the trek ### What documents do I need for the Bali Pass trek? For the Bali Pass trek you need a government photo ID and travel insurance. - **Photo ID:** original plus a photocopy (passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID), checked at forest check posts and for trek registration - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation - **Storage:** keep your documents in a waterproof pouch ### Do I need a permit for the Bali Pass trek? Yes, but all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Bali Pass trek fee, so you do not need to arrange them. Carry your original photo ID and a photocopy, as they are checked at forest check posts. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Bali Pass trek? No, there is no ATM or reliable mobile network on the Bali Pass trail. Purola has the last reliable ATM, and Sankri is the last place with a stable signal, where only Jio works consistently. - **Network:** once you leave Sankri, there is no reliable mobile signal - **Power bank:** keep your phone charged for photos and emergencies - **Cash:** enough for the cabs (₹1,000 per person each way), personal expenses and the buffer day charge if it is used ### What is Ruinsara Tal on the Bali Pass trek? Ruinsara Tal (3,500 m / 11,482 ft) is a sacred glacial lake linked to the Pandavas, where the Bali Pass trek camps on Day 4. - **Camp:** lakeside, among alpine pastures - **Views:** the Swargarohini peaks, Kalanag and Bandarpoonch - **Weather:** changes fast, so keep warm layers and rain gear handy ### Is there a buffer day on the Bali Pass trek? Yes, the Bali Pass trek has a buffer day (Day 9) for bad weather, heavy snowfall or unexpected delays. If it is used, you pay ₹2,100 + 5% GST, collected by the Trek Leader. - **Decision:** taken by the Trek Leader based on weather and trail conditions - **If not used:** you return a day earlier - **Plan ahead:** keep one spare day before your onward travel ### What is the minimum age for the Bali Pass trek? The minimum age for the Bali Pass trek is 16 years, because pass day is 8–9 hours on snow, rocky ridges and steep scree. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. Like everyone on this route, you need at least one earlier high-altitude trek above 4,000 m. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 15 May 2027 to 22 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 29 May 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 5 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 12 Jun 2027 - 12 Jun 2027 to 19 Jun 2027 - 19 Jun 2027 to 26 Jun 2027 - 26 Jun 2027 to 3 Jul 2027 - 18 Sep 2027 to 25 Sep 2027 - 25 Sep 2027 to 2 Oct 2027 --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/bali-pass-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Benog Tibba Trek > Benog Tibba Trek is a 2-day easy trek in Dehradun, Uttarakhand, reaching 2,216 m (7,270 ft). It covers about 8 km on foot and starts and ends at Cloud End. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹3,825 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (42 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/benog-tibba-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 2 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 2,216 m / 7,270 ft - **Trekking distance:** 8 km - **Region:** Dehradun, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Cloud End - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Spring-Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 15°C to 25°C, Night 7°C to 12°C | Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 12°C to 20°C, Night 5°C to 10°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 8°C to 15°C, Night -3°C to 4°C - **Price:** ₹3,825 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (42 upcoming) ## Overview Mussoorie has a side most visitors never see. Drive west past Library Chowk, along the quieter road to Cloud End, step through the forest check post into the Benog Wildlife Sanctuary, and the town is soon behind you, lost among deodar and oak. A few hours of easy walking later you are on a 7,270 ft hilltop beside the small Jwala Devi temple, watching the sun go down over the Yamuna valley, with your tent pitched close by. For many children, it is their first night under the stars. The Benog Tibba trek is a gentle forest walk to a summit temple, with a night of camping on top and a sunrise view of the snow peaks. The trail winds through deodar, oak, pine and rhododendron, past old stone ruins and small forest clearings, to the top of Benog Tibba and the Jwala Devi temple. From there, on a clear morning, the first light falls on Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and the Gangotri group, with the Yamuna valley on one side and the Doon valley on the other. Benog Tibba lies inside the Benog (Mussoorie) Wildlife Sanctuary in Dehradun district, Uttarakhand, just west of Mussoorie. The trek starts and ends at Cloud End, at about 2,074 m on the edge of the sanctuary, and climbs gently over about 4 km to the top at 2,216 m (7,270 ft) – a gain of under 150 m, spread over 2–3 hours of unhurried walking. The same trail brings you back down on Day 2, so the whole trek is about 8 km. The sanctuary is a protected forest known for its birdlife. Trekkaro runs Benog Tibba as a relaxed two-day family trek, and in our experience there are few gentler ways to introduce children to trekking and camping close to Mussoorie. ### Sunset to Sunrise at Jwala Devi – What Makes the Benog Tibba Trek Unmissable The summit of Benog Tibba is not a place you touch and leave. It is where you spend the night, and that is what sets this trek apart: the best of it happens after the walking is done. The trail ends at the top, beside the small Jwala Devi temple, and the camp is set up close by. There is time to sit, to rest tired legs and to watch the evening settle over the Yamuna valley as the sun goes down. Then comes a hot dinner, the cool of the hilltop after dark, even in summer, and the quiet of tents in the forest. For a child who has never camped before, this one evening is the adventure. You wake early, before the sun. You pull on a jacket, unzip the tent and walk out into the cool morning air at the top of the hill. Then the first light falls on the snow peaks to the north: Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag, the Gangotri group. On exceptionally clear days you may even see further east. The Doon valley lies on one side of you and the Yamuna valley on the other. You have walked only about 4 km to stand here, and the snow peaks of the Himalaya are in front of you. For a first trek, that is a great deal of mountain. After breakfast the tents come down, and the walk back to the road is easy – about 4 km and 1.5–2 hours down the same forest trail, with one last chance to look for the birds and enjoy the trees. By early afternoon you are back in Dehradun. In our experience, this shape is exactly right for families: one gentle walk up, one night on top, one sunrise, and home the same day with time to spare. ### The Forest Itself For almost all of its length, the Benog Tibba trail is a forest walk. The path is wide and well shaded, winding through deodar, oak, pine and rhododendron, with a few short, steep sections and plenty of level stretches between them, so children can walk at their own pace with regular stops. Old stone ruins and small forest clearings break up the way. We consider the sanctuary one of the best places for birdwatching near Mussoorie. Walk quietly and you are likely to spot several species: red-billed blue magpies, Himalayan woodpeckers, laughingthrushes and many other birds. The forest carries a piece of natural history too – it is known as the last recorded home of the Himalayan quail, a bird not reliably seen in more than a century. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Benog Tibba trek is graded easy, and it needs no previous trekking experience. We recommend it for families with children, school groups, first-time campers and anyone who wants an easy weekend in the hills. The walk up is about 4 km over 2–3 hours at an unhurried pace; the walk back down the next morning is the same 4 km, an easy 1.5–2 hours. If you can walk comfortably for 3 hours with breaks, you can do Benog Tibba. We still recommend four to six weeks of light preparation before departure. Children aged 6 and above who walk regularly can join with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: September to June, with winter batches from December to February. ### Key Highlights of the Benog Tibba Trek - **A night on top** – camping close to the summit of Benog Tibba at 2,216 m (7,270 ft), for many children their first night under the stars - **The Jwala Devi temple** – the small temple that crowns the hilltop where the trail ends - **Sunset over the Yamuna valley** – evening light from the hilltop camp - **Sunrise on the snow peaks** – Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and the Gangotri group on clear mornings - **Two valleys at once** – the Doon valley on one side of the summit and the Yamuna valley on the other - **Birdwatching in the Benog Wildlife Sanctuary** – red-billed blue magpies, Himalayan woodpeckers, laughingthrushes and many more - **A shaded forest trail** – deodar, oak, pine and rhododendron, with old stone ruins and small clearings along the way - **Close to Mussoorie** – a short, gentle trek just west of the town, and back in Dehradun by early afternoon on the second day ### Best Time to Do the Benog Tibba Trek The Benog Tibba trek runs most of the year: March to June, September to November, and the winter months of December to February. We pause only for the monsoon. Each window gives the hilltop its own character, from spring flowers to frost on the meadow. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (The Family Season) This is, in our view, the most comfortable season for families. Spring flowers and blooming rhododendrons brighten the forest, and the days are warm. Evenings on top are cool rather than cold, which makes the night in tents easier for younger children, and the sunset over the Yamuna valley closes a long, gentle day. - **Temperatures:** Day: 15°C to 25°C | Night at camp: 7°C to 12°C - **Trail conditions:** Shaded forest trail with spring flowers and blooming rhododendrons; warm days and cool evenings on top. - **Best for:** Families with younger children, a first night of camping and the forest in bloom. #### September to November – Autumn (The Clearest Views) After the monsoon the skies clear, and the views of the snow peaks are at their sharpest. This is the season to come for the sunrise: Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag and the Gangotri group stand out against the morning sky. Days are pleasant for walking, and nights on top are a little cooler than in spring. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 20°C | Night at camp: 5°C to 10°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear post-monsoon skies; pleasant days and cooler nights on top. - **Best for:** Sunrise views of the snow peaks and mountain photography. #### December to February – Winter (Frost and the Sharpest Skies) Winter is the quiet season on Benog Tibba. The forest is bare of flowers but the air is at its clearest, and the snow peaks look close enough to touch at sunrise. Frost covers the meadow on most mornings and a light dusting of snow is possible on the top in January. Days are short and crisp; nights in the tent are cold, so this window suits families with older children and anyone who wants a first taste of winter camping without a long drive or a high pass. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 15°C | Night at camp: -3°C to 4°C - **Trail conditions:** Dry, frosty trail; a thin layer of snow on the summit meadow after a cold spell in January. - **Best for:** Clear-sky sunrise views, a first winter camping night, and Christmas and New Year batches. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For a first family camping trip with younger children, book a March to June batch, when the days are warm, the nights mild and the forest in flower. For the clearest sunrise over Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini and the Gangotri peaks, choose September to November, or come in December to February if you are ready for a frosty night: the free -10°C jacket, shoes and poles are included, so winter needs no extra gear. Either way, the hilltop, the temple and the night under the stars are the same – and so is the easy walk home. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Cloud End and trek to Benog Tibba **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Cloud End (35 km, ~2 hrs) | Trek: about 4 km, 2–3 hrs | Altitude: 2,074 m → 2,216 m (7,270 ft) | Terrain: wide, shaded forest trail with a few short steep sections | Stay: Tents near the Jwala Devi temple** You meet in Dehradun in the morning and drive up through Mussoorie, past Library Chowk, and on along the quieter western road towards Cloud End. Cloud End sits at about 2,074 m, at the edge of the Benog (Mussoorie) Wildlife Sanctuary. The drive takes about two hours, depending on traffic in Mussoorie. Mussoorie has the last reliable ATMs and good network; inside the sanctuary the signal is patchy. At the forest check post the sanctuary entry permits are checked, and the trek begins, so keep your government photo ID handy. The trail is wide and well shaded, winding through deodar, oak, pine and rhododendron. There are a few short, steep sections, with plenty of level stretches in between. On the steep bits, slow down and stop as often as you need. Children can walk at their own pace here, with regular stops, and nobody needs to rush. You pass old stone ruins and small forest clearings along the way. Walk quietly. The sanctuary is one of the best places for birdwatching near Mussoorie, and if you keep the noise down you are likely to spot several species: red-billed blue magpies, Himalayan woodpeckers, laughingthrushes and many more. This forest is also known as the last recorded home of the Himalayan quail, a bird not reliably seen in more than a century. Natural water sources are scarce on this trail, so each person should carry at least two litres; the team brings water to camp. The path ends at the top of Benog Tibba, at 2,216 m, where the small Jwala Devi temple stands. Camp is set up close by, in 3-person tents with a dining tent and a toilet tent. In the evening you watch the sun set over the Yamuna valley, then sit down to a hot dinner. It gets cool on top even in summer, so pack a light warm jacket and a cap. For many children this is their very first night under the stars. What to Expect: - Drive through Mussoorie and past Library Chowk to Cloud End - Permit check at the sanctuary gate, then a shaded trail through deodar, oak and rhododendron - Birdwatching: red-billed blue magpies, Himalayan woodpeckers and laughingthrushes - At least 2 litres of water per person; water sources on the trail are scarce - Jwala Devi temple and sunset over the Yamuna valley - Overnight: Tents near the Jwala Devi temple, Benog Tibba (2,216 m / 7,270 ft) ### Day 2: Benog Tibba to Cloud End and drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,216 m → 2,074 m | Walk: about 4 km back to Cloud End, 1.5–2 hrs | Drive: Cloud End → Dehradun (35 km, ~2 hrs) | Stay: Trek ends in Dehradun** Wake up early for the sunrise. On a clear morning the first light falls on the snow peaks to the north: Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and the Gangotri group. On exceptionally clear days you may see even further east. The Doon valley lies on one side of the hill and the Yamuna valley on the other. Keep your jacket on until the sun is up. After breakfast you pack up the tents and walk back down through the forest to the road. It is an easy walk of about 4 km, 1.5–2 hours, and a good time for one last look at the birds and the trees. Carry your rubbish down with you. From Cloud End you drive back through Mussoorie to Dehradun, arriving by early afternoon. That leaves plenty of time to travel home the same day, so book your return train or bus for the afternoon or evening of Day 2. What to Expect: - Sunrise over Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini and the Gangotri peaks - The Doon valley on one side, the Yamuna valley on the other - Breakfast at camp, then an easy 4 km, 1.5–2 hr walk back through the forest - Drive from Cloud End through Mussoorie to Dehradun (35 km, ~2 hrs) - Return train or bus booked for the afternoon or evening - Trek ends at Cloud End; drop at Dehradun by early afternoon ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: camping near Benog Tibba, in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals on the trek, from Day 1 lunch to Day 2 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the night at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 2-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Cloud End and back - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Cloud End #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun – about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Cloud End leaves Dehradun Railway Station in the morning, so arrive the evening before and stay in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Cloud End:** about 35 km via Mussoorie, roughly 2 hrs depending on traffic. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station in the morning. **Return:** On Day 2, after a 4 km, 1.5–2 hr walk back to Cloud End, a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes you to Dehradun Railway Station by early afternoon. An evening flight the same day is possible, but leave a margin for Mussoorie traffic. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) – this is also the cab pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. The overnight Nanda Devi Express arrives early in the morning, which suits the morning pickup; check current timings. - **Overnight:** Nanda Devi Express from Delhi - **Day trains:** Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat – arrive the day before and stay in Dehradun **From Dehradun to Cloud End:** about 35 km via Mussoorie, roughly 2 hrs depending on traffic. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station in the morning. **Return:** On Day 2, after a 4 km, 1.5–2 hr walk back to Cloud End, a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes you to Dehradun Railway Station by early afternoon. You can book a train back to Delhi for the same evening. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs; Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night. Prefer government buses from inside ISBT, then take an auto or cab from Dehradun ISBT to Dehradun Railway Station for the morning pickup. **From Dehradun to Cloud End:** about 35 km via Mussoorie, roughly 2 hrs depending on traffic. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station in the morning. **Return:** On Day 2, after a 4 km, 1.5–2 hr walk back to Cloud End, a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes you to Dehradun Railway Station by early afternoon. You can take a bus back to Delhi from Dehradun ISBT the same evening. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Mussoorie and Dehradun have the last reliable ATMs - Carry the cash you need before the trek - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Good network in Mussoorie - Patchy inside the sanctuary and at camp - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Benog Tibba trek, and where does it start? The Benog Tibba trek is in Dehradun district, Uttarakhand, inside the Benog (Mussoorie) Wildlife Sanctuary, just west of Mussoorie. It starts at Cloud End, about 35 km (2 hours) by road from Dehradun. The trail ends at the small Jwala Devi temple on top of Benog Tibba. ### How many days is the Benog Tibba trek? The Benog Tibba trek takes 2 days with one night of camping, covering about 4 km up to the summit camp on Day 1 and the same 4 km back down on Day 2 (about 8 km in all). ### What is the altitude of the Benog Tibba trek? The top of the Benog Tibba trek is at about 2,216 m (7,270 ft). The trail starts at Cloud End, at about 2,074 m, so the climb is gentle. ### What is the difficulty level of the Benog Tibba trek? The Benog Tibba trek is graded Easy. The trail is mostly gentle and shaded, with a few short steep sections, and needs no trekking experience. ### Is the Benog Tibba trek good for beginners? Yes, the Benog Tibba trek is designed for beginners and families. It is one of the easiest ways to try a night of Himalayan camping close to Mussoorie. ### What fitness level do I need for the Benog Tibba trek? For the Benog Tibba trek you should be able to climb a few short steep sections, and aim to walk comfortably for 3 hours with breaks before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### Is the Benog Tibba trek suitable for children? Yes. The Benog Tibba trek is a family trek: children aged 6 and above who walk regularly can join with a parent or guardian, and the shaded trail and short distance make it ideal for a first camping night. ### What is the best time to do the Benog Tibba trek? The best time for the Benog Tibba trek is March to June for families and September to November for the clearest peak views; December to February works for a frosty, clear-sky winter night. The trek pauses only for the monsoon. - **March–June:** spring flowers, rhododendrons, warm days - **September–November:** clear skies and the best snow-peak views - **December–February:** frost on the meadow, a light snow dusting possible in January, Christmas and New Year batches ### Can you see snow on the Benog Tibba trek in winter? Sometimes. The Benog Tibba trek is not a snow trek, but from late December to February frost covers the meadow on most mornings and a light dusting of snow is possible on the top after a cold spell. Winter batches run every weekend; the trail stays walkable in trekking shoes, and the free -10°C jacket, poles and gaiters are included. ### How cold does it get on the Benog Tibba trek? On the Benog Tibba trek, spring and summer nights are 7–12°C, autumn nights 5–10°C, and winter nights drop to -3°C to 4°C with frost on the meadow. - **March–June:** days 15–25°C, nights 7–12°C - **September–November:** days 12–20°C, nights 5–10°C - **December–February:** days 8–15°C, nights -3°C to 4°C; the free -10°C jacket covers it ### Which mountains can you see on the Benog Tibba trek? From Benog Tibba you can see Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and the Gangotri group on clear days, with the Yamuna and Doon valleys below. ### What is the terrain like on the Benog Tibba trek? The Benog Tibba trail is a wide, shaded forest path through deodar, oak, pine and rhododendron, with a few short steep sections and old stone ruins along the way. ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Benog Tibba trek? No, altitude sickness is not a concern on the Benog Tibba trek, as the highest point is only about 2,216 m. ### What is the minimum age for the Benog Tibba trek? The minimum age for the Benog Tibba trek is 6 years, for children who already walk regularly. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Benog Tibba trek? To reach the Benog Tibba trek, travel to Dehradun; Cloud End is about 35 km (2 hours) away via Mussoorie. - **Train:** Dehradun Railway Station (Nanda Devi Express arrives early morning) - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun - **Bus:** Delhi to Dehradun ISBT (6–8 hours) ### Is transport included in the Benog Tibba trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab runs from Dehradun Railway Station to Cloud End and back. ### Where do we stay on the Benog Tibba trek? On the Benog Tibba trek you spend one night in tents close to the summit. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with dining and toilet tents. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Benog Tibba trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Benog Tibba trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Benog Tibba trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Benog Tibba trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Benog Tibba trek? On the Benog Tibba trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Benog Tibba trek? On the Benog Tibba trek natural water sources are scarce, so each person should carry at least 2 litres on Day 1. Our team brings water to camp. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Benog Tibba trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Benog Tibba trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Benog Tibba trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Benog Tibba trek costs ₹800 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Benog Tibba trek? No doctor joins the Benog Tibba trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Benog Tibba trek? For the Benog Tibba trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Benog Tibba trek? Mobile network on the Benog Tibba trek is good in Mussoorie but patchy inside the sanctuary and at camp. The last reliable ATMs are in Mussoorie and Dehradun. ### Is a permit needed for the Benog Tibba trek? Yes. The Benog Tibba trek is inside the Benog Wildlife Sanctuary and needs an entry permit, which Trekkaro arranges at the forest check post. Carry a government photo ID. The sanctuary is also one of the best birdwatching spots near Mussoorie. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 25 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 8 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 15 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 22 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 6 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 13 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 20 Dec 2026 - 24 Dec 2026 to 25 Dec 2026 - 26 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 31 Dec 2026 to 1 Jan 2027 - … 30 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/benog-tibba-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Bhrigu Lake Trek > Bhrigu Lake Trek is a 4-day moderate trek in Kullu, Himachal Pradesh, reaching 4,300 m (14,100 ft). It covers about 25 km on foot and starts and ends at Gulaba. Best time: May to October. Trekkaro price: ₹7,200 per person + 5% GST, with free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles. Next batch: 15 May 2027 (21 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/bhrigu-lake-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 4 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 4,300 m / 14,100 ft - **Trekking distance:** 25 km - **Region:** Kullu, Himachal Pradesh - **Start / end:** Gulaba - **Best time:** May to October - **Temperature:** Early & Late Season (mid-May, early Oct): Daytime: 8°C to 15°C, Night: -2°C to 4°C. Monsoon (Jun–Sep): Daytime: 12°C to 20°C, Night: 2°C to 8°C - **Price:** ₹7,200 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles - **Next batch:** 15 May 2027 (21 upcoming) ## Overview There is a short list of Himalayan treks that put you on the rim of a genuine high-altitude glacial lake in under three days of walking, and Bhrigu Lake sits right at the top of it. Starting barely an hour outside Manali, this trail climbs through cedar forest and wide-open meadows to a turquoise lake sitting at 14,100 ft, ringed by the snow peaks of the Pir Panjal, with no technical climbing and no multi-week commitment required. Bhrigu Lake (4,300 m / 14,100 ft) sits in the Kullu district of Himachal Pradesh, just east of Rohtang Pass, in the high alpine zone above Manali's Beas valley. Unlike most Himalayan treks that shut down the moment the monsoon arrives, Bhrigu Lake is one of the rare exceptions that stays open — and arguably gets more beautiful — through June, July, August, and September. The trail begins at Gulaba, 22 km from Manali on the Manali–Rohtang road, climbs through dense oak, deodar, and cedar forest, opens into sweeping alpine grasslands locally called "thatch," and ends at a sacred, color-shifting lake that local legend ties directly to one of Hinduism's seven great sages. For four days, the Kullu Valley and its meadows are your entire world — and you are back in Manali in time for a hot shower before the weekend ends. ### Why Bhrigu Lake Works Best Between June and September Most Himalayan trekking companies quietly shut their calendars the moment the monsoon clouds roll in over the hills in late June. Landslide risk, washed-out trails, and zero visibility make most treks genuinely unsafe between July and September. Bhrigu Lake is one of the few trails in India where that logic does not apply in the same way, and that is precisely what makes it special. Because the trek sits on the leeward, drier flank of the Pir Panjal range close to Rohtang, the meadows around Rola Kholi and Gulaba do not turn into the mudslide-prone, leech-heavy jungle you would find on a monsoon trek further down in the Himalayan foothills. Instead, they do something most Indian trekkers rarely get to see: they turn a deep, saturated green and burst into wildflowers — purple geraniums, yellow potentillas, and clusters of wild rose along the lower trail. The lake itself shifts color with the season, from a pale, snow-rimmed turquoise in late May to a deep, almost electric blue by July and August. This is also the only window when the alpine grasslands are genuinely soft underfoot instead of frozen or parched. None of this means the monsoon months are risk-free. Afternoon showers are common, the drive from Manali to Gulaba can occasionally be delayed by landslides on the Manali–Rohtang road, and low cloud can roll in and block the summit views for a few hours at a stretch. Trekkaro plans monsoon batches around morning trekking windows, before the afternoon cloud builds, and always carries rain shells and pack covers as standard kit. If you want the meadows at their most photogenic and don't mind carrying a rain jacket, June to September is when Bhrigu Lake earns its reputation as Himachal's best monsoon-friendly high-altitude trek. ### Who Is This Trek For? Bhrigu Lake is rated Moderate, and it earns that rating honestly. This is not a flat walk in the park — Day 1 and Day 2 both involve sustained, fairly steep ascents with real altitude gain, and the final approach to the lake crosses loose rock and boulder sections above the tree line. That said, it demands no technical climbing skill, no rope work, and no prior high-altitude experience. What it does demand is a reasonable baseline of cardiovascular fitness: if you can comfortably walk 10-12 km with a light daypack and handle a couple of hours of continuous uphill walking, you are well within your limits here. This trek particularly suits first-time Himalayan trekkers who want a genuine 14,000 ft high-altitude experience without committing a full week of leave, weekend warriors from Delhi-NCR and Chandigarh who can fly or drive into Manali on a Friday and be back at their desks the following Tuesday, and anyone who wants to pair a short trek with a Manali holiday — sightseeing at Solang Valley or Rohtang Pass fits naturally either side of the trek days. The minimum age is 10 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor. ### What Makes Bhrigu Lake Trek Stand Apart Plenty of treks near Manali promise mountain views. Very few deliver an actual glacial lake above 14,000 ft in a trek short enough to fit into a long weekend. Bhrigu Lake does, and it layers in three things that most short treks don't: a living mythology that local villagers still take seriously, meadows that rival the trek's own headline lake for sheer visual impact, and a season — the monsoon — when almost nothing else in the Indian Himalayas is worth trekking to. The lake itself is unusual in its own right. Geographically, it's what's known as a closed-basin lake — fed entirely by glacial melt and snow, with no visible stream flowing out of it, which is part of why local legend treats its waters as untouched and sacred. According to the story still told in villages around Kullu, the sage Maharishi Bhrigu, one of the Saptarishi (the seven great sages of Hindu tradition), chose this lake for his meditation, and villagers in the Kullu valley still treat its water as sacred. Believe the legend or not, you're trekking to a site that pilgrims and mountain gods, according to Kullu Valley folklore, have visited for centuries before the first trekking company ever set foot here. ### Key Highlights of the Bhrigu Lake Trek - A genuine high-altitude lake at 14,100 ft reached in just three days of trekking — one of the fastest payoffs of any Himalayan trek - Sweeping alpine meadows (locally called "thatch") that burst into wildflower bloom through July and August - Panoramic views of Hanuman Tibba (5,982 m), Deo Tibba (6,001 m), the Seven Sisters peaks, and the Pir Panjal range - One of India's few genuinely monsoon-friendly high-altitude treks, open when most Himalayan trails are closed - A sacred, color-shifting glacial lake tied to the legend of Maharishi Bhrigu, one of Hinduism's Saptarishi - Camping beneath some of the clearest night skies in the Pir Panjal, far from any light pollution - Barely an hour's drive from Manali — the shortest approach of any major trek in the region - Guided by Trekkaro's certified trek leaders with full safety protocols and eco-trek practices ### Best Time to Visit Bhrigu Lake Trek Bhrigu Lake has a shorter operating calendar than many Himalayan treks — the lake stays frozen and the upper trail stays avalanche-prone for seven months of the year. But within its window, mid-May to mid-October, the character of the trek changes noticeably month to month. Here's a season-by-season breakdown. #### Mid-May to June — Late Spring (Transitional Snow) This is the shoulder season, and it offers a genuine hybrid experience: the lower meadows are just turning green after winter, while the upper trail and the rim of the lake itself still carry patches of old snow. Rola Kholi and the meadows below it are at their most dramatic in this window, with new grass pushing up through the last of the snowmelt. Days are pleasant, nights are still cold enough to need a proper sleeping bag, and the trail is quieter than peak monsoon. This is a strong choice for trekkers who want a taste of snow at the lake without the deep winter cold. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 15°C | Night at camp: -2°C to 4°C - **Trail conditions:** Green lower meadows, residual snow patches near the lake and upper ridge - **Best for:** First-time trekkers who want snow at the lake with milder camping conditions #### June to September — Monsoon Season (Highly Recommended) This is the window Trekkaro recommends above all others for Bhrigu Lake, and the reason is simple: unlike almost every other major Himalayan trek, Bhrigu Lake gets better, not worse, once the monsoon arrives. The meadows around Rola Kholi turn a deep, saturated green, wildflowers carpet the lower trail, and the lake itself deepens to a rich turquoise-blue. Expect a mix of clear mornings and cloud build-up by afternoon, along with the occasional shower — Trekkaro's monsoon batches are timed to complete the lake push before midday, when visibility is at its best. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 20°C | Night at camp: 2°C to 8°C - **Trail conditions:** Lush green meadows, wildflower bloom, occasional rain — carry a rain shell and pack cover - **Best for:** Photographers, wildflower season, and trekkers whose only leave window falls in summer #### September to Mid-October — Autumn (Clearest Skies) Once the monsoon clears out, Bhrigu Lake enters its most photogenic and arguably most comfortable window. The rains wash the dust out of the atmosphere, leaving some of the sharpest, longest-range mountain visibility of the year. The meadows begin to fade from green to a golden-brown, the skies are a deep, unbroken blue, and the crowds thin out noticeably compared to peak monsoon weekends. Many experienced trekkers consider this the single best all-around window for Bhrigu Lake. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 16°C | Night at camp: -1°C to 5°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear, dry trail; golden meadows; excellent long-range visibility - **Best for:** Landscape photography, first-time high-altitude trekkers, and anyone prioritising clear peak views over green meadows #### Mid-October to April — Off-Season (Closed for Regular Batches) As winter sets in, Bhrigu Lake freezes over and the upper trail becomes genuinely avalanche-prone, particularly on the exposed slopes above Rola Kholi. Trekkaro does not run standard batches during this window. If your travel dates fall between mid-October and April, we'd recommend Kedarkantha instead — a trek purpose-built for winter conditions with full cold-weather infrastructure. Trekkaro Recommendation: For meadows at their greenest and a genuinely rare monsoon-season Himalayan trek, book a June, July, or August batch. If crystal-clear peak views matter more to you than green meadows, aim for September or the first half of October. For a snow-and-green hybrid with a quieter trail, late May is a strong off-peak pick. | Season | Months | Temperature (Night) | Trail Condition | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Late Spring | Mid-May – Jun | -2°C to 4°C | Green lower trail, residual snow near lake | | Monsoon (Peak) | Jun – Sep | 2°C to 8°C | Lush meadows, wildflower bloom | | Autumn | Sep – Mid-Oct | -1°C to 5°C | Crystal clear skies, golden meadows | | Winter (Closed) | Mid-Oct – Apr | Below -10°C | Frozen lake, avalanche risk — no regular batches | ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Manali to Gulaba and trek to Gulaba Meadows Camp **Route Details:** **Pickup: Beas Bridge, Manali, 10:00 AM | Drive: Manali → Gulaba (~22 km, ~1 hr) | Trek: ~4 km, 3–4 hrs | Terrain: steady climb through deodar, oak and maple forest to open meadows | Stay: Tents on the meadows above Gulaba** The group meets at Beas Bridge in Manali at 10:00 AM. From there you drive about 22 km up the Manali–Rohtang road, towards Rohtang Pass, to the small roadhead at Gulaba. The drive takes around an hour. At Gulaba there is a quick gear check and a briefing, and then the trek begins straight into the forest. Keep your water bottle and a light layer in your daypack, not in the main bag. Today is short on distance but steady on the climb. The trail gains height through tall deodar, oak and maple, and it rarely eases off. Walk at a pace where you can still talk. If you cannot finish a sentence, slow down. In our experience the first day sets your rhythm for the whole trek, so it pays to start slower than feels necessary. Short, regular sips of water work better than long stops. The forest looks different with the season. In the monsoon the floor is green and full of ferns and wild flowers. In late spring and autumn the light through the trees is sharp and clear. Within a couple of hours the forest opens into rolling meadows, and the peaks of the Pir Panjal start to appear above the trees. This is the first of the open views that stay with you for the rest of the trek. Camp is pitched on the meadows above Gulaba, and the rest of the day is for recovery. Rest, drink water steadily and let your body begin to adjust to the altitude. In the evening there is a briefing, then dinner and your first night in the mountains. Nights on this trek drop to between -2°C and 4°C in late May and early October, and to 2–8°C in the monsoon months, so keep a warm layer close. What to Expect: - Short morning drive from Manali up the Manali–Rohtang road to Gulaba - Gear check and briefing at the Gulaba roadhead - Steady ~4 km climb through deodar, oak and maple forest - Rolling meadows with the first views of the Pir Panjal peaks - Evening briefing; lunch and dinner included - Overnight: Tents on the meadows above Gulaba ### Day 2: Gulaba Meadows to Rola Kholi **Route Details:** **Altitude: up to ~3,900 m (12,800 ft) | Distance: ~4 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: last of the tree line, then open alpine grassland, steady and in places steep | Stay: Tents at Rola Kholi** Today the trail leaves the forest behind. You climb through high meadows and the last of the tree line into open alpine grassland, the thatch this trek is known for. The distance is only about 4 km, but it takes 4–5 hours, because the gradient is steady and in places steep. Your trek leader keeps a slow, even pace with regular breaks. Take short steps on the steep parts and keep your breathing even. Stay with that pace, even if you feel strong. The altitude gained today matters more than the kilometres. Drink 3 to 4 litres of water through the day. Good hydration is your best protection against altitude sickness, and in our experience it is the one habit that makes the biggest difference on this trek. Sip at every break rather than drinking a lot at once, and do not wait until you feel thirsty. As you gain height, the view opens up across the Kullu valley. Hanuman Tibba and Deo Tibba rise across the valley, with the jagged line of the Seven Sisters beside them. From June to August these grassy slopes are covered in wild flowers. Turn around now and then at the breaks; much of the view is behind you as you climb. Stop for photographs at the breaks rather than on the steep sections. Camp tonight is at Rola Kholi, at about 3,900 m (12,800 ft). It is a meadow beside a stream, and the base camp for Bhrigu Lake. After lunch you take a short walk higher up and back down again. This acclimatisation walk helps your body adjust before tomorrow, so join it even if you would rather rest. Then comes an early dinner and an early night. Before you sleep, lay out your warm layers, headlamp and water bottle for the early start. Tomorrow is the big day, and it starts before sunrise. What to Expect: - Climb out of the forest into open alpine grassland: ~4 km, 4–5 hrs - Slow, even pace with regular breaks on the steeper sections - Views across the Kullu valley to Hanuman Tibba, Deo Tibba and the Seven Sisters - Wild flowers on the slopes from June to August - Short acclimatisation walk above camp after lunch; 3–4 litres of water today - Overnight: Tents at Rola Kholi (~3,900 m / 12,800 ft) ### Day 3: Rola Kholi to Bhrigu Lake and back to Rola Kholi **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~3,900 m → ~4,300 m (14,100 ft) → ~3,900 m | Distance: ~9 km round trip | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: steep grassy slopes, then loose rock and boulders above the tree line | Stay: Tents at Rola Kholi** The day starts early, with breakfast before sunrise. You leave camp early to reach the lake before the afternoon cloud comes in. Above Rola Kholi the trail climbs steep grassy slopes straight away, with no warm-up. Have your daypack ready with water, snacks, sunglasses and sunscreen before breakfast, so the group can leave on time. The morning is cold, so start in your warm layers and take them off as you heat up. Higher up, the grass gives way to loose rock and boulders above the tree line. This is the hardest section of the trek. Take it slowly and use your trekking poles. Test each rock before you put your weight on it, keep your steps short and your breathing steady. There is no prize for reaching the lake first, and in our experience the trekkers who climb this section slowly arrive at the top in better shape. Then the ridge flattens and Bhrigu Lake appears. It sits at about 4,300 m (14,100 ft): a small, deep glacial lake, turquoise or deep blue depending on the season. In late spring, snow lingers on its banks. The peaks of the Pir Panjal stand close around it. Local legend says the sage Maharishi Bhrigu meditated here, and villagers in the Kullu valley still treat the lake as sacred. Please do not throw anything into the water. The sun is strong at this height, even when the air feels cool, so wear sunglasses and sunscreen. After time at the lake for photographs and rest, you walk back down the same way to Rola Kholi. Go carefully on the boulder section and keep using your poles. At camp a well-earned hot meal is waiting, followed by a celebration. Drink plenty of water once you are back. You have reached the high point of the trek, and you sleep at Rola Kholi again tonight. What to Expect: - Breakfast before sunrise and an early start to beat the afternoon cloud - Steep grassy slopes, then loose rock and boulders: the hardest section of the trek - Bhrigu Lake (~4,300 m / 14,100 ft), turquoise or deep blue, with close views of the Pir Panjal peaks - A sacred lake: please do not throw anything into the water - ~9 km round trip, 6–7 hrs; sunglasses and sunscreen at the lake - Overnight: Tents at Rola Kholi (~3,900 m / 12,800 ft) ### Day 4: Rola Kholi to Gulaba and drive to Manali **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~3,900 m (12,800 ft) → Gulaba roadhead | Distance: ~8 km descent | Duration: 4–5 hrs trek + ~1 hr drive | Terrain: meadows, then forest | Stay: Not included (trek ends in Manali)** Your last morning at Rola Kholi starts with breakfast. Then you retrace the route down through the meadows and back into the forest, about 8 km and 4–5 hours on foot. With lighter packs and legs that are now used to the trail, the descent goes quickly. Take a last long look across the Kullu valley as you drop. Downhill is hard on the knees, especially on the steeper forest sections. Shorten your poles slightly, take small steps and keep your speed under control. Let the poles take some of your weight on each step, and stop for water now and then. The trek ends at the roadhead at Gulaba, where shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, take you back to Manali in around an hour. You should be in town by early afternoon, in time for a hot shower and a walk around Old Manali. Breakfast is the last meal included, and your stay in Manali is not part of the trek. What to Expect: - Breakfast at Rola Kholi, then an ~8 km descent (4–5 hrs) - Meadows and forest on the way down, with last views of the Kullu valley - Shorter poles and small steps to save your knees - Drive from Gulaba to Manali, around 1 hr - Back in Manali by early afternoon - Trek ends at Gulaba; drop at Manali ## Inclusions #### 1. Accommodation - 3 nights camping on the trail at Gulaba Meadows and Rola Kholi, on a triple-sharing basis (3 per tent) #### 2. Meals - All meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 4 breakfast: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 3. Permits & Camping Fees - Kullu Forest Division trekking permits and checkpost fees, arranged by Trekkaro #### 4. Camping & Safety Equipment - 3-person tents, sleeping bags and sleeping mats at all campsites - Free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge) - Basic first-aid kit, oxygen cylinder and emergency evacuation support #### 5. Trek Team - Certified Trekkaro trek leader and support guide for all 4 days - Kitchen staff, camp helpers, and mules or porters for the common equipment - Trek completion certificate when you reach Bhrigu Lake and return to Gulaba ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Manali to Gulaba and back. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹2,000–2,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. - The taxi fare is paid by the trekkers, so carry cash from Manali - Travel to and from Manali (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 3. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 4. Personal Equipment - Trekking shoes, jacket and trekking poles: bring your own (microspikes and gaiters are provided free) - Your personal clothing #### 5. Trek Insurance - Travel or trek insurance with high-altitude cover is mandatory and not included; arrange it yourself #### 6. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Manali before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, phone calls, laundry and extra snacks ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Bhuntar Airport (Kullu–Manali, KUU), about 50 km / 1.5–2 hrs from Manali by taxi, with flights from Delhi. Flights are limited and weather-dependent, so plan to reach Manali the day before the trek starts. **From Manali to Gulaba:** Day 1 begins with a 22 km, about 1 hr drive from Manali to Gulaba, then a 4 km (3–4 hr) walk to the Gulaba meadows camp. The shared taxi is paid by the trekkers, so carry cash from Manali. The pickup is at Beas Bridge, Manali at 10:00 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On Day 4 you walk 8 km (4–5 hrs) down from Rola Kholi to Gulaba and drive about 1 hr back to Manali. Book your flight from Bhuntar for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Manali has no railway. The nearest major station is Chandigarh, about 300 km away (Kalka and Ambala are other options); from Chandigarh a bus or taxi to Manali takes about 8–9 hrs, so plan to reach Manali the day before the trek. **From Manali to Gulaba:** Day 1 begins with a 22 km, about 1 hr drive from Manali to Gulaba, then a 4 km (3–4 hr) walk to the Gulaba meadows camp. The shared taxi is paid by the trekkers, so carry cash from Manali. The pickup is at Beas Bridge, Manali at 10:00 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On Day 4 you walk 8 km (4–5 hrs) down from Rola Kholi to Gulaba and drive about 1 hr back to Manali. Take a bus or taxi to Chandigarh that evening or the next day, then your onward train. ### By road **Bus route:** overnight Volvo and HRTC buses run daily from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Manali, about 12–14 hrs; buses also run from Chandigarh. Book a bus that reaches Manali the day before your trek starts. **From Manali to Gulaba:** Day 1 begins with a 22 km, about 1 hr drive from Manali to Gulaba, then a 4 km (3–4 hr) walk to the Gulaba meadows camp. The shared taxi is paid by the trekkers, so carry cash from Manali. The pickup is at Beas Bridge, Manali at 10:00 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On Day 4 you walk 8 km (4–5 hrs) down from Rola Kholi to Gulaba and drive about 1 hr back to Manali. Book an overnight bus to Delhi or Chandigarh for that evening or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Manali has the last reliable ATM; there are no ATMs at Gulaba or on the trail - Withdraw enough in Manali for tips, snacks and the shared taxi - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Manali has good coverage on all major networks - The signal is weak around Gulaba, with little or no signal at the campsites - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Bhrigu Lake trek, and where does it start? The Bhrigu Lake trek is in Kullu district, Himachal Pradesh, just east of Rohtang Pass. It starts at Gulaba, a 22 km (about 1 hour) drive from Manali on the Manali–Rohtang road. The lake sits at about 4,300 m (14,100 ft) above the Rola Kholi meadows, with views across the Kullu valley to the Pir Panjal peaks. ### How many days is the Bhrigu Lake trek? The Bhrigu Lake trek takes 4 days, with pickup and drop at Manali. The walk starts and ends at Gulaba, with about 25 km of walking in total and three nights in tents. - **Day 1:** drive to Gulaba (1 hour), then 4 km to the Gulaba meadows camp - **Day 2:** 4 km to Rola Kholi (3,900 m), 4–5 hours - **Day 3:** 9 km round trip to Bhrigu Lake, 6–7 hours - **Day 4:** 8 km down to Gulaba, then drive to Manali by early afternoon ### What is the altitude of the Bhrigu Lake trek? Bhrigu Lake is at about 4,300 m (14,100 ft), the highest point of the trek. You camp below it at Rola Kholi (3,900 m / 12,800 ft) for two nights. - **Day 1 camp:** the meadows above Gulaba - **Height gain:** from the Gulaba roadhead to 14,100 ft in three days ### What is the difficulty level of the Bhrigu Lake trek? The Bhrigu Lake trek is graded Moderate. There is no technical climbing, but you gain height quickly, and the climbs on Days 1 to 3 are steady and sometimes steep. - **Lake day:** steep grassy slopes, then loose rock and boulders, the hardest section - **Descent:** 8 km down on the last day, so trekking poles help - **Monsoon:** afternoon rain and cloud from June to September ### Is the Bhrigu Lake trek good for beginners? Yes, fit beginners can do the Bhrigu Lake trek if they train for about six weeks beforehand. There is no technical climbing, and the trek is only 4 days long. The challenge is the fast height gain to 14,100 ft, so walk at a slow, even pace and drink plenty of water. ### What fitness level do I need for the Bhrigu Lake trek? For the Bhrigu Lake trek you should be able to walk 6–7 hours on steep ground, as on lake day, and beginners should train for about six weeks. - **Training:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking to build stamina - **Knees:** the 8 km descent on Day 4 is hard on the knees; trekking poles and small steps help - **Fitness test:** take the free 2-minute Am I Ready? test on the Trekkaro website ### When is the best time for the Bhrigu Lake trek? The Bhrigu Lake trek runs from mid-May to mid-October. June to September is best for green meadows and wild flowers, and September to mid-October gives the clearest mountain views. - **Late May and early June:** old snow around the lake and on the upper trail - **June to September:** monsoon, with afternoon rain and cloud - **Mid-October to April:** the lake is frozen and the trail is closed ### Can I do the Bhrigu Lake trek in the monsoon? Yes, the Bhrigu Lake trek is one of the few high-altitude treks in India that stays open in the monsoon. Expect some afternoon rain and cloud from June to September. - **Early start:** the lake climb starts before sunrise to reach it before the clouds build - **Rain gear:** a waterproof jacket, waterproof trek pants and a pack cover - **Dry bags:** ziploc bags for your phone, power bank and documents ### Will there be snow on the Bhrigu Lake trek? On the Bhrigu Lake trek, late May and early June can have old snow around the lake and on the upper trail. From July to mid-October the trail is clear of snow. From mid-October to April the lake is frozen and the trail is closed. ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Bhrigu Lake trek? On the Bhrigu Lake trek, late May and early October days are 8–15°C with nights of -2°C to 4°C, while June to September days are 12–20°C with nights of 2–8°C. - **Camps:** nights near the lake turn cold, so carry 3 warm layers - **Layers:** thermals, a fleece and a padded or insulated jacket - **Gloves:** a fleece or woollen pair, plus a waterproof pair for rainy days ### Which mountains can you see on the Bhrigu Lake trek? On the Bhrigu Lake trek you see Hanuman Tibba, Deo Tibba and the Seven Sisters across the Kullu valley, and the Pir Panjal peaks close up from the lake. - **Bhrigu Lake:** turquoise or deep blue - **Meadows:** wild flowers on the slopes from June to August - **Forest:** deodar, oak and maple on the first day ### What is the terrain like on the Bhrigu Lake trek? The Bhrigu Lake trek climbs through forest to open alpine meadows, then up steep grassy slopes and loose rock to the lake. - **Day 1:** a steady climb through deodar, oak and maple forest to rolling meadows - **Day 2:** the last of the tree line, then open alpine grassland, steep in places - **Day 3:** steep grassy slopes, then loose rock and boulders above the tree line - **Day 4:** meadows, then forest on the way down ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Bhrigu Lake trek? Yes, altitude sickness is a real risk on the Bhrigu Lake trek, because you gain height quickly, from the road at Gulaba to about 14,100 ft in three days. - **Acclimatisation:** a short walk above camp after lunch at Rola Kholi on Day 2 - **Water:** drink 3–4 litres on the climb to Rola Kholi - **Sleep lower:** you visit the lake and return to sleep at 3,900 m - **Before you go:** consult your doctor, as this is a high-altitude trek ### What is the minimum age for the Bhrigu Lake trek? The minimum age for the Bhrigu Lake trek is 10 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the start of the Bhrigu Lake trek? The Bhrigu Lake trek starts in Manali; on Day 1 a shared taxi takes the group 22 km (about 1 hour) to the Gulaba roadhead. The pickup is at Beas Bridge, Manali at 10:00 AM on Day 1. - **By bus:** overnight Volvo and HRTC buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate take 12–14 hours - **By air:** Bhuntar Airport (KUU) is about 50 km (1.5–2 hours) from Manali, with limited flights - **By train:** Chandigarh is the nearest major station, about 300 km and 8–9 hours by road from Manali - **Plan:** reach Manali the day before the trek starts ### Is transport included in the Bhrigu Lake trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹2,000–2,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. Carry cash from Manali for the cab between Manali and Gulaba. The pickup is at Beas Bridge, Manali at 10:00 AM on Day 1. ### Where do we stay on the Bhrigu Lake trek? On the Bhrigu Lake trek you stay in 3-person tents on a triple-sharing basis: one night in the meadows above Gulaba and two nights at Rola Kholi. Women share tents only with other women. Hotels in Manali before and after the trek are not included. ### What is the group size on the Bhrigu Lake trek and who leads it? Bhrigu Lake batches have a maximum of 20 trekkers, and every batch has trained trek leaders and support staff. - **Day 1:** gear check and briefing at the Gulaba roadhead, then an evening briefing at camp - **On the trail:** a slow, even pace with regular breaks on the steeper sections ### Is the Bhrigu Lake trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Bhrigu Lake trek is safe for solo women, and many of our trekkers travel solo. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other women - **Team:** every batch has trained trek leaders and support staff ### What food is served on the Bhrigu Lake trek? The Bhrigu Lake trek serves simple, hot vegetarian meals: breakfast, lunch, evening tea with snacks and dinner, from lunch on Day 1 to breakfast on Day 4. - **Packed lunch:** bring a reusable lunch box for the trail - **Snacks:** dry fruits, energy bars and a few ORS sachets ### What about drinking water on the Bhrigu Lake trek? On the Bhrigu Lake trek, carry two 1 L bottles and drink well while you climb: 3–4 litres on the day you walk up to Rola Kholi. Refill your bottles at the points the trek leader shows you, and add ORS on long days. ### Do I need my own trekking gear for the Bhrigu Lake trek? Yes. On the Bhrigu Lake trek you bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, with no deposit and no charge. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Bhrigu Lake trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Bhrigu Lake trek costs ₹2,000 + 5% GST, and your main backpack is carried for you. If you offload, carry a 20–30 L day pack with water, rain gear and snacks; you need one for lake day anyway. ### Is there a doctor on the Bhrigu Lake trek? No, a doctor does not join the Bhrigu Lake trek. Trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid and carry a first-aid kit. - **Your kit:** your regular medicines and a small first-aid kit - **Before the trek:** consult your doctor and bring a medical fitness certificate ### What documents do I need for the Bhrigu Lake trek? For the Bhrigu Lake trek, carry a government photo ID (original plus a photocopy), your booking confirmation, a medical fitness certificate and travel insurance with high-altitude and evacuation cover, which is mandatory. Keep them dry in a ziploc bag, as rain is common from June to September. ### Do I need travel insurance for the Bhrigu Lake trek? Yes, travel insurance that covers high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation is mandatory for the Bhrigu Lake trek. Carry a copy of the policy with your ID and medical fitness certificate. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Bhrigu Lake trek? On the Bhrigu Lake trek, Manali has good mobile coverage, the signal becomes patchy around Gulaba, and you should expect little or no signal at the campsites. The last ATM is in Manali. - **Cash:** carry enough for the shared taxi, tips and snacks - **Power:** a power bank keeps your phone and headlamp charged ### Is Bhrigu Lake near Manali considered a sacred lake? Yes, Bhrigu Lake is a sacred lake, so trekkers are asked not to throw anything into the water. Carry a small waste bag to bring all your waste back down, and use biodegradable soap and no wet wipes. ## Upcoming batches - 15 May 2027 to 18 May 2027 - 19 May 2027 to 22 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 25 May 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 1 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 8 Jun 2027 - 12 Jun 2027 to 15 Jun 2027 - 19 Jun 2027 to 22 Jun 2027 - 26 Jun 2027 to 29 Jun 2027 - 3 Jul 2027 to 6 Jul 2027 - 10 Jul 2027 to 13 Jul 2027 - 17 Jul 2027 to 20 Jul 2027 - 24 Jul 2027 to 27 Jul 2027 - … 9 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/bhrigu-lake-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Binsar Trek > Binsar Trek is a 2-day easy trek in Almora, Uttarakhand, reaching 2,250 m (7,382 ft). It covers about 20 km on foot and starts at Binsar and ends at Jageshwar. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹3,600 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (40 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/binsar-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 2 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 2,250 m / 7,382 ft - **Trekking distance:** 20 km - **Region:** Almora, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Binsar / Jageshwar - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 15°C to 24°C, Night 5°C to 12°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 8°C to 15°C, Night -3°C to 4°C | Spring/Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 15°C to 27°C, Night 6°C to 15°C - **Price:** ₹3,600 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (40 upcoming) ## Overview Binsar is the kind of forest you hear before you see: the call of a barking deer, wind moving through old oak, a flock of laughingthrushes chattering somewhere below the path. This short Kumaon trek walks you through the heart of the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary and on to the temple town of Jageshwar, with the snow wall of Nanda Devi, Trishul and Panchachuli appearing between the trees. Two days, one night, and a very different Himalaya from the crowded trails of Garhwal. The Binsar trek lies in Almora district, Uttarakhand, in the Kumaon hills about 30 km north of Almora town. It is a 2-day, one-way trek of about 20 km. Day 1 starts inside the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary at about 2,250 m (7,382 ft) and descends 7 km through forest to the village of Dhaulchina at 1,860 m (6,102 ft). Day 2 climbs to the hilltop shrine of Vriddha Jageshwar at about 2,250 m (7,382 ft) and comes down through deodar forest to the ancient stone temples of Jageshwar at 1,870 m (6,135 ft). Pickup and drop are at Kathgodam Railway Station. The Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary was set up in 1988 to protect the oak and rhododendron forests of the Jhandi Dhar hills, and covers about 45 km². It is home to leopard, Himalayan goral, barking deer and more than 200 species of birds. Jageshwar, at the far end of the trek, is a cluster of more than 125 stone temples dedicated to Shiva beside the Jata Ganga stream, one of the great pilgrimage sites of Kumaon. Between the two lie small Kumaoni villages, terraced fields and long ridgeline views of the high Himalaya. ### Forests, Peaks and Temples – What Makes the Binsar Trek Unmissable Most visitors to Binsar drive in, look at the view and drive out. On this trek you walk through the sanctuary instead, on forest paths where the only traffic is a villager with a bundle of fodder or a herd of goats. The oak forest here is old and dense, its trunks covered in moss and ferns, and in March and April the rhododendrons turn whole hillsides red. Walk quietly and you have a fair chance of seeing barking deer, goral on a grassy slope or a bright flash of a Himalayan bird crossing the trail. What lifts the walk is the skyline. The ridges of Binsar face straight onto the Kumaon and Garhwal Himalaya, and on a clear morning the peaks line up for well over 200 km: Chaukhamba and Kedarnath far to the west, then Trishul, Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot and the five summits of Panchachuli to the east. The view from the high ground near Vriddha Jageshwar on Day 2 is one of the finest on the route, an open arc of snow above the forest. And then the trek ends at Jageshwar. After a day and a half of forest and villages, you walk down through tall deodars into a valley filled with carved stone temples, some of them centuries old, with bells ringing and the stream running past. It is a rare thing for a weekend trek to finish somewhere so full of history, and it makes Binsar much more than a nature walk. ### The Trail Itself The Binsar trek follows old forest and village paths rather than a single marked trail. Day 1 is a gentle descent of about 400 m through oak and rhododendron forest inside the sanctuary, then out past fields to Dhaulchina, where the group spends the night. Day 2 is the longer day: a gradual climb of about 400 m through mixed forest and hamlets to Vriddha Jageshwar, followed by a long, gradual descent through pine and deodar to Jageshwar. There are no exposed sections and no steep scrambles; in winter, frost and the occasional patch of snow on the higher ground make the shaded paths slippery. Water is available from village taps and springs along the way, and your trek leader will tell you where to refill; carry two bottles, as the forest stretch inside the sanctuary has none. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Binsar trek is graded easy, and we recommend it for first-time trekkers, families with children who walk well, birdwatchers, photographers and anyone who wants a quiet weekend in the Kumaon forests. The harder day is Day 2: about 13 km and 5–6 hours on foot, with a gradual climb to Vriddha Jageshwar and a long descent to Jageshwar, followed by the drive to Kathgodam. Day 1 is a 7 km, 3–4 hour forest walk after a 5-hour drive. We recommend three to four weeks of preparation, with brisk walks of 8–10 km and some stair climbing. Children aged 8 and above can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: September to June, with a break for the monsoon in July and August. ### Key Highlights of the Binsar Trek - **A walk through the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary** – dense oak and rhododendron forest, protected since 1988 - **A long Himalayan skyline** – Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Trishul, Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot and Panchachuli on clear days - **Wildlife and birds** – barking deer, goral and more than 200 bird species recorded in the sanctuary - **Vriddha Jageshwar** – a small hilltop shrine at about 2,250 m (7,382 ft) with open views of the snow peaks - **The temples of Jageshwar** – more than 125 stone temples to Shiva in a deodar valley beside the Jata Ganga - **Kumaoni villages** – slate-roofed houses, terraced fields and a night in the village of Dhaulchina - **Rhododendrons in spring** – red blooms across the forest in March and April - **A one-way route** – new ground every hour, from sanctuary to temple town ### Best Time to Do the Binsar Trek The Binsar trek runs from September to June and pauses during the monsoon, when leeches, landslides on the mountain roads and thick cloud take the joy out of the forest. Each season brings out a different side of Binsar, from crystal-clear snow views to rhododendron forest in bloom. #### September to November – Autumn (Clearest Views) Autumn is the season for mountain views. The monsoon has cleared the air, the forest is still green and the peaks stand sharp against a deep blue sky, especially in October and November. Days are 15°C to 24°C and nights in Dhaulchina 5°C to 12°C, perfect weather for walking. We consider this the finest window for the Binsar trek. #### December to February – Winter (Snow Views and Frosty Mornings) Winter brings the cleanest skies of the year, frost on the fields and, after a western disturbance, a layer of snow on the higher ridges of the sanctuary and around Vriddha Jageshwar. Days are 8°C to 15°C and nights drop to -3°C to 4°C, so pack properly warm clothes. The snow peaks look closer than ever in the clear winter air. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (Rhododendron Season) In March and April the rhododendrons bloom across the sanctuary and the forest fills with birdsong, making spring a favourite with photographers and birdwatchers. May and June are warmer, and haze can blur the distant peaks, though mornings are clear. Across the season, days range from 15°C to 27°C and nights from 6°C to 15°C, a welcome escape from the heat of the plains. ### Binsar Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Binsar trek costs ₹3,600 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days from Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary to Jageshwar, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Kathgodam is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Kathgodam to Binsar Sanctuary, Trek to Dhaulchina **Route Details:** **Drive: Kathgodam → Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary (130 km, about 5 hrs) | Trek: Binsar → Dhaulchina | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Altitude: 2,250 m → 1,860 m** We meet at Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM, in time for the overnight trains from Delhi. The shared cab climbs out of the plains past Bhimtal and on along the Kosi valley towards Almora, then turns north into the hills. It is a drive of about 130 km and 5 hours, with a breakfast stop on the way. Past Almora the road enters the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary and winds up through thick forest. We start walking at about 2,250 m (7,382 ft), inside the sanctuary. After a briefing, pulse and oxygen checks and a short stretch, the trail sets off through old oak and rhododendron forest, with moss and ferns on the trunks and dry leaves underfoot. The path descends gently most of the way, so the walking is easy, and there is plenty of time to stop and look around. This is the richest stretch of the trek for wildlife and birds. Walk quietly and listen for the sharp bark of a barking deer, or watch the open slopes for goral. Where the trees open up, the first views of the snow peaks appear to the north. Your trek leader will point out the peaks and help you spot birds; keep a packed lunch and water handy for a break in a clearing along the way. Lower down, the forest gives way to fields and the first village houses, and after about 7 km and 3–4 hours you reach Dhaulchina at 1,860 m (6,102 ft). The night is spent in a simple guesthouse or homestay in the village. Evening tea, a walk to watch the sunset over the hills and an early, hot dinner round off the day. What to Expect: - 06:00 AM pickup at Kathgodam Railway Station - Scenic 5-hour drive via the Kosi valley and Almora - A gentle forest descent through the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary - Chances to see barking deer, goral and Himalayan birds - First views of the snow peaks of Kumaon - Overnight: guesthouse or homestay at Dhaulchina ### Day 2: Dhaulchina to Jageshwar via Vriddha Jageshwar, Drive to Kathgodam **Route Details:** **Trek: Dhaulchina → Vriddha Jageshwar → Jageshwar | Distance: 13 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Altitude: 1,860 m → 2,250 m → 1,870 m | Drive: Jageshwar → Kathgodam (about 125 km, 5 hrs)** Day 2 starts early, with breakfast at 06:30 AM and boots on by 07:30 AM, as there is a long walk and a long drive ahead. From Dhaulchina the trail climbs gradually through mixed forest of oak, pine and rhododendron, passing small hamlets and terraced fields where villagers are already at work. The gradient is gentle but steady; settle into a comfortable rhythm and take short breaks. After about 3 hours you reach Vriddha Jageshwar at about 2,250 m (7,382 ft), a small, quiet shrine on the high ground above Jageshwar. Its name means ‘old Jageshwar’, and local belief holds that it predates the temples in the valley. On a clear day this is the main viewpoint of the trek, with Trishul, Nanda Devi and the peaks of Kumaon spread across the northern horizon. We stop here for a packed lunch. From Vriddha Jageshwar the trail descends gradually for the rest of the day, first through open forest and then into tall deodar, the tree most closely linked with the Jageshwar valley. The path can be loose and dusty in dry months and frosty in winter, so trekking poles are useful. Your trek leader keeps the group together on the descent. In the early afternoon the trees part and the temples of Jageshwar appear below, more than 125 stone shrines dedicated to Shiva beside the Jata Ganga stream. Take time to walk among them before the trek ends. From Jageshwar the shared cab drives back via Almora to Kathgodam, about 125 km and 5 hours, reaching the station between 06:30 PM and 07:30 PM depending on traffic and weather. What to Expect: - An early start and a gradual climb through village and forest - Himalayan views from Vriddha Jageshwar at about 2,250 m (7,382 ft) - Long, gentle descent through deodar forest - The ancient stone temples of Jageshwar beside the Jata Ganga - Evening drive back to Kathgodam, arriving 06:30–07:30 PM - Overnight: no stay (trek ends at Jageshwar) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse or homestay at Dhaulchina village, on a sharing basis #### 3. Meals - All meals on the trek, from Day 1 lunch to Day 2 lunch - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Safety Equipment - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 2-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Kathgodam to the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary on Day 1, and Jageshwar back to Kathgodam on Day 2 - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Kathgodam, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Kathgodam and Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 5. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 6. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Pantnagar Airport (PGH), about 30 km / 1 hr from Haldwani and Kathgodam, with direct flights from Delhi. The pickup is at 06:00 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near Kathgodam or Haldwani. **From Kathgodam to Binsar:** 130 km, about 5 hrs by road via Bhimtal and Almora. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The trek ends at Jageshwar on Day 2, and the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes about 5 hrs, reaching Kathgodam between 06:30 PM and 07:30 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Kathgodam (KGM), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. For the 06:00 AM pickup, an overnight train from Delhi on the night before Day 1 is the easiest option. - **Ranikhet Express and other overnight trains** – from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Kathgodam Shatabdi and day trains** – take them the day before the trek and stay near the station. Check current timings before you book. **From Kathgodam to Binsar:** 130 km, about 5 hrs by road via Bhimtal and Almora. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The cab (not included in the trek fee) is expected at Kathgodam between 06:30 PM and 07:30 PM on Day 2. Plan your train home for after 09:00 PM or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Overnight buses run from Delhi Anand Vihar ISBT to Haldwani, about 7–8 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses, and from Haldwani bus stand take an auto or cab to Kathgodam Railway Station, about 6 km and 15–20 min, in time for the 06:00 AM pickup. **From Kathgodam to Binsar:** 130 km, about 5 hrs by road via Bhimtal and Almora. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from the station. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The cab (not included in the trek fee) reaches Kathgodam between 06:30 PM and 07:30 PM on Day 2. Plan your bus home from Haldwani for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Haldwani, Kathgodam or Almora, on the drive in - There is no ATM inside the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary or at Dhaulchina - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio and Airtel work in Kathgodam, Almora and Jageshwar - Signal is weak or absent inside the sanctuary and patchy at Dhaulchina - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Almora ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Binsar trek, and where does it start? The Binsar trek is in Almora district in the Kumaon region of Uttarakhand, about 30 km north of Almora town. It starts inside the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary at about 2,250 m, crosses the forest to Dhaulchina village for the night, and ends at the temple town of Jageshwar via Vriddha Jageshwar. Trekkaro’s pickup is at Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM on Day 1, followed by a 5-hour drive to the sanctuary. ### How many days does the Binsar trek take from Kathgodam? The Binsar trek takes 2 days and 1 night from Kathgodam to Kathgodam. Day 1 is a 5-hour drive to the sanctuary and a 7 km, 3–4 hour forest walk to Dhaulchina. Day 2 is a 13 km, 5–6 hour walk via Vriddha Jageshwar to Jageshwar, then a 5-hour drive back to Kathgodam, arriving between 06:30 PM and 07:30 PM. The total trekking distance is about 20 km, so the whole trek fits into a weekend. ### What is the maximum altitude reached on the Binsar trek? The highest point of the Binsar trek is about 2,250 m (7,382 ft), reached twice: at the start of the trail inside the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary on Day 1 and at Vriddha Jageshwar on Day 2. The night is spent lower, at Dhaulchina (1,860 m / 6,102 ft), and the trek ends at Jageshwar (1,870 m / 6,135 ft). At this altitude Acute Mountain Sickness is very unlikely, which makes Binsar a comfortable first trek. ### What is the difficulty level of the Binsar trek? The Binsar trek is graded easy. It follows forest and village paths with gentle gradients, no exposed sections and no steep scrambles. The harder day is Day 2: about 13 km and 5–6 hours, with a gradual climb of about 400 m to Vriddha Jageshwar and a long descent to Jageshwar, followed by a 5-hour drive. With three to four weeks of brisk walking and stair climbing, most healthy beginners complete it comfortably. ### What is the best time of year for the Binsar trek? The best time for the Binsar trek is October and November, when the post-monsoon skies give the clearest views of Nanda Devi, Trishul and Panchachuli. The trek runs from September to June: - **Autumn (Sep–Nov):** sharp views and pleasant walking. - **Winter (Dec–Feb):** clear skies, frost and snow on the higher ridges after a snowfall. - **Spring/Summer (Mar–Jun):** rhododendrons in March and April, warmer days later. We do not run it in July and August. ### Does the Binsar trek have snow, and in which months? Yes, the Binsar trek can have snow from December to February, after a western disturbance brings a snowfall to the Kumaon hills. The snow settles on the higher ground of the sanctuary and around Vriddha Jageshwar and melts within days on sunny slopes, while frost lingers on shaded paths. Snow is not certain on any given weekend. Microspikes and gaiters come with Free Trekking Gear, and the snow peaks are visible all season on clear days. ### How cold does it get at night on the Binsar trek? Night temperatures at Dhaulchina on the Binsar trek range from -3°C to 15°C depending on the month: - **Autumn (Sep–Nov):** day 15°C to 24°C, night 5°C to 12°C - **Winter (Dec–Feb):** day 8°C to 15°C, night -3°C to 4°C - **Spring/Summer (Mar–Jun):** day 15°C to 27°C, night 6°C to 15°C Winter mornings are frosty, so start Day 2 with your warm layers on. ### What is the minimum age for the Binsar trek? The minimum age for the Binsar trek is 8 years, for children who already walk regularly. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that each trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach Kathgodam for the Binsar trek pickup? The Binsar trek pickup is at Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM on Day 1. Overnight trains from Delhi reach Kathgodam early in the morning, and overnight buses run from Delhi Anand Vihar ISBT to Haldwani, about 6 km from the station. The nearest airport is Pantnagar, about 30 km from Haldwani. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, and your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. ### What does the Binsar trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Binsar trek costs ₹3,600 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days from Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary to Jageshwar. It includes Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon trekking shoes, a jacket rated to -10°C, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, against a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and ₹200 washing charge), a guesthouse or homestay night at Dhaulchina, all meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 2 lunch, sanctuary entry and permits, a certified trek leader and local guide, and safety equipment. Backpack offloading (₹800) is optional. ### How do I book the Binsar trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Binsar trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹3,600 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Binsar trek? Mobile signal on the Binsar trek is patchy. Jio and Airtel work in Kathgodam, Almora and Jageshwar, but inside the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary the signal is weak or absent, and in Dhaulchina it comes and goes. The last reliable ATMs are in Haldwani, Kathgodam and Almora; there is none in the sanctuary or at Dhaulchina. Carry enough cash in small notes for tea, snacks and temple offerings, as cards are not accepted in the villages. ### Do I need a permit for the Binsar trek inside the sanctuary? Yes, entering the Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary needs a forest department entry permit, and Trekkaro arranges it as part of the trek fee, along with the vehicle entry charge for the sanctuary road. You need to carry an original government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, driving licence or voter ID) and the medical certificate signed by a doctor, and complete your trekker profile before the trek so the permit can be issued. Foreign nationals should carry their passport and a valid Indian visa. ### Is the Binsar trek safe for beginners and families with children? Yes, the Binsar trek is well suited to beginners and families: the altitude is moderate, the paths are gentle and the route passes through villages. Trekkaro keeps batches to 20 trekkers, with a NIM-certified (or equivalent) trek leader, daily SpO2 and pulse checks, a first-aid kit, oxygen and a stretcher with the group. The real risks are slippery frosty paths in winter, the long Day 2 with a drive afterwards, and wildlife; stay with the group in the sanctuary and never feed animals. ### What should I carry for the Binsar trek, and what gear is free? For the Binsar trek, Free Trekking Gear covers Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. You should bring: - A 30–40 L backpack with rain cover - Two 1-litre water bottles - Thermal inners and one fleece (two in winter) - Quick-dry T-shirts and trek pants - Woollen cap and gloves in winter - Sun cap, sunscreen and sunglasses - Binoculars for birds, if you have them - Personal medicines and a headlamp ### What are the stay and food like on the Binsar trek? On the Binsar trek you spend one night in a simple guesthouse or homestay at Dhaulchina village, in shared rooms with beds and blankets, rather than in tents. Food is freshly cooked vegetarian meals: lunch on the trail on Day 1, evening tea and snacks, a hot dinner, breakfast and a packed lunch on Day 2. Kumaoni dishes appear on the menu when the hosts cook them. Tell your trek coordinator in advance about any dietary needs. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 25 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 8 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 15 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 22 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 6 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 13 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 20 Dec 2026 - 26 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 2 Jan 2027 to 3 Jan 2027 - 9 Jan 2027 to 10 Jan 2027 - … 28 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/binsar-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Brahmatal Trek > Brahmatal Trek is a 6-day easy–moderate trek in Chamoli, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,734 m (12,250 ft). It covers about 29 km on foot and starts and ends at Lohajung. Best time: October to March. Trekkaro price: ₹9,000 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (102 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/brahmatal-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,734 m / 12,250 ft - **Trekking distance:** 29 km - **Region:** Chamoli, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Lohajung - **Best time:** October to March - **Temperature:** Dec-Feb: Lohajung -2°C to 8°C, Base Camp -15°C to -5°C | Nov and Mar: Lohajung 2°C to 14°C, Base Camp -8°C to 0°C - **Price:** ₹9,000 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (102 upcoming) ## Overview There is a version of the Himalayas that most trekkers never see, the winter version. The one where the trails are buried under two feet of snow, the oaks stand bare and frost-covered against a sky of absolute blue, the lakes are frozen solid, and the mountains above stand in a clarity that the summer haze entirely obscures. Brahmatal is the route into that version of the Himalayas. And it is extraordinary. The Brahmatal trek is one of the finest winter treks in India, not because it is the hardest, but because the combination of what it offers at an easy-moderate grade is genuinely unmatched. A frozen lake near the 3,106 m base camp. A ridge viewpoint at Jhandi Top on Day 3. A summit at Brahmatal Top (3,734 m / 12,250 ft) on Day 4 with a panorama of the Garhwal Himalayan peaks: Trishul, Nanda Ghunti, Mt Kamet, and Hathi Ghoda Parvat filling the horizon simultaneously. Oak and rhododendron forests are buried shoulder-deep in snow. In six days from Rishikesh, Trekkaro takes you into this world and brings you back an experience that redefines what a winter Himalayan trek can be. ### Trek Overview The Brahmatal trek begins and ends at Lohajung (2,316 m), a village in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand, about 250 km (8–10 hours by road) from Rishikesh. The route climbs from Lohajung through dense oak and rhododendron forest, reaching the frozen Bekaltal Lake on Day 2. Day 3 crosses Jhandi Top, a ridge viewpoint that provides the first commanding views of Trishul and the surrounding Garhwal peaks before descending to the Brahmatal Base Camp near Brahmatal Lake. Day 4 is the dedicated summit push: Brahmatal Base Camp to Brahmatal Top (3,734 m / 12,250 ft) and back. Day 5 descends the full route to Lohajung, and Day 6 is the drive back to Rishikesh. The trek is graded easy-moderate and is one of the best winter options in India for first-time snow trekkers and experienced Himalayan trekkers alike. ### Why Winter – The Brahmatal Difference Brahmatal is a winter trek in the truest sense: the experience it exists to provide requires snow. The Bekaltal Lake is frozen from December through February. Snow-covered banks and bare winter forests surround the Brahmatal Lake camp. Jhandi Top, the ridge crossing on Day 3, offers a 270-degree view of the Trishul group, Nanda Ghunti, and the Garhwal range, which the summer haze obscures, but the winter air holds a hard-edged clarity. The summit at Brahmatal Top in winter conditions delivers a Himalayan panorama that is among the finest accessible on an easy-moderate route in India. The forest sections of the trail between Lohajung and Bekaltal are under two to four feet of snow in January, producing the specific quality of snowbound forest silence that no summer mountain trail can replicate. This is the Himalayan winter. Brahmatal is the accessible entry point into it. ### The Route – Three Stages, One Summit The Brahmatal route is structured in three clear stages. The first stage, Days 2 and 3, is the approach through the snow forest to the Brahmatal Base Camp, with Bekaltal as the midpoint camp and Jhandi Top as the key ridge crossing that opens the landscape. The second stage, Day 4, is the summit push from Base Camp to Brahmatal Top and back, a round trip that delivers the defining visual experience of the entire trek. The third stage, Day 5, is the return descent from Base Camp to Lohajung, covering the full approach distance in a single long day. This structure gives the route a clarity of purpose that experienced trekkers find satisfying: every day has a defined objective, and the summit day is exactly that, a dedicated, unhurried push to the top and back. ### Who Is This Trek For? Brahmatal is graded Easy–Moderate and is one of the best winter trek options for first-time snow trekkers. The maximum altitude of 3,734 m is manageable for well-prepared beginners, and the daily distances of 6 to 10 km are achievable with a reasonable fitness base. The primary demands are the cold overnight temperatures at the higher camps, which reach -10°C to -15°C in January and February, and the significantly higher energy cost of walking in deep snow compared to bare trail. Minimum age: 7 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor. Daily trekking hours: 4 to 7 hours. Season: October to March. ### Key Highlights of the Brahmatal Trek - Brahmatal Top (3,734 m / 12,250 ft) – dedicated summit day with 270-degree Himalayan panorama - Trishul (7,120 m) and Nanda Ghunti (6,309 m) – the signature peak views from both Jhandi Top and Brahmatal Top - Jhandi Top ridge viewpoint – the Day 3 crossing that opens the full Garhwal Himalayan landscape for the first time - Bekaltal Lake – frozen in winter, surrounded by the snow-buried oak forest - Brahmatal Lake – the base camp lake beneath the summit approach - Mt Kamet (7,756 m) – the second-highest peak in Uttarakhand, visible from the summit on clear days - Snow-buried oak and rhododendron forest – the defining trail character of the Brahmatal approach from Lohajung - Certified Trekkaro trek leader & guides, twice-daily health monitoring, and [FTG gear with no rental fee](https://www.trekkaro.com/free-trekking-gear) ### Best Time for the Brahmatal Trek Brahmatal is a dedicated winter trek. The experience is known for frozen lakes, deep snow forests, clear winter summit views, and the Jhandi Top ridge panorama, which is at its fullest from December to March. Unlike most Himalayan treks that have a monsoon-to-autumn preference, Brahmatal actively improves as winter deepens. #### November - Early Winter (First Snow, Pre-Peak) The Brahmatal season opens in October, and November brings the first snow. The higher elevations above Bekaltal receive their first significant snowfall, and the forest sections below accumulate snow in the second half of the month. The full frozen lake experience at Bekaltal is less consistent in early November, and Jhandi Top may carry lighter snow than in December or January. Late November, after the first significant snowfall, is when the route comes properly into its own. Overnight temperatures drop sharply, and the Himalayan winter clarity begins. - **Temperatures:** Lohajung: 2°C to 14°C | Base Camp: -8°C to 0°C - Snow depth: Moderate at higher elevations, light to moderate on the forest trail. - **Best for:** First winter experience, fewer trekkers, lakes beginning to freeze. #### December to February - Peak Winter (Most Recommended) This is the definitive Brahmatal window. December through February delivers the full winter experience: deep snow on the trail from Lohajung upward, completely frozen lakes at both Bekaltal and Brahmatal, the forest buried to the shoulder, and the crystal-clear winter air that brings Trishul and Nanda Ghunti into the kind of visual proximity that photographs consistently fail to represent. Jhandi Top on Day 3 is at its most spectacular in this window, a snow-covered ridge with an unobstructed 270-degree view of the Garhwal range. January delivers the most extreme cold (-15°C at Base Camp) and the clearest views. February combines full snow depth with slightly less severe temperatures. This is what Brahmatal is for. - **Temperatures:** Lohajung: -2°C to 8°C | Bekaltal: -10°C to -3°C | Base Camp: -15°C to -5°C - Snow depth: 2 to 4 feet on the trail. Both lakes are fully frozen. The forest is completely snowbound. - **Best for:** Full winter experience. Frozen lakes. Jhandi Top panorama. Sharpest summit views. #### March - Late Winter (Snow Softening, Extended Season) March sees the gradual return of warmth to the lower elevations. The snow begins to soften and compact below Bekaltal, but the higher sections of the trail, Jhandi Top, and the Base Camp area remain snow-covered through most of the month. The summit views retain their winter clarity in early March, and daytime temperatures become more comfortable. March is an excellent option for trekkers who want the snow experience with less severe overnight cold. The season ends in late March as snow becomes slushy and trail conditions deteriorate below the treeline. - **Temperatures:** Lohajung: 2°C to 14°C | Base Camp: -8°C to 0°C - Snow depth: 2 feet-plus above Bekaltal, softening on the lower trail. - **Best for:** Winter snow experience with less extreme overnight cold. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the complete Brahmatal experience, frozen lakes, deep snow trail, the full Jhandi Top panorama, and the sharpest Brahmatal Top summit views, book a December to February batch. January is the most dramatic winter month. February combines full snow with slightly less severe cold. March is the gentler winter option. All three windows are extraordinary. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Lohajung **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Lohajung | Distance: ~250 km | Duration: 8–10 hrs | Altitude: 356 m (Rishikesh) → 2,316 m (Lohajung)** Day 1 is an approach day, a long but scenically rewarding drive from the pilgrimage city of Rishikesh into the Garhwal interior, ending at Lohajung (2,316 m), the gateway village for the Brahmatal trek. The route follows NH7 and the state highways through the Alaknanda Valley, passing the Devprayag Sangam, where the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda rivers meet to form the Ganga proper, a confluence of sacred geography that is worth the brief roadside stop. Above Rudraprayag, the valley narrows and the river runs faster below the road. Above Karnaprayag, the final hour of the drive climbs through progressively denser forest to Lohajung. Lohajung in winter is a different village from its summer self. The surrounding forest carries the first snow on its upper edges in December, and by January the hillsides above the village are white. On clear mornings, Trishul (7,120 m) is visible above the forest ridgeline to the northeast, a distant white summit that is the first visual confirmation of where the next five days are taking you. The village is small, quiet, and genuinely connected to the mountain life of the Garhwal Chamoli district rather than to the trekking economy in any commodified way. The evening in Lohajung is for rest, gear check, and the trek briefing. Trekkaro's health baseline SpO₂, pulse, and blood pressure for every trekker is recorded here at 2,316 m as the individual reference point for all subsequent daily readings on the route. The trek briefing covers the full six-day itinerary, the specific preparation required for winter snow trekking, the layering protocol for the temperature range ahead, and the AMS awareness relevant to the altitudes of Days 3 and 4. Sleep early and well. What to Expect: - Drive Rishikesh to Lohajung – ~250 km, 8–10 hrs via Devprayag, Rudraprayag, and Karnaprayag - Devprayag Sangam: confluence of Bhagirathi and Alaknanda – the birth point of the Ganga proper - Alaknanda Valley: river gorge, terraced farms, and progressively wilder Garhwal interior - Lohajung (2,316 m): winter village with Trishul visible on clear mornings above the forest - Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - Health baseline: SpO₂, pulse, and BP recorded at Lohajung for all trekkers - Trek briefing: route, winter preparation, layering protocol, AMS awareness - Overnight: Lohajung (2,316 m) – the last road town before the trek begins ### Day 2: Lohajung to Bekaltal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,316 m (Lohajung) → 2,798 m / 9,180 ft (Bekaltal) | Distance: ~6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: Snow-covered forest trail, gradual climb through oak and rhododendron** Day 2 is when Brahmatal begins to show you what it is. The trail from Lohajung enters the oak and rhododendron forest almost immediately and climbs steadily through a landscape that is, in winter, completely unlike anything on the summer trekking circuit. The trees are leafless and bare, their black branches coated in white frost, reaching upward against a sky that in the Garhwal winter is a blue of improbable intensity. The snow on the forest floor deepens progressively with altitude: at Lohajung, a few inches; by the time the trail reaches 2,800 m, knee-deep in places; by 3,000 m, the forest is buried to the waist in compressed snowpack that the oaks are growing through as though reclaiming the landscape from below. The silence in the snow forest is a quality that most trekkers have not previously encountered. The snowpack absorbs sound in a way that the bare summer trail does not. Footsteps are muffled. The wind, which in summer rustles the oak canopy audibly, is reduced to a distant whisper above the snow-laden branches. The occasional crack of a snow-laden branch releasing its load, the distant sound of a bird, and the rhythmic crunch of boots on packed snow are the complete acoustic world of the Brahmatal forest in January. Many trekkers describe this section of the route as the most affecting they have encountered, not because of its visual scale, but because of its quality of deep, absolute quiet. Bekaltal Lake, close to the camp at about 2,798 m (9,180 ft), is the first of the two lakes that give the Brahmatal route its character. In winter, the lake surface is frozen solid, a flat, white plane surrounded by snow-covered banks and the bare winter forest, with the sky and the occasional glimpse of a distant peak reflected in the ice at the margins where the surface catches the low winter sun. The camp at Bekaltal is in a clearing beside the lake, sheltered by the surrounding forest. This is a cold camp; temperatures at the lake will drop to -10°C or below overnight in January, and tonight is the first genuine test of your sleeping bag and layering system. The -20°C rated sleeping bags that Trekkaro provides are not precautionary overkill at Bekaltal in deep winter. They are exactly necessary. What to Expect: - The trail begins at Lohajung – an oak and rhododendron forest in full winter snow from the first steps - Snow depth increases steadily with altitude – from inches at Lohajung to waist-deep at the higher forest - Snow forest silence: the defining acoustic experience of the lower Brahmatal trail - Distance: ~6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude gain: ~480 m - Bekaltal Lake (camp at about 2,798 m / 9,180 ft): frozen solid in winter – flat white ice surrounded by snowbound forest - Critical: sleeping bag – Trekkaro -20°C sleeping bag essential tonight. - Overnight: Bekaltal camp (2,798 m / 9,180 ft) – first high-altitude winter camp of the route ### Day 3: Bekaltal to Brahmatal Lake **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,798 m / 9,180 ft (Bekaltal) → Jhandi Top (~3,600 m) → Brahmatal Base Camp (3,106 m / 10,190 ft) | Distance: ~7 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: Steep snow ascent to Jhandi Top ridge, open ridge walk, descent to Brahmatal Lake basin** Day 3 is the route's most visually dramatic day before the summit push and the day that earns its place at the centre of the itinerary through a combination of effort, exposure, and reward that the approach days cannot yet provide. The trail from Bekaltal climbs steeply through the upper forest before breaking above the treeline onto the Jhandi Top ridge at approximately 3,600 m. This ascent is the steepest section of the entire Brahmatal route, requiring microspikes from the Bekaltal camp upward and deliberate, measured movement on the compacted snow slope that leads to the ridge. Jhandi Top is a snow ridge at approximately 3,600 m that serves as the viewpoint threshold between the enclosed forest terrain of the approach and the high mountain landscape ahead. When the ridge opens, it opens completely. To the north and northeast: Trishul (7,120 m) and Trishul East in full profile, the triple-peaked massif that dominates the western rim of the Nanda Devi Sanctuary, its upper snowfields brilliant white against the winter sky. Nanda Ghunti (6,309 m) sits immediately to its right, a sharper and more compact peak whose south face catches the morning sun in a composition that photographers consistently find impossible to adequately capture. To the north: Mt Kamet (7,756 m) on clear days, the second highest peak in Uttarakhand, as a massive white wall at the back of the range. Hathi Ghoda Parvat and the broader Garhwal Himalayan ridge extend across the entire northern horizon. Most trekkers spend longer on Jhandi Top than the schedule strictly allows. The view from this ridge is the first unobstructed, high-altitude panorama of the trek, and it arrives after two days of forest walking in which the mountains were glimpsed rather than seen. Here, they are fully revealed. The Trekkaro guide will call the group onwards before the cold of the exposed ridge becomes a concern, but the time at Jhandi Top is a time that the route has been building toward and that deserves to be received without hurry. From Jhandi Top, the trail descends through the open snow terrain on the far side of the ridge into the Brahmatal Lake basin. The Brahmatal Lake, about 500 m from the base camp, frozen in winter, slightly larger than Bekaltal, positioned in a more open bowl, comes into view on the descent. The base camp is established beside the lake, with the summit approach to Brahmatal Top visible as a snow slope rising above the camp to the north. This is where Day 4 begins before dawn. Study the approach from camp this evening. Know the terrain before you climb it in the dark. What to Expect: - Steep ascent from Bekaltal to Jhandi Top ridge (~3,600 m) – microspikes mandatory from camp - Jhandi Top ridge view: Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti (6,309 m), Kamet (7,756 m), Hathi Ghoda Parvat - First unobstructed high-altitude Garhwal panorama of the trek – the visual reward for two days of forest - Descent to Brahmatal Lake basin – open snow terrain with the base camp and summit approach visible - Brahmatal Lake (near the 3,106 m base camp): frozen, open basin, summit slope visible above camp to the north - Critical evening health check: SpO₂, pulse, and BP before the summit push. Go/no-go for Day 4. - Early sleep: Summit Day departs at 5:30 AM. Be in your sleeping bag by 8:00 PM. - Overnight: Brahmatal Base Camp (3,106 m / 10,190 ft) – base camp for Brahmatal Top ### Day 4: Brahmatal Base Camp to Brahmatal Top & Return **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,106 m / 10,190 ft (Base Camp) → 3,734 m / 12,250 ft (Brahmatal Top) → return to Base Camp | Distance: ~6 km round trip | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: Steep snow ascent to the summit ridge, open ridge walk, return by the same route** Day 4 is the summit day, a dedicated, focused push from the Brahmatal Base Camp to the top and back, with no other objective competing for the day's time or energy. Departure is at 5:30 AM, in the dark and in the cold that at this hour in January can be -15°C. Headlamps cut through the pre-dawn air as the group moves upward from the camp. The early departure is not ceremonial: the snow on the summit approach is at its firmest and most stable in the cold morning hours, and the Garhwal winter sky is at its clearest before the day's temperature inversion sometimes introduces a thin haze above the lower valleys. The ascent from Base Camp to Brahmatal Top gains approximately 630 m across the upper snowfield and the final summit ridge. Microspikes are worn from the first step out of camp. The snow slope above the lake is steep but consistent, a sustained uphill push on compacted winter snow that requires deliberate, rhythmic movement and steady breathing. The trek leader sets the pace at a level that keeps every trekker moving continuously, because stopping in -15°C air without the thermal generation of movement means a rapid loss of core warmth that is difficult to reverse without physical activity. The group moves together, at a measured pace, in the pre-dawn quiet of the Garhwal winter. As the summit ridge approaches and the terrain levels, the view begins to open. The forest and the lake are left below. The ridgeline ahead carries nothing but snow and sky. And then Brahmatal Top at 3,734 m (12,250 ft) delivers its complete panorama simultaneously, a 270-degree sweep of the Garhwal Himalayan range in winter clarity that is, for most trekkers, the finest summit view they have encountered at moderate grade anywhere in India. Trishul (7,120 m) to the north, its triple summit in full profile and the upper snowfields carrying a light that shifts from blue-white to gold as the sun rises. Nanda Ghunti (6,309 m) immediately to its right, sharper and more severe. The Hathi Ghoda Parvat ridge extending across the eastern horizon. Mt Kamet (7,756 m) on clear days as a massive white presence above the back of the range. The complete Garhwal winter landscape, at a visual proximity that photographs consistently fail to convey. Summit time at Brahmatal Top is 45 to 60 minutes, time for photographs from every angle, for the group ritual that the Trekkaro guide conducts at the top, and for simply being present on a 12,250-foot summit in the Garhwal winter with the Himalayan range on the horizon and the silence of a winter mountain above the treeline. The descent returns by the same route, reaching Base Camp in mid-morning. The rest of Day 4 is genuinely at rest: sleep, eat, hydrate, and let the body recover from the summit push. Tomorrow is a long descent day, and it requires legs that have been looked after today. What to Expect: - 5:30 AM departure – pre-dawn, -15°C. Full winter layering from the first step. Headlamps required. - Summit ascent: ~630 m gain on compacted snow slope to Brahmatal Top (3,734 m / 12,250 ft) - Microspikes worn from Base Camp throughout the ascent and descent - Brahmatal Top panorama: Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti (6,309 m), Kamet (7,756 m), Hathi Ghoda Parvat - Summit time: 45–60 minutes – photographs, group summit ritual, panorama absorption - Return to Base Camp: by the same route – mid-morning arrival back at the lake camp - Rest afternoon: sleep, eat, hydrate. Day 5 is a long descent day. The body needs today's recovery. - Overnight: Brahmatal Base Camp (3,106 m / 10,190 ft) – second and final night at the high camp ### Day 5: Brahmatal Base Camp to Lohajung **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,106 m / 10,190 ft (Base Camp) → Jhandi Top (~3,600 m) → Bekaltal (2,798 m) → Lohajung (2,316 m) | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: Ascent to Jhandi Top, descent through Bekaltal and snow forest to Lohajung** Day 5 is the longest trekking day of the route: a full descent from the Brahmatal Base Camp back to Lohajung, covering approximately 10 km across 7 to 8 hours. The route re-crosses Jhandi Top before descending through the Bekaltal basin and the snow forest to Lohajung. It is a demanding day, not in the sense of altitude gain, but in the sustained effort required to descend 790 m of mountain terrain in winter snow conditions while the body is carrying the accumulated fatigue of four consecutive high-altitude days. The morning departure from Base Camp is early, with the Brahmatal Lake visible one final time in the dawn light before the group moves upward toward Jhandi Top for the return crossing. Jhandi Top on the return has a different character from Day 3. Then, the ridge opening was a revelation, the first unobstructed view of the Garhwal range arriving after two days of enclosed forest. Now, the same view is received as a farewell: Trishul and Nanda Ghunti in the morning light, with the knowledge that the summit above them has been reached and that the Brahmatal Base Camp where you slept two nights will not be seen again on this journey. Most trekkers spend a few minutes on the ridge on the return that the forward movement of Day 3 did not allow. The descent from Jhandi Top through Bekaltal and down through the snow forest to Lohajung covers the same terrain as the approach in reverse. The snow forest, which on Day 2 was an arrival into an unfamiliar world, is received on Day 5 as familiar terrain being departed. The lake at Bekaltal, frozen then, is still frozen now. The silence of the forest is the same silence. But the body walking through it carries a summit, a panorama, and two nights at 3,106 m that the body ascending three days ago had not yet earned. Lohajung by the late afternoon is warmth, walls, food, signal, and the particular relief of arrival that only exists after a genuinely demanding descent. What to Expect: - Longest trekking day: ~10 km, 7–8 hrs from Base Camp to Lohajung - Re-crossing Jhandi Top – the summit panorama as a farewell view on the return - Bekaltal Lake on descent: the same frozen lake, seen again from the opposite direction - Full snow forest descent – the same forest as Day 2, carrying four days of summit behind you - Altitude drops ~790 m from Base Camp to Lohajung – warmth increases noticeably with every hour - Lohajung: warmth, walls, signal, device charging, first hot meal in a proper building - Trek concludes at Lohajung. Completion certificates issued. - Overnight: Lohajung (2,316 m) - final night before the Rishikesh return drive ### Day 6: Drive from Lohajung to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Lohajung (2,316 m) → Karnaprayag → Rudraprayag → Devprayag → Rishikesh | Distance: ~250 km | Duration: 8–10 hrs** The final morning in Lohajung has a particular quality. The Trishul summit visible above the forest ridgeline on clear mornings, the same peak whose distant white profile was the first visual confirmation of the trek's destination on Day 1, is now a peak you have seen in full, from a high viewpoint, in the winter Himalayan clarity that only exists between December and February. What was a distant aspiration on the approach is now a peak, you know. The drive from Lohajung to Rishikesh retraces the approach road in reverse: back down through the Garhwal interior, through Karnaprayag, past the Rudraprayag confluence, past the Devprayag sangam where the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda meet in their most visually dramatic form, and then back to the broader, warmer, louder landscape of the Rishikesh valley. The 8- to 10-hour drive is long but covers scenery that is, in its own way, as significant as the trek itself: the river gorges of the Alaknanda, the terraced Garhwal hillsides, and the progressively widening valley as altitude decreases and the plains begin to reassert themselves at the lower end of the Himalayan range. For trekkers with same-day onwards connections from Haridwar or Dehradun, the early morning Lohajung departure allows evening train or flight connections. For those with more time, a night in Rishikesh at the ghats, in the ashrams, or simply at a restaurant that serves hot food is a transition from the Brahmatal winter world to the normal world that the experience deserves. What to Expect: - Drive Lohajung to Rishikesh – ~250 km, 8–10 hrs via Karnaprayag, Rudraprayag, and Devprayag - Devprayag Sangam: the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda confluence – the birth of the Ganga proper - Alaknanda Valley: the same gorge road in reverse, seen now with five days of winter above it - Same-day connections: evening trains from Haridwar and flights from Dehradun are achievable with early departure - Recommended: one night in Rishikesh if the schedule allows – the transition from winter altitude to warmth ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: guesthouse in Lohajung, on a triple-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping at Bekaltal and Brahmatal Base Camp, on a triple-sharing basis #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - Forest entry permits and all checkpost fees for the Brahmatal route, arranged by Trekkaro #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Double-wall, rain-rated tents and -20°C sleeping bags at every campsite - Trekking mattresses or sleeping pads at every campsite - SpO2, pulse and blood-pressure checks twice a day at every campsite - Portable oxygen cylinder and emergency stretcher on every batch - HF radio communication across the trek team #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide for all 6 days - Mountain kitchen staff, camp helpers, and mules or porters for the group equipment - Trek completion certificate when you reach Brahmatal Top and return to Lohajung ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Rishikesh to Lohajung and back. A shared cab costs approximately ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Rishikesh (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,500 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Lohajung #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack, sunglasses and other personal gear (shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and helicopter evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Rishikesh before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun – about 20–25 km / around 45 min from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi (about 1 hr) and other metros. The cab to Lohajung leaves Rishikesh at 6:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Rishikesh. **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km along the Alaknanda via Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag, 8–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 the shared cab (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 6:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (~1 hr) from Rishikesh, is one of the best-connected stations in Uttarakhand, with trains from Delhi including the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains; Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK) has only a few trains. From Haridwar, shared cabs and local buses run to Rishikesh – reach Tapovan the evening before the 6:30 AM departure. **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km along the Alaknanda via Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag, 8–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 the shared cab (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 6:00 PM. Book a late-night train from Haridwar or travel the next day. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh, about 6–7 hrs, by overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways buses; choose government buses from inside ISBT. An overnight bus arriving early in the morning can work, but the cab leaves at 6:30 AM, so reaching Rishikesh the evening before is safer. **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km along the Alaknanda via Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag, 8–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On Day 6 the shared cab (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 6:00 PM. Book an overnight bus to Delhi for that night or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Dewal has the last reliable ATM before Lohajung - Carry enough cash from Rishikesh - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Lohajung is the last place with a stable mobile signal - Beyond Lohajung the network is patchy to non-existent - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Brahmatal trek, and where does it start? The Brahmatal trek is in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand. It starts from Lohajung, a village about 250 km (8–10 hours) by road from Rishikesh via Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag. From Lohajung the trail climbs through oak and rhododendron forest to Bekaltal, crosses the Jhandi Top ridge to the Brahmatal lake basin and goes up to Brahmatal Top at 3,734 m. ### How many days does the Brahmatal trek take from start to finish? The Brahmatal trek takes 6 days from Rishikesh to Rishikesh, with 4 trekking days covering about 29 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung (about 250 km, 8–10 hours) - **Days 2–3:** Lohajung to Bekaltal (6 km), then over Jhandi Top to the base camp (7 km) - **Day 4:** summit day to Brahmatal Top and back, 6 km in 5–6 hours - **Day 5:** the longest day, about 10 km in 7–8 hours back to Lohajung ### What is the altitude of the Brahmatal trek? The highest point of the Brahmatal trek is Brahmatal Top at 3,734 m (12,250 ft). The trek starts at Lohajung (2,316 m / 7,600 ft), so you gain about 1,420 m. - **Bekaltal camp:** 2,798 m / 9,180 ft - **Jhandi Top:** about 3,600 m / 11,810 ft - **Brahmatal Base Camp:** 3,106 m / 10,190 ft ### What is the difficulty level of the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek is graded Easy–Moderate, and how hard it feels depends on the snow. In winter the steep climbs to Jhandi Top and Brahmatal Top are on snow, with microspikes worn throughout. - **Day 2:** 6 km and about 480 m of gradual climb through snow forest - **Day 3:** a steep snow ascent to the Jhandi Top ridge (about 3,600 m) - **Summit day:** a 5:30 AM start on a compacted snow slope - **Day 5:** the longest day, about 10 km in 7–8 hours ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Brahmatal trek? Yes, the Brahmatal trek is graded Easy–Moderate, and in normal weather it is a straightforward walk suitable for most trekkers, including fit beginners. In winter, snow on the higher sections and freezing nights make it more demanding, so come well prepared. ### What fitness level do I need for the Brahmatal trek? A moderate level of fitness is recommended for the Brahmatal trek: you should be comfortable walking 6–10 km a day for 4–8 hours, on snow in winter. - **Longest day:** about 10 km in 7–8 hours on Day 5, including a climb back over Jhandi Top - **Steepest climb:** from Bekaltal to the Jhandi Top ridge on Day 3 - **Health check:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded for every trekker at Lohajung ### What is the best time for the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek is a winter trek, run from October to March. December to March brings abundant snow and the most adventurous conditions. - **December to March:** deep snow in the forest and frozen lakes - **October to November:** the start of the season, with freezing nights ### How much snow is there on the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek has abundant snow from December to March, and in winter the forest is under snow from the first steps at Lohajung. - **Snow depth:** from inches at Lohajung to waist-deep in the higher forest - **Lakes:** Bekaltal and Brahmatal are frozen in winter - **Gear:** microspikes are worn from Bekaltal onward, and gaiters are provided free ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Brahmatal trek? On the Brahmatal trek, from December to February Lohajung ranges from about -2°C to 8°C, Bekaltal from -10°C to -3°C and Brahmatal base camp from -15°C to -5°C; the 5:30 AM summit start is the coldest part of the trek. - **Layers:** 5 warm layers – thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers and the padded jacket – plus a waterproof shell - **Summit morning:** a balaclava and buff for the pre-dawn climb - **November and March:** Lohajung about 2°C to 14°C and base camp -8°C to 0°C ### Which mountains can you see on the Brahmatal trek? From Jhandi Top and Brahmatal Top on the Brahmatal trek you see Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti (6,309 m), Kamet (7,756 m) and Hathi Ghoda Parvat. - **Lohajung:** Trishul is visible above the forest on clear mornings - **Jhandi Top:** the first open high-altitude Garhwal panorama of the trek - **Drive:** Devprayag Sangam, where the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda meet to form the Ganga ### Which lakes do you see on the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek passes two high lakes, Bekaltal and Brahmatal, both frozen solid in winter. - **Bekaltal:** at the Day 2 camp (about 2,798 m), flat white ice surrounded by snowbound forest - **Brahmatal:** near the base camp (3,106 m), in an open basin with the summit slope visible above - **Return:** you pass Bekaltal again on Day 5, seen from the other direction ### What is the terrain like on the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek climbs through oak and rhododendron forest, crosses the open Jhandi Top ridge and finishes on snow slopes to Brahmatal Top. - **Day 2:** snow-covered forest trail with a gradual climb - **Day 3:** steep snow ascent to Jhandi Top, an open ridge walk, then a descent to the lake basin - **Day 4:** steep snow ascent to the summit ridge and back by the same route - **Day 5:** back over Jhandi Top and down through the snow forest ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek reaches 3,734 m, so some risk of altitude sickness exists, but the highest camp is at 3,106 m and every trekker’s health is checked along the way. - **Baseline:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure recorded at Lohajung - **Base camp:** an evening health check before summit day - **Before you go:** consult your doctor about altitude medicines and carry your own ### What is the minimum age for the Brahmatal trek? The minimum age for the Brahmatal trek is 7 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Brahmatal trek base camp from Rishikesh? The Brahmatal trek starts from Lohajung, about 250 km (8–10 hours) by road from Rishikesh. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 6:30 AM on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 45 minutes from Rishikesh; fly in the day before - **By train:** Haridwar Junction, about 1 hour from Rishikesh; reach Tapovan the evening before - **By bus:** overnight buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh take 6–7 hours ### Is transport from Rishikesh included in the Brahmatal trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Brahmatal trek fee. Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs between Rishikesh and Lohajung, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Cost:** about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, shared - **Day 1:** leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan at 6:30 AM - **Day 6:** leaves Lohajung at 6:30 AM and reaches Tapovan by about 6:00 PM ### Where do we stay on the Brahmatal trek? On the Brahmatal trek you camp at Bekaltal and at Brahmatal Base Camp, with Lohajung as the base at the start and end of the trek. - **Tents:** four-person tents shared by only three trekkers - **Women:** female trekkers share tents only with other women - **Sleeping bag:** a Trekkaro -20°C sleeping bag for the cold nights ### What is the group size on the Brahmatal trek and who leads it? Brahmatal trek batches take up to 20 trekkers, men and women, with a minimum of 6 for a fixed departure, led by a professional trek leader. - **Trek leader:** certified in mountaineering, with NIM (Nehru Institute of Mountaineering) certification or equivalent and trained in first aid - **Support team:** a local guide, chef, assistant, porters and other staff - **Private treks:** group size can be set to suit you ### Is the Brahmatal trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the safety of female trekkers is a top priority on the Brahmatal trek, and the guides and support staff are carefully selected and trustworthy. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other female trekkers - **Belongings:** keep your personal valuables secure ### What food is served on the Brahmatal trek? The Brahmatal trek serves simple, nutritious vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at the campsite. - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Snacks:** carry trail mix, energy bars, dates and electrolytes for the walk ### Is drinking water safe on the Brahmatal trek? On the Brahmatal trek, water at camp is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets, and you should refill only at sources approved by the trek leader. - **Bottles:** two 1 L bottles, at least one insulated so the water does not freeze - **Electrolytes:** carry ORS or electrolyte sachets ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Brahmatal trek? Yes, the Brahmatal trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes, a jacket or poles. - **Included:** waterproof trekking shoes with ankle support, a -10°C padded jacket and trekking poles - **Also free:** microspikes and gaiters for snow and ice - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Handover:** at Lohajung on Day 1 ### Is backpack offloading available on the Brahmatal trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Brahmatal trek costs ₹1,500 + 5% GST, with a porter or mule carrying your backpack. - **Book ahead:** request it at least 15 days in advance - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and personal items ### Is there a doctor on the Brahmatal trek? No doctor joins the Brahmatal trek, but all trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid and carry a full first-aid kit. - **Health checks:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure at Lohajung and again before summit day - **Your medicines:** carry prescriptions, remedies for common ailments and any altitude medicine your doctor advises - **Fitness:** make sure you are physically and medically fit before joining ### What documents do I need for the Brahmatal trek? For the Brahmatal trek you need a government photo ID, a medical fitness certificate, travel insurance and a disclaimer form. - **Photo ID:** original plus a photocopy (Aadhaar card, passport, voter ID or driving licence) - **International trekkers:** passport, required for forest entry permits and in case of medical evacuation - **Travel insurance:** mandatory, with emergency evacuation cover - **Also carry:** your Trekkaro booking confirmation and the disclaimer form with emergency contact details ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Brahmatal trek? Mobile signal on the Brahmatal trek is limited, there is no charging on the trail and cards are not accepted in the mountains, so carry enough cash from Rishikesh. - **Cash:** small notes, for your share of the cab and personal expenses; ATMs are few in the hills - **Lohajung:** signal and device charging are available back at the base - **Power:** carry a power bank and spare camera batteries, and download an offline map ### What should I pack for the Brahmatal trek? For the Brahmatal trek, pack for snow and sub-zero nights; Trekkaro also emails a full checklist after booking. - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, padded jacket, poles, microspikes and gaiters are provided - **Clothes:** 2 sets of thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers, a waterproof shell, warm trousers and 3–4 pairs of socks - **Accessories:** woollen cap, balaclava, buff, two pairs of gloves, UV sunglasses (category 3 or 4) and SPF 50+ sunscreen - **Essentials:** headlamp, power bank, personal medicines and cash in small notes ### How do I book the Brahmatal trek with Trekkaro online? To book the Brahmatal trek, select your date, fill in the booking form and pay online; your booking is confirmed instantly. - **Confirmation:** booking details, the itinerary and the gear checklist are emailed to you - **Travel:** book your travel as soon as the booking shows as Paid in My Bookings ### Can the Brahmatal trek itinerary be changed, and does the end date change? Minor changes to the Brahmatal trek itinerary are possible, but the completion date must stay as scheduled. If something unforeseen happens on the trail, your trek leader suggests a suitable alternative plan. ### Can I book a private Brahmatal trek for my own group? Yes, Trekkaro offers fully customisable private Brahmatal treks for a group of any size, at your own pace. The price depends on group size, duration and the type of trek. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 13 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 20 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 27 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 4 Dec 2026 - … 90 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/brahmatal-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Chadar Trek (Frozen River) > Chadar Trek (Frozen River) is a 9-day difficult trek in Leh, Ladakh, reaching 3,400 m (11,110 ft). It covers about 60 km on foot and starts and ends at Leh. Best time: January to February. Trekkaro price: ₹25,500 per person + 5% GST, with free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles. Next batch: 9 Jan 2027 (9 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/chadar-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 9 days - **Difficulty:** Difficult - **Highest point:** 3,400 m / 11,110 ft - **Trekking distance:** 60 km - **Region:** Leh, Ladakh - **Start / end:** Leh - **Best time:** January to February - **Temperature:** In winter (January - February) - Day time temperature: -5°C to 0°C and Night time temperature: -30°C to -15°C - **Price:** ₹25,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles - **Next batch:** 9 Jan 2027 (9 upcoming) ## Overview Most trails are made of earth and rock. This one is made of water, frozen hard enough to carry you. In the depth of the Ladakh winter, the Zanskar River closes over with a thick sheet of ice known as the Chadar, the blanket, and for the remote villages of Zanskar it becomes the only way in and out. You step onto it in gumboots, testing each patch before you trust it, with towering cliffs on either side and the emerald green of the river showing against the white. In our experience, nothing else in Indian trekking feels quite like that first hour on the frozen Zanskar. The Chadar trek follows the frozen Zanskar River through the Zanskar region of Ladakh, walking on the ice for several days between towering cliffs and deep gorges. Along the way the river shows you frozen waterfalls hanging on the rock walls, a waterfall that never freezes even in sub-zero cold, small caves where local porters traditionally rest, and a stretch of gorge where the sun arrives for only an hour each morning. The goal is Nerak, the first village of Zanskar, and the frozen Nerak waterfall, a towering cascade turned into a sculpture of ice. Snow-covered landscapes surround you, and along the river you may spot blue sheep, ibex and even the elusive snow leopard. Over nine days, Trekkaro takes you from Leh onto the ice and up the gorge to Nerak, before the return to Leh. The Chadar trek is a 9-day (8-night), Difficult winter trek in the Leh district of Ladakh, covering about 60 km. It begins with three days in Leh, at about 3,500 m, for acclimatisation and the mandatory medical check, followed by four nights in camp beside the frozen river and a final night back in Leh. The walking starts at Shingra Koma (3,150 m), at a U-bend in the Zanskar, and the highest point of the trail is 3,400 m (11,110 ft) at Nerak. The altitude gain on the ice is small. The difficulty comes from the cold, with night temperatures as low as -30°C, and from the ice itself, which may not be stable at all times. The trek is compared to a journey through the Arctic, and we consider it one of the most demanding treks in India. In our experience, it is also one of the most extraordinary. ### Walking the Frozen Zanskar – What Makes the Chadar Trek Unmissable What sets the Chadar apart is simple: the river is both the trail and the view. Walking on it is a skill you learn on the trek itself. Gumboots are mandatory, and the first walk, about 3 km and 2 hours from Shingra Koma to the camp at Tsomo Paldar, is your lesson. The ice is not one surface but many. Some stretches are firm, some are thin, some are slippery, and the formations shift and change shape as you go. You learn to tell fragile ice from firm, you slip, you slow down, and little by little you start to read the river. By the time the long days begin, the strangeness has turned into concentration. Around you, the rock formations and icy patterns of the gorge keep pulling your eyes away from your feet. Then comes the day the whole trek walks towards. You leave Tibb Cave and follow the frozen Zanskar deeper into the gorge, past tall cliffs and through landscapes that feel almost otherworldly. You stop midway for a hot lunch. The hours pass at the pace of careful steps. Then the Nerak waterfall comes into view: a towering cascade, frozen completely, hanging from the rock as a single sculpture of ice. You stop in front of it and look up. Tonight you will sleep at Nerak, the coldest camp of the trek, where the temperature falls to -30°C. For now, standing in the gorge with a frozen waterfall above you and a frozen river beneath you, there is nothing to think about but where you are. The Chadar is also more than a spectacle. The frozen river is the winter lifeline of the Zanskar valley, the only route in and out for its remote villages, and the small caves along the bank where local porters traditionally rest give a glimpse into the rugged lifestyle of the people who make this journey. Nerak itself is the first village of Zanskar on the route, reached in the middle of winter by the same road its people use. We find that this is what gives the trek its weight. You are not walking a path made for trekkers; you are walking the winter road of a valley, in conditions that ask for stamina, balance and patience at every step, and reward them with a landscape in its deepest winter form. ### The Zanskar Gorge Itself The journey begins before the ice. The days of acclimatisation in Leh include visits to the Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery and Thiksey Monastery, which show the culture and history of Ladakh. The drive to the start passes Gurudwara Pathar Sahib, Magnetic Hill and the confluence of the Indus and Zanskar rivers before reaching Shingra Koma, where the Zanskar bends between dramatic cliffs. From the first camp at Tsomo Paldar, ringed by towering cliffs and the frozen river, the gorge becomes your whole world. The stretch from Tsomo Paldar to Tibb Cave is one of the most scenic of the trek. Over 14 km the trail climbs gradually, with no steep sections, beside the shimmering emerald-green water of the Zanskar, which stands out sharply against the frozen landscape. Frozen waterfalls hang on the cliffs, their origins unknown and tied to local legends, and among them is the waterfall that never freezes, even in sub-zero temperatures. On this stretch the gorge is so deep that direct sunlight reaches it only between about 9 and 10 AM. Beyond Tibb Cave, the way to Nerak runs through deep gorges and between tall cliffs. Under clear blue winter skies and snow-capped mountains, the Zanskar looks less like a river valley than a world carved out of rock and ice. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Chadar trek is graded Difficult, and the reason is the conditions, not the climbing. The trail gains little height and its highest point is 3,400 m, but you walk on ice in gumboots for several days, with daytime temperatures between -5°C and 0°C and nights between -15°C and -30°C. The first walk on the river is short, about 3 km in 2 hours. The hard days are the two long stages to Tibb Cave and Nerak, 13 to 14 km each and 6 to 7 hours of careful walking on surfaces that may be firm, thin or slippery. Unpredictable weather adds to the challenge, and the trek demands physical stamina and mental toughness as much as fitness. It is not a first trek: you should have experience of trekking in challenging terrain and be able to handle severe cold for several days and nights. We recommend at least 8 weeks of preparation before departure. Every trekker must also spend at least two days acclimatising in Leh and pass the mandatory medical check there before starting. Season: January to February, with the best window from mid-January to mid-February. ### Key Highlights of the Chadar Trek - **Walking on the Chadar** – several days on the frozen Zanskar River, on the thick sheet of ice whose name means blanket - **The frozen Nerak waterfall** – a towering cascade frozen into a sculpture of ice, the most awaited sight of the trek - **A waterfall that never freezes** – on the way to Tibb Cave, flowing even in sub-zero temperatures - **Emerald water against the ice** – the shimmering green of the Zanskar set against the frozen gorge - **One hour of sun** – on the Tibb Cave stretch, direct sunlight reaches the gorge only between about 9 and 10 AM - **Nerak, the first village of Zanskar** – reached in deep winter by the frozen river its people use, and the coldest camp of the trek at -30°C - **Towering cliffs and deep gorges** – with the chance to spot blue sheep, ibex and even the elusive snow leopard - **Leh before the ice** – the Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery and Thiksey Monastery during the acclimatisation days ### Best Time to Do the Chadar Trek The Chadar trek runs in January and February, the heart of the Ladakh winter. Its best window is from mid-January to mid-February, when the Zanskar River is completely frozen and the ice can be safely traversed. In this period the trek shows its most spectacular icy landscapes, under clear blue skies and snow-capped mountains. #### January – Deep Winter Sets the Ice The season opens in the deepest cold of the year. Temperatures as low as -30°C freeze the Zanskar into the thick sheet of ice that gives the trek its name, and from mid-January the river is completely frozen and the Chadar is ready to walk. The frozen waterfalls hang on the gorge walls, the emerald water of the river stands out against the white, and the clear winter skies make the cliffs and snow-capped mountains above the gorge sharp and bright. This is the Chadar in its classic form. - **Temperatures:** Day: -5°C to 0°C | Night: -30°C to -15°C - **Trail conditions:** River completely frozen from mid-January; firm, thin and slippery ice by turns; gumboots mandatory. - **Best for:** The classic deep-winter Chadar, frozen waterfalls and clear skies over the gorge. #### February – The Frozen River Holds Into February, the frozen river holds through to the middle of the month, with the same icy landscapes, frozen waterfalls and clear skies. The Nerak waterfall stands frozen as the goal of the trek, and nights in camp remain deeply cold. For trekkers whose winter leave falls in February, the first half of the month offers the full Chadar experience on a completely frozen Zanskar. - **Temperatures:** Day: -5°C to 0°C | Night: -30°C to -15°C - **Trail conditions:** River completely frozen through mid-February; long days on ice in gumboots. - **Best for:** The full frozen-river experience and the frozen Nerak waterfall, later in the season. #### Trekkaro Recommendation Book a batch that starts between mid-January and mid-February, when the Zanskar is completely frozen and the Chadar is at its safest and most spectacular. Within that window, choose January if you want the trek in its deepest winter form, or the first half of February if that suits your leave better. This is a short, high-demand window, so we recommend booking well in advance. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Arrival in Leh **Route Details:** **Arrival: Leh by flight | Altitude: 3,500 m (11,450 ft) | Briefing: 12:00 noon (mandatory) | Stay: Centrally heated hotel (twin or triple sharing)** The Chadar Trek begins with a flight into Leh. Just before touchdown the approach gives you aerial views of the snow-covered Himalaya and the rugged Ladakhi landscape. Leh sits at 3,500 m (11,450 ft), and the cold, thin air meets you the moment you step out. Keep your woollen cap and gloves handy. Check in to the centrally heated hotel; rooms have attached washrooms and hot water in buckets. At 12:00 noon the trek leader holds the mandatory orientation briefing on essential instructions, safety guidelines and acclimatisation. Bring your ID proof and 2 photographs; foreign nationals must carry their passport and visa. Keep your boarding pass as well, because it is required for the trek permission. After the briefing, rest indoors and let your body adjust. Avoid high passes and any physical activity today. Smoking and alcohol are strictly prohibited. Leh has the last reliable ATM and mobile network, and only postpaid SIMs work here. What to Expect: - Aerial views of the snow-covered Himalaya on the flight into Leh - Mandatory orientation briefing at 12:00 noon - Documents: ID proof and 2 photographs (passport and visa for foreign nationals); keep your boarding pass - Rest indoors – no high passes, no exertion, no smoking or alcohol - Last ATM and last mobile network (postpaid SIMs only) in Leh - Overnight: Centrally heated hotel in Leh (3,500 m / 11,450 ft) ### Day 2: Acclimatisation Day in Leh **Route Details:** **Rest day: Leh | Altitude: 3,500 m (11,450 ft) | Activity: short sightseeing tour (Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery, Thiksey Monastery) | Stay: Centrally heated hotel (twin or triple sharing)** Under the current regulations for the Chadar Trek, every trekker must spend at least two days in Leh before starting the trek. This is not a formality. Rest and gradual adaptation at 3,500 m reduce the risk of Acute Mountain Sickness (AMS) before you head out onto the frozen Zanskar, where nights fall far below freezing. The day is easy by design. A short sightseeing tour, included in the trek, takes you to the Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery and the Thiksey Monastery. These places show the culture and history of Ladakh and keep the day light without tiring you out. Walk slowly between stops and drink water regularly. The trek leaders also hold an orientation session for the Chadar preparation. Avoid very high passes and regions during acclimatisation, and remember that smoking and alcohol remain strictly prohibited. You stay in the same centrally heated hotel, with attached washrooms and hot water. What to Expect: - Mandatory acclimatisation in Leh to reduce the risk of AMS - Short sightseeing tour: Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery and Thiksey Monastery - Orientation session by the trek leaders for Chadar preparation - No high passes, no alcohol, no smoking - Mobile network (postpaid only) and ATM still available in Leh - Overnight: Centrally heated hotel in Leh (3,500 m / 11,450 ft) ### Day 3: Medical Test Day in Leh **Route Details:** **Medical check: Government Medical Camp, Leh | Altitude: 3,500 m (11,450 ft) | Tests: height, weight, blood pressure, oxygen level | Afternoon: insurance formalities | Stay: Centrally heated hotel (twin or triple sharing)** Today decides whether you walk on the Chadar. Start early and head straight to the Government Medical Camp for the mandatory health check: height, weight, blood pressure and oxygen level. Because of the heavy tourist rush the process can take 3 to 4 hours, so be on time and carry water and a snack for the queue. The results of the check-up determine whether you are medically fit to proceed with the trek. In the afternoon you complete the insurance formalities; high-altitude risk insurance is mandatory under ALTOA guidelines. The pre-medical check-up fee, rescue fees, wildlife and environmental charges, the ALTOA NOC and entry fees are paid directly to the authorities on the spot. Once the formalities are done, the evening is free. Stroll around Leh at an easy pace, enjoy the crisp mountain air and then get a good night in the heated hotel. Tomorrow you leave for the river. What to Expect: - Early start for the mandatory check at the Government Medical Camp - Tests: height, weight, blood pressure and oxygen level; a 3–4 hour wait is possible - Insurance formalities in the afternoon (high-altitude risk insurance is mandatory) - Medical, permit and NOC fees paid directly to the authorities - Free evening to walk around Leh - Overnight: Centrally heated hotel in Leh (3,500 m / 11,450 ft) ### Day 4: Leh to Shingra Koma, Trek to Tsomo Paldar **Route Details:** **Drive: Leh → Shingra Koma (75 km, 3–4 hrs) | Altitude: 3,150 m → 3,200 m (10,500 ft) | Distance: 3 km | Duration: 2 hrs | Terrain: frozen Zanskar River (the Chadar), in gumboots | Stay: Tents at Tsomo Paldar** After breakfast at the hotel you drive 75 km from Leh to Shingra Koma, about 3 to 4 hours. The road passes Gurudwara Pathar Sahib (3,500 m), Magnetic Hill (3,350 m) and the confluence of the Indus and the Zanskar (3,100 m). Look out for the meeting of the two rivers; it is your first sight of the Zanskar you will be walking on. Shingra Koma sits at a U-bend in the Zanskar River, among dramatic cliffs, at 3,150 m (10,300 ft). This is where you step onto the Chadar for the first time. Chadar means blanket, the name for the sheet of ice that covers the river in winter. Gumboots are mandatory, and walking on ice in them takes practice. The first walk is short, 3 km in about 2 hours, and its real purpose is to teach you the ice. Expect slips and slow progress at first. Keep your knees soft, take short steps and keep your weight over your feet. With patience you learn to tell fragile ice from firm. Follow the line your guide takes and step where the people ahead have stepped. The rock formations and patterns in the ice around you make the slow pace easy to accept. A hot lunch is served on the way, before you reach Tsomo Paldar at 3,200 m (10,500 ft), your first camp on the river. Tents are on triple sharing, with towering cliffs around you and the frozen Zanskar beside camp. Night temperatures on the Chadar range from -15 to -30°C, so change into warm, dry layers as soon as you stop. Trekkaro provides sub-zero sleeping bags for the camping nights. What to Expect: - 75 km drive via Pathar Sahib, Magnetic Hill and the Indus–Zanskar confluence - First steps on the Chadar at Shingra Koma (3,150 m / 10,300 ft), at a U-bend of the Zanskar - Gumboots mandatory – learn to tell fragile ice from firm - Short 3 km, 2-hour walk with a hot lunch on the way - Riverside camp below towering cliffs - Overnight: Tents at Tsomo Paldar (3,200 m / 10,500 ft) ### Day 5: Tsomo Paldar to Tibb Cave **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,200 m → 3,350 m (10,950 ft) | Distance: 14 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: frozen river, gradual gain with no steep climbs | Stay: Tents at Tibb Cave** Today is long but gentle. You cover 14 km on the frozen Zanskar, and the trail rises only gradually, from 10,500 ft to 10,950 ft, with no steep climbs. The challenge is time on the ice. Six to seven hours in gumboots on slippery surfaces is tiring in its own way, so keep your pace even and take short pauses rather than long stops in the cold. This is one of the most scenic stretches of the Chadar Trek. You walk beside the Zanskar, where emerald-green water shimmers against the frozen landscape. Frozen waterfalls hang on the cliffs along the way, their sources unknown and wrapped in local legends. One waterfall here never freezes, even in sub-zero temperatures, and it remains a mystery to trekkers and locals alike. Sunlight reaches the river only between 9 and 10 AM on this stretch, so the hour of sun is something to look forward to. Along the trail you also pass small caves where local porters traditionally rest, a glimpse into their rugged way of life. Keep reading the ice the way you learnt yesterday and stay on the line your guide picks. A hot lunch is served on the way. The day ends at the Tibb Cave campsite at 3,350 m, where you settle into triple-sharing tents beside the frozen river. Change out of damp socks as soon as you reach camp and keep your gloves dry for the evening. What to Expect: - Long 14 km day with gradual gain and no steep climbs - Emerald-green Zanskar water against the white ice - Frozen waterfalls, and one waterfall that never freezes - Sunlight on the river only between 9 and 10 AM - Small caves used by local porters as rest stops; hot lunch on the way - Overnight: Tents at Tibb Cave (3,350 m / 10,950 ft) ### Day 6: Tibb Cave to Nerak **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 3,400 m (11,100 ft) | Distance: 13 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: frozen river through deep gorges and between tall cliffs | Stay: Tents at Nerak** This is the most awaited day of the Chadar Trek. Over 13 km you walk the frozen Zanskar through deep gorges and between tall cliffs, in a landscape that feels otherworldly. The ice changes with the temperature, so keep reading the surface the way you have learnt over the last two days and stay on the line your guide picks. Midway you stop for a hot lunch, then continue towards Nerak. The highlight of the trek waits here: the frozen Nerak waterfall, a towering cascade frozen solid into a sculpture of ice. It is the most iconic sight on the Chadar and draws trekkers from around the world. Give yourself time with it before you move on to camp. Nerak is the first village of the Zanskar region, and the campsite gives you a glimpse of life in this remote, frozen valley. If time permits, a short visit to Nerak village can be arranged. In winter the frozen river is the only way in and out of these villages, which helps you understand what the Chadar means to the people who live here. Be ready for the cold. Nerak is the coldest campsite of the trek, and night temperatures can drop to -30°C. Proper layering, insulated gloves, a woollen cap and thermals are essential tonight. Eat a full meal, change into dry layers and get into your sub-zero sleeping bag early. What to Expect: - 13 km through deep gorges and tall cliffs on the frozen Zanskar - Hot lunch break midway - The frozen Nerak waterfall, the most iconic sight of the trek - Nerak, the first village of Zanskar – short village visit if time permits - Coldest campsite of the trek, with nights down to -30°C - Overnight: Tents at Nerak (3,400 m / 11,100 ft) ### Day 7: Nerak to Tibb Cave **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,400 m → 3,350 m (10,950 ft) | Distance: 13 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: frozen river, return leg on changing ice | Stay: Tents at Tibb Cave** Today you turn back down the river and begin the return leg. Do not expect a repeat of the walk up. The Chadar changes all the time: ice you crossed yesterday may have cracked or vanished, and new layers form overnight. The route can look completely different, and that constant change is both the challenge and the charm of this trek. The scenery is just as striking on the way back. Snow-covered cliffs rise on both sides, emerald-green water flows beneath the ice and frozen waterfalls hang like glass sculptures. Along the way you say goodbye to the locals and porters you have met in the valley, a warm farewell to the people of the Zanskar. A hot lunch break en route gives you warmth and energy in the freezing conditions. You will be tired by now, and tired legs are less careful. Keep the same discipline you had on the way up: short steps, a steady pace and your eyes on the ice. Treat any section that looks different with care, and follow your guide’s line. By evening you reach Tibb Cave at 3,350 m for your final night in tents. Take a few minutes outside before bed. The valley is silent, the stars are bright on a clear night, and you can look back on days of walking one of the most iconic trails in the Himalaya. What to Expect: - Return leg on a Chadar that has changed since the way up - Snow-covered cliffs, emerald water beneath the ice and frozen waterfalls - Farewell to locals and porters along the way - Hot lunch break en route - Final night in tents on the Zanskar - Overnight: Tents at Tibb Cave (3,350 m / 10,950 ft) ### Day 8: Tibb Cave to Shingra Koma, Drive to Leh **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 3,150 m (10,300 ft) | Distance: 17 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: frozen river | Drive: Shingra Koma → Leh (75 km, 3–4 hrs) | Stay: Centrally heated hotel in Leh** The final day on the ice starts early. The trail may feel familiar, but it is never quite the same. The ice sheet shifts with every change in temperature, so sections that were firm may now be fragile, and rocks and the emerald water of the Zanskar show up in new forms. At 17 km this is the longest day of the trek, so keep your focus to the last step. The walk back to Shingra Koma is your last chance to take in the frozen wilderness, admire the sheer cliffs and the patterns in the ice, and take a few final photographs. Even on a return journey, the landscape looks entirely different from the way up. A hot lunch is served en route, a welcome break from the biting cold. At Shingra Koma vehicles wait for the drive of about 75 km back to Leh. The road retraces the route through the confluence of the Zanskar and the Indus, Magnetic Hill and Gurudwara Pathar Sahib. Sit back and let your legs rest. By evening you are back at the hotel in Leh, centrally heated and with running hot water. After days in tents and nights far below freezing, a hot shower and a warm room feel like pure luxury. It is the right place to rest, celebrate and look back on your days on the frozen Zanskar. What to Expect: - Early start for the longest day on the ice: 17 km - A Chadar that keeps changing with the temperature - Hot lunch on the way to Shingra Koma - 75 km drive to Leh via the Indus–Zanskar confluence and Magnetic Hill - Centrally heated hotel with running hot water - Overnight: Hotel in Leh (3,500 m / 11,450 ft) ### Day 9: Departure from Leh **Route Details:** **Departure: Leh | Hotel check-out: 10:00 AM | Airport cab: not included; we help you book one** Your Chadar Trek ends in Leh today. Hotel check-out is at 10:00 AM, so pack the night before and leave yourself an unhurried morning. Airport transfers are not included in the trek fee: we help you book a cab from the Trekkaro hotel in Leh to the airport, paid directly to the driver. If you have time to extend your stay, Ladakh has plenty more to see. Visit the historic Leh Palace, take in the panoramic views from the Shanti Stupa, or make a scenic trip to Pangong Lake. Try authentic Ladakhi cuisine before you leave and spend some time with the local culture that makes this region so distinct. Whichever way you go, you leave having walked one of the most unusual trails in the Himalaya, on a river that is only a path for a short window each winter, from mid-January to mid-February. What to Expect: - Hotel check-out at 10:00 AM - Cab to Leh airport: not included; we help you book one, paid directly to the driver - Optional extensions: Leh Palace, Shanti Stupa, Pangong Lake - Authentic Ladakhi cuisine before you fly out - Trek ends at Leh ## Inclusions #### 1. Accommodation - Day 1, Day 2, Day 3 and Day 8: centrally heated guesthouse rooms in Leh with attached washrooms, on a twin-sharing basis (triple in rare cases) - Hot water in buckets on Day 1, Day 2 and Day 3; running hot water in taps on Day 8 - Day 4 to Day 7: camping during the trek - Extra luggage can be kept safely at Leh while you are on the trek #### 2. Meals - Vegetarian and egg meals from Day 4 breakfast to Day 8 lunch #### 3. Transport - Leh to the trekking point on Day 4 and the trekking point back to Leh on Day 8, as per the itinerary #### 4. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge), plus ice axes and ropes - First aid, oxygen cylinders, a medical kit and stretchers at all campsites for emergencies #### 5. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by certified local guides - Guided visit in Leh to the Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery and Thiksey Monastery ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: pick-up and drop-off at Leh Airport - We help you book a cab from Leh Airport to the Trekkaro Leh Hotel on arrival, and from the hotel to Leh Airport on Day 9, paid directly to the driver - Flights to and from Leh, booked by you #### 2. Backpack Offloading (optional) - Porter to carry your personal luggage: ₹5,000 + 5% GST #### 3. Personal Equipment - Trekking shoes, jacket and trekking poles: bring your own (microspikes and gaiters are provided free) #### 4. Trek Insurance - High-altitude risk insurance is mandatory before joining (as per ALTOA guidelines) and is not included #### 5. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Meals in Leh - Mandatory fees paid directly to the authorities on the spot: pre-medical check-up, rescue fees, wildlife/environmental charges, ALTOA NOC and entry fees (approximately ₹6,000–₹8,000) - Personal shopping, tips or additional services - Charges for evacuation, hospitalisation or medical emergencies - Additional costs from decisions made by local authorities or administration ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Kushok Bakula Rimpochee Airport (IXL), Leh, about 4 km from Leh town, with flights from Delhi and other major cities; international trekkers can fly into Delhi and connect to Leh. In winter flying is the only way to reach Leh, and January–February is peak Chadar season, so book your flights early. **From Leh Airport to the hotel:** airport transfers are not included in the trek fee; we help you book a cab from Leh Airport to the Trekkaro Leh Hotel, paid directly to the driver. You spend the first three days in Leh to acclimatise and complete the mandatory medical check; the drive from Leh to the trek start (Day 4) and back (Day 8) is included. **Return:** On Day 9 we help you book a cab from the Trekkaro Leh Hotel to Leh Airport (airport transfers are not included in the trek fee; paid directly to the driver); hotel check-out is 10:00 AM. Book your flight out of Leh for Day 9. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** there is no railway to Leh. The nearest stations – Jammu Tawi, Chandigarh and Pathankot – all need a long road journey, and in winter the roads to Leh are closed by snow, so the only way in is to fly. If you travel by train, go to Delhi (or another city with flights to Leh) and take a flight from there. **From Leh Airport to the hotel:** airport transfers are not included in the trek fee; we help you book a cab from Leh Airport to the Trekkaro Leh Hotel, paid directly to the driver. You spend the first three days in Leh to acclimatise and complete the mandatory medical check; the drive from Leh to the trek start (Day 4) and back (Day 8) is included. **Return:** On Day 9 we help you book a cab from the Trekkaro Leh Hotel to Leh Airport (airport transfers are not included in the trek fee; paid directly to the driver); hotel check-out is 10:00 AM. Book your flight out of Leh for Day 9 and your onward train from the city you land in. ### By road **By road:** not possible in the Chadar season. The Manali–Leh and Srinagar–Leh highways close by October or November and stay shut until late April or early May, so you must fly into Leh (Kushok Bakula Rimpochee Airport, about 4 km from town). **From Leh Airport to the hotel:** airport transfers are not included in the trek fee; we help you book a cab from Leh Airport to the Trekkaro Leh Hotel, paid directly to the driver. You spend the first three days in Leh to acclimatise and complete the mandatory medical check; the drive from Leh to the trek start (Day 4) and back (Day 8) is included. **Return:** On Day 9 we help you book a cab from the Trekkaro Leh Hotel to Leh Airport (airport transfers are not included in the trek fee; paid directly to the driver); hotel check-out is 10:00 AM. Book your flight out of Leh for Day 9. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Leh is the last place with ATMs; there are none on the trail - Carry enough cash for the on-the-spot fees and personal expenses - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Leh has the last stable mobile network, and only postpaid SIMs work in Ladakh - Once you leave Leh, the signal is scarce or unavailable - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Chadar trek, and where does it start? The Chadar trek is in Leh district, Ladakh, on the frozen Zanskar River in the Zanskar region. You fly into Leh, spend three days there, then drive 75 km to Shingra Koma, where the walk on the ice begins. The trek follows the river through deep gorges as far as Nerak, the first village of Zanskar, and returns the same way. ### How many days does the Chadar trek take from start to finish? The Chadar trek takes 9 days (8 nights) from Leh to Leh, with 5 trekking days on the frozen river covering about 60 km. - **Days 1–3:** arrival, acclimatisation and the mandatory medical test in Leh - **Days 4–8:** trekking on the Chadar from Shingra Koma to Nerak and back, 3–17 km a day - **Day 9:** departure from Leh, with hotel check-out at 10:00 AM - **Longest day:** Day 8, 17 km back to Shingra Koma, then the drive to Leh ### What is the altitude of the Chadar trek? The highest point of the Chadar trek is Nerak, at about 3,400 m (11,100 ft). Leh, where you spend the first three nights, is actually higher at 3,500 m (11,450 ft). - **Shingra Koma (start):** 3,150 m (10,300 ft) - **Tsomo Paldar camp:** 3,200 m (10,500 ft) - **Tibb Cave camp:** 3,350 m (10,950 ft) - **Nerak camp:** 3,400 m (11,100 ft) ### What is the difficulty level of the Chadar trek? The Chadar trek is graded Difficult. There are no steep climbs, but you walk long days on ice in extreme cold, with nights falling to -30°C. - **Ice:** the Chadar keeps changing with the temperature, with slippery, slushy and fragile sections - **Cold:** the main challenge, with frostbite and hypothermia as real risks - **Long days:** 14 km, 13 km, 13 km and 17 km on Days 5 to 8 ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Chadar trek? The Chadar trek is graded Difficult, so it is not an easy first trek, but prior trekking experience is not mandatory; it is an advantage. You need good fitness and must be ready for extreme cold and slippery, unstable ice. Every trekker must also complete the mandatory medical test in Leh on Day 3 before going onto the river. ### What fitness level do I need for the Chadar trek? For the Chadar trek you need good endurance, strength and cardiovascular fitness to walk 5–7 hours a day on ice in extreme cold. - **Endurance:** long days of 13–17 km on the frozen river - **Balance:** trekking poles and gumboots on slippery ice - **Doctor:** consult a doctor before the trek, as a medical test in Leh is mandatory - **Fitness test:** take the free 2-minute Am I Ready? test on the Trekkaro website ### When is the best time for the Chadar trek? The best time for the Chadar trek is mid-January to mid-February, when the Zanskar River freezes into a thick sheet of ice. The trek runs only in January and February. - **Temperatures:** -5°C to 0°C by day and -15°C to -30°C at night - **Flights:** this is peak season, so book your flights to Leh early ### What are the ice and snow conditions on the Chadar trek? On the Chadar trek you walk on the frozen Zanskar River, and the ice changes from day to day with the temperature: firm in places, fragile, slushy or wet in others. - **Gumboots:** mandatory; on Day 4 you learn to tell fragile ice from firm - **Return leg:** the Chadar has changed by the time you walk back - **Snowfall:** a windproof, waterproof outer layer protects you in wind and snow ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Chadar trek? On the Chadar trek, day temperatures are -5°C to 0°C and nights fall to between -15°C and -30°C. Nerak is the coldest campsite, with nights down to -30°C. - **Layers:** 5 warm layers: thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers and a heavy padded or down jacket - **Face and hands:** a balaclava, a woollen cap, and fleece plus waterproof gloves - **Sun:** in the gorges, sunlight reaches the river only between about 9 and 10 AM ### What can you see on the Chadar trek? The best-known sight on the Chadar trek is the frozen Nerak waterfall, along with emerald-green Zanskar water flowing beneath white ice. - **Gorges:** deep gorges and tall, snow-covered cliffs - **Waterfalls:** frozen waterfalls, and one that never freezes - **Nerak village:** the first village of Zanskar, visited if time permits - **On the drive:** Pathar Sahib, Magnetic Hill and the Indus–Zanskar confluence ### What is the terrain like on the Chadar trek? The Chadar trek is walked on the frozen Zanskar River in gumboots, with gradual gains and no steep climbs. - **Ice:** a mix of firm, fragile, slushy and wet ice that changes with the temperature - **Gorges:** narrow sections between tall cliffs on the way to Nerak - **Rest stops:** small caves used by local porters along the river ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Chadar trek? Yes, altitude sickness is a risk on the Chadar trek because you fly straight into Leh at 3,500 m (11,450 ft). That is why Days 1 and 2 are for rest and acclimatisation in Leh. - **In Leh:** rest indoors on Day 1, with no exertion, smoking or alcohol - **Cold injuries:** frostbite and hypothermia are risks; watch for numbness, skin discolouration and shivering - **On the trek:** oxygen cylinders, a medical kit and stretchers are kept at all campsites - **Before you go:** consult your doctor about altitude sickness ### What is the medical test for the Chadar trek? Every trekker on the Chadar trek must take a mandatory medical check at the Government Medical Camp in Leh on Day 3, which tests height, weight, blood pressure and oxygen level. - **Waiting time:** start early, as a 3–4 hour wait is possible - **Fee:** paid on the spot, as part of the approx. ₹6,000–8,000 in mandatory fees - **Same day:** insurance formalities are completed in the afternoon ### How do I reach the start of the Chadar trek? In winter the only way to reach the Chadar trek is to fly to Leh (Kushok Bakula Rimpochee Airport, IXL), about 4 km from Leh town. The roads to Leh are closed by snow from about October or November to late April or May, and there is no railway. - **Flights:** from Delhi and other major cities; book early, as January–February is peak season - **Airport to hotel:** not included; we help you book a cab, paid directly to the driver - **Briefing:** a mandatory orientation briefing at 12:00 noon on Day 1 - **Return:** book your flight out of Leh for Day 9 ### Is transport from Leh included in the Chadar trek fee? Yes, the drives between Leh and the trek start are included in the Chadar trek: Leh to Shingra Koma on Day 4 and back to Leh on Day 8 (75 km, 3–4 hours each way). - **Not included:** airport transfers to and from the Trekkaro Leh Hotel; we help you book a cab, paid directly to the driver - **Day 2:** the Leh sightseeing tour is included ### Where do we stay on the Chadar trek? On the Chadar trek you stay 4 nights in a centrally heated hotel in Leh (Days 1, 2, 3 and 8) and 4 nights in tents beside the river (Days 4 to 7). - **Leh:** twin sharing (triple in rare cases), with attached washrooms - **Camps:** Tsomo Paldar, Tibb Cave (twice) and Nerak - **Sleeping bags:** tents and sub-zero sleeping bags are provided for the camping nights ### What is the group size on the Chadar trek and who leads it? Chadar trek batches have a maximum of 20 trekkers and are led by experienced trek leaders supported by certified local guides. The trek leaders hold an orientation session in Leh on Day 2 to prepare the group for the Chadar. ### Is the Chadar trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Chadar trek is safe for women trekking alone. Women share rooms and tents only with other women, and experienced trek leaders and local guides stay with the group. Only postpaid SIMs work in Ladakh, so arrange one before you arrive to stay in touch while in Leh. ### What food is served on the Chadar trek? The Chadar trek includes nutritious vegetarian and egg meals from breakfast on Day 4 to lunch on Day 8, with a hot lunch on the way every trekking day. - **In Leh:** meals in Leh are not included - **Snacks:** dry fruits, energy bars, chocolates and ORS sachets - **Lunch box:** bring a reusable one ### What about drinking water on the Chadar trek? On the Chadar trek water freezes quickly, so carry two 1 L bottles, at least one of them insulated. The air is very dry, so keep drinking through the day and add ORS sachets to stay hydrated in the cold. ### Do I need my own trekking gear for the Chadar trek? Yes. On the Chadar trek you bring your own gumboots, trekking shoes, jacket and poles; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, with no deposit and no charge. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Chadar trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Chadar trek costs ₹5,000 + 5% GST, as porter charges are not part of the trek fee. If you offload, carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, warm layers and snacks. ### Is there a doctor on the Chadar trek? A doctor is not listed in the Chadar trek inclusions, but medical support is kept at all campsites: first aid, oxygen cylinders, a medical kit and stretchers for emergencies. - **Medical check:** a mandatory test at the Government Medical Camp in Leh on Day 3 - **Your kit:** your regular and prescribed medicines plus basic first aid - **Emergency costs:** evacuation and hospital charges are not included ### What documents do I need for the Chadar trek? For the Chadar trek, carry an original government photo ID with a photocopy and 2 photographs; foreign nationals need their passport and visa. Keep your boarding pass too. - **ID:** passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID - **Insurance:** high-altitude risk insurance, mandatory as per ALTOA guidelines - **Waterproof pouch:** keep everything dry, as your ID is needed for permits and registration ### What permits and fees are needed for the Chadar trek? The Chadar trek needs an ALTOA NOC and permits. The pre-medical check-up, rescue fees, wildlife and environmental charges, ALTOA NOC and entry fees come to approx. ₹6,000–8,000, paid directly to the authority on the spot. These fees are not part of the trek price, so withdraw enough cash in Leh before Day 3. ### Is travel insurance mandatory for the Chadar trek in Ladakh? Yes, high-altitude risk insurance is mandatory before joining the Chadar trek, as per ALTOA guidelines, and it is not part of the trek package. The insurance formalities are completed in Leh on the afternoon of Day 3, after the medical check. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Chadar trek? On the Chadar trek, Leh is the last place with an ATM and mobile network, and only postpaid SIMs work in Ladakh. Once you leave Leh, there are no ATMs and signal is scarce or unavailable. - **Cash:** enough for the on-the-spot fees, meals in Leh and personal expenses - **Calls:** finish important calls and tell your family about limited connectivity before Day 4 - **Power bank:** keep it in an inner pocket, as batteries drain fast in the cold ### Are there washrooms and hot water on the Chadar trek? Yes, in Leh: your hotel rooms have attached washrooms, with hot water in buckets on Days 1 to 3 and running hot water on Day 8. From Day 4 to Day 7 you camp on the river, so pack biodegradable toiletries, hand sanitiser and bags to carry your waste back; do not bring wet wipes, as they are not biodegradable. ### Can I leave extra luggage in Leh during the Chadar trek? Yes, on the Chadar trek you can leave extra luggage safely in Leh while you are on the river. Take only what you need in a 50–60 L backpack, and keep one dry spare set of clothes sealed in a waterproof bag. ### Is Leh sightseeing included in the Chadar trek? Yes, the Chadar trek includes a guided visit to the Hall of Fame, Shey Monastery and Thiksey Monastery on Day 2, the acclimatisation day in Leh. Leh Palace, Shanti Stupa and Pangong Lake are optional extensions after the trek. ### Why is the trek on the frozen Zanskar River called Chadar? The Chadar trek is named after the thick sheet of ice, known as the Chadar, that covers the Zanskar River in winter. For several days you walk on this frozen river. In winter the frozen river is the only way in and out of the remote Zanskar villages. ### What is the minimum age for the Chadar trek? The minimum age for the Chadar trek is 14 years, because of the extreme cold on the frozen river, where nights drop to -30°C. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 9 Jan 2027 to 16 Jan 2027 - 10 Jan 2027 to 17 Jan 2027 - 16 Jan 2027 to 23 Jan 2027 - 17 Jan 2027 to 24 Jan 2027 - 23 Jan 2027 to 31 Jan 2027 - 30 Jan 2027 to 7 Feb 2027 - 6 Feb 2027 to 14 Feb 2027 - 13 Feb 2027 to 21 Feb 2027 - 20 Feb 2027 to 28 Feb 2027 --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/chadar-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Chopta Chandrashila Trek > Chopta Chandrashila Trek is a 5-day moderate trek in Rudraprayag, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,962 m (13,000 ft). It covers about 30 km on foot and starts at Sari and ends at Baniyakund. Best time: October to June. Trekkaro price: ₹8,250 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (48 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/deoriatal-chandrashila-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-19. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,962 m / 13,000 ft - **Trekking distance:** 30 km - **Region:** Rudraprayag, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Sari / Baniyakund - **Best time:** October to June - **Temperature:** Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 8°C to 14°C, Night -10°C to -6°C | Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 13°C to 17°C, Night around 0°C | Summer (May-Jun): Day 18°C to 24°C, Night 3°C to 8°C | Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day 10°C to 15°C, Night around 0°C - **Price:** ₹8,250 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (48 upcoming) ## Overview On a still, clear day at Deoriatal, the Chaukhamba massif appears twice: once on the skyline, and once again in the water at your feet. You do not simply stop to look at it. You camp beside it, and watch the reflection hold as the forest around the lake goes quiet for the night. Two days later the same mountain is in front of you again, this time as one summit in a full circle of snow peaks seen from the top of Chandrashila. Between the lake and the summit lie a forest, a meadow and an ancient stone temple. The Chopta Chandrashila trek (Deoriatal to Tungnath and Chandrashila) joins four of Garhwal’s classic sights on one short route. Deoriatal Lake at 2,390 m (7,841 ft), ringed by oak, rhododendron and maple, with the Chaukhamba massif mirrored in its surface. Rohini Bugyal, an open alpine meadow that turns red and pink with rhododendrons in spring and lies under snow in winter. Tungnath Temple at 3,680 m (12,073 ft), one of the revered Panch Kedar shrines. And Chandrashila Peak at 3,962 m (13,000 ft), where Nanda Devi, Trishul, Chaukhamba, Bandarpoonch and the Kedarnath peaks stand together in a 360° panorama. Five days and about 30 km on foot are enough to see all of it. The Chopta Chandrashila trek (Deoriatal to Tungnath and Chandrashila) is a moderate-grade Himalayan trek in the Rudraprayag district of Uttarakhand. It begins at Sari village (2,012 m / 6,601 ft), a quiet Garhwali basecamp, and reaches its highest point on the summit of Chandrashila at 3,962 m (13,000 ft). The summit day starts from Chopta (2,679 m / 8,790 ft), known as the Mini Switzerland of Uttarakhand, and follows the pilgrim path to Tungnath, known as the highest Shiva temple in the world, before the final climb to the top. In our experience, Chandrashila is one of the most rewarding summits in Uttarakhand for the effort it asks of you. ### A Lake, a Temple and a Summit – What Makes the Deoriatal-Chandrashila Trek Unmissable The Chopta Chandrashila trek (Deoriatal to Tungnath and Chandrashila) is built in layers, and each walking day adds a new one. The first is the lake. The trail from Sari climbs only 3 km through oak, rhododendron and maple, and snow peaks begin to show through the trees before the forest opens around Deoriatal. The lake is steeped in mythology and local folklore, and it has the stillness to match. On a clear day the water holds the Chaukhamba massif so sharply that the landscape seems to exist twice, once above the shoreline and once below it. Because the walk takes only 2–3 hours, you reach the lake with time to spare. You walk along the water as the light changes. You watch the peak settle into the surface while the evening cools and the forest falls silent. On a clear night the stars appear in the lake as well as in the sky. In our experience it is the right way to begin a trek: unhurried, with time to arrive properly in the mountains. The second layer is faith. Summit day begins with a short drive from Baniyakund to Chopta, and from there the trail climbs through rhododendron and oak forest into wide alpine meadows. This is a pilgrim path as much as a trekking trail, and Tungnath draws devotees and trekkers alike. The temple stands at 3,680 m (12,073 ft), built of ancient stone and set against a wall of high mountains. Then comes the third layer: the summit. Above Tungnath, Chandrashila is only about 1 km away, but the gradient is steep and the altitude makes itself felt. You leave the temple behind. You climb slowly, stopping more than you expected. The horizon widens with every few steps. Then the ground stops rising, the slope falls away on every side, and there is nothing left above you but sky. Nanda Devi, Trishul, Chaukhamba, Bandarpoonch and the Kedarnath peaks stand in a full circle around you. For a few minutes, very little needs to be said. You retrace your steps past Tungnath, descend to Chopta and return to Baniyakund (2,610 m / 8,562 ft), a meadow camp you already know from the night before. After the enclosed, mirror-still quiet of Deoriatal, Baniyakund feels wide and open, with the sun dropping behind snow-clad summits at the end of the day. Two very different nights, one beside water and one on an open meadow, with a summit between them that, in our experience, repays every step of the climb. ### The Forest Itself Between the lake and the summit, this is a forest trek, and the forest is never just the way to somewhere else. The longest day on the route, about 16 km from Deoriatal to Baniyakund, runs through the oak, maple and rhododendron of the Kedarnath Wildlife Sanctuary. The trail begins with gentle climbs and then turns into rolling ground with some steep descents. Keep an eye on the clearings: this is country where you have a chance of seeing the Himalayan Monal, the colourful state bird of Uttarakhand. Through the gaps in the trees, the Chaukhamba massif and Mount Kedar rise above the ridges for much of the day. Partway through, the forest breaks open onto Rohini Bugyal, a broad alpine meadow and one of the high points of the trek. In spring it is lit with fiery red and pink rhododendrons; in winter the same slopes lie under an even cover of snow. Of everything on this trek, the forest changes most with the season: flowering in spring, clear and open under autumn skies, white and silent in winter. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Chopta Chandrashila trek (Deoriatal to Tungnath and Chandrashila) is graded Moderate. Fit beginners can do it, but it is more than a gentle walk. The three walking days differ sharply: 3 km in 2–3 hours to Deoriatal, about 16 km in 7–8 hours on rolling forest trail to Baniyakund, and about 11 km in 8–9 hours on summit day. Summit day is the hard one, with about 1,352 m (4,438 ft) of height gain between Baniyakund and Chandrashila, the same height back down, and a steep final kilometre above Tungnath. The long forest day tests you differently, with steep descents that tire the knees. Basic fitness, such as walking 4–5 km a day with a small backpack, is the minimum; good stamina and leg strength make the trek far more enjoyable, especially on steeper or snowy sections. We recommend 6–8 weeks of preparation. Minimum age: 8 years; trekkers under 18 come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor’s medical certificate. Daily trekking hours: 2–9 hours. Season: January to June and October to December. ### Key Highlights of the Deoriatal-Chandrashila Trek - **Deoriatal Lake (2,390 m / 7,841 ft)** – a sharp reflection of the Chaukhamba massif on a clear day, with your camp on the lakeshore - **Chandrashila summit (3,962 m / 13,000 ft)** – a 360° panorama of Nanda Devi, Trishul, Chaukhamba, Bandarpoonch and the Kedarnath peaks - **Tungnath Temple (3,680 m / 12,073 ft)** – an ancient stone shrine to Lord Shiva, one of the Panch Kedar and known as the highest Shiva temple in the world - **Rohini Bugyal** – an open alpine meadow, red and pink with rhododendrons in spring and snow-covered in winter - **Kedarnath Wildlife Sanctuary forests** – oak, maple and rhododendron full of birdlife, with a chance of seeing the Himalayan Monal - **Chaukhamba and Mount Kedar** – in view above the forest ridges for much of the long day to Baniyakund - **Baniyakund meadow camp (2,610 m / 8,562 ft)** – a wide, open campsite where the sun sets behind snow-clad summits - **A trek for three seasons** – rhododendrons in spring, clear skies in autumn and a snow trek to the summit in winter ### Best Time to Do the Deoriatal-Chandrashila Trek The Chopta Chandrashila trek (Deoriatal to Tungnath and Chandrashila) runs from October right through to June, and across that long window it is really three different treks. The lake and the summit stay the same, but the forest, the meadows and the trail underfoot change completely from one season to the next. #### October to December – Autumn into Early Winter (Clear Skies) Autumn opens the season with clear skies and unobstructed mountain views. The snow peaks of Garhwal stand sharp against the sky from the lakeshore, the forest ridges and the summit. In our experience this is the most dependable time for the Chaukhamba reflection in Deoriatal and the full circle of peaks from Chandrashila. As December approaches the nights grow colder and winter begins to return to the upper trail. - **Temperatures:** October–November: Day: 10°C to 15°C | Night: around 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear trails and open views; colder towards December as winter returns. - **Best for:** Sharp mountain views, the Chaukhamba reflection and the clearest summit panorama. #### January to March – Snow Season Snow can reach the higher sections from December, and patches can stay on the summit into April. In the heart of winter, from January to March, snow covers the meadows, the forest and the summit trail, and this becomes the season for a true snow trek to Chandrashila Peak. Rohini Bugyal lies under an even white cover, and the climb above Tungnath turns into a slow, deliberate walk up a white slope. It is the coldest and most demanding time on the trek. For trekkers who want a snow-covered summit without going to very high altitude, we find this the most rewarding window of the year. - **Temperatures:** December–February: Day: 8°C to 14°C | Night: -10°C to -6°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the meadows, forest trail and summit slopes. Slower going every day. - **Best for:** A winter snow trek, snow-covered meadows and a white summit. #### April to June – Rhododendron Season Spring brings pleasant weather and the rhododendrons into bloom. In April and May the forests and the slopes of Rohini Bugyal flush red and pink, and the walk through the sanctuary is at its most colourful. Days are mild and nights at camp are cool rather than bitter, which makes the long forest day and the summit climb far more comfortable. We find this the easiest season for a first Himalayan summit. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 24°C | Night: 0°C to 8°C - **Trail conditions:** Pleasant walking weather on forest trail and meadow; rhododendrons in flower. - **Best for:** Rhododendron forests, Rohini Bugyal in bloom and comfortable conditions for first-time trekkers. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For a first Himalayan trek in the most comfortable conditions, book an April to June batch, ideally April or May when the rhododendrons are in bloom. For the clearest views of Chaukhamba in the lake and the widest summit panorama, choose October to December. For a full snow trek to Chandrashila, January to March is our pick, provided you are ready for colder nights and slower days on the trail. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Sari **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Sari (~185 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 313 m → 2,012 m (6,601 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a road day from Rishikesh (313 m) to Sari village, the base camp of the trek. Leave early, around 7:00 AM, and you reach Sari by evening without rushing. The 185 km drive takes 8 to 9 hours and follows the river valleys of Garhwal, past the sacred confluences at Devprayag and Rudraprayag and through the town of Srinagar. Rudraprayag is the last reliable ATM before Sari. Withdraw enough cash there, as ATMs beyond it are unavailable or unreliable. After the river towns, the road climbs through Himalayan villages, green valleys and terraced fields. Sari is a small, peaceful village and a good place to rest before the walking begins. You check into a homestay or guesthouse on a triple or quad sharing basis, and dinner is served there. Sari has a few small shops for basic trekking items, but we recommend you bring everything you need. Repack your daypack, drink plenty of water and sleep early. What to Expect: - Early start from Rishikesh, around 7:00 AM - 185 km drive (8–9 hrs) via Devprayag, Srinagar and Rudraprayag - Last reliable ATM at Rudraprayag - Terraced fields and traditional Garhwali villages on the climb to Sari - Homestay or guesthouse at the base camp, dinner included - Overnight: Sari (2,012 m / 6,601 ft) ### Day 2: Sari to Deoriatal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,012 m → 2,390 m (7,841 ft) | Distance: 3 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Terrain: gradual forest trail through oak, rhododendron and maple | Stay: Tents by Deoriatal Lake** Day 2 is the shortest and easiest walk of the trek, a gentle way in. You cover 3 km in 2 to 3 hours and gain about 378 m (1,240 ft). The trail climbs gradually out of Sari into thick forest of oak, rhododendron and maple. The gradient never turns hard. Use today to find your walking rhythm and to check that your boots and backpack sit right. The forest is alive with the songs of Himalayan birds, which makes this stretch a favourite with birdwatchers and photographers. Walk quietly and you hear more. As you gain height, the trees open now and then and the first snow-clad peaks appear in the distance. Then you reach Deoriatal at 2,390 m (7,841 ft). The lake sits in a ring of forest, and on a clear day its still water holds a sharp reflection of the Chaukhamba massif: the real range above and its mirror image below. Deoriatal also holds a place in local mythology and folklore, which gives it a quiet, spiritual feel. Camp is set by the lakeside. You arrive early, with lunch and evening snacks served at camp, so the afternoon is yours. Sit by the water, walk the shore and watch the light change on the peaks. Drinking water at camp is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets; check with your trek leader before you refill anywhere else. On a clear night the stars reflect on the lake. Put on warm layers before sunset. What to Expect: - Short, gradual 3 km climb with about 378 m (1,240 ft) of height gain - Oak, rhododendron and maple forest full of birdsong - Deoriatal Lake and its reflection of the Chaukhamba massif on clear days - Free afternoon at the lake, with lunch and evening snacks at camp - Stargazing over the water on clear nights - Overnight: Tents by Deoriatal Lake (2,390 m / 7,841 ft) ### Day 3: Deoriatal to Baniyakund via Rohini Bugyal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,390 m → 2,610 m (8,562 ft) | Distance: ~16 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: gentle ascents, then rolling forest ridges with steep descents, alpine meadow | Stay: Tents at Baniyakund** Day 3 is the longest day of the trek, nearly 16 km over 7 to 8 hours. The net gain is only about 220 m (721 ft), but that number hides the work. The trail starts with gentle ascents, then turns into rolling terrain with steep descents that test your endurance. Start early, keep your breaks short and regular, and eat and drink a little at each one. On long rolling days, in our experience, steady pacing matters more than speed. Much of the day runs through the dense oak, maple and rhododendron forest of the Kedarnath Wildlife Sanctuary. The air is fresh and the forest is full of birds. Keep an eye out for the Himalayan Monal, the colourful state bird of Uttarakhand; with luck, you spot one. As you gain height, the Chaukhamba massif and Mount Kedar rise behind the trees, and they stay with you through the day. The trail then opens onto Rohini Bugyal, a wide alpine meadow and one of the highlights of the trek. In spring, red and pink rhododendrons bloom around it. In winter, it lies under snow. Take a proper break here and refuel, because forest ridges still lie between you and camp. From Rohini Bugyal, the trail follows those ridges and small clearings, then descends gently to Baniyakund at 2,610 m (8,562 ft). The campsite is a wide, open meadow with snow peaks behind it. Watch the sun dip behind the summits, eat a good dinner and get to bed early. Tomorrow you climb to Tungnath and Chandrashila. What to Expect: - Longest day of the trek: nearly 16 km, 7–8 hrs - Rolling forest terrain with gentle ascents and steep descents - Oak, maple and rhododendron forest of the Kedarnath Wildlife Sanctuary - Views of the Chaukhamba massif and Mount Kedar, and a chance of seeing the Himalayan Monal - Rohini Bugyal meadow, with rhododendrons in spring and snow in winter - Overnight: Tents at Baniyakund (2,610 m / 8,562 ft) ### Day 4: Summit Day - Chopta to Tungnath and Chandrashila, back to Baniyakund **Route Details:** **Drive: Baniyakund → Chopta (short drive) | Altitude: 2,679 m → Tungnath 3,680 m → Chandrashila 3,962 m (13,000 ft) | Distance: 11 km | Duration: 8–9 hrs | Terrain: forest and meadow climb, steep final 1 km | Stay: Tents at Baniyakund** Summit day takes you to the Tungnath Temple and the top of Chandrashila. You leave Baniyakund early for the short drive to Chopta at 2,679 m (8,790 ft), a place known as the Mini Switzerland of Uttarakhand. This is the starting point of the walk to Tungnath. The trail from Chopta climbs gradually through rhododendron and oak forest, then opens into wide alpine meadows with the Himalaya behind them. In spring the rhododendrons are in bloom; in winter the slopes are white with snow. The climb is long and steady rather than steep, so settle into a pace you can hold for hours. You reach Tungnath at 3,680 m (12,073 ft), the highest Shiva temple in the world and one of the Panch Kedar shrines. The ancient stone temple stands against the mountains, and it is worth a quiet pause before the last climb. From Tungnath, Chandrashila is only 1 km away, but this is the hard section of the day. The gradient is steep and the altitude is high, which makes the ascent moderately challenging. Take short steps, keep your breathing steady and pause briefly but often. In snow, plant your poles and walk in the line your guide sets. At 3,962 m (13,000 ft), the summit gives you a 360° view of snow-clad peaks: Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Trishul, Bandarpoonch and Nanda Devi. After time at the top, you retrace your steps to Tungnath, descend to Chopta and return to camp at Baniyakund. Take the steep upper section slowly on the way down. Back at camp, a hot dinner ends the biggest day of the trek. What to Expect: - Early start and short drive from Baniyakund to Chopta (2,679 m) - Steady climb through rhododendron and oak forest and open meadows - Tungnath Temple (3,680 m / 12,073 ft), the highest Shiva temple in the world - Steep final 1 km from Tungnath to Chandrashila - 360° summit view of Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Trishul, Bandarpoonch and Nanda Devi - Overnight: Tents at Baniyakund (2,610 m / 8,562 ft) ### Day 5: Baniyakund to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Baniyakund → Rishikesh (~200 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 2,610 m (8,562 ft) → 313 m** The last day is a drive of about 200 km from Baniyakund down to Rishikesh, which takes 8 to 9 hours. You leave the crisp alpine air behind and follow the great rivers of Garhwal down the valleys, winding past sacred confluences and old mountain towns until the hills flatten out into the plains. It is a good day to sit back and let the trek settle: the lake at Deoriatal, the long forest day to Baniyakund and the view from Chandrashila. Meals on the road are not included, so keep some cash for a roadside stop. If you have onward travel booked, leave a margin for road delays. We recommend a late-evening or next-day departure from Rishikesh rather than a tight connection. What to Expect: - Drive of about 200 km from Baniyakund to Rishikesh, 8–9 hrs - Road along the rivers of Garhwal, past sacred confluences and mountain towns - Meals on the road are not included - Keep a margin for road delays before onward travel - Arrival in Rishikesh at the edge of the plains - Trek ends at Rishikesh ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse or homestay in Sari, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2: camping in 3-person tents by Deoriatal Lake - Day 3 and Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Baniyakund #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 4 dinner - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - Ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Transport (Rishikesh to Sari, and Baniyakund, where the trek ends, back to Rishikesh) is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 6-seater vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive from Rishikesh to Sari and on the drive back to Rishikesh #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Sari #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under Inclusions is not part of the package; ask us in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20–25 km and around 45 min from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Rishikesh at 07:00 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near Tapovan. **From Rishikesh to Sari:** The 185 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 07:00 AM. **Return:** The trek ends at Baniyakund; the cab leaves at 06:30 AM and reaches Jumping Heights, Tapovan by about 05:00 PM (200 km, 8–9 hrs; about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle, shared). Book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (around 1 hr) from Rishikesh, is the better-connected choice, with the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains from Delhi. Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK) is closer but has only a few trains; book early and check current timings. - **Via Haridwar** – most trains from Delhi stop here; take a cab to Tapovan (about 1 hr) and arrive the evening before the 07:00 AM pickup. - **Yog Nagari Rishikesh** – trains such as the Yoga Express and the Kalinga Utkal Express; they reach Rishikesh later in the day, so travel the day before. **From Rishikesh to Sari:** The 185 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 07:00 AM. **Return:** The trek ends at Baniyakund; the cab leaves at 06:30 AM and reaches Jumping Heights, Tapovan by about 05:00 PM. Allow about 1 hr to reach Haridwar and book a late-evening train with a good margin, or travel the next day – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh takes about 6–7 hrs, with overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses. An overnight bus can make the 07:00 AM pickup, but arriving the evening before is more relaxed. - **Take a government bus** – board from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises, as they are less reliable. - **Rishikesh Bus Stand to the pickup** – take an app cab, an auto rickshaw or a shared three-wheeler to Jumping Heights, Tapovan. **From Rishikesh to Sari:** The 185 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 07:00 AM. **Return:** The trek ends at Baniyakund; the cab leaves at 06:30 AM and reaches Jumping Heights, Tapovan by about 05:00 PM. Book an overnight bus to Delhi for later that evening, leaving time to reach the bus stand, or travel the next day – check current timings. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Rudraprayag has the last reliable ATM before Sari - Withdraw enough in Rishikesh or at Rudraprayag - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Sari is the last place with a stable mobile signal - Beyond Sari the network is patchy to non-existent - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Chopta Chandrashila trek, and where does it start? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek is in Rudraprayag district, Uttarakhand. It starts from Sari village, about 185 km (8–9 hours) by road from Rishikesh via Devprayag, Srinagar and Rudraprayag. From Sari the trail climbs to Deoriatal Lake, crosses forest and the Rohini Bugyal meadow to Baniyakund, and reaches Chandrashila summit via Tungnath from Chopta. ### How many days does the Chopta Chandrashila trek take from start to finish? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek takes 5 days from Rishikesh to Rishikesh, with 3 trekking days covering about 30 km. - **Day 1:** drive Rishikesh to Sari (185 km, 8–9 hours) - **Day 2:** Sari to Deoriatal, 3 km in 2–3 hours - **Day 3:** Deoriatal to Baniyakund via Rohini Bugyal, about 16 km in 7–8 hours - **Day 4:** Chopta to Tungnath and Chandrashila and back, 11 km in 8–9 hours - **Day 5:** drive Baniyakund to Rishikesh (200 km, 8–9 hours) ### What is the altitude of the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The highest point of the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek is Chandrashila summit at 3,962 m (13,000 ft). Summit day starts at Chopta (2,679 m / 8,790 ft), so you climb about 1,280 m that day. - **Sari (base):** 2,012 m / 6,601 ft - **Deoriatal camp:** 2,390 m / 7,841 ft - **Baniyakund camp:** 2,610 m / 8,562 ft - **Tungnath Temple:** 3,680 m / 12,073 ft ### What is the difficulty level of the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek is graded Moderate. The first day is short, but a 16 km forest day and a summit day with a steep final climb are the main challenges. - **Day 2:** a short, gradual 3 km climb to Deoriatal - **Day 3:** nearly 16 km of rolling forest with gentle ascents and steep descents - **Summit day:** about 1,280 m of climbing from Chopta, with a steep final 1 km to Chandrashila - **Winter:** snow from December to April adds some challenge ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Chopta Chandrashila trek? Yes, beginners with good fitness can do the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, as you sleep no higher than 2,610 m. It is graded Moderate, though, because of the 16 km Day 3 and the steep summit climb. In winter, snow on the higher sections adds some challenge, so prepare well before you go. ### What fitness level do I need for the Chopta Chandrashila trek? For the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek you should be able to walk 7–9 hours a day on two days in a row: a 16 km forest day and an 11 km summit day. - **Stamina:** good stamina and leg strength make the steep and snowy sections easier - **Descents:** Day 3 has steep descents, so strong knees help - **Health:** consult your doctor before the trek ### What is the best time for the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek runs from October to June. Come from December to April for snow, or in May–June and October–November for pleasant weather and clear trails. - **December to April:** snow on Rohini Bugyal and the summit - **Spring:** rhododendrons in bloom on Rohini Bugyal - **May–June and October–November:** pleasant weather, clear trails and green landscapes, with cold nights ### Is there snow on the Chopta Chandrashila trek, and in which months? Yes, the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek has snow from December to April, on Rohini Bugyal, the higher sections and the summit. - **Rohini Bugyal:** snow-covered in winter - **Chandrashila:** the summit may have snow - **Gear:** free microspikes and gaiters for snow on the trail ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? On the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, winter (December–February) days are about 8°C to 14°C and nights drop to -10°C to -6°C. In March–April days are 13°C to 17°C, in May–June 18°C to 24°C, and in October–November 10°C to 15°C, with nights from about 0°C to 8°C. - **December to April:** carry 5 warm layers - **May–June and October–November:** carry 3–4 warm layers - **Water:** make one bottle insulated in the snow months so it does not freeze ### Which mountains can you see on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? From Chandrashila summit on the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek you get a 360° view of Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Trishul, Bandarpoonch and Nanda Devi. - **Deoriatal Lake:** reflects the Chaukhamba massif on clear days - **Day 3:** views of the Chaukhamba massif and Mount Kedar - **Wildlife:** a chance of seeing the Himalayan Monal in the Kedarnath Wildlife Sanctuary ### What is the terrain like on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek crosses oak, rhododendron and maple forest, rolling forest ridges and an alpine meadow, and ends with a steep final climb to the summit. - **Day 2:** a gradual forest trail to Deoriatal - **Day 3:** gentle ascents, then rolling forest ridges with steep descents and the Rohini Bugyal meadow - **Day 4:** a forest and meadow climb from Chopta, with a steep final 1 km from Tungnath ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek reaches 3,962 m, so some risk of altitude sickness exists, but the highest camp, Baniyakund, is at 2,610 m and you return there after the summit. - **Summit day:** about 1,280 m of climbing from Chopta - **At every camp:** a first-aid kit, medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher - **Before you go:** consult your doctor and carry your regular medicines ### What is the minimum age for the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The minimum age for the Deoriatal-Chandrashila trek is 8 years; the steep climb from Tungnath to Chandrashila is a long day for a child, so parents should judge their child's stamina. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Chopta Chandrashila trek base camp from Rishikesh? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek starts from Sari, 185 km (8–9 hours) by road from Rishikesh. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan at 07:00 AM on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 45 minutes from Rishikesh; fly in the day before - **By train:** Haridwar Junction, about 1 hour from Rishikesh; arrive the evening before - **By bus:** overnight buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh take 6–7 hours ### Is transport from Rishikesh included in the Chopta Chandrashila trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek fee. Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs from Rishikesh to Sari and back from Baniyakund, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Cost:** about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, shared - **Day 1:** leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan at 07:00 AM - **Day 5:** leaves Baniyakund at 06:30 AM and reaches Tapovan by about 05:00 PM ### Where do we stay on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? On the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek you stay in a homestay or guesthouse at Sari, then in tents by Deoriatal Lake and at Baniyakund. - **Sari:** triple or quad sharing, with dinner included - **Camps:** three trekkers per tent, with large mess tents and tables; sleeping bags provided - **Women:** female trekkers share tents only with other women - **Couples and families:** separate tents arranged as needed ### What is the group size on the Chopta Chandrashila trek and who leads it? Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek fixed departures run with 6 to 20 trekkers, never more than 20, led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. - **Support team:** local certified mountain guides, assistant guides, local staff, and porters or mules for logistics - **First aid:** trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid - **Private treks:** available for any group size ### Is the Chopta Chandrashila trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the safety of female trekkers is a top priority on the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, and the guides and support staff are carefully selected and trustworthy. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other female trekkers, never with men - **Belongings:** keep your personal valuables secure ### What food is served on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? The Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek includes all meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 4 dinner: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food, with eggs on request at the campsite. - **At camp:** tea, coffee, soups and snacks served regularly - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals on the drives to Sari and back from Baniyakund ### Is drinking water safe on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? On the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, water at camp is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets for safety. - **Refills:** check with your trek leader for safe refill points on the trail - **Bottles:** two 1 L bottles, one insulated in the snow months ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Chopta Chandrashila trek? Yes, the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes, a jacket or poles. - **Included:** waterproof trekking shoes with ankle support, a -10°C padded jacket and a trekking pole - **Also free:** microspikes and gaiters for snow on the trail - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit ### Is backpack offloading available on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek costs ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the full trek, with a porter or mule carrying your backpack. - **Book ahead:** at least 15 days in advance; last-minute requests at Sari may cost more - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a layer ### Is there a doctor on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? No doctor joins the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, but trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid, and every camp has a first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders. - **Evacuation:** stretchers at each campsite - **Your medicines:** carry prescriptions, remedies for common ailments and any altitude medicine your doctor advises - **Insurance:** mandatory travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation ### What documents do I need for the Chopta Chandrashila trek? For the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek you need an original government photo ID, a photocopy of it and a travel insurance policy. - **Photo ID:** passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID, checked at forest check posts and for trek registration - **Photocopy:** keep it with the original in a waterproof pouch - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Are forest permits and camping fees included in the Chopta Chandrashila trek? Yes, all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek fee. Your original photo ID is checked at forest check posts, so keep it handy. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? Rudraprayag is the last reliable ATM before Sari, the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek base camp, and mobile signal is patchy to non-existent on the trek. - **Cash:** withdraw enough in Rishikesh or at Rudraprayag for the shared cab fare and small expenses - **Signal:** Sari is the last point with a stable signal; finish important calls there - **Power bank:** cold drains phone batteries fast ### What is Tungnath Temple on the Chopta Chandrashila trek? Tungnath Temple (3,680 m / 12,073 ft), on summit day of the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, is the highest Shiva temple in the world. - **Route:** a steady climb from Chopta through rhododendron and oak forest and open meadows - **After Tungnath:** a steep final 1 km to Chandrashila summit at 3,962 m ### What should I pack for the Chopta Chandrashila trek? For the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, pack for snow from December to April and cold nights the rest of the season; Trekkaro also emails a full checklist after booking. - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, padded jacket, a trekking pole, microspikes and gaiters are provided - **Bags:** a 50–60 L backpack with rain cover and a 20–30 L day pack - **Clothes:** thermal innerwear, 2 fleece or woollen layers in winter, 2 quick-dry trek pants (no jeans) and a rain jacket - **Essentials:** UV sunglasses, gloves, SPF 50+ sunscreen, headlamp, power bank and cash ### How do I book the Chopta Chandrashila trek with Trekkaro online? To book the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek, select your date, fill in the booking form and pay online; your booking is confirmed instantly. - **Confirmation:** booking details, the itinerary and the gear checklist are emailed to you - **Travel:** book your travel as soon as the booking shows as Paid in My Bookings ### Can the Chopta Chandrashila trek itinerary be changed, and does the end date change? Minor changes to the Deoriatal–Chandrashila trek itinerary are possible, but the completion date must stay as scheduled. If something unexpected happens on the trail, your trek leader suggests a suitable alternative plan. ### Can I book a private Chopta Chandrashila trek for my own group? Yes, Trekkaro offers private, customised Deoriatal–Chandrashila treks for a group of any size, at your own pace. The cost depends on the number of trekkers, the duration and the type of trek. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 28 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 4 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 11 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 18 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 25 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 2 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - … 36 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/deoriatal-chandrashila-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Dayara Bugyal Trek > Dayara Bugyal Trek is a 4-day easy–moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,749 m (12,300 ft). It covers about 20 km on foot and starts and ends at Raithal. Best time: October to June. Trekkaro price: ₹7,800 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (48 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/dayara-bugyal-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-17. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 4 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,749 m / 12,300 ft - **Trekking distance:** 20 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Raithal - **Best time:** October to June - **Temperature:** In summer- Daytime temperature: 13°C to 18°C and Night time temperature: 7°C to 12°C. In winter- Daytime temperature: 4°C to 11°C and Night time temperature: -10°C to -2°C. In autumn (October to November)- Daytime temperature: 12°C to 15°C and Night time temperature: around 0°C - **Price:** ₹7,800 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (48 upcoming) ## Overview In the Indian Himalayas there is a single word for the open grassland that waits above the last of the trees: bugyal. Dayara is the bugyal we would show you first. The forest ends, the slope rolls gently upward, and suddenly there is nothing between you and the snow peaks of the Garhwal but a vast sweep of meadow – white in winter, green in summer. You reach it after just two days on foot from the village of Raithal. The Dayara Bugyal trek climbs from Raithal through forests of oak, pine, maple and rhododendron to one of the widest high meadows we know, and on to Dayara Top at 3,749 m (12,300 ft). From the top, a 360° panorama of the Garhwal range takes in Bandarpoonch, Srikanth, Gangotri I, Black Peak, Draupadi ka Danda, Jaunli and Bakariya Top. The trek also holds two high-altitude lakes, Gui Lake and Barnala Tal, frozen and ringed with snow in winter, and forests and meadows that echo with the calls of Himalayan birds such as russet sparrows, Eurasian jays and scarlet minivets. The trek lies in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand. It takes four days and covers about 20 km on foot, starting and ending at Raithal (2,256 m), a Himalayan village with views of snow-clad peaks and a warm welcome from the people who live there. The route climbs to a single camp at Gui (2,936 m), crosses the meadows of Dayara Bugyal to Dayara Top and returns the same way. “Bugyal” is the term used in the Indian Himalayas for a high-altitude meadow, and we call Dayara the crown of alpine meadows. In our experience, the title is deserved: few short treks open onto so much space so quickly. ### The Open Bugyal – What Makes the Dayara Bugyal Trek Unmissable Below the meadow, the mountains are only a promise: a glimpse of snow through a forest clearing on the way to Gui, a row of summits turning orange and gold above camp at sunset. Dayara is where that promise is kept. Once you leave the trees, the grassland rolls away in every direction like an open plain set high in the mountains, and the Garhwal Himalayas reveal themselves at every step – Bakariya Top, Black Peak, Bandarpoonch, Srikanth, Draupadi ka Danda and Jaunli along the horizon. In spring and summer the grass is green and scattered with wildflowers; in winter the same slopes become vast white carpets of snow. We count Dayara among the largest and finest high-altitude pastures in India, and walking across it is the reason this trek exists. You leave Gui at sunrise. The trail passes the meadows near camp and enters a forest of golden oak, maple and rhododendron, its floor sprinkled with snow in winter and glowing in the low morning light. For a while the climb is gradual. Then it steepens for about half an hour towards Chilapada, and you settle into short steps and steady breathing. The trees thin. Then they stop, and you walk out of the forest onto the bugyal, with the whole range lifting above the far edge of the grass. The last stretch to Dayara Top is steeper, across undulating slopes that are snowy in winter. At the summit, snowfields in winter, or green grass in summer, run out to meet a full circle of peaks. You stand at 3,749 m with the Garhwal on every side, and for a while there is nothing to do but look. Then comes the part that makes Dayara so well suited to a short trip: you go back down to sleep. A light snack at the top, a walk back across the meadow and through the forest, sunset views on the descent, and by late evening you are at Gui again, where the snow summits glow in the last of the light and, on clear nights, the sky fills with stars. Two nights at the same camp, one long day to the top, and the meadow seen twice, on the way up and on the way down – in our experience, that rhythm is kind to first-time trekkers and still deeply satisfying for anyone who has trekked before. ### The Trail Itself The trek begins in Raithal, a quaint village in Uttarkashi that offers a first, unhurried look at Himalayan hill life. From the village, the trail climbs gradually past houses and fields into dense forest of oak, pine and rhododendron. The path is shaded and peaceful, filled with the fragrance of pine and the soft rustle of leaves, and small clearings give the first glimpses of snow-capped peaks in the distance. Gui, at 2,936 m, is the only camp on the trek: a meadow campsite backed by tall peaks, reached after a 5 km walk of 3–4 hours, and a fine spot for stargazing on a clear night. Above it, golden oak and maple take over, and then the forest gives way entirely to the open grass of Dayara. Each season paints this trail differently. In spring and summer the forest is full of wildflowers and red rhododendrons, and the meadows turn green, reaching full bloom in May and June. In winter the trail wears a sparkling coat of snow, the meadows lie under a thick white blanket, and Gui Lake and Barnala Tal freeze within a ring of snow. In October and November, crisp skies give clear views of the peaks. On the last morning, the walk back to Raithal is an easy 2–3 hour descent through the same oak, maple and rhododendron forest, with glimpses of terraced farms and the Garhwal Himalayas in the distance. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Dayara Bugyal trek is graded easy to moderate and suits beginners with some prior trekking experience – a short trek or regular walking in the hills is a sensible base. The walk from Raithal to Gui is 5 km in 3–4 hours, and the descent on the final morning is 5 km in 2–3 hours. The hard day is the climb to Dayara Top and back: 10 km over 8–9 hours, gaining and then losing about 813 m, with a steep half hour towards Chilapada and a steeper final stretch to the top, both on snow in winter. No technical climbing is involved, but walking on snow takes more energy than walking on dry ground, so do not underestimate that day. We recommend 4–6 weeks of preparation before departure. Children aged 8 and above can join, and there is no upper age limit: trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and bring a doctor’s medical certificate. Season: October to June, with December to March for snow. ### Key Highlights of the Dayara Bugyal Trek - **A 360° view from Dayara Top** – the Garhwal range in every direction from 3,749 m (12,300 ft) - **Peaks on the skyline** – Bandarpoonch, Srikanth, Gangotri I, Black Peak, Draupadi ka Danda, Jaunli and Bakariya Top - **The meadows of Dayara Bugyal** – vast high pastures, snow-white in winter and green with wildflowers in spring and summer - **Two high-altitude lakes** – Gui Lake and Barnala Tal, frozen and ringed with snow in winter - **Sunsets and stars at Gui** – snow summits glowing orange and gold at dusk, and clear night skies for stargazing - **Forests of oak, pine, maple and rhododendron** – shaded, peaceful trails with red rhododendrons in season - **Himalayan birdlife** – russet sparrows, Eurasian jays and scarlet minivets in the forests and meadows - **Raithal village** – a first look at mountain life and local hospitality at the start and end of the trek ### Best Time to Do the Dayara Bugyal Trek The Dayara Bugyal trek runs from October right through to June, and the meadow it leads to changes completely with the seasons. For snow, choose winter, when the bugyal lies buried and the lakes freeze. In spring and early summer the snow gives way to green grass and wildflowers, and in autumn the skies turn crisp and clear over the peaks. Each window shows you a different Dayara. #### December to March – Winter (The Snow Season) From December to March, the meadows of Dayara are buried under a thick blanket of snow and the trail through the forest wears a sparkling white coat. Gui Lake and Barnala Tal freeze and lie still within the snow. On summit day you walk through a snow-sprinkled forest, out across white slopes and up the last snowy stretch to the top, where endless snowfields merge with the peaks. The return through the snow, with a cold breeze on the way down, adds its own sense of adventure. If you want to experience snow trekking in Uttarakhand on a short route, this is the window. - **Temperatures:** Day: 4°C to 11°C | Night: -10°C to -2°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the forest trail and meadows; the steep sections towards Chilapada and Dayara Top are on snow. - **Best for:** A classic winter snow trek, frozen lakes and snowfields under a full circle of peaks. #### April to June – Spring and Summer (The Green Meadows) As the snow melts in spring, the meadows turn green and the forest fills with wildflowers and red rhododendrons. By May and June the bugyal is in full bloom. The forests and meadows are alive with birds such as russet sparrows, Eurasian jays and scarlet minivets, which makes this a rewarding window for nature photography and birdwatching. At Gui, the evenings bring sunsets over the peaks and, on clear nights, a sky full of stars. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 18°C | Night: 7°C to 12°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow melting in spring; green meadows, wildflowers and rhododendrons, with full bloom in May and June. - **Best for:** Green meadows, wildflowers, birdwatching and nature photography. #### October to November – Autumn (Clear Skies) Autumn brings crisp skies and crystal-clear mountain views. This is the season for trekkers who come above all for the panorama: from the meadow and from Dayara Top, Bandarpoonch, Srikanth, Black Peak and their neighbours stand sharp against the sky. We consider it one of the best seasons for unobstructed Himalayan views on this trek. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 15°C | Night: around 0°C, colder towards the end of November - **Trail conditions:** Crisp, clear weather and open views of the peaks. - **Best for:** Unobstructed Himalayan panoramas and clear mountain photography. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For snow – and for Dayara at its most dramatic – book a December to March batch. For green meadows, wildflowers and birdlife, choose April to June, with May and June for the meadows in full bloom. For the clearest views of the Garhwal peaks, October and November are our autumn pick. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Raithal **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Raithal (~180 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 2,256 m (7,400 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a road day. Start from Dehradun early, around 7:30 AM, so you reach Raithal by evening without delays. The 180 km drive takes 8 to 9 hours through the Garhwal Himalaya, past pine forests, small hill towns and the terraced fields of Uttarakhand. Bhatwari, about an hour before Raithal, is the last reliable ATM and the last place with a stable mobile signal. Withdraw enough cash there, finish your important calls and tell your family you will be out of reach. After Bhatwari the signal is weak to non-existent, at Raithal and through the trek. Raithal is a Himalayan village in Uttarkashi district and the base camp of the trek, with views of snow-clad peaks and warm local hospitality. You check into a guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis, and dinner is served there. The village has a few small shops for basic trekking items, but we recommend you carry everything you need. Sleep early tonight. What to Expect: - Early start from Dehradun, around 7:30 AM - 180 km drive (8–9 hrs) past pine forests, hill towns and terraced fields - Last ATM and last stable mobile network at Bhatwari, about 1 hour before Raithal - Village stay at Raithal with dinner included - Only basic shops in Raithal, so bring what you need - Overnight: Raithal (2,256 m / 7,400 ft) ### Day 2: Raithal to Gui **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,256 m → 2,936 m (9,630 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Terrain: village trail, then oak, pine and rhododendron forest | Stay: Tents at Gui** Day 2 is a short climb that sets you up for the summit. After breakfast at Raithal, the trail starts with a gradual ascent along village paths and then enters dense forest of oak, pine and rhododendron. You gain about 680 m (2,230 ft) over 5 km in 3 to 4 hours. The gradient is steady rather than steep, an easy-moderate walk that suits beginners. Go slowly in the first hour while your body adjusts to the height. The forest is shaded and quiet, with the smell of pine and the rustle of leaves around you. As you climb, small clearings open in the trees and give you your first look at the snow-capped peaks in the distance. In spring and summer the forest fills with wildflowers and rhododendron blooms. In winter the trail carries a coat of snow, so take shorter steps and use your poles. Gui, at 2,936 m (9,630 ft), is a campsite surrounded by alpine meadows and backed by high peaks, one of the most scenic overnight halts on this trek. You arrive with the afternoon ahead of you. Lunch and evening snacks are served at camp. Rest, keep drinking water and take a short walk around the meadow instead of spending the whole afternoon in the tent. As the sun sets, the snow summits turn orange and gold. After a warm dinner, step outside. On a clear night the sky over Gui is full of stars, and it is a good spot for night photography. Then sleep early. Tomorrow starts at sunrise. What to Expect: - Gradual 5 km climb with about 680 m (2,230 ft) of height gain - Shaded oak, pine and rhododendron forest - First views of snow peaks from clearings in the forest - Snow on the trail in winter; wildflowers and rhododendrons in spring and summer - Sunset on the peaks and a clear night sky for stargazing - Overnight: Tents at Gui (2,936 m / 9,630 ft) ### Day 3: Summit Day - Gui to Dayara Top and back to Gui **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,936 m → 3,749 m (12,300 ft) → 2,936 m | Distance: 10 km (round trip) | Duration: 8–9 hrs | Terrain: oak, maple and rhododendron forest, open meadow, steep snowy slopes near the top | Stay: Tents at Gui** Summit day is the most challenging and most rewarding day of the Dayara Bugyal Trek. After an early breakfast, you start at sunrise. The trail passes the meadows near Gui and enters a dense forest of oak, maple and rhododendron. The first stretch is a gradual climb. Then comes a steeper ascent of about half an hour towards Chilapada, the first real test of your stamina. Slow down, shorten your stride and keep your breathing even. In winter the forest floor is sprinkled with snow and catches the morning light. Out of the forest, the trail opens onto Dayara Bugyal, one of the largest high-altitude pastures in India. In spring and summer it is green grass and wildflowers. In winter it turns into a wide white carpet of snow. The walk across the meadow is rolling and open, and the Garhwal Himalaya fills the skyline: Bandarpoonch, Black Peak, Mt Srikanth, Draupadi ka Danda, Mt Jaunli and Bakariya Top. The final stretch to Dayara Top is a steeper climb across undulating snowy slopes. This is the hard section. Step into the footprints ahead of you, plant your poles and take short pauses rather than long stops. Put on microspikes if your trek leader asks you to. At 3,749 m (12,300 ft), the top gives you a 360° view of the Garhwal Himalaya, with snowfields running into peaks on every side. You spend some time here and have light refreshments before you turn around. The return follows the same route, back across the bugyal and down through the forest. The descent takes less effort, but snow and a cold breeze still demand care. The sunset lights up the peaks on the way down, and you reach Gui by late evening. Dinner is hot and sleep comes quickly. What to Expect: - Sunrise start after an early breakfast - Steep half-hour climb towards Chilapada through oak, maple and rhododendron forest - Dayara Bugyal, one of the largest high-altitude pastures in India - Steeper final climb across snowy slopes to Dayara Top (3,749 m / 12,300 ft) - 360° views of Bandarpoonch, Black Peak, Mt Srikanth and Draupadi ka Danda - Overnight: Tents at Gui (2,936 m / 9,630 ft) ### Day 4: Gui to Raithal, drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,936 m → 2,256 m (7,400 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Drive: Raithal → Dehradun (180 km, 7–8 hrs) | Stay: Not included** The last day starts with breakfast at Gui and an easy walk down. You retrace the familiar forest trail through oak, maple and rhododendron, and the downhill is far gentler than the climbs of the last two days. The 5 km to Raithal take 2 to 3 hours. Through the trees you catch glimpses of terraced farms and the Garhwal peaks in the distance. At Raithal, the base camp, there is time for a short break and a chat with the villagers before the long drive back. Then you set off on the 180 km road journey to Dehradun, 7 to 8 hours of winding mountain roads, valleys and river crossings. Breakfast is the only meal included today, so plan for lunch on the road. The cab reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 09:00 PM. What to Expect: - Easy 5 km descent to Raithal, 2–3 hrs - Glimpses of terraced farms and the Garhwal peaks from the forest trail - Short break in Raithal village before the drive - 180 km drive to Dehradun, 7–8 hrs - Breakfast is the only meal included today - Trek ends at Raithal; drop at Dehradun Railway Station by about 09:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse or homestay in Raithal, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 and Day 3: camping in 3-person tents at Gui #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 4 breakfast - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - Ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Transport (Dehradun to Raithal and back) is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Raithal #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Raithal #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under Inclusions is not part of the package; ask us in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Raithal leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Raithal:** The 180 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Raithal at around 01:00 PM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 09:00 PM (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, shared). Book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) – the pickup point itself, with direct trains from Delhi. For the 07:30 AM cab, take the overnight train or reach Dehradun a day early; book ahead in peak season and check current timings. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning, in time for the pickup. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – good choices if you travel the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Raithal:** The 180 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Raithal at around 01:00 PM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 09:00 PM. Mountain roads can run late, so book a train for the next day, or a late-night one only with a good margin – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hrs. Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night, so an overnight bus can get you in before the 07:30 AM pickup. - **Take a government bus** – board from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises, as they are less reliable. - **Dehradun ISBT to the pickup** – take an app cab, an auto rickshaw or a shared three-wheeler to Dehradun Railway Station. **From Dehradun to Raithal:** The 180 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Raithal at around 01:00 PM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 09:00 PM. For a night bus back to Delhi, allow time to reach Dehradun ISBT and for road delays, or travel the next day – check current timings. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Bhatwari, about 1 hour before Raithal, has the last reliable ATM - Withdraw enough in Dehradun or at Bhatwari - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Bhatwari is the last place with a stable mobile signal - The signal is weak to non-existent at Raithal and on the trek - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Dayara Bugyal trek, and where does it start? The Dayara Bugyal trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand. It starts from Raithal, a village about 180 km (8–9 hours) by road from Dehradun. From Raithal the trail climbs through oak, pine and rhododendron forest to the Gui camp, then across the meadows of Dayara Bugyal to Dayara Top at 3,749 m. ### How many days is the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek takes 4 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 3 trekking days covering about 20 km. - **Day 1:** drive Dehradun to Raithal (180 km, 8–9 hours) - **Day 2:** Raithal to Gui, 5 km in 3–4 hours - **Day 3:** summit day to Dayara Top and back to Gui, 10 km in 8–9 hours - **Day 4:** 5 km down to Raithal and the drive to Dehradun (7–8 hours) ### What is the altitude of the Dayara Bugyal trek? The highest point of the Dayara Bugyal trek is Dayara Top at 3,749 m (12,300 ft). The trek starts at Raithal (2,256 m / 7,400 ft), so you gain about 1,490 m. - **Gui camp:** 2,936 m / 9,630 ft, about 680 m above Raithal - **Summit day:** about 810 m up from Gui to Dayara Top and back down the same day ### What is the difficulty level of the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek is graded Easy–Moderate. The climb to Gui is short and gradual, but summit day is long, with steep sections near the top. - **Day 2:** a gradual 5 km climb with about 680 m of height gain - **Summit day:** 10 km in 8–9 hours, including a steep half-hour climb towards Chilapada - **Near the top:** a steeper final climb across snowy slopes - **Winter:** the trail is under snow from December to March ### Is the Dayara Bugyal trek good for beginners? Yes, the Dayara Bugyal trek is graded Easy–Moderate and suits beginners who are physically fit; some prior trekking experience helps. At 4 days and 20 km it is short, but summit day takes 8–9 hours, so prepare well before you go. ### What fitness level do I need for the Dayara Bugyal trek? For the Dayara Bugyal trek you should be fit enough for an 8–9 hour summit day of 10 km, with steep ascents and descents. - **Prepare:** cardio exercise and hiking in the weeks before the trek - **Other days:** 3–4 hours up to Gui and 2–3 hours down to Raithal - **Health:** consult your doctor before the trek, especially with an existing medical condition ### What is the best time for the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek runs from October to June. Come from December to March for snow, or from April to June for green meadows and wildflowers. - **December to March:** the trail to Dayara is under snow, with the coldest nights - **April to June:** wildflowers and rhododendrons, with the meadows in bloom in May and June - **October to November:** autumn, with cold nights on the meadows ### When is there snow on the Dayara Bugyal trek? Snow on the Dayara Bugyal trek lies from December to March, when the trail to Dayara is under snow. - **Gui trail:** snow on the forest trail in winter - **Near the top:** steep, snowy slopes on the final climb to Dayara Top - **Gear:** free microspikes and gaiters for snow on the trail ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Dayara Bugyal trek? On the Dayara Bugyal trek, winter days are about 4°C to 11°C and nights fall to -10°C to -2°C. In summer, days are about 13°C to 18°C and nights 7°C to 12°C. - **Winter (December–March):** carry 5 warm layers - **April–June and October–November:** carry 3–4 warm layers - **Water:** make one bottle insulated in winter so your water does not freeze ### Which mountains can you see on the Dayara Bugyal trek? From Dayara Top on the Dayara Bugyal trek you get 360° views of Bandarpoonch, Black Peak, Mt Srikanth and Draupadi ka Danda. - **Day 2:** first views of snow peaks from clearings in the forest - **Gui camp:** sunset on the peaks and a clear night sky for stargazing - **Day 4:** glimpses of terraced farms and the Garhwal peaks on the way down ### What is the terrain like on the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek starts on a village trail, climbs through oak, pine and rhododendron forest, and opens onto one of the largest high-altitude pastures in India. - **Raithal to Gui:** village trail, then shaded oak, pine and rhododendron forest - **Summit day:** oak, maple and rhododendron forest, then open meadow - **Near the top:** steep slopes, under snow in winter ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek reaches 3,749 m, so some risk of altitude sickness exists, but you sleep no higher than Gui at 2,936 m and return there on the same day as the summit. - **Gradual gain:** about 680 m from Raithal to Gui on Day 2 - **At every camp:** a first-aid kit, medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher - **Before you go:** consult your doctor and carry your regular medicines ### What is the age limit for the Dayara Bugyal trek? The minimum age for the Dayara Bugyal trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek starts from Raithal, 180 km (8–9 hours) by road from Dehradun. A cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city; fly in the day before - **By train:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) is the pickup point; the overnight Nanda Devi Express arrives in time - **By bus:** overnight government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT take 6–7 hours ### Is transport included in the Dayara Bugyal trek? No, transport is not included in the Dayara Bugyal trek fee. Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs between Dehradun and Raithal, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Cost:** about ₹6,500 per vehicle (5–6 seater) each way, shared - **Day 1:** leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM - **Day 4:** leaves Raithal around 01:00 PM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 09:00 PM ### Where do we stay on the Dayara Bugyal trek? On the Dayara Bugyal trek you stay in a guesthouse or homestay at Raithal on Day 1 and in tents at Gui on Days 2 and 3. - **Raithal:** triple or quad sharing, with dinner included - **Gui camp:** 3-person tents with large mess tents and tables; sleeping bags provided - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek - **Day 4:** no stay is included after the drive back to Dehradun ### What is the group size on the Dayara Bugyal trek and who leads it? Trekkaro limits the Dayara Bugyal trek to a maximum of 20 trekkers per group, led by experienced trek leaders with local certified mountain guides. The team brings both safety training and local knowledge of the trail. ### What food is served on the Dayara Bugyal trek? The Dayara Bugyal trek includes all meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 4 breakfast: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food. - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **At camp:** tea, coffee, soups and snacks served regularly - **Not included:** meals during the drive to and from Raithal ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Dayara Bugyal trek? Yes, the Dayara Bugyal trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes, a jacket or poles. - **Included:** waterproof trekking shoes with ankle support, a -10°C padded jacket and a trekking pole - **Also free:** microspikes and gaiters for snow on the trail - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit ### Is backpack offloading available on the Dayara Bugyal trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Dayara Bugyal trek costs ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the full trek. - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Last-minute requests:** may cost more if made at Raithal - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a layer ### Is there medical support on the Dayara Bugyal trek? Every camp on the Dayara Bugyal trek has a first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders, plus a stretcher for emergency evacuation. - **Team:** experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides - **Your own kit:** regular medicines and basics such as blister plasters - **Insurance:** mandatory travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation ### What documents do I need for the Dayara Bugyal trek? For the Dayara Bugyal trek you need an original government photo ID, a photocopy of it and a travel insurance policy. - **Photo ID:** passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID, checked at forest check posts and for trek registration - **Photocopy:** keep it with the original in a waterproof pouch - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Are permits included in the Dayara Bugyal trek? Yes, all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Dayara Bugyal trek fee. Your original photo ID is checked at forest check posts, so keep it handy. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Dayara Bugyal trek? Bhatwari, about 1 hour before Raithal, is the last reliable ATM and the last place with stable mobile signal on the way to the Dayara Bugyal trek. - **Cash:** withdraw enough in Dehradun or at Bhatwari for the shared cab fare and small expenses - **Signal:** weak to non-existent at Raithal and throughout the trek - **At Bhatwari:** finish important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity - **Power bank:** cold drains phone batteries fast ### What does the word Bugyal mean in Dayara Bugyal? Bugyal is the word used in the Indian Himalayas for a high-altitude meadow, and the Dayara Bugyal trek crosses one of the largest high-altitude pastures in India on summit day. In winter the meadow lies under snow; in spring and summer it turns green, with wildflowers and rhododendrons along the trail. ### What is summit day like on the Dayara Bugyal trek? Summit day on the Dayara Bugyal trek (Day 3) is a 10 km round trip from Gui to Dayara Top at 3,749 m, taking 8–9 hours. - **Start:** at sunrise, after an early breakfast - **Forest:** a steep half-hour climb towards Chilapada through oak, maple and rhododendron - **Meadow:** the open pasture of Dayara Bugyal - **Top:** a steeper final climb across snowy slopes to 360° views, then back to Gui ### Can I do the Dayara Bugyal trek in summer? Yes, the Dayara Bugyal trek runs from April to June, when days are about 13°C to 18°C and the meadows are in bloom in May and June. - **Spring and summer:** wildflowers and rhododendrons along the trail - **Layers:** 3–4 warm layers, as nights on the meadows are cold all season - **Rain:** carry a rain jacket or poncho for unexpected showers ### What should I pack for the Dayara Bugyal trek? For the Dayara Bugyal trek, pack for snow in winter and cold nights the rest of the season. Shoes, the padded jacket, a trekking pole, microspikes and gaiters come with Free Trekking Gear. - **Bags:** a 50–60 L backpack with rain cover and a 20–30 L day pack - **Clothes:** thermal innerwear, 2 fleece or woollen layers in winter, 2 quick-dry trek pants (no jeans) and a rain jacket - **Accessories:** UV sunglasses, sun cap, woollen cap, gloves, SPF 50+ sunscreen and lip balm - **Essentials:** headlamp, two 1 L bottles, power bank, personal medicines and cash ### What is the minimum age for the Dayara Bugyal trek? The minimum age for the Dayara Bugyal trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 can join only with a parent or guardian, who signs the disclaimer for them, and the booking must be made by someone aged 18 or older. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 27 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 28 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 3 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 4 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 10 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 11 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 17 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 18 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 24 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 25 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 1 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 2 Dec 2026 - … 36 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/dayara-bugyal-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Deoban Trek > Deoban Trek is a 2-day easy trek in Dehradun, Uttarakhand, reaching 2,900 m (9,514 ft). It covers about 19 km on foot and starts at Lokhandi and ends at Koti Kanasar. Best time: September to April. Trekkaro price: ₹3,800 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (31 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/deoban-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 2 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 2,900 m / 9,514 ft - **Trekking distance:** 19 km - **Region:** Dehradun, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Lokhandi / Koti Kanasar - **Best time:** September to April - **Temperature:** Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 10°C to 18°C, Night 0°C to 6°C | Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 10°C to 18°C, Night 0°C to 8°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 2°C to 10°C, Night -6°C to 0°C - **Price:** ₹3,800 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (31 upcoming) ## Overview Beyond Chakrata, the road runs out of houses and into deodar. Walk in from Lokhandi, spend one night in a forest that feels far older than the army town below it, and climb before dawn to Vyas Point, where the whole snow wall of the Garhwal Himalaya lines up across the north. Deoban is a weekend trek that trades crowds for silence, and you will have to look hard to find a quieter forest within a day of Delhi. The Deoban trek explores the deodar and oak forests above Chakrata in the Jaunsar-Bawar area of Dehradun district, Uttarakhand. The name means ‘forest of the gods’, and the deodar itself takes its name from the same idea. The trek starts at Lokhandi, a hamlet on the road beyond Chakrata at 2,560 m (8,400 ft), spends a night at a forest camp at Saraswati at 2,500 m (8,202 ft), climbs through the Deoban forest past an old forest rest house to Vyas Point at 2,900 m (9,514 ft), and ends at Koti Kanasar at 1,980 m (6,496 ft). Total walking is about 19 km over 2 days. Local belief links the high ridge to the sage Ved Vyas, who is said to have meditated in these forests, and the area has its own living culture: Jaunsari villages with wooden houses, their own gods and festivals, and a way of life quite different from the rest of Garhwal. Chakrata itself is an Indian Army cantonment, which has kept the region free of big hotels and heavy traffic. It also means the trek is open only to Indian nationals, who carry original photo ID through the checkpoints. ### A Forest of the Gods – What Makes the Deoban Trek Unmissable Deoban is a trek about trees before it is a trek about views. The deodars here are tall, straight and old, and between them grow banj and kharsu oak, rhododendron and, higher up, open grassy clearings. The forest floor is soft with needles. In winter the snow settles on the branches and turns the whole ridge silent; in spring the rhododendrons add red to the green. Birds are everywhere: Himalayan woodpeckers, laughingthrushes, tits and, with luck, a pheasant crossing the path. Then there is Vyas Point. You leave camp in the dark on Day 2 and climb through the forest to the open top of the ridge, and as the light comes up the Himalaya appears across the whole northern horizon. On a clear morning you see Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini and Kala Nag (Black Peak), the Gangotri group, the Kedarnath peaks and Chaukhamba to the north-east, and the snow peaks of Kinnaur and the Shrikhand range in Himachal to the north-west. It is a wide view for a summit of under 3,000 m, because nothing higher stands between Deoban and the main range. Few trekkers come here. Most visitors to Chakrata stop at Tiger Falls or the town viewpoints, and the forests above stay empty, which is exactly why we like it. Expect a quiet trail, a camp with only your group around it, and an evening sky full of stars. The drive is part of the experience too: from the plains at Vikasnagar the road crosses the Yamuna near Kalsi, home to an Ashokan rock edict, and climbs bend after bend through pine and oak to Chakrata, with the Doon valley falling away behind you. By the time you reach Lokhandi the town is behind you and the forest has taken over. ### The Trail Itself The Deoban trail is a forest walk on a well-defined path, with gentle ups and downs rather than one long climb. From Lokhandi the first day is short: about 4 km through deodar and oak, with the ground rolling along the side of the ridge, to the clearing at Saraswati. The second day is the long one. It climbs at a steady gradient through the Deoban forest to the old forest rest house and the open ridge at Vyas Point, returns through the forest past Saraswati, and then drops for a long stretch through thinning forest and village paths to Koti Kanasar. The final descent is the part that tests the knees. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Deoban trek is graded easy, and we recommend it for first-time trekkers, families with children who walk well, and working trekkers looking for a quiet weekend in the forest. Day 1 is a gentle 4 km walk of 2–3 hours. Day 2 is the hard day: about 15 km and 6–7 hours on foot, with an early start for Vyas Point and a long descent to Koti Kanasar, followed by a 4-hour drive back to Dehradun. We recommend three to four weeks of preparation with regular walks, jogging or stair climbing. Children aged 8 and above can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: September to April. ### Key Highlights of the Deoban Trek - **The forest of the gods** – old deodar, oak and rhododendron forest above Chakrata, with almost no other trekkers - **Vyas Point at 2,900 m (9,514 ft)** – a ridge-top view of Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag, the Gangotri group, the Kedarnath peaks and Chaukhamba - **Himachal on the horizon** – the Kinnaur and Shrikhand snow peaks to the north-west on clear mornings - **A night in the forest** – camping at Saraswati among deodar and oak at 2,500 m - **The old Deoban forest rest house** – a quiet stone building on the ridge, on the way to Vyas Point - **Snow within a weekend** – from December to February the forest and the ridge can lie under snow - **Jaunsari villages** – wooden houses and a culture of their own around Chakrata and Kanasar - **Birdwatching** – woodpeckers, laughingthrushes, tits and pheasants in the forest ### Best Time to Do the Deoban Trek The Deoban trek runs from September to April. We do not run it from May to August: the monsoon brings leeches, slippery forest paths and landslides on the hill roads, and the summer haze hides the peaks. Each window gives the forest a different mood. #### September to November – Autumn (Clearest Views) Autumn gives the sharpest mountain views from Vyas Point, with clean air after the monsoon and the forest still green. Days are 10°C to 18°C, and nights at camp fall to about 0°C to 8°C, the colder end in November. The first frost appears on the clearings late in the season. #### December to February – Winter (The Snow Season) This is Deoban at its most magical. Snow can cover the trail, the camp and the ridge, the deodars stand white against a blue sky and the forest goes quiet. Days are 2°C to 10°C, and nights at camp drop to about -6°C to 0°C. Microspikes and gaiters come with Free Trekking Gear, and warm layers are essential. Heavy snowfall can close the road above Chakrata for a day or two, so keep your return plans flexible. #### March and April – Spring (Rhododendron Season) As the snow melts from the lower slopes, rhododendrons bloom red through the forest, and patches of old snow can remain on the higher ground into March. Days are pleasant at 10°C to 18°C, and nights at camp are about 0°C to 6°C. The views of the high peaks are still good in the early morning before the haze builds. ### Deoban Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Deoban trek costs ₹3,800 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days from Lokhandi to Koti Kanasar, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Dehradun is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Lokhandi, Trek to Saraswati **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Lokhandi, 110 km, about 4 hrs | Trek: Lokhandi → Saraswati | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Altitude: 2,560 m → 2,500 m** The group meets at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM and leaves in shared cabs for the hills. The road runs west through Vikasnagar and crosses the Yamuna plain to Kalsi, where it begins to climb, through Sahiya and up the long series of bends to Chakrata. Keep your original photo ID handy: Chakrata is an army cantonment and there are checkpoints on the way. Breakfast is at a roadside dhaba, at your own cost. Beyond Chakrata the road leaves the town behind and climbs into the deodar forest to Lokhandi, a small hamlet at 2,560 m (8,400 ft), about 110 km and 4 hours from Dehradun. Here you meet the trek team, collect your packed lunch and start walking. The trail sets off along the side of the ridge on a clear forest path, rolling gently up and down rather than climbing hard. The 4 km to Saraswati take 2–3 hours at an easy pace. Deodar and oak close in around the path, with rhododendron in the understorey, and openings in the trees give you glimpses across the valleys of Jaunsar. Listen for woodpeckers and laughingthrushes. In winter the path can be under snow from the start, which slows the walk a little but makes it beautiful. The trek leader keeps the pace relaxed so that everyone arrives fresh. Camp is a clearing in the forest at Saraswati, at 2,500 m (8,202 ft), with tents already pitched. There is time for tea and a walk around the camp as the light goes gold through the deodars. The trek leader checks everyone’s SpO2 and pulse and briefs the group on the early start for Vyas Point. Dinner is early, the cold comes in quickly after sunset, and the sky is full of stars. What to Expect: - 06:30 AM pickup at Dehradun Railway Station - Drive via Vikasnagar, Kalsi and Chakrata, with ID checks at the cantonment - Short, gentle forest walk from Lokhandi through deodar and oak - Birds and glimpses across the Jaunsar valleys - Evening health check and briefing for summit day - Overnight: camp at Saraswati ### Day 2: Saraswati to Vyas Point and Koti Kanasar **Route Details:** **Trek: Saraswati → Deoban → Vyas Point → Saraswati → Koti Kanasar | Distance: 15 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Altitude: 2,500 m → 2,900 m → 1,980 m | Drive: Koti Kanasar → Dehradun, 116 km, about 4 hrs** The day starts at about 5:00 AM with a hot drink, and the group leaves camp by headlamp. The trail climbs at a steady gradient through the Deoban forest, the oldest and densest stretch of the trek, where tall deodars and oaks shut out the sky. As the light grows, the path passes the old Deoban forest rest house, a quiet stone building in a clearing, and comes out onto the open top of the ridge. Vyas Point, at 2,900 m (9,514 ft), is the highest point of the trek. On a clear morning the Himalaya stands across the whole northern horizon: Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini and Kala Nag, the Gangotri group, the Kedarnath peaks and Chaukhamba, with the snow peaks of Kinnaur and the Shrikhand range in Himachal to the north-west. In winter the ridge can be under snow and the trek team helps you on the slippery sections. Spend time here before turning back. The group returns through the forest to Saraswati for breakfast and to pack up camp. From here the trail begins its long descent to Koti Kanasar, first through the forest and then through thinner woods and open slopes with views over the Jaunsari villages below. This is the longest stretch of the day and hard on the knees, so use your trekking poles and take it steadily. Packed lunch is eaten on the way. The trek ends at Koti Kanasar, at 1,980 m (6,496 ft), after about 15 km and 6–7 hours on foot. The cabs meet the group here for the drive back through Chakrata to Dehradun, about 116 km and 4 hours, reaching Dehradun Railway Station in the evening. Plan your onward train or bus for late night or the next day, in case of delays on the hill road. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn start at about 5:00 AM through the Deoban forest - The old Deoban forest rest house on the ridge - Sunrise view from Vyas Point across the Garhwal and Himachal peaks - Breakfast back at the Saraswati camp - Long descent through forest and village paths to Koti Kanasar - Drive back to Dehradun, arriving in the evening - Overnight: no stay (trek ends in Dehradun) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: camping in 3-person tents at Saraswati, in the forest below Deoban #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 lunch at Lokhandi to Day 2 lunch - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 2-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Lokhandi, and Koti Kanasar back to Dehradun - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Lokhandi #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near the station. **From Dehradun to Lokhandi:** 110 km, about 4 hrs by road via Vikasnagar, Kalsi and Chakrata. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** After the trek ends at Koti Kanasar on Day 2, the cab takes about 4 hrs (116 km) and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station in the evening. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. For a weekend batch that leaves Dehradun on Saturday morning, the overnight train on Friday night is the easiest option. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings before you book. **From Dehradun to Lokhandi:** 110 km, about 4 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The cab from Koti Kanasar reaches Dehradun Railway Station in the evening on Day 2. Plan your train home for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Ordinary and Volvo buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses from inside the ISBT, and from Dehradun ISBT take an auto or cab to the railway station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Lokhandi:** 110 km, about 4 hrs by road via Vikasnagar, Kalsi and Chakrata. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The cab from Koti Kanasar reaches Dehradun in the evening on Day 2. Plan your bus home for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last reliable ATMs: Vikasnagar and Dehradun; Chakrata has a bank ATM but do not depend on it - There is no ATM at Lokhandi, on the trail or at Koti Kanasar - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio, Airtel and BSNL work in Chakrata; signal is patchy at Lokhandi - Little or no signal at the Saraswati camp and in the Deoban forest; it can return in patches on the open ridge - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Chakrata ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Deoban trek, and where does it start? The Deoban trek is in the forests above Chakrata, in the Jaunsar-Bawar area of Dehradun district, Uttarakhand. It starts at Lokhandi, a hamlet on the road beyond Chakrata at 2,560 m (8,400 ft), camps at Saraswati, climbs to Vyas Point and ends at Koti Kanasar. Trekkaro picks up the group at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1, and the drive to Lokhandi is 110 km and about 4 hours. ### How many days does the Deoban trek take from Dehradun? The Deoban trek takes 2 days from Dehradun, which makes it a good weekend trek. Day 1 is the drive to Lokhandi and a gentle 4 km walk to the forest camp at Saraswati. Day 2 is the climb to Vyas Point at dawn, the return to camp and the long descent to Koti Kanasar, about 15 km in all, followed by the drive back to Dehradun by evening. Total walking is about 19 km. ### What is the highest altitude reached on the Deoban trek? The highest point of the Deoban trek is Vyas Point at 2,900 m (9,514 ft). The camp at Saraswati is at 2,500 m (8,202 ft), the start at Lokhandi is at 2,560 m (8,400 ft) and the trek ends lower down at Koti Kanasar, 1,980 m (6,496 ft). At these heights Acute Mountain Sickness is uncommon, but the trek leader checks your SpO2 and pulse every day, and you should report any headache or dizziness at once. ### What is the difficulty level of the Deoban trek for beginners? The Deoban trek is graded easy and suits beginners. Day 1 is a gentle 4 km forest walk of 2–3 hours. Day 2 is harder: about 15 km and 6–7 hours, with a pre-dawn climb to Vyas Point and a long descent to Koti Kanasar that tests the knees. We recommend three to four weeks of preparation with regular walks, jogging or stair climbing, so the long second day feels comfortable. ### What is the best time to do the Deoban trek? The Deoban trek runs from September to April. September to November gives the clearest views of the snow peaks from Vyas Point; December to February brings snow to the forest and the ridge; March and April bring rhododendron blooms. We do not run it from May to August, when summer haze hides the peaks and the monsoon brings leeches, slippery paths and landslides on the hill roads. ### Does the Deoban trek have snow, and in which months? Yes, the Deoban trek can have snow from December to February, and patches of old snow can remain on the higher ground into March. Snow can cover the trail from Lokhandi, the camp at Saraswati and the ridge at Vyas Point. Microspikes and gaiters come with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear. Heavy snowfall can close the road above Chakrata for a day or two, so keep your return plans flexible in winter. ### How cold does it get at night on the Deoban trek? Nights at the Saraswati camp on the Deoban trek are about 0°C to 8°C from September to November, -6°C to 0°C from December to February and 0°C to 6°C in March and April. Days are 10°C to 18°C in autumn and spring and 2°C to 10°C in winter. The pre-dawn climb to Vyas Point is the coldest part of the trek, so carry your warmest layer and gloves. ### What is the minimum age for the Deoban trek? The minimum age for the Deoban trek is 8 years, for children who already walk regularly, as Day 2 is about 15 km. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit: trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health, with a doctor’s fitness certificate, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Deoban trek pickup point in Dehradun? The pickup for the Deoban trek is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. Reach Dehradun the night before or early that morning: - **Train:** the overnight Nanda Devi Express from Delhi, or a day train the day before - **Bus:** overnight buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, about 25 km from the city; arrive the day before ### What does the Deoban trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Deoban trek costs ₹3,800 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days from Lokhandi to Koti Kanasar. It includes Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, against a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and ₹200 washing charge), the night’s camping in 3-person tents with sleeping bags, meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 2 lunch, forest permits, a certified trek leader and the safety kit. Transport, backpack offloading (₹800) and a single tent (₹1,000) are extra. ### How do I book the Deoban trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Deoban trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹3,800 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is transport included in the Deoban trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Deoban trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM to Lokhandi, and from Koti Kanasar back to Dehradun; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare before departure. The drive is 110 km and about 4 hours on the way up, and 116 km and about 4 hours on the way back. ### Do foreigners need a permit for the Deoban trek near Chakrata? The Deoban trek is open to Indian nationals only, because Chakrata is an access-restricted Indian Army cantonment where foreign nationals face strict restrictions. Indian trekkers need no special permit; Trekkaro arranges the forest entry permit at the forest barrier, included in the trek fee. Carry an original government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, voter ID or driving licence) for the checkpoints around Chakrata and the forest barrier, and avoid photographing army areas. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Deoban trek? There is limited mobile network and no ATM on the Deoban trek. Jio, Airtel and BSNL work in Chakrata, signal is patchy at Lokhandi, and there is little or no signal at the Saraswati camp and in the Deoban forest, with patches on the open ridge. The last reliable ATMs are in Vikasnagar and Dehradun, so carry cash in small notes from Dehradun. ### What should I carry on the Deoban trek, and is gear provided? For the Deoban trek, carry warm layers, a headlamp and water; the main gear comes with Free Trekking Gear. Pack: - Thermal inners and 2–3 fleece or woollen layers (more in winter) - Headlamp with spare batteries for the 5:00 AM start - Two 1-litre water bottles and a lunch box - Woollen cap, gloves, sunglasses and sunscreen Trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes are part of Free Trekking Gear. ### Where do we stay and what food is served on the Deoban trek? On the Deoban trek you spend one night camping at Saraswati, in the forest below Deoban, in 3-person tents with sleeping bags and mats, with a dining tent and a toilet tent at camp. Meals run from Day 1 lunch at Lokhandi to Day 2 lunch: simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food, with tea, soup and snacks. Breakfast on the drive up from Dehradun is at a roadside dhaba at your own cost. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 25 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 8 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 15 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 22 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 6 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 13 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 20 Dec 2026 - 26 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 2 Jan 2027 to 3 Jan 2027 - 9 Jan 2027 to 10 Jan 2027 - … 19 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/deoban-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Dodital - Darwa Pass Trek > Dodital - Darwa Pass Trek is a 6-day moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,150 m (13,615 ft). It covers about 36 km on foot and starts and ends at Agoda. Best time: October to June. Trekkaro price: ₹10,500 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (26 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/dodital-darwa-pass-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 4,150 m / 13,615 ft - **Trekking distance:** 36 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Agoda - **Best time:** October to June - **Temperature:** Summer (April–June): Daytime: 8°C to 15°C, Night: 0°C to 7°C, Winter (Dec–Jan): Daytime: -2°C to 5°C, Night: -12°C to -5°C - **Price:** ₹10,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (26 upcoming) ## Overview For two days the forest keeps its secret. Oak, rhododendron and pine close over the trail, streams run somewhere beside you, and the sky arrives only in pieces through the canopy. Then the trees part, and an emerald lake lies in front of you, with a small temple to Lord Ganesha on its bank. A day later you are more than 1,000 metres higher, on Darwa Top at 4,150 metres, with Bandarpunch and Swargarohini filling the horizon. The Dodital – Darwa Pass trek is built around two very different places. The first is Dodital, a freshwater lake at about 3,050 m (10,006 ft), known locally as Dhundi-tal or Ganesha-ka-tal and believed to be the birthplace of Lord Ganesha, with meadows on its banks and trout in its clear water. The second is Darwa Top, reached by a climb through birch and rhododendron forest, alpine meadow and open ridge, past Darwa Pass, where the view takes in Bandarpunch (6,316 m), Swargarohini (6,252 m), Kala Nag and Draupadi ka Danda, and on a clear day runs towards the Gangotri range. In between lie the grassy meadows of Manjhi, with their scattered shepherd huts, and long stretches of quiet oak, deodar and rhododendron forest. The Dodital – Darwa Pass trek is a 6-day, 36 km trek in the Assi Ganga Valley of Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalayas. It starts and ends at Agoda village (2,250 m / 7,382 ft), camps at Manjhi (2,700 m) and for two nights beside Dodital, and reaches its highest point at Darwa Top, 4,150 m (13,615 ft), on a day excursion from the lake. The lake feeds the Assi Ganga, which merges with the Bhagirathi at Gangori. The trek is graded Moderate: the walk to the lake is gentle, and the Darwa climb is the real test. In our experience, that split is exactly what makes it so satisfying, with an easy, shaded approach that lets you settle into the mountains and one big day that earns you a full circle of Garhwal peaks. ### The Lake of Lord Ganesha – What Makes the Dodital – Darwa Pass Trek Unmissable Dodital does not reveal itself slowly. You leave Manjhi after breakfast and climb gently for four to five hours under a dense canopy of rhododendron and oak, with shafts of sunlight piercing the trees, crisp mountain air and the sound of bubbling streams guiding you along. Then the forest simply opens, and the lake is there: emerald water, lush lakeside meadows and snow-dusted peaks beyond. On the bank stands a small Ganesh temple, and trekkers pause there for blessings. Dodital is believed to be the place where Lord Ganesha was born, and that story gives the lake a calm, spiritual weight that you feel as soon as you arrive. What makes the lake special is that you do not leave it in a hurry. Dodital is your home for two nights. In the evening you stroll the meadows around the shore and watch trout move through the crystal-clear water, and the quiet settles in the way it only can at a camp you will not have to pack up in the morning. The lake matters to the land as well as to the legend. It feeds the Assi Ganga, which flows down to join the Bhagirathi at Gangori. Sitting by the water at dusk, with the temple a short walk away, the trek feels less like a climb and more like a retreat. The next morning you set out early for Darwa. The trail climbs, steeply at times, through birch and rhododendron, and the forest thins into alpine meadow. Then the trees are gone, and you are walking open ridges, with the snow-capped ranges coming into view as you gain height. The final push takes you over Darwa Pass and on to Darwa Top at 4,150 metres, and the whole horizon opens at once: Bandarpunch at 6,316 metres and Swargarohini at 6,252 metres, Kala Nag and Draupadi ka Danda beside them, and on a clear day the view running all the way towards the Gangotri range. You sit with your packed lunch and take it in, a 360° panorama of the Garhwal Himalaya. On the way down there is time to notice alpine flowers, marmots or Himalayan griffons overhead, and by late afternoon or evening you are back at the same tents beside the same still water. ### The Assi Ganga Valley Itself This is a forest trek first. From Agoda, a village surrounded by forests and terraced fields, the trail climbs gradually through oak, deodar and rhododendron, opening now and then onto meadows with the first views of snow-clad ridges. Birdsong and the sound of mountain streams follow you, and the forest between Agoda and Manjhi is one of the best stretches of the trek for spotting Himalayan birds and langurs; you may see woodpeckers, barbets or Himalayan magpies. At Manjhi the trees step back for lush grassland and scattered shepherd huts, and the camp sits beside a clear stream, an easy place to rest before heading higher. Above Manjhi the canopy closes again, with oak, pine and rhododendron, clear streams and alpine flowers along the trail. In spring the blooming rhododendrons paint the path in red and pink. Beyond the lake the forest turns to birch and then gives way entirely to alpine meadow and bare ridges. And in winter the whole valley changes character: the lake partially freezes, the oak and rhododendron forests wear a thick coat of snow, and the same trail becomes a silent walk through a storybook winter landscape. It is the same valley in every season, and never quite the same trek. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Dodital – Darwa Pass trek is graded Moderate, and it suits a wider range of trekkers than its high point suggests. The walk up to the lake is easy to moderate, with gradual ascents, and is suitable for beginners and families. The Darwa extension is a different matter: a steep climb of about 1,100 metres from the lake to Darwa Top and back, around 10 km in 6–7 hours over rocky ridges and narrow passages. We recommend it for trekkers with good fitness and, ideally, some prior high-altitude experience. Other walking days run 5–15 km and 3–7 hours, with the 15 km walk back to Agoda the longest by distance and a steady test for the knees. In winter, snow on the trail makes every day slower and colder. We suggest about six weeks of steady preparation before departure. Season: October to June. ### Key Highlights of the Dodital – Darwa Pass Trek - **Dodital Lake** – an emerald freshwater lake at about 3,050 m (10,006 ft), with meadows on its banks and trout in its clear water. - **The Ganesh temple** – a small temple on the bank of a lake believed to be the birthplace of Lord Ganesha, known locally as Dhundi-tal or Ganesha-ka-tal. - **Two nights by the lake** – Dodital is your base, so you return to the same quiet shore after the big day. - **The 360° view from Darwa Top** – at 4,150 m (13,615 ft), facing Bandarpunch (6,316 m), Swargarohini (6,252 m), Kala Nag and Draupadi ka Danda. - **Oak and rhododendron forests** – shaded trails with clear streams, red and pink rhododendron blooms in spring, and good birdlife. - **The meadows of Manjhi** – a grassy settlement at 2,700 m (8,860 ft) with shepherd huts and a stream-side camp. - **The source of the Assi Ganga** – the lake feeds the Assi Ganga, which joins the Bhagirathi at Gangori. - **Winter snow** – from December to March the lake partially freezes and the forest lies under snow. ### Best Time to Do the Dodital – Darwa Pass Trek The Dodital – Darwa Pass trek runs across much of the year, from October right through to June. Each part of that long season shows you a different trek: clear post-monsoon air, a deep-winter snow walk, or forests in bloom. The lake and the view from Darwa Top are constant; everything around them changes. #### October to November – Post-Monsoon Clarity Once the monsoon has passed, the Assi Ganga Valley is at its freshest. The skies are crisp and clear, the landscape is still lush, and the trails are quieter. This is the window for long, sharp views from Darwa Top, when Bandarpunch and Swargarohini stand clear on the horizon and the panorama can reach towards the Gangotri range. The forest walk to the lake is green and peaceful, and the lake itself sits calm under clear skies. - **Trail conditions:** Clear skies, fresh post-monsoon landscapes and fewer crowds. - **Best for:** Panoramic views from Darwa Top and peaceful lakeside camping. #### December to March – Winter Snow In winter Dodital becomes a different place. The lake is covered in snow and partially freezes, the oak and rhododendron forests carry a thick white coat, and the approach turns into a snow walk through silent woods. The shaded trail is slower and colder in these months, and the nights are hard, but the reward is a winter lake camp in a landscape that looks nothing like the green forest of autumn and spring. - **Temperatures:** December–January: Day: -2°C to 5°C | Night at camp: -12°C to -5°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the trail and around the lake; slower, colder walking days. - **Best for:** A true snow trek, a partially frozen lake and snow-laden forests. #### April to June – Forests in Bloom Spring brings the forest back to colour. Rhododendrons bloom red and pink along the trail, the weather turns pleasant, and the lake and the mountain views are clear. Walking days are comfortable, and the meadows around Dodital are open and green. Evenings at the lake can still get chilly, even in summer, so the warmth of the day is welcome. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 15°C | Night at camp: 0°C to 7°C - **Trail conditions:** Pleasant weather, blooming forests and clear lake views. - **Best for:** Rhododendron forests in bloom, comfortable walking days and first-time trekkers. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the clearest views from Darwa Top, book an October to November batch. For a full winter snow trek, with a partially frozen lake and snow-laden forest, choose December to March and come ready for the cold. For blooming rhododendron forests and the most comfortable conditions, especially if this is one of your first treks, April to June is our pick. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Drive from Dehradun to Agoda **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Agoda (185 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: ~700 m → 2,250 m (7,382 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay at Agoda** Day 1 is a long road day, so it starts early. We recommend reaching Dehradun Railway Station before 7:00 AM, so the drive can begin on time and you reach Agoda before dark. The road climbs into the Himalayas through valleys, pine-clad slopes and busy hill towns, then enters the quieter Uttarkashi district. For most of the day you follow the Bhagirathi River upstream, through Uttarkashi and then Sangamchatti, before the road turns into the Assi Ganga Valley. Uttarkashi is the last reliable ATM before Agoda, so withdraw the cash you need there. Meals on the drive are not included. By evening you reach Agoda, at 2,250 m, a small village surrounded by forests and terraced fields and the starting point of the trek. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis, and dinner is served here. Agoda is the last place with a stable mobile signal, and only Jio works consistently, so make your calls tonight. What to Expect: - Long drive from Dehradun to Agoda: 185 km, 8–9 hrs - Road along the Bhagirathi River through Uttarkashi and Sangamchatti - First views of the Assi Ganga Valley as you near the trailhead - Last reliable ATM at Uttarkashi; at Agoda only Jio works consistently - Dinner at the guesthouse or homestay, triple or quad sharing - Overnight: Guesthouse / homestay at Agoda (2,250 m / 7,382 ft) ### Day 2: Agoda to Manjhi **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,250 m → 2,700 m (8,860 ft) | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Terrain: gradual forest trail through oak, deodar and rhododendron, with open meadows | Stay: Tents at Manjhi** Day 2 is your first walking day, and it is a gentle one. You leave Agoda after breakfast, and the trail climbs gradually into thick forest of oak, deodar and rhododendron. The canopy keeps you in shade for long stretches, and gaps in the trees give you glimpses of the surrounding valleys. The gradient stays easy all the way, and there is no hurry: the whole walk is 6 km, and you have the afternoon to rest at the end. Find a pace you can hold for an hour without stopping, and let your breathing settle into it. The forest is the best part of today. Birdsong follows you most of the way, and now and then you hear a mountain stream running near the trail. The section between Agoda and Manjhi is one of the best on the trek for spotting Himalayan birds and langurs, and for photographs of sunlight falling through the trees, so keep your camera within reach. Between the forest sections the trail crosses stretches of open meadow. Pause at these. They give you the first views of the snow-clad ridges. You reach Manjhi by early afternoon. It is a small settlement of scattered shepherd huts set among lush grasslands, and the campsite sits beside a clear stream. You sleep in tents on a triple sharing basis, with a large mess tent for meals. At 2,700 m, Manjhi is a good acclimatisation stop before you go higher. In our experience the short day lets your body adjust without strain. After lunch the afternoon is yours. Walk out across the meadows, sit by the water, or simply rest and enjoy the stillness. Tea, coffee, soup and snacks are served regularly at camp. Mobile signal is unavailable once you leave Agoda, so tonight is a quiet first night in tents. What to Expect: - First trekking day: 6 km, 3–4 hrs, a gradual climb from Agoda - Shaded forest of oak, deodar and rhododendron - Chances of spotting Himalayan birds and langurs in the forest section - Open meadows with the first views of snow-clad ridges - Campsite beside a clear stream, among shepherd huts and grasslands - Overnight: Tents at Manjhi (2,700 m / 8,860 ft) ### Day 3: Manjhi to Dodital Lake **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,700 m → 3,050 m (10,006 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: gentle, steady climb through rhododendron, oak and pine forest | Stay: Tents by Dodital Lake** After a warm breakfast at Manjhi, you walk back into the forest. The trail keeps climbing gently under a dense canopy of rhododendron, oak and pine. The distance is short, only 5 km, but the steady climb makes it a 4–5 hour walk, so keep the same slow, even pace as yesterday. Clear streams run along the trail, and alpine flowers grow at its edges. This is a quiet, shaded stretch. Shafts of sunlight come down through the trees, the air is crisp in the shade, and the sound of the streams stays with you as you climb. In spring the rhododendrons bloom and the trail turns red and pink. Then, late in the walk, the forest opens up all at once and Dodital Lake is in front of you. Dodital sits at 3,050 m. It is a clear, emerald freshwater lake surrounded by meadows, with snow-dusted peaks behind it. Locally it is also called Dhundi-tal or Ganesha-ka-tal, and it is sacred: it is believed to be the birthplace of Lord Ganesha. A small Ganesh Temple stands on the bank, and trekkers stop there for blessings. The lake feeds the Assi Ganga River, which later joins the Bhagirathi at Gangori. In winter the lake partially freezes and the forest around it lies under thick snow. Camp is pitched by the lake, in tents on a triple sharing basis, and this is your home for the next two nights. Spend the evening strolling the lakeside meadows and watch trout swim in the clear water. Evenings at Dodital get chilly even in summer, when nights on this trek drop to 0–7°C, so put on a light woollen or down jacket before the sun goes down. Use the evening to sort your daypack for the long climb to Darwa tomorrow. What to Expect: - Gentle 5 km climb through rhododendron, oak and pine forest - Clear streams and alpine flowers along the trail; rhododendrons in bloom in spring - First view of Dodital Lake as the forest opens out - Small Ganesh Temple on the bank of a lake believed to be the birthplace of Lord Ganesha - Evening walk on the lakeside meadows, with trout in the clear water - Overnight: Tents by Dodital Lake (3,050 m / 10,006 ft) ### Day 4: Summit Day - Dodital to Darwa Pass and Darwa Top, back to Dodital **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,050 m → 4,150 m (13,615 ft) → 3,050 m | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: steep birch and rhododendron forest, alpine meadows, rocky ridges | Stay: Tents by Dodital Lake** Today is the most demanding day of the trek, and the most rewarding. You eat an early breakfast by the lake and set out for Darwa Top at 4,150 m. The climb is steep at times. The trail first runs through birch and rhododendron forest, then the trees thin out into alpine meadows. Lunch is packed today, so carry it along with plenty of water and snacks. The extension to Darwa is a real step up from the walk to the lake, and we recommend it for trekkers with good fitness and some prior experience. Above the meadows the ascent becomes rugged. The trail crosses rocky ridges and narrow passages, and this is the hard section of the day. Shorten your steps, place your feet with care, and stop to catch your breath rather than pushing through. The trekkers who climb slowly here have the most energy left for the final push. As the trees fall away behind you, the views of the snow-capped ranges grow wider with every ridge you gain. The final push takes you to Darwa Pass and then on to Darwa Top. From the top you get a full 360° panorama of the Garhwal Himalaya. Bandarpunch (6,316 m) and Swargarohini (6,252 m) stand out, with Kala Nag and Draupadi ka Danda among the peaks around them. On a clear day the view extends all the way toward the Gangotri range. Spend time here, take photographs and eat your packed snacks before you start down. You return to Dodital by the same trail, reaching camp by late afternoon or evening. The descent feels gentler and gives you time to look around: alpine flowers, marmots, or even Himalayan griffons flying overhead. Walking poles are very useful on the steep sections going down. Back at the lake, the same camp and a hot dinner are waiting for you. What to Expect: - Early start for the hardest day: 10 km, 6–7 hrs, out and back from Dodital - Steep climb through birch and rhododendron forest into alpine meadows - Rocky ridges and narrow passages below Darwa Pass - 360° view from Darwa Top: Bandarpunch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag and Draupadi ka Danda - Packed lunch; carry plenty of water and snacks, and use walking poles on the descent - Overnight: Tents by Dodital Lake (3,050 m / 10,006 ft) ### Day 5: Dodital to Agoda **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,050 m → 2,250 m (7,382 ft) | Distance: 15 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: long descent on the forest trail, meadows and river crossings | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay at Agoda** Today you walk all the way down from Dodital to Agoda. It is the longest walking day of the trek, 15 km and 6–7 hours, but the descent is comfortable and the trail is familiar. After breakfast you leave the lake and retrace the forest trail you came up on. Going down is faster, but we recommend taking your time. Start with your warm layers on, as the morning by the lake is cold, and take them off once you warm up in the forest. The steeper forest stretches are where your knees take the strain. Trekking poles are a blessing today. Use them on every steep drop, let them take some of your weight on each step down, take small steps and keep your knees soft rather than locked. The forest is rich in birdlife on the way down, and if you walk quietly you may spot woodpeckers, barbets or Himalayan magpies. Lower down, the trail makes its river crossings and passes Manjhi and its shepherd huts once more. You stop for lunch near Manjhi, then continue downhill through forest and meadow on the last stretch to Agoda. Keep sipping water through the day. It is easy to forget on a descent, and a long downhill day still tires you out. You end the day back in Agoda, where a guesthouse or homestay waits on a triple or quad sharing basis. After the nights in tents, a bed and a roof feel especially good, and the warmth of the village is a welcome change. Agoda also brings back mobile signal, though only Jio works consistently. Eat a good dinner and rest your legs. If they feel sore, a slow walk around the village in the evening helps more than sitting still. Tomorrow is a long day on the road. What to Expect: - Longest walking day: 15 km, 6–7 hrs, all downhill from Dodital - Familiar forest trail, with woodpeckers, barbets and Himalayan magpies possible - River crossings and the shepherd huts of Manjhi on the way down - Lunch near Manjhi; trekking poles for the steeper forest stretches - Mobile signal again at Agoda, Jio only - Overnight: Guesthouse / homestay at Agoda (2,250 m / 7,382 ft) ### Day 6: Drive from Agoda to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Agoda → Dehradun (185 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 2,250 m → ~700 m (2,296 ft) | Stay: Not included (trip ends on arrival at Dehradun)** Your last morning starts early in Agoda. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, and the cab leaves Agoda at around 07:00 AM for Dehradun Railway Station. The drive is 185 km and takes 8–9 hours, retracing the mountain roads you came up on. The road follows the Assi Ganga down to Sangamchatti and then joins the Bhagirathi River, so you stay close to Himalayan rivers nearly the whole way. You pass through Uttarkashi, a busy Himalayan town, and get your last views of the Garhwal ranges before the road drops to the plains. Meals on the drive are not included, so plan to buy food on the way. The cab reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 06:00 PM. Your stay in Dehradun is not included. We recommend booking your train or flight home for late evening or the next morning, which leaves buffer time in case the drive runs long. What to Expect: - Early departure from Agoda, around 07:00 AM - Shared cab to Dehradun Railway Station, not included in the trek fee - Drive along the Assi Ganga and Bhagirathi rivers through Uttarkashi - Last views of the Garhwal ranges before the plains - Book onward travel for late evening or the next morning - Trek ends at Agoda; drop at Dehradun Railway Station by about 06:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: guesthouse or homestay in Agoda, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Manjhi and Dodital Lake #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner - Simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks served regularly during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents and tables at the campsites - All technical equipment needed on the trek, including ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by certified local mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Agoda and back. Trekkaro helps the group book a shared cab, approximately ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Agoda #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Agoda #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under inclusions is not part of the package; ask in advance if you have any questions ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Agoda leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Agoda:** The 185 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Agoda at around 07:00 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 06:00 PM (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, shared). Mountain roads can run late, so book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) – the pickup point itself, with direct trains from Delhi. For the 07:30 AM cab, take the overnight train or reach Dehradun a day early; book ahead in peak season and check current timings. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning, in time for the pickup. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – good choices if you travel the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Agoda:** The 185 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Agoda at around 07:00 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 06:00 PM. Book a late-evening or overnight train with a few hours of margin, or travel the next day – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hrs. Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night, so an overnight bus can get you in before the 07:30 AM pickup. - **Take a government bus** – board from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises, as they are less reliable. - **Dehradun ISBT to the pickup** – take an app cab, an auto rickshaw or a shared three-wheeler to Dehradun Railway Station. **From Dehradun to Agoda:** The 185 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 07:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Agoda at around 07:00 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 06:00 PM. Book a night bus to Delhi from Dehradun ISBT, leaving time for the transfer and road delays – check current timings. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Uttarkashi has the last reliable ATM before Agoda - There is no ATM on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Agoda is the last place with a stable signal, and only Jio works consistently - There is no reliable signal after Agoda - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Dodital Darwa Pass trek, and where does it start? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalayas. It starts from Agoda village (2,250 m / 7,382 ft) in the Assi Ganga valley, about 185 km (8–9 hours) by road from Dehradun. From Agoda the trail climbs through forest to Manjhi and Dodital Lake (3,050 m), then up via Darwa Pass to Darwa Top at 4,150 m (13,615 ft). ### How many days is the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek takes 6 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 4 trekking days covering about 36 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Dehradun and Agoda (185 km, 8–9 hours) - **Days 2–3:** short days to Manjhi and Dodital Lake, 3–5 hours each - **Summit day:** Day 4, Dodital to Darwa Top and back, 10 km in 6–7 hours - **Longest day:** Day 5, 15 km downhill to Agoda in 6–7 hours ### What is the altitude of the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The highest point of the Dodital Darwa Pass trek is Darwa Top at 4,150 m (13,615 ft), reached via Darwa Pass. The trek starts at Agoda (2,250 m), so you gain about 1,900 m. - **Agoda:** 2,250 m (7,382 ft) - **Manjhi camp:** 2,700 m (8,860 ft) - **Dodital Lake camp:** 3,050 m (10,006 ft) - **Darwa Top:** 4,150 m (13,615 ft) ### How difficult is the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek is graded Moderate. The walk to Dodital Lake is gradual and short, but the Darwa Pass day is a steep, challenging climb. - **Days 2–3:** gradual forest trail, 3–5 hours a day - **Day 4:** a steep climb through birch and rhododendron forest to rocky ridges and narrow passages - **Winter:** from December to March the trail is under snow ### Is the Dodital Darwa Pass trek good for beginners? Yes, the Dodital Darwa Pass trek suits beginners with good fitness: the trail up to Dodital Lake is beginner-friendly with gradual ascents. The Darwa Pass day is steeper and more demanding, and is better suited to trekkers with good fitness and some prior experience. ### What fitness level do I need for the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? For the Dodital Darwa Pass trek you should be able to walk 3–7 hours a day, including a steep climb of about 1,100 m and back on the Darwa Pass day. - **Summit day:** 10 km out and back from Dodital in 6–7 hours - **Descent day:** 15 km downhill to Agoda; trekking poles help on the steeper forest stretches - **Train before the trek:** regular cardio and uphill walks with a loaded backpack ### What is the best time for the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek runs from October to June: December–March for snow, April–June for spring forests and October–November for clear post-monsoon skies. - **December–March:** Dodital is under snow and partly frozen - **April–June:** pleasant weather, rhododendrons in bloom and clear lake views - **October–November:** crisp skies and wide Himalayan views after the monsoon ### Is there snow on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Yes, from December to March the Dodital Darwa Pass trek is under snow and Dodital Lake is partly frozen; microspikes and gaiters are provided free. - **Layers:** plan on 5 warm layers in winter - **Hands and face:** waterproof gloves and a balaclava for winter departures - **Eyes:** UV sunglasses are essential on snow to prevent snow blindness ### How cold is the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? In summer (April–June) the Dodital Darwa Pass trek has days of 8–15°C and nights of 0–7°C; in winter (December–January) days are -2°C to 5°C and nights -12°C to -5°C. - **Layers:** 5 warm layers in winter, 3–4 in April–June and October–November - **Coldest part:** the climb to Darwa Pass and Darwa Top at 4,150 m - **Jacket:** a -10°C padded jacket comes free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear ### Which mountains can you see on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? From Darwa Top on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek you get a 360° view of Bandarpunch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag and Draupadi ka Danda. - **Dodital Lake:** a clear lake at 3,050 m with trout in the water - **Manjhi:** first views of snow-clad ridges from the open meadows - **Wildlife:** Himalayan birds and langurs in the forest, including woodpeckers, barbets and Himalayan magpies ### What is the terrain like on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek is mostly forest trail through oak, deodar, rhododendron and pine with open meadows, followed by steep birch forest and rocky ridges on the way to Darwa Pass. - **Agoda to Manjhi:** gradual forest trail with open meadows - **Manjhi to Dodital:** a gentle, steady climb through rhododendron, oak and pine - **Dodital to Darwa Top:** steep birch and rhododendron forest, alpine meadows and rocky ridges - **Return:** a long forest descent with river crossings ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek reaches 4,150 m, so altitude sickness is possible, but you sleep no higher than 3,050 m at Dodital and climb to Darwa Top and back in a day. - **Gradual gain:** about 450 m on Day 2 and 350 m on Day 3 - **Summit day:** about 1,100 m up to Darwa Top and back down to sleep at Dodital - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher ### Can trekkers above 60 do the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Trekkers above 60 can consider the Dodital Darwa Pass trek if they are fit, as it is a Moderate trek with gradual days to the lake and one steep climb to 4,150 m. - **Doctor’s advice:** consult your doctor before the trek - **Offloading:** your backpack can be carried for ₹1,000 + 5% GST - **Insurance:** mandatory, covering high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### How do I reach the Dodital Darwa Pass trek base camp? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek starts from Agoda, 185 km (8–9 hours) from Dehradun. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 7:30 AM, so arrive by overnight train or the day before. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN), the pickup point; the overnight Nanda Devi Express arrives early in the morning - **By bus:** overnight government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT (6–7 hours) - **Return:** the cab leaves Agoda around 7:00 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 6:00 PM ### Is transport included in the Dodital Darwa Pass trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Dodital Darwa Pass trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs between Dehradun Railway Station and Agoda (about ₹6,500 per vehicle, 5–6 seater, each way), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Payment:** paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - **Route:** along the Bhagirathi through Uttarkashi and Sangamchatti - **Meals in transit:** not included on the drive days ### Where do we stay on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? On the Dodital Darwa Pass trek you stay 2 nights in a guesthouse or homestay at Agoda and 3 nights in tents at Manjhi and Dodital Lake. - **Agoda (Day 1 and Day 5):** guesthouse or homestay, triple or quad sharing - **Manjhi (Day 2):** camp beside a clear stream among shepherd huts - **Dodital Lake (Days 3–4):** lakeside camp in 3-person tents - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek ### Who leads the Dodital Darwa Pass trek, and are local guides included? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek is led by experienced trek leaders supported by local certified mountain guides, combining safety with local expertise. All technical equipment for the trek is included, from tents and sleeping bags to ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes. ### Is the Dodital Darwa Pass trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, women can join the Dodital Darwa Pass trek on their own: you trek in a group led by experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides. - **Tents:** shared 3-person tents, or a single tent for ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the whole trek - **Stay at Agoda:** guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis - **Connectivity:** call your family from Agoda, where only Jio works; there is no reliable signal after that ### What food is served on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Meals on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food. - **Through the day:** tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly - **On the trail:** packed lunches, including on the Darwa Pass day, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals during the drive between Dehradun and Agoda ### Is drinking water available on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? On the Dodital Darwa Pass trek carry two 1 L bottles, and take plenty of water and snacks on the summit day to Darwa Top. - **Winter:** make one bottle insulated so your water does not freeze - **Hydration:** carry a few ORS sachets for the trail ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Yes, the Dodital Darwa Pass trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear: trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and a trekking pole, plus microspikes and gaiters for snow, at no rental fee. - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Value:** shoes worth ₹6,999 and a jacket worth ₹3,299 - **Shoes:** waterproof with ankle support ### Is backpack offloading available on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek costs ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the full trek, for a bag of up to 9 kg. - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Late requests:** charges may be higher if you ask for offloading at Agoda - **Day pack:** a 20–30 L day pack is needed if you offload ### Is there a doctor on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? No, a doctor is not part of the Dodital Darwa Pass trek package. Safety is handled by experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides, with emergency support at every camp. - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders - **Evacuation:** stretchers at each campsite; your travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation - **Your part:** carry a personal medical kit and consult your doctor before the trek ### What documents do I need for the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? For the Dodital Darwa Pass trek you need a government photo ID and travel insurance. - **Photo ID:** original passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID, checked at forest check posts and for trek registration - **Photocopy:** of the same ID, kept with the original in a waterproof pouch - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Do I need a permit for the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Yes, but all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Dodital Darwa Pass trek fee, so you do not need to arrange them. Carry your original photo ID and a photocopy, as they are checked at forest check posts. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? No, there is no ATM or reliable mobile network on the Dodital Darwa Pass trail. Uttarkashi has the last reliable ATM, and Agoda is the last place with a stable signal, where only Jio works consistently. - **Network:** unavailable after Agoda, with signal again when you return on Day 5 - **Power bank:** carry one, as the cold drains phone batteries fast - **Cash:** enough for your share of the cab fare and small expenses ### What is special about Dodital Lake on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? Dodital Lake (3,050 m / 10,006 ft) is believed to be the birthplace of Lord Ganesha, and a small Ganesh Temple stands on its bank. The Dodital Darwa Pass trek camps beside it for two nights. - **Trout:** visible in the clear water - **Meadows:** lakeside meadows for an evening walk - **Winter:** the lake is partly frozen from December to March ### Is there a buffer day on the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The Dodital Darwa Pass trek is completed as planned in normal weather, but in bad weather or heavy snowfall a buffer day may be added at ₹2,100 + 5% GST, payable on the spot if used. Keep a spare day before your onward travel, especially for winter departures. ### What is the minimum age for the Dodital Darwa Pass trek? The minimum age for the Dodital Darwa Pass trek is 10 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 10 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 17 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 24 Dec 2026 - 6 Mar 2027 to 11 Mar 2027 - 13 Mar 2027 to 18 Mar 2027 - 20 Mar 2027 to 25 Mar 2027 - … 14 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/dodital-darwa-pass-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Gaumukh Tapovan Trek > Gaumukh Tapovan Trek is a 7-day moderate–difficult trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,463 m (14,640 ft). It covers about 46 km on foot and starts and ends at Gangotri. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹16,500 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 14 May 2027 (16 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/gaumukh-tapovan-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate–Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,463 m / 14,640 ft - **Trekking distance:** 46 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Gangotri - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** May-Jun: Gangotri 5°C to 15°C, Tapovan -5°C to 3°C | Sep-Oct: Gangotri 5°C to 18°C, Tapovan -8°C to 2°C - **Price:** ₹16,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 14 May 2027 (16 upcoming) ## Overview Gaumukh is the mouth of the Ganges. Not a river mouth – the actual source, a tongue of glacial ice at 12,770 feet from which the Bhagirathi River emerges, cold and white, at the foot of the Gangotri Glacier. To stand at Gaumukh is to stand at the origin of one of the most sacred and significant rivers on earth. To continue to Tapovan is to enter a high-altitude meadow at 14,640 feet that exists in the immediate presence of Shivling Peak, 6,543 metres of near-vertical rock and ice that rises from the meadow floor so directly and so completely that it fills the entire visual field above you. The Gaumukh-Tapovan trek is one of the most spiritually and visually significant treks in India, not just as a Himalayan adventure but as a journey to a place that has drawn Hindu pilgrims, mountaineers, sadhus, and seekers of all kinds for centuries. The Gangotri Glacier, at 30 kilometres, one of the longest glaciers in the Garhwal Himalayas, is the source of the Bhagirathi River, a primary tributary of the Ganga, and the trail to Gaumukh follows the river upstream through the Bhagirathi gorge in one of the most dramatically enclosed and geologically exposed valleys in the entire Himalayan range. In seven days, Trekkaro takes you from the temple town of Gangotri to the glacier snout at Gaumukh, up onto the high meadows of Tapovan beneath Shivling, and back, an experience that combines physical challenge, natural grandeur, and a depth of significance unlike any other route in the accessible Indian Himalayas. The Gaumukh Tapovan trek begins and ends at Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft), the sacred Shaivite temple town in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand, positioned at the head of the Bhagirathi Valley approximately 100 km from the district headquarters. The route follows the right bank of the Bhagirathi River upstream through the Bhagirathi gorge to Chirbasa and Bhojbasa, then continues to Gaumukh at 3,892 m / 12,770 ft, the snout of the Gangotri Glacier and the source of the Bhagirathi River. From Gaumukh, the route crosses the glacier moraine and ascends to Tapovan at 4,463 m / 14,640 ft, the extraordinary high-altitude meadow beneath Shivling Peak (6,543 m). The return follows the same route back to Gangotri. The total trekking distance is approximately 46 km across five trekking days. ### Gaumukh – The Mouth of the Ganga Gaumukh – literally 'cow's mouth' in Sanskrit – is the terminal snout of the Gangotri Glacier at 3,892 m (12,770 ft), from which the Bhagirathi River emerges as a roaring, white glacial torrent from beneath the ice. The glacier itself is one of the primary glacial systems of the Garhwal Himalayas: 30 km long, up to 4 km wide, and fed by the accumulated snowfall and ice of the surrounding 6,000- and 7,000-metre peaks. The snout at Gaumukh is not static; the glacier has been retreating at a documented rate for decades, making the current location of the ice face visibly different from photographs taken even a decade ago. To stand at Gaumukh is to stand at one of the most geographically and spiritually significant points in India: the origin of the sacred Ganga, at the foot of a 30-kilometre river of ice, in a valley that has been a destination of pilgrimage for more than two thousand years. ### Tapovan – Where Shivling Fills the Sky Tapovan is a high-altitude alpine meadow at 4,463 m (14,640 ft) situated above the Gangotri Glacier, approximately 3 kilometres from Gaumukh across the glacier moraine. It is the base camp for mountaineering expeditions attempting Shivling, Meru, and Bhagirathi group peaks, but it is also, for trekkers, simply one of the most extraordinary places in the Himalayas to arrive and be present. Shivling (6,543 m), the peak that defines Tapovan's visual character, rises immediately above the meadow in a nearly vertical column of rock, ice, and light that changes colour and character continuously from dawn through to dusk. The name Shivling references its uncanny resemblance, from the Tapovan meadow floor to the iconic form of the Shivalinga. At 14,640 feet, in a meadow bordered by glaciers on three sides and by Shivling directly above, the word 'extraordinary' becomes inadequate. You simply have to be there. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Gaumukh-Tapovan trek is graded moderate-difficult. It is not recommended for first-time Himalayan trekkers. The route involves sustained altitude above 12,000 feet for multiple consecutive days, a glacier crossing on loose moraine between Gaumukh and Tapovan that requires careful foot placement and technical awareness, and overnight camping at Tapovan at 14,640 feet, the highest camp on this route and among the highest standard trekking camp sites in Uttarakhand. Additionally, this is a restricted forest area under the Gangotri National Park authority, and entry is subject to permit quotas. Trekkaro arranges all permits. Minimum recommended age: 16 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness, and a medical fitness certificate signed by a doctor is mandatory for all ages on this route. Daily trekking hours: 4 to 8 hours. Best season: mid-May to June and mid-September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Gaumukh Tapovan Trek - Gaumukh Glacier snout (3,892 m / 12,770 ft) – the source of the Ganga, one of the most significant points in India - Tapovan meadow (4,463 m / 14,640 ft) – with Shivling (6,543 m) rising directly above the campsite - Shivling Peak views from Tapovan – among the most dramatic mountain compositions in accessible Indian trekking - The Bhagirathi Gorge Trail – one of the most geologically exposed and visually dramatic valley walks in the Himalayas - Glacier moraine crossing from Gaumukh to Tapovan – technical terrain requiring careful guidance - Bhojbasa camp (3,775 m / 12,385 ft) – the acclimatisation night with views of the Gangotri peaks - Bhagirathi I, II, III and Meru peak views from multiple points on the upper route - Gangotri temple town (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) – one of the Char Dham pilgrimage sites, start and end point - Certified Trekkaro trek leader & guides, twice-daily health monitoring, and FTG gear with no rental fee ### Best Time to Visit Gaumukh Tapovan The Gaumukh Tapovan trekking season is shaped by three factors: the opening of the Gangotri temple (which determines road access), the monsoon, and the onset of winter snowfall above 12,000 feet. There are two distinct trekking windows, a pre-monsoon window from mid-May to June and a post-monsoon window from mid-September to October. The route is closed during the monsoon (July to August) when the Bhagirathi Gorge trail becomes hazardous with rockfall, flash flooding, and unstable ground. #### Mid-May to June - Pre-Monsoon Window (Snow on Tapovan) The Gangotri temple opens in late April or early May (determined by the Char Dham pilgrimage calendar), making the pre-monsoon window available from mid-May. The trail carries residual winter snow above Chirbasa, and the Tapovan meadow in May and early June is partially snow-covered, which adds a dramatic visual quality to the Shivling views but also requires microspikes and careful movement on the moraine crossing. The Bhagirathi River runs at its most powerful in late May and June, fed by snowmelt; the sound of the river through the gorge in this season is extraordinary. Wildflowers begin appearing on the lower trail from late May, and the air quality is sharp and clear before the pre-monsoon haze builds. This window has fewer trekkers than the post-monsoon period. - **Temperatures:** Gangotri: 5°C to 15°C | Bhojbasa camp: -2°C to 5°C | Tapovan: -5°C to 3°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow above Chirbasa. Powerful river flow. Clear air. Fewer trekkers. - **Best for:** Shivling in snow conditions, powerful Bhagirathi River views, and pre-monsoon clarity. #### July to August - Monsoon Season (CLOSED) The Gaumukh-Tapovan route is closed during the monsoon. The Bhagirathi gorge trail is exposed to rockfall from the unstable canyon walls above Chirbasa, and the glacier moraine above Gaumukh becomes extremely dangerous when wet. Trekkaro does not operate Gaumukh Tapovan batches during July and August under any circumstances. - **Status:** CLOSED. No Trekkaro batches operate July–August. #### Mid-September to October - Post-Monsoon Window (Most Recommended) This is Trekkaro's most recommended window for Gaumukh Tapovan. The monsoon ends in early to mid-September, and the trail dries within approximately two weeks. By late September, the upper route is clear, the glacier moraine is at its most stable, and the mountain visibility is at its sharpest of the entire year. Shivling from Tapovan in October light, the low-angle sun of early autumn illuminating the peak's south face in shades of orange and rose at dawn and dusk, is among the most photographed mountain compositions in India. The nights at Tapovan in September and October are genuinely cold, making the sleeping bag rating critical, but the days are crisp, clear, and extraordinarily rewarding. The Gangotri temple closes for the winter in late October or early November, marking the hard end of this window. - **Temperatures:** Gangotri: 5°C to 18°C | Bhojbasa: -3°C to 8°C | Tapovan: -8°C to 2°C - **Trail conditions:** Fully dry trail. Stable moraine. Sharpest visibility. Best Shivling light. - **Best for:** Peak mountain views, stable glacier crossing, autumn light on Shivling. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the best combination of trail conditions, mountain visibility, and Shivling views, book a late September to mid-October batch. For the powerful pre-monsoon river and early-season snowscapes, mid-May to early June is a rewarding alternative. Both windows deliver an extraordinary experience; the deciding factor is whether you prefer snow conditions or the sharp clarity of post-monsoon light. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Gangotri **Route Details:** **Pickup: Dehradun Railway Station, 6:30 AM | Drive: Dehradun → Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) | Activity: Temple visit, gear check, health baseline, acclimatisation walk | Overnight: Gangotri** The drive to Gangotri is an approach that earns its own place in the experience. From Dehradun, the road climbs through Mussoorie and Dharasu before joining the Bhagirathi River at Uttarkashi. From Uttarkashi onwards, the road follows the Bhagirathi upstream through a gorge that narrows and deepens progressively as altitude increases, the river visible far below in stretches of churning white water between sheer canyon walls of granite and schist. The scale of the valley tightens around the road as you climb. By the time Gangotri appears, a cluster of stone buildings and temple structures in a high valley at 3,065 metres, the contrast between the narrow gorge behind you and the relative openness of the Gangotri basin provides an immediate and visceral sense of arrival. Gangotri is one of the Char Dham pilgrimage sites, the four sacred destinations of Hindu tradition. The Gangotri Temple, dedicated to the goddess Ganga, sits at the bank of the Bhagirathi River and has been a site of religious significance for centuries. The town itself exists at the intersection of two worlds: the pilgrimage world of the Char Dham circuit and the mountaineering world that uses Gangotri as the base for expeditions to Shivling, Meru, Bhagirathi, and the surrounding peaks. This duality of devotion and mountaineering, ancient tradition and modern adventure, gives Gangotri a character unlike any other trek gateway in India. The afternoon is structured for acclimatisation, gear check, and preparation. Trekkaro's health baseline is taken at Gangotri: SpO₂, pulse, and blood pressure for every trekker, recorded as the individual reference point for all subsequent daily readings. The trek briefing covers the route, daily structure, health monitoring protocol, AMS awareness specific to the altitudes ahead (Tapovan at 14,640 feet is a serious high-altitude camp), and a review of the glacier crossing on Day 4. An evening acclimatisation walk along the Bhagirathi River to the temple and back is recommended. Sleep early. The trail begins tomorrow. What to Expect: - Drive through the Bhagirathi gorge to Gangotri – progressively narrowing, geologically dramatic - Gangotri Temple (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) – one of the Char Dham, on the bank of the Bhagirathi River - FTG gear check and fitting at Gangotri assembly point before Day 2 departure - Health baseline: SpO₂, pulse, and blood pressure recorded for every trekker - Trek briefing: route overview, AMS protocol, glacier crossing awareness, daily structure - Evening acclimatisation walk along the Bhagirathi River to the temple and back - Overnight: Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) - first night of altitude adjustment ### Day 2: Gangotri to Chirbasa **Route Details:** Altitude: 3,065 m (10,050 ft) → 3,600 m (11,808 ft) | Distance: ~9 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: Forest trail, riverside gorge path, rocky sections above treeline The trail from Gangotri to Chirbasa follows the right bank of the Bhagirathi River upstream through the Bhagirathi gorge, one of the most dramatically enclosed and geologically exposed valley walks in the entire Himalayan range. The gorge walls above the trail are vertical in sections, composed of ancient granite, gneiss, and schist in layered formations that display hundreds of millions of years of geological history in visible cross-section. The river below is fast, white, and extraordinarily loud in the early sections where the gorge is at its narrowest, a sound so constant and so powerful that it becomes a kind of baseline noise that shapes the entire character of the day's walk. The trail through the gorge passes through birch and pine forest in the lower sections before the treeline retreats and the terrain opens to bare rock and alpine scrub. Chirbasa – 'place of the chir pine' in the local dialect – sits at the point where the last significant tree cover ends, at 3,600 metres. The campsite is positioned on a rocky shelf above the river with the first clear views of the Gangotri peaks: the Bhagirathi massif is visible from Chirbasa, its glacially carved ridgelines rising above the upper valley in a sequence that previews the scale of what lies ahead. The Gangotri Glacier itself is not yet visible from Chirbasa, but the landscape has already become one that the lower valley, for all its drama, did not contain. Day 2 is a sustained but manageable introduction to the route; the altitude gain of approximately 1,800 feet over 9 km is within the range most prepared trekkers handle comfortably. Use the day to establish your rhythm on the gorge path, to begin adapting to the reduced oxygen at Chirbasa's altitude, and to observe the geological and ecological changes that occur across the 9 kilometres between Gangotri and camp. Tomorrow the trail leaves the forest entirely. What to Expect: - Gorge trail along the Bhagirathi River – vertical canyon walls, powerful white water, extraordinary geology - Forest transition from pine and birch to open alpine terrain above Chirbasa treeline - First views of the Bhagirathi massif and upper Gangotri Valley peaks from Chirbasa camp - Chirbasa camp (3,600 m / 11,808 ft) on a rocky shelf above the Bhagirathi River - Overnight: Chirbasa – last significant tree cover; first open glacier peak views ### Day 3: Chirbasa to Bhojbasa **Route Details:** Altitude: 3,600 m (11,808 ft) → 3,775 m (12,385 ft) | Distance: ~5 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Terrain: Open rocky valley, lateral moraine, last section above treeline The trail from Chirbasa to Bhojbasa is shorter in distance than the previous day but no less significant in what it reveals. The gorge walls that enclosed the lower route open gradually as altitude increases, and the valley floor, previously narrow and forested, widens into a broad, open glacial valley that frames the upper mountain terrain on all sides. The Gangotri Glacier, one of the longest glaciers in the Garhwal Himalayas at approximately 30 kilometres, becomes visible in the middle section of this day's walk as the lateral moraine of its lower terminus appears on the right side of the valley. The scale of the glacier, even seen from a lateral distance, is immediately and genuinely astonishing. This is not a small alpine snowfield. This is a river of ice that has carved the valley you are walking through over geological time. Bhojbasa, named for the birch (bhoj) trees that are the last surviving vegetation at this altitude, sits at 3,775 metres in a flat, open section of the valley with the full span of the Gangotri Glacier visible in the distance and the Bhagirathi group of peaks rising above it. Bhagirathi I (6,856 m), Bhagirathi II (6,512 m), and Bhagirathi III (6,454 m) form a spectacular vertical wall of rock and ice on the valley's eastern side that is visible in full from the Bhojbasa campsite. Shivling, still partially obscured by the valley ridgeline at this point, shows its upper reaches, enough to understand what is coming tomorrow. Bhojbasa is the acclimatisation camp before the Gaumukh day. The altitude here, 3,775 m / 12,385 ft, is a significant step above Chirbasa and requires a rest afternoon rather than further exertion. Eat a full dinner, drink 3 litres minimum, and be in your sleeping bag by 9:00 PM. The evening health check at Bhojbasa is among the most important of the trek: it establishes whether every trekker's body is responding to altitude appropriately before the push to Gaumukh and Tapovan that begins tomorrow. What to Expect: - Shorter day (5 km) – designed for acclimatisation. Do not rush. Rest is the priority. - First view of the Gangotri Glacier lateral moraine as the valley opens above Chirbasa - Bhagirathi I, II, and III visible in full from Bhojbasa camp – 6,856 m wall of rock and ice directly ahead - Shivling upper reaches become visible from Bhojbasa – the first indication of what Tapovan will deliver - Critical evening health check: SpO₂, pulse, and BP before Gaumukh and Tapovan days begin - Overnight: Bhojbasa (3,775 m / 12,385 ft) – acclimatisation camp before the glacier ### Day 4: Bhojbasa to Gaumukh & Ascent to Tapovan **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,775 m (12,385 ft) → Gaumukh (3,892 m / 12,770 ft) → Tapovan (4,463 m / 14,640 ft) | Distance: ~9 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: Valley trail to glacier, glacier moraine crossing, steep ascent to Tapovan meadow** Day 4 is the physical and emotional centrepiece of the Gaumukh Tapovan trek and one of the most memorable single trekking days in the accessible Indian Himalayas. The day begins with the walk from Bhojbasa to Gaumukh, approximately 4 kilometres along the valley floor, with the Gangotri Glacier growing in scale and proximity with every step. The glacier snout at Gaumukh sits at 3,892 metres, and the approach to it requires walking across the loose, unstable terrain of boulders and glacial debris that demands careful foot placement and the use of trekking poles as constant anchors. Your trek leader guides every trekker through the moraine crossing individually, assessing line choices in real time. Gaumukh itself, the terminal face of the Gangotri Glacier from which the Bhagirathi River emerges as a white torrent from beneath the ice, is an experience that resists adequate description. The scale of the ice is the first thing: walls of grey-white glacial ice three to five storeys high, fractured and fissured and groaning with the slow movement of 30 kilometres of accumulated ice pressing from above. The sound is constant, the roar of the river emerging beneath, the occasional crack of ice fracture, and the movement of meltwater in channels across the glacier surface. And beneath all of it, the knowledge of what this place is: the source of the sacred Ganga, the origin point of a river that has defined civilisation in northern India for millennia. Most trekkers stand at Gaumukh for longer than they planned to. The ice, the river, the scale, and the significance of the place combine in a way that is genuinely difficult to move away from. From Gaumukh, the route continues across the glacier moraine and begins the steep 571-metre ascent to Tapovan. This section, climbing from 3,892 m to 4,463 m across loose moraine and occasional boulder fields, is the most physically demanding section of the entire trek. The altitude makes every upward step harder than the last. The terrain requires concentration. The Tapovan meadow at 4,463 m is a flat, grass-covered plateau of extraordinary character. To the east, south, and west: glaciers on three sides, their lateral moraines forming the meadow's borders. Above the meadow, directly north: Shivling. At 6,543 metres, the peak rises from the meadow floor in a near-vertical composition of rock and ice that fills the entire upper visual field. The light on Shivling from Tapovan changes continuously throughout the afternoon and evening: direct sun on the south face in the morning, side-lit ridges in the afternoon, the peak catching alpenglow in shades of orange and rose as the sun descends, and a last blue-white gleam of the ice cap as the light fades. There is nothing at Tapovan except the meadow, the glaciers, and Shivling. It is sufficient. It is more than sufficient. What to Expect: - Walk from Bhojbasa to Gaumukh (~4 km) – glacier moraine approach, careful foot placement required - Gaumukh glacier snout (3,892 m / 12,770 ft) - source of the Bhagirathi/Ganga, walls of glacial ice - Tapovan meadow (4,463 m / 14,640 ft) – with Shivling (6,543 m) directly above the campsite - Shivling alpenglow: the peak changes colour continuously from afternoon through to dusk - Overnight: Tapovan (4,463 m / 14,640 ft) – the highest and most extraordinary camp on the route ### Day 5: Tapovan to Bhojbasa **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,463 m (14,640 ft) → 3,775 m (12,385 ft) | Distance: ~9 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: Moraine descent from Tapovan, glacier crossing, valley trail to Bhojbasa** The morning of Day 5 begins with the final dawn at Tapovan. One night at the high meadow, watching Shivling catch the first light is an experience that compresses days of trekking into a single, defining image. Be outside before first light one last time. The mountain deserves a proper farewell. After breakfast, the descent begins. The descent from Tapovan to Gaumukh reverses the Day 4 ascent: down the moraine from the meadow edge, across the loose boulder terrain above the glacier snout, past Gaumukh for a second view of the ice face, and then along the valley trail back toward Bhojbasa. The descent covers approximately 9 km and takes 5 to 6 hours, with the moraine section requiring the same careful attention as the ascent. At altitude, descents are physically harder on the knees than the climb; the eccentric load on the quad muscles through the moraine sections demands deliberate foot placement and the constant use of trekking poles for shock absorption. Bhojbasa at 3,775 m feels different on the return: warmer than Tapovan, with the reappearance of vegetation and the sound of the Bhagirathi River reasserting the familiar acoustic landscape of the lower valley. Dinner at Bhojbasa on Day 5 is a different kind of meal from the meals at Tapovan, the relief of lower altitude, the sense of having done what you came to do, and the knowledge that Gangotri and the road home are now only two days away, all contributing to an atmosphere at the Bhojbasa camp on the return that is warmer and more expansive than the focused, demanding nights of the ascent. What to Expect: - Dawn at Tapovan: be outside 45 minutes before sunrise for one final view of Shivling in first light - Moraine descent from Tapovan: careful foot placement required – same terrain as ascent, technically demanding going down - Second view of Gaumukh glacier snout: the ice face seen for the second time on the descent, with the Bhagirathi River emerging below - Lower altitude relief: body moves easier at 3,775 m – breathing noticeably freer at Bhojbasa after nights at 4,463 m - Trekking poles essential for knee protection on the 9 km moraine and valley descent - Overnight: Bhojbasa (3,775 m / 12,385 ft) - return to the valley camp; Gangotri is one day away ### Day 6: Bhojbasa to Gangotri **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,775 m (12,385 ft) → Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) | Distance: ~14 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: Gorge trail along the Bhagirathi River — Bhojbasa to Chirbasa to Gangotri** The final trekking day of the Gaumukh Tapovan circuit reverses the approach route from Bhojbasa to Chirbasa to Gangotri – 14 kilometres along the Bhagirathi gorge, with altitude falling steadily from 12,385 feet to 10,050 feet over 5 to 6 hours. The gorge trail on the return is the same trail you walked on Days 2 and 3, but the body walking it is different. Five days at altitude, one night at 14,640 feet, a glacier crossing, and a Tapovan dawn have accumulated into a physical and psychological state that perceives the return route differently from the approach. The reappearance of the forest, birch first at Chirbasa, then pine, progressively denser as altitude falls, is one of the more affecting transitions of the return. Above Chirbasa, the landscape is bare rock, glacier, and sky. Below Chirbasa, life returns in increments: the first scrubby alpine plants, then the birch trees, then the sound of birds in the lower forest. By the time you reach Gangotri, you are back in a world that contains trees and buildings and the specific smell of a sacred river town incense, pine smoke, temple flowers, and the ever-present roar of the Bhagirathi below the temple steps. The trek officially concludes at Gangotri. Trekkaro issues completion certificates at the assembly point. The valley that brought you here in anticipation now returns you with experience, the specific, unrepeatable, permanent experience of having stood at the source of the Ganga and slept one night in a meadow beneath Shivling at 14,640 feet. The drive to Dehradun begins from Gangotri tomorrow. Tonight, rest in the temple town at the foot of the Bhagirathi gorge. What to Expect: - Final trekking day: 14 km from Bhojbasa to Gangotri through the Bhagirathi gorge - Forest returns: birch at Chirbasa, then pine, then the full gorge vegetation on the lower trail - Altitude drops ~730 m from Bhojbasa to Gangotri – oxygen visibly easier with every hour of descent - Gangotri Temple: the trek concludes at the temple town where it began – completion certificates issued here - Overnight: Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) – the trek ends where it began; drive to Dehradun tomorrow - Drive out tomorrow: Gangotri to Dehradun – ~241 km, ~10–11 hrs on Day 7 ### Day 7: Gangotri to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,065 m (10,050 ft) → Dehradun (~460 m) | Distance: ~241 km by road | Duration: ~10–11 hrs drive | Departure: Gangotri → Uttarkashi → Dharasu → Dehradun** The final day of the Gaumukh-Tapovan trek is the drive from Gangotri back to Dehradun, approximately 241 km through the Bhagirathi Valley and out to the plains. The road descends through Uttarkashi, Chinyalisaur, and Dharasu and down through the Doon Valley to Dehradun, reversing the approach journey. Where the drive in was charged with anticipation, the drive out carries a different weight: the accumulated experience of seven days, one glacier crossing, one high-altitude camp, and a dawn beneath Shivling. The Bhagirathi gorge, encountered in full on the drive out, is the same geological drama that bordered the trek on Days 2 and 6, the same vertical canyon walls, the same roaring river far below, and the same sequence of narrowing and widening as the road descends. From a vehicle window, the scale of what you trekked through becomes newly visible. The gorge that took two days to walk out takes a few hours to drive. The body knows what the car does not. The trek officially concluded yesterday at Gangotri. Today’s drive is the final chapter, Gangotri to Dehradun, the Bhagirathi Valley to the Doon Valley, and mountain air to the plains. The journey that brought you here in anticipation now takes you back with experience, the specific, unrepeatable, permanent experience of having stood at the source of the Ganga and slept one night in a meadow beneath Shivling at 14,640 feet. The valley looks different going out. It is the same valley. You are different. What to Expect: - Drive day: Gangotri to Dehradun – ~241 km, ~10–11 hours through the Bhagirathi Valley - The gorge on the drive: the Bhagirathi gorge visible from the road – the same valley that enclosed the trek - Altitude drops ~2,600 m from 3,065 m at Gangotri down to Dehradun in the Doon Valley – lungs fully restored - Gangotri Temple: departure from the temple town where the trek ended yesterday - Trek completion certificates issued at Gangotri on Day 6 – carry yours home - The shared cab (not included in the trek fee) reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 6: guesthouse or hotel in Gangotri, on a triple-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 5: camping at Chirbasa, Bhojbasa and Tapovan (4 nights), on a triple-sharing basis #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 dinner: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - Gangotri National Park permits and Gaumukh entry fees, arranged by Trekkaro #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Double-wall, rain-rated tents and -20°C sleeping bags at every campsite - Trekking mattresses or sleeping pads at every campsite - SpO2, pulse and blood-pressure checks twice a day at every campsite - Portable oxygen cylinder and emergency stretcher on every batch - HF radio communication across the trek team #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide for all 7 days - Mountain kitchen staff, camp helpers, and mules or porters for the group equipment - Trek completion certificate when you reach Tapovan and return to Gangotri ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Gangotri and back. Trekkaro helps the group book a shared cab, approximately ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Dehradun (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Gangotri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Gangotri #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack, sunglasses and other personal gear (shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and helicopter evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Dehradun before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The drive to Gangotri takes 10–11 hrs, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** The 241 km drive takes 10–11 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Gangotri (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:00 PM (about ₹8,000 one way per vehicle, shared). Book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN), with direct trains from Delhi. With a 10–11 hr drive ahead, take the overnight train or reach Dehradun a day early; book ahead in peak season and check current timings. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – good choices if you travel the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** The 241 km drive takes 10–11 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Gangotri (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:00 PM. Book a late-night train with a few hours of margin, or travel the next day – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hrs. Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night; with a 10–11 hr drive to Gangotri ahead, arriving the day before is more relaxed. - **Take a government bus** – board from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises, as they are less reliable. - **Dehradun ISBT to the pickup** – take an app cab, an auto rickshaw or a shared three-wheeler to Dehradun Railway Station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** The 241 km drive takes 10–11 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Gangotri (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:00 PM. For a night bus back to Delhi, allow time to reach Dehradun ISBT and for road delays, or travel the next day – check current timings. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM before Gangotri - Withdraw the cash you need in Dehradun to be safe - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Gangotri is the last place with a stable signal; BSNL, Jio and Airtel work there - Beyond Gangotri there is virtually no mobile signal - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Gaumukh Tapovan trek, and where does it start? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand. It starts from Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft), one of the Char Dham temple towns, about 241 km (10–11 hours) by road from Dehradun. From Gangotri the trail follows the Bhagirathi gorge to Chirbasa and Bhojbasa, reaches the Gaumukh glacier snout (3,892 m) and climbs to the Tapovan meadow at 4,463 m (14,640 ft). ### How many days is the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek takes 7 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 5 trekking days covering about 46 km. - **Day 1 and Day 7:** drive between Dehradun and Gangotri (241 km, 10–11 hours) - **Day 3:** a short 5 km day to Bhojbasa, kept easy for acclimatisation - **Day 4:** Bhojbasa to Tapovan via Gaumukh, about 9 km in 6–7 hours - **Longest day:** Day 6, about 14 km from Bhojbasa back to Gangotri ### What is the altitude of the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The highest point of the Gaumukh Tapovan trek is the Tapovan meadow at 4,463 m (14,640 ft). From Gangotri (3,065 m) you gain about 1,400 m over three trekking days. - **Chirbasa camp:** 3,600 m (11,808 ft) - **Bhojbasa camp:** 3,775 m (12,385 ft) - **Gaumukh glacier snout:** 3,892 m (12,770 ft) - **Tapovan camp:** 4,463 m (14,640 ft) ### What is the difficulty level of the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek is graded Moderate–Difficult. Some sections are gradual, but others involve steep climbs, boulder fields and rocky glacial terrain. - **Day 4:** a glacier moraine crossing and a steep ascent from Gaumukh to Tapovan - **Day 5:** the moraine descent from Tapovan is technically demanding - **Tapovan camp:** one night at 4,463 m, the highest camp on the route ### Is the Gaumukh Tapovan trek good for beginners? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek is possible for beginners with good fitness, but the Gaumukh to Tapovan section is challenging. It is more comfortable if you have done hikes or treks at high altitude before. A short acclimatisation day to Bhojbasa (Day 3) and health checks before the glacier days help first-timers adjust. ### What fitness level do I need for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? For the Gaumukh Tapovan trek you need good fitness to walk 5–7 hours a day on rocky trail and glacial moraine, including a steep climb to 4,463 m. - **Hardest day:** about 9 km and 6–7 hours from Bhojbasa to Tapovan - **Longest day:** about 14 km from Bhojbasa to Gangotri in 5–6 hours - **Train before the trek:** regular cardio and uphill walks with a loaded backpack ### What is the best time for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The best time for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek is May–June (late spring) and September–October (autumn), for favourable weather and clear views. These months avoid the worst of the snow, ice and monsoon disruption on the trail. ### Is there snow on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek season avoids the worst of the snow, but you can still meet snow or ice near the Gaumukh glacier, so microspikes and gaiters are provided free. - **Glare:** glare off snow and ice near the glacier is intense, so carry category 3 or 4 UV sunglasses - **Hands:** carry an insulated waterproof pair of gloves for Tapovan ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? On the Gaumukh Tapovan trek, Gangotri sees about 5–15°C in May–June and 5–18°C in September–October. It gets much colder as you climb: Bhojbasa drops to about -3°C at night, and Tapovan (4,463 m) to -5°C in early summer and as low as -8°C in autumn. - **Layers:** carry 4 warm layers, including thermals and a heavy fleece for Tapovan nights - **Jacket:** a -10°C padded jacket comes free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear - **Water:** use an insulated bottle so your water does not freeze at Tapovan ### Which mountains can you see on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The main sight on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek is Shivling (6,543 m), which rises directly above the Tapovan campsite, along with Bhagirathi I, II and III. - **Chirbasa:** first views of the Bhagirathi massif and the upper Gangotri valley peaks - **Bhojbasa:** Bhagirathi I, II and III in full, a 6,856 m wall of rock and ice - **Tapovan:** Shivling changing colour from afternoon to dusk, and again in first light at dawn ### What is the terrain like on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek follows a gorge trail along the Bhagirathi through pine and birch forest, then crosses rocky glacier moraine and climbs steeply to the Tapovan meadow. - **Gangotri to Chirbasa:** gorge trail along the river, from pine and birch forest to open alpine ground - **Bhojbasa to Gaumukh:** about 4 km of moraine that needs careful foot placement - **Gaumukh to Tapovan:** a glacier moraine crossing and a steep ascent to the meadow ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, the Gaumukh Tapovan trek camps at 4,463 m, so altitude sickness is a risk; the itinerary builds in a short acclimatisation day and regular health checks. - **Day 1:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure recorded for every trekker, plus a briefing on the AMS protocol - **Day 3:** a short 5 km day to Bhojbasa, designed for acclimatisation - **Before the glacier:** an evening health check at Bhojbasa before the Gaumukh and Tapovan days - **Descent:** one night at Tapovan, then back down to Bhojbasa (3,775 m) ### Can trekkers above 60 do the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Trekkers above 60 can consider the Gaumukh Tapovan trek if they have good fitness and some high-altitude experience, as it is a Moderate–Difficult trek to 4,463 m over rocky glacier moraine. - **Medical fitness certificate:** mandatory, signed by a doctor - **Doctor’s advice:** ask your doctor about altitude medicine before the trek - **Health checks:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded on Day 1 and Day 3 ### How do I reach the Gaumukh Tapovan trek base camp? The Gaumukh Tapovan trek starts from Gangotri, 241 km (10–11 hours) by road from Dehradun. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM on Day 1, so reach Dehradun the day before and stay the night. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN), with the overnight Nanda Devi Express or the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat - **By bus:** government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT (6–7 hours) - **Return:** the cab leaves Gangotri at 6:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 7:00 PM ### Is transport included in the Gaumukh Tapovan trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Gaumukh Tapovan trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs between Dehradun and Gangotri, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The fare is about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM on Day 1. Carry cash in small notes for your share of the fare. ### Where do we stay on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? On the Gaumukh Tapovan trek you stay in a guesthouse or hotel at Gangotri and in triple-sharing tents on the trail. - **Gangotri (Day 1 and Day 6):** guesthouse or hotel - **Chirbasa (Day 2):** camp on a rocky shelf above the Bhagirathi - **Bhojbasa (Day 3 and Day 5):** camp with Bhagirathi I, II and III in view - **Tapovan (Day 4):** meadow camp below Shivling, the highest camp on the route ### What food is served on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Vegetarian meals are included for the full Gaumukh Tapovan trek: breakfast, lunch, dinner and snacks. - **Hot drinks:** soups and hot beverages help with the cold and altitude - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box ### Is drinking water available on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, water refills are available on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek, but carry two 1 L bottles for each day’s walk. - **Insulated bottle:** make one bottle insulated so your water does not freeze at Tapovan - **Day pack:** carry water, snacks and a layer in a 20–30 L day pack - **Hydration:** carry electrolyte or ORS sachets for the altitude ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, the Gaumukh Tapovan trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear: trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and a trekking pole, plus microspikes and gaiters for snow and ice. - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Fitting:** gear check and fitting at the Gangotri assembly point on Day 1 - **Shoes:** waterproof with ankle support for the moraine and stream crossings ### Is backpack offloading available on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, backpack offloading is available on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek for ₹2,400 + 5% GST. If you offload your main backpack, carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a warm layer. ### Is there a doctor on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? A doctor is not listed for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek. Instead, every trekker’s SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded at Gangotri on Day 1 and checked again at Bhojbasa before the glacier days. - **Briefing:** the trek briefing covers the AMS protocol and glacier crossing awareness - **Your kit:** regular medicines, blister plasters and ORS; ask your doctor about altitude medicine - **Insurance:** mandatory, with emergency evacuation cover ### What documents do I need for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? For the Gaumukh Tapovan trek carry an original government photo ID with a photocopy, your Trekkaro booking confirmation, travel insurance and a filled disclaimer form. - **Photo ID:** Aadhaar card, passport, voter ID or driving licence, plus a photocopy in a waterproof pouch - **International trekkers:** passport, needed for forest entry permits and in case of medical evacuation - **Travel insurance:** mandatory, with emergency evacuation cover - **Medical fitness certificate:** mandatory, signed by a doctor - **Disclaimer form:** with your emergency contact details filled in ### Do I need a permit for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, the Gaumukh Tapovan trek needs forest entry permits, so carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy. International trekkers must carry their passport, which is needed for the forest entry permits. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Mobile network on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek is limited or absent beyond Gangotri, and ATMs are few in the hills, so withdraw cash in Dehradun. - **Charging:** there is no charging on the trail; carry a power bank and keep spares close to your body - **Cash:** withdraw enough in Dehradun, in small notes, for the shared cab and small expenses - **Cards:** not accepted in the mountains ### Are there toilets on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, the camps on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek have toilet tents, though facilities on the trail are basic. - **Carry:** toilet paper, hand sanitiser and biodegradable soap - **No wet wipes:** they are not biodegradable - **Waste:** carry your waste back down in plastic or ziploc bags; Trekkaro follows a zero-waste policy on the trail ### What is Gaumukh on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Gaumukh (3,892 m / 12,770 ft) is the snout of the Gangotri Glacier and the source of the Bhagirathi (Ganga). On the Gaumukh Tapovan trek you see its walls of glacial ice on Day 4 and again on the way down on Day 5. - **Approach:** about 4 km of moraine from Bhojbasa, with careful foot placement - **Tapovan:** the meadow above Gaumukh, with Shivling directly above the campsite - **Gangotri temple:** one of the Char Dham, on the bank of the Bhagirathi, where the trek starts and ends ### Is there a buffer day on the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? A buffer day is advised for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek in case weather or road conditions delay travel or the higher camps. If it is used, it costs ₹2,100 + 5% GST, paid on the spot. Plan your onward travel from Dehradun with this spare day in mind. ### Do I get a certificate for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? Yes, trek completion certificates for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek are issued at Gangotri on Day 6, when you return from Bhojbasa. The trek ends at the Gangotri temple town where it began, and you drive back to Dehradun on Day 7. ### What is the minimum age for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek? The minimum age for the Gaumukh Tapovan trek is 16 years, because of the rocky glacier moraine between Gaumukh and Tapovan (4,463 m). Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 14 May 2027 to 20 May 2027 - 15 May 2027 to 21 May 2027 - 21 May 2027 to 27 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 28 May 2027 - 28 May 2027 to 3 Jun 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 4 Jun 2027 - 4 Jun 2027 to 10 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 11 Jun 2027 - 11 Jun 2027 to 17 Jun 2027 - 12 Jun 2027 to 18 Jun 2027 - 18 Jun 2027 to 24 Jun 2027 - 19 Jun 2027 to 25 Jun 2027 - … 4 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/gaumukh-tapovan-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Gulabi Kantha Trek > Gulabi Kantha Trek is a 5-day easy–moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,658 m (12,000 ft). It covers about 24 km on foot and starts and ends at Hanuman Chatti. Best time: October to April. Trekkaro price: ₹8,500 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (33 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/gulabikantha-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,658 m / 12,000 ft - **Trekking distance:** 24 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Hanuman Chatti - **Best time:** October to April - **Temperature:** Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 7°C to 16°C, Night -10°C to -5°C | Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 10°C to 24°C, Night -4°C to 6°C | Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day 9°C to 20°C, Night 0°C to 5°C - **Price:** ₹8,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (33 upcoming) ## Overview Gulabi Kantha is a meadow that has only recently been noticed. Local villagers and guides introduced it to a few media channels, and an ITBP team came up from Matli to see whether its slopes could one day host skiing. Walk up to it today and the trail is still quiet: tall pine, oak and maple overhead, a forest silence broken only by birdsong and rustling leaves. Then the forest gives way to open meadow, and at 12,000 ft the Garhwal peaks stand in a ring around you. The Gulabi Kantha trek (also written Gulabikantha) climbs out of the Yamuna Valley through dense forest of pine, oak and maple, past the wooden houses and terraced farms of Nishni village, to the forest camp of Kandola. From there it rises across the alpine meadows of Seema Thatch, scattered with wildflowers among rolling hills, and up a steeper trail to the Gulabikantha summit meadow. The view at the top runs a full 360°: Bandarpoonch and Chaukhamba, Swargarohini, Black Peak, Kalindi Srikala and Draupadi ka Danda, with the Shivalik ranges below. Gulabi Kantha is a vast alpine meadow on the way to the Dodital freshwater lake, and it remains largely untouched by heavy footfall. The Gulabikantha trek is an easy-moderate trek in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand. It starts and ends at Hanuman Chatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft), a peaceful village and the last motorable point on the road to Janki Chatti, close to the sacred Yamunotri Temple, one of the Char Dham shrines. The trail climbs to a single camp at Kandola (2,590 m / 8,500 ft), and the summit day passes Seema Thatch (3,200 m / 10,500 ft) on the way to the top at 3,658 m (12,000 ft). Over five days the trek covers about 24 km on foot. It is still one of the lesser-known trekking destinations in Uttarakhand. In our experience, it is one of the most rewarding first summits a beginner can choose in the Uttarkashi district. ### A Ring of Peaks at 12,000 Feet – What Makes the Gulabikantha Trek Unmissable Everything on the Gulabikantha trek leads to one day and one view. You leave Kandola early, with a packed lunch and the summit still hidden somewhere above the trees. For the first hours you walk through pine and oak, and then the forest opens onto the meadows of Seema Thatch, a wide, gentle shelf of wildflowers and rolling ground at 10,500 ft. You pause there. You look up at what is left. From here the trail turns steeper and asks for real effort, and with every step more of the Himalaya appears over the shoulder of the slope. After about four to five hours of climbing from camp, the gradient eases, the ground levels into a broad meadow, and you are standing on the summit at 3,658 m (12,000 ft). You sit down. You take out your lunch. You turn slowly in a full circle, and in every direction there is another mountain. The width of that view is what sets Gulabikantha apart. Bandarpoonch and Chaukhamba stand out first, with Swargarohini, Black Peak and Kalindi Srikala along the skyline, Draupadi ka Danda among them and the Shivalik ranges falling away below. Clouds drift across the peaks like brushstrokes on a canvas, and the panorama changes as they move. At sunrise and sunset these mountains are bathed in gold. Then, when you are ready, you walk back down the way you came, through Seema Thatch and the forest, to the same camp you left that morning. There is no camp to strike and no new site to reach before dark, and in our experience that makes the big day far more enjoyable, especially for first-time trekkers. Kandola itself is part of what makes the trek. You spend two nights at this forest camp at 2,590 m (8,500 ft), set among alpine forest and mountain slopes. In the evening the sky over the surrounding ridges glows in warm colours as the sun goes down; at night the sky fills with stars; in the morning you wake to sunrise over the hills. After the summit, an evening back at Kandola is a time to rest and share stories of the day under a starlit sky. ### The Trail Itself The trail leaves Hanuman Chatti and enters dense forest almost at once. Tall pine, oak and maple form a canopy overhead, and the ground is carpeted with fallen brown maple and pine leaves, so the path is soft underfoot. The climb is gradual, about 5 km and 456 m (1,500 ft) of height gain to Kandola, and the area is rich in flora and fauna, with seasonal wildflowers, Himalayan birds and the occasional sighting of wildlife. On the way you pass Nishni, a small Himalayan hamlet of traditional wooden houses and terraced farms. The mild climb around the village gives you a glimpse of everyday mountain life. Above Kandola the forest gives way to the open meadows of Seema Thatch, and above that the upper slopes rise more steeply to the summit meadow. On the way down to Hanuman Chatti the trail is steady with some steep patches, and the views open over the Yamuna Valley. The trek ends where it began, in a quiet village where a stroll through the lanes introduces you to the warm hospitality of local people. A short 3 km drive or walk away is Garam Kund, a natural hot water spring whose warm, mineral-rich water is believed to soothe sore muscles after the summit day. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Gulabikantha trek is graded Easy - Moderate, and in our view it makes an excellent first Himalayan trek. Without snow it is a gentle trek that beginners with basic fitness can manage; snow in the winter months adds some challenge. Two of the three walking days are short: 5 km in 3–4 hours up to Kandola, and 5 km in 2–3 hours back down, with some steep downhill patches. The hard day is the summit day: about 14 km (7 km up and 7 km down) in 7–8 hours, with a climb of about 1,068 m (3,500 ft) and the same height back down, on a trail that becomes noticeably steeper after Seema Thatch. Basic fitness, such as walking 4–5 km a day with a small backpack, is the minimum; good stamina and leg strength make the summit day far more enjoyable, especially on steep or snowy sections. We recommend 4–6 weeks of preparation before departure. Minimum age: 8 years, accompanied by adults. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor’s medical certificate. Daily trekking hours: 2–8 hours. Season: January to April and October to December. ### Key Highlights of the Gulabikantha Trek - **Gulabikantha summit (3,658 m / 12,000 ft)** – a vast alpine meadow with a 360° Himalayan panorama - **A long line of Garhwal peaks** – Bandarpoonch, Chaukhamba, Swargarohini, Black Peak, Kalindi Srikala and Draupadi ka Danda, with the Shivalik ranges below - **Seema Thatch (3,200 m / 10,500 ft)** – open meadows with wildflowers and rolling hills on the way to the top - **Kandola forest camp (2,590 m / 8,500 ft)** – two nights in one camp, with sunset over the ridges and a starry sky - **Pine, oak and maple forest** – a soft, leaf-carpeted trail with Himalayan birdsong - **Nishni village** – traditional wooden houses and terraced farms on the climb from Hanuman Chatti - **A quiet, offbeat meadow** – largely untouched by heavy footfall, and explored by the ITBP for winter sports such as skiing - **Garam Kund** – an optional dip in a natural hot spring, 3 km from Hanuman Chatti, after the trek ### Best Time to Do the Gulabikantha Trek The Gulabikantha trek runs from October right through to April, and Trekkaro recommends December to April as the best time to go. Across that window the meadow moves from settled autumn weather to deep winter snow and then into spring bloom, and each part of the season gives the same short route a very different feel. #### October to November – Autumn (Clear Trails) The season opens with pleasant weather, clear trails and green landscapes. The forest walking is comfortable, and the summit view can be enjoyed before the winter snow arrives. For trekkers who want a quiet, easy-going introduction to the Himalaya before the cold sets in, this is a calm and comfortable time to go. - **Temperatures:** Day: 9°C to 20°C | Night: 0°C to 5°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear trails and pleasant walking weather. - **Best for:** A comfortable first trek, quiet forest walking and the summit view before winter. #### December to February – Winter (Snow Season) In winter the meadow transforms. Snow settles over Gulabi Kantha, turning the summit into a wide white slope, and this becomes the season for those seeking a challenging snow trek or a skiing experience. Snow on the upper trail and the summit makes the climb slower and more tiring, and the nights at Kandola are properly cold. It is also, in our experience, the time when the meadow and its ring of peaks look most striking. - **Temperatures:** Day: 7°C to 16°C | Night: -10°C to -5°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the upper trail and summit; slower climbing; very cold nights. - **Best for:** A snow trek, a snow-covered summit meadow and winter landscapes. #### March to April – Spring (Meadows in Bloom) As winter loosens its grip, March and April bring blooming meadows and pleasant trekking conditions. The days grow milder and the meadows begin to bloom, though snow can still lie on the higher slopes early in this period. We find this the most balanced window of the year. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 24°C | Night: -4°C to 6°C - **Trail conditions:** Pleasant walking; meadows starting to bloom; snow possible higher up early in the season. - **Best for:** Blooming meadows, milder nights and comfortable conditions for beginners and families. #### Trekkaro Recommendation Trekkaro recommends December to April for Gulabikantha. For a full snow trek and the summit meadow under winter cover, book December to February. For blooming meadows, milder nights and the most comfortable conditions for first-time trekkers and families with children aged 8 and above, March to April is our pick. For a quiet trek on clear trails before the snow arrives, October to November works well. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Hanuman Chatti **Route Details:** **Pickup: Dehradun Railway Station, 6:30 AM | Drive: Dehradun → Hanuman Chatti (162 km, 7–8 hrs) | Altitude: 2,134 m (7,000 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a road day. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM, and you reach Hanuman Chatti before dark. The 162 km take 7 to 8 hours. The road climbs through Mussoorie, then runs via Damta, Naugaon, Barkot and Syana Chatti, with deep valleys, pine and oak forest, and the Yamuna alongside. Barkot, about 1 hour 30 minutes before the base camp, is the last reliable ATM and the last stable mobile network; Jio does not work well in this region. Withdraw enough cash and finish your calls there. Shops higher up mostly take cash, and the signal is almost gone by Hanuman Chatti. Hanuman Chatti is a peaceful village in Uttarkashi district and the base camp for the trek. It lies on the road to Janki Chatti, 5 km from the Yamunotri Temple. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis, with dinner included. Spend a quiet evening by the river and sleep early. What to Expect: - Early start from Dehradun, by 6:30–7:00 AM - 162 km drive (7–8 hrs) via Mussoorie, Barkot and Syana Chatti - Last ATM and stable mobile network at Barkot - Yamuna River views and pine and oak forest along the road - Quiet evening by the river, dinner included - Overnight: Hanuman Chatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft) ### Day 2: Hanuman Chatti to Kandola **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,134 m → 2,590 m (8,500 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Terrain: gradual forest trail of pine, oak and maple, past Nishni village | Stay: Tents at Kandola** Day 2 begins with a light breakfast and a short briefing from the Trekkaro team, and you set off at 7:00 AM. The walk to Kandola is a gradual ascent of about 456 m (1,500 ft) over 5 km, which takes 3 to 4 hours. It is a gentle first day and a good one for finding your rhythm. Soon after Hanuman Chatti, the trail enters dense forest. Tall pine, oak and maple trees close overhead, and the path is covered with fallen brown maple and pine leaves, soft and quiet underfoot. The only sounds are birdsong and rustling leaves. Walk at a pace where you can still talk. If you are too out of breath to speak, slow down. Partway up, you pass through Nishni village, a small hamlet of traditional wooden houses and terraced farms. The climb is mild around the village, and it is a good place for a short break and a look at mountain life up close. The last stretch brings you to Kandola at 2,590 m (8,500 ft). The campsite sits among forest and mountain slopes, with views of the surrounding ridges. Lunch and evening snacks are served at camp, and the afternoon is yours to rest. Drinking water at camp is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets; ask your trek leader before you refill anywhere else. At sunset the sky over the ridges glows warm, and on a clear night the stars are out in full. Sleep early. Tomorrow is the longest day of the trek. What to Expect: - 7:00 AM start after breakfast and a short briefing - Gradual 5 km climb with about 456 m (1,500 ft) of height gain - Dense pine, oak and maple forest on a leaf-covered trail - Nishni village, with wooden houses and terraced farms - Sunset and sunrise views over the ridges from camp - Overnight: Tents at Kandola (2,590 m / 8,500 ft) ### Day 3: Summit Day - Kandola to Gulabikantha via Seema Thatch and back **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,590 m → 3,200 m (Seema Thatch) → 3,658 m (12,000 ft) → 2,590 m | Distance: 14 km (7 km up, 7 km down) | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: pine and oak forest, alpine meadow, steeper climb to the summit | Stay: Tents at Kandola** Summit day is long, so you start early from Kandola with a packed lunch in your bag. The first part of the trail winds through dense pine and oak forest at a steady gradient, which gives you time to warm up before the real climbing. The forest then opens onto the alpine meadows of Seema Thatch at 3,200 m (10,500 ft), with rolling hills around you and wildflowers in season. Take a short break here and drink water. Above Seema Thatch the trail turns steeper. This is the hard section of the day, and it stays with you until the top. The full ascent takes about 4 to 5 hours. Climb in short steps, pause briefly and often, and keep your breathing steady. In winter, snow adds to the effort, so use your poles and walk in the line your guide sets. At the Gulabikantha summit, 3,658 m (12,000 ft), the view opens in a full 360° circle. Peaks line the skyline: Bandarpoonch, Black Peak, Swargarohini, Kalindi Srikala, Chaukhamba, Draupadi ka Danda and Jorkanden, along with the Shivalik mountains. Clouds drift across the ridges. You eat your packed lunch at the top, take your photographs and rest. Then you retrace your steps down through Seema Thatch to Kandola. The return is quicker, but it is still 7 km downhill on tired legs, so keep your poles out and your steps short. The evening at camp is relaxed. Dinner, a warm tent and a starlit sky over the forest close the day. What to Expect: - Early start with a packed lunch for the summit - Pine and oak forest, then the meadows of Seema Thatch (3,200 m / 10,500 ft) - Steeper climb above Seema Thatch; about 4–5 hrs of ascent in total - 360° summit view including Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Black Peak and Chaukhamba - Lunch at the summit, then descent by the same route - Overnight: Tents at Kandola (2,590 m / 8,500 ft) ### Day 4: Kandola to Hanuman Chatti **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,590 m → 2,134 m (7,000 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Terrain: steady downhill through pine and oak forest, some steep patches | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay at Hanuman Chatti** The last walking day is short and easy. You have breakfast around 7:00 AM and start down from Kandola. The trail is a steady descent of about 456 m (1,500 ft) over 5 km, back through the pine and oak forest you climbed through on Day 2. It takes 2 to 3 hours. Easy does not mean careless. There are some steep descending patches, and trekking poles make a real difference on them. Keep your weight over your feet, shorten your stride on the steep parts and let the poles take load off your knees. On the way you pass Nishni village again, and the trees open to views over the Yamuna Valley. The trek concludes at Hanuman Chatti. If you want more from the day, Garam Kund, a natural hot water spring, is a short 3 km away by road or on foot. We recommend the dip. The warm, mineral-rich water is believed to soothe sore muscles after summit day. You spend the night at a guesthouse or homestay in Hanuman Chatti on a triple or quad sharing basis, with lunch and dinner included. Take a slow walk through the village lanes in the evening. The locals are warm, and a few words in their language are always appreciated. What to Expect: - Breakfast around 7:00 AM, then an easy 5 km descent - Some steep patches on the way down; trekking poles help - Nishni village and views over the Yamuna Valley - Optional 3 km trip to the Garam Kund hot spring - Evening walk through the village lanes - Overnight: Hanuman Chatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft) ### Day 5: Hanuman Chatti to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Hanuman Chatti → Dehradun (162 km, 7–8 hrs) | Altitude: 2,134 m (7,000 ft) | Route: Syana Chatti, Barkot, Naugaon, Damta, Mussoorie** The last day is the drive back to Dehradun, about 162 km and 7 to 8 hours by road. The route runs through Syana Chatti, Barkot, Naugaon and Damta, then descends via Mussoorie into the Doon Valley. Pine and oak forest line the road, and the Yamuna flows alongside in parts. Barkot is the first place on the way down with a reliable ATM and mobile network, and a good spot for a short halt. Meals on the road are not included, so plan a stop for lunch. As the road winds down, the cool mountain air gives way to the plains. You arrive in Dehradun by evening, with easy onward connections by train, bus or flight. What to Expect: - 162 km drive, 7–8 hrs, via Barkot, Naugaon, Damta and Mussoorie - Yamuna River and pine and oak forest along the road - ATM and mobile network again at Barkot - Meals on the road are not included - Evening arrival with onward train, bus and flight connections - Trek ends at Hanuman Chatti; drop at Dehradun Railway Station by evening ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 4: guesthouse or homestay in Hanuman Chatti, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 and Day 3: camping in 3-person tents at Kandola #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 4 dinner - Simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks served regularly during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents and tables at the campsites - All technical equipment needed on the trek, including ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by certified local mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Hanuman Chatti and back. Trekkaro helps the group book a shared cab, approximately ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Hanuman Chatti #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,500 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Hanuman Chatti #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under inclusions is not part of the package; ask in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The drive to Hanuman Chatti takes 7–8 hrs, so fly in the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Hanuman Chatti:** The 162 km drive takes 7–8 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day we help the group book a shared cab from Hanuman Chatti to Dehradun (not included in the trek fee; about ₹6,500 one way per vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers); the drive takes 7–8 hrs. Book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN), with direct trains from Delhi. Take the overnight train or reach Dehradun a day early; book ahead in peak season and check current timings. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – good choices if you travel the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Hanuman Chatti:** The 162 km drive takes 7–8 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the cab from Hanuman Chatti takes 7–8 hrs to reach Dehradun. Book a late-night train with a good margin, or travel the next day – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hrs. Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night, so an overnight bus gets you to Dehradun by morning. - **Take a government bus** – board from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises, as they are less reliable. - **Dehradun ISBT to the pickup** – take an app cab, an auto rickshaw or a shared three-wheeler to Dehradun Railway Station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Hanuman Chatti:** The 162 km drive takes 7–8 hrs. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seater), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the cab from Hanuman Chatti takes 7–8 hrs to reach Dehradun. Book a night bus back to Delhi from Dehradun ISBT with a good margin for road delays, or travel the next day – check current timings. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Barkot, about 1 hour 30 minutes before Hanuman Chatti, has the last reliable ATM - Shops, tea stalls and transport in the hills take cash, so carry enough - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Barkot is the last place with a stable mobile network; Jio is weak in this region - At Hanuman Chatti and on the trail the signal is almost non-existent - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Gulabi Kantha trek, and where does it start? The Gulabikantha trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, above the Yamuna Valley. It starts from Hanuman Chatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft), about 162 km and 7–8 hours by road from Dehradun via Mussoorie and Barkot. From Hanuman Chatti the trail climbs through pine, oak and maple forest past Nishni village to Kandola camp, then over the Seema Thatch meadows to the 3,658 m summit. ### How many days does the Gulabi Kantha trek take from start to finish? The Gulabikantha trek takes 5 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 3 trekking days covering about 24 km. - **Day 1 and Day 5:** drive between Dehradun and Hanuman Chatti (162 km, 7–8 hours) - **Day 2 and Day 4:** 5 km between Hanuman Chatti and Kandola, 2–4 hours - **Day 3 (summit day):** about 14 km and 7–8 hours to the summit and back ### What is the altitude of the Gulabi Kantha trek? The highest point of the Gulabikantha trek is the summit at 3,658 m (12,000 ft). The trek starts at Hanuman Chatti (2,134 m / 7,000 ft), so you gain about 1,500 m, most of it on summit day. - **Kandola camp:** 2,590 m / 8,500 ft - **Seema Thatch meadow:** 3,200 m / 10,500 ft - **Summit:** 3,658 m / 12,000 ft, climbed and descended on Day 3 ### What is the difficulty level of the Gulabi Kantha trek? The Gulabikantha trek is graded Easy–Moderate: the approach and return days are short and gradual, but summit day is long, with a steeper climb above Seema Thatch. Snow from December to April adds to the challenge. - **Day 2:** a gradual 5 km climb with about 456 m (1,500 ft) of height gain - **Summit day:** 14 km and 7–8 hours, with 4–5 hours of ascent - **Descent:** some steep patches on the way down to Hanuman Chatti ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, the Gulabikantha trek is suitable for beginners with basic fitness, as it is short and graded Easy–Moderate. Without snow it is a gentle hike apart from the steeper summit climb. From December to April snow makes summit day harder, and microspikes and gaiters are provided free. ### What fitness level do I need for the Gulabi Kantha trek? For the Gulabikantha trek you need basic fitness and enough stamina for a 14 km summit day of 7–8 hours, with a steeper climb near the top. Good leg strength makes the steep and snowy sections easier. - **Cardio:** regular brisk walks, jogging or stair climbing in the weeks before - **Strength:** squats and lunges for the climb and the descent - **Practice:** walk with a small loaded backpack ### What is the best time for the Gulabi Kantha trek? The best time for the Gulabikantha trek is October to April, the months the trek runs. December to April is the snow season, while October and November bring cold nights on mostly clear trails. - **December–April:** the trail is under snow, so pack for a snow trek - **October–November:** cold nights and pleasant days - **Monsoon:** the trek does not run in July and August ### Is there snow on the Gulabi Kantha trek, and in which months? The Gulabikantha trek is under snow from December to April, with the most snow on the higher sections and at the summit. The lower camps are milder. When there is snow on the trail, microspikes and gaiters are provided free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear. ### How cold does it get on the Gulabi Kantha trek? On the Gulabikantha trek, winter (December–February) days are about 7°C to 16°C and nights fall to -10°C to -5°C. In March–April days are 10°C to 24°C with nights of -4°C to 6°C, and in October–November days are 9°C to 20°C with nights of 0°C to 5°C. - **Layers:** 5 warm layers from December to April, 3–4 in October–November - **Outer jacket:** a padded -10°C jacket is part of the Free Trekking Gear - **Snow months:** add a balaclava and waterproof gloves ### Which mountains can you see from the Gulabikantha summit? The Gulabikantha summit (3,658 m) gives a 360° view that includes Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Black Peak and Chaukhamba. Views along the way take in the ridges around Kandola and the Yamuna Valley. - **Seema Thatch:** alpine meadows at 3,200 m on the way to the summit - **Kandola camp:** sunset and sunrise views over the ridges - **Descent:** views over the Yamuna Valley near Nishni village ### What is the terrain like on the Gulabi Kantha trek? The Gulabikantha trek climbs through forest to open alpine meadows, then up a steeper final slope to the summit. From December to April the upper sections are under snow. - **Forest:** pine, oak and maple on a leaf-covered trail - **Village:** Nishni, with wooden houses and terraced farms - **Meadows:** Seema Thatch at 3,200 m - **Summit slope:** a steeper climb above Seema Thatch ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Gulabi Kantha trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Gulabikantha trek is relatively low, because you sleep no higher than Kandola (2,590 m) and climb to the 3,658 m summit and back in one day. Summit day has the biggest gain, about 1,070 m, so walk at a steady pace. - **Safety kit:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - **Medicines:** carry any altitude medicine your doctor advises - **Symptoms:** tell the trek leader early about a headache, nausea or breathlessness ### What is the minimum age for the Gulabi Kantha trek? The minimum age for the Gulabikantha trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Gulabi Kantha trek base camp? To reach the Gulabikantha trek, travel to Dehradun; the cab to Hanuman Chatti leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM for the 162 km, 7–8 hour drive, so reach Dehradun the day before. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN); the Nanda Devi Express runs overnight from Delhi - **By bus:** Uttarakhand Roadways buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT take about 6–7 hours - **Return:** the drive back takes 7–8 hours, so book a late-night train or bus, or travel the next day ### Is transport from Dehradun included in the Gulabi Kantha trek? No, transport between Dehradun and Hanuman Chatti is not included in the Gulabikantha trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seater vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Onward:** Day 1, 6:30 AM from Dehradun Railway Station - **Return:** Day 5, Hanuman Chatti to Dehradun, arriving in the evening - **Meals on the road:** not included on the drive days ### Where do we stay on the Gulabi Kantha trek? On the Gulabikantha trek you stay two nights in a guesthouse or homestay at Hanuman Chatti and two nights in tents at Kandola camp. Tents are shared by three trekkers, and the guesthouse is on a triple or quad sharing basis. - **Day 1 and Day 4:** guesthouse or homestay at Hanuman Chatti (2,134 m) - **Day 2 and Day 3:** tents at Kandola (2,590 m), with large mess tents, tables and sleeping bags - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek, for solo trekkers or couples ### What is the group size on the Gulabi Kantha trek and who leads it? Gulabikantha trek fixed departures run with 6 to 20 trekkers, never more than 20. Each group is led by an experienced, certified trek leader trained in Wilderness First Aid, supported by local certified mountain guides. - **Support team:** assistant guides, local staff and porters or mules for logistics - **Private treks:** available for any group size ### Is the Gulabi Kantha trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Gulabikantha trek is safe for women trekking alone, and the safety of women trekkers is a top priority. Guides and support staff are carefully selected, trustworthy and reliable. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other women - **Couples and families:** separate tents are arranged as required - **Valuables:** keep your personal belongings safe ### What food is served on the Gulabi Kantha trek? All meals on the Gulabikantha trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 4 dinner: simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food, with eggs available on request at the campsite. Tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly. - **Summit day:** a packed lunch, eaten at the summit - **Not included:** meals during the drive to and from Hanuman Chatti - **Bring:** a reusable lunch box and some dry fruits or energy bars ### Is drinking water safe on the Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, drinking water on the Gulabikantha trek is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets at the camps. Check with the trek leader before refilling anywhere on the trail. - **Bottles:** carry two 1 L bottles - **Snow months:** make one bottle insulated so the water does not freeze - **ORS:** carry a few sachets for the trail ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, the Gulabikantha trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes or a jacket. One refundable deposit of ₹3,000 plus a ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit. - **Shoes:** waterproof trekking shoes with ankle support (worth ₹6,999) - **Jacket:** padded jacket rated to -10°C (worth ₹3,299) - **Trekking pole:** steadies you on steep and snowy sections - **Snow gear:** free microspikes and gaiters for snow ### Can I offload my backpack on the Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Gulabikantha trek costs ₹1,500 + 5% GST for the full trek. Book it at least 15 days in advance; last-minute requests made at Hanuman Chatti may cost more. - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Bag type:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a layer ### Is there a doctor on the Gulabi Kantha trek? No doctor travels with the Gulabikantha trek, but the trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid and carry a complete first-aid kit. Medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher for emergency evacuation are available at every camp. - **Own medicines:** carry prescriptions, remedies for common ailments and any altitude medicine your doctor advises - **Before booking:** check your health, or seek medical advice if unsure ### What documents do I need for the Gulabi Kantha trek? For the Gulabikantha trek you need an original government photo ID and a travel insurance policy that covers high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. The ID is checked at forest check posts and for trek registration. - **ID:** passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID - **Photocopy:** keep one with the original in a waterproof pouch - **Insurance:** mandatory and not included in the trek fee ### Do I need a permit for the Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, the Gulabikantha trek needs permits, and all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the trek fee. You only need to carry your original photo ID for the forest check posts. Keep a photocopy of the ID with the original in a waterproof pouch. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Gulabi Kantha trek? Barkot, about 1 hour 30 minutes before Hanuman Chatti, is the last reliable ATM and the last point with a stable mobile network on the Gulabikantha trek. Beyond Barkot the signal drops sharply, and at Hanuman Chatti and on the trail it is almost non-existent. - **Jio:** does not work well in this region - **Cash:** withdraw enough in Dehradun or Barkot, as shops and transport beyond mostly take cash - **Calls:** finish important calls before leaving Barkot ### What is summit day like on the Gulabi Kantha trek? Summit day on the Gulabikantha trek (Day 3) is a 14 km round trip from Kandola that takes 7–8 hours, climbing from 2,590 m to 3,658 m and back. You start early with a packed lunch and eat it at the summit. - **First section:** pine and oak forest up to the Seema Thatch meadows (3,200 m) - **Final climb:** steeper above Seema Thatch, with about 4–5 hours of ascent in total - **Descent:** by the same route back to Kandola camp ### Is there a hot spring near the Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, on Day 4 of the Gulabikantha trek there is an optional 3 km trip to the Garam Kund hot spring after the descent to Hanuman Chatti. The descent from Kandola is short, 5 km in 2–3 hours, which leaves time for it. In the evening you can also walk through the village lanes of Hanuman Chatti. ### Can the Gulabi Kantha trek itinerary be changed, and does the end date change? Minor changes to the Gulabikantha trek itinerary are possible, but the trek’s completion date must stay as scheduled. If weather or other unexpected events force a change, the trek leader suggests the best alternate plan. The trek ends on Day 5 with the 7–8 hour drive to Dehradun, so plan onward travel around that date. ### Can I book a private or customised Gulabi Kantha trek? Yes, Trekkaro offers private and customised Gulabikantha treks for any group size, at your own pace. The cost depends on the number of trekkers, the duration and the type of trek. Fixed departures, by comparison, need at least 6 trekkers and take a maximum of 20. ### How do I book the Gulabi Kantha trek and when should I book my travel? To book the Gulabikantha trek, choose your date, fill in the booking form and pay online; the booking is confirmed instantly, and the itinerary and gear checklist are emailed to you. Once payment is complete it shows as Paid in My Bookings, so you can book your travel right away. Plan to reach Dehradun the day before the trek, as the cab to Hanuman Chatti leaves early in the morning. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 28 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 4 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 11 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 18 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 25 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 2 Dec 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 9 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 16 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 23 Dec 2026 - 23 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 24 Dec 2026 to 28 Dec 2026 - 25 Dec 2026 to 29 Dec 2026 - … 21 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/gulabikantha-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Hampta Pass Trek > Hampta Pass Trek is a 5-day moderate trek in Kullu, Himachal Pradesh, reaching 4,298 m (14,100 ft). It covers about 26.5 km on foot and starts and ends at Manali. Best time: June to September. Trekkaro price: ₹9,000 per person + 5% GST, with free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles. Next batch: 12 Jun 2027 (68 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/hampta-pass-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 4,298 m / 14,100 ft - **Trekking distance:** 26.5 km - **Region:** Kullu, Himachal Pradesh - **Start / end:** Manali - **Best time:** June to September - **Temperature:** Jun-mid Jul: Day 8°C to 18°C, Night -4°C to 0°C | Mid Jul-mid Aug: Day 12°C to 22°C, Night 2°C to 6°C | Mid Aug-Sep: Day 10°C to 20°C, Night 0°C to 4°C - **Price:** ₹9,000 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles - **Next batch:** 12 Jun 2027 (68 upcoming) ## Overview One valley is carpeted in wildflowers and river mist. The other is a planet of silver rock and ancient silence. Between them, at 14,100 feet, sits a pass that delivers both in five extraordinary days and rewards you with a lake so beautiful it has no rival in the Himalayas. The Hampta Pass trek is one of the most visually dramatic high-altitude crossings in the Indian Himalayas. In no other trek of comparable length and difficulty does the landscape transform so completely from one side of a mountain pass to the other. You begin in the lush, forested Kullu Valley above Manali, moving through meadows of rhododendron and streams fed by glacial meltwater. You cross a 14,100-foot pass in a single defining day – the air thin, the views absolute, the effort real. And then you descend into Spiti: treeless, raw, ancient, and unlike anything you have seen before. Hampta Pass is not just a trek. It is a journey between two worlds. Hampta Pass (4,298 m / 14,100 ft) is a high-altitude mountain pass in the Kullu district of Himachal Pradesh, connecting the Kullu Valley on the western side with the Lahaul-Spiti Valley on the eastern side. The pass cuts through the Pir Panjal range of the western Himalayas and has been used as a trade and migration route between these contrasting ecological zones for centuries. Today it is one of the most celebrated moderate-grade treks in northern India, and for very good reason: the sheer variety of terrain, altitude, and landscape packed into five days makes it an experience that trekkers describe as disproportionately expansive for its length and difficulty rating. ### The Two-World Phenomenon The defining characteristic of the Hampta Pass trek – the feature that sets it apart from virtually every other moderate-grade Himalayan route – is the landscape transformation that occurs at the pass itself. The Kullu side of the trail is green, wet, and verdant. Alpine meadows called buras stretch across wide glacial valleys. The Jobra stream runs cold and fast through dense forest. Wild bergenia, potentilla, and Himalayan blue poppy grow in profusion along the trail margins. The air feels alive with moisture and birdsong. Then you cross the pass, and the world ends. The Lahaul-Spiti side is a geological moonscape: silver-grey slopes stripped of vegetation by the rain shadow cast by the Pir Panjal range, sculpted river valleys of coloured scree and moraine, and the Chandra River cutting a turquoise line through the brown and ochre landscape below. No other accessible trek in India delivers this contrast so quickly and so absolutely. ### Who Is This Trek For? Hampta Pass is graded Moderate, making it suitable for trekkers with a baseline level of physical fitness and ideally some prior trekking experience, though confident first-timers who have prepared adequately have completed it successfully on Trekkaro batches. The trail involves sustained ascent on Day 3 and Day 4, with the pass crossing itself requiring 6 to 8 hours of continuous effort at altitude. The daily trekking hours range from 4 to 8 hours depending on the day. The minimum recommended age is 11 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor’s medical certificate. If you can sustain a brisk uphill walk for 4 to 5 hours at sea level, Hampta Pass is achievable with proper preparation and the right pacing strategy. ### The Chandratal – The Lake of the Moon Chandratal Lake sits at 14,100 feet on the Spiti side of the Hampta Pass range, in a glacially carved bowl of absolute silence. Named for its crescent shape, with 'chandra' meaning 'moon', it is a UNESCO Ramsar Wetland of international importance and one of the most visually extraordinary places in the entire Himalayan range. In summer, the lake’s colour shifts throughout the day like a living thing: deep cobalt at dawn, brilliant turquoise by mid-morning, a jade-pale green where the shallows catch the afternoon light, and a dark pewter at dusk that mirrors the surrounding peaks with mirror-perfect clarity. There is no single photograph that captures it fully. You have to be there, standing at the edge, watching the water change colour in real time, to understand what makes trekkers describe Chandratal as the most beautiful place they have ever seen. On Day 4, the Trekkaro itinerary takes you there directly, not as an optional extra, but as a fully included, non-negotiable part of your Hampta Pass experience. ### Key Highlights of the Hampta Pass Trek - Cross the 14,100 ft Hampta Pass – 360-degree views of Kullu and Lahaul-Spiti simultaneously - Chandratal Lake at 14,100 ft: crescent-shaped, colour-shifting between cobalt, turquoise and jade – included in the Trekkaro package - Dense cedar and birch forest trail above Manali on Day 1 – the Himalayas at their most welcoming - Wide-open alpine meadow trekking to Balu Ka Ghera with direct views of the pass ridge - Fixed ropes on the steepest section below the pass – a safety step on Trekkaro batches - Dramatic Spiti-side geology: rust, ochre, and silver rock with the Chandra River below - Return through the Atal Tunnel – the world's longest highway tunnel above 10,000 ft - NIM-certified Trekkaro trek leaders, daily health checks, and free microspikes and gaiters ### Best Time to Visit Hampta Pass The Hampta Pass trekking window is defined by snowmelt and snowfall. The pass remains buried under several metres of snow until late May or June, and it closes again under fresh snowfall by October. Within the open window, each month delivers a distinctly different experience. #### June to Mid-July - Early Season (Snow on Pass) June marks the opening of the Hampta Pass route. The pass itself retains significant snow cover well into June, knee-deep in places, and the upper trail is a river of meltwater and loose slush. For trekkers who want a snow-crossing experience, June delivers it in abundance. The Kullu Valley meadows are at peak bloom, carpeted in wildflowers immediately after the snowmelt, and the streams run at their most dramatic. The trade-off is a harder, wetter crossing and colder nights at camp. Our trek leaders assess pass conditions daily in June and adjust departure timings accordingly. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 18°C | Night at camp: 0°C to -4°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on upper trail and pass. Wildflowers in meadows. Cold camp nights. - **Best for:** Snow experience, wildflower photography, fewer crowds. #### Mid-July to Mid-August - Peak Season (Recommended) This is Trekkaro's most recommended window for Hampta Pass. The snow on the upper trail has consolidated or melted to manageable levels, the pass crossing is at its most stable, and the contrast between the green Kullu Valley and the bare Spiti landscape is at its most vivid. The weather is warm and clear in the mornings with occasional afternoon thunderstorms, a characteristic pattern of Himalayan summer that is entirely manageable with proper waterproof gear and good pacing. Streams are full and spectacular. Chandratal is at its deepest and most brilliantly coloured. This is when the trek looks exactly like the photographs that first made you want to do it. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 22°C | Night at camp: 2°C to 6°C - **Trail conditions:** Mostly clear. Some snow patches near the pass. Full streams. - **Best for:** Best overall experience, vivid landscape contrast, Chandratal at full depth. #### Mid-August to September - Late Monsoon / Post-Monsoon (Great Visibility) Late August through September is an excellent and underappreciated window for Hampta Pass. The monsoon begins to weaken, bringing progressively clearer skies and some of the sharpest mountain visibility of the year. The meadows remain lush, Chandratal is still brilliantly coloured, and the post-monsoon atmosphere is crisp and cool without the frigid nights of October. Trail conditions are at their best by September. The main caveat is occasional residual monsoon rain bursts in late August – manageable with proper gear and flexible pacing. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 20°C | Night at camp: 0°C to 4°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear trails, crisp air, strong visibility. Occasional late-August rain. - **Best for:** Clear summit views, crisp air, fewer crowds than peak July. #### October Onwards – Closing Season (Advanced Trekkers Only) October brings the first snows of winter back to the Hampta Pass area. The pass can receive fresh snowfall from mid-October onwards, making it technically challenging and increasingly dangerous for standard trek groups. Trekkaro runs Hampta Pass batches from June to September. The Spiti Valley below becomes rapidly inaccessible by road as winter closes in. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Manali to Jobra & Trek to Chika **Route Details:** **Drive: Manali → Jobra (~23 km, ~45 min) | Trek: Jobra → Chika | Distance: ~2 km | Duration: 1-2 hours | Altitude: 9,800 ft → 10,400 ft** The Hampta Pass trek begins not with a dramatic vertical climb but with one of the gentlest, most beautiful introductions in Himalayan trekking. From Jobra, a quiet forest clearing near the Hampta village above Manali, the trail enters a dense cover of oak, birch, and conifer that filters the morning light into slanted gold columns. The Hampta stream runs alongside the path, visible through the trees and audible even when obscured, its glacial chill adding a particular quality of freshness to air that is already noticeably colder and cleaner than anything you breathed in Manali. This is the Himalayas at their most welcoming: physically unhurried, visually generous, and immediately removed from the noise of the world below. The first day's trail is a confidence builder by design. The elevation gain is modest, roughly 600 feet over 2 kilometres, and the terrain is a well-defined forest path with some rocky sections near the stream crossings. First-time trekkers find their rhythm here, learning how their body responds to uphill movement at altitude and settling into the pace their guide sets. More experienced trekkers use the day to assess their kit: checking whether their boots are broken in enough, calibrating their layering to the ambient temperature, and adjusting their pack so that the weight sits correctly on their hips rather than their shoulders. After approximately 1.5 hours of steady walking, the forest opens suddenly and dramatically into the wide, flat meadow at Chika. The transition from enclosed forest to open alpine meadow is one of the recurring visual rewards of the Hampta Pass trail, and it first delivers itself here in a way that stops most trekkers mid-step. Chika sits in a glacially carved valley bowl at 10,400 feet, ringed by green ridges and snow-patched peaks. The meadow is wide enough that tents spread across it feel small against the landscape. Streams from multiple directions converge nearby with an audible rushing that fills the campsite with a constant, peaceful sound. Dinner is served in the mess tent as the light on the surrounding ridges shifts from gold to pink to grey, and the temperature drops fast after sundown. Tonight, the mountains are showing you what is coming. What to Expect: - Drive from Manali to Jobra trailhead (~45 min) through the Kullu Valley - Entry into dense oak and birch forest alongside the Hampta stream - Gentle 600-foot altitude gain – ideal for acclimatisation and finding your rhythm - Arrival at Chika Meadow Campsite (10,400 ft) with surrounding peak views - First campsite dinner and overnight in Trekkaro tents ### Day 2: Chika to Balu Ka Ghera **Route Details:** **Altitude: 10,400 ft → 12,200 ft | Distance: ~8.5 km | Duration: 6 hours | Terrain: Alpine meadows, river crossings, moraine** Day 2 is when the Hampta Pass trail reveals itself in earnest. The gentle forest introduction of Day 1 gives way to a wide, open valley that climbs steadily toward the base of the pass in a series of terraced meadows separated by stream crossings and moraine fields. From the moment you leave Chika, the scale of the surrounding terrain becomes apparent in a way that the forest canopy had partially obscured. The ridgelines are higher. The peaks are closer. The valley ahead narrows visibly in the distance, converging on the snowy V-shaped notch of the pass itself, still two days away but already visible as a distinct feature on the horizon. The trail to Balu Ka Ghera passes through some of the most spectacular open meadow terrain on the entire route. The Hampta River, which at this elevation is more accurately described as a collection of braided glacial streams flowing together across a wide, flat valley floor, provides a series of crossings that require careful foot placement and occasionally wet boots, depending on the time of season and the day's snowmelt rate. In June and early July, these crossings can be knee-deep and fast-moving; by August and September, they are ankle-deep and manageable with trekking poles for balance. Your guide will assess each crossing and assist trekkers individually if the water level is significant. The upper section of the day's trail passes through a boulder field and low moraine before arriving at Balu Ka Ghera, literally 'home of sand' in the local dialect, named for the alluvial deposits that characterise the campsite's terrain. At 12,200 feet, Balu Ka Ghera is positioned directly at the foot of the pass approach, and the view from camp looking up the valley is one of the most memorable on the trek. The glacial headwall that forms the upper valley is fully visible, streaked with snow even in peak summer, and the pass, now clearly identifiable as the lowest point on the skyline ridge, feels suddenly close. Surrounding peaks include Deo Tibba (6,001 m) to the north and Indrasan (7,074 m) to the south, both visible in clear conditions from camp. Sleep early and sleep well. Tomorrow is the longest day. What to Expect: - Wide-open valley trekking through tiered alpine meadows with full peak views - Multiple glacial stream crossings – difficulty varies by season and snowmelt rate - Progressive altitude gain from 10,400 ft to 12,200 ft over 8.5 km - First views of the Hampta Pass notch on the skyline ridge ahead - Campsite at Balu Ka Ghera with Deo Tibba and Indrasan visible in clear conditions ### Day 3: Balu Ka Ghera to Hampta Pass & Descent to Shea Goru **Route Details:** **Altitude: 12,200 ft → 14,100 ft → 11,800 ft | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 7-8 hours | Terrain: Snow, scree, steep ascent and descent** This is the day the entire trek has been building toward, and it earns its reputation completely. The Hampta Pass crossing is the defining experience of the trek – the physical, emotional, and visual centrepiece around which everything else organises itself. It is a demanding day: 10 kilometres of total distance, close to 2,000 feet of altitude gain in the morning followed by a steep 2,300-foot descent in the afternoon, all at elevations between 12,000 and 14,100 feet, where the available oxygen is roughly 40% less than at sea level. It is also the most scenic day of walking on this trek. Departure from Balu Ka Ghera is early, 5:30 AM to 6:00 AM – to take advantage of the morning's firmer snow and to ensure the group crosses the pass and completes the descent before afternoon weather builds. The first two hours are a sustained ascent up the glacially carved valley above camp. The terrain is a mix of compacted snowfields, loose scree beneath the snow, and occasional exposed rock sections where the trail becomes a steep scramble. Your trek leader moves at a measured pace that prioritises consistent forward movement over speed. The altitude demands deliberate breathing; many trekkers adopt a rhythmic step-breath pattern that becomes almost meditative over the course of the ascent. Fixed ropes are installed by the Trekkaro technical team on the steepest section just below the pass, a safety measure that converts a potentially dangerous exposed slope into a confidently manageable climb. The pass itself is a narrow, rocky ridge at 14,100 feet. When you step onto it, the world divides. Behind you: the green, water-rich Kullu Valley; the forested ridges of Manali visible in the far distance; and the braided streams of the Hampta River glittering two thousand feet below. In front of you: the Lahaul-Spiti Valley, grey and silver and brown and utterly barren, a high-desert terrain that looks like the surface of a planet where water has been absent for millennia. The Chandra River, a distant turquoise thread, cuts through the valley floor far below. Mountain ranges you have not seen before line the eastern horizon, the ridges of Ladakh and the Great Himalayan Range visible on clear days as a jagged white wall fifty miles away. Most trekkers stand on this ridge for longer than they intend to. The view in both directions simultaneously is genuinely difficult to fully absorb. The descent to Shea Goru on the Spiti side is steep, loose, and technically demanding in places – arguably harder on the knees and concentration than the ascent. The trail drops quickly through a chute of loose scree and snow before levelling into the flat, rocky terrain of the Lahaul Valley floor. The landscape around you is completely transformed: no trees, no grass, no streams audible. Just rock and sky and the wind. Shea Goru campsite sits at the foot of the descent at 11,800 feet, and after the day's exertion, it feels like the most welcome place in the world. The silence here, in the absence of water sound and birdsong, is of a quality unlike anything on the Kullu side. You are in a different Himalaya now, and it will stay with you long after you have returned home. What to Expect: - Early 5:30 AM departure for firm snow and pre-afternoon weather window - Sustained ~2,000 ft ascent on snow, scree, and exposed rock to the pass at 14,100 ft - The pass: simultaneous 360-degree views of Kullu and Lahaul-Spiti – the defining moment of the trek - Steep scree descent to Shea Goru (11,800 ft) on the Spiti side – trekking poles essential - Overnight in the barren moonscape terrain of the Lahaul Valley floor ### Day 4: Shea Goru to Chhatru and Drive to Chandratal Lake & back **Route Details:** **Trek: Shea Goru → Chhatru | Distance: ~6 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Altitude: 11,800 ft → 10,900 ft Drive: Chhatru → Kunzum Pass → Chandratal Lake (≈ 60 km, ~2 hrs) | Walk to lake: ~2 km | Return to Chhatru overnight** After the enormous physical and emotional investment of Day 3, the morning of Day 4 begins gently and unhurriedly. The 6-kilometre trail from Shea Goru to Chhatru follows the Chandra River along the floor of the Lahaul Valley – mostly flat, occasionally undulating, with the river in constant sight and the dramatic bare ridgelines of the Spiti ranges flanking both sides of the path. This is the Himalayas with all softness removed: wide, open, and elemental, lit by a hard directional light that falls on bare rock with no canopy to diffuse it. Formations of deep rust, pale ochre, silver-grey, and dark volcanic brown rise above the path in layered geological exposures that read like pages of a very long book. You are walking across the floor of an ancient inland sea, and the landscape makes that legible in ways that no geology lesson could. The Chandra River is one of the significant rivers of the western Himalayas, the headwater of the Chenab, and walking alongside it at this elevation carries a particular weight of significance. The river runs glacial-blue and fast, fed by snowfields above that are still visible on the ridgelines. Many trekkers use this morning to process what happened the previous day: the pass, the descent, the landscape change, the fixed rope, and the moment on the ridge looking both ways. The mountains have given you something significant, and the easy morning walk gives you time to sit with it before the afternoon’s second extraordinary experience begins. Chatru is reached in three to four hours, a remote settlement at the junction of the Manali-Kaza Highway and the Hampta Valley trail, sitting at the confluence of the Chandra River and the road into Spiti. After a hot lunch at camp, the Trekkaro vehicles load up, and the afternoon drive begins. The road from Chhatru to Chandratal passes over the Kunzum Pass at 15,059 feet, itself one of the highest motorable passes in the world, marked with hundreds of prayer flags that snap and stream in the constant wind and a small Kunzum Devi temple where vehicles stop and travellers offer thanks before the descent. The drive over Kunzum is a high-altitude spectacle in its own right: glaciers close enough to reach from the road window, valleys of impossible scale opening below, and the Spiti landscape becoming progressively more dramatic and alien as you gain altitude again. From the pass, the road drops into the Spiti Valley and follows the Chandra River to the Chandratal turn-off. A gentle two-kilometre walk from the road, across flat open terrain with the lake bowl visible ahead, brings you to the shore of Chandratal. Chandratal – the Lake of the Moon, at 14,100 feet – is a crescent of pure, living colour in a bowl of absolute silence. The lake’s colour is not fixed: it shifts throughout the day between deep cobalt, luminous turquoise, and a pale jade-green depending on depth, angle of light, and the position of clouds above. The surrounding peaks reflect in its surface on calm days with a mirror-clarity that makes the reflections feel more real than the mountains themselves. Named for its crescent shape, the lake is a UNESCO Ramsar Wetland of international importance and one of the most frequently photographed natural features in the Himalayas, and yet every trekker who arrives here reports the same thing: no photograph has ever done it justice. You have to stand at the edge and watch the water change colour in real time to understand what all the photographs are attempting to show. The Trekkaro group has approximately two hours at the lake – time to walk the shoreline, sit at the water’s edge, photograph from every angle, and simply be present with one of the most beautiful places on earth. The drive back to Chhatru takes the last of the light, and the Spiti Valley receives you for your final overnight in the high desert. What to Expect: - Easy morning trek along the Chandra River from Shea Goru to Chhatru (6 km, 3-4 hrs) - Spiti-side geology: rust, ochre, and silver rock formations with zero vegetation on both sides - Hot lunch at Chatru camp before the afternoon drive begins - Drive over the Kunzum Pass (15,059 ft) – one of the highest motorable passes in the world - 2 km walk from the road to Chandra Taal Lake shore across open Spiti terrain - Chandratal Lake: crescent-shaped, colour-shifting, 14,100 ft – included in your Trekkaro package - ~2 hours at the lakeshore: walk the perimeter, photograph, and watch the colour change - Return drive to Chhatru for dinner and overnight camp under the Spiti stars ### Day 5: Chhatru to Manali via Atal Tunnel **Route Details:** **Drive: Chhatru → Atal Tunnel → Manali | Distance: ~65 km by road | Duration: ~3–4 hours | Altitude: 10,900 ft → 6,700 ft** The final morning at Chhatru arrives with the particular quality of light that belongs only to high-altitude Lahaul: flat, clean, and hard-edged, falling across the grey river gravel and bare ridgelines without any warmth of forest or meadow to soften it. You have slept two nights now on the Spiti side of the Hampta Pass, and the landscape has done its work on you. There is a specific kind of quiet that belongs to this terrain – wider and more absolute than the quiet of the forested Kullu Valley – and the final morning at Chhatru is when most trekkers sit with it most consciously, knowing it will not be available on the other side of the mountain. Breakfast is taken at camp as the team packs the last of the equipment and the vehicles are loaded. Then the drive begins. The route from Chhatru to Manali follows the Chandra River westward before entering the Rohtang La area and descending through the Atal Tunnel – the 9.02-kilometre tunnel that bores straight through the Rohtang Pass mountain at 10,171 feet and emerges on the Kullu Valley side near Solang Valley. Inaugurated in 2020 and named after former Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee, the Atal Tunnel is an engineering landmark of considerable scale – it is the world’s longest highway tunnel above 10,000 feet – and it transforms a journey that once required crossing the dangerous Rohtang Pass road into a direct, year-round connection between Lahaul and Manali. The tunnel entrance on the Lahaul side sits in the bare, treeless terrain that has been your world for two days. The tunnel exit on the Manali side opens into a pine forest. The contrast – from grey rock and open sky to green, fragrant forest in the space of fifteen minutes – is so sudden and so complete that it feels almost theatrical. You step out of the mountain and back into the valley you started from. The descent from the tunnel to Manali follows the Beas River valley, the same river that flows through Manali town and whose sound is the backdrop of every evening in the city. As altitude drops, the vegetation thickens rapidly: first scrubby pine, then proper forest, then the apple orchards and cedar groves that line the valley floor approaching Manali. The air noticeably warms and moistens. Traffic reappears. The road becomes busier. The Himalayas are releasing you back into the world gently and incrementally, giving you 65 kilometres of road to make the transition. Arrival in Manali is late morning to early afternoon – time for a hot shower that feels more luxurious than any shower you have ever taken, a proper sit-down restaurant meal, and the entirely particular pleasure of a comfortable chair and a cup of tea while you try to organise five days of extraordinary experience into something that can be explained to someone who was not there. You will find, as most Hampta Pass trekkers do, that it largely resists explanation. The two valleys, the pass, the moonscape, the lake – they are a complete experience, and they belong to you now entirely. What to Expect: - Final morning at Chhatru camp – last breakfast in the Lahaul landscape before departure - Atal Tunnel crossing (9.02 km, world’s longest highway tunnel above 10,000 ft) – Lahaul to Kullu Valley in fifteen minutes - Dramatic landscape reversal from bare Lahaul rock to pine forest and Beas Valley greenery on exit - Arrival in Manali late morning to early afternoon – hot shower, meal, and five days of the Himalayas to reflect on ## Inclusions #### 1. Accommodation - Day 1 to Day 4: camping at Chika, Balu Ka Ghera, Shea Goru and Chhatru, on a triple-sharing basis #### 2. Meals - All meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 5 breakfast: breakfast, lunch, snacks and dinner #### 3. Transport - Manali to Jobra trailhead - Chatru to Chandratal and back - Return from Chatru to Manali #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - Forest department permits and Chandratal Lake entry fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Double-wall, rain-rated tents and -20°C sleeping bags at every campsite - Trekking mattresses or sleeping pads at every campsite - Free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge) - Basic first-aid kit carried by the trek leader on the trail at all times #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide throughout the trek - Experienced mountain kitchen staff, helpers, and a mule and horse support team - Trekkaro trek completion certificate when you successfully cross the pass ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Travel to and from Manali (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals during travel to and from Manali #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,500 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Manali #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack and sunglasses - Trekking shoes, jacket and trekking poles: bring your own (microspikes and gaiters are provided free) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance and emergency evacuation cover are not included #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Manali before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Bhuntar Airport (Kullu-Manali, KUU), about 50 km and 1.5–2 hrs by taxi from Manali, with flights from Delhi. Flights are limited and weather-dependent, so fly in at least a day before the 10:00 AM reporting time. If Bhuntar flights are full, fly to Chandigarh (about 300 km from Manali) and take an overnight bus. **From Manali to Jobra:** Report at Manali Bus Stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1; the 23 km (about 45 min) drive to Jobra is included in your trek fee and a 2 km walk to the Chika camp. Missing the 10:00 AM reporting time counts as a no-show: no refund, voucher, reschedule or transfer (see our [cancellation policy](https://www.trekkaro.com/terms#cancellation)). If you are running late, tell the trek coordinator early so the team can try to help you join. Be in Manali by 9:00 AM. **Return:** On the last day the included drive brings you from Chhatru to Manali via Atal Tunnel (65 km, 3–4 hrs). Bhuntar flights are limited, so book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Manali has no railway. The nearest major station is Chandigarh (about 300 km), with Kalka and Ambala as alternatives; from there you continue by road. Check current timings. - **Chandigarh** – trains from Delhi; then an overnight Volvo or HRTC bus from Chandigarh (ISBT Sector 43) to Manali, about 8–9 hrs. - **Kalka or Ambala** – useful if Chandigarh trains are full; continue by road to Manali. **From Manali to Jobra:** Report at Manali Bus Stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1; the 23 km (about 45 min) drive to Jobra is included in your trek fee and a 2 km walk to the Chika camp. Missing the 10:00 AM reporting time counts as a no-show: no refund, voucher, reschedule or transfer (see our [cancellation policy](https://www.trekkaro.com/terms#cancellation)). If you are running late, tell the trek coordinator early so the team can try to help you join. Be in Manali by 9:00 AM. **Return:** On the last day the included drive brings you from Chhatru to Manali via Atal Tunnel (65 km, 3–4 hrs). Book a bus from Manali to Chandigarh leaving after 4:00 PM to allow for traffic or roadblocks, then your train from Chandigarh – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Overnight Volvo and HRTC buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Manali in about 12–14 hrs; buses also run from Chandigarh (ISBT Sector 43, about 8–9 hrs). Book a Volvo that reaches Manali by 9:00 AM on Day 1 and double-check its timing with your transporter. - **Volvo** – AC overnight coach; the option Trekkaro asks you to book for Day 1. - **HRTC** – Himachal government buses from Delhi and Chandigarh; check current timings. **From Manali to Jobra:** Report at Manali Bus Stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1; the 23 km (about 45 min) drive to Jobra is included in your trek fee and a 2 km walk to the Chika camp. Missing the 10:00 AM reporting time counts as a no-show: no refund, voucher, reschedule or transfer (see our [cancellation policy](https://www.trekkaro.com/terms#cancellation)). If you are running late, tell the trek coordinator early so the team can try to help you join. Be in Manali by 9:00 AM. **Return:** On the last day the included drive brings you from Chhatru to Manali via Atal Tunnel (65 km, 3–4 hrs). Book a return bus leaving Manali after 4:00 PM to allow for traffic or roadblocks. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Manali is the last reliable place to withdraw cash - Carry enough money before the trek starts - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Manali is the last place with a stable mobile signal - There is little or no signal from Chika, the first campsite, onwards - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Hampta Pass trek, and where does it start? The Hampta Pass trek is in Kullu district, Himachal Pradesh, and crosses from the green Kullu valley into the bare Lahaul valley. It starts at Jobra, a 23 km (about 45 minute) drive from Manali, and ends at Chhatru, from where you drive back to Manali through the Atal Tunnel. The pass, at 4,298 m (14,100 ft), sits on the ridge between the two valleys, so from the top you see Kullu on one side and Lahaul-Spiti on the other. ### How many days is the Hampta Pass trek? The Hampta Pass trek takes 5 days from Manali to Manali, with 4 trekking days covering about 26.5 km. - **Day 1:** drive from Manali to Jobra, then a short walk to the Chika camp - **Days 2–3:** up to Balu Ka Ghera, then over the pass to Shea Goru - **Day 4:** walk to Chhatru, then a drive to Chandratal Lake and back - **Day 5:** drive from Chhatru to Manali via the Atal Tunnel (3–4 hours) ### How far do we walk each day on the Hampta Pass trek? On the Hampta Pass trek you walk between 2 km and 10 km a day, taking 1–8 hours. Pass day is the longest, while the first and last trekking days are short. - **Day 1:** Jobra to Chika, 2 km, 1–2 hours - **Day 2:** Chika to Balu Ka Ghera, 8.5 km, about 6 hours - **Day 3:** over Hampta Pass to Shea Goru, 10 km, 7–8 hours - **Day 4:** Shea Goru to Chhatru, 6 km, 3–4 hours ### What is the altitude of the Hampta Pass trek? The highest point of the Hampta Pass trek is the pass at 4,298 m (14,100 ft). The trek starts at Jobra (2,990 m / 9,800 ft), so you climb about 1,300 m in the first three days. - **Chika camp:** 3,170 m (10,400 ft) - **Balu Ka Ghera camp:** 3,720 m (12,200 ft), the highest campsite - **Shea Goru camp:** 3,600 m (11,800 ft) - **Chhatru camp:** 3,320 m (10,900 ft) ### What is the difficulty level of the Hampta Pass trek? The Hampta Pass trek is graded Moderate. Most days are steady walking, but pass day is long and steep, and rain can make the trail slippery, so good fitness is needed. - **Pass day:** 10 km in 7–8 hours, with a climb of about 2,000 ft on snow, scree and exposed rock - **Descent:** a steep scree slope down to Shea Goru, where trekking poles are essential - **Stream crossings:** several glacial streams on Day 2, harder when snowmelt is high ### Is the Hampta Pass trek good for beginners? Yes, the Hampta Pass trek suits fit beginners who prepare well. It eases you in with a 2 km first day and only about 600 ft of height gain, which helps acclimatisation. Pass day is the real test: 7–8 hours on snow and scree. Train for it in advance and bring your own broken-in shoes and trekking poles. ### What fitness level do I need for the Hampta Pass trek? For the Hampta Pass trek you should be comfortable walking up to 8 hours in a day on uneven ground, including a sustained climb of about 2,000 ft to the pass at 14,100 ft. - **Build stamina:** regular brisk walks, stair climbing or uphill hikes in the weeks before the trek - **Strength:** strong legs help on the steep scree descent from the pass - **Fitness test:** take the free 2-minute Am I Ready? test on the Trekkaro website ### When is the best time for the Hampta Pass trek? The Hampta Pass trek runs from June to September. From mid-October to May the route is under snow and closed. - **June to August:** days of 10–20°C, with rain likely on the Kullu side - **Pass approach:** patches of hard snow remain, so pass day starts at 5:30 AM while the snow is firm - **September:** colder, with a real chance of snowfall ### Will there be snow on the Hampta Pass trek? Yes, but mainly on pass day. The first two days of the Hampta Pass trek are free of snow; above Balu Ka Ghera you cross hard snow, scree and rock on the climb to 14,100 ft. - **Early start:** pass day begins at 5:30 AM, while the snow is still firm - **Gaiters and microspikes:** provided free for the snow patches on the pass approach - **September:** fresh snowfall is possible ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Hampta Pass trek? On the Hampta Pass trek, days are about 8°C to 22°C from June to September. Nights at camp are coldest in June and early July (0°C to -4°C), 2°C to 6°C from mid-July to mid-August, and 0°C to 4°C in late August and September, when early snowfall on the pass is possible. - **Layers:** 3 warm layers: thermals, a fleece and a padded or down jacket - **Rain wear:** a rain jacket and rain pants, as rain is likely on the Kullu side - **Pass day:** a woollen cap, a buff and two pairs of gloves ### Which mountains and views can you see on the Hampta Pass trek? From the Balu Ka Ghera camp on the Hampta Pass trek you can see Deo Tibba and Indrasan in clear weather, and from the pass you get 360-degree views over both the Kullu and Lahaul-Spiti valleys. - **Kullu side:** oak and birch forest, then tiered alpine meadows along the Hampta stream - **Lahaul side:** bare rock in rust, ochre and silver tones along the Chandra River - **Chandratal Lake:** a crescent-shaped lake visited on Day 4 ### What is the terrain like on the Hampta Pass trek? The terrain on the Hampta Pass trek changes every day, from forest and meadows on the Kullu side to snow, scree and bare rock on the Lahaul side. - **Day 1:** dense oak and birch forest along the Hampta stream - **Day 2:** alpine meadows, glacial stream crossings and moraine - **Day 3:** snow, scree and exposed rock up to the pass, then a steep scree descent - **Day 4:** an easy walk along the Chandra River with almost no vegetation ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Hampta Pass trek? Yes, there is some risk of altitude sickness on the Hampta Pass trek, as you go from 9,800 ft to 14,100 ft in three days. Day 1 gains only about 600 ft, and the highest camp is at 12,200 ft, which helps your body adjust. - **Trek leaders:** trained in Wilderness First Aid and aware of high-altitude issues - **First aid:** a full first-aid kit and essential medicines are carried - **Before you go:** ask your doctor about altitude medicine and bring your own regular medicines ### What is the minimum age for the Hampta Pass trek? The minimum age for the Hampta Pass trek is 11 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the start of the Hampta Pass trek? The Hampta Pass trek starts in Manali: report at Manali Bus Stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1, from where the group drives 23 km (about 45 minutes) to Jobra. - **By bus:** overnight Volvo or HRTC buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate take 12–14 hours; book one that reaches Manali by 9:00 AM - **By air:** Bhuntar Airport (KUU) is about 50 km from Manali; flights are limited, so fly in a day early - **By train:** the nearest major station is Chandigarh (about 300 km), then an 8–9 hour bus to Manali - **Return:** book buses leaving Manali after 4:00 PM on Day 5 ### Is transport included in the Hampta Pass trek? Yes, transport during the Hampta Pass trek is included in the trek fee: the drive from Manali to Jobra on Day 1, the Chandratal Lake drive on Day 4 and the drive from Chhatru back to Manali on Day 5. - **Vehicles:** Bolero, Max, Tempo Traveller or equivalent - **Your part:** travel to Manali and back home - **Late arrival:** missing the 10:00 AM reporting time counts as a no-show (no refund, voucher, reschedule or transfer); if you are running late, tell the trek coordinator early so the team can try to help you join ### Where do we stay on the Hampta Pass trek? On the Hampta Pass trek you stay 4 nights in Trekkaro tents at Chika, Balu Ka Ghera, Shea Goru and Chhatru. Three trekkers share each four-person tent. Women trekkers share tents only with other women, and men with men. ### What is the group size on the Hampta Pass trek and who leads it? A Hampta Pass batch has a maximum of 20 trekkers, and a fixed departure needs at least 6. Each batch is led by a professional trek leader who has completed basic and advanced mountaineering courses and is trained in first aid. - **Support team:** a local guide, chef, assistant, porters and other staff - **Private treks:** group size does not matter for a private batch ### Is the Hampta Pass trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Hampta Pass trek is safe for women trekking alone, and the safety of women trekkers is of the utmost importance to Trekkaro. A woman trekking solo shares a tent only with other women trekkers, never with men. - **Staff:** guides and support staff are carefully selected, trustworthy and reliable - **Valuables:** keep your personal belongings secure, as on any group trip ### What food is served on the Hampta Pass trek? The Hampta Pass trek serves simple, nutritious vegetarian food, with eggs available on request at the campsite. - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Day 4:** a hot lunch at the Chhatru camp before the Chandratal drive - **Snacks:** bring nuts, energy bars and electrolyte sachets, especially for pass day ### Is drinking water safe on the Hampta Pass trek? Yes. On the Hampta Pass trek the water comes from Himalayan streams, and to be safe it is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets at the camps. - **Bottles:** carry two 1 L bottles - **Refills:** ask the trek leader or guide where to fill your bottles during the day ### Do I need my own trekking gear for the Hampta Pass trek? Yes. On the Hampta Pass trek you bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, with no deposit and no charge. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Hampta Pass trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Hampta Pass trek costs ₹2,500 + 5% GST, and a porter or mule carries your main bag. - **Notice:** tell us at least 15 days in advance so a porter or mule can be arranged - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack with water, rain jacket and snacks ### Is there a doctor on the Hampta Pass trek? No, a doctor does not join the Hampta Pass trek. The trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid and high-altitude issues, and the team carries a full first-aid kit and essential medicines. - **Your medicines:** always bring your own regular medicines and a personal medical kit - **Before booking:** check your health, or get expert advice if you are unsure about your fitness ### What documents do I need for the Hampta Pass trek? For the Hampta Pass trek, carry an original government photo ID with a photocopy, a medical fitness certificate signed by a doctor, and travel insurance with emergency evacuation cover, which is mandatory. - **ID:** Aadhaar card, passport, voter ID or driving licence - **International trekkers:** passport, needed for forest entry permits and any medical evacuation - **Forms:** the disclaimer form with emergency contact details, and your Trekkaro booking confirmation ### Are there ATMs and charging points on the Hampta Pass trek? No. There is no charging on the Hampta Pass trek beyond Manali, and ATMs are few in the hills, so carry a power bank and withdraw enough cash in Manali. - **Cash:** keep small notes, as cards are not accepted in the mountains - **Phone:** wrap it in a ziploc bag to protect it from rain ### Is Chandratal Lake included in the Hampta Pass trek? Yes, a visit to Chandratal Lake is included in the Hampta Pass trek. On Day 4, after a short walk to Chhatru, you drive about 60 km (2 hours) to the lake and return to Chhatru for the night. - **The lake:** crescent-shaped and colour-shifting, at about 14,100 ft - **On the way:** the drive goes over Kunzum Pass (15,059 ft) - **At the lake:** a 2 km walk from the road and about 2 hours at the shore ### When should I book my travel for the Hampta Pass trek? Book your travel for the Hampta Pass trek as soon as your payment is complete: your booking is then confirmed and shows as Paid in My Bookings. - **Arrival:** a bus that reaches Manali by 9:00 AM on Day 1, or a flight to Bhuntar the day before - **Departure:** a bus leaving Manali after 4:00 PM on Day 5, or a flight the next day ### Can the Hampta Pass trek itinerary be changed, and does the end date change? Yes, the Hampta Pass itinerary can change if weather or other mountain conditions demand it, but the trek still ends on the planned date. In such cases the trek leader offers the closest alternative to the original plan. Leave some buffer in your own travel plans, and book return buses after 4:00 PM to allow for traffic or roadblocks. ### Can I book a private Hampta Pass trek? Yes, you can book the Hampta Pass trek as a private trek for your own group, with any number of people. The price of a private trek depends on the group size, the trek, its duration and the type of trek, so contact Trekkaro for a quote. ## Upcoming batches - 12 Jun 2027 to 16 Jun 2027 - 13 Jun 2027 to 17 Jun 2027 - 14 Jun 2027 to 18 Jun 2027 - 15 Jun 2027 to 19 Jun 2027 - 16 Jun 2027 to 20 Jun 2027 - 17 Jun 2027 to 21 Jun 2027 - 18 Jun 2027 to 22 Jun 2027 - 19 Jun 2027 to 23 Jun 2027 - 20 Jun 2027 to 24 Jun 2027 - 21 Jun 2027 to 25 Jun 2027 - 22 Jun 2027 to 26 Jun 2027 - 23 Jun 2027 to 27 Jun 2027 - … 56 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/hampta-pass-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Har Ki Dun Trek > Har Ki Dun Trek is a 7-day easy–moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,536 m (11,600 ft). It covers about 52 km on foot and starts and ends at Sankri. Best time: March to June and October to November. Trekkaro price: ₹10,500 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (44 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/har-ki-dun-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,536 m / 11,600 ft - **Trekking distance:** 52 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Sankri - **Best time:** March to June and October to November - **Temperature:** Apr-Jun: Taluka 10°C to 22°C, Har Ki Dun 0°C to 12°C | Sep-Nov: Taluka 5°C to 18°C, Har Ki Dun -3°C to 8°C - **Price:** ₹10,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (44 upcoming) ## Overview ### Har Ki Dun Trek: The Valley Of Gods There are valleys in the Garhwal Himalayas that are beautiful. And then there is Har Ki Dun – the Valley of the Gods, a glacially carved cradle at 3,536 metres enclosed by peaks that touch 6,000 metres, inhabited by communities who have lived here for generations, and surrounded by forests and meadows that remain among the most ecologically intact landscapes in the Indian Himalayan range. Har Ki Dun is not a summit trek and not a pass crossing. It is something rarer and, in its own way, more demanding: a journey into one of the few genuinely pristine high-altitude valleys remaining in Uttarakhand, through the Supin River gorge, across dense forests of oak, rhododendron, and pine, into a landscape that becomes more open and more extraordinary with every day of walking. The valley floor at 3,536 m is surrounded on three sides by peaks, Swargarohini (6,252 m), Bandarpunch (6,316 m), and Black Peak (6,387 m), that provide one of the most complete and dramatic mountain horizons available on an easy–moderate trek in India. In seven days from Dehradun, the Trekkaro team takes you from the road at Taluka into this valley and back out, an experience that is unhurried, deeply beautiful, and unlike anything else we operate. ### Overview Har Ki Dun – meaning 'Valley of the Gods' in the local Garhwali dialect – is a glacially carved hanging valley at 3,536 m (11,600 ft) in the Govind Pashu Vihar National Park and Wildlife Sanctuary, Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand. The valley is one of the oldest inhabited Himalayan valleys in the Indian subcontinent, with the surrounding Swargarohini massif identified in Hindu tradition as the stairway to heaven used by the Pandavas on their final ascent. The trek follows the Supin River upstream from Taluka through forest villages, gorge sections, open meadows, and alpine terrain before reaching the valley floor. ### The Valley Itself What distinguishes Har Ki Dun from almost every other trek of its grade in India is its completeness. The valley is enclosed on three sides by a mountain wall of extraordinary character: Swargarohini I (6,252 m), the mythological stairway to heaven; Bandarpunch (6,316 m), whose glacier is visible from the valley floor; and Black Peak (6,387 m) on the northern ridge. From the Har Ki Dun valley floor, trekkers have a 270-degree view of this mountain wall, a visual experience that very few moderate treks in India provide without requiring a technically demanding climb. The valley floor is wide, open, and covered in alpine meadow: a landscape that feels generous rather than austere and dramatic rather than intimidating. ### The Route – Through the Supin Valley The approach follows the Supin River upstream from Taluka (2,107 m) through one of the most ecologically rich corridors in Uttarakhand. The trail passes through dense oak and rhododendron forest, across suspension bridges above the roaring river, and through the living village of Osla, where the remarkable Duryodhana Temple, dedicated to the Mahabharata antagonist, provides a cultural dimension absent from most Himalayan trekking routes. The campsites at Puani Garaat and Kalkatiyadhaar are positioned in forest meadow clearings alongside the Supin, providing shelter and the specific quiet that only exists at walking distance from a road. ### Who Is This Trek For? Har Ki Dun is graded Easy–Moderate. It is an excellent first Himalayan trek for trekkers with a reasonable fitness base and equally rewarding for experienced trekkers who prioritise landscape depth over technical challenge. The maximum altitude of 3,536 m is accessible for well-prepared beginners. Daily distances of 8 to 14 km are achievable with consistent cardiovascular fitness. Minimum age: 8 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor. Daily trekking hours: 4 to 7 hours. Season: March to June and October to November. ### Key Highlights of the Har Ki Dun Trek - Har Ki Dun Valley floor (3,536 m / 11,600 ft) - 270-degree panorama of Swargarohini, Bandarpunch, and Black Peak - Swargarohini (6,252 m) – the mythological Pandava stairway to heaven, visible in full from the valley - Bandarpunch (6,316 m) glacier visible directly from the valley floor - Duryodhana Temple at Osla – one of the few temples in India dedicated to the Mahabharata antagonist - Supin River gorge trail – dense rhododendron and oak forest, roaring river, traditional Garhwali villages - Govind Pashu Vihar National Park – snow leopard, Himalayan black bear, and Himalayan monal habitat - Sankri gateway village (1,950 m) – established trek base with Swargarohini range views - Certified Trekkaro trek leader and guides, twice-daily health monitoring, and **[FTG gear with no rental fee](gears.php)** ### Best Time to Visit Har Ki Dun Har Ki Dun has two trekking windows separated by the monsoon: a pre-monsoon spring window from March to June and a post-monsoon autumn window from October to November. The valley is accessible year-round in principle, but the monsoon brings waterlogged forest paths and swollen river crossings that significantly diminish the experience. Winter (December to February) sees the valley and upper trail snowbound. #### March to June — Spring Window (Rhododendrons & Snowmelt) The spring window opens as the lower trail dries after winter and the rhododendron forests between Taluka and Puani Garaat come into full bloom. April and May are the peak rhododendron months, the trail through the oak and rhododendron forest below Osla is carpeted in red and pink blooms at a density that transforms the forest entirely. The Har Ki Dun valley in May still carries residual snowpack at its upper edges, making the valley floor visually dramatic against the bloom of the lower forests. This is an excellent window for trekkers who prioritise wildflower and forest colour. - **Temperatures:** Taluka: 10°C to 22°C | Puani Garaat: 5°C to 18°C | Har Ki Dun: 0°C to 12°C - **Trail conditions:** Rhododendron bloom. Residual snow at valley edges. Warm days, cool nights. - **Best for:** Forest colour, rhododendron photography, and spring snowpack in the valley. #### July to August — Monsoon (Not Recommended) The monsoon brings waterlogged paths, swollen river crossings, and leeches in the lower forest sections. Trekkaro does not operate standard Har Ki Dun batches in July and August. The trail is passable, but the practical difficulties are disproportionate to the experience. - **Status:** Not recommended. No standard Trekkaro batches in July–August. #### October to November — Autumn Window (Most Recommended) This is Trekkaro's most recommended window for Har Ki Dun. The season reopens in October, the peak month: the oak and maple forests turn amber and gold, the air is crystal clear, the Swargarohini and Bandarpunch peaks stand in hard-edged definition, and the valley floor meadow is green and wide and completely open. Night temperatures at the valley begin dropping below zero in November, but October nights are cold and clear and reward trekkers with proper sleeping bags. - **Temperatures:** Taluka: 5°C to 18°C | Puani Garaat: 2°C to 12°C | Har Ki Dun: -3°C to 8°C - **Trail conditions:** Dry, well-defined trail. Autumn forest colour. Sharpest mountain visibility. - **Best for:** Peak mountain views, autumn colour, crystal air, and the best overall conditions. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the best mountain clarity and autumn forest colour, book an October batch. For the rhododendron bloom and spring snowpack in the valley, choose April to mid-May. Both windows offer a genuinely extraordinary version of Har Ki Dun – the decision is between the colour of spring and the clarity of autumn. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Drive from Dehradun to Sankri **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Mussoorie → Purola → Mori → Sankri | Distance: ~200 km | Duration: 8–9 hrs | Altitude: 700 m (Dehradun) → 1,950 m (Sankri)** The drive from Dehradun to Sankri is one of the longer approach journeys in the Trekkaro portfolio, approximately 200 km and 8 to 9 hours, through some of the most scenic and progressively remote terrain in Uttarakhand. The road passes through Mussoorie (2,000 m) before descending into the Yamuna and then Tonnes River valleys, following roads that become narrower and quieter as they penetrate deeper into the Garhwal interior. The Tonnes Valley carries the Tonnes River, the largest tributary of the Yamuna by volume, through a landscape of forested ridges, terraced fields, and small market towns. The drive is a genuine introduction to the region you are entering. Sankri (1,950 m) is the departure point for several significant Uttarakhand treks, including Kedarkantha and Har Ki Dun. It is a small, well-organised trek gateway with the Swargarohini range visible above the village on clear days. The evening in Sankri is for rest, gear verification, and the trek briefing. Trekkaro's health baseline SpO₂, pulse, and blood pressure for every trekker is recorded here. The trek briefing covers the full route, daily structure, health monitoring protocol, and what to expect on the Supin Valley forest terrain. Sleep well. Day 2 begins early. What to Expect: - Drive from Dehradun to Sankri – ~200 km, 8–9 hrs via Mussoorie, Purola, and the Tonnes Valley road - Tonnes Valley scenery: forested ridges, terraced farms, and progressively remote Garhwal interior - Sankri (1,950 m): established trek gateway with Swargarohini views on clear days - Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - Health baseline: SpO₂, pulse, and BP recorded for every trekker - Trek briefing: full route overview, daily structure, health protocol - Overnight: Sankri (1,950 m) – last road town before the trek begins ### Day 2: Drive Sankri to Taluka & Trek to Puani Garaat **Route Details:** **Drive: Sankri → Taluka (~12 km, ~45 min) | Trek: Taluka (2,107 m) → Puani Garaat (~2,440 m) | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs** Day 2 begins with the short morning drive from Sankri to Taluka, the last motorable point on the Har Ki Dun approach road. Taluka (2,107 m) is a small settlement at the point where the jeep track ends and the foot trail begins, marked by a bridge across the Supin River and the visible opening of the forested gorge ahead. From this bridge, on clear days, the snowpeaked wall at the head of the Har Ki Dun valley is visible as a distant white horizon above the forest canopy. You leave the road behind and begin the walk that will carry you up to 3,536 metres in three days. The trail from Taluka to Puani Garaat follows the right bank of the Supin River upstream through a gorge of exceptional character. The Supin at this altitude is fast and loud, constrained between canyon walls that rise steeply on both sides. The forest above the trail is one of the ecological highlights of this route, with dense oak, deodar cedar, and rhododendron in the lower sections, giving way to blue pine and silver fir as altitude increases. In spring, the rhododendron bloom transforms the forest floor and canopy into layers of red and pink. In autumn, the oak and maple canopy turns amber and gold above a trail that remains dry and well-defined. Puani Garaat is a forest camp in a clearing above the Supin River at approximately 2,440 m, a sheltered, well-watered campsite surrounded by forest and the sound of the river below. This is the first genuine wilderness camp of the route. Beyond Taluka, there are no roads, and the sounds of the trail are the river, the forest, and the wind. The altitude gain from Taluka is modest, approximately 330 m across 10 km, making Day 2 an ideal introduction to the terrain and the specific rhythm of Supin Valley trekking. What to Expect: - Morning drive from Sankri to Taluka (~12 km, ~45 min) - last road before the trail begins - The trail begins at Taluka (2,107 m) across the Supin River bridge – a forest gorge opens ahead - Supin River gorge: dense oak, deodar, and rhododendron forest alongside the river - Altitude gain: ~330 m over ~10 km – measured gradient to settle into the route's rhythm - Puani Garaat camp (~2,440 m) - forest clearing above the Supin, first wilderness camp - Overnight: Puani Garaat – river sound, forest shelter, first night on the trail ### Day 3: Puani Garaat to Kalkatiyadhaar **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~2,440 m → ~2,740 m (Kalkatiyadhaar) | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: Forest trail, river crossings, Osla village, open meadow approach** Day 3 is the route's richest in cultural and ecological variety. The trail from Puani Garaat continues upstream along the Supin River, passing through the living village of Osla before climbing through progressively higher forest terrain to the meadow camp at Kalkatiyadhaar. Osla is one of the traditional villages of the Supin Valley, a settlement of stone and timber houses built in the distinctive Garhwali style with intricately carved wooden facades and stacked-stone construction that reflects centuries of craft adapted to the high-altitude climate. The village is genuinely inhabited and genuinely connected to an older version of Himalayan life. In Osla stands the Duryodhana Temple, one of the most unusual religious sites in Uttarakhand and one of the very few temples in India dedicated to Duryodhana, the primary antagonist of the Mahabharata. The local tradition holds that the Pandavas passed through the Har Ki Dun valley on their ascent to heaven via the Swargarohini peak and that the Kauravas maintained a protective presence over the valley in their absence. The temple is small, stone-built, and decorated in the carved wooden style of the valley. Standing in Osla beside this temple, at the base of the Swargarohini massif, the mythological landscape of the Mahabharata and the physical landscape of the Himalayas briefly become the same thing. Above Osla, the trail climbs through forest to Kalkatiyadhaar, a meadow camp at approximately 2,740 m where the forest gives way to the more open terrain of the upper Supin Valley. From Kalkatiyadhaar, the higher peaks of the Har Ki Dun enclosure become visible for the first time in their full extent: Swargarohini above and to the north, the Black Peak ridge to the east, and the valley corridor opening ahead toward the floor at 3,536 m. Tomorrow the valley reveals itself completely. What to Expect: - Osla village – traditional Garhwali stone and timber architecture, lived-in and remarkable - Duryodhana Temple – one of the few temples in India dedicated to the Mahabharata antagonist - Forest trail with gradual gain – oak, deodar, and rhododendron through the upper Supin Valley - First full views of Swargarohini and the upper valley peaks from Kalkatiyadhaar meadow - Kalkatiyadhaar camp (~2,740 m) – open meadow at the forest edge, valley opening visible ahead - Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Altitude gain: ~300 m - Overnight: Kalkatiyadhaar – the last camp before the valley floor ### Day 4: Kalkatiyadhaar to Har Ki Dun Valley & Back to Kalkatiyadhaar **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,740 m → Har Ki Dun (3,536 m / 11,600 ft) → Return to Kalkatiyadhaar (2,740 m) | Distance: ~14 km round trip | Duration: 8–9 hrs | Terrain: Open valley trail, alpine meadow** Day 4 is the centrepiece of the Har Ki Dun trek, the day the entire route has been building toward. The trail from Kalkatiyadhaar to the Har Ki Dun valley floor gains 796 m over 7 km of progressively opening terrain. The forest thins above camp, the valley walls recede on both sides, and the landscape transforms from an enclosed forest gorge to a wide, open, high-altitude basin in a transition that happens gradually enough to absorb but dramatically enough to stop most trekkers mid-stride when the valley fully opens. The Har Ki Dun valley at 3,536 m (11,600 ft) is an enclosed glacial basin of exceptional spaciousness. The valley floor is wide and flat in the summer and autumn seasons, a broad meadow of alpine grass and wildflowers crossed by the upper Supin River in clean, shallow channels that reflect the peaks above. On all three sides, the mountain wall rises: Swargarohini I (6,252 m) to the north-northwest, its upper snowfields brilliant white above the moraine at its base; Bandarpunch (6,316 m) directly north, its glacier visible as a grey-white river of ice between the rock ridges; and Black Peak (6,387 m) to the northeast. The 270-degree mountain panorama from the Har Ki Dun valley floor is among the most complete available on any moderate-grade trek in India. No pass crossing required. You simply walk into the valley and look up. The return from the valley floor to Kalkatiyadhaar descends the same 796 m across 7 km in the afternoon. Most trekkers spend 3 to 4 hours in the Har Ki Dun valley, time to walk the valley perimeter, photograph the mountain panorama from different positions, eat lunch at the riverbank, and be fully present with one of the finest valley views accessible on a moderate Himalayan trek. The afternoon light on the return illuminates the peaks and forest sections differently from the morning approach, and the two directions together give you a complete experience of the route's finest terrain. What to Expect: - Trek to Har Ki Dun (3,536 m / 11,600 ft) – ~7 km, ~4–5 hrs from Kalkatiyadhaar - Valley floor panorama: Swargarohini (6,252 m), Bandarpunch (6,316 m), and Black Peak (6,387 m) on three sides - Wide open alpine meadow with the upper Supin River crossing the valley floor in clean channels - Bandarpunch glacier visible from the valley floor between the northern ridgelines - 3–4 hours in the valley: walk the perimeter, photograph, lunch at the river, be present - Return ~7 km to Kalkatiyadhaar in the afternoon – same trail, different light - Overnight: Kalkatiyadhaar (2,740 m) - return camp after the valley day ### Day 5: Kalkatiyadhaar to Puani Garaat **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~2,740 m → ~2,440 m (Puani Garaat) | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: Forest descent, Supin Valley trail, Osla village on return** Day 5 reverses the Day 3 ascent: from Kalkatiyadhaar back through the Supin Valley forest to Puani Garaat, passing through Osla and along the riverside trail that carried you upward two days ago. The descent covers 10 km and loses approximately 300 m of altitude across 4 to 5 hours, a gentle, unhurried return through terrain that has become familiar but that reveals itself differently on the way down. The return through Osla on Day 5 produces a different experience from the Day 3 passage. Two days in the mountains have settled the group into the rhythm of the route. The urgency of the approach and the goal of reaching the valley ahead have been replaced by the fuller attention that comes after the destination has been reached. The Duryodhana Temple and the traditional wooden architecture of the village are absorbed with a different quality on the return. If time allows, the Trekkaro guide will arrange a brief stop in the village. Puani Garaat, reached in the mid-afternoon, is the same forest camp as Night 2. But it feels different: warmer on the return and more settled. The Har Ki Dun valley is behind you. Taluka and the road are one day's walking ahead. The route has given you what it came with, and the forest camp on the final descent has a quality of completion that the camp on the ascent could not yet contain. What to Expect: - Descent through the Supin Valley forest – same trail as Day 3, reverse direction - Osla village on return – Duryodhana Temple and traditional architecture, brief stop if schedule allows - Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude loss: ~300 m - Supin River alongside the trail throughout – the sound and pace of the descent are shaped by the water - Puani Garaat camp (~2,440 m) – final wilderness camp before the return to Taluka and the road - Overnight: Puani Garaat – last camp on the trail ### Day 6: Puani Garaat to Taluka & Drive to Sankri **Route Details:** **Trek: Puani Garaat (~2,440 m) → Taluka (2,107 m) | Distance: ~8 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Then: Drive Taluka → Sankri (~12 km, ~45 min)** The final morning on the trail begins in the Puani Garaat forest camp. The walk back to Taluka is the shortest of the active trekking days, 8 km descending from 2,440 m to 2,107 m over 3 to 4 hours. The trail through the lower Supin Valley gorge on the return carries the same dramatic canyon walls and river sound as the approach, but now the body walking it has walked 44 km through the Garhwal interior and stood in the Har Ki Dun valley at 3,536 m with the Swargarohini range on three sides. The same forest, the same river, the same trail sections — all perceived through a different set of accumulated experience. The altitude drops steadily through the lower gorge, with the Supin growing louder as additional tributaries join it below the camp. By mid-morning, Taluka appears: the familiar stone buildings at the end of the jeep track, the bridge across the Supin, and the shared cabs waiting on the far bank. The drive back to Sankri takes approximately 45 minutes along the jeep track. Sankri is reached in the early afternoon: mobile signal returns, devices can be charged, and the first road-town comforts in five days are available. The trek is not yet over; Dehradun and the city return tomorrow, but the walk is done. What to Expect: - Final trail section: ~8 km from Puani Garaat to Taluka through the lower Supin gorge - Altitude drops ~330 m from Puani Garaat to Taluka – steady, well-defined descent - Taluka bridge – the trail ends where it began, at the Supin River crossing - Drive from Taluka to Sankri (~12 km, ~45 min) by shared cab, paid directly to the driver - Sankri: mobile signal, device charging, first road-town facilities after five days - Trek concludes at the Sankri starting point of the trek. Completion certificates issued. - Overnight: Sankri (1,950 m) - final night before the Dehradun return drive ### Day 7: Drive from Sankri to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Sankri (1,950 m) → Mori → Purola → Mussoorie → Dehradun | Distance: ~200 km | Duration: 8–9 hrs** The morning in Sankri before the return drive has a different quality from the morning six days ago when the village was the assembly point for a trek that had not yet begun. Then, the Swargarohini range visible above the village was a destination. Now, the body and mind that looked up at those peaks have walked to 3,536 m beneath them, stood in the valley at their base, and returned through the Supin River forest over five days of walking. The mountains above Sankri look the same. Everything else is different. The drive from Sankri to Dehradun retraces the approach road in reverse, back down the Tonnes Valley through Mori and Purola, then via Mussoorie and the Doon Valley. The 8- to 9-hour journey covers the same forested gorge road that the approach drive may have passed through in darkness or in anticipation. By the time Mussoorie appears above the Doon Valley, the transition from the mountain interior back to the city is nearly complete. The Har Ki Dun valley, the Duryodhana Temple, the Supin River gorge, and the mountain panorama from 11,600 feet are now part of the specific, permanent collection of experiences that the Himalayas are uniquely able to provide. What to Expect: - Morning in Sankri – final morning tea in the trek gateway village before the return drive - Drive Sankri to Dehradun – ~200 km, 8–9 hrs via Mori, Purola, and Mussoorie - Tonnes Valley on return: the forested gorge road in daylight, the approach in reverse - Same-day flights and trains from Dehradun are achievable with early Sankri departure - Recommended: one additional night in Dehradun before onwards travel if the schedule allows ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 6: guesthouse in Sankri (2 nights), on a triple-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 5: camping at the designated campsites (4 nights), on a triple-sharing basis #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 dinner: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - Govind Pashu Vihar National Park entry permits and forest checkpost fees, arranged by Trekkaro #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Double-wall, rain-rated tents and -20°C sleeping bags at every campsite - Trekking mattresses or sleeping pads at every campsite - SpO2, pulse and blood-pressure checks twice a day at every campsite - Portable oxygen cylinder and emergency stretcher on every batch - HF radio communication across the trek team #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide for all 7 days - Mountain kitchen staff, camp helpers, and mules or porters for the group equipment - Trek completion certificate on successful completion of the trek ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Sankri and back. We help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way (₹2,000 return), paid directly to the driver. - Travel to and from Dehradun (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Sankri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Sankri #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack, sunglasses and other personal gear (shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and helicopter evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Dehradun before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab to Sankri leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so book a flight that lands by the evening before. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** The 200 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** On the last day the cab leaves Sankri at around 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 05:00 PM (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver). Mountain roads can run late, so book your flight for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) – the pickup point itself, with direct trains from Delhi. For the 06:30 AM cab, take the overnight train or, safer, reach Dehradun a day early; book ahead in peak season and check current timings. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – good choices if you travel the day before and stay the night in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** The 200 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) leaves Sankri at around 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 05:00 PM. Book an evening or overnight train with a few hours of margin, or travel the next day – check current timings. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hrs. Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night, but with a 06:30 AM pickup, arriving the evening before is safer. - **Take a government bus** – board from inside ISBT Kashmere Gate; avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises, as they are less reliable. - **Dehradun ISBT to the pickup** – take an app cab, an auto rickshaw or a shared three-wheeler to Dehradun Railway Station. - **From Haridwar or Rishikesh** – local buses and shared cabs reach Dehradun in about 1.5–2 hrs. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** The 200 km drive takes 8–9 hrs. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) leaves Sankri at around 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 05:00 PM. Book a night bus to Delhi from Dehradun ISBT, leaving time for the transfer and road delays – check current timings. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Purola has the last reliable ATM before Sankri - Withdraw enough cash in Dehradun to be safe - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Sankri is the last place with mobile signal, and only Jio works consistently - There is no mobile signal on the trail after Sankri - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Har Ki Dun trek, and where does it start? The Har Ki Dun trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Supin River valley of Garhwal. It starts from Sankri (1,950 m), about 200 km and 8–9 hours by road from Dehradun, and the trail begins at Taluka, a 45-minute drive beyond Sankri. From Taluka the route follows the Supin River through forest and past Osla village to the Har Ki Dun valley at 3,536 m (11,600 ft). ### How many days is the Har Ki Dun trek? The Har Ki Dun trek takes 7 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 5 trekking days covering about 52 km. - **Day 1 and Day 7:** drive between Dehradun and Sankri (about 200 km, 8–9 hours) - **Days 2–6:** trekking, 8–14 km a day - **Longest day:** Day 4, about 14 km and 8–9 hours to the Har Ki Dun valley and back ### What is the altitude of the Har Ki Dun trek? The highest point of the Har Ki Dun trek is the Har Ki Dun valley at 3,536 m (11,600 ft). The trail starts at Taluka (2,107 m / 6,913 ft), and the highest camp is Kalkatiyadhaar at 2,740 m (8,990 ft), because you visit the valley and return to camp the same day. - **Sankri (base village):** 1,950 m / 6,400 ft - **Puani Garaat camp:** 2,440 m / 8,010 ft - **Kalkatiyadhaar camp:** 2,740 m / 8,990 ft ### How difficult is the Har Ki Dun trek? The Har Ki Dun trek is graded Easy–Moderate, and how hard it feels depends mainly on how much snow is on the upper trail. Most of the route is a gradual forest trail along the Supin River, but the walking days are long. - **Daily distance:** 8–14 km, with 3–9 hours of walking - **Day 4:** about 14 km round trip to the Har Ki Dun valley, 8–9 hours - **Snow:** early-season snow on the upper trail makes the walk slower and colder ### Is the Har Ki Dun trek good for beginners? Yes, the Har Ki Dun trek is a good choice for fit beginners. The gradient is gentle, the highest camp is only 2,740 m, and the trek is graded Easy–Moderate. Be ready for long days: Day 2 is about 10 km in 6–7 hours, and Day 4 is about 14 km in 8–9 hours. ### What fitness level do I need for the Har Ki Dun trek? For the Har Ki Dun trek you should be comfortable walking 6–9 hours a day on uneven forest trails, with steady climbs and long descents. Start building stamina several weeks before the trek. - **Cardio:** regular brisk walks, jogging or stair climbing - **Strength:** squats and lunges help on the descents back to Taluka - **Practice:** walk with a loaded backpack to get used to the weight ### What is the best time for the Har Ki Dun trek? The best time for the Har Ki Dun trek is March to June and October to November. The trek does not run in the July–August monsoon. - **March–April:** cold nights and possible snow on the upper trail - **May–June:** milder days of 8–15°C - **October–November:** post-monsoon season; November nights are among the coldest ### Is there snow on the Har Ki Dun trek? Snow on the Har Ki Dun trek is most likely early in the season, in March and April, when it can lie on the upper trail towards the valley. The first two trekking days through the lower forest are free of snow. When there is snow on the trail, microspikes and gaiters are provided free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear. ### How cold does it get on the Har Ki Dun trek? In spring (April–June) the Har Ki Dun trek runs from about 10°C to 22°C at Taluka down to 0°C to 12°C at Har Ki Dun. In October–November it is 5°C to 18°C at Taluka and -3°C to 8°C at Har Ki Dun, and nights in March–April and November are the coldest of the season. - **Layers:** 3–4 warm layers, and 4 in March–April and November - **Outer jacket:** a padded -10°C jacket is part of the Free Trekking Gear - **At night:** thermals, a woollen cap, gloves and woollen socks ### Which mountains can you see on the Har Ki Dun trek? From the Har Ki Dun valley you see Swargarohini (6,252 m), Bandarpunch (6,316 m) and Black Peak (6,387 m), which rise on three sides of the valley floor. The Bandarpunch glacier is also visible between the northern ridgelines. - **Swargarohini:** first full views from the Kalkatiyadhaar meadow on Day 3, and from Sankri on clear days - **Supin River:** runs across the valley floor in clean channels - **Valley time:** 3–4 hours on Day 4 to walk the meadow and take photographs ### What is the terrain like on the Har Ki Dun trek? The Har Ki Dun trek is mostly a forest and river-valley trail that ends in an open alpine meadow at 3,536 m. The path follows the Supin River almost the whole way. - **Forest:** oak, deodar and rhododendron along the Supin gorge - **Villages:** the trail passes Osla, a traditional Garhwali village - **River crossings:** on the Day 3 section to Kalkatiyadhaar - **Upper valley:** open valley trail and alpine meadow ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Har Ki Dun trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Har Ki Dun trek is relatively low, because the highest camp is 2,740 m and you visit the 3,536 m valley and come back down the same day. The gain is gradual, about 330 m on Day 2 and 300 m on Day 3. - **Health checks:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded for every trekker at Sankri - **Briefing:** the health protocol is explained before the trek starts - **Medicines:** ask your doctor about altitude medicine before the trek ### How do I reach the Har Ki Dun trek base camp? To reach the Har Ki Dun trek, travel to Dehradun; the shared cab to Sankri (₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver) leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM for the 200 km, 8–9 hour drive. Reach Dehradun the evening before. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun Railway Station (DDN) is the pickup point; the Nanda Devi Express runs overnight from Delhi - **By bus:** Uttarakhand Roadways buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT take about 6–7 hours - **Return:** the cab leaves Sankri around 06:30 AM and reaches Dehradun by about 05:00 PM, so book onward travel for the next day ### Is transport from Dehradun included in the Har Ki Dun trek? No, transport between Dehradun and Sankri is not included in the Har Ki Dun trek fee. Trekkaro helps the group book a shared cab from Dehradun Railway Station at ₹1,000 per person each way (₹2,000 return), paid directly to the driver. - **Onward:** 06:30 AM from Dehradun Railway Station on Day 1 - **Return:** around 06:30 AM from Sankri on Day 7, arriving by about 05:00 PM - **Taluka transfer:** the 12 km, 45-minute drive between Sankri and Taluka on Days 2 and 6 is also by shared cab, paid directly to the driver ### Where do we stay on the Har Ki Dun trek? On the Har Ki Dun trek you stay two nights in Sankri, the base village, and four nights in tents at two trail camps. Four-person tents are shared by three trekkers. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** Sankri (1,950 m) - **Day 2 and Day 5:** Puani Garaat camp (2,440 m), a forest clearing above the Supin River - **Day 3 and Day 4:** Kalkatiyadhaar camp (2,740 m), an open meadow at the forest edge - **Tent sharing:** women share tents only with women ### What is the group size on the Har Ki Dun trek and who leads it? A Har Ki Dun trek batch has up to 20 trekkers, and a fixed departure needs at least 6 people. Each batch is led by a professional trek leader who has completed basic and advanced mountaineering courses and is trained in first aid. - **Support team:** a local guide, chef, assistant, porters and other staff - **Private treks:** run for any group size ### Is the Har Ki Dun trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Har Ki Dun trek is safe for women trekking alone, and the safety of women trekkers is a top priority. Guides and support staff are carefully selected and are trustworthy and reliable. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other women - **Batches:** groups of up to 20 include both men and women - **Valuables:** keep your personal belongings secure ### What food is served on the Har Ki Dun trek? Simple, nutritious vegetarian meals are served throughout the Har Ki Dun trek, with eggs available on request at the campsites. On trekking days you carry a packed lunch on the trail. - **Lunch box:** bring a reusable one for packed lunches - **Snacks:** carry trail mix, energy bars, dates and electrolyte sachets ### How much drinking water should I carry on the Har Ki Dun trek? On the Har Ki Dun trek, carry two 1-litre water bottles and keep both filled for each day’s walk; an insulated bottle helps on cold mornings. Walking days last 3–9 hours, so drink regularly. Add electrolyte or ORS sachets to your water on long days such as Day 4. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Har Ki Dun trek? Yes, the Har Ki Dun trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes or a jacket. The kit is handed over at Sankri on Day 1 against one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 plus a ₹200 washing charge. - **Shoes:** waterproof trekking shoes with ankle support - **Jacket:** padded jacket rated to -10°C - **Trekking pole:** saves your knees on the long descents - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes for snow ### Can I offload my backpack on the Har Ki Dun trek? Yes, backpack offloading is available on the Har Ki Dun trek for ₹1,800 + 5% GST. Tell the team at least 15 days in advance so that a porter or mule can be arranged. If you offload, carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a warm layer. ### Is there a doctor or medical support on the Har Ki Dun trek? Medical support on the Har Ki Dun trek comes from the trek leader, who is trained in first aid, and every trekker’s SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded at Sankri before the trek. The health protocol is explained at the trek briefing. - **Fitness certificate:** a medical certificate signed by a doctor is required - **Insurance:** travel insurance with emergency evacuation cover is mandatory - **Your kit:** carry your regular medicines, blister plasters and ORS ### What documents do I need for the Har Ki Dun trek? For the Har Ki Dun trek you need an original government photo ID, a medical fitness certificate signed by a doctor and a travel insurance policy with emergency evacuation cover. - **ID:** Aadhaar card, passport, voter ID or driving licence, plus a photocopy - **International trekkers:** passport, needed for forest entry permits and in case of medical evacuation - **Booking:** your Trekkaro booking confirmation (e-ticket or tax invoice) - **Disclaimer form:** filled in with your emergency contact details ### Do I need a permit for the Har Ki Dun trek? Yes, the Har Ki Dun trek requires forest entry permits, so carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy. International trekkers must carry their passport for the permit. Keep the original and the photocopy together in a waterproof pouch. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Har Ki Dun trek? There is no reliable mobile network or charging on the Har Ki Dun trail; Sankri is the last place with mobile signal and device charging. ATMs are few in the hills, so withdraw enough cash in Dehradun. - **Cash:** carry small notes for the shared cab fare (₹1,000 per person each way) and small expenses, as cards are not accepted in the mountains - **Power bank:** carry one and keep it close to your body, as cold drains batteries fast ### What is special about Osla village on the Har Ki Dun trek? Osla, passed on Day 3 of the Har Ki Dun trek, is a traditional Garhwali village of stone and timber houses that is still lived in. It has a temple dedicated to Duryodhana, the Mahabharata antagonist, one of the few such temples in India. You pass Osla again on the way down on Day 5, with a short stop if the schedule allows. ### How much time do you get in the Har Ki Dun valley? On Day 4 of the Har Ki Dun trek you get about 3–4 hours in the valley, after a 7 km, 4–5 hour walk from Kalkatiyadhaar. You can walk the meadow, take photographs and have lunch by the Supin River before returning to camp. The round trip is about 14 km and takes 8–9 hours, making it the longest day of the trek. ### What should I pack for the Har Ki Dun trek? For the Har Ki Dun trek, pack a 50–60 L backpack with a rain cover, 3–4 warm layers and sun protection; shoes, jacket, pole and snow gear come with the Free Trekking Gear. - **Clothing:** thermals, 1–2 fleece layers, 2 quick-dry trek pants, 3 full-sleeved T-shirts and a rain jacket - **Accessories:** UV sunglasses, sun cap, woollen cap, gloves and 4 pairs of socks - **Essentials:** headlamp, two 1 L water bottles, power bank, personal medicines and cash - **Waste:** ziploc bags to carry your waste back down under the zero-waste policy ### What is the minimum age for the Har Ki Dun trek? The minimum age for the Har Ki Dun trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 31 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 7 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 13 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 14 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 20 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 21 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 27 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 28 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 4 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 5 Dec 2026 - … 32 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/har-ki-dun-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kareri Lake Trek > Kareri Lake Trek is a 3-day easy–moderate trek in Kangra, Himachal Pradesh, reaching 2,930 m (9,613 ft). It covers about 26 km on foot and starts at Kareri and ends at Kareri Lake. Best time: April to June and September to November. Trekkaro price: ₹5,300 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (23 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kareri-lake-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 3 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 2,930 m / 9,613 ft - **Trekking distance:** 26 km - **Region:** Kangra, Himachal Pradesh - **Start / end:** Kareri / Kareri Lake - **Best time:** April to June and September to November - **Temperature:** Spring/Summer (Apr-Jun): Day 12°C to 22°C, Night 3°C to 10°C | Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 8°C to 18°C, Night -2°C to 8°C - **Price:** ₹5,300 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (23 upcoming) ## Overview Above the tea gardens and monasteries of Dharamshala, a stream called the Nyund comes tumbling down out of the Dhauladhar. Follow it upstream for two days, through pine and oak forest and over grey granite slabs, and you reach the place where it is born: Kareri Lake, a clear, shallow pool of snowmelt at 2,930 m (9,613 ft), with a small white temple on the rise above it and the rock walls of Minkiani standing behind. It is one of the gentlest ways to walk into the high Dhauladhar, and one of the most rewarding. The Kareri Lake trek lies in Kangra district of Himachal Pradesh, on the south face of the Dhauladhar range, about 9 km north-west of Dharamshala as the crow flies. We pick you up at the Dharamshala ISBT at 10:00 AM and drive about 25 km to Kareri village (1,800 m / 5,905 ft), a Gaddi village of slate-roofed houses and terraced fields where the walk begins. The trail follows the Nyund valley up to a forest camp at Reoti (2,450 m / 8,038 ft), also called Liyoti, and from there climbs to the lake and back. Our 3-day format keeps the loads light and the pace kind. Day 1 is a 6 km climb to Reoti. Day 2 is the lake day: you leave your tents standing, walk up to Kareri Lake with a day pack, spend time at the water and return to the same camp, 14 km in all. Day 3 is a short 6 km descent to Kareri village and the drive back to Dharamshala, with the group back by early evening. The total walking distance is 26 km. ### A Lake at the Source of the Stream – What Makes the Kareri Lake Trek Unmissable Most lake treks hide their lake until the last moment. On the Kareri Lake trek the water is with you from the very first hour, because the trail climbs beside the stream that drains the lake. You hear the Nyund before you see it, crashing over boulders below the path, and for two days you cross and recross it on small bridges, refill your bottle from springs that feed it and fall asleep at Reoti to the sound of it running past the tents. By the time you reach the lake itself, you feel you have walked up the length of a single, living stream to find where it starts. And the lake is worth the walk. Kareri is fed by snowmelt from Minkiani peak, and it is shallow enough that on a still morning you can see the stones on its bed. In April the last of the winter ice can still lie along its edges; by May and June the meadows around it turn green and the Gaddi shepherds bring their flocks up to the stone huts across the water. A small temple to Shiva and Shakti sits on a rise above the shore, hung with bells and red cloth, and from beside it the view runs down the valley you have just climbed and up to the Dhauladhar ridgeline above. Beyond the lake, a trail climbs on towards Minkiani Pass (about 4,250 m) and the Chamba side, a reminder of how much bigger these mountains are. Then there is how easy it is to fit in. Dharamshala has an airport, overnight buses from Delhi and Chandigarh and a railway station within a few hours, so you can leave home on a Thursday night, walk to a Himalayan lake and be back in McLeodganj for a plate of momos on Sunday evening. For a first trek, a family trip or a short break from work, few lakes are this close to a town and still feel this wild. ### The Trail Itself The Kareri Lake trek is a trail of two halves. Out of Kareri village the path climbs past fields and houses and then drops down to the Nyund, which it follows for the rest of the way. The lower section runs through pine, oak and rhododendron forest, steep in places with rough stone steps, crossing side streams and a metal bridge before it reaches the clearing at Reoti. Above Reoti the forest thins and the character changes: the trail moves onto the rock, picking its way over granite slabs and boulders cut and stacked into steps, with the stream in white falls beside you. Near the top the valley opens out, the slope eases, and the lake appears in its bowl beneath Minkiani. Water is plentiful along the whole route, from springs, side streams and a waterfall on the way up, and Gaddi huts dot the upper half of the trail. The return on Day 3 follows the same path down, a good chance to see the forest you climbed through on Day 1 in different light. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Kareri Lake trek is graded easy to moderate, and we recommend it for fit beginners, families with children who already walk well, solo trekkers and working groups looking for a short Himalayan trek. Day 1 is a steady 6 km climb of 4–5 hours. The hardest day is Day 2: about 14 km and 7–8 hours on foot, climbing about 480 m to the lake over rocky ground and coming back down to camp the same day, which is long but done with a light day pack. We recommend four to six weeks of preparation before departure, with regular jogging, brisk walking or stair climbing. Children aged 9 and above who walk regularly can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: April to June and September to November. ### Key Highlights of the Kareri Lake Trek - **A snow-fed Dhauladhar lake** – Kareri Lake at 2,930 m (9,613 ft), shallow and clear, fed by melt from Minkiani peak - **The Shiva-Shakti temple** – a small shrine on a rise above the shore, with views down the valley and up to the ridge - **The Nyund stream** – a trail that follows running water from the first hour to the lake, with bridges, springs and a waterfall - **Gaddi shepherd country** – Kareri village and the stone huts of the shepherds who graze their flocks around the lake in summer - **A forest camp at Reoti** – two nights in a clearing by the stream at 2,450 m (8,038 ft), among pine and oak - **Granite and forest in one trail** – shaded woods on the lower half, open rock steps and boulders on the upper half - **Close to Dharamshala** – about 25 km from the pickup point, with easy air, rail and bus links - **A gateway to bigger routes** – the lake sits below Minkiani Pass (about 4,250 m), the old crossing to the Chamba side ### Best Time to Do the Kareri Lake Trek The Kareri Lake trek runs in two windows: April to June, and September to November. We do not run it in July and August, when monsoon rain sweeps the south face of the Dhauladhar and makes the rocky upper trail slippery, or from December to March, when the lake freezes and snow covers the upper trail. Each window gives the same lake a different mood. #### April to June – Spring and Summer (The Green Season) In April the lake is just waking from winter, and patches of snow and ice can still lie on the upper trail and along the shore; we carry microspikes and gaiters for those days. Through May and June the snow melts back, the rhododendrons flower in the lower forest, the meadows turn green and the Gaddi shepherds move up with their flocks. Days are pleasant at 12°C to 22°C, and nights at Reoti camp are 3°C to 10°C, coldest in April. Late June can bring the first pre-monsoon showers, so pack a rain jacket. #### September to November – Autumn (The Clear-Sky Season) Once the monsoon clears in September, the forest is washed clean and the stream runs full. October and November bring the clearest skies of the year, with sharp views of the Dhauladhar and crisp, golden afternoons. Days are 8°C to 18°C, and nights at camp are -2°C to 8°C, falling close to freezing in November, when frost forms on the tents and an early snowfall can dust the lake. Autumn is the season for clear views; come with warm layers for the evenings. ### Kareri Lake Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Kareri Lake trek costs ₹5,300 + 5% GST per person, for 3 days starting and ending at Kareri Village, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Dharamshala is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dharamshala to Kareri Village, Trek to Reoti **Route Details:** **Drive: Dharamshala → Kareri Village (25 km, 1.5–2 hrs) | Trek: Kareri Village → Reoti | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude: 1,800 m → 2,450 m** We meet at the Dharamshala ISBT (main bus stand) at 10:00 AM. After a quick introduction from your trek leader, the group sets off in shared cabs for Kareri village, about 25 km and 1.5–2 hours away. The road leaves the town behind and winds through pine forest and small villages along the foot of the Dhauladhar, with the snow line of the range above you for much of the drive. Kareri village sits at 1,800 m (5,905 ft), a Gaddi settlement of slate-roofed houses and terraced fields. Here you meet the rest of the trek team, collect your Free Trekking Gear if you have not already, and start walking. The trail climbs out past the houses and fields and then drops to the Nyund stream, which will be your companion all the way to the lake. The path follows the stream upstream through pine, oak and rhododendron forest. It is steep in places, with rough stone steps on the sharper sections, and it crosses a few side streams on small bridges. Springs along the way and a waterfall partway up give you chances to refill your bottles. Take it slowly and steadily: you climb about 650 m today, and there is no prize for reaching camp first. After 4–5 hours you cross a metal bridge, and about ten minutes later reach Reoti (2,450 m / 8,038 ft), also called Liyoti, a clearing in the forest right beside the stream. The tents will already be up. Evenings here are simple and peaceful: hot tea and snacks, a walk along the water, a SpO2 and pulse check with your trek leader, an early dinner and a night with the sound of the stream running past the tents. What to Expect: - Pickup at Dharamshala ISBT at 10:00 AM - Drive past pine forest and villages to Kareri village - Steady climb beside the Nyund stream through pine and oak - Stone steps on steep sections and small bridges - Springs and a waterfall to refill water - Overnight: camp at Reoti (Liyoti), 3-person tents ### Day 2: Reoti to Kareri Lake and Back to Reoti **Route Details:** **Trek: Reoti → Kareri Lake → Reoti | Distance: 14 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Altitude: 2,450 m → 2,930 m → 2,450 m** This is the day you came for. After an early breakfast you leave the tents standing at Reoti and set off with a light day pack, a packed lunch and plenty of water. The first stretch continues along the stream on a gradual climb, with the forest slowly thinning around you and the valley walls rising higher on both sides. Around the halfway mark the trail changes character and moves onto the rock. From here you climb over granite slabs and boulders laid into rough steps, with the stream falling white beside you. Watch your footing on this section, and use your trekking poles; when there is snow or ice in April or late November, the trek team brings out microspikes and gaiters. You pass Gaddi shepherd huts on the upper half, used in summer when the flocks graze near the lake. Near the top the slope eases and the valley opens into a bowl beneath Minkiani peak, and there is Kareri Lake at 2,930 m (9,613 ft): a shallow, clear pool of snowmelt, with the stones on its bed visible through the water on a still day. Climb the short rise to the small Shiva-Shakti temple above the shore for the best view of the lake, the valley below and the Dhauladhar ridge above. Spend time here over lunch; the trail to Minkiani Pass climbs on from the far side. In the early afternoon we start back down the same route, taking care over the granite section, and reach Reoti by late afternoon. It is a long day of 14 km and 7–8 hours, but you carry only a day pack, and hot tea is waiting at camp. The evening is for resting tired legs, a health check and a second night by the stream. What to Expect: - Early start with a light day pack; tents stay up at Reoti - Granite slabs and boulder steps on the upper half - Gaddi shepherd huts along the trail - Kareri Lake beneath Minkiani peak and the Shiva-Shakti temple - Packed lunch at the lake - Overnight: camp at Reoti (Liyoti), 3-person tents ### Day 3: Reoti to Kareri Village, Drive to Dharamshala **Route Details:** **Trek: Reoti → Kareri Village | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Altitude: 2,450 m → 1,800 m | Drive: Kareri Village → Dharamshala (25 km, 1.5–2 hrs)** Wake up to your last morning at Reoti, with the stream running past and the light coming down the valley. After breakfast the team packs up camp, and we start the descent to Kareri village on the same trail we climbed on Day 1. Going down is quicker but asks more of your knees, especially on the stone steps, so keep your trekking poles out and take short, controlled steps. The forest looks different in the morning light, and with less effort in your lungs there is more time to notice the rhododendrons, the side streams and the views across the valley that you may have missed on the way up. After 3–4 hours you are back among the fields and houses of Kareri village, where you hand back your Free Trekking Gear and say goodbye to the trek team. The shared cabs take you back to Dharamshala, about 25 km and 1.5–2 hours away, with the group expected at the Dharamshala ISBT between 5:30 and 6:30 PM, depending on the weather and the road. Plan your onward journey for late evening or the next day. What to Expect: - Breakfast by the stream at Reoti - Descent through pine and oak forest on the Day 1 trail - Stone steps that call for trekking poles and care - Return of Free Trekking Gear at Kareri village - Drive back to Dharamshala, arriving 5:30–6:30 PM - Overnight: no stay (trek ends) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 2: camping at Reoti (Liyoti), in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 3 lunch - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 3-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dharamshala to Kareri village and back - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Dharamshala, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dharamshala and Kareri Village #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Kangra Airport at Gaggal (DHM), about 13 km / 30–40 min from Dharamshala, with flights from Delhi. The pickup is at the Dharamshala ISBT at 10:00 AM, so a morning flight on Day 1 is tight; we recommend flying in the day before and staying in Dharamshala or McLeodganj. **From Dharamshala to Kareri village:** 25 km, about 1.5–2 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** After the descent to Kareri village on Day 3, the shared cab is expected at the Dharamshala ISBT between 5:30 and 6:30 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Pathankot (PTK), about 85–90 km from Dharamshala, with direct trains from Delhi. - **Overnight trains from Delhi to Pathankot** – arrive in the early morning, then take a bus or taxi to Dharamshala, about 3 hrs. - **Kangra Mandir station** – about 22 km from Dharamshala on the narrow-gauge line, with few trains; not practical for the pickup. Check current timings before you book, and reach Dharamshala the day before if your train arrives late. **From Dharamshala to Kareri village:** 25 km, about 1.5–2 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The shared cab is expected at the Dharamshala ISBT between 5:30 and 6:30 PM on Day 3. Allow about 3 hrs to Pathankot and plan a late-night train or one on the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Overnight Volvo and ordinary buses run from Delhi (ISBT Kashmere Gate and Majnu ka Tilla) to Dharamshala, about 500 km and 12–13 hrs, and from Chandigarh, about 7 hrs. Prefer HRTC (Himachal government) buses. An overnight bus from Delhi reaches Dharamshala in the morning, in time for the 10:00 AM pickup at the ISBT. **From Dharamshala to Kareri village:** 25 km, about 1.5–2 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The shared cab is expected at the Dharamshala ISBT between 5:30 and 6:30 PM on Day 3, in time for the overnight buses to Delhi and Chandigarh. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Dharamshala; withdraw cash before the 10:00 AM pickup - There is no ATM at Kareri village or on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio, Airtel and BSNL work in Dharamshala; signal turns weak on the drive towards Kareri village - Only sparse BSNL signal in places on the trail; expect little or no signal at Reoti camp and Kareri Lake - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Dharamshala ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kareri Lake trek, and where does it start? The Kareri Lake trek is in Kangra district of Himachal Pradesh, on the south face of the Dhauladhar range above Dharamshala. It starts and ends at Kareri village (1,800 m / 5,905 ft), about 25 km and 1.5–2 hours by road from Dharamshala. Trekkaro picks you up at the Dharamshala ISBT (main bus stand) at 10:00 AM on Day 1. From Kareri village the trail follows the Nyund stream up to Reoti camp and then to Kareri Lake, a snow-fed lake beneath Minkiani peak. ### How many days does the Kareri Lake trek take from Dharamshala? The Kareri Lake trek takes 3 days from Dharamshala and back with Trekkaro, covering 26 km on foot. - **Day 1:** Drive to Kareri village, trek 6 km (4–5 hrs) to Reoti camp. - **Day 2:** Reoti to Kareri Lake and back, 14 km (7–8 hrs). - **Day 3:** Descend 6 km (3–4 hrs) to Kareri village and drive to Dharamshala, arriving 5:30–6:30 PM. Camping two nights at Reoti lets you do the lake day with only a light day pack. ### What is the maximum altitude reached on the Kareri Lake trek? The maximum altitude on the Kareri Lake trek is 2,930 m (9,613 ft), at the lake itself. The trek starts at Kareri village at 1,800 m (5,905 ft), and both nights are spent at Reoti camp at 2,450 m (8,038 ft). At this height the risk of Acute Mountain Sickness is low, but our trek leaders still check every trekker’s SpO2 and pulse each day, and you should report any headache, nausea or dizziness at once. ### What is the difficulty level of the Kareri Lake trek? The Kareri Lake trek is graded easy to moderate. The altitude is modest and the trail is clear, but it is not a flat walk. Day 1 is a steady 6 km climb with stone steps on steep sections. Day 2 is the hardest, about 14 km and 7–8 hours to the lake and back, with an upper section over granite slabs and boulders. Fit beginners manage it well with four to six weeks of jogging, brisk walking or stair climbing before the trek. ### What is the best time of year to do the Kareri Lake trek? The best time for the Kareri Lake trek is April to June and September to November. Spring and summer (April–June) bring green meadows, rhododendrons in the lower forest and Gaddi shepherds at the lake, with some snow near the shore in April. Autumn (September–November) brings the clearest skies and sharpest views of the Dhauladhar, especially in October and November. We do not run the trek in July–August because of heavy monsoon rain, or from December to March, when the lake is frozen and the upper trail is under snow. ### Will I see snow on the Kareri Lake trek in April or November? Yes, you may see snow on the Kareri Lake trek in April and late November, but not in the other months it runs. The lake freezes from December to March, and in April patches of snow and ice can still lie on the upper trail and along the shore. In late November an early snowfall can dust the lake. From May to October the trail is clear of snow. When there is snow or ice, Trekkaro provides microspikes and gaiters free with our Free Trekking Gear. ### How cold does it get at night on the Kareri Lake trek? Nights at Reoti camp on the Kareri Lake trek range from -2°C to 10°C depending on the month. - **Spring/Summer (April–June):** day 12°C to 22°C, night 3°C to 10°C, coldest in April. - **Autumn (September–November):** day 8°C to 18°C, night -2°C to 8°C, close to freezing in November. It is colder at the lake and in the wind. Bring 3 warm layers in the milder months and 4 in April and November; the -10°C jacket comes with Free Trekking Gear. ### What is the minimum age to join the Kareri Lake trek? The minimum age for the Kareri Lake trek is 9 years, for children who already walk regularly. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Kareri Lake trek pickup point in Dharamshala? The Kareri Lake trek pickup is at the Dharamshala ISBT (main bus stand) at 10:00 AM on Day 1. - **By bus:** overnight HRTC Volvo and ordinary buses from Delhi (12–13 hrs) or Chandigarh (about 7 hrs) reach Dharamshala in the morning. - **By air:** Kangra Airport at Gaggal is about 13 km away; fly in the day before. - **By train:** Pathankot station is 85–90 km away, about 3 hrs by bus or taxi. From Dharamshala it is 25 km to Kareri village by shared cab. ### Is transport from Dharamshala included in the Kareri Lake trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Kareri Lake trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from the Dharamshala ISBT to Kareri village (25 km, 1.5–2 hrs) and back; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare before the trek. Travel to and from Dharamshala, and meals on the drive, are also arranged by you. ### What does the Kareri Lake trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Kareri Lake trek costs ₹5,300 + 5% GST per person, for 3 days starting and ending at Kareri Village. The fee includes: - Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes (₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge) - Two nights of camping at Reoti in 3-person tents, with sleeping bags and mats - All meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 3 lunch - Permits and camping charges - A certified trek leader, local guide, cook and support staff Optional add-ons: backpack offloading at ₹1,000 and a single tent at ₹2,000 both plus 5% GST. ### How do I book the Kareri Lake trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Kareri Lake trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹5,300 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Dharamshala ISBT (main bus stand) at 10:00 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kareri Lake trek? Mobile signal on the Kareri Lake trek is weak, and there is no ATM after Dharamshala. Jio, Airtel and BSNL work in Dharamshala, but signal fades on the way to Kareri village; on the trail there is only sparse BSNL signal in places, and you should expect little or no signal at Reoti camp and the lake. Withdraw cash in Dharamshala before the 10:00 AM pickup, carry small notes, and make your important calls before you leave town. ### Do I need a permit or ID for the Kareri Lake trek? You do not need to arrange a permit yourself for the Kareri Lake trek; Trekkaro takes care of the local permissions and camping charges, and they are included in the trek fee. Complete your trekker profile with the details we ask for, and carry an original government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, driving licence or voter ID) along with the signed medical certificate and disclaimer form. Foreign nationals should carry their passport. ### How safe is the Kareri Lake trek, and how do you handle AMS? The Kareri Lake trek is a safe trek with modest altitude, and we run it with the same safety system we use in higher mountains. Trek leaders hold NIM (Nehru Institute of Mountaineering) certification or an equivalent, batches are limited to 20 trekkers, and SpO2 and pulse are checked every day. The group carries oxygen cylinders, a first-aid kit and a stretcher. The main risks are the long Day 2 and the rocky granite steps, slippery when wet or icy, so we set a steady pace and help you across tricky sections. ### Is the Kareri Lake trek suitable for first-time trekkers and beginners? Yes, the Kareri Lake trek is a good choice for first-time trekkers who are reasonably fit. The altitude stays below 3,000 m, the trail is clear, and the 3-day format spreads the walking out, with the long lake day done from a fixed camp with only a day pack. Beginners should still train for four to six weeks, building up to a 5 km jog in about 35–40 minutes or an hour of brisk walking, so the 14 km on Day 2 feels comfortable. ### What should I carry for the Kareri Lake trek, and what is the food like? For the Kareri Lake trek, carry a 40–50 L backpack with rain cover, a small day pack for Day 2, thermals, a fleece, a rain jacket, woollen cap and gloves, two 1 L bottles, a headlamp, sunscreen and a lunch box. Trekking shoes, the -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear. On the trek you stay two nights in 3-person tents at Reoti and eat simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with tea, soup and snacks at camp. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 26 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 2 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 9 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 16 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 23 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 30 Nov 2026 - 3 Apr 2027 to 5 Apr 2027 - 10 Apr 2027 to 12 Apr 2027 - 17 Apr 2027 to 19 Apr 2027 - 24 Apr 2027 to 26 Apr 2027 - 1 May 2027 to 3 May 2027 - 8 May 2027 to 10 May 2027 - … 11 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kareri-lake-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kartik Swami Trek > Kartik Swami Trek is a 2-day easy trek in Rudraprayag, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,050 m (10,007 ft). It covers about 7 km on foot and starts at Kanakchauri and ends at Kartik Swami Temple. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹3,800 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (40 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kartik-swami-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 2 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 3,050 m / 10,007 ft - **Trekking distance:** 7 km - **Region:** Rudraprayag, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Kanakchauri / Kartik Swami Temple - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Spring/Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 12°C to 22°C, Night 3°C to 10°C | Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 10°C to 18°C, Night 0°C to 8°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 3°C to 10°C, Night -5°C to 1°C - **Price:** ₹3,800 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (40 upcoming) ## Overview Some summits make you wait days for their view. Kartik Swami asks for one early alarm and about 3.5 km of forest path. Walk up in the dark from Kanakchauri, climb the last stone steps to a temple hung with hundreds of bells, and watch the first light touch Chaukhamba, the Kedarnath peaks, Neelkanth and Trishul in a single sweep of the horizon. By breakfast you are back in the village with the whole Garhwal skyline still in your eyes. The Kartik Swami trek climbs to the Kartik Swami temple, a hilltop shrine to Kartikeya, the elder son of Lord Shiva, on a narrow ridge above the village of Kanakchauri in Rudraprayag district, Uttarakhand. Kanakchauri sits on the road between Rudraprayag and Pokhari, about 40 km from Rudraprayag town, and the trail starts right from the village. The temple stands at 3,050 m (10,007 ft), on top of a ridge that falls away steeply on both sides, and that position is what gives it one of the widest mountain panoramas you can reach on foot in Garhwal in a single morning. Our version is a 2-day trip from Rishikesh. Day 1 is the drive up the Ganga and Alaknanda valleys, through Devprayag, Srinagar and Rudraprayag, with the night at a homestay or guesthouse in Kanakchauri. Day 2 starts before dawn: about 3.5 km up to the temple for sunrise, the same 3.5 km back down to the village for breakfast, and the drive back to Rishikesh by evening. Total walking is about 7 km. There is no camping on this trek, and no heavy backpack to carry, which makes it one of the gentlest ways to stand at 10,000 ft in the Himalaya. ### Bells Above the Clouds – What Makes the Kartik Swami Trek Unmissable The first thing you notice at the top is the sound. The temple and the railings along its last steps carry hundreds of brass bells, tied there by pilgrims over the years, and when the wind comes up the ridge they ring together. The second thing is the space. The ridge is so narrow near the top that there is almost nothing between you and the mountains: the valleys of the Alaknanda and the Mandakini lie far below, and the snow peaks rise in an arc from the Kedarnath group in the north-west round to Trishul and Nanda Ghunti in the east. On a clear morning the names come one after another: Chaukhamba with its four summits, Kedarnath and Kedar Dome, Meru and Sumeru, Neelkanth above Badrinath, Dronagiri, Nanda Ghunti, Trishul and, on the clearest days, the tip of Nanda Devi far to the east, with Bandarpoonch away in the west. You see them first as grey shapes against a paling sky, then as pink points as the sun reaches them, then as white walls. Sunrise is the reason for the early start, and it is worth every minute of lost sleep. The temple has its own story. Local legend tells that Kartikeya, after a contest with his brother Ganesha over which of them would be worshipped first, came to this mountain and offered his bones to his father, Lord Shiva. Devotees still climb here to worship him, and the temple holds a stone idol of Kartik Swami. Treat the shrine with respect: shoes come off at the top, and the priest opens the temple after sunrise. ### The Trail Itself The trail is short and well marked. From Kanakchauri it climbs steadily on a stone and earth path through oak and rhododendron forest, past small roadside shrines, for most of the first 2.5 to 3 km. The gradient is steady rather than steep, and there are places to stop and breathe. Higher up the forest opens, a few tea stalls appear, and the path reaches the ridge. The last stretch is the steepest: a narrow flight of about 80 stone steps up the crest of the ridge to the temple itself. Coming down is the same way back, and in the morning light you finally see the forest you walked through in the dark. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Kartik Swami trek is graded easy, and we recommend it for first-time trekkers, families with children, pilgrims and anyone who wants a big Himalayan view without camping or a multi-day walk. The trekking day is Day 2: about 7 km up and down in 4–5 hours with stops, starting in the dark, with a steep set of stone steps at the very top. The long drive on both days (6–7 hrs each way) is as tiring as the walk, so come rested. Two to three weeks of preparation with regular walks, stair climbing or jogging is enough. Children aged 7 and above can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: September to June, except July and August. ### Key Highlights of the Kartik Swami Trek - **A Himalayan panorama from 3,050 m (10,007 ft)** – Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Kedar Dome, Meru, Sumeru, Neelkanth, Dronagiri, Nanda Ghunti and Trishul from one ridge - **Sunrise over the snow peaks** – a pre-dawn walk timed to reach the top as the first light hits the Garhwal range - **The temple of a thousand bells** – brass bells tied along the steps and around the shrine ring when the wind rises - **A shrine to Kartikeya** – one of the few temples in Uttarakhand dedicated to Lord Shiva’s elder son - **Only about 7 km of walking** – no camping and no heavy backpack, with a night in a village homestay - **Oak and rhododendron forest** – red rhododendron blooms along the trail in March and April - **Snow in winter** – from December to February the ridge and the temple steps can lie under snow - **The drive of the five prayags** – past Devprayag, where the Alaknanda and the Bhagirathi meet to form the Ganga, and Rudraprayag ### Best Time to Do the Kartik Swami Trek The Kartik Swami trek runs from September to June. We do not run it in July and August, when monsoon rain makes the mountain roads to Rudraprayag prone to landslides and clouds hide the peaks. Each of the three windows gives the same view a different character, and the clearest skies come in autumn. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (Rhododendron Season) March and April bring red rhododendron blooms to the forest, and the snow on the high peaks is still deep and bright. Days on the trail are pleasant at 12°C to 22°C, while the pre-dawn start and the night in Kanakchauri sit at about 3°C to 10°C. From May the afternoon haze can build, so the sunrise view is the one to aim for. Showers can arrive late in June as the monsoon approaches. #### September to November – Autumn (Clearest Views) After the monsoon washes the air clean, autumn gives the sharpest mountain views of the year, and the whole arc of peaks stands out from Kedarnath to Trishul. Day temperatures are 10°C to 18°C, and nights and the dawn climb drop to about 0°C to 8°C, colder in November. Early September can still bring a passing shower, so carry a rain layer. #### December to February – Winter (The Snow Season) Winter turns the ridge white. Snow can cover the upper trail and the temple steps, and the air is crisp and clear. Days are 3°C to 10°C, and the pre-dawn walk and the nights fall to about -5°C to 1°C, with wind on the open ridge. Microspikes and gaiters come with Free Trekking Gear, and a proper set of warm layers is essential for the sunrise wait at the top. ### Kartik Swami Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Kartik Swami trek costs ₹3,800 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days starting and ending at Kanakchauri, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Rishikesh is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Kanakchauri **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Devprayag → Srinagar → Rudraprayag → Kanakchauri | Distance: about 175 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Altitude: 340 m → Kanakchauri** The day begins at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station, where the group meets at 06:30 AM and boards shared cabs for the drive into the Garhwal hills. Leaving early keeps you ahead of the traffic and gives you a relaxed arrival in Kanakchauri by mid-afternoon. Have a light breakfast before you leave or carry something to eat, as the first proper stop comes after an hour or two on the road. The road follows the Ganga upstream through deep green gorges. At Devprayag you look down on the meeting of the Alaknanda and the Bhagirathi, the point where the Ganga takes its name. The road then follows the Alaknanda past Srinagar, the largest town in this part of Garhwal, and on to Rudraprayag, where the Mandakini joins the Alaknanda. The group stops for lunch on the way, at your own cost. From Rudraprayag the road turns off onto the Pokhari route and climbs through terraced villages and pine and oak forest for about 40 km. The air grows cooler with every bend. Kanakchauri is a small roadside village on the ridge, and on a clear evening you get your first glimpse of the snow peaks you will see from the temple the next morning. After check-in at the homestay, the trek leader runs a short briefing on the pre-dawn start, the route and the cold at the top, and checks everyone’s SpO2 and pulse. Dinner is early and simple, and lights out is early too: the alarm for the sunrise climb rings at about 4:00 AM. Lay out your warm layers, headlamp and water bottle before you sleep. What to Expect: - 06:30 AM pickup at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station - Views of the Devprayag confluence, where the Ganga is born - Drive along the Alaknanda past Srinagar and Rudraprayag - First glimpse of the snow peaks from the Kanakchauri ridge - Evening briefing and health check by the trek leader - Overnight: homestay or guesthouse at Kanakchauri ### Day 2: Kartik Swami Temple and Drive to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Trek: Kanakchauri → Kartik Swami Temple → Kanakchauri | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude: Kanakchauri → 3,050 m | Drive: Kanakchauri → Rishikesh, about 175 km, 6–7 hrs** The day starts at about 4:00 AM with a hot drink, and the group leaves Kanakchauri by headlamp at about 4:30 AM. The trail climbs at a steady gradient through oak and rhododendron forest, a stone and earth path that is easy to follow even in the dark. Walk at a pace where you can still talk; the trek leader sets short breaks so that nobody is rushed. Carry at least one litre of water, as there is no water point on the trail. After about 2.5 to 3 km the forest thins, the sky turns pale and the path reaches the ridge, where a few tea stalls open as the morning brings the pilgrims. The last stretch is a narrow flight of about 80 stone steps along the crest, lined with bells. In winter these steps can carry snow or ice, and the trek team helps you up where needed. Reaching the top before sunrise gives you time to find a spot and pull on your warmest layer. As the sun comes up, the snow peaks light up one after another: the Kedarnath group and Chaukhamba to the north, Neelkanth and Dronagiri beyond, Nanda Ghunti and Trishul to the east, and Bandarpoonch far to the west on a clear morning. The temple opens after sunrise; remove your shoes before you step up to the shrine. Spend time on the ridge, take your photographs and enjoy the quiet before the day’s visitors arrive. The descent is the same 3.5 km back to Kanakchauri, about 1.5 hours, and in daylight you see the forest you walked through in the dark. Breakfast waits at the homestay, and then the group packs up for the drive back to Rishikesh: about 175 km and 6–7 hrs down the Alaknanda and the Ganga. Expect to reach Rishikesh by evening, and plan onward travel for late night or the next day. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn start at about 4:30 AM by headlamp - Steady climb through oak and rhododendron forest - About 80 stone steps lined with bells to the temple - Sunrise over Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Neelkanth and Trishul - Breakfast at Kanakchauri after the descent - Drive back to Rishikesh, arriving by evening - Overnight: no stay (trek ends in Rishikesh) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: homestay or guesthouse in Kanakchauri, on twin or triple sharing #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner at Kanakchauri to Day 2 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Safety Equipment - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 2-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Rishikesh to Kanakchauri and back - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Rishikesh, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Kanakchauri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 5. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 6. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20 km / 40–50 min from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Rishikesh at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay in Rishikesh. **From Rishikesh to Kanakchauri:** about 175 km, 6–7 hrs by road via Devprayag, Srinagar and Rudraprayag. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 06:30 AM, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** After the sunrise climb and breakfast on Day 2, the cab takes 6–7 hrs and is expected in Rishikesh by evening. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK), which is also the pickup point. Haridwar (HW), about 25 km away, has many more trains from Delhi and the rest of India. - **To Rishikesh:** a few direct trains, including overnight services from Delhi; check current timings. - **To Haridwar:** Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi, Vande Bharat and overnight express trains from Delhi; take a cab or auto on to Rishikesh, about 1 hr. For a 06:30 AM pickup, arrive the evening before and stay near the station. **From Rishikesh to Kanakchauri:** about 175 km, 6–7 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The cab reaches Rishikesh by evening on Day 2. Plan your train home for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Overnight ordinary and Volvo buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses from inside the ISBT. Arrive the evening before and stay in Rishikesh for the 06:30 AM pickup at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station. **From Rishikesh to Kanakchauri:** about 175 km, 6–7 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The cab reaches Rishikesh by evening on Day 2. Plan your bus home for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last reliable ATMs: Rudraprayag, about 40 km before Kanakchauri; carry cash from Rishikesh or Rudraprayag - There is no ATM at Kanakchauri or on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio, Airtel and BSNL work in Rudraprayag; at Kanakchauri and on the open ridge, Jio and Airtel signal is available but patchy - Signal can drop in the forest section of the trail - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Rudraprayag ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kartik Swami trek, and where does it start? The Kartik Swami trek is in Rudraprayag district, Uttarakhand, and starts from Kanakchauri village on the Rudraprayag–Pokhari road, about 40 km from Rudraprayag. The trail climbs about 3.5 km through oak and rhododendron forest to the Kartik Swami temple on a narrow ridge, then returns the same way to Kanakchauri. Trekkaro picks up the group at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. ### How many days does the Kartik Swami trek take from Rishikesh? The Kartik Swami trek takes 2 days from Rishikesh. Day 1 is the drive from Rishikesh to Kanakchauri, about 175 km and 6–7 hrs, with the night in a homestay. Day 2 is the pre-dawn climb to the temple for sunrise, the walk back to Kanakchauri for breakfast and the drive back to Rishikesh by evening. Total walking is about 7 km. ### What is the highest altitude reached on the Kartik Swami trek? The Kartik Swami temple stands at 3,050 m (10,007 ft), the highest point of the Kartik Swami trek. It sits on the crest of a narrow ridge above Kanakchauri, and the height gain from the village is spread over about 3.5 km. At this altitude Acute Mountain Sickness is uncommon on a short visit, but the trek leader still checks your SpO2 and pulse, and you should report any headache or dizziness at once. ### What is the difficulty level of the Kartik Swami trek for beginners? The Kartik Swami trek is graded easy and suits beginners. The walk is about 7 km up and down in 4–5 hours with stops, on a clear stone and earth path. The harder parts are the pre-dawn start in the cold and the last stretch of about 80 narrow stone steps to the temple. The long drive on both days is as tiring as the walk, so come rested and with two to three weeks of regular walking behind you. ### What is the best time to do the Kartik Swami trek? The best time for the Kartik Swami trek is September to November, when the skies after the monsoon give the clearest views of the snow peaks. The trek also runs from December to February for snow, and from March to June for rhododendron blooms and pleasant days. We do not run it in July and August, when monsoon rain brings landslides on the roads to Rudraprayag and clouds hide the mountains. ### Does the Kartik Swami trek have snow, and in which months? Yes, the Kartik Swami trek can have snow from December to February. Snow can cover the upper trail, the ridge and the temple steps, and after a heavy winter it can linger into early March. The steps can turn icy in the early morning. Microspikes and gaiters come with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, and the trek team helps you on the steep steps when they are slippery. ### How cold does it get on the Kartik Swami trek at sunrise? On the Kartik Swami trek, pre-dawn and night temperatures are about 3°C to 10°C from March to June, 0°C to 8°C from September to November and -5°C to 1°C from December to February. Days are milder: 12°C to 22°C in spring and summer, 10°C to 18°C in autumn and 3°C to 10°C in winter. Wind on the open ridge makes the sunrise wait feel colder, so keep your warmest layer handy. ### What is the minimum age for the Kartik Swami trek? The minimum age for the Kartik Swami trek is 7 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit: trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health, with a doctor’s fitness certificate, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. The pre-dawn start and the steep temple steps are the parts to prepare children for. ### How do I reach the Kartik Swami trek pickup point in Rishikesh? The pickup for the Kartik Swami trek is at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. Reach Rishikesh the evening before: - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun, about 20 km away - **Train:** to Rishikesh, or to Haridwar and then about 1 hr by road - **Bus:** overnight buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate, about 6–7 hrs From Rishikesh the group drives about 175 km to Kanakchauri. ### What does the Kartik Swami trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Kartik Swami trek costs ₹3,800 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days starting and ending at Kanakchauri. It includes Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, against a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and ₹200 washing charge), the night’s homestay at Kanakchauri, meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 2 breakfast, trail entry charges, a certified trek leader and the safety kit. Transport and backpack offloading (₹800) are not included. ### How do I book the Kartik Swami trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Kartik Swami trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹3,800 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 06:30 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is transport included in the Kartik Swami trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Kartik Swami trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 06:30 AM to Kanakchauri and back; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare before departure. The drive is about 175 km and 6–7 hrs each way, via Devprayag, Srinagar and Rudraprayag. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kartik Swami trek? There is limited mobile network and no ATM on the Kartik Swami trek. Jio and Airtel signal is available but patchy at Kanakchauri and on the open ridge, and it can drop in the forest section. The last reliable ATMs are in Rudraprayag, about 40 km before Kanakchauri, so carry cash from Rishikesh or Rudraprayag in small notes for tea stalls and offerings. ### Do I need a permit or ID for the Kartik Swami trek? No special trekking permit is needed for the Kartik Swami trek, but there is a small entry ticket at the counter at the start of the trail, which Trekkaro covers in the trek fee; a camera charge, if applied, is yours. Carry an original government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, voter ID or driving licence) for the homestay check-in and any police checks on the road. ### What should I carry on the Kartik Swami trek, and is gear provided? For the Kartik Swami trek, carry warm layers, a headlamp and water; the main gear comes with Free Trekking Gear. Pack: - Thermal inners and 1–2 fleece or woollen layers (more in winter) - Headlamp with spare batteries for the 4:30 AM start - One or two 1-litre water bottles, as there is no water point on the trail - Woollen cap, gloves, sunglasses and sunscreen Trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes are part of Free Trekking Gear. ### Where do we stay and what food is served on the Kartik Swami trek? On the Kartik Swami trek you stay one night in a homestay or guesthouse at Kanakchauri, on twin or triple sharing; there is no camping. Meals run from Day 1 dinner to Day 2 breakfast: simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food, with hot tea or coffee before the pre-dawn start. Lunch on both drive days is at roadside dhabas at your own cost. Tea stalls near the top of the trail sell tea and light snacks. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 25 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 8 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 15 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 22 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 6 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 13 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 20 Dec 2026 - 26 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 2 Jan 2027 to 3 Jan 2027 - 9 Jan 2027 to 10 Jan 2027 - … 28 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kartik-swami-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kashmir Great Lakes Trek > Kashmir Great Lakes Trek is a 7-day moderate–difficult trek in Ganderbal, Jammu and Kashmir, reaching 4,206 m (13,800 ft). It covers about 67 km on foot and starts at Shitkadi and ends at Naranag. Best time: July to September. Trekkaro price: ₹19,500 per person + 5% GST, with free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles. Next batch: 3 Jul 2027 (22 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kashmir-great-lakes-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate–Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,206 m / 13,800 ft - **Trekking distance:** 67 km - **Region:** Ganderbal, Jammu and Kashmir - **Start / end:** Shitkadi / Naranag - **Best time:** July to September - **Temperature:** Early Jul: Day 8°C to 18°C, Night -5°C to -2°C | Mid Jul-Aug: Day 14°C to 22°C, Night 2°C to 8°C | Late Aug-mid Sep: Day 10°C to 18°C, Night -1°C to 4°C - **Price:** ₹19,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles - **Next batch:** 3 Jul 2027 (22 upcoming) ## Overview There are treks in India that are beautiful. And then there is the Kashmir Great Lakes – a route that stops experienced trekkers mid-stride. Seven high-altitude alpine lakes strung across a single valley, each one a different shade of blue, green, and turquoise. Meadows that feel engineered rather than natural. Mountain walls so close the scale stops making sense. The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is the most visually spectacular trek in India. Vishansar and Krishansar – twin lakes at about 13,400 feet. Gadsar at the foot of the highest pass on the circuit. Satsar, a chain of seven connected lakes unlike anything else in the Himalayas. And Gangabal with Nundkol beneath the south face of Harmukh Peak – what many experienced trekkers consider the finest campsite in the country. In seven days, Trekkaro takes you through all of it, from Shitkadi near Sonamarg to Naranag, with pickup and drop at the Tourist Reception Centre in Srinagar, across passes, through meadows, and alongside the lakes that give this circuit its name. This is not a single-note adventure. It is the complete Himalayan experience. The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is a high-altitude circuit in the upper Kashmir Valley, traversing from Shitkadi near Sonamarg to Naranag across a sequence of seven distinct alpine lakes at altitudes between 11,000 and 13,800 feet. The route crosses the Nichnai Pass, the Gadsar Pass, and the ridgeline above the Gangabal basin, passing through some of the most dramatic and varied terrain in the entire Himalayan range. It has been called the most beautiful trek in India by experienced trekkers returning from routes across Uttarakhand, Himachal Pradesh, Ladakh, and Sikkim. That assessment, in our experience, is accurate. ### The Seven Lakes – What Makes This Trek Unmissable What distinguishes the Kashmir Great Lakes from every other Himalayan circuit is the lake sequence itself. Vishansar and Krishansar sit as twin lakes at the valley head at about 13,400 feet, divided by a narrow ridge, both visible simultaneously from the Nichnai Pass, their surfaces shifting between cobalt and turquoise depending on the hour. Gadsar, the deepest lake on the route, sits at the foot of a moraine wall at 11,800 feet in a landscape so austere it feels geological rather than geographical. Satsar is not a single lake but a chain of seven smaller lakes connected by channels, a geological feature unique to this valley. Gangabal and Nundkol, the final pair, sit beneath the south face of Harmukh Peak (5,142 m) in a glacial cirque that constitutes what many experienced trekkers consider the single finest view in the Indian Himalayan trekking repertoire. You arrive at Gangabal with time remaining in the afternoon. You sit at the edge of the water. You watch the mountain above reflect in the surface below. Very little else needs to happen. ### The Valley Itself The route traverses the upper Kashmir Valley from Shitkadi to Naranag, crossing high passes, descending into hidden basins, and following ridgelines with simultaneous views of the Himalayan and Karakoram ranges. The landscape shifts constantly: from the pine and birch forests of the lower approach through the open alpine meadows of the middle altitudes to the bare rock, snow, and glacial moraines of the upper passes and basins. This variety, combined with the lake circuit, makes the Kashmir Great Lakes trek unlike any other route in the country. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is graded Moderate to Difficult. It is not suited to someone on their first Himalayan trek; the daily distances are significant (8-14 km per day), the altitude gain is sustained, and the passes require physical confidence on steep terrain. We recommend this trek for trekkers who have completed at least one previous Himalayan trek at a similar altitude or who have a strong cardiovascular fitness base and are willing to commit to a serious preparation programme in the 8-10 weeks before departure. Minimum recommended age: 14 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor's medical certificate. Daily trekking hours: 4-8 hours. Season: July to September only. ### Key Highlights of the Kashmir Great Lakes Trek - Seven distinct high-altitude alpine lakes across one continuous circuit – Vishansar, Krishansar, Gadsar, Satsar, Gangabal, and Nundkol - Gadsar Pass at 13,800 ft – the highest point of the route, with panoramic views into Kashmir and Ladakh on clear days - Gangabal Lake beneath Harmukh Peak (5,142 m) – widely considered the finest campsite in Indian trekking - Satsar – a chain of seven interconnected lakes, a unique geological feature of the Kashmir Valley - Twin lakes view: Vishansar and Krishansar visible simultaneously from the Nichnai Pass ridge at 13,100 ft - Naranag temple ruins (8th century) on the final descent – a rare historical landmark on a natural landscape route - Full circuit trek Shitkadi to Naranag – not an out-and-back; every day brings new terrain - Certified Trekkaro trek leader & guides, twice-daily health monitoring ### Best Time to Visit Kashmir's Great Lakes The Kashmir Great Lakes trek has one of the narrowest operating windows of any major Himalayan circuit — approximately 10 to 11 weeks from early July to mid-September. The Nichnai and Gadsar passes remain snowbound before July and are reclosed by fresh snowfall from mid-October. Within this window, each part of the season delivers a distinctly different experience. #### Early July - Opening Season (Snow on the Passes) Early July is the opening of the Kashmir Great Lakes route. The passes still hold significant snow, and the Nichnai Pass approach and Gadsar Pass crossing both involve snow sections that require microspikes. But this is also the time when the Kashmir alpine meadows are at their most extraordinary: immediately post-snowmelt, the margs are carpeted in wildflowers at their peak density and colour — purple primula, blue Himalayan poppy, and yellow potentilla in layers so dense they cover every square metre of ground. The lakes are at maximum depth, fed from all directions by snowmelt, and the colours are at their most intense. For trekkers who want the full snow-crossing experience and the peak wildflower display, early July is a justified and rewarding choice. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 18°C | Night at camp: -2°C to -5°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on both passes. Peak wildflower meadows. Fast glacial streams. - **Best for:** Snow crossings, wildflower photography, and lakes at maximum depth and colour. #### Mid-July to August – Peak Season (Most Recommended) This is Trekkaro's most recommended window for the Kashmir Great Lakes. The passes are fully clear, all seven lakes are accessible at their best conditions, the meadows remain vivid green, and the weather follows a reliable Himalayan summer pattern: clear, warm mornings with occasional afternoon cloud and the possibility of brief rain. The lake colours in this window are extraordinary – Vishansar at cobalt blue on a clear morning, Gangabal reflecting Harmukh in conditions of perfect stillness, and Gadsar catching the afternoon light in shades of deep green. The trek looks exactly as spectacular as the photographs that first made you want to do it. - **Temperatures:** Day: 14°C to 22°C | Night at camp: 2°C to 8°C - **Trail conditions:** Passes fully clear. All lakes are accessible. Best overall conditions. - **Best for:** Best overall experience, vivid lake colours, and ideal conditions on all seven lakes. #### Late August to Mid-September - Post-Monsoon Season (Crystal Visibility) Late August through mid-September is an underrated and beautiful window for the Kashmir Great Lakes. The monsoon weakens, the atmosphere clears, and mountain visibility reaches its sharpest of the year — peaks that are hazy in July stand in hard-edged clarity in September. Harmukh above Gangabal is particularly dramatic in this light. Crowds are lighter than in peak July, trails are well-defined, and nights at camp are cool and clear. The lakes retain their colour through to mid-September. Nights become noticeably colder from early September, and the transition to autumn is visible in the changing light on the upper valley ridges. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 18°C | Night at camp: -1°C to 4°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear trails, sharpest visibility, fewer trekkers, cooler nights. - **Best for:** Crystal mountain views, quiet trails, and dramatic post-monsoon light on the lakes. #### October Onwards – Closing Season From mid-October, winter reasserts itself over the upper Kashmir Valley, and fresh snowfall closes the passes without warning. Trekkaro does not operate standard Kashmir Great Lakes batches after mid-September. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the full Kashmir Great Lakes experience, book a mid-July to August batch. For the peak wildflower display with snow crossings, choose early July. For the sharpest mountain visibility and quieter trails, late August to mid-September is our top post-monsoon pick. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Srinagar to Shitkadi **Route Details:** **Drive: Srinagar → Shitkadi (~85 km, ~3 hours) | Altitude: 5,200 ft → ~8,530 ft | Activity: Short orientation walk, camp setup, health baseline** Day 1 of the Kashmir Great Lakes circuit is an arrival day. The drive from Srinagar to Shitkadi moves quickly through the outskirts of the city and into the lower mountain terrain above the valley floor. Shitkadi sits at approximately 8,530 feet, already a meaningful altitude for trekkers arriving from the plains, and the trailhead itself is positioned at a point where the city noise falls away and the character of the upper Kashmir landscape begins to assert itself. Pine forest, the sound of a stream nearby, and the temperature already a few degrees cooler than it was at the Srinagar assembly point. The afternoon at Shitkadi is structured around preparation rather than distance. The trek leader conducts the first health baseline SpO₂, pulse rate, and blood pressure for every trekker, recorded as the reference point against which all subsequent daily readings will be compared. The trek briefing follows: route overview, daily structure, health monitoring protocol, AMS awareness, and a review of what to expect on Days 2 and 3. Tonight is the first of six nights in the Kashmir high mountains. Sleep at Shitkadi's altitude begins the acclimatisation process in a measured way, high enough to initiate adaptation but not so high as to stress the body before the circuit's more demanding days arrive. Eat a full dinner, hydrate well, and be in your sleeping bag by 9:00 PM. Tomorrow, the trail begins in earnest. What to Expect: - Drive from the Srinagar assembly point to the Shitkadi trailhead (~8,530 ft) - Health baseline: SpO₂, pulse, and blood pressure recorded for every trekker – Day 1 reference point - Trek briefing: route overview, AMS awareness, daily structure, and safety protocols - Orientation walk (optional) in the forest around Shitkadi camp before dinner - Overnight: Shitkadi camp (~8,530 ft) - first night of altitude acclimatisation ### Day 2: Shitkadi to Nichnai **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~8,530 ft → ~11,500 ft | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: Mixed forest, alpine scrub, open meadow approach** Day 2 is the circuit's first true walking day, and it establishes the rhythm and character of what follows. The trail from Shitkadi climbs steadily through mixed pine and birch forest before transitioning to open alpine terrain as the treeline retreats. The Sindh Valley basin is visible below and behind in the early sections, its cultivated floor and poplar-lined roads shrinking progressively as altitude increases. Above the treeline, the trail moves through a landscape that has no equivalent at lower elevations: wide, open, and immediately expansive, with the ridgelines framing a sky of the particular deep blue that only exists above 10,000 feet. The path to Nichnai follows the Nichnai stream in its upper reaches, the water cold and fast from the snowfields above. First-time trekkers find their fundamental rhythm on this day, learning how their legs respond to sustained uphill movement at reduced oxygen, how their breathing adjusts to the thinner air, and how the pace that felt comfortable at Shitkadi requires recalibration above 10,000 feet. Experienced trekkers use Day 2 to verify gear fit, calibrate layering to the changing temperature across altitude bands, and absorb the specific character of the Kashmir alpine landscape that no photograph fully conveys. Nichnai Meadow at 11,500 feet is a broad, open basin surrounded by ridgelines that catch the last of the day's light in a sequence of gold, amber, and deep grey. The campsite is large enough that the tents look small against the surrounding terrain. The stream is audible from every part of the camp. In July and early August, wildflowers grow in dense clusters at the stream margins. Tonight, the circuit has properly begun, and tomorrow brings the first pass and the first lake. What to Expect: - First full trekking day – ~10 km, 4–5 hrs, ~3,000 ft altitude gain from Shitkadi to Nichnai - Forest transition to open alpine terrain as the treeline retreats above 10,000 ft - Nichnai stream alongside the upper trail – cold glacial water, increasingly audible as you climb - Views back over the Sindh Valley and Srinagar basin below as altitude increases - Wildflowers in peak density at Nichnai meadow in July and early August - Overnight: Nichnai Meadow Camp (11,500 ft) ### Day 3: Nichnai to Vishansar Lake via Nichnai Pass **Route Details:** **Altitude: 11,500 ft → Nichnai Pass (~13,100 ft) → Vishansar Lake (~13,386 ft) | Distance: ~12 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: Rocky ascent, snow sections, pass ridge, descending lakeshore approach** Day 3 delivers the Kashmir Great Lakes circuit's first defining visual moment. The route climbs from Nichnai to the Nichnai Pass at approximately 13,100 feet, ascending through open rockfield and snowpatches, the extent of which depends on the season, with increasingly wide views over the Kashmir Valley as altitude is gained. The ascent is sustained but well-graded. The pass ridge, when you reach it, presents one of the most immediately arresting views in Himalayan trekking: two lakes visible simultaneously in the basin below. Vishansar and Krishansar are twin lakes separated by a narrow ridge at the upper valley head. From the Nichnai Pass, both are in view simultaneously, Vishansar in the near basin at approximately 13,386 feet, and Krishansar just beyond the dividing ridge and slightly higher. Vishansar's colour on a clear morning is a deep, saturated cobalt, unlike anything at lower elevation. Krishansar reflects the surrounding snowfields in its surface. The composition of both lakes visible from one ridge, framed by the valley behind them, constitutes the circuit's first extraordinary visual sequence. It is sufficient on its own terms to justify the previous two days of effort. Camp is set on the Vishansar lakeshore, one of the finest campsites in the Indian Himalayan trekking circuit. The lake's colour shifts throughout the afternoon as the light angle changes: cobalt at the morning, turquoise by midday, and a pale jade-green where shallows catch the late afternoon sun. If you arrive before 3:00 PM, walk the lake perimeter before dinner. The circuit takes approximately 45 minutes, and each angle presents a different relationship between water, shore, sky, and the surrounding ridge. Tonight, the circuit is fully underway. What to Expect: - Climb to Nichnai Pass (~13,100 ft) – snow sections in July; free microspikes and gaiters in use - First view of twin lakes: Vishansar and Krishansar are both visible simultaneously from the pass ridge - Vishansar Lake (~13,386 ft): deep cobalt shifting to turquoise and jade throughout the afternoon - Lakeshore camp – one of the finest campsites on the circuit - Afternoon perimeter walk of Vishansar Lake (~45 min, flat terrain) before dinner if time allows - Overnight: Vishansar Lakeshore Camp (~13,386 ft) ### Day 4: Vishansar Lake to Gadsar Lake via Gadsar Pass **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~13,386 ft → Gadsar Pass (~13,800 ft) → Gadsar Lake (~11,800 ft) | Distance: ~14 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: Snow ascent, exposed pass ridge, long scree and boulder descent** Day 4 is the hardest day of the circuit and the most rewarding. The Gadsar Pass at approximately 13,800 feet is the highest point of the entire Kashmir Great Lakes route, higher even than the Nichnai Pass, and the crossing is the physical and visual centrepiece of the trek. Departure from Vishansar camp is early, by 5:30 AM, to take advantage of firmer snow conditions in the morning and to ensure the group clears the pass and completes the descent before afternoon cloud and wind build up on the upper ridge. The ascent from Vishansar gains altitude steadily across open rocky terrain and snowfields before the final steepened approach to the Gadsar Pass itself. Trekkaro's technical team installs fixed ropes on the steepest section of the pass approach before the trekking group departs, providing a continuous handline through the crux, converting what would otherwise be a genuinely exposed snow traverse into a confidently manageable climb. Every trekker uses the rope. The guide leads from the front. The group move through one by one. The Gadsar Pass ridge delivers a panoramic view that experienced trekkers consistently cite as among the finest in Indian Himalayan trekking. To the south and west, the Kashmir Valley in full depth, forested ridges, the valley floor, and the Kashmir Himalaya on the horizon. To the north and east on clear days: the Ladakh and Zanskar ranges as a white wall of peaks at the edge of visibility. The border between Kashmir's green ecosystem and Ladakh's high-altitude desert is visible as a literal ecological line from the pass ridge. Two worlds. One ridge. You stand between them. The descent from Gadsar Pass to Gadsar Lake is long and demanding, with approximately 2,000 feet of scree, boulder, and occasional snow before the valley floor levels out. Gadsar Lake at approximately 11,800 feet sits at the foot of a moraine wall in an enclosed basin: its surface the deepest blue of all seven lakes, its surroundings stripped of all vegetation, its silence of a quality more absolute than anything on the Vishansar side. The Gadsar camp is the most remote night of the circuit. The darkness here, away from any human light source, is complete. Sleep well. The hardest day is behind you. What to Expect: - Early 5:30 AM departure – firm snow conditions and pre-afternoon weather window - Gadsar Pass (~13,800 ft) – highest point of the circuit, hardest climbing of the trek - Fixed ropes installed by the Trekkaro technical team on the steepest snow section below the pass (if needed) - Panoramic pass views: Kashmir Valley and Ladakh/Zanskar ranges visible simultaneously on clear days - Long descent (~2,000 ft) of scree and boulder to Gadsar Lake – trekking poles essential - Gadsar Lake (~11,800 ft): the deepest blue of the circuit, the most remote and austere campsite - Overnight: Gadsar Valley camp – complete darkness, complete silence, complete isolation ### Day 5: Gadsar Lake to Satsar Lake **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~11,800 ft → Satsar (~12,400 ft) | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: Open tundra valley, gentle undulation, meadow approach to Satsar chain** After the enormous physical and psychological investment of Day 4, Day 5 offers the circuit's most measured and meditative stage. The trail from Gadsar to Satsar follows the open valley eastward through tundra terrain with a moderate, unhurried gradient. The body, now fully acclimatised to altitude and to the cumulative rhythm of multi-day trekking, moves differently on this day with a confidence and ease in the terrain that Days 1 and 2 did not yet contain. The landscape continues to reward: wide valley floors with the ridgelines framing a sky that at this altitude carries a quality of blue impossible at sea level. There are no trees, no traffic sounds, and no human noise beyond the group. The silence on this section of the circuit is among the more disorienting and clarifying experiences the route provides. Many trekkers use this day to process what the circuit has given them so far, the twin lakes, the pass crossing, and the Gadsar basin, and to prepare, both physically and psychologically, for the Zaj Pass and Gangabal that await on Day 6. Satsar is not a single lake but a chain of seven smaller lakes connected by channels and separated by meadow ridges, a geological feature formed by the interaction of glacial moraine and the valley's drainage pattern, unique to this part of the Kashmir Himalayas. Walking through the Satsar sequence gives a different experience from the dramatic single-lake moments of earlier days: a slower, more intimate engagement with water and landscape at the same altitude. Each of the seven is distinct in size, colour, and character. The campsite at the main Satsar lake sits in a broad, flat meadow with peaks on all sides and the sound of moving water at the meadow margins. What to Expect: - Measured recovery day – gentle gradient after Gadsar Pass, body settling into the circuit's rhythm - Open tundra walking with wide valley views and sustained mountain silence - Satsar chain: seven interconnected alpine lakes – a unique geological feature of the Kashmir Valley - Each lake is distinct in size, depth, colour, and character as you walk through the sequence - Overnight: Satsar Meadow Camp (~12,400 ft) with surrounding peak views on all sides ### Day 6: Satsar Lake to Gangabal Lake via Zaj Pass **Route Details:** **Altitude: ~12,400 ft → Zaj Pass → Gangabal Lake (3,501 m / 11,486 ft) | Distance: ~10 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: Pass ascent, rocky ridge, descent to lake basin** Day 6 delivers the circuit's emotional and visual climax. The route crosses the Zaj Pass before descending into the Gangabal basin, a glacial cirque formed beneath the south face of Harmukh Peak (5,142 m), one of the significant summits of the Kashmir Himalayas. The Zaj Pass is less technically demanding than the Gadsar Pass but no less rewarding: from the ridge, the view opens into the Gangabal basin below, the two lakes visible in the cirque floor, and Harmukh rising as an unbroken wall of rock and ice directly behind them. Gangabal Lake sits at 3,501 metres (11,486 feet) in the floor of the cirque, its surface occupying the full width of the enclosed basin. Nundkol Lake sits immediately adjacent at a slightly higher elevation, separated by a short moraine ridge that takes approximately 10 minutes to cross. The two lakes together, with Harmukh rising directly above them, constitute what experienced trekkers consistently describe as the single finest view in the Indian Himalayan trekking repertoire. The mountain reflects in Gangabal's surface on calm mornings with a mirror-clarity that makes the reflection appear more substantial than the rock itself. Trekkers routinely arrive at Gangabal and stop mid-step. Not from fatigue. From the view. Day 6 is a shorter walking day, approximately 10 km, 5 to 6 hours, designed to ensure arrival at Gangabal with time remaining in the afternoon. Two hours at the Gangabal lakeshore before dinner is time that earns itself many times over: walk the perimeter, cross the moraine ridge to Nundkol, sit at the water's edge with Harmukh in full view, and be unhurriedly present with one of the most extraordinary places the Himalayas contain. The evening at Gangabal tends to be quiet. The conversation, when it happens, tends to be the kind that only occurs at places like this. What to Expect: - Zaj Pass crossing – third and final major pass of the circuit, with views into the Gangabal basin below - Descent to Gangabal Lake (3,501 m / 11,486 ft) – the visual and emotional climax of the circuit - Gangabal + Nundkol: two adjacent lakes beneath Harmukh Peak (5,142 m) in a glacial cirque - Harmukh reflects in Gangabal's surface on calm mornings – widely considered the finest view in Indian trekking - Shorter walking day (~10 km, 5–6 hrs) to ensure afternoon time at the lakeshore - Cross the moraine ridge to Nundkol – 10-minute walk from Gangabal, different perspective of the cirque - Overnight: Gangabal Lakeshore Camp (3,501 m / 11,486 ft) - most memorable night of the circuit ### Day 7: Gangabal to Naranag & Drive to Srinagar **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,501 m (11,486 ft) → Naranag (7,200 ft) | Distance: ~11 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Then: Drive Naranag → Srinagar (~55 km, ~2 hrs)** The morning after Gangabal has a quality different from every other morning on the circuit. You are at 3,501 metres, above the treeline, in the complete silence of the cirque, with Harmukh visible above the camp in the early light and the lake's surface reflecting the sky at a colour it only holds for approximately 20 minutes at dawn before the sun angle changes. Most trekkers are outside before the guide calls for breakfast. Not because there is anything to do. Because the view has earned a proper farewell. The descent from Gangabal to Naranag follows the Wangath stream downward through progressively denser forest. The landscape transformation on this descent mirrors Day 2 in reverse: the open alpine terrain of the high camp gives way to rhododendron scrub, then birch and pine, then the dense conifer forest of the lower valley. The air warms incrementally. Birds return. The stream grows louder and more visible. You are re-entering the world below, and the forest receives you in the same unhurried way it released you at Shitkadi five days ago. At approximately 7,600 feet, the trail passes through the Naranag temple complex, a group of stone structures and ruins dating to the 8th century CE, positioned at the confluence of two mountain streams. The ruins are among the few significant historical sites on the Kashmir Great Lakes route, and their presence at the end of a circuit defined entirely by natural landscape gives the final descent an unexpected dimension. You are descending not just from altitude but from one world into a much older one. Naranag village at 7,200 feet marks the end of the trek. The shared cab, paid directly to the driver, meets the group here for the 2-hour drive back to Srinagar. What to Expect: - Final dawn at Gangabal – Harmukh reflected at first light, 20-minute window before the angle changes - 11 km descent from 3,501 m to Naranag (7,200 ft) through changing forest zones - Wangath stream alongside the trail for much of the descent – sound and temperature warm with altitude loss - Naranag temple ruins (8th century CE, ~7,600 ft) – rare historical landmark on the final approach - Shared cab from Naranag village, where the trek officially ends - Drive to Srinagar: ~55 km, ~2 hrs. Arrival late afternoon. Trek completion certificates issued. ### Day 8: Buffer Day Why Keep a Buffer Day on the Kashmir Great Lakes Trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is one of India's finest high-altitude treks, but its remote Himalayan terrain demands smart planning. What is one of the most important things seasoned trekkers and travel experts recommend? Build in a buffer day at the end of your trek. What Is a Buffer Day, and Why Does It Matter? A buffer day is a flexible extra day built into your itinerary as a safety net. On a trek like Kashmir Great Lakes, where you're navigating altitudes above 4,000m through some of the most dynamic mountain terrain in the subcontinent, that flexibility isn't a luxury; it's essential trip planning. Here's why: Unpredictable Mountain Weather The Kashmir Himalayas are known for sudden weather shifts. Heavy rainfall, unexpected snowfall, or trail-blocking landslides can delay your group's progress with little to no warning. A buffer day absorbs these disruptions without throwing your entire return journey into chaos. Safe Acclimatisation: Every trekker's body responds differently to altitude. If your group needs an extra day to acclimatise properly and avoid altitude sickness, a buffer day ensures you never have to choose between your health and your schedule. Protecting Your Onwards Travel: Missing a connecting flight or transport out of Srinagar is a stressful and costly experience. A buffer day gives you a reliable window between the end of your trek and your return journey, so you arrive at the airport calm, not panicked. What If You Don't Need the Buffer Day? Good news – an unused buffer day is never wasted in Kashmir. Spend it in Srinagar: - Glide across Dal Lake on a traditional shikara - Stroll through the stunning Mughal gardens — Shalimar Bagh, Nishat Bagh, and Chashme Shahi - Explore the old city's architecture, craft bazaars, and spice markets Buffer Day Cost If the buffer day is used due to trek delays, an additional charge of ₹2,500 per person per day applies, covering meals, accommodation, and staff expenses. If unused, there's no extra cost. Important Travel Advisory: When booking your return tickets from Srinagar, always account for this buffer day. If your schedule is tight, opt for flexible or refundable travel tickets for your return journey. Rigid bookings on high-altitude treks are a risk not worth taking. Smart trekkers plan for the unexpected. The mountains run on their own schedule – your itinerary should too. ## Inclusions #### 1. Accommodation - Day 1 to Day 6: camping at the designated campsites (6 nights), on a triple-sharing basis #### 2. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 7 breakfast: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 3. Permits & Camping Fees - Forest permits and all Kashmir Great Lakes route entry fees #### 4. Camping & Safety Equipment - Double-wall, rain-rated tents and -20°C sleeping bags at every campsite - Trekking mattresses or sleeping pads at every campsite - Free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge) - Daily SpO2, pulse and blood-pressure checks at every campsite - Portable oxygen cylinder and emergency stretcher on every batch #### 5. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide for all 7 days - Mountain kitchen staff, camp helpers, and a local horse and mule support team - Trek completion certificate when you complete the full circuit to Naranag ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Tourist Reception Centre (TRC), Srinagar, to the Shitkadi base camp via Sonamarg, and Naranag back to Srinagar. Trekkaro arranges a shared cab at an additional cost of about ₹8,500 per 5–6 seat vehicle for the round trip, paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Srinagar (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drives from Srinagar to Shitkadi and from Naranag back to Srinagar #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹3,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Shitkadi #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack, sunglasses and other personal gear - Trekking shoes, jacket and trekking poles: bring your own (microspikes and gaiters are provided free) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and helicopter evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Srinagar before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Srinagar International Airport (SXR), with direct flights from Delhi (about 1 hr 20 min) and other metros. Fly in at least a day before the trek, so a delayed flight does not make you miss the 12:00 PM departure from the TRC. **From Srinagar to Shitkadi:** 85 km, about 3 hrs by road. Transportation is arranged from the Tourist Reception Centre (TRC), Srinagar, at 12:00 PM; the cab costs ₹8,500 per vehicle (round trip), paid directly to the driver and shared among the trekkers in the same vehicle (5–6 seats). **Return:** On the last day you trek 11 km (5–6 hrs) from Gangabal Lake down to Naranag, then drive 55 km (about 2 hrs) to Srinagar, so expect to reach Srinagar by evening. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Srinagar. Since June 2025, Vande Bharat trains run between Shri Mata Vaishno Devi Katra and Srinagar (about 3 hrs), so you can now come all the way by rail: reach Katra (or Jammu Tawi) by train from Delhi, then continue to Srinagar. Plan to arrive in Srinagar the day before the trek. - **Delhi → Katra or Jammu Tawi** – trains from New Delhi and Hazrat Nizamuddin, including overnight trains; check current timings. - **Katra → Srinagar** – Vande Bharat, about 3 hrs; check current timings and book ahead. **From Srinagar to Shitkadi:** 85 km, about 3 hrs by road. Transportation is arranged from the Tourist Reception Centre (TRC), Srinagar, at 12:00 PM; the cab costs ₹8,500 per vehicle (round trip), paid directly to the driver and shared among the trekkers in the same vehicle (5–6 seats). **Return:** On the last day you trek 11 km (5–6 hrs) from Gangabal Lake down to Naranag, then drive 55 km (about 2 hrs) to Srinagar, so expect to reach Srinagar by evening. Book your train home for the next day. ### By road **By road:** Delhi to Srinagar is about 876 km on NH44 via Pathankot, Jammu, Udhampur and the Banihal tunnel – a long 2-day journey, not a single overnight drive. The practical way is Delhi to Jammu overnight by bus or train, then on to Srinagar the next day by cab or by the Katra–Srinagar train. Weather can close the highway, so confirm the road status before you leave. **From Srinagar to Shitkadi:** 85 km, about 3 hrs by road. Transportation is arranged from the Tourist Reception Centre (TRC), Srinagar, at 12:00 PM; the cab costs ₹8,500 per vehicle (round trip), paid directly to the driver and shared among the trekkers in the same vehicle (5–6 seats). **Return:** On the last day you trek 11 km (5–6 hrs) from Gangabal Lake down to Naranag, then drive 55 km (about 2 hrs) to Srinagar, so expect to reach Srinagar by evening. Book onward travel from Srinagar for the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Sonamarg has the last reliable ATM before Shitkadi - There are no ATMs anywhere on the trek route - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Shitkadi is the last point with a stable network, on postpaid SIMs only - Beyond Shitkadi you may get a weak signal at a few points, but it is not reliable - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kashmir Great Lakes trek, and where does it start? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is in Ganderbal district, Jammu and Kashmir. It starts at Shitkadi, an 85 km (about 3 hour) drive from Srinagar, and ends at Naranag, 55 km (about 2 hours) from Srinagar. On the way it crosses three passes and camps beside a chain of high alpine lakes, from Vishansar to Gangabal. ### How many days is the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek takes 7 days from Srinagar to Srinagar and covers about 67 km, with Day 8 kept as a buffer day if needed. - **Day 1:** drive from Srinagar to Shitkadi (85 km, about 3 hours) - **Days 2–6:** 10–14 km a day via Nichnai, Vishansar, Gadsar, Satsar and Gangabal - **Day 7:** 11 km down to Naranag, then a 2-hour drive to Srinagar - **Longest day:** Day 4 over Gadsar Pass, 14 km in 7–8 hours ### What is the altitude of the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The highest point of the Kashmir Great Lakes trek is Gadsar Pass at 4,206 m (13,800 ft). The trek starts at Shitkadi (2,600 m / 8,530 ft) and ends at Naranag (7,200 ft). - **Nichnai Pass:** 3,990 m (13,100 ft) - **Highest camp:** Vishansar Lake, 4,080 m (13,386 ft) - **Other camps:** Nichnai 3,510 m, Gadsar 3,600 m, Satsar 3,780 m and Gangabal 3,501 m ### How difficult is the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is graded Moderate–Difficult. It is long (7 days, about 67 km) and crosses three passes, with steep ascents and descents, snow sections and many stream crossings. - **Gadsar Pass day:** 14 km in 7–8 hours, with a 5:30 AM start and fixed ropes on the steepest snow if needed - **Descents:** about 2,000 ft of scree and boulders down to Gadsar Lake, and 11 km down to Naranag on the last day - **Weather:** rain showers in July and August make the trail wet ### Is the Kashmir Great Lakes trek good for beginners? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek is not the easiest first trek, but fit beginners can complete it with proper preparation. It runs for 7 days, with 4–8 hours of walking a day and two passes above 13,000 ft. If this is your first Himalayan trek, start training well in advance and keep the buffer day free in your travel plans. ### What fitness level do I need for the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? For the Kashmir Great Lakes trek you need a good level of fitness: you should be able to walk 4–8 hours a day for six days in a row, climb steep slopes and be comfortable at high altitude. - **Training:** prepare physically and mentally in the weeks before the trek, with regular walks, stairs or uphill hikes - **Hardest day:** Gadsar Pass, 14 km with snow and a long descent - **Fitness test:** take the free 2-minute Am I Ready? test on the Trekkaro website ### When is the best time for the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek runs from July to mid-September. Days are pleasant at 10–20°C, but nights at the lake camps get cold. - **July:** snow sections remain on Nichnai Pass, and wildflowers peak at Nichnai meadow from July to early August - **August:** rain showers are common, so carry full rain gear - **September:** colder nights, and snowfall becomes common in September and October ### Will there be snow on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Yes. In July the Kashmir Great Lakes trek has snow sections on Nichnai Pass and on the climb to Gadsar Pass, where you wear the free microspikes and gaiters. - **Gadsar Pass:** a snow ascent, with fixed ropes on the steepest section if needed - **Gaiters and microspikes:** provided free for the snow sections - **Late season:** snowfall is common in September and October ### How cold is the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? On the Kashmir Great Lakes trek, days are pleasant at about 8°C to 22°C, but nights get cold fast: -5°C to -2°C in early July, 2°C to 8°C from mid-July to August, and -1°C to 4°C from late August to mid-September. - **Layers:** 3 warm layers: thermals, a fleece and a padded or down jacket - **Coldest points:** Gadsar Pass (13,800 ft) and the evenings at Satsar and Gangabal - **Rain:** a rain jacket and rain pants, as showers are common in July and August ### Which lakes and mountains can you see on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? On the Kashmir Great Lakes trek you see Vishansar, Krishansar, Gadsar, the Satsar chain, Gangabal and Nundkol lakes, with Harmukh Peak (5,142 m) above the last two. - **Vishansar and Krishansar:** twin lakes, both visible from the Nichnai Pass ridge - **Gadsar:** deep blue water at the most remote campsite of the circuit - **Satsar:** a chain of seven connected alpine lakes - **Gangabal and Nundkol:** two lakes beneath Harmukh Peak, which reflects in Gangabal on calm mornings - **Gadsar Pass:** views of the Kashmir Valley and the Ladakh and Zanskar ranges on clear days ### What is the terrain like on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek covers mixed forest, open alpine meadows, rocky and snowy pass climbs, scree and boulder descents and open tundra valleys. - **Day 2:** forest giving way to alpine scrub and meadow above 10,000 ft - **Days 3–4:** rocky, snowy climbs to Nichnai and Gadsar passes, then long scree descents - **Day 5:** gentle open tundra to Satsar - **Day 7:** an 11 km descent through changing forest beside the Wangath stream ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Yes, there is a risk of altitude sickness on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek: you sleep at 8,530 ft on Day 1, gain about 3,000 ft on Day 2, and spend the Day 3 night at 13,386 ft. - **Health checks:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded for every trekker on Day 1 as a baseline - **Briefing:** the Day 1 briefing covers AMS awareness and safety protocols - **Medicine:** consult your doctor before the trek, including about Diamox ### Can trekkers above 60 do the Kashmir Great Lakes trek, and what do they need? Yes. There is no upper age limit on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek: trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit, have some high-altitude trekking experience and bring a medical fitness certificate signed by a doctor, as the trek crosses high passes with steep ascents and descents. ### How do I reach the start of the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek starts from Srinagar: the group leaves the Tourist Reception Centre (TRC) at 12:00 PM on Day 1 for the 85 km drive to Shitkadi. - **By air:** Srinagar International Airport (SXR) has direct flights from Delhi (about 1 hour 20 minutes); fly in a day early - **By train:** reach Katra or Jammu Tawi, then take the Vande Bharat from Katra to Srinagar (about 3 hours) - **By road:** Delhi to Srinagar is about 876 km, a 2-day journey via Jammu - **Return:** you reach Srinagar by evening on Day 7, so book onward travel for the next day ### Is transport included in the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? No, transport is not included in the Kashmir Great Lakes trek fee. We help the group book a shared cab from the TRC, Srinagar, at 12:00 PM on Day 1; it costs ₹8,500 per vehicle for the round trip, paid directly to the driver. - **Sharing:** the fare is split among the trekkers in the same vehicle (5–6 seats) - **Return:** the shared cab meets the group at Naranag on Day 7 for the 2-hour drive to Srinagar - **Cash:** keep your share of the cab fare ready in small notes ### Where do we stay on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? On the Kashmir Great Lakes trek you stay 6 nights in tents at camps beside meadows and lakes: Shitkadi, Nichnai, Vishansar Lake, Gadsar Lake, Satsar and Gangabal Lake. Tents are shared, so earplugs can help. Plan to reach Srinagar the day before the trek starts. ### What is the group size on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek and who leads it? Kashmir Great Lakes batches have a maximum of 20 trekkers, and a fixed departure needs at least 6. Each batch is led by a trek leader trained in Wilderness First Aid, with a support team. The Trekkaro technical team also fixes ropes on the steepest snow section below Gadsar Pass if conditions need it. ### Is the Kashmir Great Lakes trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, women can join the Kashmir Great Lakes trek alone: women trekkers share tents only with other women, and the trek leader and support staff stay with the group throughout. As with any trip to the region, check the current security situation before you travel, and keep your valuables secure. ### What food is served on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek serves simple, nutritious vegetarian meals at camp, with packed lunches on the long trekking days. - **Lunch box:** bring a reusable, leak-proof one - **Snacks:** nuts, dry fruit, energy bars, dark chocolate and electrolyte sachets, especially for Gadsar Pass day ### Is drinking water safe on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Yes. On the Kashmir Great Lakes trek the water comes from cold glacial streams, and to be safe it is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets at the camps. - **Bottles:** two 1 L bottles, one of them insulated for the cold early starts - **Electrolytes:** add ORS or electrolyte sachets on long days ### Do I need my own trekking gear for the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Yes. On the Kashmir Great Lakes trek you bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, with no deposit and no charge. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek costs ₹3,000 + 5% GST for one backpack of up to 9 kg, carried by a porter for the whole trek. - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack with water, rain jacket and snacks - **Weight:** keep the offloaded bag within 9 kg ### Is there a doctor on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? No, a doctor does not join the Kashmir Great Lakes trek, but your health is tracked from Day 1, when SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded for every trekker. - **Trek leaders:** trained in Wilderness First Aid, with a full first-aid kit - **Your kit:** your regular medicines, blister plasters, pain relief and ORS - **Fitness certificate:** mandatory, signed by a doctor ### What documents do I need for the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? For the Kashmir Great Lakes trek, carry an original government photo ID with a photocopy and a travel insurance policy with emergency evacuation cover, which is mandatory. - **ID:** Aadhaar card, passport, voter ID or driving licence - **International trekkers:** passport, needed for forest entry permits and any medical evacuation - **Medical:** a fitness certificate signed by a doctor (mandatory) - **Forms:** the signed disclaimer form and your Trekkaro booking confirmation ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Mobile network on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek is very limited: only postpaid connections work, and you may get a weak signal at a few points, but it is not reliable. There are no charging points on the trail. - **Power:** carry a power bank (or a portable solar charger) with enough capacity for 7 days - **Cash:** withdraw in Srinagar, as ATMs are very few in the hills and cards do not work in the mountains ### Can I leave extra luggage at the base camp on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Yes. On the Kashmir Great Lakes trek you can leave extra luggage at the base camp in Shitkadi on Day 1, and you collect it at Naranag at the end of the trek on Day 7. The trek is one way, from Shitkadi to Naranag, and your bag will be waiting for you at the finish. Keep it to a minimum and do not leave valuables; Trekkaro is not responsible for any damage to items left behind. ### What happens if the buffer day is used on the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The Kashmir Great Lakes trek keeps Day 8 as a buffer day. If it is used, each trekker pays an extra ₹2,500 per day, which covers meals, accommodation and staff expenses. To be safe, plan your onward travel from Srinagar with this extra day in mind. ### Should I do the Kashmir Great Lakes trek or the Hampta Pass trek? Choose the Kashmir Great Lakes trek for a week-long walk past a chain of alpine lakes, and the Hampta Pass trek for a shorter crossing from green Kullu to bare Lahaul. - **Kashmir Great Lakes:** 7 days, about 67 km, Moderate–Difficult, highest point 4,206 m, July to mid-September - **Hampta Pass:** 5 days, about 26.5 km, Moderate, highest point 4,298 m, June to September - **Gear:** both treks give free microspikes and gaiters; you bring your own shoes, jacket and poles ### How far in advance should I book the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? Booking for a Kashmir Great Lakes batch closes at 5 PM (India time) on the day before the trek starts. The season runs only from July to mid-September, so popular batches fill early; book as soon as your dates are fixed. Booking early also gives you time to find flights or trains to Srinagar and to train for the trek. ### What is the minimum age for the Kashmir Great Lakes trek? The minimum age for the Kashmir Great Lakes trek is 14 years, because of the long days and two passes above 13,000 ft. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 3 Jul 2027 to 9 Jul 2027 - 4 Jul 2027 to 10 Jul 2027 - 10 Jul 2027 to 16 Jul 2027 - 11 Jul 2027 to 17 Jul 2027 - 17 Jul 2027 to 23 Jul 2027 - 18 Jul 2027 to 24 Jul 2027 - 24 Jul 2027 to 30 Jul 2027 - 25 Jul 2027 to 31 Jul 2027 - 31 Jul 2027 to 6 Aug 2027 - 1 Aug 2027 to 7 Aug 2027 - 7 Aug 2027 to 13 Aug 2027 - 8 Aug 2027 to 14 Aug 2027 - … 10 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kashmir-great-lakes-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kedarkantha Trek > Kedarkantha Trek is a 5-day easy–moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,810 m (12,500 ft). It covers about 20 km on foot and starts and ends at Sankri. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹9,000 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (102 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kedarkantha-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,810 m / 12,500 ft - **Trekking distance:** 20 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Sankri - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Winter (Dec-Feb): Day -2°C to 8°C, Night -15°C to -10°C | Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 5°C to 15°C, Night -6°C to -2°C | Summer (May-Jun): Day 10°C to 20°C, Night 2°C to 5°C | Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 5°C to 18°C, Night -8°C to -2°C - **Price:** ₹9,000 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (102 upcoming) ## Overview Kedarkantha is India's most celebrated winter trek, and for good reason. It rewards first-time trekkers with a dramatic summit climb, snow-buried pine forests, a frozen lake campsite, and 360-degree Himalayan views, all without requiring prior mountaineering experience. Kedarkantha (3,810 m / 12,500 ft) rises from the Govind Pashu Vihar National Park in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand, deep in the western Garhwal Himalayas. It is a relatively accessible summit by Himalayan standards, reachable without technical climbing gear or prior mountaineering experience, yet it rewards every trekker with a summit view that rivals peaks three times its height. The trail begins at Sankri village (1,950 m), winds through ancient cedar and pine forests, passes the frozen high-altitude lake of Juda Ka Talab, crosses sweeping snow-blanketed meadows called bugyals, and culminates in a pre-dawn summit push that delivers one of the finest sunrises in the Indian Himalayas. For five days, the Kedarkantha trek is your entire world. ### Why Winter? The Case for December to February Kedarkantha runs in every month except July and August, with the season reopening on 15 September, but winter is when it becomes something extraordinary. Between December and February, heavy snowfall transforms the entire trail into a white wilderness. The pine forests carry several feet of snow on their branches. The meadows above the treeline are buried under deep, untracked powder. Juda Ka Talab freezes solid. And the summit, stripped of summer haze, offers crystalline 360-degree panoramas of Himalayan giants including Swargarohini, Bandarpunch, Black Peak, Kalanag, and the distant Kedarnath range. Winter also thins the crowds significantly. On a December or January batch with Trekkaro, you experience a trail that feels genuinely untouched, a rarity in popular Indian trekking. ### Who Is This Trek For? Kedarkantha is rated Easy-Moderate and is one of the best-suited winter treks in India for first-time trekkers. The daily distances are manageable (3–4 km a day, and about 9 km on summit day), the altitude gain is gradual enough to allow natural acclimatisation, and the summit push, while demanding, does not require any technical skills beyond physical fitness and determination. The trek is equally compelling for seasoned trekkers chasing a winter summit and Himalayan views without the multi-week commitment of a technical expedition. The minimum recommended age is 8 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor’s medical certificate. If you can walk briskly for 4–5 hours and handle cold-weather camping, Kedarkantha is within your reach. ### What Makes Kedarkantha Stand Apart Many Himalayan treks offer stunning views. Fewer offer a genuine summit experience. And almost none combine a true winter summit with trail variety, cultural immersion, and beginner accessibility the way Kedarkantha does. In five days, you move through four distinct landscapes: a winding river-road drive through Garhwal gorges, dense snow-draped forest trails, open alpine meadows with unobstructed Himalayan panoramas, and a pre-dawn summit climb that ends in a sunrise you will describe for years. The trek also passes through Sankri, a living Jaunsari tribal village where traditional wooden architecture, local cuisine, and mountain hospitality offer a grounding cultural counterpoint to the wilderness above. This is not a single-note adventure. It is a complete Himalayan experience compressed into five days. ### Key Highlights of the Kedarkantha Trek - Summit at 12,500 ft with a 360-degree winter panorama of the Garhwal Himalayas - Camping beside the frozen Juda Ka Talab under a star-filled mountain sky - Dense pine forest trails blanketed in deep winter snow - Open alpine meadows (bugyals) with unobstructed views of Swargarohini and Bandarpunch - Cultural immersion in Sankri’s Jaunsari village community - Scenic 200 km drive along the Tons River gorge through the Garhwal Himalayas - Guided by NIM-certified Trekkaro professionals with full safety and eco-trek protocols ### Best Time to Visit Kedarkantha Kedarkantha runs in every month except July and August – the trail closes for the monsoon and reopens on 15 September – and each season offers a dramatically different experience. The month you choose shapes everything: the trail conditions underfoot, the views from the summit, the temperature at camp, and the crowd levels on the mountain. Here is a season-by-season breakdown to help you pick the window that matches what you are looking for. #### December to February - Peak Season (Highly Recommended) This is the window Trekkaro recommends above all others, and the reason is simple: Kedarkantha in winter is a completely different mountain. The entire trail disappears under several feet of snow, turning the pine forest into a white tunnel and the high-altitude meadows into an unbroken snowfield. Juda Ka Talab freezes solid. The summit air is clear of summer haze, delivering the sharpest, most expansive panoramas of the season. Night temperatures at base camp drop to -10°C to -15°C, so proper layering and quality sleeping bags are non-negotiable, but the Trekkaro team handles all cold-weather gear. January and early February see the heaviest snowfall and the most dramatic conditions on the trail. December offers slightly milder temperatures with reliable snow coverage and fewer crowds. If a winter wonderland summit is what you are after, this is your season. - **Temperatures:** Day: -2°C to 8°C | Night at camp: -10°C to -15°C - **Trail conditions:** Deep snow throughout. Microspikes provided on summit day. - **Best for:** Snow trekking, summit views, winter photography, and the full Kedarkantha experience. #### March to April — Spring Season (Good for Beginners) As winter loosens its grip, the Kedarkantha trail transitions into something softer and more colourful. Snowmelt reveals patches of green meadow beneath, and rhododendrons begin to bloom in vivid crimson and pink along the lower forest sections. Residual snow still covers the upper trail and summit, making this an excellent window for trekkers who want some snow experience without the extreme cold of January. Daytime temperatures are comfortable, and the longer daylight hours make for relaxed pacing on the trail. Skies are clear in March, though April can bring occasional afternoon cloud build-up. This is a particularly good season for first-time trekkers who prefer milder camping temperatures while still enjoying a snow-dusted summit. - **Temperatures:** Day: 5°C to 15°C | Night at camp: -2°C to -6°C - **Trail conditions:** Partial snow on upper sections. Clear path on lower forest trail. Rhododendron blooms. - **Best for:** First-time trekkers, wildflower photography, and mild-weather summit attempts. #### May to June — Pre-Monsoon Season (Clear Skies, No Snow) The pre-monsoon window offers the warmest trekking conditions on Kedarkantha, with snow largely absent from all but the very upper trail. The meadows are fully green, carpeted in alpine grasses and wildflowers, and the forest is lush. Daytime temperatures on the trail are pleasant and camping is considerably more comfortable than in winter. The Himalayan panoramas remain exceptional, though the occasional afternoon haze can soften views compared to the crystal clarity of December or January. If you are travelling with children, trekkers with lower cold tolerance, or a group with mixed fitness levels, the May-June window offers the most forgiving conditions. Trails close in July with the onset of the monsoon and reopen on 15 September. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 20°C | Night at camp: 2°C to 5°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow-free. Green meadows and wildflowers. Well-defined trail throughout. - **Best for:** Families, wildflower lovers, and trekkers who prefer warm-weather camping. #### July to August — Monsoon Season (Trek Closed) The monsoon brings heavy rainfall to the Garhwal Himalayas, making the Kedarkantha trail unsafe due to landslide risk, slippery terrain, and poor visibility. Trekkaro does not operate Kedarkantha batches during the monsoon months. If your travel window falls in July or August, we recommend exploring monsoon-safe alternatives in the rain shadow regions of Spiti Valley or Ladakh instead. #### Mid-September to November — Autumn Season (Excellent Visibility) Post-monsoon autumn is arguably the most underrated season on Kedarkantha. The rains wash the atmosphere clean, leaving behind some of the sharpest mountain visibility of the entire year. The meadows are a vivid green, the sky is a deep, unobstructed blue, and the first dustings of early snow appear on the higher Himalayan peaks by October and November, creating a striking contrast against the golden and amber tones of the forest below. Temperatures are moderate and pleasant during the day, dropping to cold but manageable levels at night. Trail conditions are excellent. Crowds are lighter than winter peak season. November in particular sits in a sweet spot: early snowfall on the upper trail can make for a partial snow experience without the full cold exposure of mid-winter. For trekkers who want stellar views, comfortable temperatures, and quiet trails, Mid-September to November is a compelling alternative to the December-February window. - **Temperatures:** Day: 5°C to 18°C | Night at camp: -2°C to -8°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear and well-defined. First snow on peaks from October. Green meadows below. - **Best for:** Landscape photography, clear summit views, and quieter trails with comfortable daytime temperatures. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the full Kedarkantha experience, book a December, January, or February batch. If you want milder temperatures with residual snow, March is ideal. For green meadows, wildflowers, and comfortable camping, go with May or June. For crystal-clear autumn panoramas and a quieter trail, November is our top off-season pick. | Season | Months | Temperature (Night) | Trail Condition | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Winter (Peak) | Dec - Feb | -10°C to -15°C | Deep Snow, Frozen Lakes | | Spring | Mar - Apr | -2°C to -6°C | Residual Snow, Rhododendrons | | Summer | May - Jun | 2°C to 5°C | Lush Green Meadows | | Autumn | Sep - Nov | -2°C to -8°C | Crystal Clear Skies | ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Sankri **Route Details:** **Dehradun → Sankri | Distance: ~200 km | Drive Duration: ~7–8 hours | Altitude: Sankri 1,950 m (6,400 ft)** Your Kedarkantha winter trek begins not on a trail, but on a winding mountain road that feels like a curtain slowly rising on a grand stage. Depart Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM in a shared cab (₹1,000 per person, not included in the trek fee, paid directly to the driver), and within two hours, the city dissolves into dense oak and rhododendron forests. The NH-707 hugs the emerald-green Tons River through the Garhwal Himalayas, a road so scenic that seasoned trekkers photograph it obsessively. Watch for waterfalls crashing down limestone cliffs, remote villages perched impossibly on ridges, and the first distant white crowns of snow-capped peaks appearing above the treeline. As you ascend past Purola and Mori, the temperature drops noticeably and the landscape shifts from green to a quieter, more austere beauty. Snow may dust the roadside even here, hinting at what awaits higher up. Pull-over chai stops at roadside dhabas are a small but essential ritual on this drive. By late afternoon, the road delivers you to Sankri, a compact Himalayan village that serves as the base camp for the Kedarkantha trek and the jumping-off point for several other celebrated Uttarakhand trails. Sankri itself is a place worth pausing to absorb. Local guesthouses and teahouses cluster around a central area where mules carry supplies, children shout greetings from rooftops, and the air smells of pine smoke and altitude. Your Trekkaro guide will brief you on the days ahead, run a gear check, and introduce you to your trek crew. Eat a warm, hearty dinner, hydrate well, and sleep early. The mountains operate on their own schedule, and tomorrow, you follow theirs. What to Expect: - A scenic 7–8 hour drive along the Tons River gorge - First glimpses of snow-capped peaks from the road - Arrival and acclimatization at Sankri base camp (6,400 ft) - Gear check and trek briefing with your Trekkaro guide - Accommodation in Sankri guesthouse ### Day 2: Sankri to Juda Ka Talab **Route Details:** **Altitude: 6,400 ft → 9,100 ft | Trek Distance: ~4 km | Duration: 4–5 hours | Terrain: Dense pine & oak forest** The moment your boots hit the Kedarkantha trail, the world goes quiet in the most absolute way. From Sankri, the path climbs steadily through a cathedral of towering pine trees whose branches bow under the weight of winter snow. Sunlight filters through in slanted golden columns, and the only sounds are the crunch of snow underfoot and the occasional whistle of a Himalayan bird. This 4-kilometre stretch through dense forest is not just a warm-up. It is the trek's opening movement, and it sets the mood for everything that follows. The gradient is consistent and manageable, making it an ideal first trekking day even for beginners. Your guide will point out medicinal plants used by local Jaunsari tribes, animal tracks pressed into the snow, and occasional clearings that reveal early glimpses of the Himalayan peaks beyond. The forest feels primeval and unmarked, the kind of wilderness that recalibrates your sense of scale and silence. Stop frequently to drink water, adjust your pace to your breathing, and photograph the pine groves encrusted with frost. After a lunch break at a scenic ridge clearing, the trees thin and a wide, bowl-shaped meadow appears. At its heart sits Juda Ka Talab, a high-altitude lake that freezes solid in winter. Watching the surface, you may notice the ice has captured tiny air bubbles mid-motion, like a photograph of water itself. Pitch your tents at the campsite beside the lake as the sun drops and the temperature plummets. The sky at this altitude and in this season is almost violently clear. On cloudless nights, the Milky Way spans the full horizon above you. Tonight, it is your ceiling. What to Expect: - Trail through dense pine and oak forest laden with winter snow - Consistent, manageable altitude gain ideal for first-time trekkers - Lunch at a ridge clearing with early Himalayan views - Arrival at Juda Ka Talab (9,100 ft): the iconic frozen lake campsite - Dinner and overnight camping under a star-filled Himalayan sky ### Day 3: Juda Ka Talab to Kedarkantha Base Camp **Route Details:** **Altitude: 9,100 ft → 11,250 ft | Trek Distance: ~3 km | Duration: 2–3 hours | Terrain: Open alpine meadows & snow slopes** Day 3 is where the Kedarkantha trek undergoes its most dramatic visual transformation. As you leave the treeline behind, the dense pine forest gives way to sweeping open meadows draped in unbroken white. There are no more canopies filtering the sky. Instead, the sky is enormous, and all around it, a ring of Himalayan peaks stands in sharp, clean profile. The air is thinner here, the light harsher, and the silence deeper. You are now firmly above the world you came from. The trail winds through a series of snow-covered alpine meadows locally called bugyals, gradual inclines carpeted in deep powder during peak winter. On either side, ridgelines reveal distant panoramas that grow more expansive with every 100 metres of altitude gained. On a clear day, you can identify Swargarohini, Black Peak, Ranglana, and Bandarpunch without any optical aid. This is also the section where first-time trekkers stop mid-step, stare at the view in silence, and understand, perhaps for the first time, why people chase mountains. Base camp sits at 11,250 feet and serves as the launch point for tomorrow's summit push. Your Trekkaro guides will set up insulated tents, prepare a calorie-rich dinner, and walk you through the summit-day protocol: wake time, pace, turnaround policies, and what to expect in the dark hours of the early morning climb. Rest is critical tonight. The summit attempt begins before dawn, and every hour of sleep is fuel for the final ascent. Lay your layers out in order, double-check your water and snacks, and close your eyes to the sound of wind moving across the high Himalayas. What to Expect: - Dramatic transition from forest to open alpine meadows (bugyals) - Panoramic views of Swargarohini, Black Peak, Bandarpunch & Ranglana - Steady altitude gain with manageable terrain on snow slopes - Arrival at Kedarkantha Base Camp (11,250 ft) - Summit-day briefing, early dinner & rest ### Day 4: Summit Day - Base Camp to Kedarkantha Peak & Back to Juda Ka Talab **Route Details:** **Altitude: 11,250 ft → 12,500 ft → 9,100 ft | Summit Distance: ~3 km | Total Day: ~9 km | Start Time: 2:00 AM** At 2:00 AM, your guide calls the tent. The temperature outside is well below freezing. The stars, improbably bright and impossibly close, form a hard canopy overhead. Headlamps switch on, breath fogs immediately, and the summit party begins moving in single file up the dark mountain. This is the moment the entire trek has been building toward. The summit trail is steep and unrelenting in places, cutting through deep snow across switchbacks that demand a rhythmic, deliberate pace. Your guide sets a tempo. You follow it. One step, breathe. One step, breathe. An hour into the climb, you stop to look back. The valley below is inky black, with only faint camp lights visible. Above you, the slope disappears into darkness. The Kedarkantha summit push strips the experience down to its essentials: cold, effort, breath, and will. But this is exactly the kind of simplicity that clears the mind like nothing else. As you approach the final ridge, the eastern horizon begins to shift from black to a deep bruised purple. The Himalayas are waking up. You keep moving. At the summit, 12,500 feet above sea level, the sun cracks the horizon in a sweep of crimson and gold. The peaks of Swargarohini, Black Peak, Bandarpunch, and Kalanag catch the first light and ignite like embers one by one. Below, the clouds lie flat in the valleys like a white sea, and you are above all of it. This is the summit view of Kedarkantha in winter, one of the finest sunrise panoramas in India, and you have earned every pixel of it. Celebrate, photograph, breathe it in. After a brief rest and hot tea from your guide's thermos, the descent begins. Moving downhill on snow-covered slopes is its own kind of joy: faster, looser, and punctuated with involuntary laughter. Back at base camp by mid-morning, you continue descending through the meadows and back into the forest to reach Juda Ka Talab by late morning. Tonight, camp feels different. Quieter. Fuller. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn summit start at 2:00 AM from base camp - Steep snow climb with headlamps through the dark - Sunrise from the Kedarkantha summit (12,500 ft / 3,810 m) - 360-degree panoramic views of the Garhwal & Himachal Himalayan ranges - High-energy descent back through base camp to Juda Ka Talab - Overnight camping at Juda Ka Talab with a celebratory dinner ### Day 5: Juda Ka Talab to Sankri & Drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Altitude: 9,100 ft → 6,400 ft | Trek to Sankri: ~4 km | Drive: Sankri → Dehradun (~7–8 hours)** The last morning at Juda Ka Talab arrives quietly. You wake to sunlight already moving across the frozen lake, turning the ice from grey to pale gold. There is no summit to chase today, no agenda beyond descent. Trekkers who experienced the same trail just three days ago as fresh and novel now move through it with an easy familiarity, recognising specific trees, trail bends, and the particular way a certain ridge lights up at this hour. The mountain has become familiar, and that, too, is a form of belonging. The 4-kilometre descent through the pine forest back to Sankri passes quickly. Legs are stronger, lungs are adapted, and conversation flows freely. Your Trekkaro guide will walk the final stretch beside you, reviewing highlights, answering questions about the landscape, and ensuring no one rushes the last miles in a hurry to reach the road. At Sankri, trekkers share summit photographs, collect their completion certificates, and the trip documentation, memories, and laughter that define the end of every great expedition begin to take shape. The drive back to Dehradun traces the same Tons River road you traveled four days ago. But it looks different now. Not because the landscape has changed, but because you have. The river is the same. The cliffs are the same. The pine forests above the road are the same. What is different is the trekker looking out the window. Kedarkantha has a well-documented effect on those who climb it: they return quieter in the best possible sense, with better posture, a deeper appetite for silence, and a persistent urge to look up at the sky. You will feel it on this drive. You will feel it for weeks after. What to Expect: - Final 4 km descent through pine forest back to Sankri - Trek concludes at Sankri starting point of trek. Completion certificates issued. - 7–8 hour scenic drive back to Dehradun along the Tons River - Arrival in Dehradun by evening ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse in Sankri, on a triple-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping at the designated campsites, on a triple-sharing basis #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 breakfast: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - Govind Pashu Vihar National Park entry permits and forest checkpost fees, arranged by Trekkaro #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Double-wall, rain-rated tents and -20°C sleeping bags at every campsite - Trekking mattresses or sleeping pads at every campsite - SpO2, pulse and blood-pressure checks twice a day at every campsite - Portable oxygen cylinder and emergency stretcher on every batch - HF radio communication across the trek team #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide for all 5 days - Mountain kitchen staff, camp helpers, and mules or porters for the group equipment - Trek completion certificate when you reach Kedarkantha Summit and return to Sankri ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Sankri and back. We help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way (₹2,000 return), paid directly to the driver. - Travel to and from Dehradun (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Sankri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,500 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Sankri #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack, sunglasses and other personal gear (shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and helicopter evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Dehradun before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near the station. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** 200 km, 7–8 hrs by road. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM for Sankri Village. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** On the last day you walk down from Juda Ka Talab to Sankri and drive back; the shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. Take the overnight train to arrive on the morning of departure, or come a day early. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, the easiest way to make the 06:30 AM cab. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings and book early, especially for weekend and holiday batches. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** 200 km, 7–8 hrs by road. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM for Sankri Village. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** On the last day you walk down from Juda Ka Talab to Sankri and drive back; the shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-night train or travel the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo or ordinary buses from inside the ISBT, and from Dehradun ISBT take an auto or cab to the railway station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** 200 km, 7–8 hrs by road. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM for Sankri Village. It is not included in the trek fee and costs ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. **Return:** On the last day you walk down from Juda Ka Talab to Sankri and drive back; the shared cab (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-night bus or travel the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Purola has the last reliable ATM before Sankri - Withdraw enough cash in Dehradun to be safe - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Sankri is the last place with mobile signal, and only Jio works consistently - There is no mobile signal on the trail after Sankri - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kedarkantha trek, and where does it start? The Kedarkantha trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand. It starts from Sankri village, about 200 km (7–8 hours) by road from Dehradun along the Tons River gorge. From Sankri the trail climbs through pine and oak forest to Juda Ka Talab, then over open alpine meadows to the base camp and the 3,810 m summit. ### How many days does the Kedarkantha trek take from start to finish? The Kedarkantha trek takes 5 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 4 trekking days covering about 20 km. - **Day 1:** drive Dehradun to Sankri (200 km, 7–8 hours) - **Days 2–3:** Sankri to Juda Ka Talab (4 km), then on to the base camp (3 km) - **Day 4:** summit day, about 9 km in 8–9 hours - **Day 5:** 4 km down to Sankri and the drive back to Dehradun ### What is the altitude of the Kedarkantha trek? The highest point of the Kedarkantha trek is the summit at 3,810 m (12,500 ft). The trek starts at Sankri (1,950 m / 6,400 ft), so you gain about 1,860 m over three days. - **Juda Ka Talab camp:** 2,773 m / 9,100 ft - **Kedarkantha Base Camp:** 3,429 m / 11,250 ft ### What is the difficulty level of the Kedarkantha trek? The Kedarkantha trek is graded Easy–Moderate. Without snow it is a gentle hike, while winter snow and the pre-dawn summit climb add some challenge. - **Days 2–3:** short days of 3–4 km with steady, manageable height gain - **Summit day:** a 2:00 AM start and a steep snow climb by headlamp - **Total summit day:** about 9 km and 8–9 hours, ending back at Juda Ka Talab ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Kedarkantha trek? Yes, the Kedarkantha trek suits first-time trekkers with basic fitness. The daily distances are short and the altitude gain is steady and manageable. Summit day is the hardest part, with a 2:00 AM start and a steep climb on snow in winter. ### What fitness level do I need for the Kedarkantha trek? Basic fitness is enough for the Kedarkantha trek, such as walking 4–5 km a day with a small backpack, but good stamina and leg strength make the steep and snowy sections easier. - **Daily walking:** 3–4 km in 2–5 hours on Days 2, 3 and 5 - **Summit day:** about 9 km over 8–9 hours, starting at 2:00 AM - **Health:** consult your doctor before the trek, including about Diamox ### What is the best time for the Kedarkantha trek? The Kedarkantha trek is open almost all year except July and August. Come from December to February for deep snow (March and April still have snow on the upper trail), or in May–June and from 15 September to November for clear trails and green landscapes. - **December to February:** deep snow, with Juda Ka Talab frozen and snow on the summit climb - **March to April:** snow on the upper trail and the summit - **May to June:** pleasant weather and green meadows - **15 September to November:** clear trails after the monsoon - **July and August:** no departures during the monsoon ### Is there snow on the Kedarkantha trek, and in which months? Yes, the Kedarkantha trek has deep snow from December to February, from the pine and oak forest above Sankri up to the summit, and snow on the upper trail in March and April. - **Forest:** the trail to Juda Ka Talab is laden with winter snow - **Juda Ka Talab:** the lake at camp freezes - **Summit climb:** a steep snow climb in the dark - **Gear:** free microspikes and gaiters for snow and ice ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Kedarkantha trek? On the Kedarkantha trek, winter (December–February) days are about -2°C to 8°C and nights at camp drop to -15°C to -10°C. In March–April days are 5°C to 15°C with nights of -6°C to -2°C, in May–June 10°C to 20°C with nights of 2°C to 5°C, and from mid-September to November 5°C to 18°C with nights of -8°C to -2°C. - **Layers:** 5 warm layers – thermal top and bottom, 2 fleece or woollen layers and a padded jacket - **Summit morning:** a balaclava and waterproof gloves for the pre-dawn wind chill - **Water:** one insulated bottle so your water does not freeze ### Which mountains can you see on the Kedarkantha trek? From the Kedarkantha summit you get 360° views of the Garhwal and Himachal Himalayan ranges, at sunrise on summit day. - **From the meadows:** Swargarohini, Black Peak, Bandarpunch and Ranglana - **Day 1:** first glimpses of snow peaks from the road - **Juda Ka Talab:** a lake campsite, frozen in winter, under a star-filled sky ### What is the terrain like on the Kedarkantha trek? The Kedarkantha trek moves from dense pine and oak forest to open alpine meadows (bugyals) and snow slopes on the summit climb. - **Day 2:** dense pine and oak forest, snow-laden in winter - **Day 3:** open alpine meadows and snow slopes - **Day 4:** a steep snow climb to the summit, then a long descent to Juda Ka Talab - **Day 5:** a 4 km descent through pine forest to Sankri ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Kedarkantha trek? The Kedarkantha trek reaches 3,810 m, so some risk of altitude sickness exists, but the height gain is steady and you sleep no higher than the base camp at 3,429 m. - **Day 1:** arrival and acclimatisation at Sankri (1,950 m) - **After the summit:** you descend the same day to Juda Ka Talab (2,773 m) - **Before you go:** consult your doctor, including about Diamox, and carry your own medicines ### What is the minimum age for the Kedarkantha trek? The minimum age for the Kedarkantha trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Kedarkantha trek base camp from Dehradun? The Kedarkantha trek starts from Sankri, 200 km (7–8 hours) by road from Dehradun. A shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1, at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city; fly in the day before - **By train:** Dehradun (DDN) is the pickup point; the overnight Nanda Devi Express arrives in time for the cab - **By bus:** overnight government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT take about 6–7 hours ### Is transport from Dehradun included in the Kedarkantha trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Kedarkantha trek fee. Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs between Dehradun and Sankri at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. - **Cost:** ₹1,000 per person each way, ₹2,000 return - **Day 1:** leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM - **Day 5:** expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM ### Where do we stay on the Kedarkantha trek? On the Kedarkantha trek you stay in a guesthouse at Sankri on Day 1 and in tents at Juda Ka Talab and the base camp for the rest of the trek. - **Tents:** spacious four-person tents shared by only three trekkers - **Women:** female trekkers share tents only with other women - **Couples and families:** separate tents arranged as needed ### What is the group size on the Kedarkantha trek and who leads it? Kedarkantha trek fixed departures run with 6 to 20 trekkers, never more than 20, led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. - **Support team:** assistant guides, local staff, and porters or mules for logistics - **First aid:** trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid - **Private treks:** available for any group size ### Is the Kedarkantha trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the safety of female trekkers is a top priority on the Kedarkantha trek, and the guides and support staff are carefully selected and trustworthy. - **Tents:** women share tents only with other female trekkers, never with men - **Belongings:** keep your personal valuables secure ### What food is served on the Kedarkantha trek? The Kedarkantha trek serves simple, nutritious vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at the campsite. - **On the trail:** packed lunch, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Summit night:** a celebratory dinner at Juda Ka Talab - **Snacks:** carry trail mix, energy bars and ORS for the walk ### Is drinking water safe on the Kedarkantha trek? On the Kedarkantha trek, water at camp is boiled or treated with chlorine tablets for safety. - **Refills:** check with your trek leader for safe refill points on the trail - **Bottles:** two 1 L bottles, one of them insulated so it does not freeze ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Kedarkantha trek? Yes, the Kedarkantha trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes, a jacket or poles. - **Included:** trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and a trekking pole - **Also free:** microspikes and gaiters for snow and ice - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Handover:** on the first day, at the gear check in Sankri ### Is backpack offloading available on the Kedarkantha trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Kedarkantha trek costs ₹1,500 + 5% GST, with a porter or mule carrying your backpack. - **Book ahead:** tell Trekkaro at least 15 days in advance - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and a spare layer ### Is there a doctor on the Kedarkantha trek? No doctor joins the Kedarkantha trek, but the trek leaders are trained in Wilderness First Aid and carry a complete first-aid kit. - **Your medicines:** carry prescriptions, remedies for common ailments and any altitude medicine your doctor advises - **Before you go:** check your health, or seek expert advice if unsure - **Insurance:** travel insurance with emergency evacuation cover is mandatory ### What documents do I need for the Kedarkantha trek? For the Kedarkantha trek you need a government photo ID, a medical fitness certificate signed by a doctor, travel insurance and a signed disclaimer form. - **Photo ID:** original and a photocopy (Aadhaar card, passport, voter ID or driving licence) - **International trekkers:** passport, needed for forest entry permits and any medical evacuation - **Travel insurance:** mandatory, with emergency evacuation cover - **Also carry:** your Trekkaro booking confirmation and the disclaimer form with emergency contact details ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kedarkantha trek? Mobile signal on the Kedarkantha trek is limited, there is no charging on the trail and cards are not accepted in the mountains, so withdraw cash in Dehradun. - **Cash:** carry small notes, including the cab fare (₹1,000 per person each way); ATMs are few in the hills - **Power:** carry a power bank and keep it close to your body in the cold - **Maps:** download an offline map before you leave ### What is summit day like on the Kedarkantha trek? Summit day on the Kedarkantha trek starts at 2:00 AM from the base camp, with a steep snow climb by headlamp to reach the 3,810 m summit for sunrise. - **Climb:** about 3 km from the base camp to the summit - **Total day:** about 9 km and 8–9 hours - **View:** a 360° panorama of the Garhwal and Himachal ranges - **Descent:** back through the base camp to Juda Ka Talab for the night ### What should I pack for the Kedarkantha trek? For the Kedarkantha trek, pack for snow, sub-zero nights and a pre-dawn summit start; Trekkaro also emails a full checklist after booking. - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, padded jacket, poles, microspikes and gaiters are provided - **Clothes:** 2 sets of thermals, 2 fleece layers, a waterproof shell, warm trousers and 3–4 pairs of socks - **Accessories:** woollen cap, balaclava, two pairs of gloves, UV sunglasses (category 3 or 4) and SPF 50+ sunscreen - **Essentials:** headlamp, power bank, personal medicines and cash in small notes ### How do I book the Kedarkantha trek with Trekkaro online? To book the Kedarkantha trek, select your date, fill in the booking form and pay online; your booking is confirmed instantly. - **Confirmation:** booking details, the itinerary and the gear checklist are emailed to you - **Travel:** book your travel as soon as the booking shows as Paid in My Bookings ### Can the Kedarkantha trek itinerary be changed, and does the end date change? Minor changes to the Kedarkantha trek itinerary are possible, but the completion date must stay as scheduled. If something unexpected happens on the trail, your trek leader suggests a suitable alternative plan. ### Can I book a private Kedarkantha trek for my own group? Yes, Trekkaro offers private, customised Kedarkantha treks for a group of any size, at your own pace. The cost depends on the number of trekkers, the duration and the type of trek. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 28 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 4 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 11 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 18 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 25 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 2 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - … 90 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kedarkantha-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kedartal Trek > Kedartal Trek is a 6-day moderate–difficult trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,912 m (16,116 ft). It covers about 38 km on foot and starts and ends at Gangotri. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹15,750 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (21 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kedartal-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate–Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,912 m / 16,116 ft - **Trekking distance:** 38 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Gangotri - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** The Kedartal Trek offers varying temperatures across seasons. In summer (May–June), days range from 12°C to 17°C with nights dropping to -2°C to 7°C, while autumn (Sept–Oct) brings cooler days (3°C to 9°C) and freezing nights (-4°C to -1°C). - **Price:** ₹15,750 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (21 upcoming) ## Overview Above Gangotri, the Kedar Ganga thunders down a steep gorge. Follow it upstream for three days, through birch forest, over the tree line and across fields of loose boulder, and you reach the place where it begins: a still glacial lake at 4,912 m, held in a ring of rock and snow beneath Thalay Sagar. In our view, few walks in the Garhwal Himalayas lead so directly from a temple town to the feet of mountains this big. And in our experience, the moment that lake comes into view repays every hard step it took to get there. The Kedartal trek takes you to Kedartal, also known as Shiva’s Lake, a turquoise glacial lake at 4,912 m (16,116 ft). Three snow-clad peaks stand around it: Thalay Sagar (6,904 m), Bhrigupanth (6,772 m) and Meru (6,672 m). Fed by the melting snow of these mountains, Kedartal is the origin of the sacred Kedar Ganga River. The trail to it climbs beside that river through pine, deodar and Bhojpatra forest to the camp at Bhoj Kharak, crosses the tree line into the alpine meadows of Kedar Kharak, where Bhrigupanth makes its first grand appearance, and then rises over scree and boulders to the lake itself. At either end lies Gangotri, one of the Char Dham shrines, with its temple, its evening Ganga Aarti and the natural Shivling in the river. Over six days, Trekkaro’s itinerary takes you from that sacred town to the foot of Thalay Sagar and back again. The Kedartal trek lies in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand. It is a 6-day, Moderate to Difficult trek of about 38 km, out and back from Gangotri (3,065 m), the base and a revered pilgrimage town. There is no pass to cross; the summit of this trek is the lake. The route climbs from 3,065 m to 4,912 m in three days of walking, with camps at Bhoj Kharak (3,780 m) and Kedar Kharak (4,267 m), an ascent spread out so the body can adjust before the lake. We consider Kedartal one of the most striking glacial lakes in the Garhwal Himalayas. In our experience, it is also one of the most rewarding ways to get close to 5,000 m in under a week, provided you come prepared for what it asks in return. ### Shiva’s Lake at 4,912 m – What Makes the Kedartal Trek Unmissable What sets Kedartal apart is how close it brings you to very big mountains in very few days. Bhrigupanth (6,772 m) appears first, from the open meadows above the tree line on the way to Kedar Kharak. On the final climb, Thalay Sagar (6,904 m) and Meru (6,672 m) join it, and the three peaks close in until they stand directly around you. The lake at their feet is fed by their snow, and from it flows the Kedar Ganga, the same river you have followed all the way from Gangotri. On a clear day, the water is turquoise and perfectly still, and every one of those peaks appears in it a second time. You leave Kedar Kharak before sunrise, because this is the most challenging day of the trek and the daylight matters. The meadow falls behind and the trail turns to rocky path, then scree, then loose boulders that shift under your boots and demand balance and patience with every step. Water is scarce on this section, so you carry what you need. The air thins. The mountains grow. Thalay Sagar fills more of the sky with each hour, and Bhrigupanth and Meru crowd in from the sides. After four to five hours of climbing, the ground levels out, and Kedartal is in front of you. You find a rock near the shore, take off your pack and eat your lunch beside the water. For a while, the only thing to do is look at the peaks, and then look at them again in the lake. The lake also carries a meaning beyond the view. Kedartal is called Shiva’s Lake, and the trek begins and ends at Gangotri, where, according to legend, the River Ganga descended to Earth, sanctified by Lord Shiva. On the way back down, an early start brings you into Gangotri in time for the evening Ganga Aarti at the Gangotri temple. Nearby is Bhagirath Shila, where Raja Bhagirath is believed to have meditated for the salvation of his ancestors, and the natural Shivling submerged in the river, where mythology says the Goddess Ganga descended into Shiva’s locks. We find that this frame changes the trek. The lake at the top and the shrine at the bottom are joined by the same river, and walking from one to the other gives the hard climb a sense of pilgrimage as much as of adventure. ### The Kedar Ganga Valley Itself The trail leaves the temple town and climbs at once beside the roaring Kedar Ganga, on narrow paths that hug steep mountain slopes, with rocky sections and sharp ridges that keep you alert. Pine and deodar give way to the Bhojpatra, the birch whose bark is said to have been the ancient writing medium of sages, and through gaps in the trees the Bhagirathi peaks appear and disappear. Waterfalls run beside the path. As you gain height the forest thins and the air turns crisp, and by afternoon you reach Bhoj Kharak, a camp perched above the gorge among birch trees, looking out over the valley. The next morning opens with a steep hour through the Bhoj forest, and then the trees end. Above the tree line the valley widens into lush alpine meadows with sweeping views, and this upper ground is home to high-altitude wildlife: the trail gives chances to spot blue sheep, goral, the Himalayan black bear and a variety of mountain birds. Kedar Kharak sits in a vast meadow beside a gushing, crystal-clear mountain stream. Beyond the camp, the green runs out, and the last stretch to the lake is a bare world of scree, boulders and snow-clad peaks. Forest, meadow and rock, one after another, in three days of walking: it is a compact lesson in how a Himalayan valley changes with height. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Kedartal trek is graded Moderate to Difficult, and it is not a first trek. It suits trekkers in good physical condition who have some prior experience of high-altitude trekking and are steady on rocky ground. Trekking days are long, 5 to 8 hours, with steep ascents and descents throughout. The first day on foot climbs about 715 m over 8 km in 5 to 6 hours on narrow, continuous trail; the next gains about 487 m at altitude in 6 to 7 hours. The hard day is the lake day: 7 to 8 hours and about 8 km, climbing roughly 645 m to 4,912 m over scree and loose boulders with scarce water, then descending the same height back to Kedar Kharak. The walk out to Gangotri is about 15 km and 7 to 8 hours, almost all downhill, which is easier on the lungs but hard on the knees. We recommend cardio training and hill walking for at least 6 to 8 weeks before departure. There is no upper age limit: trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and bring a doctor’s medical certificate, and anyone with a health condition should consult a doctor before booking. Season: May to June, and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Kedartal Trek - **Kedartal (Shiva’s Lake) at 4,912 m / 16,116 ft** – a turquoise glacial lake and the origin of the Kedar Ganga - **Thalay Sagar, Bhrigupanth and Meru up close** – peaks of 6,904 m, 6,772 m and 6,672 m standing directly around the final climb - **Peaks reflected in the lake** – on a clear day the still water holds the snow-clad mountains that ring it - **The first view of Bhrigupanth** – a grandstand view from the meadows above the tree line on the way to Kedar Kharak - **Bhojpatra forest along the Kedar Ganga** – birch trees whose bark is said to have been the ancient writing medium of sages - **Kedar Kharak meadow camp at 4,267 m** – a vast meadow beside a gushing, crystal-clear mountain stream - **High-altitude wildlife** – chances to spot blue sheep, goral, the Himalayan black bear and mountain birds - **Gangotri at both ends** – a Char Dham shrine, with the evening Ganga Aarti, Bhagirath Shila and the natural Shivling in the river ### Best Time to Do the Kedartal Trek The Kedartal trek runs in two windows: May to June, and September to October. Summer brings warmer days and snow on the trail, especially early in the season; autumn brings settled, pleasant weather, colder air and the clearest views of the peaks around Kedartal. #### May to June – Summer Season (Snow on the Trail) The summer window opens with the trail still carrying snow, especially in May, and the climb through the upper valley takes on a wintry edge. Snow on the path makes the going slower and asks for more care, which adds to the challenge of an already demanding route, but it also gives the high ground a cleaner, whiter look beneath Thalay Sagar and Bhrigupanth. Days are the warmer of the two seasons, while nights at the high camps still drop to around freezing. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 17°C | Night: -2°C to 7°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow-laden trails, especially in May; snow can slow progress on the upper sections. - **Best for:** Snow on the high trail, warmer trekking days and a wintry approach to the lake. #### September to October – Autumn Season (Clearest Views) Autumn is when the mountains around Kedartal show themselves most clearly. The weather turns pleasant and settled, the air sharpens, and the views of Thalay Sagar, Meru and Bhrigupanth come into hard focus from the meadows and the final climb. The trade-off is cold: days are cooler, and nights at Bhoj Kharak and Kedar Kharak are freezing, so this season suits trekkers who are comfortable with a real high-altitude chill. - **Temperatures:** Day: 3°C to 9°C | Night: -4°C to -1°C - **Trail conditions:** Pleasant weather, clearer views of the peaks, freezing nights at camp. - **Best for:** The clearest views of Thalay Sagar, Meru and Bhrigupanth, and photography at the lake. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the clearest views of the peaks around the lake, book a September or October batch; it is our first choice for photographers and for anyone who wants Thalay Sagar at its sharpest, as long as you are ready for freezing nights. For warmer days on the trail and the added challenge of snow on the trail, choose May or June. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Drive from Dehradun to Gangotri **Route Details:** **Pickup: Dehradun Railway Station, 6:30 AM | Drive: Dehradun → Gangotri (~241 km, 10–11 hrs) | Altitude: 655 m → 3,065 m (10,050 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a long road day, and it sets you up for everything that follows. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM, so you reach Gangotri by evening with time to spare for the temple and a slow walk around town. The road climbs through Mussoorie and then works up the valley via Uttarkashi, Gorsali, Bhatwari, Harshil and Dharali. For long stretches the Bhagirathi River runs beside you, and the slopes fill with pine and deodar forest as you gain height. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Two practical points matter today. Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM before Gangotri, so withdraw the cash you need there. Gangotri is the last place with a stable mobile signal, and only BSNL, Jio and Airtel work consistently, so make your important calls before the trail starts tomorrow. Gangotri sits at 3,065 m (10,050 ft) and is one of the four shrines of the Chota Char Dham. Legend holds that this is where the Ganga descended to Earth, sanctified by Lord Shiva. After you check in to your guesthouse, there is time to visit the Gangotri temple, explore the small market, meet the sadhus or take a quiet walk in the forest around town. After dinner, the team meets for introductions and the trek briefing. Sleep early; tonight your body begins adjusting to the altitude. What to Expect: - Scenic drive via Mussoorie, Uttarkashi, Bhatwari, Harshil and Dharali (~241 km, 10–11 hrs) - Early start from Dehradun, around 6:30 AM, to reach Gangotri by evening - Last ATM at Bhatwari; last stable mobile network (BSNL, Jio, Airtel) at Gangotri - Evening visit to the Gangotri temple, one of the Char Dham shrines - Team introduction and trek briefing after dinner - Overnight: Gangotri guesthouse / homestay (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) ### Day 2: Gangotri to Bhoj Kharak **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,065 m → 3,780 m (12,402 ft) | Distance: 8 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: steep riverside trail, pine and deodar forest, then bhojpatra (birch) forest | Stay: Tents at Bhoj Kharak** Day 2 is the first walking day, and it does not ease you in. The trail leaves Gangotri and turns up the valley of the Kedar Ganga, the river that flows down from Kedartal itself. Within minutes the temple town is behind you and the roar of the river takes over. The path climbs steadily through pine and deodar forest, gaining about 715 m over 8 km. That is a lot of height for a first day, so expect to feel it in your lungs before you feel it in your legs. The gradient is moderate but continuous. The trail is narrow in places, cut into steep mountain slopes, with rocky stretches and a few sharp ridges where you need to watch every step. Walk these sections slowly, keep to the inside of the path and let faster walkers pass at the wider points. In our experience, the trekkers who do best today are the ones who start slower than they want to. There are waterfalls along the route; use them as natural rest stops, and carry enough water from Gangotri so you never have to ration it. Higher up, the conifers give way to bhojpatra, the Himalayan birch. Its papery bark is said to have been the writing material of ancient sages, and the forest has a quieter, paler feel than the pines below. Through gaps in the trees the Bhagirathi peaks begin to appear. As you climb on, the forest thins, the ground turns more rugged and the air gets sharper and cooler. By afternoon you reach Bhoj Kharak at 3,780 m (12,402 ft). The campsite is perched above the gorge, ringed by birch trees and looking down the valley you have just climbed. Tents go up, evening snacks and hot drinks follow, and the rest of the day is yours to rest. Keep drinking water through the evening; this is a big first jump in altitude, and your body needs the night to catch up. What to Expect: - First trekking day: 8 km, 5–6 hrs, ~715 m altitude gain from Gangotri - Trail along the Kedar Ganga through pine, deodar and bhojpatra (birch) forest - Narrow, rocky sections on steep slopes – slow down and watch your footing - Waterfalls on the way make good rest stops; carry enough water from Gangotri - First glimpses of the Bhagirathi peaks as the forest thins - Overnight: Bhoj Kharak camp above the gorge (3,780 m / 12,402 ft) ### Day 3: Bhoj Kharak to Kedar Kharak **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,780 m → 4,267 m (14,000 ft) | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: steep birch forest, then open alpine meadow above the tree line | Stay: Tents at Kedar Kharak** Day 3 starts hard and then settles. The first hour out of Bhoj Kharak is a steep climb through dense birch forest, and it comes before your legs have properly warmed up. Take it in short steps, breathe steadily and do not try to match anyone else’s pace. Once that first hour is behind you, the gradient eases and the day turns into a steady, moderate ascent. Overall it is gentler than yesterday’s climb, but the altitude makes it strenuous all the same. The distance is short at 7 km, and that is exactly why it can catch you out. You gain about 487 m and the walk takes 6–7 hours, because at this height every uphill stretch costs more than it looks. Keep a slow, even rhythm, sip water regularly and carry enough for the full day. Stopping for a few breaths works better than stopping rarely for long breaks. The big change today is the tree line. Somewhere above Bhoj Kharak the birches thin out and you step onto open alpine meadow. The valley widens, the views sweep out on all sides, and Bhrigupanth (6,772 m) comes into full view for the first time. This open ground is also good wildlife country. The area is home to blue sheep, goral and the Himalayan black bear, along with a variety of mountain birds, so keep your camera within reach and your voice low. Kedar Kharak, at 4,267 m (14,000 ft), is a wide meadow beside a fast, crystal-clear mountain stream. The sound of the water carries across the camp, and the open ground gives you room to walk around gently after you arrive, which helps your body adjust. Nights on this trek can drop below freezing, so put your warm layers on before the sun goes. Tomorrow is the climb to Kedartal, and the best preparation is a full dinner, plenty of fluids and an early night. What to Expect: - Steep first hour through dense birch forest, then a steadier, moderate climb - 7 km, 6–7 hrs, ~487 m gain – short distance, but the altitude makes it strenuous - Cross the tree line into open alpine meadows with wide valley views - First full view of Bhrigupanth Peak (6,772 m) - Chance to spot blue sheep, goral and mountain birds - Overnight: Kedar Kharak camp beside a mountain stream (4,267 m / 14,000 ft) ### Day 4: Kedar Kharak to Kedartal and back to Kedar Kharak **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,267 m → 4,912 m (16,116 ft) → 4,267 m | Distance: 8 km (up and back) | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: steep rocky trail, scree and loose boulders | Stay: Tents at Kedar Kharak** Day 4 is the hardest and the most rewarding day of the Kedartal Trek. You climb about 645 m to the lake and come back down the same way to Kedar Kharak. We recommend starting before sunrise so you can use every hour of daylight. The trail is steep and strenuous from early on, over rocky paths, scree and loose boulders. It asks for stamina, balance and patience far more than speed. The loose ground is the part to respect. Test each step on scree before you put your full weight on it, use your hands where the boulders get big, and use trekking poles on both the climb and the descent. Natural water sources are scarce on this section, so fill every bottle at camp before you leave. The climb to the lake takes 4–5 hours, and it pays to keep something in reserve for the walk back. With every hour the setting grows more dramatic. The peaks close in around you: Thalay Sagar (6,904 m), Bhrigupanth (6,772 m) and Meru (6,672 m), with other high summits filling the skyline. Then the ground levels and Kedartal appears, a glacial lake at 4,912 m (16,116 ft), also known as Shiva’s Lake. It is fed by snowmelt from the peaks around it and is the source of the Kedar Ganga, the river you followed up from Gangotri. On a still day its turquoise water holds a clear reflection of the snow peaks above. Take your time at the shore. Sit, take photographs, or simply stay quiet for a while; you have earned it. Lunch is at the lake, and then you begin the descent to Kedar Kharak, which takes about 3 hours. Going down on scree is where tired legs slip, so shorten your stride and keep your poles planted. Back at camp, the stream and the open meadow feel very welcome after a long day at altitude. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn start for the toughest day of the trek (7–8 hrs) - Steep ~645 m climb over rocky paths, scree and loose boulders; trekking poles strongly recommended - Close views of Thalay Sagar (6,904 m), Bhrigupanth (6,772 m) and Meru (6,672 m) - Kedartal (Shiva’s Lake), source of the Kedar Ganga and the highest point of the trek - Very few water sources – fill all bottles at Kedar Kharak; lunch at the lake - Overnight: Kedar Kharak camp (4,267 m / 14,000 ft) ### Day 5: Kedar Kharak to Gangotri **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,267 m → 3,065 m (10,050 ft) | Distance: 15 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: long descent via Bhoj Kharak, birch forest and the Kedar Ganga trail | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay in Gangotri** Day 5 is the last day on the trail and the longest in distance. You retrace the route down through Bhoj Kharak and along the Kedar Ganga, all the way from 4,267 m to Gangotri. The trail is mostly downhill. That makes it easier on the lungs but much harder on the knees, so trekking poles are highly recommended, along with knee support if you use one. Descending well is a skill. Shorten your stride, keep your knees soft and avoid running the steep sections, however tempting it is with Gangotri getting closer. The narrow, rocky stretches you climbed on Day 2 need the same care on the way down. There are a few natural water sources along the route where you can refill your bottles, so you do not need to carry a heavy load of water today. Short, regular breaks help too; a few minutes off your feet every hour gives your knees and thighs a chance to recover before the next long downhill. The walk back through the birch forest and past the waterfalls of the Kedar Ganga looks quite different in this direction, with the valley opening below you instead of above. We recommend an early start so you reach Gangotri in time for the evening Ganga Aarti at the Gangotri temple. The original temple was built by a Nepalese general, and today it draws thousands of pilgrims every year. Close to the temple is Bhagirath Shila, the rock where Raja Bhagirath is believed to have meditated for the salvation of his ancestors. Nearby, the natural Shivling lies submerged in the river, where mythology says the Ganga descended into Shiva’s locks. Spend the evening walking through town past its dharamshalas and ashrams, or sit by the Bhagirathi and let the trek settle in. Tonight you sleep under a roof again. What to Expect: - Longest day by distance: 15 km, 7–8 hrs, mostly downhill - Retrace the route via Bhoj Kharak, birch forest and waterfalls along the Kedar Ganga - Hard on the knees – trekking poles and knee support recommended - A few natural water sources on the way for refills - Evening Ganga Aarti at the Gangotri temple; Bhagirath Shila and the submerged Shivling nearby - Overnight: Gangotri guesthouse / homestay (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) ### Day 6: Drive from Gangotri to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Gangotri → Dehradun (~241 km, 10–11 hrs) | Altitude: 3,065 m → 655 m (2,150 ft) | End: Dehradun by evening** The last day is a long drive back to the plains. We recommend leaving Gangotri around 6:30 AM so you reach Dehradun by evening without delays. The road follows the Bhagirathi River downstream, and the first stretch takes you past Dharali and Harshil, known for their apple orchards and calm, open valley floors. Further down you pass through villages, forests and valleys to Uttarkashi, a hub for mountaineering and river rafting. From there the road climbs over to Mussoorie before it drops into the Doon Valley. Watch the Garhwal Himalaya fall away behind you; it is a good moment to look back on how far you climbed in four days on foot. Meals on the road are not included, so plan for food stops along the way. The shared cab reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:00 PM. If you are travelling onward the same night, leave yourself a comfortable margin, as the drive alone takes 10–11 hours. What to Expect: - Early start from Gangotri, around 6:30 AM - Drive along the Bhagirathi past the apple orchards of Dharali and Harshil - Through Uttarkashi and Mussoorie, then down into the Doon Valley - ~241 km, 10–11 hrs on mountain roads; meals in transit are on your own - Drop at Dehradun Railway Station (655 m / 2,150 ft) by about 07:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: guesthouse or homestay in Gangotri, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Bhoj Kharak and Kedar Kharak #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner - Simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks served regularly during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents and tables at the campsites - All technical equipment needed on the trek, including ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by certified local mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Gangotri and back. Trekkaro helps the group book a shared cab, approximately ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Gangotri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹3,600 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Gangotri #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Anything not listed under inclusions is not part of the package; ask in advance if you have any questions ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The drive to Gangotri takes most of a day, so fly in the day before. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** 241 km, 10–11 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Gangotri and back (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (not included in the trek fee, paid directly to the driver) leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), with direct trains from Delhi. Book well in advance for the May–June and September–October peak season. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from New Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings before you book. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** 241 km, 10–11 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Gangotri and back (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (not included in the trek fee, paid directly to the driver) leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book a late-night train or travel the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hrs, with Uttarakhand Roadways Volvo and ordinary buses running through the night. Choose government buses from inside the ISBT and avoid private buses that leave from outside the ISBT premises. From Dehradun ISBT, an auto, shared three-wheeler or app cab takes you to Dehradun Railway Station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** 241 km, 10–11 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun to Gangotri and back (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The pickup is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (not included in the trek fee, paid directly to the driver) leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book a late-night bus or travel the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM before Gangotri - There is no ATM on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Gangotri is the last place with a stable signal; BSNL, Jio and Airtel work there - There is no reliable signal after Gangotri - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kedartal trek, and where does it start? The Kedartal trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, above the temple town of Gangotri. It starts from Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft), one of the Char Dham shrines, about 241 km (10–11 hours) by road from Dehradun. From Gangotri the trail follows the Kedar Ganga through pine, deodar and birch forest to Bhoj Kharak and Kedar Kharak, then climbs to Kedartal lake at 4,912 m (16,116 ft). ### How many days does the Kedartal trek take from start to finish? The Kedartal trek takes 6 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 4 trekking days covering about 38 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Dehradun and Gangotri (241 km, 10–11 hours) - **Days 2–5:** trekking, 7–15 km a day - **Hardest day:** Day 4, Kedar Kharak to Kedartal and back, 8 km in 7–8 hours - **Longest day:** Day 5, a 15 km descent to Gangotri in 7–8 hours ### What is the altitude of the Kedartal trek? The highest point of the Kedartal trek is Kedartal lake at 4,912 m (16,116 ft). The trek starts at Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft), so you gain about 1,850 m in three trekking days. - **Gangotri:** 3,065 m (10,050 ft) - **Bhoj Kharak camp:** 3,780 m (12,402 ft) - **Kedar Kharak camp:** 4,267 m (14,000 ft) - **Kedartal:** 4,912 m (16,116 ft) ### What is the difficulty level of the Kedartal trek? The Kedartal trek is graded Moderate–Difficult, with steep ascents and descents, rocky terrain and high altitude. It is recommended for fit trekkers with some prior high-altitude trekking experience. - **Day 2:** narrow, rocky sections on steep slopes above the Kedar Ganga - **Day 4:** a steep climb of about 645 m over scree and loose boulders to the lake - **Day 5:** a 15 km descent that is hard on the knees ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Kedartal trek? No, the Kedartal trek is not a beginner trek. It is graded Moderate–Difficult and is recommended for trekkers in good physical condition who have some prior high-altitude experience. First-time trekkers should gain experience on an easier high-altitude trek first, as proper preparation and acclimatisation are essential on Kedartal. ### What fitness level do I need for the Kedartal trek? For the Kedartal trek you need good fitness: you should be comfortable walking 5–8 hours a day and handling steep ascents and descents at altitude. - **Train before the trek:** regular cardio exercise and hiking on hills - **Summit day:** 7–8 hours with a steep 645 m climb above 4,267 m - **Descent:** 15 km downhill on Day 5, so build leg strength for the knees ### What is the best time for the Kedartal trek? The best time for the Kedartal trek is May–June and September–October, the two seasons in which Trekkaro runs it. - **May–June:** summer, with days of 12–17°C and nights of -2°C to 7°C - **September–October:** autumn, with cooler days of 3–9°C and freezing nights of -4°C to -1°C ### Is there snow on the higher sections of the Kedartal trek? Snow is possible on the higher sections of the Kedartal trek, which climbs to 4,912 m, so microspikes and gaiters are provided free. - **Team gear:** ice axes and ropes are carried as part of the included technical equipment - **Eyes:** UV sunglasses prevent snow blindness from the glare - **Hands:** carry a waterproof pair of gloves for snow ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Kedartal trek? Nights on the Kedartal trek drop to -2°C to 7°C in May–June and to -4°C to -1°C in September–October. Days are 12–17°C in summer and 3–9°C in autumn. - **Layers:** plan on 4 warm layers – thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers and a padded jacket - **Jacket:** a -10°C padded jacket comes free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear - **Cold mornings:** a balaclava or buff, a woollen cap and gloves for the climb to the lake ### Which mountains can you see on the Kedartal trek? On the Kedartal trek you get close views of Thalay Sagar (6,904 m), Bhrigupanth (6,772 m) and Meru (6,672 m) from the lake, with the Bhagirathi peaks appearing earlier on the trail. - **Day 2:** first glimpses of the Bhagirathi peaks as the forest thins - **Day 3:** first full view of Bhrigupanth from the meadows near Kedar Kharak - **Day 4:** Kedartal lake with Thalay Sagar, Bhrigupanth and Meru close by - **Wildlife:** a chance to spot blue sheep, goral and mountain birds ### What is the terrain like on the Kedartal trek? The Kedartal trek moves from forest trail to rocky alpine ground: steep riverside paths through pine, deodar and birch forest, open meadows above the tree line, and scree and loose boulders below the lake. - **Gangotri to Bhoj Kharak:** steep riverside trail with narrow, rocky sections - **Bhoj Kharak to Kedar Kharak:** steep birch forest, then open alpine meadow - **Kedar Kharak to Kedartal:** steep rocky trail, scree and loose boulders ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Kedartal trek? Yes, the Kedartal trek reaches 4,912 m and you sleep two nights at Kedar Kharak (4,267 m), so altitude sickness is a real risk and proper acclimatisation is essential. - **Altitude gain:** about 715 m on Day 2 and 487 m on Day 3 - **Summit day:** you climb to the lake and return to sleep at Kedar Kharak - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher for evacuation ### Can trekkers above 60 do the Kedartal trek, and what do they need? Yes. There is no upper age limit on the Kedartal trek: trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and bring a medical certificate signed by a doctor, as it is a Moderate–Difficult trek to 4,912 m. - **Medical certificate:** carry one signed by a registered doctor - **Experience:** prior high-altitude trekking is recommended - **Pace:** take breaks as needed on the long climbs and descents ### How do I reach the Kedartal trek base camp? The Kedartal trek starts from Gangotri, 241 km (10–11 hours) by road from Dehradun. Reach Dehradun the day before, as the cab to Gangotri leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun (DDN), with the overnight Nanda Devi Express and day trains such as the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat from Delhi - **By bus:** government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT (6–7 hours) - **Return:** the cab leaves Gangotri at 6:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 7:00 PM ### Is transport included in the Kedartal trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Kedartal trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs between Dehradun and Gangotri (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Pickup:** Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM on Day 1 - **Payment:** paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - **Route:** via Mussoorie, Uttarkashi, Bhatwari, Harshil and Dharali - **Meals in transit:** not included, so budget for food on both drive days ### Where do we stay on the Kedartal trek? On the Kedartal trek you stay 2 nights in a guesthouse or homestay at Gangotri and 3 nights in tents on the trail. - **Gangotri (Day 1 and Day 5):** guesthouse or homestay, triple or quad sharing - **Bhoj Kharak (Day 2):** 3-person tents with a mess tent and tables - **Kedar Kharak (Days 3–4):** camp beside a mountain stream - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek, for 1 or 2 people ### What is the group size on the Kedartal trek and who leads it? Each Kedartal trek batch has a maximum of 20 trekkers, led by experienced trek leaders supported by local certified mountain guides. All technical equipment for the trek is included, from tents and sleeping bags to ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes. ### Is the Kedartal trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, women can join the Kedartal trek on their own: you trek in a batch of up to 20 led by experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides. - **Tents:** shared 3-person tents, or a single tent for ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the whole trek - **Stay at Gangotri:** guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis - **Connectivity:** inform your family before you leave Gangotri, as there is no reliable mobile signal after it ### What food is served on the Kedartal trek? All meals on the Kedartal trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food. - **Through the day:** tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals during the drive between Dehradun and Gangotri ### Is drinking water available on the Kedartal trek? Water sources on the Kedartal trek are limited, so carry two 1 L bottles and fill them at camp before each day’s walk. - **Day 2:** carry enough water from Gangotri; waterfalls on the way make good rest stops - **Day 4:** very few water sources, so fill every bottle at Kedar Kharak - **Day 5:** a few natural water sources on the way down for refills - **Bottles:** an insulated bottle helps on cold mornings ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Kedartal trek? Yes, the Kedartal trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear: trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and trekking poles, plus microspikes and gaiters, at no rental fee. - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Value:** shoes worth ₹6,999 and a jacket worth ₹3,299 - **Own shoes:** your own broken-in, waterproof pair with ankle support is welcome too ### Is backpack offloading available on the Kedartal trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Kedartal trek costs ₹3,600 + 5% GST for the full trek, for a bag of up to 9 kg. - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Late requests:** charges may be higher if you ask for offloading at Gangotri - **Day pack:** a 20–30 L day pack is required if you offload ### Is there a doctor on the Kedartal trek? No, a doctor is not part of the Kedartal trek package. Safety is handled by experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides, with emergency support at every camp. - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders - **Evacuation:** stretchers at each campsite; your travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation - **Your part:** carry a personal medical kit and consult your doctor before the trek ### What documents do I need for the Kedartal trek? For the Kedartal trek you need a government photo ID, a medical certificate signed by a registered doctor and travel insurance. - **Photo ID:** original and a photocopy (passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID) - **Medical certificate:** signed by a registered doctor - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Do I need a permit for the Kedartal trek? Yes, but all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Kedartal trek fee, so you do not need to arrange them. Just carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy on the trek. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kedartal trek? No, there is no ATM or reliable mobile network on the Kedartal trail. Gangotri is the last place with a stable signal (BSNL, Jio and Airtel), and Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM. - **Network:** once you leave Gangotri, there is no reliable mobile signal - **Charging:** there is no charging on the trail, so carry a power bank - **Cash:** Uttarkashi ATMs can run out, so withdraw what you need in Dehradun, including your share of the cab fare ### Can I leave extra luggage at the Kedartal trek base camp? Yes, you can leave luggage you do not need on the Kedartal trek at the base camp in Gangotri free of charge and collect it when you return. Do not keep any valuables in the luggage you leave behind. ### What is special about the lake on the Kedartal trek? Kedartal, known as Shiva’s Lake, sits at 4,912 m (16,116 ft) and is the source of the Kedar Ganga. It is the highest point of the Kedartal trek, with close views of Thalay Sagar, Bhrigupanth and Meru. - **Gangotri temple:** an evening visit to this Char Dham shrine on Day 1 - **Ganga Aarti:** evening aarti at the Gangotri temple when you return on Day 5 - **Nearby:** Bhagirath Shila and the submerged Shivling at Gangotri ### How far in advance should I book the Kedartal trek? Booking for a Kedartal trek batch closes at 5 PM (India time) on the day before the trek starts. Popular batches in May–June and September–October fill early, so book as soon as your dates are fixed. Trains to Dehradun should also be booked early for the peak season. ### What is the minimum age for the Kedartal trek? The minimum age for the Kedartal trek is 16 years, because it is a Moderate–Difficult trek to 4,912 m. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. Prior high-altitude experience is recommended. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 8 May 2027 to 13 May 2027 - 9 May 2027 to 14 May 2027 - 15 May 2027 to 20 May 2027 - 16 May 2027 to 21 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 27 May 2027 - 23 May 2027 to 28 May 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 3 Jun 2027 - 30 May 2027 to 4 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 10 Jun 2027 - 6 Jun 2027 to 11 Jun 2027 - 12 Jun 2027 to 17 Jun 2027 - … 9 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kedartal-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Khaliya Top Trek > Khaliya Top Trek is a 5-day easy trek in Pithoragarh, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,500 m (11,480 ft). It covers about 14 km on foot and starts and ends at Munsiyari. Best time: October to June. Trekkaro price: ₹9,450 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 23 Oct 2026 (36 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/khaliya-top-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 3,500 m / 11,480 ft - **Trekking distance:** 14 km - **Region:** Pithoragarh, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Munsiyari - **Best time:** October to June - **Temperature:** Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day 8°C to 14°C, Night -4°C to 3°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 0°C to 8°C, Night -12°C to -5°C | Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 8°C to 15°C, Night -3°C to 4°C | Summer (May-Jun): Day 14°C to 20°C, Night 4°C to 10°C - **Price:** ₹9,450 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 23 Oct 2026 (36 upcoming) ## Overview Some summits make you wait for the view. Khaliya Top hands it to you all at once: step out of the last band of rhododendron, and the five Panchachuli peaks fill the eastern sky so close and so white that they look painted on. Two nights in a high meadow camp, one dawn climb and about 14 km on foot are all it asks. It is the gentlest way we know to stand face to face with the big peaks of the Kumaon Himalaya. The Khaliya Top trek climbs from the Munsiyari road to a broad grassy summit at 3,500 m (11,480 ft) in the Pithoragarh district of Kumaon, Uttarakhand. The trail starts at Khaliya Dwar, also called Balati Bend, a forest gate on the road about 8 km before Munsiyari town, and climbs through oak and rhododendron forest to the Bhujani meadow, where we camp. From there an open ridge of alpine grass leads to the top. The trek starts and ends at Khaliya Dwar, and Munsiyari (2,200 m / 7,220 ft) is the base town for the night before and the night after. Munsiyari sits at the head of the Gori Ganga valley, the old trading town on the route to Milam and Tibet, and it is one of the few places in India where a major Himalayan range rises straight across the valley from your guesthouse window. Khaliya Top lifts you about 1,300 m above the town, high enough to see over the nearer ridges to Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot, Rajrambha and Hardeol as well as Panchachuli. The drive in from Kathgodam is long, and the trek itself is short, so this is a journey to the edge of Kumaon as much as it is a climb. ### Five Peaks at Sunrise – What Makes the Khaliya Top Trek Unmissable The heart of this trek is one morning. You leave the Bhujani camp in the dark with a hot drink and a headlamp, climb the last stretch of forest as the sky turns grey, and come out onto open grass just as the first sun touches the Panchachuli peaks. They catch the light one after another, gold, then orange, then white, while the valley of the Gori Ganga below is still in shadow. To the south and west, Nanda Devi and Nanda Kot appear above the ridges, and on a clear morning Rajrambha and Hardeol complete the line. The summit is wide and gentle, so there is room to sit, take it in and drink tea while the light changes. What makes Khaliya different from many short treks is how much wilderness it holds for its size. The forest below the meadow is home to the Himalayan monal, Uttarakhand’s state bird, and on quiet mornings you may spot bharal (blue sheep) or the barking deer known locally as kakar on the higher slopes. In spring the rhododendron forest turns red, and in winter the meadows lie under deep snow, with the Panchachuli wall even brighter against a hard blue sky. The second night at Bhujani is a gift. Instead of rushing down after the summit, you come back to the same camp, rest through the afternoon and watch the sunset paint the same peaks from a different angle. By the time you walk out on Day 4, the range feels like something you know. ### The Trail Itself From Khaliya Dwar the trail climbs at once into forest of oak, rhododendron and birch, a clear path laid with stone in places and worn smooth by herders and trekkers. It is steady rather than steep, with short breathers on small clearings, and in about 2–3 hours it opens onto the Bhujani meadow. Above the camp the trees thin quickly. The last section to Khaliya Top crosses open alpine grassland along a broad ridge, with views widening at every step. In winter this upper ridge and the meadows are under snow, and the trail is slower but never exposed. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Khaliya Top trek is graded easy, and we recommend it for first-time trekkers, families with children who walk well, and anyone who wants a big Himalayan view without a long expedition. The trekking days are short. The hardest day is Day 3: about 8 km and 5–6 hours, with a climb of about 500 m to the summit before sunrise and the same way back to camp. The real effort on this trip is the road: about 275 km and 10–11 hours each way between Kathgodam and Munsiyari. We recommend four weeks of preparation before departure. Children aged 8 and above can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: October to June. ### Key Highlights of the Khaliya Top Trek - **Panchachuli at arm’s length** – the five peaks of the Panchachuli massif rise straight across the Gori Ganga valley from the summit - **A wide Himalayan panorama** – Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot, Rajrambha and Hardeol on a clear day - **Sunrise on the summit** – a pre-dawn climb from camp to 3,500 m (11,480 ft) - **Two nights at Bhujani** – a meadow camp at the forest edge, with sunset views of the range - **Rhododendron forest in spring** – red blooms from March to April on the climb from Khaliya Dwar - **Snow in winter** – the meadows and summit ridge lie under snow from December to March - **Wildlife** – Himalayan monal, bharal and kakar in the forest and on the open slopes - **Munsiyari** – the old trading town at the head of the Gori Ganga valley, with Panchachuli across the valley ### Best Time to Do the Khaliya Top Trek The Khaliya Top trek runs from October to June, and stops for the monsoon from July to September, when rain and landslides close the hill roads to Munsiyari and cloud hides the peaks. Each season gives the same summit a different mood. The temperatures below are for the Bhujani camp; the summit at dawn is a few degrees colder. #### October to November – Autumn (The Clear-Sky Season) Autumn brings the sharpest views of the year. The monsoon has washed the air clean, the meadows turn gold, and the Panchachuli peaks stand out without a haze. Days are 8°C to 14°C, and nights drop to -4°C to 3°C, colder towards the end of November. #### December to February – Winter (The Snow Season) This is Khaliya at its wildest. Snow covers the meadows and the summit ridge, the camp sits on white ground, and the walk is slower and more demanding. Days are 0°C to 8°C, and nights fall to -12°C to -5°C. Snow can block the road near Munsiyari for a day after heavy snowfall, so keep a spare day in your travel plans. #### March to April – Spring (The Rhododendron Season) The rhododendron forest blooms red as the snow melts from the lower slopes, while the summit ridge can still hold snow in March. Days are 8°C to 15°C, and nights are -3°C to 4°C. #### May to June – Summer (The Green Season) The meadows turn green and the days are pleasant for families and first-timers. Views are clearest early in the morning, and afternoon cloud builds towards late June. Days are 14°C to 20°C, and nights are 4°C to 10°C. ### Khaliya Top Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Khaliya Top trek costs ₹9,450 + 5% GST per person, for 5 days starting and ending at Munsiyari, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Kathgodam is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Kathgodam to Munsiyari **Route Details:** **Drive: Kathgodam → Munsiyari | Distance: 275 km | Duration: 10–11 hrs | Altitude: 554 m → 2,200 m** The day starts early at Kathgodam Railway Station, where the group meets at 06:00 AM. The overnight trains from Delhi arrive before dawn, so you can step off the train, have a cup of tea and climb into the cab. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, and your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The road climbs out of the plains past Bhimtal into pine forest, then follows the ridges through Almora and down to Bageshwar on the Saryu river. Beyond Bageshwar it winds up through terraced villages towards Thal and Birthi, where the Birthi waterfall drops beside the road. The last climb crosses the Kalamuni pass, and if the sky is clear, the Panchachuli peaks appear for the first time above the valley. This is a long day in a vehicle, about 10–11 hours with stops for breakfast and lunch on the way (meals in transit are on you). Carry a light jacket and snacks within reach, and if you are prone to motion sickness, take your medicine before you leave. The views make up for the hours: the road runs past pine ridges, deep river valleys and terraced villages, and Almora and Bageshwar make good breaks to stretch your legs. Sit near a window if you can. We reach Munsiyari by evening and check into a guesthouse. After dinner the trek leader runs a short briefing on the route, the gear and the summit plan, and checks each trekker’s SpO2 and pulse. Get a good night’s sleep: the trek starts tomorrow. Munsiyari at 2,200 m (7,220 ft) is a good first step for acclimatisation, so drink plenty of water and avoid alcohol tonight. On a clear evening, step outside to see the Panchachuli peaks across the valley. What to Expect: - Pickup at Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM - A long mountain drive through Bhimtal, Almora and Bageshwar - Birthi waterfall and the Kalamuni pass on the way - First views of Panchachuli near Munsiyari on a clear day - Evening briefing and health check - Overnight: guesthouse in Munsiyari ### Day 2: Munsiyari to Bhujani Camp via Khaliya Dwar **Route Details:** **Trek: Khaliya Dwar → Bhujani | Distance: 3 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Altitude: 2,500 m → 3,000 m** After breakfast we drive back along the road about 8 km, around 20–30 minutes, to Khaliya Dwar, also called Balati Bend, where a forest gate marks the start of the trail. Packed lunch, water and a warm layer go in your daypack. The trek leader collects the forest permits here. Your main backpack goes with you unless you have chosen offloading, so keep it light. Before setting off, the trek leader explains the pace, the breaks and the rule of staying behind the guide. The trail climbs at once into a forest of oak, rhododendron and birch, a clear path with stone steps in places. The gradient is steady and the forest is cool and quiet; keep an eye out for the Himalayan monal, whose call carries through the trees, and for the first glimpses of the snow peaks between the trunks. In March and April the rhododendrons turn the whole slope red. In about 2–3 hours the trees open onto the Bhujani meadow at about 3,000 m (9,840 ft), a wide clearing on the edge of the forest, and the camp. With the short distance you reach camp by lunch, which leaves the afternoon free to rest, acclimatise and take a short walk with the trek leader to a viewpoint above camp. There is a water source near the campsite, and the team boils and treats drinking water. Evenings at Bhujani are cold and clear. As the sun goes down, the Panchachuli peaks glow pink above the dark forest, and then the stars come out. Dinner is early, and the trek leader confirms the start time for tomorrow’s sunrise climb. Bhujani sits well above the town and the nights here are cold in every season, so change into dry clothes and warm layers as soon as the sun drops. The team serves hot soup before dinner in the dining tent. What to Expect: - Short drive to Khaliya Dwar (Balati Bend) and the forest gate - A steady climb through oak and rhododendron forest - Himalayan monal in the forest on quiet mornings - Afternoon to rest and acclimatise at camp - Sunset on the Panchachuli peaks - Overnight: camp at Bhujani ### Day 3: Bhujani to Khaliya Top and Back **Route Details:** **Trek: Bhujani → Khaliya Top → Bhujani | Distance: 8 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Altitude: 3,000 m → 3,500 m → 3,000 m** This is summit day. We wake at about 4:00 AM, have tea and biscuits, and set off by headlamp around 4:30 AM so that we reach the top for sunrise. The first section climbs the last band of forest above camp; it is steady, and the trek leader sets a slow, even pace. Wear your warm layers from the start: the hour before sunrise is the coldest of the trek, and your hands and feet feel it first. Keep your camera and gloves in an outer pocket so you do not have to stop and dig for them. The trees thin out, and the trail moves onto open alpine grass along a broad ridge. The sky lightens behind the Panchachuli wall, and the climb of about 4 km and 500 m brings you onto Khaliya Top at 3,500 m (11,480 ft) in about 2–3 hours. As the sun rises, the five Panchachuli peaks light up across the Gori Ganga valley, and Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot, Rajrambha and Hardeol appear over the ridges. In winter the whole ridge is under snow, and the team fixes a safe line and hands out microspikes where needed. The summit is wide and grassy, with room to sit and enjoy the view. We spend time on top, take photos and then walk back down the same ridge to camp, where a hot breakfast waits. The descent is quicker, about 1.5–2 hours, and trekking poles help on the grassy slopes. If the weather is clear and the group is strong, the trek leader may walk a little further along the ridge for a wider view, but the trek goes no higher than the summit. The descent is on the same open ridge, so you can enjoy the peaks the whole way down. The afternoon is free at Bhujani. Rest, dry your socks in the sun, and walk around the meadow for bird watching. The second sunset from camp is as good as the first, and the night feels well earned. This easy afternoon is part of the plan, not a gap in it: resting at the same camp after the summit keeps the trek gentle for first-timers and families. In the evening the trek leader runs the daily health check and the team serves an early dinner. What to Expect: - 4:30 AM start by headlamp - Sunrise on Panchachuli from 3,500 m (11,480 ft) - Views of Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot, Rajrambha and Hardeol on a clear day - Snow on the summit ridge from December to March - Hot breakfast back at camp and a free afternoon - Overnight: camp at Bhujani ### Day 4: Bhujani to Khaliya Dwar, Drive to Munsiyari **Route Details:** **Trek: Bhujani → Khaliya Dwar | Distance: 3 km | Duration: 1.5–2 hrs | Altitude: 3,000 m → 2,500 m** There is no rush this morning. Wake up to one last view of the peaks from camp, have breakfast and pack your bag. The team strikes camp and carries all waste back down; please hand your wrappers to them. The camp is cleared down to the last tent peg, and the meadow is left as we found it. Take a last look around Bhujani before you set off: in a few hours you will be back on the road, and the quiet of the meadow will feel far away. The descent to Khaliya Dwar follows the same forest trail, about 3 km and 1.5–2 hours. It is steeper going down than it felt coming up, so take short steps, use your trekking poles and watch for loose stones and wet leaves. The trees are full of birds in the morning. The forest is cool in the morning and the walk is short, so there is no need to hurry. If you missed the monal on the way up, this is a good chance to see it near the trail. At Khaliya Dwar the cab takes you back to Munsiyari in about 20–30 minutes, in time for lunch. The afternoon is free: rest at the guesthouse, walk through the market for local woollens, or visit the Nanda Devi temple at the edge of town, with the Panchachuli peaks across the valley. Munsiyari is known for its hand-woven shawls and woollens, made in the villages of the valley. There is mobile signal in town again, so this is also the time to call home. In the evening the trek leader hands out trek certificates, and we settle the plan for the early start tomorrow. Returning to Munsiyari for the night breaks the journey, so the long drive home starts after a proper rest. Pack your bag tonight so that the morning goes quickly, and keep your snacks, water and a warm layer in your daypack for the drive. Dinner is early, and it is a good idea to go to bed early as well. What to Expect: - A relaxed morning and the last view from camp - A 3 km descent through forest to Khaliya Dwar - Lunch and a free afternoon in Munsiyari - Optional visit to the Nanda Devi temple and the market - Trek certificates in the evening - Overnight: guesthouse in Munsiyari ### Day 5: Munsiyari to Kathgodam **Route Details:** **Drive: Munsiyari → Kathgodam | Distance: 275 km | Duration: 10–11 hrs | Altitude: 2,200 m → 554 m** We leave Munsiyari early in the morning after tea, with a last look back at Panchachuli from the Kalamuni pass. The road retraces the route through Birthi, Thal, Bageshwar and Almora, with stops for breakfast and lunch on the way. The morning drive down the valley brings the clearest light of the day. Look back from the bends near Birthi for one more glimpse of the snow peaks before the road turns towards Bageshwar. The drive is about 275 km and 10–11 hours, depending on the road, and the cab is expected at Kathgodam Railway Station by about 07:00 PM. Delays happen on mountain roads, especially after rain or snow, so book a late-night train or bus, or travel the next day. If you are flying home, book your flight for the next day: Pantnagar is about 1.5–2 hours beyond Kathgodam, and Delhi is an overnight train or bus away. Haldwani has plenty of simple hotels if you want to stay the night. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Meals on the drive are on you. Keep some cash for food and tea stops on the way, and carry a light layer: the morning in Munsiyari is cold, while the afternoon in the foothills can be warm. Snacks within reach help on the long winding road. That brings the Khaliya Top trek to a close. Before you head home, take a moment to sort your gear: return the Free Trekking Gear to the team at the end of the trek, and the ₹3,000 deposit is refunded by UPI within 2 working days after we check the returned gear. We hope you go home with a few good photographs of Panchachuli and a taste for the Kumaon mountains. Drop us a note about your trek; your feedback helps us make the next batch better. What to Expect: - Early departure from Munsiyari - Last views of Panchachuli from the Kalamuni pass - Long drive through Bageshwar and Almora - Arrival at Kathgodam Railway Station by about 07:00 PM - Book your onward travel for late night or the next day - Overnight: no stay (trek ends) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 4: guesthouse in Munsiyari, shared rooms - Day 2 and Day 3: camping at Bhujani, in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner in Munsiyari to Day 5 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 5-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Kathgodam to Munsiyari and back, and the drives between Munsiyari and Khaliya Dwar - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Kathgodam, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Kathgodam and Munsiyari #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Pantnagar Airport (PGH), about 70 km and 1.5–2 hrs from Kathgodam, with limited flights from Delhi. The cab leaves Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM, so fly in the day before and stay in Haldwani or Kathgodam. Delhi airport is the other option: from there, take the overnight train from Delhi to Kathgodam. **From Kathgodam to Munsiyari:** 275 km, about 10–11 hrs by road via Bhimtal, Almora and Bageshwar. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM to Munsiyari. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** On Day 5 the cab (not included in the trek fee) leaves Munsiyari early in the morning and is expected at Kathgodam Railway Station by about 07:00 PM, depending on the road. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Kathgodam (KGM), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. The overnight train from Delhi the night before Day 1 is the easiest option. - **Ranikhet Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Kathgodam Shatabdi** – a day train; take it the day before the trek and stay near the station. Check current timings before you book. **From Kathgodam to Munsiyari:** 275 km, about 10–11 hrs by road via Bhimtal, Almora and Bageshwar. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM to Munsiyari. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** On Day 5 the cab (not included in the trek fee) leaves Munsiyari early in the morning and is expected at Kathgodam Railway Station by about 07:00 PM, depending on the road. Plan your train home for late night on Day 5 or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Ordinary and Volvo buses run through the night from Delhi (Anand Vihar ISBT) to Haldwani, about 7–8 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses. Haldwani is about 6 km from Kathgodam Railway Station; take an auto or cab to the station for the 06:00 AM pickup. **From Kathgodam to Munsiyari:** 275 km, about 10–11 hrs by road via Bhimtal, Almora and Bageshwar. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM to Munsiyari. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** On Day 5 the cab (not included in the trek fee) leaves Munsiyari early in the morning and is expected at Kathgodam Railway Station by about 07:00 PM, depending on the road. Plan your bus home for late night on Day 5 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Munsiyari has a few ATMs, but they can run out of cash - Draw enough cash in Haldwani or Almora on the drive in - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio and BSNL work in Munsiyari - Signal is patchy at Bhujani camp and on the summit - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Munsiyari ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Khaliya Top trek, and where does it start? The Khaliya Top trek is above Munsiyari in the Pithoragarh district of Kumaon, Uttarakhand. It starts at Khaliya Dwar, also called Balati Bend, a forest gate on the road about 8 km before Munsiyari, and it ends at the same point. We camp at the Bhujani meadow and climb to the summit at 3,500 m (11,480 ft). The group meets at Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM on Day 1 and stays in Munsiyari before and after the trek. ### How many days does the Khaliya Top trek take from Kathgodam? The Khaliya Top trek takes 5 days from Kathgodam to Kathgodam. Day 1 and Day 5 are long drives of about 275 km and 10–11 hours between Kathgodam and Munsiyari. Day 2 is a short climb to the Bhujani camp, Day 3 is the sunrise summit climb and return to camp, and Day 4 is the walk down to Khaliya Dwar and a night in Munsiyari. The total trekking distance is about 14 km. ### What is the maximum altitude of the Khaliya Top trek? The maximum altitude of the Khaliya Top trek is 3,500 m (11,480 ft), at the summit. The trail starts at Khaliya Dwar at about 2,500 m (8,200 ft), and the Bhujani camp sits at about 3,000 m (9,840 ft). Munsiyari, where you stay before and after the trek, is at 2,200 m (7,220 ft). The gain on summit day is about 500 m, spread over 4 km, so the altitude is gentle for a first Himalayan trek. ### What is the difficulty level of the Khaliya Top trek? The Khaliya Top trek is graded easy. The trekking days are short: 3 km to camp on Day 2, about 8 km and 5–6 hours on summit day, and 3 km down on Day 4. The trail is a clear forest path and an open grassy ridge with no exposed sections. The harder part is the drive, about 10–11 hours each way between Kathgodam and Munsiyari. From December to March snow makes the upper ridge slower and colder. ### What is the best time to do the Khaliya Top trek? The best time for the Khaliya Top trek depends on what you want to see; the trek runs from October to June. - **October–November (autumn):** the clearest views of Panchachuli and golden meadows. - **December–February (winter):** snow on the meadows and the summit ridge. - **March–April (spring):** red rhododendron forest. - **May–June (summer):** green meadows and pleasant days. The trek closes from July to September for the monsoon. ### Will there be snow on the Khaliya Top trek, and when? Yes, the Khaliya Top trek has snow from December to March. In those months the Bhujani meadow and the summit ridge lie under snow, and Free Trekking Gear includes microspikes and gaiters for the snowy sections. Snow can linger on the upper ridge into early April after a heavy winter. From May to November the trail is free of snow, though the Panchachuli peaks across the valley stay white throughout the year. ### How cold does it get on the Khaliya Top trek at night? Night temperatures at the Khaliya Top trek camp at Bhujani depend on the month: - **October–November:** day 8°C to 14°C, night -4°C to 3°C - **December–February:** day 0°C to 8°C, night -12°C to -5°C - **March–April:** day 8°C to 15°C, night -3°C to 4°C - **May–June:** day 14°C to 20°C, night 4°C to 10°C The summit at dawn is a few degrees colder than camp, so carry your warm layers on Day 3. ### What is the minimum age for the Khaliya Top trek? The minimum age for the Khaliya Top trek is 8 years, for children who walk regularly and can manage two long days in a vehicle. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that each trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Khaliya Top trek, and where is the pickup? The pickup for the Khaliya Top trek is at Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM on Day 1. Kathgodam has overnight trains from Delhi, such as the Ranikhet Express, and Haldwani (6 km away) has overnight buses from Delhi. The nearest airport is Pantnagar, about 70 km away. From Kathgodam the drive to Munsiyari is about 275 km and 10–11 hours via Almora and Bageshwar. On Day 5 the cab is expected back at Kathgodam by about 07:00 PM. ### What does the Khaliya Top trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Khaliya Top trek costs ₹9,450 + 5% GST per person, for 5 days starting and ending at Munsiyari. It includes Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, against a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and ₹200 washing charge), two nights in a Munsiyari guesthouse, two nights of camping at Bhujani, all meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 breakfast, forest permits, camping and safety equipment, and a certified trek leader with cook and support staff. The full list is under Terms & Conditions. ### How do I book the Khaliya Top trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Khaliya Top trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹9,450 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Kathgodam Railway Station at 06:00 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is transport included in the Khaliya Top trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Khaliya Top trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Kathgodam Railway Station to Munsiyari and back, including the short drives between Munsiyari and Khaliya Dwar; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare before the trek. Meals on the drive between Kathgodam and Munsiyari are not included either. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Khaliya Top trek? Mobile network on the Khaliya Top trek is limited to Munsiyari and the first part of the trail. Jio and BSNL work in Munsiyari, and signal is patchy at Bhujani and on the summit. Munsiyari has a few ATMs, but they can run out of cash, so draw enough cash in Haldwani or Almora on the way. Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail. Make your important calls from Munsiyari before Day 2. ### Do I need a permit for the Khaliya Top trek? Yes, the Khaliya Top trek needs a forest entry permit, collected at the forest gate at Khaliya Dwar, and Trekkaro arranges it for the group. Forest permits and camping charges are included in the trek fee. Carry a government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, driving licence or voter ID) and a copy, as the forest staff may check it. Foreign nationals should carry their passport. ### Is there a risk of AMS on the Khaliya Top trek, and how is safety handled? The risk of Acute Mountain Sickness (AMS) on the Khaliya Top trek is low but real, as the summit is at 3,500 m (11,480 ft). The itinerary helps: a night in Munsiyari at 2,200 m, a short first day to camp and an afternoon to acclimatise. Our trek leaders are NIM certified or equivalent; they check SpO2 and pulse daily, and the team carries oxygen cylinders, a first-aid kit and a stretcher. Batches have up to 20 trekkers. ### Is the Khaliya Top trek suitable for beginners and families? Yes, the Khaliya Top trek suits beginners and families with children who walk well. The trekking days are short, the trail is clear, and the two nights at the same camp keep the pace relaxed. We recommend four weeks of preparation: brisk walks, stair climbing and jogging, aiming to walk 5–6 km uphill comfortably. Be ready for the long drives on Day 1 and Day 5, and for cold nights at camp. ### What should I carry for the Khaliya Top trek, and what gear is free? For the Khaliya Top trek, Free Trekking Gear covers Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. You bring a 40–50 L backpack with a rain cover, a daypack if you offload, thermal inners, two fleece or woollen layers (three in winter), a rain jacket, trek pants, woollen cap, gloves, sunglasses, sunscreen, a headlamp for the sunrise climb, two water bottles and a lunch box. The full list is under Things to Carry. ## Upcoming batches - 23 Oct 2026 to 27 Oct 2026 - 30 Oct 2026 to 3 Nov 2026 - 6 Nov 2026 to 10 Nov 2026 - 13 Nov 2026 to 17 Nov 2026 - 20 Nov 2026 to 24 Nov 2026 - 27 Nov 2026 to 1 Dec 2026 - 4 Dec 2026 to 8 Dec 2026 - 11 Dec 2026 to 15 Dec 2026 - 18 Dec 2026 to 22 Dec 2026 - 25 Dec 2026 to 29 Dec 2026 - 1 Jan 2027 to 5 Jan 2027 - 8 Jan 2027 to 12 Jan 2027 - … 24 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/khaliya-top-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kuari Pass Trek > Kuari Pass Trek is a 6-day easy–moderate trek in Chamoli, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,815 m (12,516 ft). It covers about 35 km on foot and starts and ends at Pipalkoti. Best time: October to April. Trekkaro price: ₹9,400 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (56 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kuari-pass-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,815 m / 12,516 ft - **Trekking distance:** 35 km - **Region:** Chamoli, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Pipalkoti - **Best time:** October to April - **Temperature:** Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 8°C to 14°C, Night -14°C to -8°C | Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 13°C to 17°C, Night around 0°C | Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day 10°C to 15°C, Night around 0°C - **Price:** ₹9,400 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (56 upcoming) ## Overview Count them from the top. Kedarnath, Chaukhamba, Kamet, Nanda Devi – and ten more summits around them, fourteen peaks in all, spread in a single 180° arc across the Garhwal Himalayas. That is the view that waits at Kuari Pass, 3,815 m up, at the end of a trail graded easy to moderate. In winter you walk to it through oak and rhododendron forest standing deep in snow, and no technical climbing stands between you and it. The Kuari Pass trek is a journey from Garhwali village to snowline. It begins among the terraced fields of Dhak and Tugasi, climbs into forests of oak, rhododendron and deodar, crosses the open alpine meadows of Khullara and ends on a high ridge looking out at Nanda Devi, Kamet, Dronagiri, Trishul, Bertholi, Hathi Ghodi Parvat, Mana and Neelkanth. Snow-covered trails, dense forest, wide meadows and Himalayan hamlets – it is all here, on a route gentle enough for a first Himalayan trek and rewarding enough for experienced trekkers too. Also known as the Curzon Trail, the Kuari Pass trek lies in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalayas. It covers about 35 km on foot over six days, starting and finishing at Pipalkoti (1,883 m), the base town where you stay on Day 1 and Day 5, known for its hot springs and apple orchards; the walking starts and ends at Dhak village (2,050 m), a 15 km drive away. Pickup and drop are at Dehradun Railway Station or Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan). The route climbs to camps at Gulling (2,900 m) and Khullara (3,350 m), then makes a full-day push along a ridge to the pass at 3,815 m (12,516 ft) and back. The grade is easy to moderate, yet the reward is the kind of panorama we associate with far harder routes. In our experience, there are few better ways to see the high Garhwal for the first time. ### Fourteen Peaks from One Ridge – What Makes the Kuari Pass Trek Unmissable What sets Kuari Pass apart is how much it shows you for the effort it asks. From the top, the Garhwal Himalayas are not a glimpse between trees or a single summit framed at the end of a valley. They are a line of snow peaks running across half the horizon in one 180° sweep: Kedarnath and Chaukhamba, Kamet and Nanda Devi, and ten more summits around them, all on the skyline at once. The view builds slowly before that moment. Clearings in the forest above Dhak give the first sight of the surrounding Garhwal peaks, and the meadows at Khullara open onto panoramic views of the ranges around camp. But nothing on the lower trail quite prepares you for the pass itself. Summit day is the heart of the trek. You leave Khullara early, carrying all the water you will need, because there are no water sources on the route. The first 3.5 km lead to Khullara Top, across a broken bridge and a stream that in winter lies frozen. Then the ridge begins. In the snow season you climb it on a white trail, in short pushes, resting every fifteen minutes or so to keep your legs and lungs steady; the effort is moderate to strenuous, and the wind on the high ground can be strong. Then the gradient eases, the ridge opens out, and the mountains arrive all at once. You find Nanda Devi. You find Kamet. Somewhere around the tenth peak you stop counting and simply stand there. The return is part of what makes the day work. Because the pass is climbed as a there-and-back walk from Khullara, you come down that evening to the same tents in the same meadow, with nothing to pack before you leave and nothing to set up when you return. It is a 13 km day of 8–9 hours, the longest of the trek, and in our experience the one that stays with you longest afterwards. Two nights at Khullara turn the hardest day into a single, focused push to the best view on the route. ### The Forest Itself Kuari Pass is as much a forest walk as a mountain one. From Dhak, the dusty village paths soon give way to green slopes, terraced farms and settlements such as Tugasi, where the traditional life of the Garhwali people carries on beside the trail. Above the villages, the path enters a canopy of oak and rhododendron that gives cool shade on the first climb to Gulling, a tucked-away campsite inside the forest where the day ends with warm tea and crisp mountain air. The next morning the slopes grow gentler. The trail crosses a small stream and winds through mixed forest of conifers, oaks and rhododendrons before opening onto the meadows of Khullara, ringed by coniferous forest, with snow peaks beyond. In winter, all of it changes. Every tree and every stretch of trail between Gulling and Khullara is blanketed in thick snow, the meadows turn into wide white fields, and the stream below Khullara Top freezes over. In March the snow begins to retreat from the lower trail and the rhododendrons come into bloom, while the higher sections still hold their snow. On the way down, the same forests of oak, rhododendron and conifer lead you back to Dhak, with final views of the meadows, the valleys and the distant snow peaks, and a last look at village life before the road. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Kuari Pass trek is graded easy to moderate, and we are happy to recommend it for a first Himalayan trek – provided you are comfortable walking for a full day. Trek days range from 5 to 13 km and from about 4 to 9 hours. The first climb from Dhak to Gulling is 6 km over 5–6 hours, the walk to Khullara is a gentler 5 km in about 4 hours, and the way down is 11 km over 6–7 hours, a long, steady descent that tests the knees. The hard day is the pass: 13 km over 8–9 hours, with a ridge climb, a frozen stream, a broken bridge, no water on the way and snow underfoot in winter. No technical climbing or previous high-altitude experience is needed, but a good base level of fitness is, and we recommend starting your preparation at least six weeks before departure. Experienced trekkers who want a wide mountain view on a well-paced route will find plenty here too. Season: October to April, with December to March the window for snow. ### Key Highlights of the Kuari Pass Trek - **A 180° summit panorama** – fourteen Himalayan peaks from the pass at 3,815 m (12,516 ft), including Kedarnath, Chaukhamba, Kamet and Nanda Devi - **Great peaks along the way** – Nanda Devi, Kamet, Dronagiri, Trishul, Bertholi, Hathi Ghodi Parvat, Mana and Neelkanth - **A true winter snow trek** – from December to February the forests, meadows and trail lie under snow - **Rhododendrons in March** – blooms on the lower trail while the higher sections still hold snow - **Forests of oak, rhododendron and deodar** – with mixed conifer forest on almost every trek day - **Two nights at Khullara** – a meadow camp at 3,350 m, so summit day starts and ends at the same tents - **The approach to Khullara Top** – a broken bridge and a stream that freezes in winter, before the ridge climb to the pass - **Garhwali villages** – terraced fields and hamlets such as Tugasi at the start of the trail ### Best Time to Do the Kuari Pass Trek The Kuari Pass trek runs from October through to April. For a trail completely draped in snow, the ideal window is winter, from December to March, when the forests and meadows lie white and the views of the snow-covered Himalayan ranges are, in our view, at their finest. Within the season, each stretch of months gives the trek a distinctly different character. #### December to February – Peak Winter (The Classic Snow Trek) This is Kuari Pass at its most complete. Snow covers the forests, the meadows and the trail itself, every oak and rhododendron between Gulling and Khullara carries its load of white, and the stream below Khullara Top is frozen. The ridge to the pass is a snow climb, which makes summit day harder and the arrival at the top all the more rewarding. For trekkers who want a classic Himalayan snow trek without going above 4,000 m, this is the window we would choose. - **Temperatures:** Day: 8°C to 14°C | Night: -14°C to -8°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the trail, forests and meadows. Frozen stream and icy sections on summit day; high winds possible on the ridge. - **Best for:** The full snow-trek experience, white forests and snow-covered peaks. #### March to April – Late Season (Snow Above, Blossom Below) March is the turn of the season. The snow begins to melt on the lower trail and the rhododendrons come into bloom, while the higher sections still hold snow, so the trek moves from flowering forest to snow as you climb. By April, the last month of the season, the days are noticeably milder. For trekkers who want some snow without the deepest winter cold, this is a well-balanced choice. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 17°C | Night: around 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow melting on the lower trail in March, with snow still on the higher sections. - **Best for:** Rhododendron blooms with snow above, and milder days towards the end of the season. #### October to November – Opening of the Season October and November open the Kuari Pass season. The route is the same – village fields at Dhak, the forest camp at Gulling, the meadows of Khullara and the long ridge to the pass – and the 180° panorama still waits at the top. What these months do not promise is the full snow cover that defines the winter trek, so if snow is the main reason you are coming, wait for December. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 15°C | Night: around 0°C - **Trail conditions:** The same forest and meadow trail; for a route fully under snow, choose December to March. - **Best for:** Trekkers whose dates fall early in the season and who come mainly for the forest walk and the view from the pass. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the classic Kuari Pass experience – snow on every tree, a frozen stream and a white ridge to the pass – book a December to February batch. For rhododendrons in bloom with snow still on the higher trail, choose March. If your dates fall in October, November or April, the panorama from the pass is still reason enough to go; just know that the deepest snow belongs to the heart of winter. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Pipalkoti **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Pipalkoti (~215 km, ~9 hrs) | Altitude: 1,883 m (6,175 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a road day. The shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM or Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) at 08:00 AM and follows the Badrinath Road north into the Garhwal hills. It is long, about 9 hours for 215 km, with the Alaknanda beside you for much of the way. You pass the sacred confluences at Devprayag, Rudraprayag, Karnaprayag and Nandaprayag, and the river grows louder as you climb. Small villages and roadside dhabas break up the journey. By evening you reach Pipalkoti, a quiet town known for its hot springs and apple orchards. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis, with dinner served there. There is no ATM at Pipalkoti, so carry enough cash from Rishikesh, Dehradun or your home city. Jio and BSNL may work at Pipalkoti, but expect little or no network once the trek starts. The town has a few small shops for basic trekking items; we recommend you arrive with everything you need. What to Expect: - About 215 km (around 9 hrs) from Rishikesh on the Badrinath Road - River confluences at Devprayag, Rudraprayag, Karnaprayag and Nandaprayag - No ATM at Pipalkoti – carry enough cash before you leave Rishikesh - Patchy Jio and BSNL signal at Pipalkoti, little to none on the trail - Guesthouse or homestay with dinner included - Overnight: Pipalkoti (1,883 m / 6,175 ft) ### Day 2: Pipalkoti to Dhak by road, then trek to Gulling **Route Details:** **Drive: Pipalkoti → Dhak (15 km, 40–45 mins) | Altitude: 2,050 m → 2,900 m (9,600 ft) | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: village trail and terraced fields, then oak and rhododendron forest | Stay: Tents at Gulling** Day 2 is your first day on foot. After a hearty breakfast at Pipalkoti, a 15 km drive of 40 to 45 minutes on mountain roads brings you to Dhak village at 2,050 m, the trailhead. Before you start walking, fill every water bottle you have. Water sources on this trail can be limited, and in our experience it is better to carry a little extra than to ration water on the climb. The trail begins with a moderate ascent. The first stretch out of Dhak is dusty, then the path turns green and runs past terraced fields and traditional mountain settlements such as Tugasi village. This is your first day of real height gain on foot, and the common mistake is to start too fast. Keep a slow, steady rhythm, keep your daypack light, and take short breaks before you feel you need them. Your packed lunch travels with you on the trail. Higher up, the trail enters a forest of oak and rhododendron. The canopy gives cool shade, and the climb feels easier under it. Through gaps in the trees you get wide views of the Garhwal peaks around you. The gradient stays moderate, but the forest section is long. Hold the pace you started with and it passes steadily. By late afternoon you reach Gulling at 2,900 m, a tucked-away campsite on the forest slope. This is your first night in tents. Rest your legs, have a warm cup of tea and settle into camp as the air turns crisp. Dinner is served at camp. Put on your warm layers before the sun goes down, and on a clear night step out to see the stars. What to Expect: - 15 km drive (40–45 mins) from Pipalkoti to the trailhead at Dhak (2,050 m) - Fill your bottles at Dhak; water sources on the trail can be limited - Moderate ascent past terraced fields and Tugasi village - Shaded oak and rhododendron forest with views of the Garhwal peaks - Packed lunch on the trail, tea and dinner at camp - Overnight: Tents at Gulling (2,900 m / 9,600 ft) ### Day 3: Gulling to Khullara **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,900 m → 3,350 m (11,000 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: ~4 hrs | Terrain: gentle forest slopes, a stream crossing, open meadow | Stay: Tents at Khullara** Day 3 is short and gentle, and it does important work. You gain about 450 m (1,400 ft) over 5 km, in around 4 hours. That gives your body time to adjust to the height before the climb to the pass. Start early. The slopes out of Gulling are smooth, the gradient is kind, and you reach camp with most of the afternoon still ahead. The trail winds through oak and rhododendron forest, then into wider mixed forest where conifers stand among the oaks and rhododendrons. On the way you cross a small stream, the one clear landmark of the day and a good place for a short break. As you climb, the forest gives way in places to green meadows, and the snow peaks start to show above the trees. In winter, the same walk becomes a different trek. From December to March the forest is under thick snow, with every tree and every step of the trail covered. The going is slower, and your footing matters more than your speed. Take short steps, plant your poles firmly and walk in the line your guide sets. Khullara camp at 3,350 m (11,000 ft) sits among open meadows and coniferous forest, with panoramic views of the surrounding Himalayan ranges. The early arrival is the point of today. Rest, eat well and keep drinking water through the afternoon. Tomorrow is the hardest day of the trek, and it starts early. What to Expect: - Short, gentle climb of about 450 m (1,400 ft) over 5 km - Oak, rhododendron and conifer forest on smooth slopes - A small stream crossing along the way - Thick snow on the forest trail from December to March - Open meadows and panoramic Himalayan views at camp - Overnight: Tents at Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft) ### Day 4: Summit Day - Khullara to Kuari Pass and back to Khullara **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 3,815 m (12,516 ft) → 3,350 m | Distance: 13 km (round trip) | Duration: 8–9 hrs | Terrain: stream and broken-bridge crossing, ridge climb, snow in winter | Stay: Tents at Khullara** Summit day is the hardest and the best day of the Kuari Pass Trek. You start early and go prepared for snow, icy streams and strong wind. There are no water sources anywhere on the route. Fill all your bottles at Khullara and carry enough for the whole day, up and back. The first 3.5 km take you to Khullara Top. On the way you cross a broken bridge and a stream that freezes in winter, so watch your footing on both. After Khullara Top, the trail climbs along a ridge towards the pass. This is the hard section. On a snow-covered trail the effort is moderate to strenuous, and it tests your stamina more than your skill. We recommend a short break every 15 minutes. Small steps, steady breathing and short pauses carry you up this ridge better than long pushes and long stops. At Kuari Pass, 3,815 m (12,516 ft), the view opens through 180° across the Garhwal Himalaya. Fourteen peaks stand on the skyline, among them Nanda Devi, Kamet, Chaukhamba, Kedarnath, Dronagiri, Trishul and Hathi Ghodi Parvat. Take your time here. Pick out the peaks with your guide, eat, drink and pull on a layer before the wind chills you. Then you walk back the way you came: down the ridge, past Khullara Top and across the stream to camp. The descent is easier on your lungs but harder on your knees, so keep your poles out and your steps short. Back at Khullara, a hot dinner and a warm sleeping bag close the longest day of the trek. What to Expect: - Early start; carry all your water, as there are no water sources on the route - Broken bridge and a stream crossing (frozen in winter) on the 3.5 km to Khullara Top - Moderate to strenuous ridge climb on snow, with short breaks every 15 minutes - 180° view of 14 peaks, including Nanda Devi, Kamet, Chaukhamba and Kedarnath - Descent by the same route; poles help on the way down - Overnight: Tents at Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft) ### Day 5: Khullara to Dhak, drive to Pipalkoti **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 2,050 m (6,750 ft) | Distance: 11 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: steady descent through oak, rhododendron and conifer forest | Drive: Dhak → Pipalkoti (15 km) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay at Pipalkoti** Day 5 is the long walk down. After breakfast you leave Khullara on a steadily sloping trail and lose height all day, back through the oak, rhododendron and conifer forest you climbed through on Days 2 and 3. The 11 km take 6 to 7 hours. It is familiar ground, walked in one go. Descents tire you in a different way. Your knees and thighs do the work, and the fatigue shows late in the day. Shorten your stride on the steeper parts, keep your poles in front of you and do not rush the final stretch into Dhak. Drink water at every break, even when the downhill feels easy. Through the trees you get your last wide views of the meadows, the snow peaks and the valleys below, so stop for them now and then. At Dhak the walking ends, and you are back among village fields and houses. A shared cab, paid directly to the driver, takes you on the short drive to Pipalkoti, where you check into a guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis. Dinner is served there. Have a proper wash, a warm meal and an early night. Tomorrow is a long day on the road, and the start is early. What to Expect: - Steady 11 km descent from Khullara, 6–7 hrs - Oak, rhododendron and conifer forest with last views of meadows and snow peaks - Poles and short steps take the load off your knees - Village life at Dhak, where the walking ends - Short drive by shared taxi or vehicle to Pipalkoti - Overnight: Pipalkoti (1,883 m / 6,175 ft) ### Day 6: Pipalkoti to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Pipalkoti → Rishikesh (215 km, 8–10 hrs) | Altitude: 1,883 m (6,175 ft) | Drop: Tapovan (Rishikesh) or Dehradun Railway Station** The last day is a long drive back to the plains. Leave Pipalkoti early, preferably before 6:30 AM, because the road can take 8 to 10 hours depending on conditions. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The route runs back through the Panchprayag region, past the river valleys, towns and distant peaks you saw on Day 1. Expect to reach Rishikesh (Tapovan) by about 7:00 PM and Dehradun Railway Station by about 9:00 PM. Drop points are Tapovan in Rishikesh and Dehradun Railway Station. Meals on the road are not included, so keep some cash for a roadside stop. If you have onward travel booked, leave a margin for road delays. We recommend a late-night or next-day connection rather than an early-evening one. What to Expect: - Early departure, preferably before 6:30 AM - 215 km drive, 8–10 hrs depending on road conditions - Return through the Panchprayag region and the river valleys of Garhwal - Meals on the road are not included - Arrival around 7:00 PM in Rishikesh and around 9:00 PM in Dehradun - Trek ends at Pipalkoti; drop at Rishikesh (Tapovan) or Dehradun Railway Station ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: guesthouse or homestay in Pipalkoti, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Gulling and Khullara #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - All technical equipment needed on the trek, including ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Rishikesh (or Dehradun) to Pipalkoti and back. We help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers; a shared cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, split among the trekkers in it. - Pickup from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM or Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) at 08:00 AM; the return cab drops at both - Travel to and from Dehradun or Rishikesh (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive to and from Pipalkoti #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Pipalkoti #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - If an item is not listed under inclusions, it is not part of the package; ask in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20–25 km / ~45 min from Rishikesh and about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The taxis leave early in the morning, so fly in the day before. **From Rishikesh to Pipalkoti:** 215 km, about 9 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM or from Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) at 08:00 AM to Pipalkoti and back, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. A shared cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, split among the trekkers in it. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab from Pipalkoti is expected to reach Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) by 07:00 PM and Dehradun Railway Station by 9:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway stations:** Dehradun (DDN) for the 06:30 AM taxi, or Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (~1 hr) from Rishikesh, for the 08:00 AM taxi from Tapovan. Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK) has only a few trains, so book early. - **To Dehradun** – the overnight Nanda Devi Express suits the early taxi; the Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat are day trains for the day before. - **To Haridwar** – the best-connected option from Delhi (Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains), then about 1 hr by road to Rishikesh. - **To Yog Nagari Rishikesh** – a few direct trains such as the Yoga Express and the Kalinga Utkal Express; plan to arrive a day early. Check current timings before you book. **From Rishikesh to Pipalkoti:** 215 km, about 9 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM or from Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) at 08:00 AM to Pipalkoti and back, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. A shared cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, split among the trekkers in it. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab from Pipalkoti is expected to reach Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) by 07:00 PM and Dehradun Railway Station by 9:00 PM. Book a late-night train or travel the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh takes about 6–7 hrs by overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways buses; buses to Dehradun ISBT take about the same time. Choose government buses from inside the ISBT and avoid private buses that leave from outside it. From Rishikesh bus stand, an auto, shared three-wheeler or app cab takes you to Jumping Heights, Tapovan. **From Rishikesh to Pipalkoti:** 215 km, about 9 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM or from Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) at 08:00 AM to Pipalkoti and back, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. A shared cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, split among the trekkers in it. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab from Pipalkoti is expected to reach Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) by 07:00 PM and Dehradun Railway Station by 9:00 PM. Book a late-night bus or travel the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - There is no ATM at Pipalkoti, the base camp - Carry enough cash from Rishikesh, Dehradun or your home city - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - At Pipalkoti, Jio and BSNL work, but the signal is spotty and weather-dependent - On the trail expect little or no signal, apart from short coverage on the first and last day - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kuari Pass trek, and where does it start? The Kuari Pass trek is in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalaya. It starts from Pipalkoti, a town on the Badrinath Road about 215 km (around 9 hours) by road from Rishikesh. From Pipalkoti a 15 km drive takes you to the trailhead at Dhak (2,050 m), and the trail climbs past Tugasi village and through forest to the camps at Gulling and Khullara. ### How many days is the Kuari Pass trek? The Kuari Pass trek takes 6 days, Pipalkoti to Pipalkoti (pickup and drop in Rishikesh by road), with 4 trekking days covering about 35 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Rishikesh and Pipalkoti (215 km, 8–10 hours) - **Days 2–5:** trekking, 5–13 km a day - **Longest day:** summit day (Day 4), a 13 km round trip in 8–9 hours ### What is the altitude of the Kuari Pass trek? The highest point of the Kuari Pass trek is the pass itself at 3,815 m (12,516 ft). The trail starts at Dhak (2,050 m / 6,750 ft), the trailhead, so you gain about 1,765 m over three trekking days. - **Pipalkoti (base):** 1,883 m / 6,175 ft - **Gulling camp:** 2,900 m / 9,600 ft - **Khullara camp:** 3,350 m / 11,000 ft ### What is the difficulty level of the Kuari Pass trek? The Kuari Pass trek is graded Easy–Moderate. The first two trekking days are gradual, but summit day is long, with a moderate to strenuous ridge climb that is on snow in winter. - **Day 2:** 6 km with a moderate ascent of about 850 m - **Day 3:** a short, gentle 5 km climb of about 450 m - **Summit day:** 13 km in 8–9 hours, with a broken-bridge and stream crossing - **Day 5:** a steady 11 km descent; poles take the load off your knees ### Is the Kuari Pass trek good for beginners? Yes, the Kuari Pass trek is graded Easy–Moderate and fit beginners can do it. The daily climbs are gradual and you sleep no higher than 3,350 m, but summit day takes 8–9 hours. In winter the trail is under snow; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, and the group takes short breaks every 15 minutes on the ridge climb. ### What fitness level do I need for the Kuari Pass trek? For the Kuari Pass trek you should be comfortable walking 4–9 hours a day, including a 13 km summit day of 8–9 hours, on snow in winter. - **Climbs:** up to about 850 m of height gain in a day - **Descents:** 11 km downhill on Day 5, so strong knees and legs help - **Health:** consult your doctor before the trek ### What is the best time for the Kuari Pass trek? The best time for the Kuari Pass trek is December to March, when the whole trail is under snow. Trekkaro runs the trek from October to April. - **December to March:** a full snow trek, with the coldest nights - **October, November and April:** outside the main snow months, but the nights at camp are still cold ### Is there snow on the Kuari Pass trek? Yes, the Kuari Pass trek is under snow from December to March, with thick snow on the forest trail and snow on the ridge to the pass. - **Forest trail:** thick snow between Gulling and Khullara in winter - **Summit day:** the ridge climb is on snow, and the stream on the way is frozen - **Gear:** free microspikes and gaiters for snow and ice ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Kuari Pass trek? On the Kuari Pass trek, winter (December–February) days are about 8°C to 14°C and nights drop to -14°C to -8°C. In March–April, days are about 13°C to 17°C, and in October–November about 10°C to 15°C, with nights around 0°C in both. - **Layers:** 5 warm layers – thermal top and bottom, 2 fleece or woollen layers and a padded jacket - **Water:** one insulated bottle so your water does not freeze - **Sleeping:** keep one set of thermals dry for the night ### Which mountains can you see on the Kuari Pass trek? From the top of the Kuari Pass trek you get a 180° view of 14 peaks, including Nanda Devi, Kamet, Chaukhamba and Kedarnath. - **Forest days:** views of the Garhwal peaks through oak and rhododendron forest - **Khullara camp:** open meadows with panoramic Himalayan views - **Drive:** the river confluences at Devprayag, Rudraprayag, Karnaprayag and Nandaprayag on the way to Pipalkoti ### What is the terrain like on the Kuari Pass trek? The Kuari Pass trek moves from village trails and terraced fields into oak, rhododendron and conifer forest, then open meadows and a ridge to the pass. - **Day 2:** village trail past Tugasi, then shaded oak and rhododendron forest - **Day 3:** gentle forest slopes, a small stream crossing and open meadow - **Day 4:** a broken-bridge and stream crossing, then a ridge climb, on snow in winter - **Day 5:** a steady descent through the same forest to Dhak ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Kuari Pass trek? The Kuari Pass trek reaches 3,815 m, so some risk of altitude sickness exists, but the height gain is gradual and the highest camp, Khullara, is at 3,350 m. You climb to the pass and return to Khullara the same day. - **Gradual gain:** about 850 m on Day 2 and 450 m on Day 3 - **At every camp:** a first-aid kit, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher for emergency evacuation - **Before you go:** consult your doctor and carry your own medicines ### How do I reach the Kuari Pass trek? The Kuari Pass trek starts from Pipalkoti, 215 km (about 9 hours) by road from Rishikesh. Shared cabs, booked with Trekkaro’s help and paid directly to the driver, pick you up in Dehradun or Rishikesh on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 45 minutes from Rishikesh; fly in the day before - **By train:** Dehradun (DDN) for the 06:30 AM taxi, or Haridwar Junction, about 1 hour from Rishikesh, for the 08:00 AM taxi from Tapovan - **By bus:** overnight buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh or Dehradun take 6–7 hours ### Is transport included in the Kuari Pass trek? No, transport is not included in the Kuari Pass trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Rishikesh (or Dehradun) to Pipalkoti and back, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers; the fare is about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. Pickup on Day 1 is from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM or Rishikesh (Jumping Heights, Tapovan) at 08:00 AM; on Day 6 the cab drops you in Rishikesh around 07:00 PM and at Dehradun Railway Station around 9:00 PM. Meals during the drive to and from Pipalkoti are also not included. ### Where do we stay on the Kuari Pass trek? On the Kuari Pass trek you stay in a guesthouse, camp or homestay at Pipalkoti and in tents at Gulling and Khullara. - **Pipalkoti (Day 1 and Day 5):** triple or quad sharing - **Trek camps:** 3-person tents with large mess tents and tables; sleeping bags provided - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek, for solo trekkers or couples ### Who leads the Kuari Pass trek, and are local guides included? The Kuari Pass trek is led by experienced Trekkaro trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides who know the trail. On summit day the group climbs the ridge with short breaks every 15 minutes and comes down by the same route. ### What food is served on the Kuari Pass trek? The Kuari Pass trek includes all meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food. - **On the trail:** packed lunch, so carry a reusable lunch box - **At camp:** tea, coffee, soups and snacks served regularly - **Not included:** meals on the drive to and from Pipalkoti ### Is drinking water available on the Kuari Pass trek? Water sources on the Kuari Pass trek are limited, so fill your bottles at Dhak, and on summit day carry all your water, as there are no sources on the route. - **Bottles:** two 1 L bottles, one of them insulated - **Winter:** the insulated bottle stops your water from freezing ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Kuari Pass trek? Yes, the Kuari Pass trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes, a jacket or poles. - **Included:** trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and a trekking pole - **Also free:** microspikes and gaiters for snow and ice - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Own shoes:** your own broken-in, waterproof pair with ankle support is welcome too ### Is backpack offloading available on the Kuari Pass trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Kuari Pass trek costs ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the full trek. - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Last-minute requests:** may cost more if made at Pipalkoti - **Day pack:** a 20–30 L day pack is needed if you offload ### Is there medical support on the Kuari Pass trek? Every camp on the Kuari Pass trek has a first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders, plus a stretcher for emergency evacuation. - **Team:** experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides - **Your own kit:** regular and prescribed medicines, blister plasters, pain relief and ORS - **Insurance:** mandatory travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation ### What documents do I need for the Kuari Pass trek? For the Kuari Pass trek you need a government photo ID, a medical certificate signed by a registered doctor and travel insurance. - **Photo ID:** original and a photocopy (passport, Aadhaar card, driving licence or voter ID) - **Medical certificate:** signed by a registered doctor - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Are permits included in the Kuari Pass trek? Yes, all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Kuari Pass trek fee. Carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy for the trek. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kuari Pass trek? There is no ATM at Pipalkoti, the Kuari Pass trek base camp, and mobile signal on the trail is little to none. - **Cash:** carry enough from Rishikesh, Dehradun or your home city; ATMs on the way are scarce and may not work - **At Pipalkoti:** patchy Jio and BSNL signal, depending on the weather - **On the trail:** only intermittent signal on the first and last trekking days - **Power bank:** cold drains phone batteries fast ### Are there toilets on the Kuari Pass trek? Yes, Trekkaro sets up eco-friendly toilet tents at all campsites on the Kuari Pass trek. - **Bring:** your own toilet paper and hand sanitiser - **Avoid:** wet wipes, as they are not biodegradable - **Waste:** carry plastic or ziploc bags to bring your waste back ### Can I leave extra luggage at the Kuari Pass base camp? Yes, you can leave extra luggage at the Kuari Pass base camp in Pipalkoti before the trek, free of charge. Carry only what you need on the trail; an offloaded backpack can weigh up to 9 kg. ### What is summit day like on the Kuari Pass trek? Summit day on the Kuari Pass trek (Day 4) is a 13 km round trip from Khullara to the pass at 3,815 m, taking 8–9 hours. - **Start:** early, carrying all your water, as there are no water sources on the route - **First 3.5 km:** a broken bridge and a stream crossing (frozen in winter) to Khullara Top - **Ridge climb:** moderate to strenuous, on snow, with short breaks every 15 minutes - **Top:** a 180° view of 14 peaks; the descent is by the same route ### What should I pack for the Kuari Pass trek? For the Kuari Pass trek, pack for snow and freezing nights: 5 warm layers, a waterproof shell and good sun protection. Shoes, the padded jacket, poles, microspikes and gaiters come with Free Trekking Gear. - **Bags:** a 50–60 L backpack with rain cover and a 20–30 L day pack - **Clothes:** 2 sets of thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers, 2 quick-dry trek pants (no jeans) and 3–4 pairs of socks - **Accessories:** woollen cap, balaclava, two pairs of gloves, UV sunglasses and SPF 50+ sunscreen - **Essentials:** headlamp, power bank, personal medicines and enough cash ### What is the minimum age for the Kuari Pass trek? The minimum age for the Kuari Pass trek is 8 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 13 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 20 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 27 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - 29 Nov 2026 to 4 Dec 2026 - … 44 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kuari-pass-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Kunjapuri Trek > Kunjapuri Trek is a 2-day easy trek in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, reaching 1,676 m (5,499 ft). It covers about 18 km on foot and starts at Neer Garh and ends at Tapovan. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹3,600 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (40 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kunjapuri-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 2 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 1,676 m / 5,499 ft - **Trekking distance:** 18 km - **Region:** Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Neer Garh / Tapovan - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 18°C to 27°C, Night 9°C to 16°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 10°C to 18°C, Night 1°C to 7°C | Spring/Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 20°C to 32°C, Night 10°C to 20°C - **Price:** ₹3,600 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (40 upcoming) ## Overview Most people see Kunjapuri from the window of a pre-dawn taxi. On this trek you earn it: a forest climb from the edge of Rishikesh, a night on the ridge below the temple, and a short walk up the stone stairs in the dark to watch the sun come up over the Garhwal hills. Below you, the Ganga catches the first light. Behind you, on a clear morning, the snow peaks of the Gangotri and Kedarnath country stand along the northern sky. The Kunjapuri trek climbs from Neer Garh, just above Tapovan in Rishikesh, to the Kunjapuri Devi temple at 1,676 m (5,499 ft) on a forested ridge in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, about 8 km from Narendra Nagar. It is a 2-day trek of about 18 km: up through the villages of Dharkot and Pater on Day 1 to a camp on the ridge, and down through Barkot and Badhera villages to Tapovan on Day 2, after sunrise at the temple. Pickup and drop are in Rishikesh, so the whole trek fits into a weekend from Delhi. Kunjapuri is one of the Shakti Peeths, the shrines where, according to legend, parts of the goddess Sati fell to earth as Shiva carried her body across the Himalaya. Together with Surkanda Devi and Chandrabadni it forms a sacred triangle of Devi temples in Tehri district, and pilgrims climb to it all year, in the largest numbers during Navratri. For a trekker it is something simpler as well: the first high ridge north of Rishikesh, close enough to reach in a morning, high enough to see the Himalaya. ### A Temple Above the Clouds – What Makes the Kunjapuri Trek Unmissable The reason to do Kunjapuri on foot, and to sleep up there, is the morning. Day visitors leave Rishikesh at four in the morning and arrive half-asleep in a crowd. On this trek you are already on the ridge. You wake in the dark, drink something hot, and walk a few minutes to the foot of the temple stairs. By the time you reach the courtyard the sky over the eastern hills is turning orange, and the valleys below are still full of shadow, or of cloud on a winter morning, so that the temple seems to float above a white sea. Then the light reaches the north. On a clear day the horizon lines up from Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini to the Gangotri group and Chaukhamba, while to the south the land falls away to Rishikesh, the bends of the Ganga, Haridwar and the Doon valley. The temple bells start for the morning aarti. It is a view that takes in the plains you came from and the mountains you might go to next, and on this trek you have it with time to spare. The other half of the trek is the walk itself. Very few visitors see the forest between Rishikesh and the ridge, the small farming villages, the springs and the stepped fields. In two days you go from the ashrams and cafes of Tapovan to a quiet ridge and back, and it never feels far from home – which is exactly why it suits a first trek. ### The Trail Itself The climb starts near Neer Garh waterfall, a short drive from Tapovan, and the first hour follows a stream through mixed forest of sal, chir pine and broadleaf trees. Above the falls the path becomes a village trail, stone steps and dirt tracks climbing between terraced fields to Dharkot and Pater, where the houses look out over the Ganga valley. Higher up, oak and rhododendron take over, the air cools, and the last stretch joins the ridge a short walk below the temple. The descent on Day 2 takes a different line, through Barkot and Badhera villages and past a small waterfall, so you see new ground on the way down. The trail has no exposed sections and no snow work; the challenge is the steady height gain of about 1,200 m on Day 1. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Kunjapuri trek is graded easy, and we recommend it for first-time trekkers, families with children who already walk well, school and college groups, and anyone who wants a short, gentle introduction to Himalayan trekking. The harder day is Day 1: about 9 km and 5–6 hours of steady climbing from Neer Garh to the ridge camp, with a height gain of roughly 1,200 m. Day 2 is about 9 km, almost all downhill, which asks more of the knees than the lungs. We recommend three to four weeks of preparation, with brisk walks, stair climbing or jogging. Children aged 8 and above can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: September to June, with a break for the monsoon in July and August. ### Key Highlights of the Kunjapuri Trek - **Sunrise at the Kunjapuri Devi temple** – 1,676 m (5,499 ft), one of the Shakti Peeths of Garhwal, with the morning aarti - **Himalayan views from a foothill ridge** – Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, the Gangotri group and Chaukhamba on clear mornings - **The Ganga from above** – Rishikesh, Haridwar and the Doon valley spread out to the south - **A night on the ridge** – a camp below the temple, with the lights of Rishikesh twinkling far below after dark - **Villages on foot** – Dharkot, Pater, Barkot and Badhera, with terraced fields, cattle sheds and springs - **Neer Garh waterfall** – a cool, shaded start to the climb from Tapovan - **A different trail down** – an up-and-down loop, so Day 2 brings new villages and forest - **Weekend-friendly** – pickup and drop in Rishikesh, back by mid-afternoon on Day 2 ### Best Time to Do the Kunjapuri Trek The Kunjapuri trek runs from September to June and pauses for the monsoon, when the forest trail turns slippery and clouds hide the sunrise. Because the ridge is only 1,676 m high, the seasons here are mild compared with the high Himalaya; what changes most is the clarity of the view and the heat on the lower trail. #### September to November – Autumn (Clearest Views) After the monsoon has washed the air, autumn brings the sharpest mountain views of the year, green fields in the villages and comfortable walking. Days are 18°C to 27°C and nights at camp 9°C to 16°C. Navratri, in September or October, fills the temple with pilgrims and colour. October and November are our favourite months for this trek. #### December to February – Winter (Sea of Clouds) Winter mornings are crisp, and the valleys below the ridge fill with cloud and mist, giving the classic view of the temple above a white sea with the snow peaks clear in the north. Days are 10°C to 18°C, while nights at camp fall to 1°C to 7°C, so bring proper warm layers. On a rare cold spell the ridge sees a light dusting of snow that melts within a day or two. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (Rhododendrons and Long Days) In March and April the rhododendrons bloom red in the upper forest and the days are pleasant. By May and June the lower trail out of Rishikesh is hot, and we start the climb early. Across the season, days range from 20°C to 32°C and nights at camp from 10°C to 20°C. Haze can blur the distant peaks in summer, but sunrise over the hills stays beautiful, and the ridge stays cooler than the town below. ### Kunjapuri Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Kunjapuri trek costs ₹3,600 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days from Neer Garh (Tapovan, Rishikesh) to Tapovan (Rishikesh), with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Rishikesh is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Kunjapuri Ridge Camp **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Neer Garh (about 8 km, 30 min) | Trek: Neer Garh → Dharkot → Pater → Kunjapuri ridge camp | Distance: 9 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Altitude: 450 m → 1,600 m** We meet at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 09:00 AM. After introductions and a gear check, a short shared-cab ride of about 30 minutes takes the group past Tapovan to the start of the trail near Neer Garh waterfall. Your trek leader gives a short briefing on pace, water and the day ahead, and checks everyone’s pulse and oxygen level before the walk begins. The first stretch follows the stream up past the Neer Garh falls, shaded by sal, chir pine and broadleaf forest. It is a pleasant warm-up, with pools and small cascades beside the path. Above the waterfall the trail leaves the stream and starts to climb in earnest on stone steps and dirt paths between terraced fields, and the noise of Rishikesh fades behind you. By late morning you reach Dharkot, a small farming village with views back down to the Ganga. We stop here for a packed lunch and a rest, then continue up to Pater. The climb is steady rather than steep, but it rarely lets up, so walk at your own pace and keep drinking water. Water from village taps is available; your trek leader will tell you where to refill. Above Pater the forest changes to oak and rhododendron, and the air turns noticeably cooler. The last section joins the ridge a short walk below the temple, where camp is already pitched. Evening brings tea, snacks and, on a clear day, a wide sunset over the hills, then the lights of Rishikesh and Haridwar coming on far below. Dinner is early, as the alarm rings before dawn. What to Expect: - 09:00 AM pickup at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station - Neer Garh waterfall and a shaded forest start - Village trail through Dharkot and Pater - Steady climb of about 1,200 m; the harder of the two days - Sunset over the Garhwal hills from the ridge - Overnight: camping on the Kunjapuri ridge in 3-person tents ### Day 2: Sunrise at Kunjapuri Temple, Descent to Tapovan **Route Details:** **Trek: Camp → Kunjapuri temple → Barkot → Badhera → Tapovan | Distance: 9 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude: 1,600 m → 1,676 m → 400 m** We wake about an hour before sunrise, which falls between about 05:15 AM in early summer and about 07:00 AM in mid-winter. After a hot drink, the group walks up by headlamp to the road and climbs the stone stairs to the temple courtyard. It is a short walk, but the stairs are steep; take them slowly. At the top you stand at 1,676 m (5,499 ft), the highest point of the trek. As the sky lightens, the sun rises over the eastern hills and the valleys below turn from blue to gold. On many winter mornings they are filled with cloud. To the north, on a clear morning, Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, the Gangotri group and Chaukhamba catch the first light, while to the south the Ganga winds past Rishikesh towards Haridwar. Stay for the morning aarti if you like; please respect the temple’s customs and remove your shoes in the shrine area. Back at camp, breakfast is waiting. After packing up, we start the descent on a different trail from the one we climbed, dropping off the ridge through oak and rhododendron forest to Barkot village and then on to Badhera. The path is steep in places and loose after rain, so trekking poles help a great deal, and the trek leader sets a careful pace on the rougher sections. Lower down, the forest turns to pine and sal again and the trail passes a small waterfall, a good spot for a last break. You reach Tapovan around midday or early afternoon, after about 9 km and 4–5 hours on foot. The trek ends here, and the group can share a cab back to Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station, with time for an afternoon train or bus, or an evening at the Ganga aarti. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn walk by headlamp to the Kunjapuri temple - Sunrise from 1,676 m (5,499 ft) with views of the Gangotri and Kedarnath peaks on clear days - Morning aarti at the temple - A new trail down through Barkot and Badhera villages - Steep, knee-testing descent; trekking poles recommended - Overnight: no stay (trek ends at Tapovan, Rishikesh) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: camping on the Kunjapuri ridge below the temple, in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals on the trek, from Day 1 lunch on the trail to Day 2 breakfast at camp - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 2-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Rishikesh to the Neer Garh trailhead on Day 1, and Tapovan back to Rishikesh railway station on Day 2 - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Rishikesh, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Neer Garh (Tapovan, Rishikesh) #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20 km / 40 min from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The pickup is at 09:00 AM, so an early-morning flight can work, but flying in the day before and staying in Rishikesh is safer. **From Rishikesh to Neer Garh:** about 8 km, 30 min by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 09:00 AM to the trailhead. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The trek ends at Tapovan around midday or early afternoon on Day 2. A short shared cab takes you back to Rishikesh, and Jolly Grant is another 40 min away. An evening flight on Day 2 is possible; the next day is more relaxed. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK), which is also the pickup point. Haridwar (HW), about 25 km / 1 hr away, has far more trains from Delhi and the rest of India. - **Overnight trains to Haridwar** – arrive early in the morning, then take a cab, bus or shared auto to Rishikesh. - **Direct trains to Yog Nagari Rishikesh** – fewer in number; check whether one fits your dates. Check current timings before you book. **From Rishikesh to Neer Garh:** about 8 km, 30 min by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 09:00 AM to the trailhead. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The trek ends at Tapovan around midday or early afternoon on Day 2. Plan your train home from Rishikesh or Haridwar for the evening of Day 2 or later. ### By road **By bus:** Ordinary and Volvo buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses from inside the ISBT. From the Rishikesh bus stand, take an auto or cab to Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station for the 09:00 AM pickup. **From Rishikesh to Neer Garh:** about 8 km, 30 min by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from the station to the trailhead. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** The trek ends at Tapovan around midday or early afternoon on Day 2. Plan your bus home from Rishikesh for the evening of Day 2 or later. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Rishikesh and Tapovan, before the trek starts - There is no ATM in the villages on the trail or at the temple ridge - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio and Airtel work well in Rishikesh, Tapovan and on the Kunjapuri ridge - Signal is weak in the forest near Neer Garh and in the stream valleys - Make your important calls and tell your family about the patchy connectivity before you leave Rishikesh ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Kunjapuri trek, and where does it start? The Kunjapuri trek is in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, on the forested ridge north of Rishikesh, about 8 km from Narendra Nagar. It starts near Neer Garh waterfall, just above Tapovan in Rishikesh, climbs through Dharkot and Pater villages to a camp below the Kunjapuri Devi temple, and comes down through Barkot and Badhera villages to Tapovan. Trekkaro’s pickup is at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 09:00 AM on Day 1. ### How many days does the Kunjapuri trek take from Rishikesh? The Kunjapuri trek takes 2 days and 1 night, starting and ending in Rishikesh. Day 1 is the climb from Neer Garh to the ridge camp (9 km, 5–6 hours). Day 2 begins with sunrise at the temple and ends with the descent to Tapovan (9 km, 4–5 hours), reaching Rishikesh by early afternoon. The total trekking distance is about 18 km, and the trek fits comfortably into a weekend from Delhi. ### What is the maximum altitude reached on the Kunjapuri trek? The highest point of the Kunjapuri trek is the Kunjapuri Devi temple at 1,676 m (5,499 ft). The trek starts at about 450 m (1,476 ft) near Neer Garh, so Day 1 gains roughly 1,200 m. This altitude is far below the level where Acute Mountain Sickness becomes a real concern, which makes Kunjapuri a gentle introduction to trekking. The challenge lies in the steady climb, not in thin air. ### What is the difficulty level of the Kunjapuri trek? The Kunjapuri trek is graded easy. The trail is a well-used village and forest path with no exposed sections or snow work. The harder day is Day 1: about 9 km and 5–6 hours of steady uphill walking with a height gain of roughly 1,200 m. Day 2 is mostly downhill and can be tiring on the knees. With three to four weeks of walking, stair climbing or jogging beforehand, most healthy beginners finish it comfortably. ### What is the best time of year for the Kunjapuri trek? The best time for the Kunjapuri trek is October and November, when the post-monsoon air gives the clearest Himalayan views. The trek runs from September to June: - **Autumn (Sep–Nov):** sharp views, green villages and Navratri at the temple. - **Winter (Dec–Feb):** crisp mornings and a sea of clouds below the ridge. - **Spring/Summer (Mar–Jun):** rhododendrons in March and April, warmer and hazier later. We do not run it in July and August, when the trail is slippery. ### Does the Kunjapuri trek have snow at any time of year? No, the Kunjapuri trek is not a snow trek. At 1,676 m the ridge stays below the regular snowline, and the trail is free of snow for the whole season. On a rare cold spell in winter the temple ridge can get a light dusting that melts within a day or two, but you will not need microspikes or gaiters. If you want to walk in snow, the snow peaks are part of the view rather than the trail. ### How cold does it get at night on the Kunjapuri trek? Night temperatures at the Kunjapuri ridge camp range from 1°C to 20°C depending on the month: - **Autumn (Sep–Nov):** day 18°C to 27°C, night 9°C to 16°C - **Winter (Dec–Feb):** day 10°C to 18°C, night 1°C to 7°C - **Spring/Summer (Mar–Jun):** day 20°C to 32°C, night 10°C to 20°C Winter mornings at sunrise are the coldest time of the trek, so keep your jacket handy for the walk up to the temple. ### What is the minimum age for the Kunjapuri trek? The minimum age for the Kunjapuri trek is 8 years, for children who already walk regularly. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that each trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach Rishikesh for the Kunjapuri trek pickup? The Kunjapuri trek pickup is at Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 09:00 AM on Day 1. Overnight buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh in about 6–7 hours, and trains from Delhi reach Haridwar, about 25 km and an hour by road from Rishikesh, with a few running on to Yog Nagari Rishikesh. The nearest airport is Jolly Grant (DED), about 20 km and 40 minutes from Rishikesh. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, and your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The trek ends at Tapovan by early afternoon on Day 2. ### What does the Kunjapuri trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Kunjapuri trek costs ₹3,600 + 5% GST per person, for 2 days from Neer Garh (Tapovan, Rishikesh) to Tapovan (Rishikesh). It includes Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon trekking shoes, a jacket rated to -10°C, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, against a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and ₹200 washing charge), camping on the ridge in 3-person tents, all meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 2 breakfast, permits, a certified trek leader and local guide, and safety equipment. Backpack offloading (₹800) and a single tent (₹1,000) are optional add-ons. ### How do I book the Kunjapuri trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Kunjapuri trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹3,600 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Yog Nagari Rishikesh Railway Station at 09:00 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Kunjapuri trek? Yes, the Kunjapuri trek stays close to towns, so mobile signal is good for most of the route. Jio and Airtel work in Rishikesh and Tapovan, on the upper trail and on the temple ridge, with weaker patches in the forest near the streams. The last ATMs are in Rishikesh and Tapovan, and there is none on the trail. Carry some cash in small notes for tea stalls and temple offerings, as cards are not accepted in the villages. ### Do I need a permit for the Kunjapuri trek, and what ID? No separate permit is needed from you for the Kunjapuri trek: Trekkaro arranges any local permissions and camping charges as part of the trek fee. Please carry an original government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, driving licence or voter ID) along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor. Visiting the Kunjapuri Devi temple is free; any offering is your personal choice. Foreign nationals should carry their passport and a valid Indian visa. ### Is the Kunjapuri trek safe for beginners and families with children? Yes, the Kunjapuri trek is a gentle overnight trek and is well suited to beginners and families. The altitude is low, the trail has no exposed sections, and the route passes through villages, so help is never far away. Trekkaro keeps batches to 20 trekkers, with a NIM-certified (or equivalent) trek leader, daily SpO2 and pulse checks, a first-aid kit, oxygen and a stretcher with the group. The main risks are slips on the steep descent, heat on summer afternoons and dehydration. ### What should I carry for the Kunjapuri trek, and what gear is free? For the Kunjapuri trek, Free Trekking Gear covers Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes (₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). You should bring: - A 30–40 L backpack with rain cover - Two 1-litre water bottles - A headlamp for the pre-dawn walk to the temple - Thermal inners and a fleece (two warm layers in winter) - Quick-dry T-shirts and trek pants - Sun cap, sunscreen and sunglasses - A light rain jacket and personal medicines ### What are the stay and food like on the Kunjapuri trek? On the Kunjapuri trek you spend one night camping on the ridge below the temple, in 3-person tents with sleeping bags and mats, with a dining tent and a toilet tent at the campsite. Food is simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals: packed lunch on Day 1, evening tea and snacks, a hot dinner, and breakfast on Day 2 after sunrise. Tell your trek coordinator in advance about any dietary needs, and we will do our best to help. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 25 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 8 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 15 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 22 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 6 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 13 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 20 Dec 2026 - 26 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 2 Jan 2027 to 3 Jan 2027 - 9 Jan 2027 to 10 Jan 2027 - … 28 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/kunjapuri-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Mukta Top Trek > Mukta Top Trek is a 6-day easy–moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,608 m (11,838 ft). It covers about 27 km on foot and starts and ends at Kuflon. Best time: October to June. Trekkaro price: ₹9,450 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 23 Oct 2026 (36 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/mukta-top-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,608 m / 11,838 ft - **Trekking distance:** 27 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Kuflon - **Best time:** October to June - **Temperature:** Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day 6°C to 12°C, Night -5°C to 0°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 0°C to 8°C, Night -12°C to -5°C | Spring/Summer (Mar-Jun): Day 8°C to 18°C, Night -3°C to 5°C - **Price:** ₹9,450 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 23 Oct 2026 (36 upcoming) ## Overview Mukta Top is the kind of summit you have almost to yourself. Four days of forest trail lead you past a quiet alpine lake to a grassy dome at 11,838 ft, and from the top the whole western Garhwal skyline opens in a single sweep: Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag, the Gangotri peaks, Jaonli and Srikanta. Few groups walk this trail, the camps sit in silent clearings, and the monal calls through the oaks at dawn. If you want a real Himalayan trek without the crowds, this is it. The Mukta Top trek is a six-day loop in the Uttarkashi district of Garhwal, Uttarakhand. It starts and ends at Kuflon (1,400 m / 4,600 ft), a small village in the Asi Ganga valley a short drive beyond Uttarkashi town, the same valley that leads to Dodital. From Kuflon the trail climbs through Shiladhuni and the forest camp of Chaithathar to Mukta Tal, a small lake at 3,300 m (10,830 ft), and on to the summit at 3,608 m (11,838 ft). The way down takes a different line, through the camp at Kuari, so you see new country every day. The trek is about 27 km on foot, with camping on each of the four nights on the trail. It covers a lot of height for its distance: about 2,200 m of climbing from Kuflon to the summit. That steady climb through untouched forest is what gives Mukta Top its character, and it is why the view from the top feels so earned. ### A Lake, a Dome and the Gangotri Skyline – What Makes the Mukta Top Trek Unmissable The first thing that sets Mukta Top apart is the quiet. This is a newer trail, opened to trekking groups only in recent years, and the forest between Kuflon and Chaithathar still feels untouched: tall oak, pine and rhododendron, moss on the trunks, and no tea stalls or crowded campsites. Birdwatchers will love it. The Himalayan monal, with its shining blue and copper plumage, lives in these forests along with woodpeckers, pheasants and flocks of smaller birds. The second is Mukta Tal. On Day 4 the forest gives way to open meadow, and you reach a small, still lake below the summit dome, where we camp for the night. The evening light on the peaks from here is a preview of what is coming. In winter the lake freezes and the meadow lies under deep snow; in spring and autumn the grass and water reflect the sky. And then there is the summit. Mukta Top is a broad grassy dome, and from the top the view runs all the way round. Bandarpoonch and its White Peak, Kala Nag (Black Peak), the Draupadi Ka Danda peaks, Jaonli, Srikanta, the Gangotri peaks and the Bhagirathi massif line the northern and eastern horizon, with Nag Tibba far off to the south-west. For a summit under 12,000 ft, it is a rare chance to see this many named peaks in one turn of the head, and on a clear autumn morning you can trace the line of the Gangotri valley towards its glaciers. ### The Trail Itself The Mukta Top trail climbs hard in its first two days. From Kuflon a village path rises past fields and houses into forest, and the climb to Shiladhuni is short but steep. Day 3 is the big forest day, a long, steady ascent through oak, pine and rhododendron to Chaithathar at about 3,000 m (9,840 ft). Above it the forest opens into meadow on the way to Mukta Tal, and the final climb to the summit is a short walk on open grass. The descent to Kuari is long and steep in places, through forest again, and the last morning drops back to Kuflon. From December to March the upper half of the trail is under snow. What makes the route work is its shape. Because it is a loop, you never walk the same stretch twice: the climb follows one ridge up to the lake, and the descent follows another down to Kuari. The camps are spaced so that the hard days come early, while your legs are fresh, and the gentle Day 4 to Mukta Tal gives your body time to settle at height before the summit. Water is scarce on the long forest climbs, so the team plans refills at the camps, and you carry two litres between them. There are no villages or tea stalls after Kuflon. Everything you need for four nights, from tents and sleeping bags to the kitchen and the food, travels with the trek team, and you walk through forest that sees only a few groups in a season. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Mukta Top trek is graded easy to moderate, and we recommend it for fit beginners who want a longer trek, and for experienced trekkers looking for a quiet trail. The daily distances are short, but the climbs are steep. The hardest day is Day 5: about 8 km and 7–8 hours, with the summit climb from Mukta Tal followed by a long descent of more than 1,200 m to Kuari. We recommend six weeks of preparation before departure, with the aim of jogging 5 km in 40 minutes. Children aged 10 and above can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: October to June. ### Key Highlights of the Mukta Top Trek - **A 360-degree summit view** – Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag, Jaonli, Srikanta, the Gangotri peaks and the Bhagirathi massif from 3,608 m (11,838 ft) - **Mukta Tal** – a small alpine lake below the summit, with a camp beside it - **A quiet trail** – a newer route with few trekkers and untouched forest - **Old forests** – oak, pine and rhododendron on the climb from Kuflon and the descent to Kuari - **Birdlife** – the Himalayan monal, woodpeckers and pheasants in the forest - **A loop route** – up through Chaithathar and Mukta Tal, down through Kuari, with new views each day - **Snow in winter** – from December to March on the upper trail and the summit ### Best Time to Do the Mukta Top Trek The Mukta Top trek runs from October to June and stops for the monsoon from July to September, when the forest trail turns slippery and the roads into Uttarkashi are prone to landslides. The temperatures below are for the high camp at Mukta Tal; Kuflon and the lower camps are warmer. #### October to November – Autumn (The Clear-Sky Season) After the monsoon the air is clean and the summit view is at its sharpest, with the meadows turning gold and brown. Days are 6°C to 12°C, and nights drop to -5°C to 0°C, colder towards late November. #### December to February – Winter (The Snow Season) Snow covers the trail above Chaithathar, Mukta Tal freezes, and the summit dome turns white. This is the most beautiful and the most demanding time on Mukta Top: the walking is slower and the nights are hard. Days are 0°C to 8°C, and nights fall to -12°C to -5°C. Snow stays on the upper trail into March. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (The Rhododendron Season) From March to May the rhododendron forests bloom as the snow melts back towards the summit, and in May and June the meadows turn green and the days are long. Days are 8°C to 18°C, and nights are -3°C to 5°C, with the colder nights in March. ### Mukta Top Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Mukta Top trek costs ₹9,450 + 5% GST per person, for 6 days starting and ending at Kuflon, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Dehradun is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Kuflon **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Kuflon | Distance: about 155 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Altitude: 640 m → 1,400 m** The group meets at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, and your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. If you arrive the night before, there are plenty of simple hotels around the station. Carry your photo ID, your medical certificate and the signed forms in an outer pocket of your bag, as the trek leader checks them before departure. The road climbs out of the Doon valley towards Chamba, then follows the Bhagirathi river upstream past Dharasu and Chinyalisaur to Uttarkashi, the district town and the last big market on the route. Beyond Uttarkashi the road turns into the Asi Ganga valley, a narrow green side valley, and climbs to Kuflon. We stop for breakfast and lunch on the way (meals in transit are on you). The drive takes 7–8 hours, more if there is roadwork or a landslide on the highway. Keep a light jacket, water and snacks within reach, and take your motion-sickness medicine before you leave if you need it. Uttarkashi has the last reliable ATMs, so draw any cash you need there. The highway along the Bhagirathi has some long, winding sections, so a seat near the front helps if you feel unwell on hill roads. The river views below Uttarkashi make the hours go quickly. We reach Kuflon by late afternoon and check into a guesthouse. In the evening the trek leader briefs the group on the route, checks each trekker’s SpO2 and pulse, and hands out any Free Trekking Gear that is still to be fitted. Dinner is early. Kuflon is a quiet village with a handful of shops, so pick up anything you have forgotten in Uttarkashi on the way. Drink plenty of water this evening and get a full night’s sleep, as the climbing begins tomorrow. What to Expect: - Pickup at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM - A long drive along the Bhagirathi to Uttarkashi - The Asi Ganga valley and the village of Kuflon - Last ATMs in Uttarkashi - Evening briefing and health check - Overnight: guesthouse in Kuflon ### Day 2: Kuflon to Shiladhuni **Route Details:** **Trek: Kuflon → Shiladhuni | Distance: 4 km | Duration: about 4 hrs | Altitude: 1,400 m → 2,100 m** The trek begins right after breakfast from Kuflon. A village path leads up past terraced fields, stone houses and cattle sheds, with the Asi Ganga flowing in the valley below. Villagers on their way to the fields will greet you; a smile and a namaste go a long way. Your main backpack goes with you unless you have chosen offloading. Before setting off, the trek leader explains the pace, the breaks and the rule of staying behind the guide, and checks that each trekker’s shoes are laced and comfortable. Soon the fields give way to forest, and the climb turns steep. The trail gains about 700 m in only 4 km, so take it slowly and settle into a rhythm, with short breaks to drink water and catch your breath. The forest of pine and oak gives shade for most of the way, and the views back down the valley widen as you climb. In about 4 hours you reach Shiladhuni at 2,100 m (6,890 ft), a clearing in the forest and our first camp. The short day leaves the afternoon free to rest, settle into camp life and let your body adjust to the height. There is a water source near the camp, and the team boils and treats drinking water. Use the free time to sort your gear for the cold nights ahead. Evenings in the forest are quiet and cool. After tea and snacks, the trek leader runs the daily health check, and dinner is served early in the dining tent. This is the first night in tents, so the team shows you how to use the sleeping bag and how to keep your things dry. Keep your water bottle and headlamp within reach, and change into dry clothes before the evening chill sets in. What to Expect: - A village walk past fields and stone houses - A short but steep climb of about 700 m - Pine and oak forest with valley views - Afternoon to rest and acclimatise - Daily SpO2 and pulse check - Overnight: camp at Shiladhuni ### Day 3: Shiladhuni to Chaithathar **Route Details:** **Trek: Shiladhuni → Chaithathar | Distance: 5 km | Duration: about 6 hrs | Altitude: 2,100 m → 3,000 m** This is the big forest day, and the steepest climb of the trek: about 900 m of height over 5 km. We start after breakfast with packed lunch in the daypack, and the trek leader sets a slow, steady pace with regular breaks. Short steps and steady breathing work better than a fast pace with long stops. Carry two litres of water, as there are few sources along this section, and keep a warm layer handy for the breaks. The trail winds up through some of the most beautiful forest in this part of Garhwal: tall oaks hung with moss, pine, and, higher up, rhododendron and maple. It is quiet and shaded, and it is the best stretch of the trek for birds. Listen for the call of the Himalayan monal and watch for woodpeckers and pheasants in the undergrowth. From December to March snow starts on the upper half of this section. After about 6 hours you reach Chaithathar at about 3,000 m (9,840 ft), a forest camp in a clearing near the treeline. The air is noticeably colder here, so put on a warm layer as soon as you arrive, before you cool down. The snow peaks start to show through the gaps in the trees. Above Chaithathar the forest starts to give way to meadow, and this is where the views of the trek begin. After a long climb, hot soup and an early dinner are welcome. Report any headache, nausea or breathlessness to the trek leader; the evening health check is there to catch the signs of altitude early. Hang damp socks and clothes inside the tent rather than outside, where they will freeze overnight. Use the evening to rest well: tomorrow is shorter, and it ends beside the lake at Mukta Tal. What to Expect: - The steepest climb of the trek, about 900 m - Old oak, pine and rhododendron forest - The best birdwatching on the route - Snow on the upper trail from December to March - A cold forest camp near the treeline - Overnight: camp at Chaithathar ### Day 4: Chaithathar to Mukta Tal **Route Details:** **Trek: Chaithathar → Mukta Tal | Distance: 4 km | Duration: about 4 hrs | Altitude: 3,000 m → 3,300 m** After the hard climb of Day 3, today is gentler, with about 300 m of gain over 4 km. The trail climbs out of the last of the forest and onto open meadows, and the views start to open up in every direction. Take it slowly anyway, as the height is now above 3,000 m and the air is thinner than it was on the lower camps. Keep sipping water and eat well at lunch. The walk across the meadows is the most open stretch of the trek so far. The peaks of the Bandarpoonch range and the Gangotri group begin to rise over the ridges, and the summit dome of Mukta Top appears ahead. In winter the whole meadow is a field of snow, and the team hands out microspikes and gaiters and fixes a safe line where needed. In about 4 hours you reach Mukta Tal at 3,300 m (10,830 ft), a small lake in a hollow below the summit, and our high camp. With the short day, you have the afternoon to rest, explore the lake shore and watch the light on the peaks. In winter the lake is frozen. There is a water source at the camp, and the team boils and treats drinking water. This is the coldest camp of the trek, so layer up early. The trek leader briefs the group on summit day after dinner, and it is an early night: the climb starts before sunrise. Sleep in your thermals, a dry pair of woollen socks and your woollen cap, and keep your water bottle inside the sleeping bag so it does not freeze. Lay out your summit layers before you go to bed so that the morning goes quickly. What to Expect: - A shorter, gentler day of about 300 m gain - Open meadows and the first wide views - The summit dome of Mukta Top in sight - Camp beside Mukta Tal, frozen in winter - Summit-day briefing - Overnight: camp at Mukta Tal ### Day 5: Mukta Tal to Mukta Top, Descend to Kuari **Route Details:** **Trek: Mukta Tal → Mukta Top → Kuari | Distance: 8 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Altitude: 3,300 m → 3,608 m → 2,390 m** Summit day starts early. We leave Mukta Tal before dawn with headlamps and a hot drink, for the 2 km climb of about 300 m to the top. The trail goes up the open grassy slope of the dome, steady and never exposed, and takes about 2–3 hours at a slow pace. In winter it is all on snow, with microspikes. Mukta Top, at 3,608 m (11,838 ft), is a wide, rounded summit with a view all the way round. To the north and east rise Bandarpoonch and its White Peak, Kala Nag (Black Peak), the Draupadi Ka Danda peaks, Jaonli, Srikanta, the Gangotri peaks and the Bhagirathi massif; to the south-west, far away, is Nag Tibba. Take your time here: this is the view you came for. Then comes the long part of the day: back past Mukta Tal for a quick breakfast, and down a different trail to Kuari, about 6 km and 5–6 hours with a descent of more than 1,200 m. The path drops back into forest and is steep in places, so take short steps and use your trekking poles. It is hard on the knees, and slow and steady is the way. Kuari camp, at 2,390 m (7,840 ft), sits in a forest clearing, and the warmer air at this height feels luxurious after Mukta Tal. The last night on the trail is a happy one, with tired legs and the summit behind you. After dinner, the trek leader runs the last health check and talks about the walk out tomorrow. It is a good evening to thank the cook and the support staff, whose work made the trek possible. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn start for the summit - A 360-degree view from 3,608 m (11,838 ft) - Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag, Jaonli, Srikanta and the Gangotri peaks - A long, steep descent of more than 1,200 m to Kuari - Trekking poles help on the way down - Overnight: camp at Kuari ### Day 6: Kuari to Kuflon, Drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Trek: Kuari → Kuflon | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Altitude: 2,390 m → 1,400 m | Drive: Kuflon → Dehradun, 7–8 hrs** We start early on the last day, as there is a long drive after the trek. After an early breakfast the trail descends from Kuari through forest and then past village fields, about 6 km and 3–4 hours, dropping close to 1,000 m back into the Asi Ganga valley. Keep your daypack light today: water, a snack and a light jacket are enough. The morning is cool, but it warms up quickly as you descend. The descent is steady and kind to tired legs compared with yesterday, and the forest is full of birdsong in the morning. Near the bottom the trail meets the village path, and you walk back into Kuflon, where the loop closes and the trek ends. The villagers of Kuflon are used to trekkers returning from the hills and may stop you to ask how the trek went. Take a last look up at the forested ridges you have crossed: the summit you stood on yesterday is hidden somewhere behind them. From Kuflon the cab drives back to Dehradun via Uttarkashi, about 155 km and 7–8 hours, and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:30 PM. Delays happen on mountain roads, so book onward travel for late night or the next day. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Before you leave, return the Free Trekking Gear to the team, and the ₹3,000 deposit is refunded by UPI within 2 working days after we check the returned gear. The trek leader hands out trek certificates at Kuflon, and the trek comes to a close. We hope you leave with tired legs, a camera full of peaks and the memory of a quiet trail that few people walk. Drop us a note about your trek; your feedback helps us plan the next batch. What to Expect: - An early start for the final descent - Forest and village trail back to Kuflon - Trek certificates and return of Free Trekking Gear - A 7-8 hr drive to Dehradun - Arrival at Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:30 PM - Overnight: no stay (trek ends) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse in Kuflon, shared rooms - Day 2 to Day 5: camping in 3-person tents at Shiladhuni, Chaithathar, Mukta Tal and Kuari #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner at Kuflon to Day 6 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 6-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Kuflon and back - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Kuflon #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near the station. **From Dehradun to Kuflon:** about 155 km, 7–8 hrs by road via Chamba, Dharasu and Uttarkashi. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM to Kuflon. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** After the walk down from Kuari camp to Kuflon on Day 6, the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 7–8 hrs and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:30 PM, depending on the road. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. The overnight train from Delhi the night before Day 1 is the easiest option. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings before you book. **From Dehradun to Kuflon:** about 155 km, 7–8 hrs by road via Chamba, Dharasu and Uttarkashi. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM to Kuflon. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** After the walk down from Kuari camp to Kuflon on Day 6, the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 7–8 hrs and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:30 PM, depending on the road. Plan your train home for late night on Day 6 or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Ordinary and Volvo buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses from inside the ISBT, and from Dehradun ISBT take an auto or cab to the railway station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Kuflon:** about 155 km, 7–8 hrs by road via Chamba, Dharasu and Uttarkashi. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM to Kuflon. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** After the walk down from Kuari camp to Kuflon on Day 6, the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 7–8 hrs and is expected at Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:30 PM, depending on the road. Plan your bus home for late night on Day 6 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Uttarkashi, on the drive in on Day 1; there is no ATM in Kuflon - Carry enough cash from Dehradun or Uttarkashi - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio works patchily at Kuflon - No signal on the trail after Kuflon - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Kuflon ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Mukta Top trek, and where does it start? The Mukta Top trek is in the Uttarkashi district of Garhwal, Uttarakhand. It starts and ends at Kuflon (1,400 m / 4,600 ft), a village in the Asi Ganga valley a short drive beyond Uttarkashi town, and loops through Shiladhuni, Chaithathar, Mukta Tal, the summit and Kuari. The group meets at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1, and the drive to Kuflon takes 7–8 hours. ### How many days does the Mukta Top trek take from Dehradun? The Mukta Top trek takes 6 days from Dehradun to Dehradun. Day 1 is the drive to Kuflon, Days 2 to 4 climb through Shiladhuni and Chaithathar to Mukta Tal, Day 5 is the summit and the descent to Kuari, and Day 6 is the walk down to Kuflon and the drive back to Dehradun. The total trekking distance is about 27 km over five trekking days. ### What is the maximum altitude of the Mukta Top trek? The maximum altitude of the Mukta Top trek is 3,608 m (11,838 ft), at the summit. The trek starts at Kuflon at 1,400 m (4,600 ft) and camps at Shiladhuni (2,100 m / 6,890 ft), Chaithathar (3,000 m / 9,840 ft), Mukta Tal (3,300 m / 10,830 ft) and Kuari (2,390 m / 7,840 ft). That is about 2,200 m of climbing from Kuflon to the top. ### What is the difficulty level of the Mukta Top trek? The Mukta Top trek is graded easy to moderate. The daily distances are short, 4–8 km, but the climbs are steep: about 700 m on Day 2 and 900 m on Day 3. The hardest day is Day 5, about 8 km and 7–8 hours, with the summit climb and a descent of more than 1,200 m to Kuari. From December to March snow on the upper trail makes it harder. ### What is the best time to do the Mukta Top trek? The Mukta Top trek runs from October to June, and each season has its own appeal. - **October–November (autumn):** the clearest summit views and golden meadows. - **December–February (winter):** deep snow on the upper trail, a frozen Mukta Tal and a white summit. - **March–June (spring and summer):** rhododendron blooms and green meadows. The trek closes from July to September for the monsoon. ### Will there be snow on the Mukta Top trek, and when? Yes, the Mukta Top trek has snow from December to March. In those months snow covers the trail above Chaithathar, Mukta Tal freezes and the summit dome is white. Free Trekking Gear includes microspikes and gaiters for the snowy sections, and the team fixes a safe line where needed. After a heavy winter, patches of snow can linger near the summit into April. ### How cold does it get on the Mukta Top trek at night? Night temperatures at the Mukta Top trek high camp at Mukta Tal depend on the month: - **October–November:** day 6°C to 12°C, night -5°C to 0°C - **December–February:** day 0°C to 8°C, night -12°C to -5°C - **March–June:** day 8°C to 18°C, night -3°C to 5°C Kuflon and the lower camps are a few degrees warmer, and the summit at dawn is colder. ### What is the minimum age for the Mukta Top trek? The minimum age for the Mukta Top trek is 10 years, for children who walk regularly and are comfortable on steep climbs. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that each trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Mukta Top trek, and where is the pickup? The pickup for the Mukta Top trek is at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. Dehradun has overnight trains from Delhi, such as the Nanda Devi Express, overnight buses to Dehradun ISBT, and flights to Jolly Grant Airport. From Dehradun the drive to Kuflon is about 155 km and 7–8 hours via Chamba and Uttarkashi. On Day 6 the cab is expected back at Dehradun by about 07:30 PM. ### What does the Mukta Top trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Mukta Top trek costs ₹9,450 + 5% GST per person, for 6 days starting and ending at Kuflon. It includes Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, against a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and ₹200 washing charge), a night in a Kuflon guesthouse, four nights of camping, all meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 breakfast, forest permits, camping and safety equipment, and a certified trek leader with cook and support staff. The full list is under Terms & Conditions. ### How do I book the Mukta Top trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Mukta Top trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹9,450 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is transport included in the Mukta Top trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Mukta Top trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station to Kuflon and back; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare before the trek. Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Kuflon are not included either. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Mukta Top trek? Mobile network on the Mukta Top trek ends at Kuflon. Jio works patchily at Kuflon, and there is no signal on the trail after that. There is no ATM in Kuflon; the last reliable ATMs are in Uttarkashi, on the drive in on Day 1, so carry enough cash from Dehradun or Uttarkashi. Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail. Make your important calls before you leave Kuflon on Day 2. ### Do I need a permit for the Mukta Top trek? Yes, the Mukta Top trek passes through forest land and needs forest permits, and Trekkaro arranges them for the group. Forest permits and camping charges are included in the trek fee. Carry a government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, driving licence or voter ID) and a copy, and complete your trekker profile with your details before the trek so the permits can be issued. ### Is there a risk of AMS on the Mukta Top trek, and how is safety handled? The risk of Acute Mountain Sickness (AMS) on the Mukta Top trek is moderate, as the trail climbs about 900 m on Day 3 and camps at 3,300 m (10,830 ft). Short daily distances and a gentler Day 4 help your body adjust. Our trek leaders are NIM certified or equivalent; they check SpO2 and pulse daily, and the team carries oxygen cylinders, a first-aid kit and a stretcher. Batches have up to 20 trekkers. ### Is the Mukta Top trek suitable for beginners? Yes, the Mukta Top trek suits fit beginners who prepare well. The distances are short and the trail is clear, but the climbs are steep and the summit day is long, so fitness matters more than on an easy weekend trek. We recommend six weeks of preparation: jogging, stair climbing and long walks with a loaded backpack, aiming to jog 5 km in 40 minutes. In winter, the snow adds extra effort. ### What should I carry for the Mukta Top trek, and what gear is free? For the Mukta Top trek, Free Trekking Gear covers Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. You bring a 50–60 L backpack with a rain cover, a daypack if you offload, thermal inners, two fleece or woollen layers (three in winter), a rain jacket, trek pants, woollen cap, gloves, sunglasses, sunscreen, a headlamp for the pre-dawn summit start, two water bottles and a lunch box. The full list is under Things to Carry. ## Upcoming batches - 23 Oct 2026 to 28 Oct 2026 - 30 Oct 2026 to 4 Nov 2026 - 6 Nov 2026 to 11 Nov 2026 - 13 Nov 2026 to 18 Nov 2026 - 20 Nov 2026 to 25 Nov 2026 - 27 Nov 2026 to 2 Dec 2026 - 4 Dec 2026 to 9 Dec 2026 - 11 Dec 2026 to 16 Dec 2026 - 18 Dec 2026 to 23 Dec 2026 - 25 Dec 2026 to 30 Dec 2026 - 1 Jan 2027 to 6 Jan 2027 - 8 Jan 2027 to 13 Jan 2027 - … 24 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/mukta-top-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Nag Tibba Trek > Nag Tibba Trek is a 2-day easy trek in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,022 m (9,915 ft). It covers about 16 km on foot and starts and ends at Pantwari. Best time: September to June. Trekkaro price: ₹3,825 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (42 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/nag-tibba-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 2 days - **Difficulty:** Easy - **Highest point:** 3,022 m / 9,915 ft - **Trekking distance:** 16 km - **Region:** Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Pantwari - **Best time:** September to June - **Temperature:** Summer (Apr-Jun): Day 15°C to 25°C, Night 5°C to 10°C | Winter (Dec-Feb): Day 0°C to 9°C, Night -7°C to -2°C - **Price:** ₹3,825 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (42 upcoming) ## Overview Leave Dehradun on a Saturday morning, and by Sunday you can be standing on a Himalayan summit. Nag Tibba asks for one night in a forest beside a small temple to the serpent god, one early climb by headlamp and about 16 km on foot. In return it gives you 9,915 ft of mountain and a skyline of snow peaks running from Bandarpoonch to the Gangotri group. By Sunday evening you are back in Dehradun, with the summit still in your legs. The Nag Tibba trek climbs to the highest point of the Nag Tibba range in the Garhwal foothills. From the stone and slate-roofed houses of Pantwari village it rises through terraced fields of wheat, potatoes and mustard into a forest of oak, rhododendron and deodar, past the small Nag Devta temple, and out onto an open summit ridge. From the top, Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak), the Gangotri group and, on very clear days, the Kedarnath peaks line the horizon. Nag Tibba, whose name means ‘Serpent’s Peak’, lies in the Jaunpur area of Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, beyond Mussoorie. The trek starts and ends at Pantwari (1,400 m), spends one night at a forest camp near the Nag Devta temple at about 2,300 m (7,550 ft), and tops out at 3,022 m (9,915 ft). Local shepherds and villagers worship Nag Devta, the serpent god, at the temple and pray there for the safety of their cattle. The route is known as the classic Himalayan weekend trek. It is short, but it is not a stroll, and in our experience that is exactly what makes it such a good first summit. ### The Serpent’s Peak at Dawn – What Makes the Nag Tibba Trek Unmissable What makes Nag Tibba special is the gap between where you sleep and what you wake up for. The camp sits in a forest clearing with oak and rhododendron all around, and the evening there is simple: tea as the light fades, warm layers as the cold comes in, an early dinner. The summit is still somewhere above the trees. It is only the next morning, after more than 700 m of climbing in the half-light, that the mountains appear – and when they do, they appear together. You leave camp at five or six in the morning with a hot drink inside you and a headlamp lighting the path. You walk past the Nag Devta temple, its bells and offerings tied around it, and on into dense oak forest. Above the temple the trail turns steeper and narrower; from December to February it lies under snow, and every step asks for care. Then the forest thins. The sky grows lighter between the trunks. And then the trees are gone and you are on the summit, with Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini to the north, Kala Nag and the Gangotri group beside them and, if the morning is very clear, the Kedarnath peaks beyond. Behind you, the land drops away towards the Doon valley. You have climbed more than 1,600 m since Pantwari. There is no reason to hurry down. Then comes the part not to underestimate: breakfast at camp and the long descent to Pantwari, which is harder on the knees than the climb. By evening you are in Dehradun. In our experience it is exactly the right size of challenge – hard enough to feel like a real mountain, short enough to fit between one working week and the next. ### The Trail Itself For a 16 km trek, Nag Tibba covers a surprising range of ground. For the first hour out of Pantwari the trail is a wide village path used by mules and villagers, climbing gently between terraced fields, small hamlets and cattle sheds. Slowly the fields give way to forest. Oak and rhododendron close in around the path, and higher up the deodar begins; the gradient is steady rather than steep, but it rarely lets up. Above the temple the trail changes again, steeper and narrower in dense oak, until the forest opens onto the summit. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Nag Tibba trek is graded easy, and we recommend it for fit beginners, families with children who already walk well, and working trekkers who want a weekend in the mountains. The first day is a steady 5 km climb of 3–4 hours to the forest camp. The hard day is the second: an early summit climb and a long descent, about 11 km and 6–8 hours on foot, with a steep forest section above the temple that lies under snow in winter. We recommend four to six weeks of preparation before departure. Children aged 9 and above who walk regularly can join with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: September to June. ### Key Highlights of the Nag Tibba Trek - **A real Himalayan summit in a weekend** – 3,022 m (9,915 ft), the highest point of the Nag Tibba range - **Snow peaks from the top** – Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak), the Gangotri group and, on very clear days, the Kedarnath peaks - **The Nag Devta temple** – a small shrine to the serpent god, hung with bells and offerings - **A forest camp** – one night among oak, rhododendron and deodar at about 2,300 m - **Snow within a weekend** – from late December to February; in our view one of the easiest snow treks near Delhi - **Rhododendrons in spring** – blooms in the forest as the snow melts from the lower slopes - **Pantwari village** – stone and slate-roofed houses above terraced fields of wheat, potatoes and mustard ### Best Time to Do the Nag Tibba Trek The Nag Tibba trek runs from September right through to June, and because the whole trek fits into a weekend, the season you choose shapes almost everything about it. Each window gives the same summit a different character. #### December to February – Winter (The Snow Season) This is Nag Tibba at its most dramatic. Snow arrives from late December, and January and February are the most reliable months for it, when fresh falls turn the upper forest and the summit ridge white. The steep section above the temple becomes a snow climb, and nights at camp are well below freezing. For a first taste of Himalayan snow in a single weekend, this is the window we would choose. - **Temperatures:** Day: 0°C to 9°C | Night at camp: -7°C to -2°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the upper forest and summit ridge, most reliably in January and February; slippery above the temple. - **Best for:** A first snow trek and a snowbound summit. #### March to June – Spring and Early Summer (Rhododendrons and Mild Days) In March and April the rhododendrons bloom in the forest and the snow melts from the lower slopes; after a heavy winter it lingers into March. By May and June the mountains offer what the plains cannot: pleasant days, cool nights and a comfortable evening at camp, a relaxed window for families and first-time campers. - **Temperatures:** Day: 15°C to 25°C | Night at camp: 5°C to 10°C (April to June) - **Trail conditions:** Snow melting from the lower slopes in spring; rhododendrons in bloom; pleasant days by early summer. - **Best for:** Rhododendron forest, families and an escape from the heat of the plains. #### September to November – Autumn (The Clearest Views) After the monsoon the air is clear and the mountain views are at their sharpest: the line from Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini to the Gangotri group stands out hard against the sky. If the summit panorama is your reason for coming, these are the months we would point you to. - **Trail conditions:** Clear post-monsoon air and the sharpest mountain views of the season. - **Best for:** The summit panorama and mountain photography. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For snow on the summit, book a January or February batch. For rhododendrons, choose March or April; for an easy weekend with children or first-time campers, we recommend May and June. And for the sharpest view of Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini and the Gangotri group, autumn is our pick. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Pantwari and trek to Nag Devta Camp **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Pantwari (88 km, ~4 hrs) | Trek: 5 km, 3–4 hrs | Altitude: 1,400 m → 2,300 m (7,550 ft) | Terrain: village path through terraced fields, then oak and rhododendron forest | Stay: Tents near the Nag Devta temple** The day starts early in Dehradun. Be at the meeting point by 6:30 am, so the group can leave before the Mussoorie traffic builds up. The road climbs out of the Doon valley through a long series of bends to Mussoorie, then continues past Kempty Falls and drops into the Aglar river valley. There is a short tea and breakfast stop on the way. Carry the cash you need from Dehradun or Mussoorie, as there is no ATM on the trail. Pantwari sits at about 1,400 m, a village of stone and slate-roofed houses spread across terraced fields. After lunch and a short briefing from your trek leader, you start walking. For the first hour the trail is a wide village path used by mules and villagers. It climbs gently between fields of wheat, potatoes and mustard, past small hamlets and cattle sheds. Slowly the fields give way to forest. Oak and rhododendron close in around the path, and higher up you start to see deodar. The gradient is steady rather than steep, but it rarely lets up, and this is the part of the day to manage well. Set a slow, even pace, take short breaks, and do not try to keep up with the fastest walker. There are a couple of natural water points on the way, and your trek leader tells you where to refill. The campsite sits in a forest clearing close to the small Nag Devta temple, at about 2,300 m. You sleep in 3-person tents, with a dining tent and a toilet tent. Once the tents are up there is tea and snacks, and time to explore the clearing as the light fades. Evenings are cold in every season and well below freezing in winter, so change into dry, warm layers as soon as you arrive. Keep those layers and your headlamp at the top of your backpack; you need both at camp. Dinner is served early, followed by a short briefing for summit day. What to Expect: - 6:30 am start from Dehradun; drive past Mussoorie and Kempty Falls - Lunch and briefing at Pantwari, a village of stone and slate-roofed houses - Village trail through terraced fields of wheat, potatoes and mustard - Steady climb through oak, rhododendron and deodar, with a couple of water points - Tea at camp, early dinner and a briefing for summit day - Overnight: Tents near the Nag Devta temple (2,300 m / 7,550 ft) ### Day 2: Summit Day - Nag Devta Camp to Nag Tibba, down to Pantwari, drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,300 m → 3,022 m (9,915 ft) → 1,400 m | Distance: 11 km trek + 88 km drive | Duration: 6–8 hrs trek + 4–5 hrs drive | Terrain: steep, narrow oak forest trail to an open summit ridge, then a long descent | Stay: Trek ends in Dehradun (evening)** Summit day begins before sunrise. After a hot drink, you leave camp around 5–6 am with headlamps on. The trail passes the Nag Devta temple first. Local shepherds and villagers worship Nag Devta, the serpent god, here and pray for the safety of their cattle, and you see bells and offerings tied around the temple. Nag Tibba itself means Serpent’s Peak. Carry at least 1.5 litres of water and some energy snacks, because there are no shops or water points on top. Above the temple the trail becomes steeper and narrower as it climbs through dense oak forest. This is the hard section of the day. Shorten your stride, breathe steadily and use your trekking poles. From about December to February this whole section is under snow and can be slippery. Your trek leader helps you put on microspikes and gaiters before the steep part, so you can walk it with confidence. The forest thins as you near the ridge, then opens all at once onto the summit at 3,022 m (9,915 ft). On a clear morning the view runs along the Greater Himalaya. Bandarpoonch and Swargarohini stand to the north, with Kala Nag (Black Peak) and the Gangotri group, and on very clear days the Kedarnath peaks. On the other side the land falls away towards the Doon valley. Spend time here and take your photos. You have climbed more than 1,600 m since Pantwari. You return to camp for breakfast, pack up and begin the long descent to Pantwari. In our experience going down is harder than going up on this trek. Walk slowly, use your poles and keep your knees soft. After lunch at Pantwari, the group drives back through Mussoorie to Dehradun, arriving by evening. We recommend planning any onward travel from Dehradun for late night or the next day. What to Expect: - 5–6 am start with headlamps, past the Nag Devta temple - Steep, narrow climb through oak forest; snow and microspikes from about December to February - Summit views of Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag and the Gangotri group - Breakfast back at camp, then the long descent to Pantwari; 11 km on foot today - At least 1.5 litres of water and energy snacks; no water points on top - Trek ends at Pantwari; drop at Dehradun by evening ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: camping near the Nag Devta temple, in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals on the trek, from Day 1 lunch at the trailhead to Day 2 lunch - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the night at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 2-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Pantwari and back - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Pantwari #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹1,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near the station. **From Dehradun to Pantwari:** 88 km, about 4 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Pantwari at 6:30 AM. **Return:** After the summit and the descent to Pantwari on Day 2, a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 4–5 hrs and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by evening. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. For a weekend batch that leaves Dehradun on Saturday morning, the overnight train on Friday night is the easiest option. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings before you book. **From Dehradun to Pantwari:** 88 km, about 4 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Pantwari at 6:30 AM. **Return:** After the summit and the descent to Pantwari on Day 2, a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 4–5 hrs and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by evening. Plan your train home for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Ordinary and Volvo buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses from inside the ISBT, and from Dehradun ISBT take an auto or cab to the railway station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Pantwari:** 88 km, about 4 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Pantwari at 6:30 AM. **Return:** After the summit and the descent to Pantwari on Day 2, a shared cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 4–5 hrs and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by evening. Plan your bus home for late night on Day 2 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Carry cash from Dehradun or Mussoorie - Pantwari has only small bank branches, and there is no ATM on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio and Airtel work at Pantwari and patchily at camp - Little or no signal near the summit - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Nag Tibba trek, and where does it start? The Nag Tibba trek is in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, in the Jaunpur area beyond Mussoorie. It starts from Pantwari village, 88 km (about 4 hours) by road from Dehradun, where the group is picked up. Nag Tibba (‘Serpent’s Peak’) is the highest point of the Nag Tibba range in the Garhwal foothills. ### How many days is the Nag Tibba trek? The Nag Tibba trek takes 2 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, covering about 16 km on foot. - **Day 1:** drive to Pantwari and trek about 5 km to the Nag Devta camp - **Day 2:** summit climb and descent, about 11 km, then drive back to Dehradun ### What is the altitude of the Nag Tibba trek? The summit of the Nag Tibba trek is at 3,022 m (9,915 ft). The trek starts at Pantwari (1,400 m) and the camp is at about 2,300 m. ### What is the difficulty level of the Nag Tibba trek? The Nag Tibba trek is graded Easy. Day 1 is a steady climb, but Day 2 is long: an early summit climb followed by a long descent to Pantwari. ### Is the Nag Tibba trek good for beginners? Yes, the Nag Tibba trek is one of the best first treks near Delhi, giving a real summit in only two days. Start walking or jogging 3–4 weeks before so the long summit day feels comfortable. ### What fitness level do I need for the Nag Tibba trek? For the Nag Tibba trek you should be able to walk 6–8 hours with breaks on summit day, and aim to jog 5 km in under 40 minutes before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### Is the Nag Tibba trek good for a weekend? Yes. The Nag Tibba trek is the classic Himalayan weekend trek: leave Dehradun on Saturday morning, camp near the Nag Devta temple, summit on Sunday morning and be back in Dehradun by evening. ### What is the best time to do the Nag Tibba trek? The best time for the Nag Tibba trek is September to June: December to June, and September to November. July and August (monsoon) are avoided. - **December–February:** snow on the upper forest and summit - **March–April:** rhododendrons in bloom - **May–June:** pleasant days, an escape from the heat - **September–November:** clearest views ### Is there snow on the Nag Tibba trek, and in which months? The Nag Tibba trek has snow from late December to February, and into March after a heavy winter; January and February are the most reliable months. Microspikes and gaiters from our Free Trekking Gear make the snowy summit section much easier. ### How cold does it get on the Nag Tibba trek? On the Nag Tibba trek, summer nights at camp are 5–10°C and winter nights drop to about -7 to -2°C. - **April–June:** days 15–25°C, nights 5–10°C - **December–February:** days 0–9°C, nights -7 to -2°C ### Which mountains can you see on the Nag Tibba trek? From the Nag Tibba summit you see Bandarpoonch, Swargarohini, Kala Nag (Black Peak), the Gangotri group and, on clear days, the Kedarnath peaks. ### What is the terrain like on the Nag Tibba trek? The Nag Tibba trail goes from village fields to oak, rhododendron and deodar forest, then a steeper forest climb to an open summit ridge. ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Nag Tibba trek? Altitude sickness is rarely a problem on the Nag Tibba trek, as the summit is only 3,022 m. Still, walk at a steady pace and drink plenty of water. ### What is the minimum age for the Nag Tibba trek? The minimum age for the Nag Tibba trek is 9 years, for children who already walk regularly. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Nag Tibba trek? To reach the Nag Tibba trek, travel to Dehradun; Pantwari is about 85–90 km (3.5–5 hours) away via Mussoorie and Kempty Falls. - **Train:** Dehradun Railway Station - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun - **Bus:** Delhi to Dehradun ISBT (6–7 hours) ### Is transport included in the Nag Tibba trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Pantwari at 6:30 AM and brings the group back on Day 2. ### Where do we stay on the Nag Tibba trek? On the Nag Tibba trek you spend one night in tents at our campsite near the Nag Devta temple. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with dining and toilet tents. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Nag Tibba trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Nag Tibba trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Nag Tibba trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Nag Tibba trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Nag Tibba trek? On the Nag Tibba trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Nag Tibba trek? On the Nag Tibba trek there are a couple of natural water points on Day 1; carry at least 1.5 litres on summit day, as there is no water on top. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Nag Tibba trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Nag Tibba trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Nag Tibba trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Nag Tibba trek costs ₹800 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Nag Tibba trek? No doctor joins the Nag Tibba trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Nag Tibba trek? For the Nag Tibba trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Nag Tibba trek? Mobile network on the Nag Tibba trek: Jio and Airtel work at Pantwari and patchily at camp, with little or no signal near the summit. Carry cash from Dehradun or Mussoorie. ### Why is Nag Tibba called the Serpent's Peak by locals? Nag Tibba means ‘Serpent’s Peak’. Local shepherds and villagers worship Nag Devta, the serpent god, at a small temple below the summit, praying for the safety of their cattle. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 25 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 8 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 15 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 22 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 5 Dec 2026 to 6 Dec 2026 - 12 Dec 2026 to 13 Dec 2026 - 19 Dec 2026 to 20 Dec 2026 - 24 Dec 2026 to 25 Dec 2026 - 26 Dec 2026 to 27 Dec 2026 - 31 Dec 2026 to 1 Jan 2027 - … 30 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/nag-tibba-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Pangarchulla Peak Trek > Pangarchulla Peak Trek is a 7-day difficult trek in Chamoli, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,593 m (15,069 ft). It covers about 39 km on foot and starts and ends at Joshimath. Best time: March to May and October to November. Trekkaro price: ₹11,433 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (25 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/pangarchulla-peak-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,593 m / 15,069 ft - **Trekking distance:** 39 km - **Region:** Chamoli, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Joshimath - **Best time:** March to May and October to November - **Temperature:** Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 10°C to 15°C, Night -5°C to 0°C | Autumn (Oct-Nov): Day 5°C to 15°C, Night -5°C or lower - **Price:** ₹11,433 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (25 upcoming) ## Overview On the Pangarchulla Peak trek, Kuari Pass is only the rehearsal. You climb to 3,815 m, stand in front of one of the most famous views in Garhwal, with Nanda Devi, Kamet, Dronagiri, Chaukhamba and Trishul spread across the horizon, and then you walk back down to camp. The real climb starts the following night, by headlamp, on the snow slopes above Khullara. It ends on an exposed ridge at 15,069 ft, on the top of a mountain rather than on the way over one. The Pangarchulla Peak trek is built around one summit and the days that prepare you for it. It begins in the village fields of Tugasi and climbs through oak and rhododendron forest to Guling, a camp in a clearing among the trees. Above Guling the forest opens into meadows, and the big peaks start to appear through the gaps: Dronagiri, and the twin summits of Hathi Parbat and Gauri Parbat, known locally as Hathi–Ghoda. Khullara, a wide meadow camp, becomes home for three nights. From there the trek climbs to Kuari Pass and back, then sets out for Pangarchulla itself, up steep snow slopes and boulder fields to a summit that looks out over Nanda Devi, Kamet, Changabang and the peaks around Mana. Every one of its five trekking days leads towards the top. The Pangarchulla Peak trek is a difficult-grade summit trek in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand, above the Kuari Pass trail near Joshimath. Trekkaro runs it as a 7-day trek from Rishikesh, with about 39 km on foot. The base is the mountain town of Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft), and the walk begins at the road head of Tugasi, about 12 km away. The route climbs through Guling (2,857 m / 9,375 ft) to Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft), makes an acclimatisation hike to Kuari Pass (3,815 m) and back, and then climbs to the summit of Pangarchulla at about 4,593 m (15,069 ft) before descending through the forest to Tugasi. It shares its early days with the Kuari Pass trail, and it is known as one of the most accessible true summits in the Garhwal Himalaya. In our experience, for a trekker with a moderate high-altitude trek behind them who wants a first real summit, it is the natural next step. ### A Real Summit at 15,069 ft – What Makes the Pangarchulla Peak Trek Unmissable A pass is a gap in a ridge, a way through to somewhere else. A summit is the end of the climb, with the ground falling away on every side. Pangarchulla gives you the second, and the whole trek is shaped around it. The first days are deliberately short: 3–5 hours to Guling, 3–5 hours to Khullara, and an afternoon of rest at 3,350 m while your body adjusts. On clear evenings at Khullara the sunset turns the snow on Dronagiri and Hathi Parbat orange and pink. The Kuari Pass day matters just as much as summit day: you climb high, take in the view, and sleep lower. That evening comes the summit briefing, and you lay out every piece of summit clothing before you sleep, so you can dress quickly in the dark. Then the alarm goes, somewhere between midnight and 3 am. You pull on every warm layer you have, switch on your headlamp and step out into the cold. The first hours are a steady climb up snow slopes in the dark, one step and one breath at a time, and the sky lightens slowly as you gain height. Higher up, the mountain steepens. You cross steep snow and boulder fields with microspikes and gaiters on, the team fixing ropes and using ice axes where the ground needs them, and you keep your hands free for the rocks. You eat something small every hour, even when you do not feel hungry. Then comes the exposed final ridge, and then the ridge simply runs out beneath your boots. From the top, at about 4,593 m (15,069 ft), the view stretches across Nanda Devi, Dronagiri, Hathi Parbat, Gauri Parbat, Kamet, Changabang and the peaks around Mana. Several of them have been with you for days: Dronagiri and Hathi Parbat since the forest opened above Guling, Nanda Devi and Kamet since Kuari Pass. Now you are looking at them from a summit of your own. In our experience it is one of the finest summit views in the Garhwal Himalaya, and it is earned rather than given. The descent is as demanding as the climb, the trek leader sets a firm turn-around time, and reaching the top is never guaranteed. When it all comes together, you are back at Khullara in the afternoon for a hot meal, 14 km and 11–14 hours after you left, with the mountain above you climbed. ### The Trail Itself Pangarchulla changes its ground every day. From Tugasi the trail climbs past village fields into a forest of oak and rhododendron, with views opening back over the Joshimath valley as you gain height. In spring the rhododendrons are in full bloom; in autumn the oaks turn golden. Above Guling the trees thin and the forest gives way to open meadow at Khullara, a wide campsite that gives you your first real sense of the high Himalaya. In spring the slopes around it are still under snow, and the meadows on the way to Kuari Pass can lie white rather than green. Above Khullara the green ends altogether. Summit day moves onto steep snow slopes, then boulder fields, then the bare, exposed ridge at the top: snow, rock and sky, and very little else. Coming back down, the order runs in reverse, snow to meadow, meadow to forest, forest to the fields of Tugasi, about 8 km of downhill walking on the last trekking day, and you notice how much easier it is to breathe as you lose height. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Pangarchulla Peak trek is graded Difficult and is not suitable as a first trek. We recommend it for trekkers who have completed at least one moderate high-altitude trek and are very fit. The approach days are manageable, 5–8 km in 3–7 hours, but you should be comfortable walking 6–8 hours a day. The hard day is the summit: about 14 km and 11–14 hours on the move, starting between midnight and 3 am, on steep snow slopes, boulder fields and an exposed final ridge, with a descent as demanding as the climb. With the summit above 4,500 m, the trek gives a full day to acclimatisation before the summit push. As a fitness benchmark, you should be able to jog 5 km in about 30 minutes before the trek, and we recommend 4–6 weeks of steady preparation. Trekkers aged 14 and above with prior trek experience can join; under-18s must be with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: March to May and October to November. ### Key Highlights of the Pangarchulla Peak Trek - **Pangarchulla summit (4,593 m / 15,069 ft)** – an exposed final ridge and a 360-degree view of Nanda Devi, Dronagiri, Hathi Parbat, Gauri Parbat, Kamet, Changabang and the Mana peaks - **A true summit** – one of the most accessible in the Garhwal Himalaya, and a big step up from pass and meadow trekking - **Kuari Pass (3,815 m)** – the acclimatisation hike to one of the most famous views in Garhwal, with Nanda Devi, Kamet, Dronagiri, Chaukhamba and Trishul - **Summit night by headlamp** – a start between midnight and 3 am, with the sky lightening as you climb the snow slopes - **Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft)** – a wide meadow camp and base for three nights, with sunset colour on Dronagiri and Hathi Parbat - **Hathi–Ghoda** – the twin peaks of Hathi Parbat and Gauri Parbat, first seen through the forest between Guling and Khullara - **Snow-covered meadows** – around Khullara and on the way to Kuari Pass in spring - **Oak, rhododendron and birch forest** – rhododendrons in full bloom in spring, golden oaks in autumn ### Best Time to Do the Pangarchulla Peak Trek The Pangarchulla Peak trek has two windows each year: spring, from March to May, and autumn, in October and November. The route is the same in both, but the climb to the top feels quite different. Choosing between them is really a choice about what kind of summit day you want. #### March to May – Spring (The Classic Snow Summit) Spring is the classic season on Pangarchulla, and March and April are its heart. The summit slopes lie under snow, the slopes around Khullara are still white, and the acclimatisation walk to Kuari Pass may be over snow rather than meadow. Lower down, the rhododendron forest between Tugasi and Guling is in full bloom. Nights at Khullara are cold, especially in March and April when snow surrounds the camp, and summit day is a true snow climb, with microspikes and gaiters on and ropes fixed on the steep sections. - **Temperatures:** March–April: Day: 10°C to 15°C | Night: -5°C to 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the summit slopes and around Khullara; possible snow on the way to Kuari Pass; rhododendrons in bloom lower down. - **Best for:** A classic snow summit, snow-covered meadows and rhododendron forest in bloom. #### October to November – Autumn (Rock, Hard Snow and Clear Skies) In autumn Pangarchulla becomes a different climb. The upper mountain is mostly rocky, with hard snow patches where microspikes still come out, and the skies are clear. On the lower trail the oak forest turns golden. This is the colder window: days are cool, nights at Khullara can drop to -5°C or lower, and summit night is the coldest of the trek. In our experience, autumn suits trekkers who want a rockier, clearer climb and are prepared for real cold before dawn. - **Temperatures:** Day: 5°C to 15°C | Night: -5°C or lower - **Trail conditions:** Mostly rock on the upper slopes, with hard snow patches; clear skies; very cold nights. - **Best for:** Clear summit views, a rockier climb and golden oak forest on the approach. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For Pangarchulla as a classic snow summit, book a spring batch, ideally in March or April, when the summit slopes and the meadows around Khullara are under snow and the rhododendrons are out lower down. For clear skies and a rockier climb, October to November is our pick, provided you are ready for very cold nights and a bitterly cold summit start. In either window, come with a moderate high-altitude trek behind you. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Joshimath **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Joshimath (~255 km, 9–10 hrs) | Altitude: 1,890 m (6,200 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / hotel, Joshimath** Day 1 is a road day, and a long one. You leave Rishikesh early and drive up the Badrinath road, with the Alaknanda river beside you for most of the way. The road follows the river past its sacred confluences. At Devprayag, the Bhagirathi and the Alaknanda meet to form the Ganga. Further up come Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag, then Chamoli, and finally Joshimath. Plan for 9–10 hours on the road. Joshimath sits at about 1,890 m. It is a busy mountain town and the gateway to Badrinath, Auli and several high treks. It has the last ATMs and good shops on the route. The ATMs sometimes run out of cash, though, so we recommend you withdraw what you need in Rishikesh before you leave. You check in to a guesthouse or hotel. Your trek leader holds a briefing and checks your documents: an original government photo ID with a photocopy, a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Keep them handy so the check is quick. Then make the most of the evening. This is the last night with full network and electricity for several days. The signal turns patchy on the way to Guling and is mostly gone at Khullara. What to Expect: - Early start from Rishikesh and a 9–10 hour drive up the Alaknanda valley - Devprayag, where the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda join to form the Ganga, then Rudraprayag, Karnaprayag and Chamoli - Trek briefing and document check: photo ID, medical certificate and signed disclaimer form - Last ATMs and good shops in Joshimath – withdraw cash in Rishikesh, as these ATMs can run dry - Last night with full mobile network and electricity for several days - Overnight: Guesthouse / hotel in Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft) ### Day 2: Joshimath to Guling via Tugasi **Route Details:** **Drive: Joshimath → Tugasi (~12 km, 45 min) | Altitude: 2,100 m → 2,857 m (9,375 ft) | Distance: 5 km trek | Duration: 3–5 hrs | Terrain: village fields, then oak and rhododendron forest | Stay: Tents at Guling** After breakfast you drive about 12 km from Joshimath to Tugasi, the road head. The drive takes around 45 minutes. Tugasi is the last place you will see vehicles for five days. From here the team, the mules and the porters carry the camp up the mountain. Everything above this point arrives on foot. Keep water, snacks and a warm layer within easy reach in your daypack. The trail starts at about 2,100 m and climbs past the village fields of Tugasi. Soon it enters a forest of oak and rhododendron. The gradient is steady rather than steep, and with every bend the views open back over the Joshimath valley. In spring the rhododendron forest is in full bloom. In autumn the oaks turn golden. Lunch is packed and eaten on the trail. Treat today as practice for the days ahead. The first day on foot is about finding a rhythm: short steps, steady breathing and regular sips of water. Walk at a pace where you can still talk. Carry 2 litres of water and start drinking plenty from today. In our experience, staying hydrated is one of the best defences against altitude sickness. The mobile signal turns patchy on the way up, so send any messages you need to early. Camp tonight is at Guling, at about 2,857 m, in a clearing in the forest. It is a short day of 3–5 hours, and that is deliberate. You gain height gently and give your body time to start adjusting. Hot tea and snacks are waiting when you arrive, and the team boils or treats the water at camp. Dinner is in the dining tent. This evening your trek leader starts the daily oxygen and pulse checks, which continue every evening of the trek. Guling is your only forest camp. From tomorrow you sleep in the open meadow at Khullara. What to Expect: - 45-minute drive from Joshimath to the Tugasi road head – the last vehicles for five days - Steady 3–5 hour climb past the village fields of Tugasi into oak and rhododendron forest - Views back over the Joshimath valley; rhododendrons in bloom in spring, golden oaks in autumn - Packed lunch on the trail; carry 2 litres of water and keep sipping - Hot tea on arrival, dinner in the dining tent and the first evening oxygen and pulse checks - Overnight: Tents at Guling (2,857 m / 9,375 ft) ### Day 3: Guling to Khullara **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,857 m → 3,350 m (11,000 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 3–5 hrs | Terrain: forest trail opening into meadows; snow in spring | Stay: Tents at Khullara** From Guling the trail keeps climbing through the forest. It is another short day of 5 km, and the pace stays unhurried. As you gain height the trees thin, and the forest slowly opens into meadows. Keep the same rhythm as yesterday: small steps, steady breathing and a sip of water at every break. In our view this is the right way to arrive at a high camp, with energy to spare. Through the gaps in the trees, the big peaks start to appear. First comes Dronagiri. Then the twin peaks of Hathi Parbat and Gauri Parbat, known locally as Hathi–Ghoda. These are the mountains you live beside for the next three days, and each hour of walking shows them from a new angle. You reach Khullara, at about 3,350 m, by early afternoon. This meadow campsite is your base for the next three nights. It is a wide, open site with room to walk around, and it gives you your first real sense of the high Himalaya. In spring the slopes around camp are still under snow. The mobile signal is mostly gone from here, and the team boils or treats the camp water. Spend the afternoon resting and getting used to the altitude. A short walk around camp after arrival helps your body adjust, but we recommend you avoid long, tiring walks. On clear evenings the sunset turns the snow on Dronagiri and Hathi Parbat orange and pink. Your trek leader checks everyone’s oxygen levels every evening from now on. Eat a full dinner and keep drinking water through the evening. Nights here are cold. In spring they drop to between -5°C and 0°C, and in autumn they can go lower. Wear your thermals, fleece and down jacket, and use a sleeping bag liner if you have one. Keep your water bottle inside the tent so it does not freeze overnight. What to Expect: - Short 5 km climb as the forest opens into meadows - First views of Dronagiri and of Hathi Parbat and Gauri Parbat, known locally as Hathi–Ghoda - Arrival at Khullara by early afternoon – your base camp for three nights - A short walk around camp to help you acclimatise, but no long, tiring walks - Cold nights (-5°C to 0°C in spring, lower in autumn) – keep your water bottle inside the tent - Overnight: Tents at Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft) ### Day 4: Acclimatisation Day - Khullara to Kuari Pass and back to Khullara **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 3,815 m → 3,350 m | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 5–7 hrs | Terrain: open meadows, or snow in spring | Stay: Tents at Khullara** Today is an acclimatisation day, and it matters just as much as summit day. You climb from Khullara to Kuari Pass, at about 3,815 m, and then return to the same camp. The idea is simple: climb high and sleep lower. It is the best way to prepare your body for tomorrow, and it is why this itinerary gives it a full day before the summit. The route crosses open meadows. In spring the same ground lies under snow, and the walking is slower and more tiring. On snow, step into the footprints of the person ahead and keep your poles planted. Keep your pace easy. This is not a day to race. Breathe steadily, drink and save your legs for tomorrow. The 7 km round trip takes 5–7 hours, so there is time to stop whenever you need to. The view from Kuari Pass is one of the most famous in Garhwal. Nanda Devi, Kamet, Dronagiri, Chaukhamba and Trishul spread across the horizon. Spend time here and enjoy it. Sit down, eat something and take in the line of peaks. It is also a useful check on yourself. Notice how your body feels at this height, and tell your trek leader if anything feels wrong. You return to Khullara for a late lunch and an early dinner. In the evening your trek leader gives a detailed summit briefing. It covers the start time, what to wear and carry, the turn-around time, and how the team will move on the steep sections. Listen closely and ask questions. Before you sleep, lay out all your summit clothes and gear so you can get ready quickly in the dark. Pack an insulated bottle for tomorrow. There is no water on the summit route, and ordinary bottles can freeze. Then go to bed as early as you can. The start is only a few hours away. What to Expect: - A 7 km out-and-back hike to Kuari Pass (3,815 m) over meadows, or snow in spring - One of the most famous views in Garhwal: Nanda Devi, Kamet, Dronagiri, Chaukhamba and Trishul - Climb high, sleep low – the key acclimatisation step before the summit - Late lunch and an early dinner back at camp - Detailed summit briefing: start time, clothing, turn-around time and movement on steep sections - Overnight: Tents at Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft) ### Day 5: Summit Day - Khullara to Pangarchulla Peak and back to Khullara **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 4,593 m (15,069 ft) → 3,350 m | Distance: 14 km | Duration: 11–14 hrs | Terrain: snow slopes, steep snow and boulder fields, exposed final ridge | Stay: Tents at Khullara** Summit day starts between midnight and 3 am, depending on conditions. You leave camp with your headlamp on and every warm layer you have. This is the coldest night of the trek. The first part climbs steadily up snow slopes in the dark. You see little beyond your own pool of light. Slowly the sky lightens as you gain height. In October and November the slopes are mostly rock with hard snow patches. Higher up, the route crosses steep snow and boulder fields to an exposed final ridge. This is the hard section, and it needs care, not speed. You wear microspikes and gaiters, and the team fixes ropes and uses ice axes where needed. Move slowly. Follow your trek leader’s instructions exactly. Keep your hands free on the rocks. We recommend a slow, even pace from the very start. It leaves you strength for the ridge. From the summit, at about 4,593 m (15,069 ft), the view stretches across Nanda Devi, Dronagiri, Hathi Parbat, Gauri Parbat, Kamet, Changabang and the peaks around Mana. It is one of the finest summit views in the Garhwal Himalaya. You have watched Dronagiri and Hathi Parbat from camp for days. From the top you see them up close. Take your photographs, and be ready to start down when your trek leader calls it. The descent is as demanding as the climb, so stay focused all the way down. The trek leader sets a firm turn-around time. If the group has not reached the top by then, you turn back. Reaching the summit is never guaranteed, and safety always comes first. There is no water on the route. Carry your insulated bottle, and eat and drink something small every hour, even if you do not feel hungry. You return to Khullara in the afternoon for a hot meal and rest after 11–14 hours on the move. What to Expect: - Start between midnight and 3 am, with your headlamp and every warm layer - Steady climb up snow slopes in the dark, then steep snow and boulder fields to an exposed final ridge - Microspikes and gaiters worn; ropes fixed and ice axes used where needed - Summit view of Nanda Devi, Dronagiri, Hathi Parbat, Gauri Parbat, Kamet, Changabang and the Mana peaks - Firm turn-around time; no water on the route, so carry an insulated bottle and eat every hour - Overnight: Tents at Khullara (3,350 m / 11,000 ft) ### Day 6: Khullara to Joshimath via Tugasi **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,350 m → 1,890 m (6,200 ft) | Distance: 8 km trek + 12 km drive | Duration: 3–5 hrs trek + 45 min drive | Terrain: downhill forest trail | Stay: Guesthouse / hotel, Joshimath** After a well-earned breakfast, you leave Khullara and descend through the forest to Tugasi. The trail is downhill all the way. Use your trekking poles and take care on the steep sections. Before you go, take a last look at Dronagiri and Hathi Parbat from camp. The 8 km descent takes 3–5 hours. Coming down, you notice how much easier it is to breathe at lower altitude. The meadows give way to the forest you climbed through on Day 2 and Day 3, and then to the village fields of Tugasi. The Joshimath valley you saw over your shoulder on Day 2 is now in front of you. Take it slowly anyway. Tired legs after summit day make slips more likely, and we recommend short steps and planted poles on every steep stretch. From Tugasi you drive about 12 km back to Joshimath, around 45 minutes on the road. Lunch is at Tugasi or Joshimath. A hot shower and a proper bed are waiting, and the mobile network is back. The rest of the afternoon is free to rest, shower and sort your gear. In the evening the group celebrates together. If you want local souvenirs or snacks for the drive home, Joshimath is a good place to buy them. Get to bed early. Tomorrow is another long day on the road, so dry anything damp and pack your bag tonight. What to Expect: - Downhill 8 km trek through the forest from Khullara to Tugasi - Trekking poles and a slow pace on the steep sections – tired legs slip more easily - 45-minute drive from Tugasi back to Joshimath - Hot shower, a proper bed and a free afternoon to rest and sort your gear - Group celebration in the evening; local souvenirs and snacks in Joshimath - Overnight: Guesthouse / hotel in Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft) ### Day 7: Joshimath to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Joshimath → Rishikesh (~255 km, 9–11 hrs) | Altitude: 1,890 m → 340 m | Stay: Trek ends in Rishikesh** After an early breakfast you drive back down the Alaknanda valley to Rishikesh. You pass the river confluences again, this time on the way down: Karnaprayag, Rudraprayag and finally Devprayag, where the Alaknanda meets the Bhagirathi. It is the same road you came up on Day 1. Expect 9–11 hours on the road with short stops. Breakfast is the last meal of the trek. Meals on the drive are not included, so keep a snack, water and a light jacket in your daypack. The short stops along the way are a chance to stretch legs that have done five days on the trail. You reach Rishikesh between 6 and 8 pm. Mountain roads can bring delays, so we recommend you book onward travel for late at night or the next day. For trains, Yog Nagari Rishikesh is the nearest station, and Haridwar has more options. Jolly Grant Airport in Dehradun is about an hour from Rishikesh. What to Expect: - Early breakfast in Joshimath and a 9–11 hour drive down the Alaknanda valley - Karnaprayag, Rudraprayag and Devprayag on the way down - Meals on the drive not included – keep a snack, water and a light jacket handy - Arrival in Rishikesh between 6 and 8 pm - Onward travel best booked for late night or the next day - Trek ends at Tugasi on Day 6; drop at Rishikesh ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 6: guesthouse or hotel in Joshimath, on a triple/quad-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 5: camping in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 7 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the camping nights - Dining and toilet tents at camp - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide for all 7 days - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Rishikesh to Joshimath and back - Not included: Joshimath to the trailhead at Tugasi and back - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs from Rishikesh; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare - Travel to and from Rishikesh, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Joshimath #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20–25 km / ~45 min from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Rishikesh early in the morning, so fly in the day before and stay in Rishikesh. **From Rishikesh to Joshimath:** 255 km, 9–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Rishikesh for Joshimath early in the morning. The short drive from Joshimath to the trailhead at Tugasi and back is also shared and extra. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (not included in the trek fee) drives from Joshimath and reaches Rishikesh by 06:00–08:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway stations:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (~1 hr) from Rishikesh, is far better connected than Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK), which has only a few trains. Reach Rishikesh the day before the trek, as the cab leaves early in the morning. - **Haridwar Junction** – Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains from Delhi, then about 1 hr by road to Rishikesh. - **Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK)** – a few direct trains; book early. Check current timings before you book. **From Rishikesh to Joshimath:** 255 km, 9–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Rishikesh for Joshimath early in the morning. The short drive from Joshimath to the trailhead at Tugasi and back is also shared and extra. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (not included in the trek fee) drives from Joshimath and reaches Rishikesh by 06:00–08:00 PM. Book your train home for the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Rishikesh, about 6–7 hrs. Travel a day early so you are rested for the long drive; if you are travelling on your own, early-morning buses also run from Rishikesh to Joshimath. **From Rishikesh to Joshimath:** 255 km, 9–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Rishikesh for Joshimath early in the morning. The short drive from Joshimath to the trailhead at Tugasi and back is also shared and extra. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab (not included in the trek fee) drives from Joshimath and reaches Rishikesh by 06:00–08:00 PM. Book your bus home for the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Joshimath is the last place with ATMs, and they can run out of cash - Withdraw what you need in Rishikesh - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Good network in Joshimath - Patchy up to Guling and mostly none at Khullara - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Pangarchulla Peak trek, and where does it start? The Pangarchulla Peak trek is in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand, above the Kuari Pass trail near Joshimath. The base is Joshimath, about 255 km (9–10 hours) by road from Rishikesh, and the trail starts at Tugasi village. The route climbs via Guling to Khullara, makes an acclimatisation hike to Kuari Pass, and then goes for the 15,069 ft summit. ### How many days is the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The Pangarchulla Peak trek takes 7 days from Rishikesh to Rishikesh, with 5 trekking days covering about 39 km. - **Day 1 and Day 7:** drive between Rishikesh and Joshimath (9–11 hours) - **Day 4:** acclimatisation hike to Kuari Pass - **Day 5:** summit day, 11–14 hours, starting between midnight and 3 am ### What is the altitude of the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The summit of the Pangarchulla Peak trek is at about 4,593 m (15,069 ft) – one of the most accessible true summits in Garhwal. - **Joshimath:** 1,890 m - **Guling camp:** 2,857 m - **Khullara camp:** 3,350 m - **Kuari Pass:** 3,815 m ### What is the difficulty level of the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The Pangarchulla Peak trek is graded Difficult and is not suitable as a first trek. Summit day lasts 11–14 hours on steep snow slopes, boulder fields and an exposed final ridge. - **Experience:** a prior moderate high-altitude trek is required - **Start:** pre-dawn on summit day - **Safety gear:** ropes and ice axes where conditions need them ### Is the Pangarchulla Peak trek good for beginners? No, the Pangarchulla Peak trek is not for beginners. You should have completed at least one moderate high-altitude trek such as Kedarkantha, Kuari Pass or Brahmatal. First-timers should start with Kuari Pass, which shares the first half of this route. ### What fitness level do I need for the Pangarchulla Peak trek? For the Pangarchulla Peak trek you should be able to walk 6–8 hours a day, and up to 14 hours on summit day, and aim to jog 5 km in about 30 minutes before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### Is the Pangarchulla trek the same as Kuari Pass? No. The Pangarchulla Peak trek shares the first part of the Kuari Pass trail and visits Kuari Pass (3,815 m) for acclimatisation, but then climbs a real summit at 15,069 ft. It is the natural next step after Kuari Pass. ### What is the best time to do the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The best time for the Pangarchulla Peak trek is March–April for a snow summit and October–November for a rockier, clearer climb. The trek is closed in the monsoon and in mid-winter. - **March–April:** classic season, summit slopes under snow - **October–November:** mostly rock with hard snow patches, very cold nights ### Is there snow on the Pangarchulla Peak trek in spring and autumn? Yes, the Pangarchulla Peak trek has snow on the upper slopes in March and April, and hard snow patches in October–November. Microspikes and gaiters from our Free Trekking Gear are worn, and the team fixes ropes on the steep sections. ### How cold does it get on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? On the Pangarchulla Peak trek, nights at Khullara drop to about -5 to 0°C in spring and can go lower in autumn; summit night is the coldest. - **March–April:** days 10–15°C, nights -5 to 0°C - **October–November:** days 5–15°C, nights -5°C or lower ### Which mountains can you see on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? From the Pangarchulla summit you see Nanda Devi, Dronagiri, Hathi Parbat, Gauri Parbat, Kamet, Changabang and the peaks around Mana. From Kuari Pass on Day 4 you also see Chaukhamba and Trishul. ### What is the terrain like on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The Pangarchulla trail goes from oak and rhododendron forest to open meadows, steep snow slopes, boulder fields and an exposed summit ridge. ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Pangarchulla Peak trek is moderate to high, because the summit is above 4,500 m. The itinerary includes a full acclimatisation day to Kuari Pass before the summit. Your trek leader checks oxygen and pulse every evening and sets a firm turn-around time on summit day. ### What is the minimum age for the Pangarchulla Peak trek? The minimum age for the Pangarchulla Peak trek is 14 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. You also need prior trek experience. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Pangarchulla Peak trek? To reach the Pangarchulla Peak trek, travel to Rishikesh; Joshimath is about 255 km (9–10 hours) up the Alaknanda valley. - **Train:** Yog Nagari Rishikesh, or Haridwar for more trains - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun, about 1 hour from Rishikesh - **Bus:** early-morning buses from Rishikesh to Joshimath Plan to reach Rishikesh the night before Day 1. ### Is transport included in the Pangarchulla Peak trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab runs from Rishikesh to Joshimath and back. ### Where do we stay on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? On the Pangarchulla Peak trek you stay 2 nights in a guesthouse or hotel in Joshimath (Day 1 and Day 6) and 4 nights in tents at Guling and Khullara. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with dining and toilet tents. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Pangarchulla Peak trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Pangarchulla Peak trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Pangarchulla Peak trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Pangarchulla Peak trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? On the Pangarchulla Peak trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? On the Pangarchulla Peak trek, carry 2 litres every day and an insulated bottle on summit day, when there is no water and bottles can freeze. Our team boils or treats the water at every campsite. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Pangarchulla Peak trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Pangarchulla Peak trek costs ₹2,400 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? No doctor joins the Pangarchulla Peak trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Pangarchulla Peak trek? For the Pangarchulla Peak trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Pangarchulla Peak trek? Mobile network on the Pangarchulla Peak trek is good in Joshimath, patchy up to Guling and mostly absent at Khullara. Joshimath has the last ATMs, which can run out of cash. Withdraw what you need in Rishikesh. ### Is reaching the Pangarchulla Peak summit guaranteed on every batch? No. On the Pangarchulla Peak trek the trek leader may turn the group back because of weather, snow conditions or time. A firm turn-around time is set every summit day – safety always comes before the summit. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 13 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 20 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 27 Nov 2026 - 23 Nov 2026 to 29 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 4 Dec 2026 - 6 Mar 2027 to 12 Mar 2027 - 13 Mar 2027 to 19 Mar 2027 - 20 Mar 2027 to 26 Mar 2027 - 21 Mar 2027 to 27 Mar 2027 - 25 Mar 2027 to 31 Mar 2027 - … 13 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/pangarchulla-peak-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Panwali Kantha Trek > Panwali Kantha Trek is a 5-day moderate trek in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,700 m (12,140 ft). It covers about 32 km on foot and starts at Ghuttu and ends at Kailbhagi. Best time: April to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹13,050 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 23 Oct 2026 (18 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/panwali-kantha-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,700 m / 12,140 ft - **Trekking distance:** 32 km - **Region:** Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Ghuttu / Kailbhagi - **Best time:** April to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Spring/Summer (Apr-Jun): Day 10°C to 18°C, Night 0°C to 5°C | Autumn (Sep-Oct): Day 8°C to 15°C, Night -3°C to 3°C - **Price:** ₹13,050 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 23 Oct 2026 (18 upcoming) ## Overview Some meadows announce themselves from the road. Panwali Kantha hides behind a long day of forest, and that is half its charm. Climb out of the oaks above Ghuttu, cross the high shoulder of Dyuili Top, and a rolling sea of grass opens in front of you, with the Gangotri peaks, Thalay Sagar, Meru and the Kedarnath range lined up along its far edge. Few groups walk here, and on most evenings the meadow belongs to you, the shepherds and their flocks. The Panwali Kantha trek is a 5-day trek in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, in the upper Bhilangana valley. Panwali Kantha (also called Panwali Bugyal) is one of the largest high meadows of Garhwal, a broad grassy ridge that runs between the Bhilangana valley and the Kedarnath side. For centuries it lay on the old pilgrim path that linked Gangotri with Kedarnath, and shepherds from the villages below still graze their sheep, goats and buffaloes here in summer. We pick you up at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM and drive past Tehri lake and Ghansali to Ghuttu (1,500 m), the last road-head village of the valley. From there the trail climbs to a forest camp at Gwanmanda (2,600 m), crosses Dyuili Top (3,700 m / 12,140 ft), the highest point of the trek, and drops to a camp on the Panwali meadows at 3,280 m (10,760 ft). The return comes back to Gwanmanda and finishes with a short walk down to the road at Kailbhagi (2,025 m). In all you walk about 32 km over four days. ### A Meadow at the Edge of the Snow Peaks – What Makes the Panwali Kantha Trek Unmissable What sets Panwali Kantha apart is the size of the view against the size of the trek. In four days of walking you go from village terraces to an open ridge at 3,700 m, and from that ridge the horizon fills with mountains: the Gangotri group, Thalay Sagar, Meru, Jogin, the Kedarnath peaks, Chaukhamba to the east and Bandarpoonch to the west. You see the high Himalaya side by side, without the crowds of the better-known meadow treks. The day that earns it is Day 3. You leave Gwanmanda early, climb through the last of the oak and rhododendron forest past the clearing of Pobhari, and walk onto open slopes that keep rising towards Dyuili Top. There is no water on this stretch, so you carry what you need from camp. Then the ground levels, the wind picks up, and the peaks are suddenly there, from one end of the sky to the other. From the top the trail tips down onto the Panwali meadows, where the camp sits on a gentle sweep of grass at 3,280 m. The evening at Panwali camp is the reward. The light turns gold on the grass, the snow peaks go pink and then grey, and the cold arrives fast once the sun drops. Next morning, if the sky is clear, a short walk up the meadow gives you sunrise over the Kedarnath range before you head back down. There is also the quiet. Panwali Kantha sees far fewer trekkers than the meadows near Kedarnath or Gangotri, and the only other people you meet up here may be shepherds from the villages below, moving their flocks across the grass in summer. Their stone huts and grazing camps dot the ridge. Sitting on the meadow with tea in hand, watching the light leave the peaks, you get a feel for the mountains that the busier trails rarely give. ### The Trail Itself The Panwali Kantha trek moves through three kinds of country. Out of Ghuttu the path is a village trail, climbing between terraced fields, cattle sheds and small hamlets, and then into a dense forest of banj oak, rhododendron and maple that shades most of the way to Gwanmanda. Above the forest the land opens into bugyal: wide, rolling grassland on a broad ridge, with shepherd huts, grazing flocks and the occasional stone shrine. The climbs are steady rather than technical, but Day 2 gains about 1,100 m and Day 3 gains another 1,100 m to Dyuili Top, so the trek asks for real fitness. The way back retraces the meadow and forest to Gwanmanda and then drops to Kailbhagi on a short, steep downhill path. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Panwali Kantha trek is graded moderate, and we recommend it for fit beginners who have done a weekend trek before, for solo trekkers and for small groups of friends or colleagues who want quiet meadows rather than busy trails. The hardest day is Day 3: about 10 km and 8–10 hours on foot, climbing from Gwanmanda (2,600 m) over Dyuili Top (3,700 m) and down to Panwali camp, with no water on the way. We recommend six to eight weeks of preparation, with regular running or brisk walking and some stair climbing with a loaded backpack. The minimum age is 10 years, and trekkers under 18 come with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: April to June and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Panwali Kantha Trek - **One of the largest meadows of Garhwal** – the Panwali bugyal, a rolling grass ridge at about 3,300–3,400 m - **Dyuili Top at 3,700 m (12,140 ft)** – the high point of the trek, with a wide view of snow peaks - **A long skyline of peaks** – the Gangotri group, Thalay Sagar, Meru, Jogin, the Kedarnath peaks, Chaukhamba and Bandarpoonch - **The old pilgrim path** – the meadow lay on the historic route that linked Gangotri and Kedarnath - **Forest camp at Gwanmanda** – a clearing in banj oak and rhododendron forest at 2,600 m - **Quiet trails** – few trekking groups, and shepherds with their flocks on the meadows in summer - **Ghuttu and the Bhilangana valley** – a road-head village of stone houses, reached by a drive past Tehri lake - **Rhododendrons in spring** – red blooms in the forest above Ghuttu in April and May ### Best Time to Do the Panwali Kantha Trek The Panwali Kantha trek runs in two windows: April to June, and September to October. In July and August the monsoon brings landslides to the roads and leeches and mist to the trail, and from November the higher ridge starts to take snow. Both windows have their own character, and the temperatures below are for the high camp at Panwali. #### April to June – Spring and Summer (Flowers and Green Meadows) In April the rhododendron forest above Ghuttu is in bloom, and patches of old snow can still lie near Dyuili Top. By May and June the meadows turn green, the shepherds bring their flocks up, and the days are long and pleasant. Days are 10°C to 18°C and nights at camp are 0°C to 5°C. Afternoon clouds and short showers are possible in June, so start each day early. #### September to October – Autumn (The Clearest Views) After the monsoon the air is washed clean, and autumn gives the sharpest views of the snow peaks from Dyuili Top. The meadow grass turns golden by October, and the skies are clear for days at a time. It is colder: days are 8°C to 15°C and nights at Panwali camp are -3°C to 3°C, with frost on the tents on late-October mornings. Bring an extra warm layer. ### Panwali Kantha Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Panwali Kantha trek costs ₹13,050 + 5% GST per person, for 5 days from Ghuttu to Kailbhagi, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Dehradun is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Ghuttu by Road **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Ghuttu | Distance: about 200 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Altitude: 640 m → 1,500 m** The trek begins with a long and scenic drive. The shared cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so arrive a little early with your bags packed and some cash in hand. The road climbs out of the Doon valley towards Chamba and New Tehri, and before long the hills open up around you, with pine forest on the slopes and small towns strung along the ridges. The highlight of the morning is Tehri lake, the long blue reservoir behind the Tehri dam, which the road follows for a good stretch. After a break for breakfast and tea, the road turns up the Bhilangana valley to Ghansali, the last real market town on the way. This is the place to pick up any last items and draw cash, as there is no reliable ATM beyond it. From Ghansali the road narrows and follows the Bhilangana river upstream to Ghuttu, a village at about 1,500 m (4,920 ft) at the head of the motorable road. Stone houses, terraced fields and walnut trees surround it, and the high ridges you will climb tomorrow rise above the village. The Bhilangana is a fast, clear river here, and the valley feels far from the busy pilgrim roads. Ghuttu is also the last place with a regular road connection, so this is where the mountain part of the trip really begins. You check into a simple guesthouse in Ghuttu in the late afternoon or evening. The trek leader meets the group, runs the first SpO2 and pulse check, hands over Free Trekking Gear and goes through the plan for the days ahead. Dinner is early, and a good night of sleep is the right preparation for the climb. Keep your daypack ready the night before, with water bottles, a rain layer and your headlamp, so the morning start is easy. What to Expect: - Pickup at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM - Long drive past Chamba, New Tehri and Tehri lake - Last market town and ATM at Ghansali - First health check and trek briefing in the evening - Overnight: guesthouse in Ghuttu ### Day 2: Ghuttu to Gwanmanda **Route Details:** **Trek: Ghuttu → Gwanmanda | Distance: 8 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Altitude: 1,500 m → 2,600 m** After breakfast you shoulder your daypack and walk out of Ghuttu on a village trail. The first hour climbs gently past terraced fields of wheat and potatoes, cattle sheds and small hamlets, with villagers and mules sharing the path. Look back now and then: the Bhilangana valley drops away quickly below you. Set an easy pace from the start; the climb is long, and the trekkers who start slowly are the ones who arrive fresh. Above the last houses the trail enters forest. Banj oak, rhododendron and maple close in overhead, and the path settles into a steady climb that rarely lets up. There are no shops or water points on this stretch, so start with two full bottles from Ghuttu. In April and May the rhododendrons are in bloom, and the forest floor is scattered with red petals. The day gains about 1,100 m, so the trek leader keeps a slow, even pace with regular short breaks. A packed lunch is eaten on the trail. Drink water at each stop even if you do not feel thirsty, as it helps your body adjust to the height. By mid-afternoon the gradient eases and the trail comes out into Gwanmanda (also spelled Gaurmanda), a flat clearing at the edge of the forest at about 2,600 m (8,530 ft), with oak trees on three sides. The tents are already up when you arrive. Tea and snacks are waiting, followed by the evening health check. As the sun goes down the forest turns quiet and the air cools sharply, so change into dry, warm layers. Dinner is early, as tomorrow is the longest day of the trek. The trek leader briefs the group on the start time, the water you need to carry and the turn-around rule for Dyuili Top, so that everyone knows the plan before bed. What to Expect: - Village trail through terraced fields out of Ghuttu - Steady climb of about 1,100 m through oak and rhododendron forest - No water on the trail: carry two full bottles - Rhododendron blooms in April and May - Forest camp in a clearing at Gwanmanda - Overnight: camp at Gwanmanda ### Day 3: Gwanmanda to Panwali Camp via Dyuili Top **Route Details:** **Trek: Gwanmanda → Dyuili Top → Panwali Camp | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 8–10 hrs | Altitude: 2,600 m → 3,700 m → 3,280 m** This is the big day of the Panwali Kantha trek, and it starts early. After a hot breakfast you fill your water bottles to the brim, because there is no water source on the way to Panwali camp. The trail climbs out of Gwanmanda through the upper oak and rhododendron forest, steep in places, until the trees start to thin. Around Pobhari (about 2,945 m / 9,660 ft), a small clearing used by shepherds, the forest gives way to open grass. From here the trail keeps climbing over wide slopes towards Dyuili Top, and the views grow with every switchback. In early April this upper section can still hold patches of snow, and the trek team decides on the spot whether microspikes are needed. At Dyuili Top, 3,700 m (12,140 ft), the whole horizon opens. On a clear day you can pick out the Gangotri group, Thalay Sagar, Meru and Jogin, the Kedarnath peaks, Chaukhamba further east and Bandarpoonch to the west. Take your time here for photographs and a packed lunch, out of the wind if you can find a sheltered spot. The trek leader keeps an eye on the weather and the time, and the group starts down well before clouds build in the afternoon. From the top the trail descends gently onto the Panwali meadows, a huge rolling bugyal, to the camp at about 3,280 m (10,760 ft). It is a long day of 8 to 10 hours, and you arrive tired but with the meadow all around you. Evenings here are cold and clear: watch the peaks turn pink at sunset, then get into warm layers before dinner. What to Expect: - Longest day: 10 km and 8-10 hrs on foot - No water on the route: carry enough from camp - Forest gives way to open grass at Pobhari - Dyuili Top at 3,700 m, the highest point of the trek - Wide view from the Gangotri group to Chaukhamba - Cold, clear evening on the meadow - Overnight: camp at Panwali meadow ### Day 4: Panwali Camp to Gwanmanda **Route Details:** **Trek: Panwali Camp → Gwanmanda | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Altitude: 3,280 m → 2,600 m** If the sky is clear, wake before dawn and walk a short way up the meadow with a hot drink. The first light reaches the Kedarnath peaks and Chaukhamba before it touches the grass, and for a few minutes the whole range glows. It is one of the quietest and most memorable mornings of the trek. Wrap up well, as the meadow is at its coldest just before sunrise, and walk back to camp in time for a hot breakfast while the tents dry in the sun. After breakfast you pack up and start the walk back. The trail climbs gently across the meadows towards the ridge before it begins its long descent, so the views stay with you for the first few hours. In summer you pass shepherd camps and grazing flocks of sheep, goats and buffaloes on the open slopes. Give the flocks room on the trail, and keep a respectful distance from the shepherd dogs, which guard their animals closely. Below Pobhari the trail drops back into the oak and rhododendron forest. The descent is long and steady, and it is harder on the knees than it looks, so use your trekking poles and keep a measured pace on the steeper sections. Lunch is packed and eaten on the way. Rest at the clearing of Pobhari before you enter the trees, and refill your bottles at camp the next time you can, as the upper trail is dry. You reach Gwanmanda in the afternoon, where the camp is ready in the familiar forest clearing. The air is noticeably warmer than on the meadow. The evening is relaxed: tea, the last health check of the trek in the forest, and an early dinner around the dining tent. It is the last night in tents, and a good time to share stories of the climb with the group and the trek team. What to Expect: - Optional sunrise walk on the Panwali meadow - Last views of the snow peaks across the bugyal - Shepherd camps and grazing flocks in summer - Long descent through oak and rhododendron forest - Warmer evening back at the forest camp - Overnight: camp at Gwanmanda ### Day 5: Gwanmanda to Kailbhagi, Drive to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Trek: Gwanmanda → Kailbhagi | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Altitude: 2,600 m → 2,025 m | Drive: Kailbhagi → Dehradun, about 200 km, 7–8 hrs** The last morning starts early, as a long drive follows the walk. After breakfast the group leaves Gwanmanda on a short, steep downhill path through the forest towards Kailbhagi. Take it slowly on the loose sections and keep your poles handy. The forest is quiet in the early light, and you may hear Himalayan monals and other birds calling from the slopes. Pack your bags well the night before, as the cab will be waiting at the road head. The forest opens onto fields and village houses as you come down to Kailbhagi, at about 2,025 m (6,640 ft), where the shared cab meets the group. The walk takes 2 to 3 hours, and it is a good time to say thank you to the trek team and the staff who looked after you on the mountain. You return your Free Trekking Gear to the trek leader here, and the deposit is refunded by UPI within 2 working days after we check the returned gear. From Kailbhagi the road runs down the Bhilangana valley to Ghansali and back past Tehri lake towards Dehradun. It is a long drive of 7 to 8 hours with breaks for lunch and tea along the way, depending on road and weather conditions. Meals during the drive are not included, so keep some cash for the roadside dhabas. Sit back and watch the hills give way to the plains as the road drops towards the Doon valley. You reach Dehradun Railway Station in the evening. Plan any onward train, bus or flight for late night or the next day, so a delay on the mountain roads does not make you miss it. If you are staying the night in Dehradun, book a room near the station in advance. The Panwali Kantha trek ends here, with the meadow and the snow peaks still fresh in your mind. What to Expect: - Short, steep descent through the forest - Road head at Kailbhagi village - Drive back past Ghansali and Tehri lake - Arrival at Dehradun Railway Station in the evening - Book onward travel for late night or the next day - Overnight: no stay (trek ends) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1: guesthouse in Ghuttu, twin or triple sharing - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Gwanmanda, Panwali meadow and Gwanmanda #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner at Ghuttu to Day 5 breakfast at Gwanmanda - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 5-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Ghuttu and Kailbhagi to Dehradun - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Ghuttu #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near the station. **From Dehradun to Ghuttu:** about 200 km, 7–8 hrs by road via Chamba, New Tehri and Ghansali. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** On Day 5 the group walks down to Kailbhagi and the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 7–8 hrs to Dehradun Railway Station, arriving in the evening. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, arriving early in the morning before the 06:30 AM pickup. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings before you book. **From Dehradun to Ghuttu:** about 200 km, 7–8 hrs by road via Chamba, New Tehri and Ghansali. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** On Day 5 the group walks down to Kailbhagi and the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 7–8 hrs to Dehradun Railway Station, arriving in the evening. Plan your train home for late night on Day 5 or the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Ordinary and Volvo buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) buses from inside the ISBT, and from Dehradun ISBT take an auto or cab to the railway station for the 06:30 AM pickup. **From Dehradun to Ghuttu:** about 200 km, 7–8 hrs by road via Chamba, New Tehri and Ghansali. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. **Return:** On Day 5 the group walks down to Kailbhagi and the cab (not included in the trek fee) takes 7–8 hrs to Dehradun Railway Station, arriving in the evening. Plan your bus home for late night on Day 5 or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Ghansali, the market town before Ghuttu; carry cash from Dehradun or Ghansali - No ATM at Ghuttu or on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - BSNL and Jio work at Ghuttu and along the road through Ghansali - Little or no signal at Gwanmanda, Dyuili Top and the Panwali meadow - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Ghuttu ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Panwali Kantha trek, and where does it start? The Panwali Kantha trek is in Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand, in the upper Bhilangana valley, and it starts at Ghuttu village (1,500 m). Panwali Kantha is a large high meadow on the ridge between the Bhilangana valley and the Kedarnath side. We pick you up at Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM and drive about 200 km to Ghuttu on Day 1. The trek ends at Kailbhagi, a road-head village close to Ghuttu, from where the cab drives back to Dehradun. ### How many days does the Panwali Kantha trek take from Dehradun? The Panwali Kantha trek takes 5 days from Dehradun to Dehradun. Day 1 is the drive to Ghuttu, Days 2 to 4 are trekking days with three nights in tents, and Day 5 is a short walk to Kailbhagi followed by the drive back. You walk about 32 km in total: - Day 2: Ghuttu to Gwanmanda, 8 km - Day 3: Gwanmanda to Panwali camp via Dyuili Top, 10 km - Day 4: Panwali camp to Gwanmanda, 10 km - Day 5: Gwanmanda to Kailbhagi, 4 km We recommend keeping one buffer day in your travel plans. ### What is the maximum altitude reached on the Panwali Kantha trek? The maximum altitude on the Panwali Kantha trek is 3,700 m (12,140 ft) at Dyuili Top, crossed on Day 3. The camp on the Panwali meadow sits lower, at about 3,280 m (10,760 ft), so you sleep below the high point. The trek starts at Ghuttu (1,500 m) and the forest camp at Gwanmanda is at 2,600 m (8,530 ft), which gives your body two nights to adjust before the big climb. ### What is the difficulty level of the Panwali Kantha trek? The Panwali Kantha trek is graded moderate. The trail is not technical, but the climbs are long: Day 2 gains about 1,100 m from Ghuttu to Gwanmanda, and Day 3 gains another 1,100 m to Dyuili Top over about 10 km and 8–10 hours, with no water on the way. The descent on Day 4 is long and tests the knees. Fit beginners who have done a weekend trek and who train for six to eight weeks can complete it comfortably. ### What is the best time of year for the Panwali Kantha trek? The Panwali Kantha trek runs from April to June and from September to October. April and May bring rhododendron blooms in the forest, and by June the meadows are green and full of grazing flocks. Autumn, in September and October, gives the clearest views of the snow peaks and golden grass on the meadow. We do not run the trek in July and August because of the monsoon, or in winter when the higher ridge is under snow. ### Will I see snow on the Panwali Kantha trek in April? You may see patches of old snow near Dyuili Top on the Panwali Kantha trek in early April, but it is not a snow trek. By May the snow has melted from the trail, and from June to October there is no snow on the route. The higher ridge takes fresh snow from November, which is why the season closes after October. When there is snow on the upper section, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear and the trek team guides the group across. ### How cold does it get at night on the Panwali Kantha trek? Nights at the Panwali meadow camp on the Panwali Kantha trek are 0°C to 5°C from April to June and -3°C to 3°C in September and October. Days are pleasant: 10°C to 18°C in spring and summer, and 8°C to 15°C in autumn. Gwanmanda, lower in the forest, is a few degrees warmer. Bring four warm layers in summer and five in autumn: thermals, two fleece or woollen layers and the -10°C jacket from Free Trekking Gear. ### What is the minimum age to join the Panwali Kantha trek? The minimum age for the Panwali Kantha trek is 10 years, for children who already walk regularly and can manage a long day on foot. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Panwali Kantha trek pickup point in Dehradun? The pickup point for the Panwali Kantha trek is Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM on Day 1. Dehradun has direct trains from Delhi, including the overnight Nanda Devi Express, and overnight buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT. Jolly Grant Airport is about 25 km from the city. If you arrive by day train or flight, come the day before and stay near the station. From Dehradun it is about 200 km and 7–8 hrs to Ghuttu. ### What does the Panwali Kantha trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Panwali Kantha trek costs ₹13,050 + 5% GST per person, for 5 days from Ghuttu to Kailbhagi. The trek fee includes: - Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes (₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - A guesthouse night at Ghuttu and three nights in tents - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 breakfast - Forest permits and camping fees - A certified trek leader, local guide, cook and support staff ### How do I book the Panwali Kantha trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Panwali Kantha trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹13,050 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is transport to Ghuttu included in the Panwali Kantha trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Panwali Kantha trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM to Ghuttu on Day 1, and from Kailbhagi back to Dehradun on Day 5. The fare is paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, and your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare before departure. The drive is about 200 km and 7–8 hrs each way, via New Tehri and Ghansali. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Panwali Kantha trek? Mobile signal on the Panwali Kantha trek is limited to the villages: BSNL and Jio work at Ghuttu, but there is little or no signal at Gwanmanda and on the Panwali meadow. Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave Ghuttu. The last reliable ATMs are at Ghansali, the market town before Ghuttu, so draw cash there or in Dehradun. Carry small notes, as cards are not accepted on the trail. ### Do I need a permit for the Panwali Kantha trek? Yes, the Panwali Kantha trek needs forest and camping permissions from the local authorities, and Trekkaro arranges them as part of the trek fee. You only need to carry a government photo ID, such as an Aadhaar card, passport, driving licence or voter ID, and share your details with us when you book. Foreign nationals should carry their passport and tell us at the time of booking, as permit charges for foreign trekkers can differ. ### How do you handle altitude sickness and safety on the Panwali Kantha trek? On the Panwali Kantha trek, the trek leader checks the SpO2 and pulse of each trekker every day, from the first evening at Ghuttu. The route sleeps at 1,500 m, 2,600 m and 3,280 m, so the body has time to adjust before Dyuili Top at 3,700 m. Our trek leaders are NIM certified or equivalent, and the team carries oxygen cylinders, a first-aid kit and a stretcher. Report a headache, nausea or breathlessness at once; anyone unwell rests or descends. ### Is the Panwali Kantha trek suitable for first-time trekkers? The Panwali Kantha trek suits fit first-time trekkers, ideally those who have done one weekend trek before. The trail is not technical and the camps are comfortable, but Day 3 is a long 10 km day of 8–10 hours over Dyuili Top, with no water on the way. Train for six to eight weeks with running or brisk walking, stair climbs with a loaded backpack and long weekend walks, so that you can walk 5 km in about 35 minutes before the trek. ### What kind of accommodation and food does the Panwali Kantha trek offer? On the Panwali Kantha trek you stay one night in a guesthouse at Ghuttu (twin or triple sharing) and three nights in 3-person tents at Gwanmanda and the Panwali meadow, with sleeping bags and mats. The campsites have a dining tent and a toilet tent. Meals are simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food, from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 breakfast, with tea, soup and snacks at camp and a packed lunch on the trail. ## Upcoming batches - 23 Oct 2026 to 27 Oct 2026 - 2 Apr 2027 to 6 Apr 2027 - 9 Apr 2027 to 13 Apr 2027 - 16 Apr 2027 to 20 Apr 2027 - 23 Apr 2027 to 27 Apr 2027 - 30 Apr 2027 to 4 May 2027 - 7 May 2027 to 11 May 2027 - 14 May 2027 to 18 May 2027 - 21 May 2027 to 25 May 2027 - 28 May 2027 to 1 Jun 2027 - 4 Jun 2027 to 8 Jun 2027 - 11 Jun 2027 to 15 Jun 2027 - … 6 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/panwali-kantha-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Phulara Ridge Trek > Phulara Ridge Trek is a 6-day moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,763 m (12,345 ft). It covers about 26.5 km on foot and starts and ends at Sankri. Best time: March to June and September to November. Trekkaro price: ₹9,160 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (57 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/phulara-ridge-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,763 m / 12,345 ft - **Trekking distance:** 26.5 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Sankri - **Best time:** March to June and September to November - **Temperature:** Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 8°C to 15°C, Night -5°C to 3°C | Summer (May-Jun): Day 12°C to 20°C, Night 0°C to 5°C | Autumn (Sep-Nov): Day 10°C to 14°C, Night -3°C to 0°C - **Price:** ₹9,160 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (57 upcoming) ## Overview For more than four hours, the trail stays on top. Phulara Ridge lifts you above the treeline onto a broad, grassy crest and then simply keeps you there, with the Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag and Ranglana along the horizon and Kedarkantha standing close by. The slopes fall away into forested valleys on either side. There is no single moment of arrival on this trek; the high ground is something you walk along, hour after hour, on a ridge that rises to 12,345 ft. The Phulara Ridge trek is a loop from the wooden village of Sankri through a run of very different landscapes. It rises through pine and oak forest to Juda Ka Talab, a small lake ringed by tall trees; climbs on through oak and silver birch to the open meadows of Bhoj Gadi, where Kedarkantha rises close by; follows the length of Phulara Ridge itself, with the Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and Ranglana in view; and drops to the meadows of Pushtara before a long descent to Taluka on the Supin river. Phulara Ridge lies in the Govind Pashu Vihar National Park in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand. The trek takes six days from Dehradun, with four days on foot covering about 26.5 km. It starts at Sankri (1,950 m / 6,400 ft), camps at Juda Ka Talab (2,773 m), Bhoj Gadi (3,400 m) and Pushtara (2,900 m), reaches its highest point on the ridge at about 3,763 m (12,345 ft), and finishes at the road head of Taluka (2,107 m). It is graded moderate and is known above all for its ridge walk: more than four hours on an open grassy crest, which we count as rare at this grade. In our experience, few moderate treks give you so much time in the company of the high peaks. ### Walking the Roof of the Valley – What Makes the Phulara Ridge Trek Unmissable What makes Phulara Ridge unmissable is time. On the ridge day you are not racing up to a single point for a few minutes of view before turning back; the whole high day is the view. From Bhoj Gadi a short climb puts you on the crest, and from there the trail follows the grassy spine of the ridge for more than four hours. On both sides the slopes drop into forested valleys, so the walk feels less like a climb and more like a long traverse along the roof of the valley. The ridge is broad and open, with no shade and no water, and the wind and the sky are as much a part of the day as the peaks. You leave Bhoj Gadi early, after breakfast, and climb a short way above the meadow onto Phulara Ridge. The peaks are there at once, and then they stay there. You walk on through the morning along the grass – the Swargarohini group and Bandarpoonch on the horizon, Kala Nag and Ranglana beside them, Kedarkantha close enough to feel like a neighbour. The ridge rises to about 3,763 m, the highest point of the trek, and the view does not so much change as deepen. By the third hour you have stopped reaching for your camera at every turn of the trail. You are just walking, and looking. In the afternoon the trail leaves the ridge and descends to the meadows of Pushtara at about 2,900 m, the last campsite of the trek. It is a fitting place to end the big day: the ridge you have just walked rises above camp, and you can look up at the line you followed all morning. The day covers 8.5 km over 6–7 hours, the longest of the trek. We think of it as one of the finest single days of walking a moderate Himalayan trek can offer. ### The Valley Itself The trek begins right from Sankri, a small village of traditional wooden houses at about 1,950 m, looking out over forested hills. The trail climbs straight out of the village into pine and oak forest, a fairly steep and steady climb from start to finish. After about four hours the path levels out and the trees open around Juda Ka Talab, a small lake surrounded by tall oak and pine at 2,773 m, where the evenings are calm and cold. Above the lake the trail passes through oak and silver birch, the forest slowly thins, and looking back you see the Juda Ka Talab basin and the forested valleys below. Then the trees give way to the open meadows of Bhoj Gadi at 3,400 m, where the higher snow peaks to the north begin to appear on a clear day. At the edge of the meadow stand bhoj (Himalayan birch) trees, whose papery bark was once used for writing manuscripts. Beyond the ridge, the trek comes down through a different world. From the meadows of Pushtara the trail drops steadily through forest, then out onto open village slopes above the Supin river, past shepherd huts and small fields, with glimpses of village life in the Tons valley. In the villages above Taluka you pass traditional wooden houses and granaries, some decorated with carvings, before the trail ends at Taluka, a small settlement and road head on the Supin river at about 2,107 m. The route is a traverse from Sankri to Taluka, so no stretch of trail is walked twice. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Phulara Ridge trek is graded moderate and is suitable for fit beginners as well as trekkers with some experience behind them. The first two trekking days are steady climbs – 5 km in 4–5 hours from Sankri to Juda Ka Talab, then 5 km in 4–6 hours to Bhoj Gadi, a shorter day by design to give your body time to adjust to the height before the ridge. The hard day is the ridge itself: 8.5 km over 6–7 hours, with more than four hours on open ground with no shade and no water, followed by a descent to Pushtara. The next day brings another long descent, about 8 km over 5–6 hours, to Taluka, so strong knees matter as much as stamina. There are no technical sections. You should be able to walk 5–7 hours a day on uneven ground, and we recommend four to six weeks of preparation before departure. Trekkers aged 9 and above can join; under-18s must be with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: March to June and September to November. ### Key Highlights of the Phulara Ridge Trek - **More than four hours on an open ridge** – a grassy crest above the treeline, rare at this grade, rising to 3,763 m (12,345 ft) - **A continuous mountain panorama** – the Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and Ranglana along the horizon for most of the ridge day - **Juda Ka Talab** – a small forest lake ringed by tall oak and pine, and the setting for the first night in tents - **Two high meadow camps** – Bhoj Gadi at 3,400 m and Pushtara at 2,900 m, with the ridge you have walked rising above the last camp - **Bhoj trees** – Himalayan birch at the edge of Bhoj Gadi, whose papery bark was once used for writing manuscripts - **Summer wildflowers and golden autumn grasslands** – green meadows in May and June, gold and russet in autumn - **A full loop through Govind Pashu Vihar National Park** – from the wooden village of Sankri to Taluka on the Supin river, past carved wooden houses and granaries ### Best Time to Do the Phulara Ridge Trek The Phulara Ridge trek runs in two windows: March to June, and September to November. Spring and early summer bring green meadows, wildflowers and long days on the ridge; autumn brings crisp, clear skies, the best mountain views and cold nights at the higher camps. Each window shows you a different Phulara. #### March to June – Spring and Summer (Green Meadows and Long Days) This is our most popular season on Phulara Ridge. The high meadows are green and full of wildflowers, and the long days give the ridge walk room to breathe. From March to early May, patches of snow can remain on the ridge, adding a little white to the green. Days are mild and nights cold without being severe, which makes this a comfortable window for fit beginners on their first moderate trek. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 20°C | Night at camp: 0°C to 5°C - **Trail conditions:** Green meadows and wildflowers; long days; patches of snow possible on the ridge from March to early May. - **Best for:** Wildflower meadows, long daylight hours on the ridge and milder nights. #### September to October – Autumn (Crisp Skies, Clearest Views) After the monsoon the air over the ridge turns crisp and clear, and the mountain views are at their best. The Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag and Ranglana stand sharp against the sky along the whole length of the ridge walk. The grasslands turn golden, the forest around Juda Ka Talab turns golden too, and the meadow at Bhoj Gadi moves through gold and russet. Nights at the higher camps are cold, at or just below freezing. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 14°C | Night at the higher camps: -3°C to 0°C (September to November) - **Trail conditions:** Crisp, clear skies; golden grasslands and autumn forest; cold nights. - **Best for:** The clearest mountain views from the ridge and autumn colour. #### November – Late Autumn (The Season’s Close) November carries the clear skies and golden grasslands of autumn to the end of the season. Nights at the higher camps are cold, and an early snowfall can leave patches of snow on the ridge, so the walk along the crest may carry a first trace of winter. For trekkers comfortable with cold camps, it is a rewarding time to see the peaks in late-autumn light. - **Trail conditions:** Clear autumn weather; possible patches of snow on the ridge after an early snowfall; cold nights. - **Best for:** Late-autumn views and trekkers comfortable with cold camps. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For green meadows, wildflowers and the longest days on the ridge, book a May or June batch – our recommendation for fit beginners on their first moderate trek. For the clearest views of the Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag and Ranglana choose September or October. If you do not mind cold nights and would welcome the chance of early snow on the crest, November is a rewarding late-season pick. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Sankri **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Sankri (~200 km, 9–10 hrs) | Altitude: 1,950 m (6,400 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay, Sankri** Day 1 is a long travel day, so you leave Dehradun early, around 6–7 am. The road climbs through Mussoorie and then winds through Nainbagh, Purola and Mori. After Mori it follows the Tons river and then the Supin river, through pine forest, into Govind Pashu Vihar National Park. The last reliable ATMs are at Purola, so we recommend withdrawing the cash you need in Dehradun. Sankri is a small village at about 1,950 m, with traditional wooden houses and views of the surrounding forested hills. It is the base for several treks, including Kedarkantha and Har Ki Dun, so it has a friendly, busy feel in the trekking season. You check in to the guesthouse or homestay. In the evening your trek leader holds a briefing and checks everyone’s documents and gear. The forest permit for the national park is arranged at Sankri. Jio and BSNL work in Sankri; there is no network on most of the trail. Eat a good dinner and sleep early. The trek begins tomorrow. What to Expect: - Early start via Mussoorie, Nainbagh, Purola and Mori - Tons and Supin river valleys into Govind Pashu Vihar National Park - Traditional wooden houses of Sankri village - Evening briefing with a document and gear check - Last reliable ATMs at Purola; Jio and BSNL in Sankri - Overnight: Sankri (1,950 m / 6,400 ft) ### Day 2: Sankri to Juda Ka Talab **Route Details:** **Altitude: 1,950 m → 2,773 m (9,100 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: fairly steep, steady climb through pine and oak forest | Stay: Tents at Juda Ka Talab** The trek starts right from the village. The trail climbs out of Sankri and quickly enters a forest of pine and oak. This is a fairly steep, steady climb from start to finish. There is no single hard section to brace for. The whole day is the climb, and the way to walk it is to find a slow, comfortable rhythm early and hold it. Take short breaks rather than long ones, so your legs stay warm and your breathing stays even. Drink plenty of water. The climb is steady, and it is easy to get dehydrated without noticing. Lunch is packed and eaten on the trail. Mules carry the camp equipment. If you have opted for backpack offloading, you walk with only a daypack and water. As you gain height, the forest thickens and the air turns cool. Through gaps in the trees you start to see the surrounding ridges. Stop at the gaps for a minute; it is a good excuse to catch your breath. After about four hours the path levels out and the trees open around Juda Ka Talab, a small lake surrounded by tall oak and pine, at about 2,773 m. After a morning of climbing, the level ground feels very welcome. Camp is close to the lake. In summer the clearing is green; in autumn the forest turns golden. On arrival there is hot tea and snacks. Water is available at the campsite, and the team boils or treats it before you drink. Evenings by the lake are calm and cold. Walk around the lake once before the light goes. This is your first night in tents, so set up your sleeping bag and layers before dark. Your trek leader starts the daily oxygen and pulse checks this evening, and they continue every evening of the trek. What to Expect: - Fairly steep, steady climb through pine and oak forest from the first step - Views of the surrounding ridges through gaps in the trees - Juda Ka Talab, a small lake ringed by tall oak and pine - Hot tea on arrival and water at camp, boiled or treated by the team - First night in tents and the first evening oxygen and pulse check - Overnight: Juda Ka Talab camp (2,773 m / 9,100 ft) ### Day 3: Juda Ka Talab to Bhoj Gadi **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,773 m → 3,400 m (11,150 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 4–6 hrs | Terrain: climb through oak and silver birch forest that thins onto open meadow | Stay: Tents at Bhoj Gadi** After breakfast you keep climbing above the lake. The trail passes through oak and silver birch, and the forest slowly thins as you gain height. Keep the same slow rhythm as yesterday; your legs will thank you for it tomorrow. Look back for views over the Juda Ka Talab basin and the forested valleys below. Soon the trees give way to the open meadows of Bhoj Gadi, at about 3,400 m. After two days inside the forest, this is the first open camp of the trek. Kedarkantha rises close by, and on a clear day the higher snow peaks to the north begin to appear. Look for the bhoj (Himalayan birch) trees at the edge of the meadow. Their papery bark was once used for writing manuscripts. This is a shorter day by design. You reach camp by late morning, which gives your body time to adjust to the height before tomorrow’s ridge walk. In our experience, a short walk around camp after you arrive helps with acclimatisation, but rest is just as important. Spend the afternoon resting, exploring the meadow, or watching the light change on the mountains. Sit in the sun while it lasts. Water is available at camp, so top up your bottles and drink steadily through the afternoon. In summer the meadow is green and full of wildflowers; in autumn it turns gold and russet. Evenings here are cold, so put on your warm layers as soon as the sun goes down. Your trek leader checks everyone’s oxygen levels and briefs the group on the big day ahead. Fill at least two litres tonight for the ridge, where there is no water. Lay out tomorrow’s cap, sunscreen and warm layer before you sleep, because the ridge has no shade and can be windy. Then get to bed early. What to Expect: - Oak and silver birch forest that thins as you climb - Views back over the Juda Ka Talab basin - Open meadows of Bhoj Gadi with Kedarkantha close by - Bhoj (Himalayan birch) trees at the edge of the meadow - Early arrival, a free afternoon and the ridge-day briefing - Overnight: Bhoj Gadi camp (3,400 m / 11,150 ft) ### Day 4: Ridge Day - Bhoj Gadi to Pushtara via Phulara Ridge **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,400 m → 3,763 m (12,345 ft) → 2,900 m | Distance: 8.5 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: short climb, then 4+ hrs on an open, grassy ridge and a long descent to meadow | Stay: Tents at Pushtara** Today is the reason most people choose this trek, and it is the longest day. You start early after breakfast and climb a short distance from Bhoj Gadi onto Phulara Ridge. Once you are on the ridge, the trail follows its grassy crest for more than four hours. Most treks climb to one point and turn back. Here, the whole high day is the view. The views are continuous. To the north and east, the Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and Ranglana fill the horizon, and Kedarkantha stands close by. The ridge rises to about 3,763 m (12,345 ft), the highest point of the trek. On both sides the slopes fall away into forested valleys. Keep your camera or phone in an easy-to-reach pocket. The best views of the trek are today, and you may even pick up an occasional phone signal on the ridge. The ridge is broad and safe in good weather, with no technical sections. The challenge is exposure. There is no shade and no water on the ridge, so carry at least two litres, wear a cap and sunscreen, and keep a warm layer handy for the wind. Sip water regularly rather than waiting until you are thirsty. If the weather turns, your trek leader may change the plan for the day. Safety always comes first. In the afternoon the trail leaves the ridge and descends to the meadows of Pushtara, at about 2,900 m, your last campsite. The descent is long, so use your trekking poles and keep your steps short. Pushtara is a beautiful place to end the big day, with the ridge you have just walked rising above camp. Water is available at camp again, so refill and drink well. After the evening oxygen and pulse check, get to bed early. Your legs have earned it. What to Expect: - Short climb from Bhoj Gadi onto Phulara Ridge - More than four hours on the open, grassy crest, up to 3,763 m - Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag and Ranglana, with Kedarkantha close by - No shade or water on the ridge: carry at least 2 litres, a cap, sunscreen and a warm layer - Long descent to the Pushtara meadows, under the ridge you have walked - Overnight: Pushtara camp (2,900 m) ### Day 5: Pushtara to Taluka, drive to Sankri **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,900 m → 2,107 m | Distance: 8 km trek + 12 km drive | Duration: 5–6 hrs trek + 1 hr drive | Terrain: long, steady descent through forest and open village slopes | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay, Sankri** This is the last day on the trail. From Pushtara the trail drops steadily through forest, then comes out onto open village slopes above the Supin river. It is a long descent of around 8 km, and the downhill is the hard part of the day. Walk at a steady pace and use your trekking poles to protect your knees. Take a short break every hour or so to rest them. Tie your shoelaces firmly before you start; loose shoes on a long downhill lead to blisters. Along the way you pass shepherd huts and small fields, and get glimpses of village life in the Tons valley. Look out for traditional wooden houses and granaries in the villages above Taluka, some decorated with carvings. Give way to animals and villagers on the narrow paths near the villages. This is the quieter side of the Supin valley, and it is a good day to slow down and enjoy it. The trail ends at Taluka, a small settlement and road head on the Supin river, at about 2,107 m. From Taluka you drive back to Sankri, about 12 km and roughly an hour on a narrow mountain road. The road is narrow, so the drive is slow; sit back and watch the river below. Lunch is on the way or at Sankri. Back at the guesthouse there is time for a hot shower, a good meal and a well-earned rest. After three nights in tents, a bed and hot water feel very good. If you have any blisters or sore spots from the descent, show them to your trek leader so they can be treated tonight. Spend the evening walking through Sankri if you have energy left, or simply rest your legs. This is your last night in the mountains before the long drive back to Dehradun. What to Expect: - Long, steady descent of about 8 km through forest - Open village slopes above the Supin river - Shepherd huts, small fields, and carved wooden houses and granaries above Taluka - Road head at Taluka and a drive of about 12 km back to Sankri - Hot shower, a good meal and rest at the guesthouse - Overnight: Sankri (1,950 m / 6,400 ft) ### Day 6: Sankri to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Sankri → Dehradun (~200 km, 9–10 hrs) | Altitude: 1,950 m → 640 m | Stay: Trek ends in Dehradun** This is a long travel day. After an early breakfast you leave Sankri and drive back to Dehradun along the same road you came up on Day 1, through Mori, Purola, Nainbagh and Mussoorie. The drive takes 9–10 hours with short stops. The first part follows the Supin and Tons rivers, through pine forest and past small villages. With the trek behind you, it is a quieter ride to watch the valleys go by. Keep a snack and water in your daypack for the long drive, and stretch your legs at each stop. Purola has the first reliable ATMs on the way down if you need cash. You reach Dehradun by evening. Please book your onward trains, buses or flights for the late night or the next day, in case of delays on the mountain road. If you are travelling the same night, keep your tickets and ID in an easy-to-reach pocket. The trek ends on arrival in Dehradun. What to Expect: - Early breakfast and departure from Sankri - Return drive along the Tons valley via Mori, Purola, Nainbagh and Mussoorie - 9–10 hours on the road with short stops - Arrival in Dehradun by evening - Onward trains, buses or flights best booked for the late night or the next day - Trek ends at Taluka on Day 5; drop at Dehradun Railway Station ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: guesthouse or homestay in Sankri, on a triple/quad-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the camping nights - Dining and toilet tents at camp - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide for all 6 days - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Sankri and back. We help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way (₹2,000 return), paid directly to the driver. - Not included: Taluka to Sankri on Day 5 - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs; the fare is paid directly to the driver - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Sankri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km / 45–60 min from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay near the station. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** 200 km, 9–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Sankri at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab from Sankri (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) reaches Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), which is also the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. Take the overnight train to arrive on the morning of departure, or come a day early. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi, the easiest way to make the 06:30 AM cab. - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat** – day trains; take them the day before the trek. Check current timings before you book. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** 200 km, 9–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Sankri at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab from Sankri (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) reaches Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-night train or travel the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Buses run through the night from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT, about 6–7 hrs. Prefer Uttarakhand Roadways (government) Volvo or ordinary buses from inside the ISBT, and from Dehradun ISBT take an auto or cab to the railway station for the 06:30 AM pickup. If you are travelling on your own, early-morning buses also run from Dehradun to Sankri. **From Dehradun to Sankri:** 200 km, 9–10 hrs by road. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Sankri at 6:30 AM. **Return:** On the last day the shared cab from Sankri (₹1,000 per person, paid directly to the driver) reaches Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-night bus or travel the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Purola has the last reliable ATMs - Withdraw the cash you need in Dehradun to be safe - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio and BSNL work in Sankri - No network on most of the trail, with occasional signal on the ridge - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Phulara Ridge trek, and where does it start? The Phulara Ridge trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, inside Govind Pashu Vihar National Park. It starts from Sankri, the same base village as Kedarkantha and Har Ki Dun, about 200 km (9–10 hours) from Dehradun. The trail loops from Sankri via Juda Ka Talab and Bhoj Gadi over Phulara Ridge to Pushtara and down to Taluka. ### How many days is the Phulara Ridge trek? The Phulara Ridge trek takes 6 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 4 trekking days covering about 26.5 km. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** drive between Dehradun and Sankri (9–10 hours) - **Days 2–5:** trekking, 5–8.5 km a day - **Longest day:** ridge day (Day 4), about 8.5 km and 6–7 hours ### What is the altitude of the Phulara Ridge trek? The highest point of the Phulara Ridge trek is the ridge top at about 3,763 m (12,345 ft). The trek starts at Sankri (1,950 m / 6,400 ft). - **Juda Ka Talab camp:** 2,773 m - **Bhoj Gadi camp:** 3,400 m - **Pushtara camp:** 2,900 m ### What is the difficulty level of the Phulara Ridge trek? The Phulara Ridge trek is graded Moderate and is suitable for fit beginners. The climbs on Days 2 and 3 are steady, and Day 4 is a 6–7 hour day on the open ridge and down to Pushtara. - **Technical sections:** none - **Ridge:** no shade or water - **Descents:** long, on Days 4 and 5 ### Is the Phulara Ridge trek good for beginners? Yes, fit beginners can do the Phulara Ridge trek, and it is a great second trek after Kedarkantha or Dayara Bugyal. You need the stamina for a 6–7 hour day on the ridge. ### What fitness level do I need for the Phulara Ridge trek? For the Phulara Ridge trek you should be able to walk 5–7 hours a day on uneven ground, and aim to jog 5 km in about 35 minutes before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### What makes the Phulara Ridge trek different from other treks? The Phulara Ridge trek is one of the few treks in India where you walk for more than four hours along an open grassy ridge, with the Swargarohini peaks, Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag in view almost the whole time. Most treks climb to one point and turn back; on Phulara Ridge the whole high day is the view. ### What is the best time to do the Phulara Ridge trek? The best time for the Phulara Ridge trek is March to June and September to November. The trek is closed in the monsoon and in deep winter, when snow makes the ridge unsafe. - **March–June:** snow patches on the ridge until early May, then green meadows, wildflowers and long days - **September–November:** crisp, clear skies and the best mountain views ### Is there any snow on the Phulara Ridge trek route? The Phulara Ridge trek runs from March to June and September to November. Patches of snow can remain on the ridge from March to early May, or appear after an early snowfall in November. ### How cold does it get on the Phulara Ridge trek? On the Phulara Ridge trek, spring nights (March–April) drop to about -5 to 3°C, summer nights are 0–5°C and autumn nights drop to about -3 to 0°C at the higher camps. - **March–April:** days 8–15°C, nights -5 to 3°C, with snow patches possible on the ridge - **May–June:** days 12–20°C, nights 0–5°C - **September–November:** days 10–14°C, nights -3 to 0°C ### Which mountains can you see on the Phulara Ridge trek? From Phulara Ridge you see the Swargarohini group, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag (Black Peak) and Ranglana, with Kedarkantha close by. ### What is the terrain like on the Phulara Ridge trek? The Phulara Ridge trail goes from pine and oak forest to a forest lake, high meadows and a long, open grassy ridge. - **Day 2:** steady forest climb to Juda Ka Talab - **Day 3:** oak and birch forest to the Bhoj Gadi meadows - **Day 4:** 4+ hours on the open ridge, then down to Pushtara - **Day 5:** long descent through forest and village slopes to Taluka ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Phulara Ridge trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Phulara Ridge trek is low to moderate; you sleep at up to 3,400 m and walk to 3,763 m on the ridge. The gentle climb over two days helps acclimatisation, and your trek leader checks oxygen and pulse every evening. ### What is the minimum age for the Phulara Ridge trek? The minimum age for the Phulara Ridge trek is 9 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Phulara Ridge trek? To reach the Phulara Ridge trek, travel to Dehradun; the base village Sankri is about 200 km (9–10 hours) away via Mussoorie, Nainbagh, Purola and Mori. - **Train:** Dehradun Railway Station - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun - **Bus:** early-morning buses from Dehradun to Sankri (8–9 hours) Plan to reach Dehradun the night before Day 1. ### Is transport included in the Phulara Ridge trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs at ₹1,000 per person each way, paid directly to the driver. The cab runs from Dehradun Railway Station to Sankri and back, ₹2,000 return. ### Where do we stay on the Phulara Ridge trek? On the Phulara Ridge trek you stay 2 nights in a guesthouse or homestay in Sankri (Day 1 and Day 5) and 3 nights in tents at Juda Ka Talab, Bhoj Gadi and Pushtara. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with dining and toilet tents. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Phulara Ridge trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Phulara Ridge trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Phulara Ridge trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Phulara Ridge trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Phulara Ridge trek? On the Phulara Ridge trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Phulara Ridge trek? On the Phulara Ridge trek, carry at least 2 litres on Day 4: there is no water on the ridge. Water is available at all the campsites. Our team boils or treats the water at every campsite. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Phulara Ridge trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Phulara Ridge trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Phulara Ridge trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Phulara Ridge trek costs ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Phulara Ridge trek? No doctor joins the Phulara Ridge trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Phulara Ridge trek? For the Phulara Ridge trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Phulara Ridge trek? Mobile network on the Phulara Ridge trek is available in Sankri (Jio and BSNL); there is no network on most of the trail, with occasional signal on the ridge. The last reliable ATMs are at Purola. Withdraw the cash you need in Dehradun. ### Are permits needed for the Phulara Ridge trek? Yes. The Phulara Ridge trek is inside Govind Pashu Vihar National Park and needs a forest permit, which Trekkaro arranges at Sankri. Carry an original government photo ID and a doctor-signed medical certificate. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 29 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 5 Nov 2026 - 1 Nov 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 7 Nov 2026 to 12 Nov 2026 - 8 Nov 2026 to 13 Nov 2026 - 14 Nov 2026 to 19 Nov 2026 - 15 Nov 2026 to 20 Nov 2026 - 21 Nov 2026 to 26 Nov 2026 - 22 Nov 2026 to 27 Nov 2026 - 23 Nov 2026 to 28 Nov 2026 - 28 Nov 2026 to 3 Dec 2026 - … 45 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/phulara-ridge-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Ranthan Kharak Trek > Ranthan Kharak Trek is a 7-day moderate trek in Bageshwar, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,928 m (12,887 ft). It covers about 36 km on foot and starts and ends at Gogina. Best time: March to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹9,160 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (28 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/ranthan-kharak-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,928 m / 12,887 ft - **Trekking distance:** 36 km - **Region:** Bageshwar, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Gogina - **Best time:** March to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 10°C to 15°C, Night below 0°C | Summer (May-Jun): Day 15°C to 20°C, Night around 2°C | Autumn (Sep-Oct): Day 12°C to 18°C, Night around 0°C - **Price:** ₹9,160 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (28 upcoming) ## Overview The first thing the Ranthan Kharak trek asks of you is to go down. From the stone houses of Gogina the trail drops through fields and forest to the Ramganga river, crosses it on a suspension bridge, and only then begins to climb. For three days it works its way upwards, past a village that sees few visitors, along a stone trail used by villagers and shepherds for generations, across the high grazing meadows known in Kumaoni as kharaks. On the fourth day on foot you stand on a rocky summit at 12,887 ft, with Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot, Trishul and the five peaks of Panchachuli in front of you. Ranthan Kharak is a little-known trek in the Kumaon Himalaya, and it fits a great deal into a single loop. Gogina, a remote Kumaoni village of stone houses and terraced fields, is where it begins and ends. Namik, set high above the river, is one of the most remote villages on any Trekkaro trek. Above it, rhododendron and oak forest breaks into clearings such as Bajimanian Kharak, then into open meadows and the windswept col of Thal Tok, where the sunrise lights up Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni. The summit, Ranthan Top, faces Nanda Devi, Maiktoli and the Panchachuli range, before a long descent leads through Parava Thor and forest back to Gogina. The Ranthan Kharak trek is a moderate-grade loop trek in the Bageshwar district of Uttarakhand, in the upper Ramganga valley between the Pindari and Namik glacier areas of Kumaon. Trekkaro runs it as a 7-day trek from Kathgodam, with five trekking days and about 36 km on foot. It starts and ends at Gogina (1,955 m / 6,415 ft), drops to the Ramganga at about 1,810 m, and climbs through Namik (2,252 m / 7,390 ft), Bajimanian Kharak (2,954 m / 9,690 ft) and Thal Tok (3,392 m / 11,130 ft) to Ranthan Top at about 3,928 m (12,887 ft), the highest point, before descending to Parava Thor (2,743 m) and closing the loop at Gogina. Kumaon sees far fewer trekkers than Garhwal, and in our experience Ranthan Kharak shows exactly what that quiet is worth. ### Ranthan Top and the Peaks of Kumaon – What Makes the Ranthan Kharak Trek Unmissable What sets Ranthan Kharak apart is the distance it covers between two very different worlds. It begins among people: the homestay at Gogina, the steep walk down to the river, and the camp near Namik, where the evening belongs to village life, with farmers returning from the fields, children playing and smoke rising from kitchens. It ends on an open, rocky summit facing some of the great peaks of Kumaon. Between the two lie forest, kharak and col, and the view widens the higher you go. Thal Tok is where the summit starts to feel close. You reach the col at 3,392 m after a narrow ledge walk and a final climb in switchbacks, and the wind meets you the moment you arrive. You pull on your windproof jacket, cap and gloves, eat a good dinner and turn in early, because tomorrow is the long day. Then, if the sky is clear the next morning, you step out of your tent to watch the sunrise light up Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni to the north, one of the most beautiful moments of the trek. Summit day starts early and stays hard. The climb to Ranthan Top crosses rocky, bouldery ground, and in spring there may be snow or a thin layer of ice on the shaded north face. You test each step on the loose rock before trusting your weight to it, and your trek leader guides the group through the steeper ground. Then the climbing stops, and at about 3,928 m (12,887 ft) the view sweeps across the great peaks of Kumaon: Nanda Devi and Nanda Devi East, Nanda Kot, Trishul, Maiktoli and the five peaks of the Panchachuli range. On a clear day it is one of the finest views in the region. From the top the trail follows a ridge and then begins a long descent to Parava Thor at 2,743 m, about 10 km and 11–12 hours in all. The next day the forest carries you back to Gogina. In our experience, it is that full circle, from a village to a summit and back to the same village, that makes Ranthan Kharak feel complete. ### The Upper Ramganga Valley Itself On the lower trail the landscape changes almost hour by hour. Gogina is a village of stone houses and terraced fields, and the first walk drops through fields and forest to the Ramganga, crosses the river on a suspension bridge and climbs steeply through forest to Namik on the far side. From Namik a stone-paved trail climbs through dense forest of rhododendron and oak; in March and April the rhododendrons cover the hillside in red and pink. The forest is broken by kharaks, clearings where shepherds graze their animals in summer, and Bajimanian Kharak, a meadow surrounded by forest, makes a cool, quiet camp. Above the forest the valley opens out. A narrow ledge, with a drop on one side, leads onto open meadows, and the trail climbs in switchbacks, the views growing wider at every turn, until it reaches the exposed col of Thal Tok. The descent from Parava Thor runs back through some of the most beautiful forest of the trek, oak and rhododendron with deodar and pine in places, where, if you walk quietly, you may hear or see the Himalayan monal and the verditer flycatcher. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Ranthan Kharak trek is graded Moderate, with a Difficult summit day. Trekking days cover 5–10 km, and apart from summit day they take 5–7 hours, so you should be comfortable walking 6–7 hours a day. The first day on foot goes steeply down to the Ramganga and then steeply up to Namik, and the ledge walk before Thal Tok needs care. The hard day is the summit: about 10 km and 11–12 hours over rocky, bouldery ground to 3,928 m, followed by a long descent to Parava Thor. The highest camp is Thal Tok at 3,392 m. In our experience, the trek suits both fit beginners who train well and trekkers with one or two treks behind them, though one earlier trek helps, because summit day is long and rocky. As a benchmark, aim to jog 5 km in about 35 minutes before the trek, and plan on 4–6 weeks of steady preparation. Fit children aged 10 and above can join with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: March to June and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Ranthan Kharak Trek - **Ranthan Top (3,928 m / 12,887 ft)** – a rocky summit with a sweeping view of Nanda Devi and Nanda Devi East, Nanda Kot, Trishul, Maiktoli and the Panchachuli range - **Sunrise at Thal Tok (3,392 m / 11,130 ft)** – Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni lit up to the north from a windswept col - **Gogina and Namik** – two remote Kumaoni villages of stone houses and terraced fields, with homestay nights in Gogina - **The Ramganga crossing** – a suspension bridge over the river at about 1,810 m - **The kharaks** – high grazing meadows such as Bajimanian Kharak (2,954 m / 9,690 ft), set among forest - **An old stone trail** – through rhododendron and oak, red and pink with bloom in March and April - **Forest birdlife** – the Himalayan monal and the verditer flycatcher among oak, rhododendron, deodar and pine - **A complete loop** – Gogina to Gogina via Namik, Thal Tok, Ranthan Top and Parava Thor ### Best Time to Do the Ranthan Kharak Trek The Ranthan Kharak trek has two windows: spring and early summer, from March to June, and autumn, from September to October. Within them the trek has three distinct moods: rhododendrons first, then green kharaks, then the sharpest views of the year. #### March to April – Rhododendron Season Early spring is when the forest above Namik is at its most colourful. The rhododendrons are in full bloom, and the stone trail climbs through hillsides of red and pink towards Bajimanian Kharak. Higher up, snow lingers on the upper slopes, and the shaded north face of Ranthan Top may carry snow or a thin layer of ice, so microspikes and gaiters come out on summit day. Nights are the coldest of the season, dropping below freezing. - **Temperatures:** Day: 10°C to 15°C | Night: below 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Rhododendrons in full bloom; snow lingering high up, with possible snow or ice on the shaded upper slopes. - **Best for:** Rhododendron forest in bloom and a touch of snow near the summit. #### End of April to June – Green Meadows As spring turns to summer, the kharaks come into their own. The meadows turn green, wildflowers appear, and from May the trail is free of snow all the way to the top. This is the season when shepherds bring their animals up to these high clearings, and the days are at their warmest, with milder nights at camp. - **Temperatures:** May–June: Day: 15°C to 20°C | Night: around 2°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow-free from May; green meadows and wildflowers. - **Best for:** Green kharaks, wildflowers and milder days and nights. #### September to October – Clear Mountain Views Autumn brings the clearest mountain views of the year to Ranthan Kharak. The sunrise on Nanda Kot from Thal Tok and the long view from Ranthan Top have their best chance of being sharp now. The trail is snow-free, the days are pleasant for long walking, and nights drop to around freezing. In our experience, this is the season for trekkers who are coming above all for the summit view. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 18°C | Night: around 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow-free; clearest mountain views of the year; cold nights. - **Best for:** Sharp views of Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot and Panchachuli from the summit, and sunrise on Nanda Kot from Thal Tok. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For rhododendron forest in full bloom, with a little snow near the summit, book a March or April batch. For green kharaks, wildflowers and the mildest conditions, choose the end of April to June. For the clearest views of Nanda Devi, Nanda Kot and the Panchachuli range, September to October is our pick, provided you are ready for nights around freezing. Whichever window you choose, come prepared for one long, rocky summit day; the view from Ranthan Top is the reward for it. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Kathgodam to Gogina **Route Details:** **Drive: Kathgodam → Gogina (~235 km, 10–11 hrs) | Altitude: 1,955 m (6,415 ft) | Stay: Homestay, Gogina** Day 1 is a long road day into the heart of Kumaon. You leave Kathgodam early in the morning. The road climbs into the Kumaon hills through Bhimtal and Almora, then continues to Bageshwar on the Saryu river and on to Kapkot. From Kapkot a smaller road climbs into the upper Ramganga valley and ends at Gogina. Plan for 10–11 hours on the road, with stops for breakfast and lunch. The views change as you go higher, from pine-covered foothills to deep, terraced valleys. Network is weak beyond Kapkot and absent on the trail, so make your calls and tell your family your plans before then. There are no ATMs near Gogina. Bageshwar and Kapkot are the last towns on the route, and we recommend you withdraw all the cash you need in Haldwani or Kathgodam. Gogina, at about 1,955 m, is a remote Kumaoni village of stone houses and terraced fields. You stay in a homestay, which gives you a first taste of local food and village life before the trail begins. Meals on the drive are not included, and dinner at the homestay is the first meal of the trek. Sleep early. Tomorrow starts with a steep walk down to the river. What to Expect: - Early start from Kathgodam and a 10–11 hour drive into the Kumaon hills - Bhimtal, Almora, Bageshwar on the Saryu river and Kapkot along the way - A smaller road up the upper Ramganga valley to Gogina - Weak network beyond Kapkot and no ATMs near Gogina – carry cash from Haldwani or Kathgodam - Homestay dinner and a first look at Kumaoni village life - Overnight: Homestay in Gogina (1,955 m / 6,415 ft) ### Day 2: Gogina to Namik **Route Details:** **Altitude: 1,955 m → 1,810 m → 2,252 m (7,390 ft) | Distance: 6.5 km | Duration: 6 hrs | Terrain: steep descent through fields and forest, suspension bridge, steep forest climb | Stay: Tents near Namik** The trek begins by going down, not up. From Gogina the trail drops steeply through fields and forest to the Ramganga river, at about 1,810 m. Take this section slowly and use your trekking poles. Let them take some of the load off your knees, and keep your steps short on the steeper parts. The day is 6.5 km and takes about 6 hours. At the river you cross on a suspension bridge, one of the highlights of the day. The Ramganga runs below you, and the bridge is the lowest point of the walking route. On the far side the trail climbs steeply through forest to Namik. This is the hard section of the day. Today goes down and then up, so save some energy for the climb after the bridge. Walk slowly, breathe steadily and stop when you need to. Lunch is packed and eaten on the trail. Namik sits high above the river at about 2,252 m. It is a village of stone houses and terraced fields, and one of the most remote villages on any Trekkaro trek. The people here see few visitors. Please be respectful: ask before taking photos of people and homes, and keep the village clean. Namik is the last village on the loop before the forest and the high clearings. There is no mobile network from here on. Camp tonight is near the village. When you arrive there is hot tea and snacks, and your trek leader begins the daily oxygen and pulse checks. The team boils or treats the camp water. In the evening, watch village life around you: farmers returning from the fields, children playing, smoke rising from the kitchens. It is a rare chance to see a remote Kumaoni village up close, and in our view it is one of the quiet rewards of this trek. What to Expect: - Steep descent through fields and forest from Gogina to the Ramganga river (1,810 m) - Suspension-bridge crossing of the Ramganga - Steep forest climb to Namik – save energy for the climb after the bridge - Packed lunch on the trail; hot tea and snacks at camp - First evening oxygen and pulse checks, and a close look at village life - Overnight: Tents near Namik village (2,252 m / 7,390 ft) ### Day 3: Namik to Bajimanian Kharak **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,252 m → 2,954 m (9,690 ft) | Distance: 5.4 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: steep stone-paved trail through rhododendron and oak forest, forest clearings | Stay: Tents at Bajimanian Kharak** From Namik a stone-paved trail climbs into dense forest of rhododendron and oak. Villagers and shepherds have used this trail for generations. Parts of it are steep, and the numbers tell the story: 5.4 km takes 6–7 hours. Walk at a steady pace and take short breaks in the shade. On the stone steps, we recommend short strides over long ones. Wear full sleeves and a cap in the forest. They protect you from sun and branches. In March and April the rhododendrons are in full bloom, and the hillside turns red and pink. The forest is broken by clearings, called kharaks in Kumaoni, where shepherds graze their animals in summer. Each clearing gives you a breather and a patch of open sky before the trees close in again. Keep an eye out for birds. The Himalayan monal is sometimes seen in these forests. From end April to June the clearings turn green, with wildflowers in the meadows. Water is available from streams along the way. Your trek leader tells you where it is safe to refill, so ask before you fill your bottle. On a long, steady climb like this one, we recommend small sips at every break rather than big gulps at the end of the day. Camp tonight is at Bajimanian Kharak, at about 2,954 m, a meadow surrounded by forest. It is an open clearing with trees all around, and evenings here are cool and quiet. After 6–7 hours on the stone trail, rest well. Your trek leader continues the evening oxygen and pulse checks, and the team boils or treats the camp water. Nights on this trek drop below 0°C in spring, so put on your warm layers as the light goes. Eat a good dinner and get to bed early. Tomorrow the trail leaves the clearing for a narrow ledge and open meadows. What to Expect: - Steep, stone-paved trail out of Namik, used by villagers and shepherds for generations - Dense rhododendron and oak forest, in full bloom in March and April - Forest clearings (kharaks) where shepherds graze their animals in summer - Stream water along the way – refill only where your trek leader says it is safe - Full sleeves and a cap for sun and branches; watch for the Himalayan monal - Overnight: Tents at Bajimanian Kharak (2,954 m / 9,690 ft) ### Day 4: Bajimanian Kharak to Thal Tok **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,954 m → 3,392 m (11,130 ft) | Distance: 5 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: narrow ledge, open meadows, switchbacks to a col | Stay: Tents at Thal Tok** Leaving Bajimanian Kharak, the trail follows a narrow ledge for a while. This is the section to watch today. In places the ledge is narrow, with a drop on one side. Walk carefully, keep your eyes on the path and keep your poles on the inside. There is no need to hurry here. Leave a little space between you and the person ahead. After the ledge the trail crosses open meadows. Higher up the meadows open out, and the views grow wider with every switchback. The last section climbs in switchbacks to Thal Tok, at about 3,392 m. Take the turns at an even pace. Short stops to look back are a good excuse to catch your breath and drink some water. The day is only 5 km, but at 6–7 hours it is not a short one. Thal Tok is a windy col with wide views. It is exposed, so the team sets up the tents in the most sheltered spot available. Keep your windproof jacket, cap and gloves on as soon as you reach camp. Keep everything you need for the night inside your tent before dark. This is the highest camp of the trek. Tomorrow is summit day, and tonight is about preparation. Rest well, eat a good dinner and go to bed early. Your trek leader briefs the group and checks everyone’s oxygen levels in the evening. Listen to the briefing closely and ask about anything you are unsure of. Lay out your warm layers, snacks and at least two litres of water before you sleep, so you can leave quickly in the morning. If the sky is clear in the morning, sunrise lights up Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni to the north. In our view it is one of the most beautiful moments of the trek, so keep your camera within reach. What to Expect: - Narrow ledge walk with a drop on one side – poles on the inside - Open meadows, then switchbacks up to the Thal Tok col - Windswept, exposed campsite, with tents pitched in the most sheltered spot - Windproof jacket, cap and gloves on as soon as you reach camp - Summit briefing, oxygen checks and an early night; sunrise on Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni if the sky is clear - Overnight: Tents at Thal Tok (3,392 m / 11,130 ft) ### Day 5: Summit Day - Thal Tok to Parava Thor via Ranthan Top **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,392 m → 3,928 m (12,887 ft) → 2,743 m | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 11–12 hrs | Terrain: rocky, bouldery climb, summit ridge, long descent | Stay: Tents at Parava Thor** This is the hardest day of the trek, so you start early. Eat breakfast even if you are not hungry. If the sky is clear, sunrise lights up Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni to the north as you set off from the col. The climb to Ranthan Top crosses rocky, bouldery ground. In spring there may be snow or a thin layer of ice on the shaded north face. You wear microspikes and gaiters on snow or ice, and your trek leader guides each step. The rocky climb is the hard section, and it rewards patience. On loose rock, test each step before you put your full weight on it. Keep your pace slow and even. The ground sets your speed here, not your fitness. If you feel unsteady, stop, look for the next solid step and follow your trek leader’s line. From the summit, at about 3,928 m (12,887 ft), the view sweeps across the great peaks of Kumaon: Nanda Devi and Nanda Devi East, Nanda Kot, Trishul, Maiktoli and the five peaks of the Panchachuli range. On a clear day it is one of the finest views in the region. Take your time at the top. The climbing is done, but the day is far from over. From the top, the trail follows a ridge and then begins a long descent to Parava Thor, at about 2,743 m. Stay focused on the way down. Short steps and planted poles make the long descent easier on tired legs. With 11–12 hours on the trail, carry at least two litres of water, plenty of snacks and warm layers. The trek leader sets a turn-around time and may change the plan if the weather turns. Camp tonight is at Parava Thor, well below Thal Tok. After the longest day of the trek, a hot dinner and an early night are all you need. What to Expect: - Early start from the Thal Tok col; sunrise on Nanda Kot and Mrigthuni if the sky is clear - Rocky, bouldery climb to Ranthan Top, with possible snow or ice on the shaded north face in spring - Summit view of Nanda Devi, Nanda Devi East, Nanda Kot, Trishul, Maiktoli and the Panchachuli range - Ridge walk and a long descent to Parava Thor - Turn-around time set by your trek leader; carry at least 2 litres of water, snacks and warm layers - Overnight: Tents at Parava Thor (2,743 m) ### Day 6: Parava Thor to Gogina **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,743 m → 1,955 m (6,415 ft) | Distance: 9.5 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: mostly downhill forest trail | Stay: Homestay, Gogina** The last day on the trail closes the loop. From Parava Thor the trail descends through forest back to Gogina. At about 9.5 km it is a long walk, but it is mostly downhill and easier than the days before. Your legs still carry summit day, so keep the pace easy and use your poles on the steeper parts. There are streams on the lower trail. Refill only where your trek leader says it is safe. This stretch passes through some of the most beautiful forest of the trek. Oak and rhododendron line the trail, with deodar and pine in places. Walk quietly and you may hear or see birds such as the Himalayan monal and the verditer flycatcher. You reach Gogina in the afternoon and return to the homestay. Lunch is at Gogina, and a hot meal and rest are waiting. The afternoon is free, so stretch, wash and repack your bag for the drive. In the evening the group celebrates the summit together. Mobile network stays absent until Kapkot, so calls home wait for tomorrow’s drive. Before the evening ends, thank your local guides and support team. The local guide, the cook, the helpers and the mules carried this trek through remote country. They make treks like this possible. What to Expect: - Long but mostly downhill 9.5 km walk that closes the loop - Oak and rhododendron forest, with deodar and pine in places - Birds such as the Himalayan monal and verditer flycatcher - Lunch at Gogina and a free afternoon at the homestay - Summit celebration in the evening, and a thank-you to the local guides and support team - Overnight: Homestay in Gogina (1,955 m / 6,415 ft) ### Day 7: Gogina to Kathgodam **Route Details:** **Drive: Gogina → Kathgodam (~235 km, 10–11 hrs) | Altitude: 1,955 m → 554 m | Stay: Not included (drop at Kathgodam)** After an early breakfast you leave Gogina and drive back down the upper Ramganga valley. The road runs through Kapkot, Bageshwar and Almora to Kathgodam, the same way you came on Day 1. The views run in reverse, from deep, terraced valleys back to pine-covered foothills. The drive takes 10–11 hours with short stops. Breakfast is the last meal of the trek. Meals on the drive are not included, so keep snacks, water and a light jacket in your daypack. Mobile network returns as you get past Kapkot, so this is the time to let your family know you are off the mountain. You reach Kathgodam around 7 pm. Mountain roads can bring delays, so we recommend you book onward trains for late night or the next day. Overnight trains from Kathgodam to Delhi work well after the drive. If you are flying, Pantnagar Airport is about 40 minutes from Kathgodam. What to Expect: - Early breakfast at the Gogina homestay - A 10–11 hour drive via Kapkot, Bageshwar and Almora - Mobile network back after Kapkot - Meals on the drive not included – keep snacks and water handy - Arrival at Kathgodam around 7 pm; overnight trains to Delhi work well - Trek ends at Gogina on Day 6; drop at Kathgodam Railway Station ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 6: homestay in Gogina, on a triple/quad-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 5: camping in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 7 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the camping nights - Dining and toilet tents at camp - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide for all 7 days - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Kathgodam to Gogina and back - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs from Kathgodam Railway Station; the fare is paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare - Travel to and from Kathgodam, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Kathgodam and Gogina #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Pantnagar Airport (PGH), about 30 km and roughly 1 hour from Kathgodam. Flights are limited, so if they don’t suit you, fly to Delhi and take an overnight train to Kathgodam instead. **From Kathgodam to Gogina:** about 235 km via Almora, Bageshwar and Kapkot, a 10–11 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Kathgodam Railway Station early in the morning. **Return:** on Day 7 the cab from Gogina is expected to reach Kathgodam Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book a late-night train or bus, or travel the next day if you want a buffer for road delays. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Kathgodam (KGM), where the cab picks you up, with overnight and day trains from Delhi. The cab leaves early in the morning, so an overnight train is the easiest option; check current timings and book early in season. - **Ranikhet Express** – overnight from Delhi - **Kathgodam Shatabdi** – a day train; take it the day before and stay overnight in Kathgodam or Haldwani **From Kathgodam to Gogina:** about 235 km via Almora, Bageshwar and Kapkot, a 10–11 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Kathgodam Railway Station early in the morning. **Return:** on Day 7 the cab from Gogina is expected to reach Kathgodam Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book a late-night train or bus, or travel the next day if you want a buffer for road delays. ### By road **Bus route:** buses run from Delhi ISBT Anand Vihar and Kashmere Gate to Haldwani and Kathgodam in about 7–8 hours. Take an overnight bus and get down at Kathgodam (or take an auto from Haldwani) to reach the railway station in time for the early-morning cab. There are no direct buses to Gogina; on your own you would need a bus to Bageshwar and then a jeep to Gogina (about 80 km). **From Kathgodam to Gogina:** about 235 km via Almora, Bageshwar and Kapkot, a 10–11 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab leaves Kathgodam Railway Station early in the morning. **Return:** on Day 7 the cab from Gogina is expected to reach Kathgodam Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book a late-night train or bus, or travel the next day if you want a buffer for road delays. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Withdraw all the cash you need in Haldwani or Kathgodam - There is no ATM near Gogina - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - The network is weak beyond Kapkot and absent on the trail - Inform your family before the drive from Bageshwar - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Ranthan Kharak trek, and where does it start? The Ranthan Kharak trek is in Bageshwar district, Kumaon, Uttarakhand, in the upper Ramganga valley between the Pindari and Namik glacier areas. It starts from Gogina village, about 235 km (10–11 hours) by road from Kathgodam. The trek is a loop: Gogina, Namik, Bajimanian Kharak, Thal Tok, over Ranthan Top to Parava Thor and back to Gogina. ### How many days is the Ranthan Kharak trek? The Ranthan Kharak trek takes 7 days from Kathgodam to Kathgodam, with 5 trekking days covering about 36 km. - **Day 1 and Day 7:** drive between Kathgodam and Gogina (10–11 hours) - **Days 2–6:** trekking, 5–10 km a day - **Longest day:** summit day (Day 5), about 10 km and 11–12 hours ### What is the altitude of the Ranthan Kharak trek? The highest point of the Ranthan Kharak trek is Ranthan Top at about 3,928 m (12,887 ft). The trek starts at Gogina (1,955 m / 6,415 ft). - **Namik camp:** 2,252 m - **Bajimanian Kharak:** 2,954 m - **Thal Tok:** 3,392 m - **Parava Thor:** 2,743 m ### What is the difficulty level of the Ranthan Kharak trek? The Ranthan Kharak trek is graded Moderate, with a difficult summit day of 11–12 hours over rocky, bouldery ground. It suits fit beginners who train well and trekkers with one or two treks behind them. ### Is the Ranthan Kharak trek good for beginners? Fit beginners can do the Ranthan Kharak trek if they train well, but one earlier trek helps, because summit day is long and rocky. ### What fitness level do I need for the Ranthan Kharak trek? For the Ranthan Kharak trek you should be able to walk 6–7 hours a day, and 11–12 hours on summit day, and aim to jog 5 km in about 35 minutes before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### What does the word 'kharak' mean in Ranthan Kharak? ‘Kharak’ is the Kumaoni word for a high grazing meadow. The Ranthan Kharak trek passes several of them, such as Bajimanian Kharak, where shepherds bring their animals in summer. ### What is the best time to do the Ranthan Kharak trek? The best time for the Ranthan Kharak trek is March to June and September to October. The trek is closed in the monsoon and in winter. - **March–April:** rhododendrons in bloom, snow lingering up high - **End April–June:** green meadows and wildflowers - **September–October:** the clearest mountain views ### Is there snow on the Ranthan Kharak trek, and in which months? The Ranthan Kharak trek can have snow or ice on the shaded upper slopes in March and April. From May to October the trail is snow-free. Microspikes and gaiters from our Free Trekking Gear are used on snow or ice. ### How cold does it get on the Ranthan Kharak trek? On the Ranthan Kharak trek, nights drop below 0°C in spring and are around 0–2°C in summer and autumn. - **March–April:** days 10–15°C, nights below 0°C - **May–June:** days 15–20°C, nights around 2°C - **September–October:** days 12–18°C, nights around 0°C ### Which mountains can you see on the Ranthan Kharak trek? From Ranthan Top you see Nanda Devi and Nanda Devi East, Nanda Kot, Trishul, Maiktoli and the five peaks of the Panchachuli range. ### What is the terrain like on the Ranthan Kharak trek? The Ranthan Kharak trail goes from village fields to a suspension bridge over the Ramganga, stone trails through rhododendron forest, open kharaks and a rocky summit. ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Ranthan Kharak trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Ranthan Kharak trek is low to moderate; you sleep at up to 3,392 m and reach 3,928 m on summit day. Your trek leader checks oxygen and pulse every evening. ### What is the minimum age for the Ranthan Kharak trek? The minimum age for the Ranthan Kharak trek is 10 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Ranthan Kharak trek? To reach the Ranthan Kharak trek, travel to Kathgodam; Gogina is about 235 km (10–11 hours) away via Almora, Bageshwar and Kapkot. - **Train:** Kathgodam, overnight trains from Delhi - **Air:** Pantnagar Airport, about 40 minutes from Kathgodam - **Bus:** to Bageshwar, then a jeep to Gogina (no direct buses) Plan to reach Kathgodam early on Day 1. ### Is transport included in the Ranthan Kharak trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. The cab runs from Kathgodam Railway Station to Gogina and back. ### Where do we stay on the Ranthan Kharak trek? On the Ranthan Kharak trek you stay 2 nights in a homestay in Gogina (Day 1 and Day 6) and 4 nights in tents at Namik, Bajimanian Kharak, Thal Tok and Parava Thor. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with dining and toilet tents. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Ranthan Kharak trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Ranthan Kharak trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Ranthan Kharak trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Ranthan Kharak trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Ranthan Kharak trek? On the Ranthan Kharak trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Ranthan Kharak trek? On the Ranthan Kharak trek there are streams on the lower trail, but carry at least 2 litres on summit day. Our team boils or treats the water at every campsite. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Ranthan Kharak trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Ranthan Kharak trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Ranthan Kharak trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Ranthan Kharak trek costs ₹2,400 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Ranthan Kharak trek? No doctor joins the Ranthan Kharak trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Ranthan Kharak trek? For the Ranthan Kharak trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Ranthan Kharak trek? Mobile network on the Ranthan Kharak trek is weak beyond Kapkot and absent on the trail, and there is no ATM near Gogina. Withdraw all the cash you need in Haldwani or Kathgodam. ### What villages do you pass on the Ranthan Kharak trek? The Ranthan Kharak trek passes Gogina and Namik, two remote Kumaoni villages of stone houses and terraced fields. Please ask before photographing people and homes, and keep the villages clean. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 6 Mar 2027 to 12 Mar 2027 - 13 Mar 2027 to 19 Mar 2027 - 20 Mar 2027 to 26 Mar 2027 - 21 Mar 2027 to 27 Mar 2027 - 25 Mar 2027 to 31 Mar 2027 - 27 Mar 2027 to 2 Apr 2027 - 3 Apr 2027 to 9 Apr 2027 - 10 Apr 2027 to 16 Apr 2027 - 13 Apr 2027 to 19 Apr 2027 - 14 Apr 2027 to 20 Apr 2027 - … 16 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/ranthan-kharak-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Roopkund Trek > Roopkund Trek is a 7-day moderate–difficult trek in Chamoli, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,800 m (15,750 ft). It covers about 47 km on foot and starts and ends at Lohajung. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹16,500 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (22 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/roopkund-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate–Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,800 m / 15,750 ft - **Trekking distance:** 47 km - **Region:** Chamoli, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Lohajung - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Summer (May-Jun): Day 13°C to 18°C, Night 0°C to 7°C | Autumn (Sep-Oct): Day 3°C to 9°C, Night -3°C to -1°C - **Price:** ₹16,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (22 upcoming) ## Overview Most treks build towards a view. Roopkund builds towards a question. At 4,800 m, beneath Mt Trishul and Nanda Ghunti, lies a small glacial lake where hundreds of ancient human skeletons were discovered – a find that has fed legend and scientific curiosity alike. To stand at its edge, you climb for days: through oak and rhododendron forest, across two great Himalayan meadows, past a black stone shrine on a windswept ridge, and finally over rock and snow in the dark before dawn. The Roopkund trek is a journey through a remarkable range of Himalayan landscapes. It follows the Neel Ganga through dense forest to the Ranka Dhar ridge, opens onto the vast meadows of Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal with Trishul (7,120 m) and Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m) filling the sky, passes the sacred lake of Bedni Kund and the ridge-top shrine of Kalu Vinayak, and climbs through boulder fields and glacial moraine to Roopkund Lake itself, with an optional push to Junargali at 4,880 m (16,000 ft) above it. The trek lies in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalayas. It covers about 47 km on foot over seven days, starting and ending at Lohajung (2,316 m), the base village, with pickup and drop at Rishikesh; the walking starts and ends at Wan village, 15 km by road from Lohajung. The route climbs through camps at Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m), Pathar Nachauni (3,870 m) and Bhagwabasa (4,300 m) before the summit push to the lake at 4,800 m (15,750 ft). Roopkund is famously known as the “Skeleton Lake”, and the trek to it is graded moderate to difficult – a serious high-altitude route. In our experience, few treks in the Himalayas combine meadow, rock, faith and mystery so completely within a single week. ### The Skeleton Lake – What Makes the Roopkund Trek Unmissable Roopkund is one of the very few treks we know that ends at a genuine historical puzzle. Hundreds of ancient human skeletons were discovered at the bottom of this glacial lake, and their story has given rise to both legend and scientific study. The lake itself is modest in size for most of the year, growing during the monsoon as melting glaciers feed into it, and it sits amid rock, moraine and snow beneath the Himalayan giants. It is not the size of the lake that stays with you. It is the place: the altitude, the bare high ground around the water, and the knowledge of what was found here. Reaching it is the hardest and most thrilling day of the trek. You wake at Bhagwabasa in the cold before dawn and set off around 4 or 5 AM, early enough to avoid the strong afternoon winds and the worst of the sun. The trail climbs steeply over rocky terrain, glacial moraine and occasional patches of snow, and the thin air turns every few steps into a decision. You stop, breathe, and go on. Then comes the final steep climb, the ground eases, and the lake is in front of you, with Trishul, Nanda Ghunti and the Chaukhamba ranges standing all around. You stand at 4,800 m beside the water that drew you here. If you still have the legs, Junargali rises about 80 m higher for a wider panorama of the surrounding peaks. Then the long return: back down through Bhagwabasa and on to Pathar Nachauni, a descent of about 930 m that completes a 12 km, nine-hour day. People come to Roopkund for different reasons – some to see the lake and its mystery for themselves, others to lose themselves in the wilderness, and many simply for the sense of wonder and divinity these mountains carry. In our experience, the lake answers each of those reasons in its own way. ### The Landscape Itself Roopkund changes almost completely from one day to the next. The first trek day climbs from Wan through dense oak and rhododendron forest, alive with birdsong, following the lively Neel Ganga across wooden bridges and rising to the Ranka Dhar ridge for one of the first wide Himalayan views of the trek. Camp is at Ghairoli Patal, a peaceful forest clearing surrounded by tall deodars. The next morning the trees fall away and the trail opens into the rolling grasslands of Ali Bugyal (3,350 m) and then Bedni Bugyal (3,550 m) – two meadows we count among the most beautiful in the Himalayas, where herds of horses and sheep graze freely, Bedni is dotted with wildflowers in season, and Trishul and Nanda Ghunti rise across the sky. A short detour leads to Bedni Kund (3,600 m), a small sacred lake with deep mythological roots, used for rituals during the Nanda Devi Raj Jat festival. Beyond Bedni, the mountain shows its harder face. The green gives way to alpine scrub and rocky slopes, the air grows thinner and colder, and camp at Pathar Nachauni is a stark, windswept site beneath towering ridges. From here a steep zig-zag climb of about 2 km leads up a rocky ridge to Kalu Vinayak at 4,200 m, a black stone shrine dedicated to Lord Ganesha, with 360° views of Trishul, Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhamba and Neelkanth. It is a place to pause, for breath and for a quiet moment of reverence, before the trail runs over boulders to Bhagwabasa at 4,300 m – a camp of loose rock and snow patches, cold and windy in the evening, and full of anticipation as the last stop before the lake. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Roopkund trek is graded moderate to difficult, and we will be frank: this is not a first trek. We recommend it for fit trekkers with prior trekking experience – ideally at least one previous Himalayan trek – who are ready to go well above 4,000 m. Trek days run from about 4 to 12 km and 4 to 9 hours. The first trek day from Wan is 6 km in 4–5 hours, and the meadow day to Pathar Nachauni is 9 km in 6–7 hours. The day from Pathar Nachauni to Bhagwabasa is only 4 km, but its steep climb at altitude takes 4–5 hours and frequent halts. The hard day is the summit: a 4–5 AM start, about 480 m of climbing to 4,800 m on rocky, sometimes slippery ground with snow patches, an optional 80 m more to Junargali, and a descent of about 930 m to Pathar Nachauni – roughly 12 km and 9 hours in thin air. Good cardiovascular stamina and leg strength are essential, and we recommend at least eight weeks of preparation. The minimum age is 12 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a doctor’s medical certificate. Season: May to June and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Roopkund Trek - **Roopkund Lake at 4,800 m (15,750 ft)** – the glacial “Skeleton Lake”, where hundreds of ancient human skeletons were discovered - **Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal** – vast alpine meadows at 3,350 m and 3,550 m, with grazing horses and sheep and wildflowers in season - **Close views of Trishul and Nanda Ghunti** – Mt Trishul (7,120 m) and Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m) dominate the skyline from the meadows upward - **Bedni Kund** – a small sacred lake at 3,600 m, used for rituals during the Nanda Devi Raj Jat festival - **Kalu Vinayak temple** – a black stone shrine to Lord Ganesha at 4,200 m, with 360° views that include Chaukhamba and Neelkanth - **Optional climb to Junargali** – 4,880 m (16,000 ft), the highest point you can reach on the trek - **The Neel Ganga and the Ranka Dhar ridge** – wooden bridges, oak and rhododendron forest, and the first wide Himalayan views - **Forest to moraine in one week** – deodar clearings, open grassland, rocky ridges, boulder fields and glacial moraine on a single trail ### Best Time to Do the Roopkund Trek The Roopkund trek runs in two short windows each year: May to June, and September to October. Both lead to the same lake and the same high camps, but they feel quite different on the ground – one a spring–summer season of blooming rhododendrons and lingering snow, the other a colder season of clear skies and more snow near the lake. #### May to June – Spring–Summer Season (Rhododendrons and Snow Patches) This is the warmer of the two windows. The rhododendrons are in bloom, trekking conditions are pleasant, and the upper trail still carries patches of snow. Bhagwabasa in particular is snow-covered early in the season, with snow lying among the loose rock of the camp. The days are mild enough to enjoy long stops in the meadows of Ali and Bedni, and the nights, though cold, stay around or above freezing. For trekkers who want comfortable conditions with a touch of snow on the high ground, this is a rewarding season. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 18°C | Night: 0°C to 7°C - **Trail conditions:** Pleasant trekking conditions, with patches of snow on the upper trail and around Bhagwabasa early in the season. - **Best for:** Blooming rhododendrons, milder days and nights, and a first taste of snow at altitude. #### September to October – Autumn Season (Clear Skies and Colder Nights) September and October bring clear skies and wide, open mountain views, with Trishul, Nanda Ghunti and the Chaukhamba ranges standing sharp above the meadows and the high ridges. It is noticeably colder, with daytime temperatures in single figures and nights below freezing, and there is more snow near the lake. For trekkers who want the clearest views of the Himalayan giants and are ready for real cold, this is, in our view, the more dramatic of the two windows. - **Temperatures:** Day: 3°C to 9°C | Night: -3°C to -1°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear skies, more snow near the lake, cold nights at the high camps. - **Best for:** Clear mountain views, crisp light and a colder, snowier approach to the lake. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For milder conditions and blooming rhododendrons, book a May to June batch. For clear skies, sharper views of Trishul and Nanda Ghunti, and more snow around the lake, choose September to October, and expect colder nights at every camp. Whichever window you pick, give yourself the full eight weeks of preparation; the lake is worth arriving strong. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Lohajung **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Lohajung (about 250 km, 8–10 hrs) | Altitude: 2,316 m (7,600 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** Day 1 is a long day on the road. Leave Rishikesh by about 6:30 AM and you reach Lohajung by evening without rushing. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan at 6:30 AM. The hill road runs through Devprayag, Srinagar, Rudraprayag, Gauchar, Karnaprayag, Tharali and Dewal, past forest, river valleys and remote Garhwal villages with terraced fields. On the way you pass Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag, three of the Panch Prayags, the holy river confluences on the Alaknanda. We recommend a halt at Devprayag, where the Alaknanda and the Bhagirathi meet to form the Ganga. Lohajung, at 2,316 m, is the base village for Roopkund, Brahmatal and Ali Bedni Bugyal. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay, with dinner in the evening. The few small shops here stock only basics, so bring everything you need. Dewal is the last reliable ATM, and Lohajung the last place with a stable mobile signal. What to Expect: - Early start from Rishikesh (around 6:30 AM) to reach Lohajung by evening - Drive past Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Karnaprayag, three of the Panch Prayags - Halt at Devprayag, the confluence of the Alaknanda and the Bhagirathi - Last reliable ATM at Dewal; last stable mobile network at Lohajung - Dinner at Lohajung; carry your trekking essentials, as local shops are small - Overnight: Lohajung guesthouse / homestay (2,316 m / 7,600 ft) ### Day 2: Lohajung to Wan, then Trek to Ghairoli Patal **Route Details:** **Drive: Lohajung → Wan (15 km, ~1 hr) | Altitude: 2,438 m → 3,205 m (10,515 ft) | Distance: 6 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: steady climb to Ranka Dhar, then oak and rhododendron forest along the Neel Ganga | Stay: Tents at Ghairoli Patal** A short drive of about an hour takes you from Lohajung to Wan, the starting point of the trek. From here you walk. The day gains about 767 m (2,515 ft) over 6 km, so the climb is steady rather than steep. Start at an easy pace. Your body is meeting real altitude for the first time on this trek, and the first hour sets the tone for the rest of the week. The first couple of kilometres climb steadily to Ranka Dhar, the ridge above Wan village. It gives you one of the first wide Himalayan views of the trek and a good place for a short breather. The trail then runs on through dense oak and rhododendron forest, full of diverse flora and fauna, and follows the lively Neel Ganga River, which you cross on wooden bridges. The river is the natural rest stop of the day. Take a short break here for photos and water, then keep going before you cool down. Beyond the river the forest closes in again and the steady climb continues. Walk in short, even steps and take regular sips of water rather than long stops. If you notice a headache, nausea or dizziness at any point, tell your trek leader early. By late afternoon you reach Ghairoli Patal at 3,205 m, a forest clearing ringed by tall deodars. It is a quiet, peaceful campsite, and your first night in tents. Sleeping here lets your body adjust before the meadows and higher camps that follow. What to Expect: - 15 km drive from Lohajung to Wan, about an hour - Steady climb to Ranka Dhar ridge, one of the first wide Himalayan views of the trek - Oak and rhododendron forest along the Neel Ganga, with wooden bridge crossings - About 767 m (2,515 ft) of gain over 6 km – start slow and keep sipping water - Ghairoli Patal: a forest clearing ringed by tall deodars, your first camp - Overnight: Tents at Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m / 10,515 ft) ### Day 3: Ghairoli Patal to Pathar Nachauni via Ali and Bedni Bugyal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,205 m → 3,870 m (12,700 ft) | Distance: 9 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: gradual forest ascent, rolling alpine meadows, then alpine scrub and rocky slopes | Stay: Tents at Pathar Nachauni** Today the forest gives way to the great meadows. The trail starts with a gradual ascent out of the clearing at Ghairoli Patal and soon opens into rolling grassland. A steady climb brings you onto Ali Bugyal at 3,350 m (11,000 ft), where the meadow runs wide in every direction under an open sky. Herds of horses and sheep graze freely here. This is one of the most scenic stretches of the whole trek, so give yourself a few minutes to take it in. From Ali Bugyal the trail climbs gradually to Bedni Bugyal at 3,550 m (11,650 ft), another broad meadow, dotted with wildflowers in season. On clear days Mt Trishul (7,120 m / 23,360 ft) and Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m / 20,700 ft) fill the skyline. A short detour takes you to Bedni Kund at 3,600 m (11,800 ft), a small sacred lake used for rituals during the Nanda Devi Raj Jat festival. We recommend the detour; it is short, and the lake is one of the quiet highlights of the trek. After Bedni the character of the walk changes. The lush grass gives way to alpine scrub and rocky slopes, and the air turns thinner and colder. This last section is where the length of the day shows. Slow down, keep your breathing steady and drink water often. Pathar Nachauni is your first campsite above 3,800 m (12,000 ft), and a measured pace now helps your body acclimatise. You reach Pathar Nachauni at 3,870 m by late afternoon. It is a stark, open campsite below steep ridges and is buffeted by mountain winds. Put on a warm layer as soon as you stop walking, and keep it on through the evening. What to Expect: - Gradual climb out of the forest onto Ali Bugyal (3,350 m), with horses and sheep grazing - Bedni Bugyal (3,550 m): open meadow with wildflowers in season - Views of Mt Trishul (7,120 m) and Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m) on clear days - Short detour to Bedni Kund (3,600 m), the sacred lake of the Nanda Devi Raj Jat - Landscape shift from meadow to rocky alpine slopes above Bedni - Overnight: Tents at Pathar Nachauni (3,870 m / 12,700 ft) ### Day 4: Pathar Nachauni to Bhagwabasa via Kalu Vinayak **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,870 m → 4,300 m (14,100 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: steep zig-zag climb up a rocky ridge, then boulders and rocky slopes | Stay: Tents at Bhagwabasa** On paper today looks easy: 4 km and about 430 m (1,400 ft) of gain. In practice it is one of the most challenging sections of the Roopkund trek, because the climb is steep and the air at this height is thin. Allow 4 to 5 hours and treat the day as a lesson in patience. The trail starts climbing the moment you leave Pathar Nachauni, in tight zig-zags up a rocky ridge. Trekkers take frequent halts on this stretch to catch their breath, and that is the right way to walk it. Move slowly, breathe deeply and rest before you run out of breath, not after. After about 2 km of steady climbing you reach Kalu Vinayak at 4,200 m (13,800 ft), a black stone shrine dedicated to Lord Ganesha, set on the rocky ridge. Kalu Vinayak is the viewpoint of the day. Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m), Chaukhamba and Neelkanth stand around you in a full circle. Many trekkers pause here for more than rest, for a quiet moment at the shrine before the summit approach. From the temple the trail runs over boulders and rocky slopes and levels out towards Bhagwabasa. The grassy meadows are behind you now; this is rocky alpine country with sparse vegetation. Bhagwabasa at 4,300 m is a stark camp of boulder fields, loose rock and snow patches, and it is snow-covered early in the season. Evenings here are cold and windy, so layer up as soon as you arrive. It is the last camp before Roopkund Lake, and there is a quiet sense of anticipation in camp. Tomorrow starts around 4 to 5 AM, so rest well tonight. What to Expect: - Short but steep: 4 km and about 430 m (1,400 ft) of gain at high altitude - Zig-zag climb up a rocky ridge from Pathar Nachauni – frequent short halts help - Kalu Vinayak (4,200 m): black stone Ganesha shrine with views of Trishul, Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhamba and Neelkanth - Rocky, sparse alpine terrain from the temple to camp - Bhagwabasa: boulder fields and snow patches, cold and windy in the evening - Overnight: Tents at Bhagwabasa (4,300 m / 14,100 ft) ### Day 5: Summit Day - Bhagwabasa to Roopkund and Junargali, back to Pathar Nachauni **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,300 m → 4,800 m (15,750 ft) → 3,870 m (12,700 ft) | Optional: Junargali 4,880 m (16,000 ft) | Distance: 12 km | Duration: ~9 hrs | Terrain: steep rocky ascent with glacial moraine and snow patches, return on the same route | Stay: Tents at Pathar Nachauni** This is the day the trek is built around, and the hardest. Leave Bhagwabasa very early, around 4 to 5 AM. The early start keeps you ahead of the strong afternoon winds, cuts your sun exposure and gives you time at the lake without hurrying. Start in your warm layers, with water and energy snacks where you can reach them. The climb is steep and crosses rocky terrain, glacial moraine and occasional snow patches. Use your trekking poles for stability, keep your steps short and stay close to the person ahead. You wear the free microspikes and gaiters on the snow sections, and the team carries ropes. After 2 to 3 hours of steady climbing you reach Roopkund at 4,800 m, a small glacial lake ringed by high peaks and famous for the ancient human skeletal remains in its waters. For most of the year it stays small; it grows during the monsoon as glacier melt feeds it. Take your time at the lake to look around and take photographs. If you still have energy, the optional side trek to Junargali at 4,880 m (16,000 ft) adds about 80 m (250 ft) of climbing and opens a wider view of Trishul, Nanda Ghunti and the glacier-fed valleys around you. The descent follows the same route. You stop at Bhagwabasa for rest and lunch, then continue down to Pathar Nachauni, a total descent of about 930 m (3,050 ft). Your legs feel this part. Keep eating, keep drinking and use your poles on every steep step. You reach camp tired, but the lower altitude at Pathar Nachauni helps you recover overnight. What to Expect: - Very early start (around 4–5 AM) to avoid the strong afternoon winds - 2–3 hour steep climb over rock, moraine and snow patches to Roopkund (4,800 m) - Roopkund Lake: a small glacial lake famous for its ancient skeletal remains - Optional side trek to Junargali (4,880 m / 16,000 ft) for a wider view of Trishul and Nanda Ghunti - Rest and lunch at Bhagwabasa on the way down; about 930 m (3,050 ft) of descent in all - Overnight: Tents at Pathar Nachauni (3,870 m / 12,700 ft) ### Day 6: Pathar Nachauni to Wan via Bedni Bugyal, Drive to Lohajung **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,870 m → 2,438 m (8,000 ft) | Distance: 16 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: meadow descent, rocky paths and ridges, then forest trail | Drive: Wan → Lohajung (15 km, ~1 hr) | Stay: Guesthouse / hotel at Lohajung** Today is the longest day by distance, and almost all of it is downhill. You lose about 1,430 m (4,700 ft) over 16 km between Pathar Nachauni and Wan. Downhill is easier on the lungs but hard on the knees, so use your trekking poles from the first step and keep your pace controlled rather than fast. The descent begins gradually and brings you back across the meadows of Bedni Bugyal at 3,550 m. Take a break here. It is your last chance to see Trishul (7,120 m) and Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m) across open meadow, along with the valleys and glaciers around them. We recommend taking your final photographs here rather than hurrying on towards Wan. Below the meadows the trail runs down rocky paths and along ridges before it enters forest. The vegetation grows denser as you lose height, and the shade of the trees returns after days in open country. Keep your steps short on the steeper sections and take small breaks to rest your knees. By late afternoon you walk into Wan village at 2,438 m, where the trek on foot ends. From Wan a shared cab, paid directly to the driver, brings you to Lohajung in about an hour. You stay in a guesthouse or hotel on triple or quad sharing. After the nights in tents, a roof and a proper bed feel like a reward. Relax, enjoy the local hospitality and look back on the trek over dinner. What to Expect: - Long descent: 16 km and about 1,430 m (4,700 ft) of height loss - Last views of Trishul and Nanda Ghunti from Bedni Bugyal (3,550 m) - Rocky paths, ridges and forest trail, with vegetation thickening as you descend - Trekking poles strongly recommended to protect your knees - Walk ends at Wan (2,438 m / 8,000 ft), then a 1-hour drive to Lohajung - Overnight: Lohajung guesthouse / hotel (2,316 m / 7,600 ft) ### Day 7: Lohajung to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Lohajung → Rishikesh (about 250 km, 8–10 hrs) | Altitude: 2,316 m → 340 m (1,115 ft) | End: Rishikesh by evening** The last day is a long drive back to the plains. The road retraces the route you came up on, through Dewal, Tharali, Karnaprayag, Gauchar, Rudraprayag, Srinagar and Devprayag. It runs past valleys, riverbanks and mountain towns, and you descend about 1,976 m (6,485 ft) over the day. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. We recommend a short halt at Devprayag to see the confluence of the Bhagirathi and the Alaknanda, where the two rivers merge to form the Ganga. If you passed it in a hurry on Day 1, this is your second chance. The cab reaches Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) by about 06:00 PM. Meals during the drive are not part of the trek, so carry snacks or plan a roadside stop. Keep a margin before any onward train, bus or flight; this is a full 8 to 10 hours on the road. What to Expect: - About 250 km drive, 8–10 hours, back to Rishikesh - Route via Dewal, Tharali, Karnaprayag, Gauchar, Rudraprayag and Srinagar - Short halt at Devprayag, where the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda form the Ganga - Shared cab from Lohajung, not included in the trek fee - Meals on the drive are your own - Trek ends at Lohajung; drop at Rishikesh (340 m / 1,115 ft) by about 06:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 6: guesthouse or homestay in Lohajung, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 5: camping in 3-person tents at Ghairoli Patal, Pathar Nachauni and Bhagwabasa #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 dinner - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - All technical equipment needed on the trek, including ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Transport (Rishikesh to Lohajung and back) is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 6-seater vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,500 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Lohajung #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - If an item is not listed under inclusions, it is not part of the package; ask in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun (DED), about 20–25 km and around 45 minutes from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before and stay in Rishikesh. **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km, an 8–10 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 06:30 AM. **Return:** on the last day the cab leaves Lohajung at 06:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 06:00 PM. Book onward travel for late evening or night, or the next day if you want a buffer. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (around 1 hour) from Rishikesh, is far better connected than Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK), which has only a few trains. With a 06:30 AM pickup, plan to reach Rishikesh the day before; check current timings and book early. - **Haridwar Junction** – trains from Delhi including the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains - **Yog Nagari Rishikesh** – a few trains, such as the Yoga Express and the Kalinga Utkal Express **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km, an 8–10 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 06:30 AM. **Return:** on the last day the cab leaves Lohajung at 06:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 06:00 PM. Book onward travel for late evening or night, or the next day if you want a buffer. ### By road **Bus route:** buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate reach Rishikesh in about 6–7 hours, including overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways buses. Most drop you at Rishikesh Bus Stand, from where an app cab, auto or shared three-wheeler takes you to Jumping Heights, Tapovan; arriving the evening before is safer than relying on an overnight bus for the 06:30 AM pickup. - **Choose government buses** – board them inside ISBT Kashmere Gate for safety and reliability - **Avoid private buses** – those that leave from outside the ISBT premises are unreliable **From Rishikesh to Lohajung:** about 250 km, an 8–10 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 06:30 AM. **Return:** on the last day the cab leaves Lohajung at 06:30 AM and is expected to reach Jumping Heights, Tapovan by 06:00 PM. Book onward travel for late evening or night, or the next day if you want a buffer. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Dewal has the last reliable ATM before Lohajung - Withdraw enough there for your share of the cab and personal expenses - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Lohajung is the last place with a stable mobile signal - Beyond Lohajung the network is patchy to non-existent - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Roopkund trek, and where does it start? The Roopkund trek is in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand, and starts from Lohajung (2,316 m / 7,600 ft), about 250 km and 8–10 hours by road from Rishikesh. The trail begins at Wan village, a 15 km, one-hour drive from Lohajung. From Wan the route climbs through forest to the Ali and Bedni Bugyal meadows, then over rocky ground via Kalu Vinayak to Roopkund Lake at 4,800 m (15,750 ft). ### How many days does the Roopkund trek take from start to finish? The Roopkund trek takes 7 days from Rishikesh to Rishikesh, with 5 trekking days covering about 47 km. - **Day 1 and Day 7:** drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung (about 250 km, 8–10 hours) - **Days 2–6:** trekking, 4–16 km a day - **Summit day:** Day 5, about 12 km and 9 hours to Roopkund and back to Pathar Nachauni - **Longest distance:** Day 6, a 16 km descent to Wan in 5–6 hours ### What is the altitude of the Roopkund trek? The highest point of the Roopkund trek is Roopkund Lake at 4,800 m (15,750 ft), with an optional climb to Junargali at 4,880 m (16,000 ft). The highest camp is Bhagwabasa at 4,300 m (14,100 ft). - **Wan (trailhead):** 2,438 m / 8,000 ft - **Ghairoli Patal camp:** 3,205 m / 10,515 ft - **Pathar Nachauni camp:** 3,870 m / 12,700 ft - **Bhagwabasa camp:** 4,300 m / 14,100 ft ### What is the difficulty level of the Roopkund trek? The Roopkund trek is graded Moderate–Difficult because of the high altitude, steep rocky climbs and long days. It climbs from 2,438 m to 4,800 m in four trekking days. - **Day 4:** a short but steep zig-zag climb of about 430 m up a rocky ridge to Bhagwabasa - **Summit day:** a 2–3 hour steep climb over rock, moraine and snow patches, about 9 hours in all - **Day 6:** a long 16 km descent with about 1,430 m of height loss ### Can a first-time trekker with no experience do the Roopkund trek? The Roopkund trek is not ideal for first-time trekkers: it is graded Moderate–Difficult, reaches 4,800 m and has steep, rocky and sometimes slippery sections. Prior trekking experience is recommended. If you are new to trekking, do a short trek at moderate altitude first to prepare for Roopkund. ### What fitness level do I need for the Roopkund trek? For the Roopkund trek you need moderate to good fitness, with the stamina to walk 4–9 hours a day over steep, rocky ground at high altitude. Cardiovascular endurance and leg strength matter most. - **Cardio:** running, cycling or swimming - **Strength:** squats, lunges and other leg exercises - **Endurance:** practise multi-hour hikes with a loaded backpack - **Altitude:** if possible, do a short trek at moderate altitude beforehand ### What is the best time for the Roopkund trek? The best time for the Roopkund trek is May–June and September–October, when the weather is relatively stable and the trail is clear of heavy snow. Avoid trekking after October, when heavy snowfall, strong winds and extreme cold make the trail dangerous. - **May–June:** days of 13–18°C and nights of 0–7°C - **September–October:** colder, with days of 3–9°C and nights of -3°C to -1°C ### Is there snow on the Roopkund trek, and in which months? The Roopkund trek runs when the trail is clear of heavy snow, but you can still meet snow patches at Bhagwabasa and on the final climb to the lake, especially early or late in the season. Any snow near the lake also reflects strong sunlight. Gaiters and microspikes are provided free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear. ### How cold does it get on the Roopkund trek? On the Roopkund trek, May–June days are 13–18°C with nights of 0–7°C, while September–October days are 3–9°C with nights of -3°C to -1°C. Bhagwabasa camp (4,300 m) is cold and windy in the evening in both seasons. - **Layers:** 4 warm layers, including thermals and 2 fleece or woollen layers - **Outer jacket:** a padded -10°C jacket is part of the Free Trekking Gear - **Summit day:** a balaclava or buff and waterproof gloves for the cold wind ### Which mountains and lakes can you see on the Roopkund trek? The Roopkund trek gives views of Trishul (7,120 m), Nanda Ghunti (6,310 m), Chaukhamba and Neelkanth, and passes two lakes, Bedni Kund and Roopkund itself. The widest view comes from the optional climb to Junargali (4,880 m). - **Roopkund Lake (4,800 m):** a small glacial lake known for its ancient skeletal remains - **Bedni Kund (3,600 m):** the sacred lake of the Nanda Devi Raj Jat - **Kalu Vinayak (4,200 m):** views of Trishul, Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhamba and Neelkanth - **Ranka Dhar ridge:** one of the first wide Himalayan views, on Day 2 ### What is the terrain like on the Roopkund trek? The Roopkund trek moves from oak and rhododendron forest to rolling alpine meadows, then to rocky, boulder-strewn slopes and glacial moraine near the lake. The upper sections can be slippery, with snow patches. - **Forest:** oak and rhododendron along the Neel Ganga, with wooden bridge crossings - **Meadows:** Ali Bugyal and Bedni Bugyal - **Rocky ridge:** a steep zig-zag climb from Pathar Nachauni to Kalu Vinayak - **Summit approach:** rock, moraine and snow patches below Roopkund ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Roopkund trek? The Roopkund trek carries a real risk of altitude sickness, as it reaches 4,800 m and has a camp at 4,300 m. The altitude gain is gradual but significant, so acclimatisation and a slow pace are essential. - **Symptoms:** headache, nausea or dizziness; tell your guide at once - **Safety kit:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - **Evacuation:** stretchers are kept at each campsite ### How do you acclimatise on the Roopkund trek? The Roopkund trek itinerary builds in acclimatisation: the first night on the trail is at Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m), and you sleep at 3,870 m and 4,300 m before the summit. After summit day you descend to sleep lower, at Pathar Nachauni. - **Pace:** walk slowly and take short breaks - **Hydration:** drink plenty of water and carry ORS - **Avoid:** alcohol and heavy meals at high altitude - **If unwell:** rest or descend, as advised by your guide ### What is the minimum age for the Roopkund trek? The minimum age for the Roopkund trek is 12 years, because of the high altitude and strenuous terrain. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Roopkund trek base camp? To reach the Roopkund trek, travel to Rishikesh; the cab to Lohajung leaves Jumping Heights, Tapovan (Rishikesh) at 06:30 AM for the 8–10 hour drive of about 250 km. Reach Rishikesh the day before. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), Dehradun, about 20–25 km and 45 minutes from Rishikesh - **By train:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km from Rishikesh, is far better connected than Yog Nagari Rishikesh - **By bus:** buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate reach Rishikesh in about 6–7 hours - **Return:** the cab leaves Lohajung at 06:30 AM on Day 7 and reaches Rishikesh by about 06:00 PM ### Is transport from Rishikesh included in the Roopkund trek? No, transport between Rishikesh and Lohajung is not included in the Roopkund trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs (about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Onward:** 06:30 AM from Jumping Heights, Tapovan, Rishikesh on Day 1 - **Return:** 06:30 AM from Lohajung on Day 7, reaching Rishikesh by about 06:00 PM - **Trailhead drive:** the 15 km, one-hour drive between Lohajung and Wan on Days 2 and 6 is also by shared cab, paid directly to the driver ### Where do we stay on the Roopkund trek? On the Roopkund trek you stay two nights at Lohajung in a guesthouse, homestay or hotel, and four nights in 3-person tents at high-altitude camps with large mess tents. Tents and sleeping bags are included, and Lohajung rooms are on a triple or quad sharing basis. - **Day 1 and Day 6:** Lohajung (2,316 m) - **Day 2:** Ghairoli Patal (3,205 m), a forest clearing ringed by tall deodars - **Day 3 and Day 5:** Pathar Nachauni (3,870 m) - **Day 4:** Bhagwabasa (4,300 m) - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the whole trek ### Who leads the Roopkund trek, and are local guides included? The Roopkund trek is led by experienced trek leaders supported by local certified mountain guides, combining safety with local knowledge of the route. Follow their instructions on weather changes, snow and rockfall areas. - **Safety support:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - **Technical gear:** ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes are included ### Can I join the Roopkund trek as a solo trekker or a woman travelling alone? Yes, solo trekkers, including women travelling alone, can join a Roopkund group trek, but trekking Roopkund entirely on your own is not recommended because of the high altitude and remote sections. A group trek gives you a trek leader, local guides and logistics support. - **Single tent:** ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the whole trek if you want privacy - **Support:** medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp ### What food is served on the Roopkund trek? All meals on the Roopkund trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 dinner: simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food. Tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly. - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so bring a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Lohajung - **Snacks:** carry energy bars, dry fruits and chocolate ### How much drinking water should I carry on the Roopkund trek? On the Roopkund trek, carry two 1-litre water bottles and keep sipping through the day, as good hydration helps at altitude. Make one bottle insulated for the cold summit day. Carry a few ORS or electrolyte sachets to add to your water at high altitude. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included in the Roopkund trek? Yes, the Roopkund trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear, so you do not need to buy or rent shoes or a jacket. One refundable deposit of ₹3,000 plus a ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit. - **Shoes:** trekking shoes worth ₹6,999 - **Jacket:** padded jacket rated to -10°C, worth ₹3,299 - **Trekking poles:** help on the steep Pathar Nachauni to Roopkund section and on the way down - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes ### Can I offload my backpack on the Roopkund trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Roopkund trek costs ₹2,500 + 5% GST for the full trek. Book it in advance, as last-minute requests made at Lohajung may cost more. - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Bag type:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and layers ### Is there a doctor or medical support on the Roopkund trek? Medical support on the Roopkund trek is available at every camp, with a first-aid kit and oxygen cylinders, and stretchers are kept at each campsite for emergency evacuation. Trek leaders and local certified guides manage safety on the trail. - **Medical certificate:** signed by a registered doctor, required before the trek - **Insurance:** mandatory, covering high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation - **Your kit:** carry your regular and prescribed medicines plus basic first aid ### What documents do I need for the Roopkund trek? For the Roopkund trek you need an original government photo ID with a photocopy, a medical certificate signed by a registered doctor and a copy of your travel insurance policy. - **ID:** passport, Aadhaar, driving licence or voter ID - **Insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Do I need a permit for the Roopkund trek? Yes, the Roopkund trek needs permits, and all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the trek fee. Carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy. Keep your documents dry in a ziploc or plastic bag. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Roopkund trek? On the Roopkund trek, Dewal is the last reliable ATM and Lohajung is the last point with a stable mobile signal. Beyond Lohajung the network is patchy to non-existent. - **Cash:** withdraw enough at Dewal for your share of the cab, offloading if needed and small expenses - **Shops:** Lohajung has only small shops, so carry your trekking essentials - **Power bank:** bring one fully charged ### Why is Roopkund Lake famous, and what is found there? Roopkund Lake, at 4,800 m (15,750 ft), is a small glacial lake famous for the ancient skeletal remains found there. You reach it on Day 5 of the Roopkund trek after a 2–3 hour steep climb from Bhagwabasa. The lake lies among rock and glacial moraine, with snow patches common around it. ### What is summit day like on the Roopkund trek? Summit day on the Roopkund trek (Day 5) starts very early, around 4–5 AM, to avoid strong afternoon winds, and covers about 12 km in 9 hours. You climb from Bhagwabasa (4,300 m) to Roopkund (4,800 m), then descend to sleep at Pathar Nachauni (3,870 m). - **Climb:** 2–3 hours, steep, over rock, moraine and snow patches - **Optional:** side trek to Junargali (4,880 m) for a wider view of Trishul and Nanda Ghunti - **Descent:** rest and lunch at Bhagwabasa, with about 930 m of descent in all ### What are Kalu Vinayak and Bedni Kund on the Roopkund trek? Kalu Vinayak (4,200 m) is a black stone Ganesha shrine on the Day 4 climb of the Roopkund trek, with views of Trishul, Nanda Ghunti, Chaukhamba and Neelkanth. Bedni Kund (3,600 m) is the sacred lake of the Nanda Devi Raj Jat, reached by a short detour on Day 3. Above Bedni the landscape changes from meadow to rocky alpine slopes, and Kalu Vinayak sits above the steep zig-zag ridge from Pathar Nachauni. ### What should I pack for the Roopkund trek? For the Roopkund trek, pack a 50–60 L backpack with 4 warm layers, rain protection and strong sun protection; shoes, jacket, poles and snow gear come with the Free Trekking Gear. - **Clothing:** thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers, 2 trek pants, 3 quick-dry T-shirts and a rain jacket - **Cold gear:** woollen cap, balaclava or buff, fleece gloves and waterproof gloves - **Accessories:** UV sunglasses, SPF 50+ sunscreen and lip balm - **Essentials:** headlamp, two 1 L bottles, lunch box, power bank, medicines and cash ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 25 Oct 2026 to 31 Oct 2026 - 8 May 2027 to 14 May 2027 - 9 May 2027 to 15 May 2027 - 15 May 2027 to 21 May 2027 - 16 May 2027 to 22 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 28 May 2027 - 23 May 2027 to 29 May 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 4 Jun 2027 - 30 May 2027 to 5 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 11 Jun 2027 - 6 Jun 2027 to 12 Jun 2027 - … 10 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/roopkund-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Rupin Pass Trek > Rupin Pass Trek is a 7-day moderate–difficult trek in Shimla, Himachal Pradesh, reaching 4,679 m (15,350 ft). It covers about 40.5 km on foot and starts at Jiskun and ends at Sangla. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹15,750 per person + 5% GST, with free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles. Next batch: 8 May 2027 (10 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/rupin-pass-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate–Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,679 m / 15,350 ft - **Trekking distance:** 40.5 km - **Region:** Shimla, Himachal Pradesh - **Start / end:** Jiskun / Sangla - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Summer (May-Jun): Day 13°C to 18°C, Night 0°C to 7°C | Autumn (15 Sep-Oct): Day 3°C to 9°C, Night -3°C to -1°C - **Price:** ₹15,750 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles - **Next batch:** 8 May 2027 (10 upcoming) ## Overview Rupin Pass will not stay the same trek for more than a day. It begins in villages that hang off the mountainside, slips into forests beside a rushing river, and opens into a glacial bowl where a waterfall drops nearly 1,500 feet in tiers. Then it sends you up beside that same waterfall and into snow. On the last high day you climb a narrow gully, step onto the pass at 4,679 metres, and look out at the Kinner Kailash range above a valley you have never seen. The Rupin Pass trek strings together an unusual run of sights in about 40.5 km. Jakha, the “Hanging Village”, clings to a steep slope above the valley, surrounded by coniferous forest and apple orchards. Saruwas Thatch is a meadow camp beneath towering cliffs at the edge of the Rupin River. Dhanderas Thatch is a broad glacial valley where waterfalls pour down the walls and the Rupin Waterfall plunges nearly 1,500 ft in several tiers. Above it lie the snowfields of Rata Pheri, the narrow Rupin Gully and the pass itself, with views of the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati, before the trail drops to Ronti Gad and on towards Sangla. The Rupin Pass trek is a 7-day crossover trek in Himachal Pradesh, graded Moderate – Difficult. It starts at Jiskun (2,099 m / 6,889 ft) in Shimla district, after a drive from Shimla, and ends at Sangla, so you begin in one valley and finish in another. The route climbs from village homestays at Jiskun and Jakha (2,650 m) to camps at Saruwas Thatch (3,450 m), Dhanderas Thatch (3,550 m) and the Upper Waterfall Camp (4,100 m), crosses Rupin Pass at 4,679 m (15,350 ft), the highest point of the trek, and descends to Ronti Gad (4,000 m). It is celebrated for the way it combines villages, forests, meadows, waterfalls and snow in a single crossing. In our experience, it deserves its place among the finest treks in India, because no two days on it look alike. ### The Rupin Waterfall and the Snow Gully – What Makes the Rupin Pass Trek Unmissable The heart of this trek is a waterfall you live beside. The walk from Saruwas Thatch to Dhanderas Thatch is short, two to three hours through pine, rhododendron and silver birch along the gushing river. Then the trees fall back, the valley opens, and the Rupin Waterfall comes into sight ahead, plunging nearly 1,500 feet in several tiers, throwing up mist and filling the valley with a roaring echo. Dhanderas Thatch itself is a wide glacial meadow ringed by towering cliffs, with more waterfalls streaming down its walls, and in summer, especially in June, it is carpeted with flowers. You pitch camp with the falls in full view and fall asleep to their sound. The next morning you go up beside it. You start early, because afternoons up here can bring strong winds and cloud. The trail climbs steeply along the river, over glacial streams and boulder sections, and in the early season across icy snow bridges. The roar of the falls grows louder as you climb. The distance is only 3.5 km, but it gains about 550 metres in 3–4 hours on sharp ascents and narrow trail. By early afternoon you reach the Upper Waterfall Camp at 4,100 metres, set right above the cascade. The water you have been listening to all day now falls away beneath your tent, and ahead lie the snowfields and peaks of the upper valley. Summit day begins before sunrise, for better snow conditions. You walk out across the wide snowfields of Rata Pheri, a white world after days of forest and meadow. Then the valley narrows into the Rupin Gully, a steep, focused climb where all that matters is the next step. And then you are on the pass at 4,679 metres, and the view opens all at once to the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati. The descent to Ronti Gad is steep and long, and the whole day runs 9–10 hours. The next day carries you down towards Sangla through country you have not seen before. We find that this sense of crossing into a new valley, rather than turning around and walking back, is what gives Rupin its character. ### The Rupin Valley Itself The landscape starts changing before you take your first step on the trail. The drive in runs through apple orchards, terraced fields and pine forest and climbs over Chainsheel Pass at about 11,000 ft, where the road cuts through dense forest and then opens onto rolling meadows with distant snow peaks, before dropping through isolated hamlets to Jiskun. From there the first walk climbs through pine and deodar forest and terraced fields of barley and potatoes, past traditional wooden houses and over small streams and wooden bridges, to Jakha, the highest settlement in the area and the last major village on the trek. Above Jakha the trail belongs to the river. You walk under rhododendron, maple and deodar, cross the Rupin on rustic wooden bridges and pass small clearings dotted with wildflowers, with the sound of the water rarely out of earshot. The forest then gives way to open alpine meadows with views of snow-dusted peaks and waterfalls in the distance, and Saruwas Thatch, under its cliffs beside the river, gives you a night beneath starry skies. Higher still, meadow becomes glacial valley, glacial valley becomes snowfield, and snowfield becomes gully. Village, forest, meadow, waterfall, snow: the order never repeats, and that, more than any single view, is what defines the Rupin valley. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Rupin Pass trek is graded Moderate – Difficult. Most walking days are short, 3.5–7 km and 2–6 hours, but several are steep, and the climb beside the waterfall gains about 550 metres in just 3.5 km. The hard day is the pass crossing: about 10 km in 9–10 hours over snowfields and a steep gully, followed by a long, steep descent, with no water source after the Upper Waterfall Camp. The trek involves river crossings, snow patches and several nights of camping at altitude. We recommend it for trekkers who have done at least one high-altitude trek above 10,000 ft. Beginners with excellent fitness may attempt it, but endurance and stamina are essential. Plan on six to eight weeks of steady preparation before departure. Season: May to June and 15 September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Rupin Pass Trek - **Jakha, the Hanging Village** – at 2,650 m (8,694 ft), set on a steep mountainside, the highest and last major settlement on the route. - **The Rupin Waterfall** – a cascade of nearly 1,500 ft in several tiers, which you camp below one night and above the next. - **Dhanderas Thatch** – a broad glacial valley at 3,550 m (11,647 ft) full of waterfalls, carpeted with wildflowers in summer, especially in June. - **Upper Waterfall Camp** – a campsite at 4,100 m (13,451 ft) perched right above the falls, with snowfields ahead. - **The snowfields of Rata Pheri** – wide open snow below the pass, a complete change from the forests below. - **Rupin Gully and the pass** – a narrow, steep final climb to 4,679 m (15,350 ft), with views of the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati. - **Forests along the Rupin River** – pine, deodar, maple, silver birch and rhododendron, crossed by rustic wooden bridges. - **A true crossover** – from Jiskun over the pass to Ronti Gad and Sangla, with fresh country right to the end. ### Best Time to Do the Rupin Pass Trek The Rupin Pass trek runs in two seasons, May to June and 15 September to October, and the trek changes noticeably between them. Early summer is the time of snow bridges and then fresh green meadows; post-monsoon is the time of clear skies, crisp views and colder nights. #### May – Snow Bridges Season In early May the trail is still sprinkled with snow. You walk over snow bridges and snow-covered stretches of trail on the way up the valley, and you see the Himalayas around you in their most pristine, icy form. It is the most adventurous version of Rupin, with the feel of an early-season crossing, and for trekkers who want snow to be part of the story, this is the window to choose. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 18°C | Night at camp: 0°C to 7°C (May–June range) - **Trail conditions:** Snow-covered sections on the upper trail; snow bridges over streams. - **Best for:** Snow bridges, snow walking and a full early-season pass crossing. #### June – Meadows in Bloom As summer moves on, the lower valley turns green. Lush meadows, blooming flowers and clear skies take over, and Dhanderas Thatch is at its best: the broad glacial valley below the Rupin Waterfall becomes a meadow carpeted with flowers, with the falls pouring down behind it. Snow still lies higher up on the way to the pass, so June gives you both sides of Rupin, flowers at the waterfall camp and snow at the top. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 18°C | Night at camp: 0°C to 7°C (May–June range) - **Trail conditions:** Green meadows and wildflowers lower down; snow patches remain on the upper trail. - **Best for:** Wildflowers at Dhanderas Thatch, green meadows and the waterfall in full summer setting. #### 15 September to October – Post-Monsoon Clarity After the monsoon the skies over the Rupin valley turn crystal clear, the valleys are fresh and green, and the meadows are full of colour. Views of the snow-clad peaks are at their sharpest, and the mountain air is crisp. The weather stays pleasant for long trekking days, though nights at the high camps drop below freezing. This is the season when the view from the top of the pass, across to the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati, is at its clearest. - **Temperatures:** Day: 3°C to 9°C | Night at camp: -3°C to -1°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear skies, fresh green valleys, colourful meadows and crisp mountain views. - **Best for:** Sharp views of the snow peaks, the clearest views from the pass and pleasant long walking days. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the full snow experience, with snow bridges and a snowy upper valley, book an early-season batch in May. For wildflowers at Dhanderas Thatch alongside the waterfall, with snow still waiting at the top, choose June. For the clearest mountain views from the pass and pleasant, crisp trekking days, a batch from 15 September to October is our pick, provided you are ready for colder nights at camp. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Drive from Shimla to Jiskun **Route Details:** **Pickup: Shimla Old Bus Stand, 6:30 AM | Drive: Shimla → Jiskun (~198 km, ~10 hrs) | Altitude: 2,276 m → 2,099 m (6,889 ft) | Stay: Homestay in Jiskun (triple / quad sharing)** The Rupin Pass Trek begins with a long drive from Shimla to Jiskun, the village where the walking starts. It is about 198 km and roughly 10 hours on the road. The route winds through apple orchards, terraced fields and thick forest, and the landscape keeps changing as you move deeper into the hills. Rohru is the last dependable ATM on the way, and after Rohru facilities are sparse, so carry enough cash and any last essentials from Shimla. Beyond Rohru the road climbs over Chainsheel Pass, at about 11,000 ft, on winding dirt roads that cut through dense forest. Near the top the trees give way to wide, rolling meadows with distant snow peaks on the horizon. The road then drops gradually through isolated hamlets and quiet valleys towards Jiskun. You arrive at Jiskun (2,099 m / 6,889 ft) by evening, a small village on the mountainside. You settle into a homestay, with local hospitality and a hearty dinner before the trek begins. Make your last calls here: Jiskun has a weak signal, with BSNL and Vodafone working only sporadically, and beyond it there is no network for the rest of the trek. Sleep early; tomorrow you start walking. What to Expect: - Long drive from Shimla (~198 km, ~10 hrs) through apple orchards and pine forest - Last dependable ATM at Rohru; carry cash and essentials from Shimla - Cross Chainsheel Pass (~11,000 ft) with views of rolling meadows and snow peaks - Weak, patchy mobile signal at Jiskun (BSNL, Vodafone); none beyond - Dinner and a night in a village homestay - Overnight: Jiskun homestay (2,099 m / 6,889 ft) ### Day 2: Jiskun to Jakha **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,099 m → 2,650 m (8,694 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: ~4 hrs | Terrain: village trail and terraced fields, pine and deodar forest, small stream crossings | Stay: Homestay in Jakha** Day 2 is your first day on foot, and it is a good warm-up for what follows. It is short, 4 km in about 4 hours, but it climbs about 551 m, so the trail is steeper than the distance suggests. You leave Jiskun on a path that winds through forests of pine and deodar, and the air carries their fresh scent. The gradient mixes gradual climbs with occasional steep pitches. On the steep pitches, shorten your step and keep moving slowly rather than stopping and starting; it costs less energy and keeps your breathing even. This is a day of village life as much as mountain scenery. The trail passes terraced farmland where locals grow barley and potatoes, and traditional wooden houses stand along the slopes. It is worth slowing down to take it in, because after tomorrow the villages are behind you. As you climb, the valley opens up below. Small streams and rustic wooden bridges break up the walk; cross them one at a time and watch your footing where the planks are wet. By afternoon you reach Jakha, at 2,650 m (8,694 ft), known as the Hanging Village for the way it sits on the steep mountain slope. It is the highest and the last major settlement on the trek, surrounded by coniferous forest and apple orchards. Jakha is also the last point where you may find basic supplies, so stock up on packaged snacks or anything else you need. Before dark, take a few minutes at the edge of the village to look back down the valley you climbed. Tonight is another homestay night. Rest your legs, spend some time with the villagers and get your kit sorted for the trail ahead. From tomorrow you sleep in tents, and the days get longer and higher. Check your boots, socks and rain cover tonight, because tomorrow’s climb gains about 800 m. What to Expect: - Short but steep first trek day: 4 km, ~4 hrs, ~551 m gain - Pine and deodar forest, terraced fields of barley and potatoes - Traditional wooden houses and village life along the trail - Small streams and wooden bridges to cross - Last chance for basic supplies at Jakha - Overnight: Jakha homestay (2,650 m / 8,694 ft) ### Day 3: Jakha to Saruwas Thatch **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,650 m → 3,450 m (11,319 ft) | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: forest of rhododendron, maple and deodar, wooden bridges, then alpine meadow | Stay: Tents at Saruwas Thatch** Day 3 is the first big climbing day, gaining about 800 m over 7 km. You leave the hanging village of Jakha behind, and the trail climbs gradually through dense forest of rhododendron, maple and deodar. The canopy gives plenty of shade, which helps on a long uphill. The ascents are broken by level stretches, so there are natural places to pause, catch your breath and look around. Use them; a steady pace with short stops gets you to camp in better shape than pushing hard and then resting long. The Rupin River is your companion all day. You hear it long before you see it, and the trail winds across rustic wooden bridges over the river and through small clearings dotted with wildflowers. Water is easy today: you pass fresh streams along the way, so carry a refillable bottle and top up as you go rather than hauling a heavy load from Jakha. The shaded forest can feel cool early on, so start in a light layer and take it off as you warm up. Higher up, the forest opens into vast alpine meadows. Snow-dusted peaks come into view and waterfalls cascade down the slopes in the distance, the first grand views of the trek. This is the point where the walk changes from a village trail into a high-mountain journey, and the scale of the valley ahead becomes clear. By afternoon you reach Saruwas Thatch, at 3,450 m (11,319 ft), your first campsite. It is a broad meadow ringed by towering cliffs, with the gushing Rupin River running along its edge, and it is one of the most beautiful campsites on the trek. On a clear night the stars are worth staying up for, but not for too long. You have climbed a lot today, and a warm layer, a hot dinner and a full night’s sleep will serve you well. What to Expect: - 7 km, 5–6 hrs, ~800 m gain through rhododendron, maple and deodar forest - Wooden bridges over the Rupin River and clearings with wildflowers - Fresh streams on the way – carry a refillable bottle - First grand views of snow-dusted peaks and distant waterfalls - First tent night of the trek, beside the Rupin River - Overnight: Saruwas Thatch meadow camp (3,450 m / 11,319 ft) ### Day 4: Saruwas Thatch to Dhanderas Thatch (Lower Waterfall) **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,450 m → 3,550 m (11,647 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 2–3 hrs | Terrain: gentle forest trail of pine, silver birch and rhododendron, stream crossings, open glacial valley | Stay: Tents at Dhanderas Thatch** Day 4 is the easiest day of the trek: 4 km in 2–3 hours with only about 100 m of gain. It is short, but it is far from dull. The walk begins gently through alpine forest where pine and silver birch stand tall and the scent of rhododendron hangs in the air. Enjoy the slow pace. In our experience, a light day like this is exactly what your body needs before the two steep days that follow. The trail runs alongside the gushing Rupin River and crosses several wooden bridges and lively streams. Look out for wildflowers and birdlife along the banks. Then the trees thin, the valley opens, and the Rupin Waterfall comes into view. It plunges nearly 1,500 ft in several tiers, throwing up mist and filling the valley with a roaring echo. It is the first close look at the waterfall, and it changes the feel of the whole trek. Keep a light rain shell handy; the spray from the falls carries on the wind. The final stretch brings you into Dhanderas Thatch, at 3,550 m (11,647 ft), a broad glacial valley surrounded by towering cliffs and dotted with waterfalls. In summer, and especially in June, the meadow is carpeted with wildflowers. It is one of the most scenic campsites on the trek, with the Rupin Waterfall filling the backdrop and plenty of open ground to spread out across the meadow. Because the walk is short, you arrive with most of the afternoon free. Wander the meadow, photograph the falls and rest your legs. Spend a little time studying the waterfall closely, too: tomorrow’s trail climbs right beside it to the camp above, and it helps to see the line before you walk it. Eat well tonight and keep your water bottles full for the morning. What to Expect: - Short, easy day: 4 km, 2–3 hrs, ~100 m gain - Pine, silver birch and rhododendron forest beside the Rupin River - Wooden bridges and lively streams; wildflowers and birdlife - First close view of the Rupin Waterfall, dropping nearly 1,500 ft in tiers - Wildflower meadows at Dhanderas Thatch, especially in June - Overnight: Dhanderas Thatch camp at the Lower Waterfall (3,550 m / 11,647 ft) ### Day 5: Dhanderas Thatch to Upper Waterfall Camp **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,550 m → 4,100 m (13,451 ft) | Distance: 3.5 km | Duration: 3–4 hrs | Terrain: steep climb beside the waterfall over boulders, glacial streams and seasonal snow bridges | Stay: Tents at Upper Waterfall Camp** Day 5 is short but steep, and it is one of the most adventurous days of the trek. You gain about 550 m in just 3.5 km, climbing beside the Rupin Waterfall to a camp above it. We recommend an early start: afternoons here can bring strong winds and cloud cover, and you want to be at camp before the weather turns. The trail begins with a steep climb along the gushing Rupin River. You cross glacial streams and boulder sections, and depending on the season, icy snow bridges. Carry trekking poles; they make a real difference on this steep, uneven ground. On snow bridges, follow the guide’s instructions exactly, cross one at a time and do not stop to rest in the middle. Snow is firmer in the cold of the morning, which is one more reason the early start matters. As you climb, the roar of the waterfall grows louder and the views become more dramatic. The cascade falls in several tiers between sheer cliffs, and the trail keeps you close to it. The ascents are sharp and the path is narrow in places, so take your time and keep a steady rhythm. You can feel the landscape change underfoot as the trek moves from green meadow to alpine snowfield. By early afternoon you reach the Upper Waterfall Camp, at 4,100 m (13,451 ft), perched right above the falls, with tents pitched on open ground at the top of the cascade. From here the valley opens up to wide snowfields and towering Himalayan peaks. It is one of the most dramatic campsites on the trek, with the waterfall roaring below and snow stretching ahead. This is your highest camp so far. Rest well, drink plenty this evening and get your gear ready before dark; tomorrow is the longest and hardest day of the trek, and it starts before sunrise. What to Expect: - Short, steep climb: 3.5 km, 3–4 hrs, ~550 m gain - Trail beside the Rupin Waterfall, crossing glacial streams, boulders and seasonal snow bridges - Trekking poles strongly recommended for the steep, uneven ground - Early start to beat afternoon wind and cloud - Transition from green meadows to alpine snowfields - Overnight: Upper Waterfall Camp (4,100 m / 13,451 ft) ### Day 6: Summit Day - Upper Waterfall Camp to Ronti Gad via Rupin Pass **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,100 m → 4,679 m (15,350 ft) at Rupin Pass → 4,000 m (13,123 ft) | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 9–10 hrs | Terrain: snowfields, the steep Rupin Gully, then snow slopes, scree and rocky patches on the descent | Stay: Tents at Ronti Gad** Day 6 is the pass crossing, the most awaited and most strenuous day of the Rupin Pass Trek. It is 10 km and 9–10 hours, with about 550 m of climbing to Rupin Pass and about 650 m of descent to Ronti Gad. Start before sunrise, when the snow is in better condition. There are no water sources after the Upper Waterfall Camp, so carry enough water and energy snacks for the whole day. The trail begins with a steep ascent from camp onto snowfields and icy terrain. You cross the wide snowfields of Rata Pheri, an open white world unlike anything lower on the trek. You wear microspikes and gaiters on the snow, and the team fixes ropes where the slope needs them. Walk in the steps of the person ahead, keep your pace even and save your energy for the final push. The crux is the Rupin Gully, a narrow, steep section on the final climb to the pass that tests both endurance and balance. Take it slowly, one step at a time, kicking firm steps into the snow and keeping your weight over your feet. Then you are on top of Rupin Pass, at 4,679 m (15,350 ft). The view opens in every direction: towering peaks, glaciers and valleys, with the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati in sight. After some time at the top, the trail drops sharply down the other side. The descent is just as demanding, involving sliding down snow slopes or picking your way carefully over scree and rocky patches. Keep your poles out and your knees bent. By evening you reach Ronti Gad, at 4,000 m (13,123 ft), a quiet alpine meadow with views of the Kinner Kailash range. You will be tired, and you will have earned every minute of the rest. What to Expect: - Pre-dawn start; 10 km, 9–10 hrs – the longest and hardest day - ~550 m climb over the snowfields of Rata Pheri and up the steep Rupin Gully - Rupin Pass (4,679 m / 15,350 ft) with views of the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati - Microspikes and gaiters on the snowfields; ropes fixed by the team - No water after Upper Waterfall Camp – carry enough for the day - Overnight: Ronti Gad meadow camp (4,000 m / 13,123 ft) ### Day 7: Ronti Gad to Sangla and Drive to Shimla **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,000 m → 2,680 m (8,790 ft) | Distance: 12 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: alpine meadow, then a steep descent through oak and rhododendron forest | Drive: Sangla → Shimla (~215 km, 9–10 hrs) | Stay: Not included** The last day starts with a long descent of about 1,320 m over 12 km. From Ronti Gad the trail drops gradually through rolling alpine meadows, then steeply into forests of oak and rhododendron. The steep section is hard on the knees, so shorten your stride and lean on your poles. On the way, the Baspa Valley and the Kinner Kailash range spread out ahead, with traditional Himachali villages on the slopes below. The descent ends at Sangla, at 2,680 m (8,790 ft) in Kinnaur, where the trek officially concludes. Sangla is known for its apple orchards, wooden houses and temples, and its mountain backdrop. Trekkaro’s services end here. The shared cab to Shimla (not included in the trek fee, paid directly to the driver) leaves Sangla at about 3:00 PM. The 215 km drive runs along the Sutlej River through deep mountain valleys and takes 9–10 hours, so you reach Shimla around 2:00 AM the next day. Pre-book a hotel in Shimla that allows late-night check-in, or plan to rest at the bus stand or taxi stop until morning. Dinner today is not included. What to Expect: - 12 km, 6–7 hrs, ~1,320 m descent from Ronti Gad - Alpine meadows, then a steep drop through oak and rhododendron forest - Views of the Baspa Valley and the Kinner Kailash range - Arrival at Sangla in Kinnaur, known for apple orchards and wooden temples - Cab to Shimla at about 3:00 PM (215 km, 9–10 hrs), arriving around 2:00 AM; dinner and stay not included - Trek ends at Sangla (2,680 m / 8,790 ft) ## Inclusions #### 1. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 2: homestays in Jiskun and Jakha, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 3 to Day 6: camping in 3-person tents at Saruwas Thatch, Dhanderas Thatch, Upper Waterfall Camp and Ronti Gad #### 2. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 dinner - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 3. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 4. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - Free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge), plus the ice axes and ropes the team uses on snow - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 5. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Transport (Shimla to Jiskun, and Sangla back to Shimla) is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs at ₹3,500 per person for both ways, paid directly to the driver. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive from Shimla to Jiskun and from Sangla back to Shimla #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹3,800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Jiskun #### 4. Personal Equipment - Trekking shoes, jacket and trekking poles: bring your own (microspikes and gaiters are provided free) #### 5. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 6. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - If an item is not listed under inclusions, it is not part of the package; ask in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Chandigarh Airport, about 115–120 km and 4–5 hours by road from Shimla, with daily flights from major cities. The drive to Jiskun takes about 10 hours, so reach Shimla the day before. **From Shimla to Jiskun:** about 198 km, a 10-hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Shimla to Jiskun and back from Sangla to Shimla at ₹3,500 per person for both ways, paid directly to the driver. The pickup is at Shimla Old Bus Stand at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** on the last day you trek about 12 km (6–7 hours) from Ronti Gad down to Sangla, then drive about 215 km (9–10 hours) to Shimla. The drive is overnight, so carry light snacks, water and a neck pillow, and book onward travel from Shimla for later the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Kalka, about 90 km from Shimla, with direct trains from Delhi and other cities such as Kolkata. From Kalka, take the Kalka–Shimla toy train or a taxi; check current timings and reach Shimla the day before the drive to Jiskun. - **Kalka–Shimla toy train** – a scenic UNESCO World Heritage route, slower than the road - **Taxi or shared cab from Kalka** – the faster way up to Shimla - **Chandigarh** – also well served by trains from Delhi; Shimla is 4–5 hours by road from there **From Shimla to Jiskun:** about 198 km, a 10-hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Shimla to Jiskun and back from Sangla to Shimla at ₹3,500 per person for both ways, paid directly to the driver. The pickup is at Shimla Old Bus Stand at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** on the last day you trek about 12 km (6–7 hours) from Ronti Gad down to Sangla, then drive about 215 km (9–10 hours) to Shimla. The drive is overnight, so carry light snacks, water and a neck pillow, and book onward travel from Shimla for later the next day. ### By road **Bus route:** HRTC and Volvo buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Shimla (about 360 km, 8–9 hours) and from Chandigarh (about 120 km, 4–5 hours). Take an overnight bus from Delhi or travel a day early, so you are rested before the long drive to Jiskun. **From Shimla to Jiskun:** about 198 km, a 10-hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs from Shimla to Jiskun and back from Sangla to Shimla at ₹3,500 per person for both ways, paid directly to the driver. The pickup is at Shimla Old Bus Stand at 06:30 AM on Day 1. **Return:** on the last day you trek about 12 km (6–7 hours) from Ronti Gad down to Sangla, then drive about 215 km (9–10 hours) to Shimla. The drive is overnight, so carry light snacks, water and a neck pillow, and book onward travel from Shimla for later the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Rohru is the last dependable ATM on the way to Jiskun - There is no ATM on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jiskun is the last place with even a weak signal; BSNL and Vodafone work there sporadically - There is no reliable network beyond Jiskun - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Rupin Pass trek, and where does it start? The Rupin Pass trek is in Himachal Pradesh, starting from Jiskun village in Shimla district and ending at Sangla in Kinnaur. Jiskun (2,099 m) is about 198 km and 10 hours by road from Shimla, via Rohru and the Chainsheel Pass. The trail follows the Rupin River past Jakha village and the Rupin Waterfall, crosses Rupin Pass (4,679 m) and descends to Sangla in the Baspa Valley. ### How many days is the Rupin Pass trek? The Rupin Pass trek takes 7 days from Shimla, with 6 trekking days covering about 40.5 km. The return drive from Sangla is overnight and reaches Shimla around 2:00 AM. - **Day 1:** drive from Shimla to Jiskun (about 198 km, 10 hours) - **Days 2–7:** trekking, 3.5–12 km a day - **Pass day:** Day 6, about 10 km and 9–10 hours over Rupin Pass - **Day 7:** 12 km trek to Sangla, then a 215 km, 9–10 hour drive to Shimla ### What is the altitude of the Rupin Pass trek? The highest point of the Rupin Pass trek is Rupin Pass at 4,679 m (15,350 ft). The trek starts at Jiskun (2,099 m / 6,889 ft), and the highest camp is Upper Waterfall Camp at 4,100 m (13,451 ft). - **Jakha:** 2,650 m / 8,694 ft - **Saruwas Thatch:** 3,450 m / 11,319 ft - **Dhanderas Thatch (Lower Waterfall):** 3,550 m / 11,647 ft - **Ronti Gad:** 4,000 m / 13,123 ft - **Sangla (end point):** 2,680 m / 8,790 ft ### What is the difficulty level of the Rupin Pass trek? The Rupin Pass trek is graded Moderate–Difficult, with long walking hours, steep ascents, river crossings, snow patches and high-altitude camping. Pass day is the longest and hardest, at 9–10 hours. - **Day 5:** a short, steep climb of about 550 m beside the Rupin Waterfall over boulders and snow bridges - **Day 6:** snowfields and the steep Rupin Gully up to 4,679 m, then snow, scree and rock on the descent - **Day 7:** a steep descent of about 1,320 m to Sangla ### Is the Rupin Pass trek good for beginners? The Rupin Pass trek is not ideal for beginners; at least one earlier high-altitude trek above 10,000 ft is recommended. Beginners with excellent physical fitness may attempt it, but endurance and stamina are crucial. Pass day alone is 9–10 hours on snow and steep ground at up to 4,679 m. ### What fitness level do I need for the Rupin Pass trek? For the Rupin Pass trek you should be able to jog 5 km in 30–35 minutes comfortably. Strong leg muscles, cardiovascular endurance and stamina are essential for the 9–10 hour pass day. - **Running:** build up to the 5 km target with regular runs - **Stairs:** stair climbing builds strength for the steep climbs - **Workouts:** regular leg-strength training for the long descents ### What is the best time for the Rupin Pass trek? The best time for the Rupin Pass trek is May to June and 15 September to October. The two seasons give very different experiences of the same route. - **May–June:** snow-covered trails and snow bridges, with days of 13–18°C - **June:** wildflower meadows at Dhanderas Thatch - **15 September–October:** clear skies, colourful meadows and crisp mountain views, with colder nights ### Is there snow on the Rupin Pass trek? Snow on the Rupin Pass trek is heaviest in May–June, when the upper trail is snow-covered and you cross snow bridges and snowfields below the pass. September–October is the clearer season, though snowfields and snow patches can remain near the pass. Microspikes and gaiters are provided free, and the team carries ice axes and ropes for the snow sections. ### How cold does it get on the Rupin Pass trek? On the Rupin Pass trek, May–June days are 13–18°C and nights 0–7°C, while September–October nights can drop to about -2°C. Expect cold wind on the pass. - **Layers:** 4 warm layers, including thermals and 2 fleece or woollen layers - **Jacket:** bring your own padded or down jacket for sub-zero nights at the high camps - **Pass day:** a balaclava or buff and waterproof gloves ### Which mountains can you see on the Rupin Pass trek? From Rupin Pass (4,679 m) you see the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati, and the descent to Sangla gives views of the Baspa Valley and Kinner Kailash. The other highlight is the Rupin Waterfall, which drops nearly 1,500 ft in tiers. - **Chainsheel Pass drive:** meadows and snow peaks on Day 1 - **Saruwas Thatch:** first grand views of snow-dusted peaks and distant waterfalls - **Dhanderas Thatch:** the first close view of the Rupin Waterfall ### What is the terrain like on the Rupin Pass trek? The Rupin Pass trek changes terrain almost every day, from village trails and forest to meadows, a glacial valley, snowfields and a steep gully. Stream and river crossings on wooden bridges are frequent. - **Lower trail:** terraced fields and pine, deodar, maple and rhododendron forest - **Middle section:** meadows and an open glacial valley along the Rupin River - **Waterfall climb:** boulders, glacial streams and seasonal snow bridges - **Pass and descent:** snowfields, the steep Rupin Gully, scree and rocky patches ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Rupin Pass trek? The Rupin Pass trek reaches 4,679 m and camps at 4,000–4,100 m, so trekkers must be prepared for high altitude and acclimatisation. The climb is spread out, with short days of 2–4 hours on Days 4 and 5 before the pass. - **Biggest gains:** about 800 m on Day 3 and about 550 m each on Days 5 and 6 - **Safety kit:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - **Evacuation:** stretchers at each campsite ### How do I reach the Rupin Pass trek base camp? To reach the Rupin Pass trek, travel to Shimla and arrive the day before; the pickup is at Shimla Old Bus Stand at 6:30 AM on Day 1, and the drive to Jiskun is about 198 km and takes around 10 hours. - **By air:** Chandigarh Airport, about 115–120 km and 4–5 hours by road from Shimla - **By train:** Kalka, about 90 km from Shimla, then the Kalka–Shimla toy train or a taxi - **By bus:** HRTC buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Shimla (about 360 km, 8–9 hours) or from Chandigarh (4–5 hours) - **Return:** the drive from Sangla reaches Shimla around 2:00 AM, so book onward travel for later the next day ### Is transport from Shimla included in the Rupin Pass trek? No, transport is not included in the Rupin Pass trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs from Shimla to Jiskun and back from Sangla to Shimla at ₹3,500 per person for both ways, paid directly to the driver. - **Onward:** from Shimla Old Bus Stand at 6:30 AM on Day 1 to Jiskun, about 198 km and 10 hours - **Return:** the cab leaves Sangla at about 3:00 PM on Day 7 and reaches Shimla around 2:00 AM - **Overnight drive:** dinner and stay are not included that night ### Where do we stay on the Rupin Pass trek? On the Rupin Pass trek you stay two nights in village homestays at Jiskun and Jakha and four nights in 3-person tents at the high camps. Homestays are on a triple or quad sharing basis, and tents and sleeping bags are included. - **Day 1:** homestay at Jiskun (2,099 m) - **Day 2:** homestay at Jakha (2,650 m) - **Days 3–5:** tents at Saruwas Thatch, Dhanderas Thatch and Upper Waterfall Camp - **Day 6:** tents at Ronti Gad meadow camp (4,000 m) - **Day 7:** overnight drive to Shimla, with no stay included ### Who leads the Rupin Pass trek, and are local guides included? The Rupin Pass trek is led by experienced trek leaders supported by local certified mountain guides and support staff, combining safety with local knowledge. All technical equipment needed on the route is included. - **Technical gear:** ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - **Safety:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp ### Is the Rupin Pass trek safe, and what safety support is there? Yes, the Rupin Pass trek is safe with Trekkaro’s trained trek leaders, local guides and support staff, and medical kits and oxygen cylinders are always available. Trekkers must follow instructions and stay aware of altitude-related risks. - **Snow sections:** free microspikes and gaiters, with ropes fixed by the team - **Evacuation:** stretchers are kept at each campsite - **Insurance:** mandatory, covering high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### What food is served on the Rupin Pass trek? All meals on the Rupin Pass trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 6 dinner: simple, freshly prepared vegetarian food. Tea, coffee, soups and snacks are served regularly. - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so bring a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals in transit and dinner on Day 7 - **Snacks:** carry energy bars, dry fruits and chocolate for the trail and the overnight drive ### How do I get drinking water on the Rupin Pass trek? On the lower Rupin Pass trail there are fresh streams to refill a bottle, but there is no water after Upper Waterfall Camp, so carry enough for the whole of pass day. Take two 1-litre bottles, one of them insulated for the snow sections. Add ORS or electrolyte sachets to stay hydrated at altitude. ### Do I need my own trekking gear for the Rupin Pass trek? Yes. On the Rupin Pass trek you bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, with no deposit and no charge. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Rupin Pass trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Rupin Pass trek costs ₹3,800 + 5% GST for the full trek. Book it in advance, as last-minute requests made at Jiskun may cost more. - **Weight limit:** 9 kg - **Bag type:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack for water, snacks and layers ### Is there a doctor or medical support on the Rupin Pass trek? Medical support on the Rupin Pass trek is available at every camp, with a first-aid kit and oxygen cylinders, and stretchers are kept at each campsite for emergency evacuation. Trained trek leaders and local guides manage safety on the trail. - **Medical certificate:** signed by a registered doctor, required before the trek - **Insurance:** mandatory and not included - **Your kit:** carry your regular and prescribed medicines plus basic first aid ### What documents do I need for the Rupin Pass trek? For the Rupin Pass trek you need an original government photo ID with a photocopy, a medical certificate signed by a registered doctor and a copy of your travel insurance policy. - **ID:** passport, Aadhaar, driving licence or voter ID - **Insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Do I need a permit for the Rupin Pass trek? Yes, the Rupin Pass trek needs permits, and all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the trek fee. Carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy. Keep your documents dry in a ziploc or plastic bag, as the trail has many stream crossings. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Rupin Pass trek? On the Rupin Pass trek, Rohru is the last dependable ATM, and Jiskun is the last place with even a weak mobile signal; beyond Jiskun there is no reliable network for the rest of the trek. - **Signal at Jiskun:** BSNL and Vodafone work only sporadically - **Cash:** withdraw enough at Rohru for the ₹3,500 transport fare, offloading if needed and small expenses - **Supplies:** Jakha is the last chance for basic supplies ### What is the Rupin Waterfall on the Rupin Pass trek? The Rupin Waterfall drops nearly 1,500 ft in tiers and is the main sight of the Rupin Pass trek. You get the first close view on Day 4 at Dhanderas Thatch (Lower Waterfall camp), and on Day 5 you climb beside it to Upper Waterfall Camp at 4,100 m. The climb beside the falls crosses glacial streams, boulders and seasonal snow bridges, so trekking poles are strongly recommended. ### What is pass day like on the Rupin Pass trek? Pass day on the Rupin Pass trek (Day 6) starts before dawn and covers about 10 km in 9–10 hours, the longest and hardest day of the trek. You climb about 550 m over the Rata Pheri snowfields and up the steep Rupin Gully to the pass at 4,679 m, then descend to Ronti Gad (4,000 m). - **Views:** the Kinner Kailash range and Charang Ghati from the pass - **Snow gear:** free microspikes and gaiters, with ropes fixed by the team - **Water:** none after Upper Waterfall Camp, so carry enough for the day ### When does the Rupin Pass trek end and when should I book my return? The Rupin Pass trek ends at Sangla on Day 7 after a 12 km, 6–7 hour descent, and the cab to Shimla leaves at about 3:00 PM, arriving around 2:00 AM. Book onward travel from Shimla for later the next day. - **Not included:** dinner and stay on the night of Day 7 - **Carry:** light snacks, water and a neck pillow for the overnight drive ### What should I pack for the Rupin Pass trek? For the Rupin Pass trek, pack a 50–60 L backpack with your own trekking shoes, poles and a warm padded or down jacket, plus 4 warm layers in all; microspikes and gaiters are provided free. - **Clothing:** thermals, 2 fleece or woollen layers, 2 quick-dry trek pants, 3 quick-dry T-shirts and a rain jacket - **Cold gear:** woollen cap, balaclava or buff, fleece gloves and waterproof gloves - **Accessories:** UV sunglasses, SPF 50+ sunscreen and lip balm for the snowfields - **Essentials:** headlamp, two 1 L bottles, lunch box, power bank, neck pillow and cash ### What is the minimum age for the Rupin Pass trek? The minimum age for the Rupin Pass trek is 14 years, because pass day alone is 9–10 hours and climbs to 4,679 m. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. At least one earlier high-altitude trek is recommended. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 8 May 2027 to 14 May 2027 - 15 May 2027 to 21 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 28 May 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 4 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 11 Jun 2027 - 12 Jun 2027 to 18 Jun 2027 - 19 Jun 2027 to 25 Jun 2027 - 26 Jun 2027 to 2 Jul 2027 - 18 Sep 2027 to 24 Sep 2027 - 25 Sep 2027 to 1 Oct 2027 --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/rupin-pass-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Sar Pass Trek > Sar Pass Trek is a 5-day easy–moderate trek in Kullu, Himachal Pradesh, reaching 4,200 m (13,800 ft). It covers about 49 km on foot and starts at Kasol and ends at Barshaini. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹10,150 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 23 Oct 2026 (13 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/sar-pass-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 5 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 4,200 m / 13,800 ft - **Trekking distance:** 49 km - **Region:** Kullu, Himachal Pradesh - **Start / end:** Kasol / Barshaini - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Summer (May-Jun): Day 5°C to 20°C, Night -5°C to 5°C | Autumn (Sep-Oct): Day 5°C to 15°C, Night -8°C to 2°C - **Price:** ₹10,150 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 23 Oct 2026 (13 upcoming) ## Overview Five days, one high snow pass and a slide down the other side that grown adults still talk about years later. The Sar Pass trek climbs out of Kasol through pine and rhododendron forest, past a village of old wooden houses, onto open ridges above the tree line and finally across a snowfield at 4,200 m (13,800 ft). Then, instead of walking down, you sit in the snow and let the mountain carry you. The Sar Pass trek lies in the Parvati valley of Kullu district, Himachal Pradesh, in the side valley of the Grahan nala above Kasol. It starts on foot from Kasol at 1,700 m (5,577 ft), spends its first night at Grahan village at 2,350 m (7,710 ft) and then climbs to two high camps, Min Thach at 3,400 m (11,155 ft) and Nagaru at 3,800 m (12,467 ft). From Nagaru you cross the pass at 4,200 m (13,800 ft) and descend to the meadow of Biskeri Thach at 3,350 m (10,991 ft), before the last walk down to the road head at Barshaini at 2,400 m (7,874 ft). It is a 5-day trek of about 49 km, and it is a crossing rather than an out-and-back: you never walk the same stretch of trail twice. In the local dialect ‘sar’ means lake, and the pass takes its name from a small lake near the top that stays frozen through the early summer. For many trekkers in north India, Sar Pass is the first real Himalayan pass of their lives, and the trek is built for exactly that. ### Snowfields and the Great Slide – What Makes the Sar Pass Trek Unmissable The pass day is the reason people come. You leave Nagaru before dawn with a headlamp on, the snow still hard and crunching under your microspikes. The ridge camp falls away below, the sky turns from black to grey to pale blue, and the line of trekkers ahead of you winds slowly up across the white slopes. Near the top the frozen lake appears, a flat sheet of ice in a bowl of snow, and a little further on you are standing on the pass itself, with the Parvati valley on one side and new country on the other. Then comes the descent. On the far side of Sar Pass, long snow slopes run down from the pass, and in May and June the trek team guides you through them on natural slides, one trekker at a time, seated in the snow with the trek leader and staff positioned below. It is a few minutes of pure laughter after a hard morning, and it takes you down height that would otherwise cost an hour of careful walking. By afternoon you are on soft grass at Biskeri Thach, the hardest day of the trek behind you. The rest of the trek is the slow build-up to that moment. Grahan is one of the most traditional villages in the Parvati valley, with wooden houses, stone paths and fields around it. Min Thach is a clearing at the edge of the forest with long views back over the valley you climbed out of. Nagaru is wild and open, a windy camp on a ridge with snow all around in early summer. Each day takes you into a higher, quieter world than the one before. ### The Trail Itself For a 49 km trek, Sar Pass packs in a lot of change. The first day follows the Grahan nala out of Kasol through pine forest, crossing small streams on the way up to Grahan. From Grahan the trail climbs steeply through dense rhododendron, oak and conifer forest, gaining about 1,050 m in a single day, before opening out at Min Thach. Above Min Thach the trees end, and the walk to Nagaru is short but steep on open slopes, on snow in early summer. The pass day crosses snowfields up to 4,200 m and comes down on snow and then meadow. The last day is a long, steady descent through forest towards Pulga and Barshaini, where the road and the Parvati river meet you again. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Sar Pass trek is graded easy to moderate, and we recommend it for fit beginners, solo trekkers and groups of colleagues who want their first snow pass. It sits at the harder end of that grade. The climb from Grahan to Min Thach is steep, and the hardest day is Day 4: a pre-dawn start, about 14 km and 6–8 hours on foot from Nagaru over the pass to Biskeri Thach, much of it on snow in May and June. We recommend six to eight weeks of preparation, with regular running or cycling and stair climbing with a loaded backpack. Children aged 10 and above who walk regularly can join with a parent or guardian. Above 60: a doctor’s fitness certificate is needed, and an ECG or TMT report is recommended. Season: May to June and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Sar Pass Trek - **A real snow pass** – Sar Pass at 4,200 m (13,800 ft), crossed on foot over snowfields in early summer - **The snow slide** – long natural slides down the far side of the pass in May and June, guided by the trek team - **The frozen lake** – the small lake near the top that gives Sar Pass its name - **Grahan village** – old wooden houses and stone paths in a quiet side valley of the Parvati - **Forest to alpine in five days** – pine, rhododendron and oak forest, open ridges and snowfields - **The Nagaru ridge camp** – the highest and wildest campsite, with wide views over the Parvati valley - **Biskeri Thach** – a soft, open meadow camp after the pass, the reward at the end of the long day - **A true crossing** – from Kasol to Barshaini without retracing a single step ### Best Time to Do the Sar Pass Trek The Sar Pass trek runs in two windows: May to June, before the monsoon, and September to October, after it. The pass is the same, but the two seasons give it a very different character, mainly because of the snow. July and August bring monsoon rain and slippery trails, and from November to April deep snow closes the route. #### May to June – Summer (The Snow Season) This is Sar Pass as most people picture it. Snow lies on the upper trail from Nagaru to the pass, the lake near the top is frozen, and the long slides down the far side are at their best. The forest below is green and the rhododendrons bloom in the lower forest early in the season. Days are pleasant, from 5°C at the high camps to 20°C lower down, while nights range from 5°C at Grahan to -5°C at Nagaru, where the wind makes it feel colder. Microspikes and gaiters are part of the kit on the pass day. #### September to October – Autumn (After the Monsoon) After the monsoon the air clears, the views are at their sharpest and the trail is quieter. There is little or no snow on the pass, so there is no snow slide; the descent from the pass is on grass, rock and loose ground instead, and needs careful steps. In return you get golden meadows, crisp mornings and stable weather. It is colder than summer: days range from 5°C to 15°C, and nights drop from 2°C at Grahan to -8°C at Nagaru, especially in late October. A fresh early snowfall on the pass is possible towards the end of the season. ### Sar Pass Trek Cost and Booking in 2026 The Sar Pass trek costs ₹10,150 + 5% GST per person, for 5 days from Kasol to Barshaini, with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes. Meals, stays, permits and a certified trek leader are included; transport from Kasol is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Book online on this page by choosing a batch date. Booking closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek, and you can reschedule once, free of charge, up to 8 days before departure. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Kasol to Grahan Village **Route Details:** **Trek: Kasol → Grahan | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude: 1,700 m → 2,350 m** We meet at Kasol bus stand at 10:00 AM, where your trek leader checks your documents, your Free Trekking Gear and your health readings before the group sets off. The trek begins right from Kasol, so there is no drive on the first day. The trail leaves the village and turns into the side valley of the Grahan nala, leaving the busy Parvati valley road behind within the first half-hour. The path follows the stream upwards through pine forest, with the sound of water close by most of the way. You cross a few small streams on wooden bridges or stepping stones, and the gradient stays gentle to moderate for the first few hours. This is a good day to find your rhythm, drink water steadily and get used to walking with your backpack. Keep a light layer handy, as the forest stays shaded and cool even on a sunny morning, and eat a little at each break to keep your energy steady. The last section climbs more steeply, and then the first wooden houses of Grahan appear above the fields. Grahan is an old village of timber and stone houses, with narrow paths running between them and a small temple at its heart. Please dress modestly in the village and ask before taking photographs of people or houses. The camp is set up close to the village, and once your tent is ready you can rest your legs, change into dry clothes and drink something warm. Evening is relaxed: tea and snacks, a short walk around the village, and a briefing from the trek leader on the days ahead. Dinner is early, and the first night at 2,350 m (7,710 ft) is mild compared with what comes later. Fill your bottles at camp before you sleep, keep your headlamp in an easy pocket and lay out tomorrow’s layers, as the climb to Min Thach starts soon after breakfast. What to Expect: - Meet at Kasol bus stand at 10:00 AM - Gentle to moderate climb along the Grahan nala - Pine forest and small stream crossings - Packed lunch on the trail - Old wooden houses of Grahan village - Overnight: camping at Grahan village ### Day 2: Grahan to Min Thach **Route Details:** **Trek: Grahan → Min Thach | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude: 2,350 m → 3,400 m** Today is short in distance but steep in height: you gain about 1,050 m in 7 km. After breakfast the trail leaves Grahan and climbs straight into the forest, and there are few flat stretches until you reach the camp. Walk slowly, take short steps and stop for water every half-hour or so. The trek leader sets a pace the whole group can hold, and there is plenty of time in the day, so there is no reason to rush any section of the climb. The forest is dense and beautiful, with rhododendron, oak and tall conifers closing in around the path. In early summer the rhododendrons may still be in flower on the lower slopes. Now and then the trees open for a moment and you see how far Grahan has dropped below you. Birdsong fills the quieter stretches, and the air turns noticeably cooler as you climb past the 3,000 m mark towards the edge of the trees. Water sources on this stretch are limited, so fill both bottles at Grahan before you leave. The trek leader will keep the group together and stop at a few points so you can catch your breath. Packed lunch is eaten on the way, in a clearing in the forest. If you feel a mild headache or tiredness, tell the trek leader early; resting, eating and drinking well on this day sets you up for the higher camps. Min Thach is an open clearing at the edge of the forest, with long views back over the Parvati valley and the ridges around it. As the sun drops, the temperature falls quickly, so put on your warm layers as soon as you reach camp. After dinner, the trek leader runs the daily SpO2 and pulse checks. It is a good moment to share how you feel, and a good night to sleep in your thermal layers, as Min Thach is the first properly cold camp of the trek. What to Expect: - Steep, steady climb of about 1,050 m - Rhododendron, oak and conifer forest - Limited water: fill both bottles at Grahan - Views back over the Parvati valley from camp - Daily SpO2 and pulse checks in the evening - Overnight: camping at Min Thach ### Day 3: Min Thach to Nagaru **Route Details:** **Trek: Min Thach → Nagaru | Distance: 8 km | Duration: 4–6 hrs | Altitude: 3,400 m → 3,800 m** Above Min Thach the forest ends and the trek changes character. The trail climbs on open slopes above the tree line, and in May and June much of it is on snow. The height gain is smaller than yesterday, but the air is thinner and the slopes are steep, so the pace stays slow and steady. Looking back, Min Thach and the forest you climbed through yesterday shrink quickly below you as the views open up. On snow, the trek team cuts steps where needed and you walk in microspikes and gaiters from your Free Trekking Gear. Keep your sunglasses on all day: the glare off fresh snow is strong even when the sky is hazy. In autumn the same stretch is on grass and rock, with frost in the early morning. Take regular short breaks, sip water even when you do not feel thirsty, and keep your sun cap or buff on, as the sun at this height is strong. Nagaru sits on an exposed ridge at 3,800 m (12,467 ft), with wide views over the Parvati valley and the ranges around it. It is the highest and coldest camp of the trek, and the wind can pick up sharply in the afternoon. Arriving early gives you time to rest, drink plenty of water and let your body adjust to the altitude. The evening is short and cold. After an early dinner, the trek leader briefs the group on the pass day: wake-up time, layers, microspikes, water and the order of walking. Pack your day bag before you sleep, keep your headlamp within reach and get into your sleeping bag early. Sleep in your thermals and woollen socks, and keep your water bottle inside the sleeping bag so it does not freeze before the morning start. What to Expect: - Above the tree line on open slopes - Snow on the trail in May and June - Exposed, windy ridge camp at 3,800 m - Coldest night of the trek - Pass-day briefing and early night - Overnight: camping at Nagaru ### Day 4: Nagaru to Sar Pass and Biskeri Thach **Route Details:** **Trek: Nagaru → Sar Pass → Biskeri Thach | Distance: 14 km | Duration: 6–8 hrs | Altitude: 3,800 m → 4,200 m → 3,350 m** This is the big day. The wake-up call comes around 3:30 AM, and after a hot drink and a light breakfast the group leaves Nagaru by 4 to 5 AM with headlamps on. The early start matters: the snow is firm in the morning and grows soft and slippery by afternoon, and the weather on the pass is more stable before noon. The climb crosses long snowfields, gaining about 400 m to the pass. The trek team leads the way, fixing ropes and cutting steps where the slope needs it. As the light comes up, the small frozen lake near the top appears, the lake that gives Sar Pass its name. A little later you reach the pass at 4,200 m (13,800 ft) and take time for photographs and a rest. On the far side, in May and June, comes the famous part: long natural snow slides down the slopes below the pass. The trek team checks each slope first, positions staff below and sends trekkers down one at a time. In autumn there is little or no snow, and the descent is a careful walk on grass, rock and loose ground instead. Below the snow, the trail eases onto meadow and leads to Biskeri Thach, a wide open camp at 3,350 m (10,991 ft). After the cold of Nagaru, the lower camp feels mild. The evening is one of the happiest of the trek: warm soup, dry socks and a group that has just crossed a Himalayan pass together. The trek leader runs the daily SpO2 and pulse checks after dinner, and the camp goes quiet early after the longest day of the trek. What to Expect: - Wake-up around 3:30 AM, start by 4 to 5 AM - Long climb over snowfields to 4,200 m - Frozen lake near the top of the pass - Snow slides on the descent in May and June - Longest day of the trek: 14 km, 6–8 hrs - Overnight: camping at Biskeri Thach ### Day 5: Biskeri Thach to Barshaini **Route Details:** **Trek: Biskeri Thach → Barshaini | Distance: 10 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Altitude: 3,350 m → 2,400 m** The last day is all downhill. After breakfast at Biskeri Thach the trail drops off the meadow and into the forest, passing the open grazing ground of Bhandak Thach on the way. The descent is long and steady, and trekking poles make a real difference to your knees today. Take smaller steps on the steeper sections, keep your weight slightly forward and let the poles take some of the load on loose ground. The forest is cool and shaded, and water is easier to find than on the climb. As you lose height, the first signs of village life return: cattle trails, fields and the sound of the Parvati river far below. Mobile signal comes back on this side of the pass, so a rest stop is a good chance to send the first messages home since Kasol. The walk passes quickly, with the group in high spirits after the crossing. The trail comes down near Pulga and ends at the road head at Barshaini at 2,400 m (7,874 ft), where the trek finishes after lunch. From Barshaini the group drives down the Parvati valley to Kasol, about 18 km and 1–1.5 hrs. This cab is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Expect to reach Kasol in the late afternoon or early evening, depending on the road. If you are travelling on to Delhi or Chandigarh, an overnight bus from Bhuntar or Kasol on the same evening is possible, but we recommend booking your onward journey for the next day. Kasol has plenty of guesthouses and cafes, and a night there lets you rest, return your Free Trekking Gear without hurry and travel home fresh. What to Expect: - Long, steady descent through forest - Past Bhandak Thach meadow - Mobile signal returns on this side of the pass - Trek ends at Barshaini road head after lunch - Shared cab to Kasol, about 18 km (not included) - Overnight: no stay (trek ends) ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 to Day 4: camping in 3-person tents at Grahan, Min Thach, Nagaru and Biskeri Thach - Sleeping bags and mats provided at each camp #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 5 lunch - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and entry charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the nights at camp - Dining tent and toilet tent at the campsite - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide throughout the 5-day trek - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Bhuntar to Kasol, and Barshaini back to Kasol or Bhuntar - Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. - Travel to and from Kasol, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive from Barshaini to Kasol #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,400 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Bhuntar Airport (Kullu–Manali, KUU), about 31 km from Kasol, with limited flights from Delhi that can be cancelled in bad weather. Chandigarh Airport (IXC) has many more flights and is about 8–9 hrs from Kasol by road. Fly in the day before the trek and stay in Kasol. **From Bhuntar to Kasol:** 31 km, about 1.5 hrs by local bus or taxi up the Parvati valley. The meeting point is Kasol bus stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1, and the trek starts on foot from there. **Return:** The trek ends at Barshaini after lunch on Day 5. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers, to Kasol (about 18 km, 1–1.5 hrs) or on to Bhuntar; your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. Book your flight home for the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Chandigarh (CDG) is the most practical major station, with fast trains from Delhi; Kasol is about 8–9 hrs from Chandigarh by road. - **Shatabdi and Vande Bharat trains** – Delhi to Chandigarh in about 3–4 hrs. - **Onward by bus** – HRTC and private buses run from Chandigarh ISBT (Sector 43) towards Manali; get off at Bhuntar. Overnight buses to Bhuntar and Kasol are the easiest way to arrive in the morning. Check current timings before you book. **From Bhuntar to Kasol:** 31 km, about 1.5 hrs by local bus or taxi. Be at Kasol bus stand by 10:00 AM on Day 1; we recommend reaching Kasol the day before. **Return:** From Barshaini on Day 5, a shared cab (not included; paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers) takes about 1–1.5 hrs to Kasol. Plan your train home from Chandigarh for the next day. ### By road **By bus:** Overnight Volvo and ordinary buses run from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate towards Manali; get off at Bhuntar, about 520 km and 12–13 hrs away. Some private buses run direct to Kasol. Prefer HRTC (government) buses, and arrive in Kasol the day before, or by early morning on Day 1 at the latest. **From Bhuntar to Kasol:** 31 km, about 1.5 hrs by local bus or taxi. The meeting point is Kasol bus stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1. **Return:** The trek ends at Barshaini after lunch on Day 5. A shared cab to Kasol takes about 1–1.5 hrs (not included in the trek fee; your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare), and overnight buses leave from Bhuntar and Kasol for Delhi in the evening. We recommend booking your bus for the next day in case the descent or the road runs late. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Last ATM: Kasol, with more in Bhuntar and Manikaran - There is no ATM at Grahan, on the trail or at Barshaini - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Jio, Airtel and BSNL work well in Kasol - Weak, unreliable signal at Grahan; little or none at Min Thach and only in a few spots at Nagaru - Signal returns at Biskeri Thach and on the descent to Barshaini - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Sar Pass trek, and where does it start? The Sar Pass trek is in the Parvati valley of Kullu district, Himachal Pradesh, and it starts on foot from Kasol. The route climbs the side valley of the Grahan nala to Grahan village, then to the high camps of Min Thach and Nagaru, crosses Sar Pass at 4,200 m (13,800 ft) and comes down via Biskeri Thach to the road head at Barshaini. We meet at Kasol bus stand at 10:00 AM on Day 1. From Barshaini, a shared cab takes you back to Kasol, about 18 km. ### How many days does the Sar Pass trek take from Kasol? The Sar Pass trek takes 5 days from Kasol, covering about 49 km on foot. - Day 1: Kasol to Grahan, 10 km - Day 2: Grahan to Min Thach, 7 km - Day 3: Min Thach to Nagaru, 8 km - Day 4: Nagaru to Sar Pass and Biskeri Thach, 14 km - Day 5: Biskeri Thach to Barshaini, 10 km, and drive to Kasol Plan to reach Kasol the day before the trek, and book your onward travel for the day after Day 5. ### What is the maximum altitude reached on the Sar Pass trek? The maximum altitude on the Sar Pass trek is 4,200 m (13,800 ft), at the top of the pass on Day 4. The trek starts at Kasol at 1,700 m (5,577 ft), and the highest camp is Nagaru at 3,800 m (12,467 ft). The itinerary gains height gradually over three days before the pass, with nights at 2,350 m, 3,400 m and 3,800 m, so your body has time to adjust. After the pass you sleep lower, at Biskeri Thach at 3,350 m (10,991 ft). ### What is the difficulty level of the Sar Pass trek? The Sar Pass trek is graded easy to moderate, at the harder end of that grade. The climb from Grahan to Min Thach gains about 1,050 m in 7 km, and the pass day is long: a pre-dawn start and about 14 km in 6–8 hours, much of it on snow in May and June. There is no technical climbing, and the trek team fixes ropes and cuts steps on steep snow. Six to eight weeks of regular running, cycling or stair climbing with a loaded backpack will prepare you well. ### When is the best time to do the Sar Pass trek? The best time for the Sar Pass trek is May to June for snow, and September to October for clear autumn views. In May and June the upper trail and the pass are under snow, the lake near the top is frozen and the snow slides on the descent are at their best. In September and October there is little or no snow, the skies are clear and the trail is quieter, but the nights are colder. The trek does not run in the July–August monsoon or from November to April, when deep snow closes the route. ### Will there be snow on the Sar Pass trek in May and June? Yes, in May and June the Sar Pass trek has snow on the upper trail from above Min Thach to the pass and down the far side. This is the season for the frozen lake near the top and the long snow slides on the descent towards Biskeri Thach. Microspikes and gaiters come with Free Trekking Gear. In September and October there is little or no snow on the pass, so there is no slide, though an early snowfall is possible towards the end of October. ### How cold does it get on the Sar Pass trek at night? On the Sar Pass trek, nights range from 5°C to -5°C in May–June and from 2°C to -8°C in September–October. Grahan is the mildest camp and Nagaru, on its windy ridge at 3,800 m, is the coldest. Days are pleasant: 5°C to 20°C in May–June and 5°C to 15°C in September–October. Pack four warm layers for summer and five for autumn, including the -10°C jacket that comes with Free Trekking Gear, plus a woollen cap, gloves and woollen socks for the night. ### What is the minimum age for the Sar Pass trek? The minimum age for the Sar Pass trek is 10 years, for children who already walk regularly and can manage a long, cold day on snow. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that all trekkers bring, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach Kasol for the Sar Pass trek, and is transport included? For the Sar Pass trek, reach Kasol bus stand by 10:00 AM on Day 1; we recommend arriving the day before. Overnight buses run from Delhi to Bhuntar (about 520 km), and Kasol is 31 km from Bhuntar, about 1.5 hrs by local bus or cab. The nearest airport is Bhuntar (Kullu), and the nearest major railway station is Chandigarh. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. This covers the drive from Barshaini back to Kasol on Day 5; your trek coordinator will confirm the cab fare. ### What does the Sar Pass trek cost in 2026, and what is included? The Sar Pass trek costs ₹10,150 + 5% GST per person, for 5 days from Kasol to Barshaini. The trek fee includes: - Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes (₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - Camping for 4 nights in 3-person tents, with sleeping bags and mats - All vegetarian meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 5 lunch - Forest permits and camping fees - A certified trek leader, local guide, cook and support staff Transport, backpack offloading and single tents are extra; the full list is under Terms & Conditions. ### How do I book the Sar Pass trek online with Trekkaro, and when does booking close? You can book the Sar Pass trek online on this page: choose a batch date, add the trekkers and any add-ons, and pay securely. Booking for a batch closes at 5 PM on the day before the trek starts. - **Price:** ₹10,150 + 5% GST per person, with EMI options shown in the price box - **Pickup:** Kasol bus stand at 10:00 AM - **Free Trekking Gear:** shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes, with a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge - **Change of plans:** one free reschedule to another batch, a booking transfer or a 100% TrekCash voucher (valid 1 year), up to 8 days before departure After booking you get a confirmation with the batch details, the medical certificate format and the packing list. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Sar Pass trek? The last ATM on the Sar Pass trek is in Kasol, and mobile signal is patchy above Grahan. Kasol has good Jio, Airtel and BSNL coverage and several ATMs. At Grahan the signal is weak and unreliable, and at Min Thach expect little or none. Nagaru has erratic signal in a few spots only. Signal returns at Biskeri Thach and on the way down to Barshaini. Carry enough cash in small notes from Kasol, and make your important calls before you leave Kasol on Day 1. ### Do I need permits for the Sar Pass trek in Himachal? Yes, the Sar Pass trek needs forest and local permissions, and we arrange them for the group; the fees are included in the trek price. You only need to carry an original government photo ID (Aadhaar, passport, driving licence or voter ID) and a photocopy, along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor. Please share your ID details when you book so the permissions can be processed before the batch date. Foreign nationals should carry their passport and visa. ### How safe is the Sar Pass trek, and how is AMS handled? The Sar Pass trek is safe when the itinerary, the team and the trekker are well prepared, and we plan every step around altitude. The route gains height over three days before the pass, and the trek leader checks your SpO2 and pulse every day to catch early signs of Acute Mountain Sickness (AMS). Trek leaders are NIM (Nehru Institute of Mountaineering) certified or equivalent, and the team carries oxygen cylinders, a first-aid kit and stretchers. On snow, the team fixes ropes, cuts steps and supervises the slides one trekker at a time. Report any headache, nausea or breathlessness at once. ### Can a first-time trekker do the Sar Pass trek safely? Yes, a fit first-time trekker can do the Sar Pass trek, and it is one of the trails where many trekkers cross their first snow pass. You do not need any previous experience, but you do need good fitness: the climb to Min Thach is steep and the pass day is 14 km, 6–8 hours at altitude. We recommend six to eight weeks of training, building up to jogging 5 km in 35 minutes. Batches are capped at 20 trekkers, so the trek leader can give first-timers the attention they need on the snow. ### What should I carry for the Sar Pass trek, and is gear provided? For the Sar Pass trek, the main gear comes with Free Trekking Gear: Decathlon trekking shoes, a -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes, for a ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing. You bring: - A 50–60 L backpack with rain cover, and a small day pack - Thermal inners, two fleece or woollen layers and a rain jacket - Woollen cap, balaclava, woollen and waterproof gloves - UV sunglasses, sunscreen SPF 50+ and lip balm for the snow - Headlamp, two 1 L water bottles and a lunch box ### Where will I stay and what food is served on the Sar Pass trek? On the Sar Pass trek you stay in 3-person tents for 4 nights, at Grahan, Min Thach, Nagaru and Biskeri Thach, with sleeping bags and mats provided. Each campsite has a dining tent and a toilet tent. Food is simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals from Day 1 lunch to Day 5 lunch: breakfast, packed or hot lunch, evening tea with snacks and dinner, with soup and hot drinks to keep you warm at the high camps. Single tents are available at extra cost. ## Upcoming batches - 23 Oct 2026 to 27 Oct 2026 - 7 May 2027 to 11 May 2027 - 14 May 2027 to 18 May 2027 - 21 May 2027 to 25 May 2027 - 28 May 2027 to 1 Jun 2027 - 4 Jun 2027 to 8 Jun 2027 - 11 Jun 2027 to 15 Jun 2027 - 18 Jun 2027 to 22 Jun 2027 - 25 Jun 2027 to 29 Jun 2027 - 3 Sep 2027 to 7 Sep 2027 - 10 Sep 2027 to 14 Sep 2027 - 17 Sep 2027 to 21 Sep 2027 - … 1 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/sar-pass-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Surya Top Trek > Surya Top Trek is a 7-day moderate trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 3,932 m (12,900 ft). It covers about 31 km on foot and starts and ends at Raithal. Best time: March to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹9,960 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (28 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/surya-top-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 7 days - **Difficulty:** Moderate - **Highest point:** 3,932 m / 12,900 ft - **Trekking distance:** 31 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Raithal - **Best time:** March to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Spring (Mar-Apr): Day 13°C to 17°C, Night around 0°C | Summer (May-Jun): Day 15°C to 20°C, Night around 2°C | Autumn (Sep-Oct): Day 12°C to 15°C, Night around 0°C - **Price:** ₹9,960 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (28 upcoming) ## Overview Two mountain ranges, and a single ridge between them. On one side stands the Gangotri range, on the other the Yamunotri range, and the line you walk along begins at the summit of Surya Top, 3,932 m (12,900 ft), where Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag rise so close that they almost fill the sky. Two days of steady climbing lead to that morning, first through oak and rhododendron forest, then out onto the wide Siyari meadows. What comes after the summit is, for us, the best part of all. The Surya Top trek is a summit-and-ridge route that climbs above the Siyari and Dayara meadows in the Garhwal Himalayas. From Barsu it rises through village fields and forest to a camp at Pichkiya, leaves the treeline for the open grasslands of Siyari, where Bandarpoonch comes fully into view for the first time, and then climbs steeply to Surya Top. From the summit, Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag (Black Peak) stand at close range, with the Gangotri group, Jaonli and Srikanth on the horizon. A long ridge walk leads on to Devkund, a campsite right beneath Bandarpoonch, before the trail eases down across the meadows to Chilapada and through forests of oak, maple and rhododendron to Raithal. Surya Top lies in the Uttarkashi district of Uttarakhand, in the Bhagirathi valley. The base is Raithal (2,256 m / 7,400 ft), a Garhwali village known for its old wooden houses with carved doors and windows; the trek starts at Barsu, a short drive away, and ends on foot back at Raithal. The route climbs through camps at Pichkiya (2,941 m) and Siyari (3,500 m), crosses the summit at 3,932 m (12,900 ft), and makes its last two camps at Devkund (3,560 m) and Chilapada (3,200 m). Trekkaro runs it as a seven-day trek from Dehradun, with five days and about 31 km on foot, graded moderate. It is known above all for the ridge between the Gangotri and Yamunotri ranges that follows the summit. In our experience, it is one of the finest ways to reach the Siyari and Dayara meadows and then keep climbing beyond them. ### The Ridge Between Two Ranges – What Makes the Surya Top Trek Unmissable What sets Surya Top apart is what happens after the top. Once you have taken in the summit view, the trail does not turn back the way it came. It follows a ridge for about 4.5 km, with the Gangotri range on one side and the Yamunotri range on the other, before descending to Devkund at about 3,560 m, right beneath Bandarpoonch. It is, in our view, one of the most beautiful ridge walks in Garhwal, and it turns a single summit moment into hours of walking among the high peaks. Summit day begins at Siyari before dawn. You climb steeply for about 2.5 km, slowly, breathing steadily and taking short breaks; in spring there may be snow near the top, and microspikes and gaiters make it easier. Then the slope runs out. You stand at 3,932 m with Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag directly before you and the Gangotri group, Jaonli and Srikanth further away. You take your time here; it is the high point of the trek. Then you turn along the ridge. One range keeps you company on the left, the other on the right, and for the next few hours both stay in view with every step. By the time the trail drops towards Devkund, Bandarpoonch is no longer a peak on the horizon. It is the mountain your tent stands beneath. It is a long day – about 9.5 km and 9–10 hours, the longest and hardest of the trek – and there is no water on the ridge, so you carry at least two litres, plenty of snacks and a warm layer. We find that the length of the day is exactly what makes it memorable: you arrive at Devkund having crossed the mountain, not simply climbed it. ### The Meadows Themselves From Barsu, the trail climbs through village fields into a forest of oak and rhododendron, with occasional clearings that look back over the valley. In spring the rhododendrons bloom red and pink along the path; in autumn the forest turns gold. The colourful Himalayan monal is sometimes seen in the clearings early or late in the day. Camp at Pichkiya sits at the edge of the forest, quiet in the evening. The next morning the trees thin and then stop, and the slope ahead becomes open grassland: Siyari, part of the same high meadows as Dayara Bugyal, with Bandarpoonch in full view ahead. In late spring and summer the grass is green and dotted with alpine flowers, with blue poppies in some years by June; in autumn it turns gold and russet. Shepherds bring their flocks up here in summer, and the Siyari camp, in our view, has one of the best sunsets of the trek. After the summit, the land softens. From Devkund, a short, gentle downhill crosses the high meadows to Chilapada, a quiet camp at their edge with wide views back to the grasslands and the ridge, and an evening sunset over the Gangotri range. The last day on foot descends through dense forest of oak, maple and rhododendron, past grassy clearings and, in spring and early summer, many small streams. In autumn the maple leaves turn bright red and yellow. Langurs and birds move through the trees, and the sounds of Raithal drift up long before you see its carved wooden houses again. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Surya Top trek is graded moderate. We recommend it for fit beginners who are willing to train properly, and it is a natural next step for trekkers with one easy trek behind them. Trekking days run from 4 to 9.5 km, and most take 4–6 hours: the two days up to Pichkiya and Siyari are each a little over 5 km in 5–6 hours, the day after the summit is an easy 4 km, and the final 7 km descent to Raithal is steep in places. The hard day is the summit: a pre-dawn start, a steep 2.5 km climb to 3,932 m, about 4.5 km along the ridge and the descent to Devkund – 9.5 km and 9–10 hours in all, with no water on the ridge and possible snow on top until mid-April. You should be able to walk 6–7 hours on uneven ground, and up to 10 hours on summit day; as a benchmark, aim to jog 5 km in about 35 minutes, and allow 4–6 weeks of preparation. Fit children aged 10 and above can join with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and we recommend an ECG or TMT report. Season: mid-March to June and mid-September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Surya Top Trek - **Surya Top at 3,932 m (12,900 ft)** – Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag (Black Peak) at close range from the summit - **A ridge walk of about 4.5 km** – between the Gangotri and Yamunotri ranges, in our view one of the finest in Garhwal - **Two days on the Siyari and Dayara meadows** – wide high grasslands, green with alpine flowers in summer and gold in autumn - **The first full view of Bandarpoonch** – as the trail leaves the treeline for the Siyari meadows - **Devkund campsite at 3,560 m** – a camp right beneath Bandarpoonch - **The Gangotri group, Jaonli and Srikanth** – on the horizon from the summit, with sunset over the Gangotri range from Chilapada - **Oak, rhododendron and maple forest** – red and pink rhododendrons in spring, red and yellow maples in autumn - **Raithal village** – a Garhwali village of old wooden houses with carved doors and windows ### Best Time to Do the Surya Top Trek The Surya Top trek runs in two windows: mid-March to June, and mid-September to October. Within them the trek changes character more than once – from snow on the summit in early spring, to green meadows and alpine flowers in early summer, to golden grass and the clearest views in autumn. #### Mid-March to Mid-April – Early Spring (Snow on the Summit) In the first weeks of the season, the upper meadows and the summit are still under snow. Lower down, the rhododendrons bloom red and pink along the climb from Barsu, and then the trail rises out of the flowering forest into a white landscape above the treeline. The steep climb to the top is made on snow, with microspikes and gaiters. For trekkers who want a snow summit with mild days, this is a rewarding window. - **Temperatures:** Day: 13°C to 17°C | Night: around 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow on the upper meadows and the summit; microspikes and gaiters used near the top. - **Best for:** A snow summit, rhododendron forest and white meadows. #### End of April to June – Late Spring and Summer (Green Meadows and Alpine Flowers) As the snow melts, the slopes of Siyari and Dayara turn green, and by June they are covered in alpine flowers, with blue poppies in some years. Shepherds bring their flocks up to the high grasslands, the trail is snow-free, and the forest on the way down is cool and shady, crossed by small streams. In our view, these are the mildest conditions for a first attempt at the long summit day. - **Temperatures:** Day: 15°C to 20°C | Night: around 2°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow-free, with green meadows and streams in the lower forest. - **Best for:** Alpine flowers, green meadows and the warmest days of the season. #### Mid-September to October – Autumn (Golden Meadows and the Clearest Views) Autumn brings clear skies and the sharpest mountain views of the season. The meadows turn gold and russet, the forest above Barsu turns gold, and the maples below Chilapada go red and yellow. From the summit and the ridge, Bandarpoonch, Kala Nag and the Gangotri group stand out in clean light. The nights are cold, around freezing at the high camps, and the trail is free of snow. - **Temperatures:** Day: 12°C to 15°C | Night: around 0°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow-free, with clear skies and cold nights at the high camps. - **Best for:** The clearest views from the summit and ridge, golden meadows and autumn forest colour. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the clearest views from the summit and along the ridge, book a mid-September to October batch; it is our first choice for Surya Top. For green meadows, alpine flowers and the warmest days, choose end April to June. For a snow summit with rhododendrons in bloom below, mid-March to mid-April is the window, and the climb to the top will ask more of you. Whichever you choose, prepare well for the summit day. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Dehradun to Raithal **Route Details:** **Drive: Dehradun → Raithal (~185 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 2,256 m (7,400 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay, Raithal** Day 1 is a long travel day, so you leave Dehradun early. The road climbs through Mussoorie, then drops to Chamba and continues to Uttarkashi along the Bhagirathi river. After Uttarkashi it follows the Bhagirathi valley up to Bhatwari, where a smaller road climbs to Raithal. Uttarkashi has the last well-stocked shops, so buy any personal items you have forgotten there. Raithal, at about 2,256 m, is a Garhwali village known for its old wooden houses with carved doors and windows. Walk around the village in the evening and you see daily life much as it has been for generations. You stay in a guesthouse or homestay. Your trek leader holds a briefing and checks documents. Bhatwari has a single ATM that does not work on many days, and Uttarkashi ATMs run out of cash, so we recommend withdrawing what you need in Dehradun. Airtel and Jio work at Raithal, but there is little or no network on the trail. What to Expect: - Drive via Mussoorie, Chamba and Uttarkashi along the Bhagirathi river - Last well-stocked shops at Uttarkashi - Old wooden houses with carved doors and windows in Raithal - Evening briefing and document check - Unreliable ATMs on the way; carry cash from Dehradun - Overnight: Raithal (2,256 m / 7,400 ft) ### Day 2: Raithal to Pichkiya via Barsu **Route Details:** **Drive: Raithal → Barsu (~20 km, ~1 hr) | Altitude: 2,256 m → 2,941 m (9,650 ft) | Distance: 5.3 km trek | Duration: 5–6 hrs trek | Terrain: village fields, then a steady climb through oak and rhododendron forest | Stay: Tents at Pichkiya** After breakfast you drive about 20 km to Barsu, a short ride of around an hour. Keep your eyes on the window. The Bhagirathi valley falls away below, and on clear days the first snow peaks appear to the north. From Barsu the trail climbs through village fields and then into a forest of oak and rhododendron. The climb is steady through the forest, with occasional clearings that look back over the valley. Today’s effort lies in the length of the climb rather than in any single hard section: 5.3 km and 5–6 hours on your first trekking day. Walk slowly and breathe evenly. If you feel breathless, slow down until you can talk in full sentences. In our experience, a steady pace now pays off on summit day. Lunch is packed and eaten on the trail. In spring the rhododendrons bloom red and pink along the trail; in autumn the forest turns gold. The forest above Barsu is home to many birds, including the colourful Himalayan monal, which is sometimes seen in the clearings in early morning or late afternoon. Walk quietly through the clearings and you have a better chance of seeing one. Camp tonight is at Pichkiya, at about 2,941 m, in a clearing at the edge of the forest. After tea and snacks there is time to rest. Use it to sort your tent and layers before dark. Evenings here are quiet, with the forest all around. The team boils or treats the water at every campsite, so refill your bottles at camp and ask your trek leader before you drink from a stream on the way. Carry at least two litres each day from here on. At Pichkiya your trek leader begins the daily oxygen and pulse checks, which continue every evening of the trek. What to Expect: - Short drive of about 20 km to Barsu, with the Bhagirathi valley below - Village fields above Barsu, then a steady climb through oak and rhododendron forest - Red and pink rhododendrons in spring, a gold forest in autumn - A chance of seeing the Himalayan monal in the forest clearings - Forest-edge campsite and the first evening oxygen and pulse check - Overnight: Pichkiya camp (2,941 m / 9,650 ft) ### Day 3: Pichkiya to Siyari **Route Details:** **Altitude: 2,941 m → 3,500 m (11,482 ft) | Distance: 5.5 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: gradual climb out of the treeline onto wide, open meadows | Stay: Tents at Siyari** From Pichkiya the trail climbs gradually out of the treeline. The gradient is gentle and the distance is short, so there is no reason to hurry. You are heading above 3,000 m today, and this is the day to let your body settle into the height. Walk slowly, drink and take short breaks in the open patches to look back at the forest you have climbed through. The change from forest to meadow is sudden. The trees end, and you step out onto the wide, open meadows of Siyari, part of the same high grasslands as Dayara Bugyal. Ahead, Bandarpoonch comes fully into view for the first time. After a day and a half inside the forest, the sense of space is the first thing you notice. The meadows of Siyari and Dayara are among the most beautiful high grasslands in Uttarakhand. In late spring the snow melts to reveal green slopes, and by June they are covered in alpine flowers, including blue poppies in some years. In autumn the grass turns gold and russet. Shepherds bring their flocks up here in summer, and you may meet them on the trail. Give the animals room and let them pass. Camp at Siyari sits on the open meadow at about 3,500 m, and it has one of the best sunsets of the trek. You arrive with the afternoon to spare, and the afternoon is for rest. In the evening your trek leader checks everyone’s oxygen levels and briefs the group on tomorrow’s long summit day. Fill your bottles at camp tonight, since there is no water on the ridge tomorrow. Lay out your summit-day layers before you sleep so you can dress quickly in the dark. Eat a good dinner and go to bed early, because tomorrow starts before dawn. What to Expect: - Gradual climb out of the treeline on a short day - A sudden change from forest to the open Siyari meadows - Your first full view of Bandarpoonch - Alpine flowers by June, gold and russet grass in autumn, shepherds and flocks in summer - Sunset over the meadow, then the summit-day briefing and oxygen check - Overnight: Siyari camp (3,500 m / 11,482 ft) ### Day 4: Summit Day - Siyari to Devkund via Surya Top **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,500 m → 3,932 m (12,900 ft) → 3,560 m | Distance: 9.5 km | Duration: 9–10 hrs | Terrain: steep climb of about 2.5 km, a ridge walk of about 4.5 km, then a descent to camp | Stay: Tents at Devkund** This is the longest and hardest day of the trek, so you start early, before dawn. With 9–10 hours on the trail, pack at least two litres of water, plenty of snacks and a warm layer. There is no water on the ridge, so what you carry from camp is what you have. Sunglasses and sunscreen are essential on the open ridge and on snow. The first section is the hard one: a steep climb of about 2.5 km to Surya Top. Go slowly, breathe steadily and take short breaks. Find a pace you can hold without stopping every few steps. In spring there may be snow near the top; microspikes and gaiters make it easier. Your trek leader sets a turn-around time and may change the plan if the weather turns. Stick to it, because it exists to keep the whole group safe. From the summit, at 3,932 m (12,900 ft), Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag (Black Peak) rise so close they almost fill the sky. Further away you can see the Gangotri group, Jaonli and Srikanth. Take your time here. It is the high point of the trek, and the hardest climbing of the day is behind you. From the top, the trail follows a ridge for about 4.5 km, with the Gangotri range on one side and the Yamunotri range on the other. In our view it is one of the most beautiful ridge walks in Garhwal. The ridge is long and open, so keep an even pace and keep sipping from your bottle. The trail then descends to Devkund, at about 3,560 m, a campsite right beneath Bandarpoonch. Use your trekking poles on this descent, as your legs will be tired by now. After a day this long, eat a full dinner and get to bed early. The evening oxygen and pulse check follows as usual. What to Expect: - Start before dawn; carry at least 2 litres, snacks and a warm layer, as there is no water on the ridge - Steep climb of about 2.5 km to Surya Top, with possible snow near the top in spring - Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag at close range, with the Gangotri group, Jaonli and Srikanth beyond - About 4.5 km of ridge walking between the Gangotri and Yamunotri ranges - Sunglasses and sunscreen are essential on the open ridge and snow - Overnight: Devkund camp (3,560 m) ### Day 5: Devkund to Chilapada **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,560 m → 3,200 m (10,500 ft) | Distance: 4 km | Duration: 4–5 hrs | Terrain: gentle downhill across the high meadows | Stay: Tents at Chilapada** After the big day, today is short and easy. The trail crosses the high meadows on a gentle downhill, with the peaks you walked beside yesterday behind you. Bandarpoonch, which stood over Devkund last night, slowly drops behind you as you walk. There is no hard section today. Let your legs loosen up at their own pace, and stop as often as you like to look back at the ridge you crossed. Some groups take an alternative route via Nayata on this day. It is longer but mostly level. Your trek leader decides which way to go based on conditions, and either way you end the day at the same camp. Camp tonight is at Chilapada, at about 3,200 m, at the edge of the meadows. It is a quiet campsite with wide views back to the meadows and the ridge. Arriving early gives you the afternoon to rest your legs, dry your clothes and enjoy a last evening in the high country. Use the sun while it lasts: spread wet socks and clothes out to dry and air your sleeping bag. In our experience, a dry pair of socks tonight makes the long descent tomorrow far more comfortable. Refill your bottles from the water the team has boiled or treated at camp. If you have energy left, take a short walk around camp in the evening to watch the sunset over the Gangotri range. Dinner is served early. Put your warm layers on as the sun goes down. This is your last night in the mountains, and the group spends it sharing stories from summit day. It is also a good evening to pack your bag for tomorrow, when the trail drops through the forest to Raithal. Your trek leader still runs the evening oxygen and pulse check, even on an easy day. What to Expect: - A short, easy day after the summit - Gentle downhill across the high meadows, with the ridge behind you - A possible alternative route via Nayata, longer but mostly level - A free afternoon to rest and dry wet socks and clothes in the sun - Sunset over the Gangotri range from around camp - Overnight: Chilapada camp (3,200 m / 10,500 ft) ### Day 6: Chilapada to Raithal **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,200 m → 2,256 m (7,400 ft) | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: descent through dense oak, maple and rhododendron forest, steep in places | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay, Raithal** This is your last day on the trail, and it runs downhill nearly all the way. The meadows give way to trees soon after you leave camp. From Chilapada the trail descends through dense forest of oak, maple and rhododendron, passing grassy clearings along the way. The forest below Chilapada is cool and shady. In autumn the maple leaves turn bright red and yellow. The path is steep in places, and this is where you need care. Use your trekking poles, and let them touch down before your feet on the steepest steps. Keep your knees slightly bent and take shorter steps on the steep descents. It protects your knees and keeps your feet under you. Tired legs on a downhill are when slips happen, so take a short break if you feel your steps getting loose. Stay focused until the end; the last steep stretches of a trek are where people tend to relax too early. In spring and early summer many small streams cross the path. Step where your trek leader steps, and ask before you refill your bottle from one. Look out for langurs and birds in the trees. As you get lower, the sounds of Raithal village drift up through the trees, and you know the walk is nearly done. You reach Raithal by afternoon. Lunch is at Raithal, and after four nights in tents, the hot water and a proper bed at the homestay are very welcome. The rest of the day is free. Take a slow walk around the village in the evening light; the carved doors and windows of the old wooden houses are worth a second look. Change into fresh clothes and pack your trekking kit away, because tomorrow is the long drive to Dehradun. In the evening the group celebrates the summit together. What to Expect: - Descent through oak, maple and rhododendron forest with grassy clearings - Bright red and yellow maple leaves in autumn - Small streams across the path in spring and early summer - Langurs and birds in the trees - Hot shower, lunch and the summit celebration in Raithal - Overnight: Raithal (2,256 m / 7,400 ft) ### Day 7: Raithal to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Raithal → Dehradun (~185 km, 8–9 hrs) | Altitude: 2,256 m → 640 m | Stay: Trek ends in Dehradun** This is a long travel day. After breakfast you drive back down the Bhagirathi valley, through Uttarkashi and Mussoorie to Dehradun. The drive takes 8–9 hours with short stops. The road drops from Raithal to Bhatwari first, then follows the river down to Uttarkashi. It retraces the Day 1 route along the Bhagirathi river, and with the trek behind you, it is a good time to watch the valley go by. Keep some snacks and water in your daypack for the long drive. Uttarkashi is the main town on the way if you need anything before you reach the plains. You reach Dehradun by evening. Please book your onward travel for the late night or the next day. Mountain roads can be slow, and a little margin keeps your train or flight safe. If you are travelling the same night, keep your tickets and ID in an easy-to-reach pocket. The trek ends on arrival in Dehradun. What to Expect: - Return drive down the Bhagirathi valley via Uttarkashi and Mussoorie - 8–9 hours on the road with short stops - Snacks and water in your daypack for the long drive - Arrival in Dehradun by evening - Onward travel best booked for the late night or the next day - Trek ends at Raithal on Day 6; drop at Dehradun Railway Station ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 6: guesthouse or homestay in Raithal, on a triple/quad-sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 5: camping in 3-person tents #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 7 breakfast - Simple, freshly cooked vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soup and snacks on the trail and at camp #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All forest permits and camping charges for the trek #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents, sleeping bags and mats for the camping nights - Dining and toilet tents at camp - First-aid kit on the trek - Pulse oximeter and blood-pressure checks during the trek #### 6. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and local guide for all 7 days - Cook, helpers and support staff ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Dehradun to Raithal and back. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. - Not included: Raithal to Barsu on Day 2 - Trekkaro helps the group book shared cabs; the fare is paid directly to the driver - Travel to and from Dehradun, arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Raithal #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Personal expenses and tips ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 06:30 AM, so fly in the day before. **From Dehradun to Raithal:** about 185 km via Mussoorie and Uttarkashi, an 8–9 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. **Return:** on Day 7 the cab from Raithal is expected to reach Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-evening or night train or bus, or travel the next day if you want a buffer. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), the pickup point, with direct trains from Delhi. The overnight Nanda Devi Express is the easiest way to make the 06:30 AM pickup; otherwise arrive a day early, and check current timings. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from Delhi - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – day trains; take one the day before and stay in Dehradun **From Dehradun to Raithal:** about 185 km via Mussoorie and Uttarkashi, an 8–9 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. **Return:** on Day 7 the cab from Raithal is expected to reach Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-evening or night train or bus, or travel the next day if you want a buffer. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hours, and Uttarakhand Roadways Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night. Prefer government buses from inside ISBT, then take an app cab or auto from Dehradun ISBT to the railway station for the pickup. On your own, you can take the early bus from Dehradun to Uttarkashi and then a shared jeep to Raithal (about 43 km). **From Dehradun to Raithal:** about 185 km via Mussoorie and Uttarkashi, an 8–9 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM. **Return:** on Day 7 the cab from Raithal is expected to reach Dehradun Railway Station by 06:00 PM. Book a late-evening or night train or bus, or travel the next day if you want a buffer. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Bhatwari has a single, unreliable ATM, and Uttarkashi ATMs can run out of cash - Withdraw the cash you need in Dehradun - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Airtel and Jio work at Raithal - Little or no network on the trail - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Surya Top trek, and where does it start? The Surya Top trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Bhagirathi valley, right next to the Dayara Bugyal trail. It starts from Raithal village, about 185 km (8–9 hours) by road from Dehradun. The trail climbs from Barsu through forest to the Siyari and Dayara meadows, over Surya Top (12,900 ft), and down via Devkund and Chilapada. ### How many days is the Surya Top trek? The Surya Top trek takes 7 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 5 trekking days covering about 31 km. - **Day 1 and Day 7:** drive between Dehradun and Raithal (8–9 hours) - **Days 2–6:** trekking, 4–9.5 km a day - **Longest day:** summit day (Day 4), about 9.5 km and 9–10 hours ### What is the altitude of the Surya Top trek? The highest point of the Surya Top trek is the summit at 3,932 m (12,900 ft). The trek starts at Raithal (2,256 m / 7,400 ft). - **Pichkiya camp:** 2,941 m - **Siyari camp:** 3,500 m - **Devkund camp:** 3,560 m - **Chilapada camp:** 3,200 m ### What is the difficulty level of the Surya Top trek? The Surya Top trek is graded Moderate and suits fit beginners and trekkers with one easy trek behind them. Most days are 4–6 hours, but summit day is 9–10 hours with a steep climb and a long ridge walk. - **Summit climb:** steep, about 2.5 km - **Ridge walk:** about 4.5 km to Devkund - **Snow:** possible on top until mid-April ### Is the Surya Top trek good for beginners? Yes, fit beginners can do the Surya Top trek, but it is longer and harder than Dayara Bugyal or Kedarkantha. If this is your first trek, train well for the 9–10 hour summit day. Trekkers who have done one easy trek will find it a perfect next step. ### What fitness level do I need for the Surya Top trek? For the Surya Top trek you should be able to walk 6–7 hours on uneven ground, and up to 10 hours on summit day, and aim to jog 5 km in about 35 minutes before the trek. - **Train for 4–6 weeks:** brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking - **Strength:** add squats and lunges for the descents - **Fitness test:** take our free 2-minute test at [Am I Ready?](https://www.trekkaro.com/am-i-ready) ### How is the Surya Top trek different from Dayara Bugyal? The Surya Top trek uses the same Raithal base and crosses the same Siyari and Dayara meadows as Dayara Bugyal, but then climbs to a 12,900 ft summit and follows a ridge to Devkund under Bandarpoonch. It is 7 days instead of 4, higher and harder – ideal if you loved Dayara and want more. ### What is the best time to do the Surya Top trek? The best time for the Surya Top trek is mid-March to June and mid-September to October. The trek is closed in the monsoon (July–August) and in deep winter. - **Mid-March–mid-April:** upper meadows and summit under snow - **End April–June:** green meadows and alpine flowers - **Mid-September–October:** golden meadows and the clearest views ### Is there snow on the Surya Top trek, and in which months? The Surya Top trek has snow from mid-March to mid-April, when the upper meadows and summit are still white. In May–June and September–October the trail is snow-free. Microspikes and gaiters from our Free Trekking Gear are used whenever there is snow on top. ### How cold does it get on the Surya Top trek? On the Surya Top trek, nights at the high camps are around 0°C in spring and autumn and about 2°C in summer. - **March–April:** days 13–17°C, nights around 0°C - **May–June:** days 15–20°C, nights around 2°C - **September–October:** days 12–15°C, nights around 0°C ### Which mountains can you see on the Surya Top trek? From the Surya Top summit you see Bandarpoonch and Kala Nag (Black Peak) at close range, with the Gangotri group, Jaonli and Srikanth on the horizon. The ridge walk after the summit has the Gangotri range on one side and the Yamunotri range on the other. ### What is the terrain like on the Surya Top trek? The Surya Top trail goes from village fields and oak–rhododendron forest to wide high meadows and an open summit ridge. - **Day 2:** fields and dense forest above Barsu - **Day 3:** out of the treeline onto the Siyari meadows - **Day 4:** steep summit climb and a 4.5 km ridge walk - **Days 5–6:** gentle meadows, then oak, maple and rhododendron forest down to Raithal ### Is altitude sickness a risk on the Surya Top trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Surya Top trek is moderate, as you sleep at up to 3,560 m and reach 3,932 m. The itinerary climbs gradually over three days before the summit. Your trek leader checks oxygen levels and pulse every evening. Report a headache, nausea or breathlessness at once. ### What is the minimum age for the Surya Top trek? The minimum age for the Surya Top trek is 10 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ### How do I reach the Surya Top trek? To reach the Surya Top trek, travel to Dehradun; the base village Raithal is about 185 km (8–9 hours) away via Mussoorie and Uttarkashi. - **Train:** Dehradun Railway Station (overnight trains from Delhi) - **Air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun - **Bus:** Dehradun to Uttarkashi, then a shared jeep to Raithal (about 43 km) Plan to reach Dehradun the night before Day 1. ### Is transport included in the Surya Top trek? No. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab costs about ₹6,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. The cab runs from Dehradun Railway Station to Raithal and back. ### Where do we stay on the Surya Top trek? On the Surya Top trek you stay 2 nights in a guesthouse or homestay in Raithal (Day 1 and Day 6) and 4 nights in tents at Pichkiya, Siyari, Devkund and Chilapada. Tents are shared by 3 trekkers, with a dining tent and toilet tent at every camp. Sleeping bags and mats are provided. ### What is the group size on the Surya Top trek, and who leads it? Fixed departures of the Surya Top trek run with 6 to 20 trekkers – never more than 20 – led by a certified Trekkaro trek leader. The leader is supported by a local guide, a cook, helpers and mules that carry the camp. Private groups of any size can also be arranged. ### Is the Surya Top trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes. On the Surya Top trek, female trekkers share tents only with other female trekkers, and male trekkers with males; couples and families get their own tents. We keep three trekkers to a tent, and our guides and support staff are carefully selected and trusted. ### What food is served on the Surya Top trek? On the Surya Top trek we serve simple, freshly cooked vegetarian meals, with eggs available on request at camp. - **Breakfast:** at camp - **Lunch:** packed, on trekking days - **Evening:** tea with snacks - **Dinner:** hot, in the dining tent Meals on the drive to and from the base are not included. ### Is drinking water available on the Surya Top trek? On the Surya Top trek, carry at least 2 litres every day, and more on summit day, when there is no water on the ridge. Our team boils or treats the water at every campsite. Ask your trek leader before refilling from a stream. ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Surya Top trek? Yes. Free Trekking Gear is included on the Surya Top trek, free of rental charges: - **Shoes:** Decathlon trekking shoes - **Jacket:** Decathlon -10°C trekking jacket - **Poles:** trekking poles - **Snow gear:** free gaiters and microspikes There is a ₹3,000 refundable deposit and a ₹200 washing charge. You only bring your personal clothes, a backpack and a water bottle. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Surya Top trek? Yes. Backpack offloading on the Surya Top trek costs ₹1,800 + 5% GST for the full trek, for up to 9 kg. - **Bags:** no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Booking:** tell us at least 15 days before the trek; last-minute requests may cost more - **Daypack:** you still carry water, snacks and a warm layer ### Will a doctor come on the Surya Top trek? No doctor joins the Surya Top trek, but our trek leaders are trained in wilderness first aid and carry a full first-aid kit and a pulse oximeter. Carry your own regular medicines and tell your trek leader about any health condition before the trek. ### What documents do I need for the Surya Top trek? For the Surya Top trek, carry an original government photo ID (with a photocopy), a medical certificate signed by a doctor, and the signed disclaimer form. Trekkaro arranges the forest and camping permissions. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Surya Top trek? Mobile network on the Surya Top trek is available at Raithal (Airtel and Jio); there is little or no signal on the trail. Bhatwari has a single unreliable ATM and Uttarkashi ATMs can run out of cash. Withdraw the cash you need in Dehradun. ### What is special about Raithal village on the Surya Top trek? Raithal, the base of the Surya Top trek, is a Garhwali village known for its old wooden houses with carved doors and windows. Walk around it on Day 1 or Day 6 to see village life much as it has been for generations. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 30 Oct 2026 - 31 Oct 2026 to 6 Nov 2026 - 6 Mar 2027 to 12 Mar 2027 - 13 Mar 2027 to 19 Mar 2027 - 20 Mar 2027 to 26 Mar 2027 - 21 Mar 2027 to 27 Mar 2027 - 25 Mar 2027 to 31 Mar 2027 - 27 Mar 2027 to 2 Apr 2027 - 3 Apr 2027 to 9 Apr 2027 - 10 Apr 2027 to 16 Apr 2027 - 13 Apr 2027 to 19 Apr 2027 - 14 Apr 2027 to 20 Apr 2027 - … 16 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/surya-top-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Valley of Flowers Trek > Valley of Flowers Trek is a 6-day easy–moderate trek in Chamoli, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,329 m (14,200 ft). It covers about 50 km on foot and starts and ends at Joshimath. Best time: July to September. Trekkaro price: ₹7,500 per person + 5% GST, with free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles. Next batch: 3 Jul 2027 (24 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/valley-of-flowers (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 6 days - **Difficulty:** Easy–Moderate - **Highest point:** 4,329 m / 14,200 ft - **Trekking distance:** 50 km - **Region:** Chamoli, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Joshimath - **Best time:** July to September - **Temperature:** Jul-Aug: Valley 8°C to 15°C, Hemkund 2°C to 8°C | Sep: Valley 5°C to 12°C, Hemkund 0°C to 5°C - **Price:** ₹7,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free microspikes & gaiters (no deposit, no charge); bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles - **Next batch:** 3 Jul 2027 (24 upcoming) ## Overview There is no trek in the Indian Himalayas quite like the Valley of Flowers. Not because it is the hardest, or the highest, or the longest; it is none of those things. It is the only trek in India where you walk into a UNESCO World Heritage Site that is, for a brief window of weeks each year, covered from end to end in Himalayan wildflowers in densities and varieties found nowhere else on the subcontinent. Over 300 species of alpine flora bloom simultaneously in the valley between July and September: Brahmakamal, Blue Poppy, Cobra Lily, Himalayan Balsam, and Marsh Marigold, in a colour display that photographers, botanists, and ordinary trekkers describe in terms that consistently exceed the language available to them. The Valley of Flowers National Park sits in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand at the head of the Pushpawati River valley. It is accessed on foot from Ghangaria, the last inhabited settlement before the valley, reached via the Bhyundar Gorge trail from Poolna. In six days, the Trekkaro team takes you from Rishikesh to Joshimath, up the gorge trail to Ghangaria, into the valley for a full exploration day, to Hemkund Sahib, a glacial Sikh pilgrimage lake at 4,329 m, and back to Rishikesh. Joshimath serves as the gateway and night-halt both on the approach and the return, making this a well-paced and logistically clean route. The Valley of Flowers trek starts and ends at Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft), the base town where you stay on Day 1 and Day 5, with pickup and drop at Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. The walking starts and ends at Poolna, 3 km beyond Govindghat (1,828 m / 5,997 ft), the roadhead on the Badrinath National Highway in Chamoli district, about 250 km from Rishikesh by road. The route follows the Pushpawati River through the Bhyundar Gorge to Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft), the last permanent settlement before the valley, with guesthouses, a Gurudwara, and basic medical facilities. From Ghangaria, the route branches in two directions: northeast to the Valley of Flowers National Park (3,352–3,658 m) and northwest to Hemkund Sahib (4,329 m / 14,200 ft), a glacial lake of Sikh religious significance. The total trekking distance is approximately 50 km across four trekking days. ### The Valley of Flowers – A UNESCO World Heritage Site UNESCO declared the Valley of Flowers National Park, a World Heritage Site, in 2005 as part of the Nanda Devi Biosphere Reserve. The valley is approximately 8 km long and 2 km wide, lying at altitudes between 3,352 m and 3,658 m, enclosed by high ridges to the north and south and fed by meltwater and glacial streams from the surrounding peaks. It is one of the most botanically significant alpine meadows in the Himalayas, supporting over 300 species of wildflower, including several that are rare, endangered, or endemic to this ecosystem. The bloom season runs from mid-July through mid-August at peak density, tapering into September. The park is open from 1 June to 31 October each year and closed from November to May to protect the flora during the dormant winter period; entry is allowed between 7 AM and 2 PM and everyone must leave by 5 PM. Entry is restricted to daytime visits only; no camping is permitted inside the valley. ### Hemkund Sahib – The Lake at 14,200 Feet Hemkund Sahib is one of the holiest sites in Sikhism. The Gurudwara Hemkund Sahib stands at the edge of a glacial lake at 4,329 m (14,200 ft), surrounded by seven peaks, at the terminus of a steep trail that climbs approximately 1,280 m in 6 km from Ghangaria. The word ‘hem’ means snow, and ‘kund’ means pool or lake. The Gurudwara is open from June to October and serves langar (community meal) to all visitors regardless of faith or background. For Sikh pilgrims, reaching Hemkund Sahib is an act of deep religious devotion. For trekkers, it is one of the most physically demanding and visually extraordinary day walks accessible without technical climbing skills in the Indian Himalayan system. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Valley of Flowers trek is graded easy to moderate. Unlike higher-altitude Trekkaro routes, it does not involve glacier crossings, sustained altitude above 14,200 feet, or technical terrain that requires specialist training. The trail from Govindghat to Ghangaria is well-graded and wide and walked by pilgrims of all ages during the open season. The valley itself is a gentle walk across open meadow. The Hemkund Sahib ascent is the most demanding element, a steep 1,280 m gain over 6 km, and requires solid fitness and a night of acclimatisation at Ghangaria before attempting. This trek is suitable for first-time Himalayan trekkers with reasonable base fitness, for families with teenagers, and for trekkers drawn more by botanical immersion than by altitude. Minimum age: 9 years. There is no upper age limit; trekkers above 60 need good fitness and a medical certificate signed by a doctor. Daily trekking hours: 3 to 6 hours. Season: July to September, with peak bloom from late July to mid-August. ### Key Highlights of the Valley of Flowers Trek - 300+ species of alpine wildflowers blooming simultaneously – Brahmakamal, Blue Poppy, Cobra Lily, Marsh Marigold, Himalayan Balsam, and more - UNESCO World Heritage Site designation – the valley is botanically and ecologically unique within the Indian Himalayan system - Hemkund Sahib (4,329 m / 14,200 ft) – a glacial Sikh pilgrimage lake ringed by seven snow-capped peaks - Bhyundar Gorge trail – a lush river valley walk through dense Himalayan forest and waterfalls - Ghangaria base camp (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) – the quiet Himalayan settlement where all routes converge - A full valley day – unhurried exploration of the flower fields with the Trekkaro naturalist guide - Open during the monsoon – uniquely trekked in July–September when most Himalayan trails are closed - Certified Trekkaro trek leader & guides, twice-daily health monitoring ### Best Time to Visit Valley of Flowers **Opening dates:** the Valley of Flowers National Park opens on 1 June and closes on 31 October (2026 season: 1 June to 31 October). Entry 7 AM to 2 PM, out by 5 PM; the entry fee (₹150 for Indians, ₹600 for foreign nationals) is included in the Trekkaro fee. Peak bloom is late July to mid-August; see our [month-by-month guide](https://www.trekkaro.com/article/valley-of-flowers-best-time-to-visit). The Valley of Flowers trekking season is shaped by a single factor unlike any other Himalayan route: the monsoon is not a reason to avoid this trek; it is the reason to do it. The valley blooms because of the monsoon. The wildflower season runs from mid-July through mid-September, with peak bloom density in late July and early August. Outside this window, the valley is either snow-covered (November through June) or in late-season wind-down (late September). Trekkaro runs Valley of Flowers batches from early July to mid-September. #### Late July to Mid-August - Peak Bloom Window (Most Recommended) This is the heart of the Valley of Flowers season and Trekkaro’s most recommended window. In late July, the valley floor is already covered in blooms by early August; the concentration of species is at its maximum, with Brahmakamal, Blue Poppy, and Himalayan Balsam visible simultaneously across the full length of the valley. Rain is present in this window in the form of brief daily monsoon showers, mostly in the afternoon, which clear quickly at this altitude. The light after rain on the flowers is extraordinary. Waterproofs are essential, but the showers themselves are part of the experience. The Bhyundar Gorge trail in the monsoon is lush and waterfall-laden in a way that the drier seasons cannot replicate. - **Temperatures:** Haridwar: 25°C to 35°C | Ghangaria: 10°C to 18°C | Valley: 8°C to 15°C | Hemkund: 2°C to 8°C - **Trail conditions:** Wet trail. Brief daily showers. Flowers at maximum density. Lush gorge. - **Best for:** Peak bloom, Brahmakamal and Blue Poppy, post-rain light, and the fullest botanical experience. #### Mid-September to Late September - Late Season Window By mid-September, the monsoon begins to withdraw, and the daily showers reduce in frequency. The wildflower density is lower than peak season, but the valley takes on a different visual character, with richer tones of amber, rust, and late-season purple as the flora transitions. The trail is drier, and the days are clearer. Hemkund Sahib is fully accessible, and the views of the surrounding peaks are sharper than in the July-August cloud window. The valley is less crowded. This is a valid alternative for trekkers who prefer clear skies over peak bloom and cannot manage the July–August monsoon timing. - **Temperatures:** Ghangaria: 8°C to 16°C | Valley: 5°C to 12°C | Hemkund: 0°C to 5°C - **Trail conditions:** Drying trail. Reducing showers. Late-season bloom. Clearer mountain views. - **Best for:** Clearer skies, Hemkund Sahib peak views, and a less crowded valley. #### October to June - Outside the Bloom The Valley of Flowers National Park closes on 31 October and reopens on 1 June; October has autumn colour but no flowers. The route above Ghangaria is under deep snow from November through June. No Trekkaro batches operate in the closed season. The trail from Govindghat to Ghangaria also closes from late October due to snow on the higher sections. - **Status:** CLOSED. No Trekkaro batches operate October–June. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the full Valley of Flowers experience with maximum bloom density, book a late July to early August batch. For drier conditions and sharper mountain views on the Hemkund ascent, mid- to late September is the better window. Both are rewarding; the deciding factor is whether you want peak bloom or peak clarity. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Rishikesh to Joshimath **Route Details:** **Drive: Rishikesh → Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft) | Distance: ~250 km | Duration: ~7–8 hrs | Activity: Arrival, gear check, health baseline, acclimatisation walk | Overnight: Joshimath** The drive from Rishikesh to Joshimath is one of the most scenic road journeys in the Garhwal Himalaya. The route follows the Ganges and then the Alaknanda River upstream through a succession of sacred confluences: Devprayag (where the Bhagirathi and Alaknanda merge to form the Ganga), Rudraprayag (where the Mandakini joins the Alaknanda), and Vishnuprayag (above Joshimath, where the Dhauliganga and Alaknanda converge). Each prayag is a temple town nested at the base of a steep gorge, with the river churning through rock below and the high ridges closing in above. The visual character of the Alaknanda Valley changes continuously as altitude increases: the subtropical vegetation of Rishikesh gives way to broadleaf oak and pine, which gives way to the more open, rock-faced upper valley around Chamoli and Pipalkoti. Joshimath (1,890 m) is the administrative centre of the upper Chamoli district and the most significant town in the Garhwal Himalaya above Srinagar. It is the base for Auli, the skiing destination; the gateway for the Kuari Pass, Pangarchulla, and Nanda Devi treks; the wintering place of the Badrinath idol; and the departure point for the road to Govind Ghat. It has proper hotels, restaurants, a district hospital, ATMs, pharmacies, and mobile connectivity, making it the last place on this itinerary where comprehensive logistics and personal needs can be addressed before the trail begins. The evening walk along the Joshimath ridge with views of the Hathi Parbat and Kuari massif at last light is a quiet introduction to the scale of what lies ahead. Trekkaro’s health baseline is recorded at Joshimath: SpO2, pulse, and blood pressure for every trekker. The trek briefing covers the full route, daily structure, valley entry permit protocol, AMS awareness for the Hemkund Sahib ascent (the highest point of the trek at 14,200 ft), and gear review. Sleep early. The road to Govind Ghat and the trail to Ghangaria begin tomorrow morning. What to Expect: - Scenic drive through the Alaknanda Valley – Devprayag, Rudraprayag, and Vishnuprayag confluences - Arrival in Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft) – the Garhwal Himalaya’s premier gateway town - Health baseline: SpO2, pulse, and blood pressure recorded for every trekker - Trek briefing: route overview, AMS protocol for Hemkund altitude, valley permit structure, daily plan - Evening acclimatisation walk on the Joshimath ridge with Himalayan peak views - Overnight: Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft) – last night at mid-altitude before the trail ### Day 2: Joshimath to Govind Ghat to Poolna, Trek to Ghangaria **Route Details:** **Drive: Joshimath → Govind Ghat (1,828 m) → Poolna (2,050 m) (~30 mins + shared jeep) | Trek: Poolna → Ghangaria (3,048 m) | Distance: ~11 km | Duration: 4-5 hrs | Ascent: ~1,000 m | Overnight: Ghangaria** From Joshimath the road descends briefly to Govind Ghat (1,828 m) on the Badrinath highway, where the Laxmanganga river joins the Alaknanda at the base of the gorge. Govind Ghat is the roadhead and the site of the Gurudwara Govind Ghat, a large Sikh shrine that serves as the gateway for both Hemkund Sahib pilgrims and Valley of Flowers trekkers. From Govind Ghat, a 3 km road or shared jeep ride brings you to Poolna (2,050 m), the actual trailhead where all motorised access ends and the Bhyundar Gorge trail begins. The 11 km trail from Poolna to Ghangaria follows the Pushpawati River upstream through the Bhyundar Gorge, one of the most botanically rich and visually layered approach valleys in the entire Garhwal range. The trail is wide, well-maintained, and continuous alongside the river for much of its length. The gorge walls close in overhead in the narrower stretches, with waterfalls dropping from ledges that can’t be seen from below. The forest changes character every few hundred metres of altitude, from subtropical broadleaf at Poolna through oak and rhododendron at mid-gorge to the silver birch groves that announce the approach to Ghangaria. In the monsoon season the trail is lush beyond description, the river is loud and powerful, and the waterfalls multiply. Ghangaria (also written Gangria) sits at 3,048 m at the confluence of the Bhyundar Gorge and the two routes beyond, northeast to the Valley of Flowers and northwest to Hemkund Sahib. It has guesthouses, tea shops, a Gurudwara serving free langar, a Forest Department post where valley permits are checked, and a basic medical facility. It is the base camp for all exploration on this trek. The evening arrival at Ghangaria, with the sound of both rivers and the ridge visible above the settlement, is the moment the trek begins to feel genuinely high. What to Expect: - Short drive from Joshimath to Govind Ghat (~30 mins) and jeep or walk to Poolna trailhead - Gurudwara Govind Ghat (1,828 m) – landmark Sikh shrine at the confluence of Laxmanganga and Alaknanda - Trek through Bhyundar Gorge – 11 km, ~1,000 m ascent, forest trail with river alongside - Waterfalls and forest ecology – subtropical to birch, continuous ecological transition - Forest Department permit check at Ghangaria for Valley of Flowers National Park entry - Arrival at Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) – base for valley and Hemkund exploration - Overnight: Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) – acclimatisation night before valley entry ### Day 3: Ghangaria to Valley of Flowers & Back **Route Details:** **Start/End: Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) | Valley: 3,352–3,658 m | Distance: ~16 km round trip (full valley to glacier base) | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Overnight: Ghangaria** The 4 km trail from Ghangaria to the Valley of Flowers entry gate climbs through forest and open meadow before the valley floor opens abruptly and completely. There is a precise moment on the trail where the tree cover ends and the full panorama of the valley becomes visible: a long, wide, flat-floored basin stretching ahead, flanked by high ridges, with the Pushpawati glacier visible at the far end. In July and August, the floor of that basin is not green; it is every colour. The wildflowers at peak bloom cover the valley so densely that underlying grass is not visible in stretches, and the variety of simultaneous blooms is unlike any alpine environment accessible to recreational trekkers anywhere in India. The Valley of Flowers is strictly managed by the Forest Department. No camping is permitted inside. Entry is from the permit gate at the valley mouth, and all visitors must exit by evening. Trekkaro enters early in the morning to make maximum use of the morning light, which is at its most dramatic in the first two hours after dawn before the daily cloud builds. The Trekkaro naturalist guide leads the group along the valley floor, identifying species by name, the sacred Brahmakamal (Saussurea obvallata), the distinctive Blue Poppy (Meconopsis aculeata), Cobra Lily, Himalayan Balsam, Marsh Marigold, and dozens of others, explaining the ecological context of the Nanda Devi Biosphere Reserve and the conditions that make this specific valley botanically unique. The route covers the full length of the valley to the Pushpawati glacier base and returns along the north bank, a different flora profile from the morning outward route. The walk back to Ghangaria in the afternoon, with the valley behind and the gorge forest below, is a particular quality of the experience. An early start is important on this day: the best light and the clearest air are before 9 am, and in the monsoon season a shower arrives by early afternoon. Rest well in the evening; the Hemkund Sahib ascent begins tomorrow. What to Expect: - Full Valley of Flowers traverse – entry gate to Pushpawati glacier base and return on north bank trail - Naturalist-guided walk identifying Brahmakamal, Blue Poppy, Cobra Lily, Himalayan Balsam, Marsh Marigold, and 300+ species - UNESCO World Heritage Site entry – Forest Department permit checked at valley gate - Peak bloom panoramas – wildflower cover from valley wall to valley wall in late July and August - Pushpawati glacier visible at the valley head on clear mornings - Post-rain light – the valley is most intensely colourful in the 30–60 minutes after a monsoon shower - Overnight: Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) – rest before Hemkund Sahib ascent ### Day 4: Ghangaria to Hemkund Sahib & Back **Route Details:** **Start/End: Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) | Hemkund Sahib: 4,329 m / 14,200 ft | Distance: ~12 km round trip | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Ascent: ~1,280 m | Overnight: Ghangaria** The trail to Hemkund Sahib is one of the most relentlessly ascending day walks in accessible Indian trekking. From Ghangaria at 3,048 m, the path climbs 1,280 m in 6 km, an average gradient exceeding 20%, first through the upper Bhyundar forest, then above the treeline on an exposed stone trail that switches back up the valley headwall. The path is wide and well-maintained for pilgrimage traffic, but at this altitude and gradient, the pace requires careful management. The night at Ghangaria before this ascent is a deliberate acclimatisation day in the Trekkaro itinerary, and Trekkaro’s twice-daily health checks on this morning are the most critical of the entire trek. The transition above the treeline marks the point where the landscape shifts completely. A dense humid forest gives way to open, wind-exposed alpine terrain, and the full sweep of the Bhyundar Valley headwall becomes visible behind and below. In the monsoon season, morning clouds fill the gorge while the peaks above remain clear; the sensation of ascending out of cloud into high blue sky and white summits is one of the most striking transitions on this route. The final approach crosses a rock-strewn basin before the lake appears: still, cold, partially frozen at the edges, enclosed on three sides by a natural ring of seven peaks. The Gurudwara Hemkund Sahib serves langar throughout the day and is open to all visitors. The lake, according to Sikh scripture, is where Guru Gobind Singh meditated in a previous life. Regardless of faith, the quality of stillness at Hemkund, at 14,200 feet in a glacially carved bowl, with no sound beyond wind, water, and distant prayer, is one of the most profound experiential qualities of this trek. The descent back to Ghangaria takes approximately 2.5 to 3 hours on the same trail. Rest well this evening: tomorrow the descent to Joshimath begins. What to Expect: - Steep ascent of 1,280 m in 6 km – the most demanding day on the trek - Above-treeline trail with full Bhyundar Valley panorama and seven-peak ridge enclosure - Hemkund Sahib Lake (4,329 m / 14,200 ft) – glacial, partially frozen, ringed by seven snow peaks - Gurudwara Hemkund Sahib – Sikh pilgrimage site and langar open to all visitors - Cloud inversion views in monsoon season – ascending out of gorge cloud into clear alpine sky - Twice-daily health monitoring – most critical day of the trek; highest altitude at 14,200 ft - Overnight: Ghangaria (3,048 m / 10,000 ft) - return by mid-afternoon ### Day 5: Ghangaria to Govind Ghat, Drive to Joshimath **Route Details:** **Trek: Ghangaria (3,048 m) → Poolna (2,050 m) → Govind Ghat (1,828 m) | Distance: ~11 km to Poolna (+ 3 km by jeep or on foot to Govind Ghat) | Duration: ~3–4 hrs trek + drive to Joshimath (~30 mins) | Overnight: Joshimath** The final morning in Ghangaria carries a particular quality; a day in the valley and a day at Hemkund Sahib are behind you, and the gorge trail descends ahead. Breakfast at the guesthouse or Gurudwara, a last look at the ridge above Ghangaria, and the trail begins to descend into the Bhyundar Gorge for the last time. The descent covers the same 11 km from Ghangaria to Poolna that was climbed on Day 2, but in the opposite direction the ecology reads differently: birch gives way to oak, oak to mixed broadleaf, broadleaf to the riverine vegetation near Poolna, and the sound of the Pushpawati River follows all the way down. The descent is notably faster than the ascent; most trekkers reach Poolna in 2.5 to 3 hours from Ghangaria. From Poolna, a shared jeep or short walk of 3 km brings you back to Govind Ghat and the Badrinath highway. Shared cabs, paid directly to the driver, wait at Govind Ghat for the drive back to Joshimath, a 30-minute journey that climbs back up the highway to the town on the ridge. Joshimath on the evening of Day 5 carries the specific comfort of a warm room, hot food, and mobile connectivity after three nights at altitude. Trek completion certificates are presented at Joshimath. The drive to Rishikesh begins tomorrow morning. What to Expect: - Descent of 11 km through Bhyundar Gorge from Ghangaria to Poolna – ecology in reverse - Altitude drops ~1,000 m from Ghangaria to Govind Ghat on the descent - Short jeep or walk of 3 km from Poolna to Govind Ghat roadhead - Drive to Joshimath (~30 mins) – return to the gateway town with full facilities - Trek completion certificates issued at Joshimath - Overnight: Joshimath (1,890 m / 6,200 ft) – last mountain night before the return drive ### Day 6: Joshimath to Rishikesh **Route Details:** **Drive: Joshimath (1,890 m) → Rishikesh (356 m) | Distance: ~250 km | Duration: ~7–8 hrs | Drop: Rishikesh** The drive from Joshimath back to Rishikesh reverses the approach journey Vishnuprayag, Chamoli, Rudraprayag, Devprayag, and Rishikesh, the same landmarks in the same valley, seen differently after four nights in the mountains. The altitude drops from 1,890 m at Joshimath to 356 m at Rishikesh over seven hours, passing through all the same gorge sections and confluence towns that marked the arrival. By Devprayag, the temperature has risen significantly, the valley has widened, and the proportion of the landscape that is rock versus green has gradually reversed. By Rishikesh, the Himalayan range has receded behind you, visible only as a white profile on the northern horizon on clear afternoons. The shared cab drops trekkers at Jumping Heights, Rishikesh, from where train, bus, and taxi connections to Delhi, Dehradun, and other destinations are readily available. Rishikesh itself, with its riverside ghats, cafes, yoga centres, and Ganga views, is a natural place to spend an additional evening if connections allow. Many Trekkaro trekkers extend their Rishikesh stop by a day simply to decompress after the trek before the return to city life. What to Expect: - Drive through the Alaknanda Valley – Vishnuprayag, Chamoli, Rudraprayag, and Devprayag confluences in reverse - Altitude drops ~1,530 m from Joshimath to Rishikesh over ~250 km - ~7–8 hour drive with scenic gorge sections and river views throughout - Drop at Rishikesh for onwards travel connections to Delhi, Dehradun, and other cities - Rishikesh Ghat for an optional evening extension before the return journey home ## Inclusions #### 1. Accommodation - Day 1 and Day 5: hotel or guesthouse in Joshimath, on a triple or quad sharing basis - Day 2 to Day 4: hotel or guesthouse in Ghangaria, on a triple or quad sharing basis #### 2. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 5 dinner: breakfast, lunch, evening snacks and dinner #### 3. Permits & Camping Fees - Valley of Flowers National Park entry fees and forest permits, arranged by Trekkaro #### 4. Camping & Safety Equipment - SpO2, pulse and blood-pressure checks every day at every hotel - Portable oxygen cylinder and emergency stretcher on every batch - Free microspikes and gaiters (no deposit, no charge) #### 5. Trek Team - Certified trek leader and guide for all 5 days - Trekkaro naturalist guide on the valley day, for species identification and botanical briefings - Trek completion certificate when you complete the full circuit to Joshimath ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Not included: Rishikesh to Joshimath and back. Trekkaro helps the group book a shared cab, approximately ₹7,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle, paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers in it. - Travel to and from Rishikesh (flights, trains or buses), arranged by you #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Rishikesh and Joshimath #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Joshimath #### 4. Personal Equipment - Your clothing, backpack, sunglasses and other personal gear - Trekking shoes, jacket and trekking poles: bring your own (microspikes and gaiters are provided free) #### 5. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and helicopter evacuation. #### 6. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - Accommodation in Rishikesh before or after the trek - Personal expenses such as tips, calls, laundry and extra snacks - Costs from an early exit, evacuation, or an itinerary change due to weather or medical reasons ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun (DED), about 20–25 km and around 45 minutes from Rishikesh, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. Fly in the day before and stay in Rishikesh, so a delayed flight does not cost you the drive. **From Rishikesh to Joshimath:** about 250 km via Devprayag and Rudraprayag, a 7–8 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹7,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. **Return:** on the last day you drive about 250 km (7–8 hours) from Joshimath back to Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. Hill roads can be slow in the monsoon, so book onward travel for late night or the next day. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Haridwar Junction, about 25–30 km (around 1 hour) from Rishikesh, has trains from Delhi and most major cities, while Yog Nagari Rishikesh (YNRK) has only a few trains. Check current timings and plan to reach Rishikesh the day before the drive. - **Haridwar Junction** – trains from Delhi including the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and overnight trains; then a cab or bus to Rishikesh - **Yog Nagari Rishikesh** – useful only if one of its few trains suits your dates **From Rishikesh to Joshimath:** about 250 km via Devprayag and Rudraprayag, a 7–8 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹7,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. **Return:** on the last day you drive about 250 km (7–8 hours) from Joshimath back to Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. Hill roads can be slow in the monsoon, so book onward travel for late night or the next day. ### By road **Bus route:** buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate reach Rishikesh in about 6–7 hours, including overnight Volvo and Uttarakhand Roadways buses. Haridwar (about 230 km and 5–6 hours from Delhi) also has regular buses and is about 1 hour from Rishikesh; reaching Rishikesh the evening before is the safest plan. **From Rishikesh to Joshimath:** about 250 km via Devprayag and Rudraprayag, a 7–8 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹7,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. **Return:** on the last day you drive about 250 km (7–8 hours) from Joshimath back to Jumping Heights, Rishikesh. Hill roads can be slow in the monsoon, so book onward travel for late night or the next day. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Joshimath has the last reliable ATM - Carry extra cash for snacks, tips and emergencies - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - The signal is reliable up to Govind Ghat - Beyond Ghangaria expect little or no connectivity - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Valley of Flowers trek, and where does it start? The Valley of Flowers trek is in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand. You drive about 250 km from Rishikesh to Joshimath, then walk 11 km from Poolna, near Govind Ghat, through the Bhyundar gorge to Ghangaria, the base for both the Valley of Flowers and Hemkund Sahib. The valley is a national park and a UNESCO World Heritage Site, entered on a Forest Department permit. ### How many days is the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek takes 6 days from Rishikesh to Rishikesh, with 4 trekking days covering about 50 km. - **Days 1 and 6:** drive between Rishikesh and Joshimath (about 250 km, 7–8 hours) - **Day 2:** 11 km from Poolna to Ghangaria, 4–5 hours - **Days 3–4:** day walks to the Valley of Flowers (16 km) and Hemkund Sahib (12 km), back to Ghangaria each evening - **Day 5:** descend to Govind Ghat and drive to Joshimath ### What is the altitude of the Valley of Flowers trek? The highest point of the Valley of Flowers trek is Hemkund Sahib at 4,329 m (14,200 ft). The valley itself lies between 3,352 m and 3,658 m (11,000–12,000 ft). - **Joshimath:** 1,890 m (6,200 ft) - **Poolna trailhead:** 2,050 m (6,730 ft) - **Ghangaria base:** 3,048 m (10,000 ft), where you sleep for 3 nights ### How difficult is the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek is graded Easy–Moderate. The trail is well marked, but the climb to Hemkund Sahib is steep and monsoon rain makes the paths wet and muddy. - **Hemkund Sahib day:** about 1,280 m of ascent in 6 km, the hardest day - **Day 2:** 11 km with about 1,000 m of ascent through the Bhyundar gorge - **Valley day:** about 16 km round trip in 6–7 hours, the longest distance ### Is the Valley of Flowers trek good for beginners? Yes, the Valley of Flowers trek is good for beginners. Anyone with basic fitness who can walk 5–6 hours a day with a backpack can join. The steep climb to Hemkund Sahib is the one real test, so build up your stamina before the trek. ### What fitness level do I need for the Valley of Flowers trek? For the Valley of Flowers trek you should be able to walk 5–7 hours a day with a backpack, and handle one steep day: about 1,280 m of climbing in 6 km to Hemkund Sahib. - **Build stamina:** regular brisk walks, stairs or uphill walking before the trek - **Descents:** trekking poles help on the way down from Hemkund Sahib and to Govind Ghat - **Fitness test:** take the free 2-minute Am I Ready? test on the Trekkaro website ### When is the best time for the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek is open only from July to September, when the valley is in bloom; for the rest of the year it is closed by snow. - **Peak bloom:** late July and August, with flowers from one valley wall to the other - **Monsoon:** heavy rain is common, and the valley is most colourful in the 30–60 minutes after rain - **Temperatures:** 8–15°C by day and 0–7°C at night ### Does it rain on the Valley of Flowers trek? Yes, the Valley of Flowers trek is a monsoon trek, and heavy rain is common from July to September. Trails are wet and muddy, and Hemkund Sahib is cold, windy and misty. - **Rain gear:** a rain jacket and rain pants, or a good poncho, are essential - **Dry bags:** keep clothes, phone and documents in plastic or ziploc bags - **Footwear:** waterproof shoes and gaiters, as wet feet are the main cause of blisters ### Will there be snow on the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek runs in the monsoon, from July to September, so rain is far more likely than snowfall on the trail. You do see snow on the seven peaks around Hemkund Sahib, whose glacial lake can be partly frozen. Outside July to September the valley is closed because of snow. ### How cold is the Valley of Flowers trek? On the Valley of Flowers trek, the valley is about 8°C to 15°C in July–August and 5°C to 12°C in September, with Ghangaria at 8°C to 18°C. Hemkund Sahib, at 4,329 m, is much colder: 0°C to 8°C, with wind and mist. - **Layers:** thermals, a fleece and a padded jacket, with no cotton next to your skin - **Hemkund Sahib:** a woollen cap, a buff, and fleece plus waterproof gloves - **Rain:** a rain jacket and rain pants, as July and August are monsoon months ### Which flowers and sights can you see on the Valley of Flowers trek? On the Valley of Flowers trek a naturalist-guided walk helps you identify more than 300 species, including Brahmakamal, Blue Poppy, Cobra Lily, Himalayan Balsam and Marsh Marigold. - **Pushpawati glacier:** visible at the head of the valley on clear mornings - **Hemkund Sahib:** a glacial lake ringed by seven snow peaks - **Bhyundar gorge:** waterfalls and forest beside the river on the way to Ghangaria - **On the drive:** the Devprayag, Rudraprayag and Vishnuprayag river confluences ### What is the terrain like on the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek follows a well-marked trail: a forest path beside the river through the Bhyundar gorge, flower-covered slopes in the valley, and a steep climb above the tree line to Hemkund Sahib. - **Day 2:** forest trail with waterfalls, changing from subtropical forest to birch - **Day 3:** from the valley entry gate to the Pushpawati glacier base, returning on the north bank trail - **Day 4:** an above-treeline trail with views over the Bhyundar valley - **Monsoon:** expect mud and slush, so gaiters help ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Valley of Flowers trek? The risk of altitude sickness on the Valley of Flowers trek is highest on Hemkund Sahib day, when you climb to 4,329 m (14,200 ft). You return to sleep at Ghangaria (3,048 m) the same day. - **Health baseline:** SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded for every trekker on Day 1 - **Hemkund day:** your health is checked twice that day - **Briefing:** the Day 1 briefing covers the AMS protocol for Hemkund’s altitude ### How do I reach the start of the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek starts and ends at Joshimath; pickup and drop are at Jumping Heights, Rishikesh, from where the group drives about 250 km (7–8 hours) to Joshimath on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport, Dehradun, is 20–25 km (about 45 minutes) from Rishikesh; fly in the day before - **By train:** Haridwar Junction, about 1 hour from Rishikesh, has trains from Delhi and most major cities - **By bus:** buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate reach Rishikesh in 6–7 hours - **Return:** monsoon roads can be slow, so book onward travel for late night or the next day ### Is transport included in the Valley of Flowers trek? No, transport from Rishikesh to Joshimath and back is not included in the Valley of Flowers trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers: about ₹7,500 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle. - **Pickup:** Jumping Heights, Rishikesh, on Day 1 - **Day 2:** a 30-minute drive from Joshimath to Govind Ghat, then a shared jeep to the Poolna trailhead ### Where do we stay on the Valley of Flowers trek? On the Valley of Flowers trek you stay in guesthouses or lodges, not tents: 2 nights in Joshimath and 3 nights in Ghangaria. Rooms are shared, so earplugs can help. Trek completion certificates are handed out at Joshimath on Day 5. ### What is the group size on the Valley of Flowers trek and who leads it? Valley of Flowers batches have a maximum of 20 trekkers, and a fixed departure needs at least 6. A trained trek leader leads the group, and the walk through the valley is naturalist-guided. The Day 1 briefing in Joshimath covers the route, the AMS protocol for Hemkund Sahib, the valley permits and the daily plan. ### Is the Valley of Flowers trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, the Valley of Flowers trek is safe for women trekking alone. Women trekkers share rooms only with other women, and the trek leader and support staff stay with the group throughout. The trail to Ghangaria and Hemkund Sahib is well marked, but keep your valuables secure, as on any group trip. ### What food is served on the Valley of Flowers trek? The Valley of Flowers trek serves simple, nutritious vegetarian meals suited to trekkers, with packed lunches on the trail days. - **Lunch box:** bring a reusable one for packed lunches - **Hemkund Sahib:** the gurudwara runs a langar that is open to all visitors - **Snacks:** nuts, energy bars, dark chocolate and dates, especially for the Hemkund climb ### What about drinking water on the Valley of Flowers trek? On the Valley of Flowers trek, carry two 1 L bottles and refill them at the points the trek leader or guide shows you. Add ORS or electrolyte sachets to your water every day, especially on the Hemkund Sahib climb. ### Do I need my own trekking gear for the Valley of Flowers trek? Yes. On the Valley of Flowers trek you bring your own trekking shoes, jacket and poles; microspikes and gaiters are provided free, with no deposit and no charge. ### Can I offload my backpack on the Valley of Flowers trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Valley of Flowers trek costs ₹2,000 + 5% GST, and a porter or mule carries your main bag. - **Day pack:** carry a 20–30 L day pack with a rain cover - **Day walks:** on Days 3 and 4 you return to Ghangaria, so you only need the day pack for the Valley and Hemkund Sahib ### Is there a doctor on the Valley of Flowers trek? No, a doctor does not join the Valley of Flowers trek, but your health is monitored: SpO2, pulse and blood pressure are recorded on Day 1 and checked twice on Hemkund Sahib day. - **Trek leaders:** trained in Wilderness First Aid, with a first-aid kit - **Your kit:** blister plasters, ORS and your regular medicines; consult your doctor before the trek ### What documents do I need for the Valley of Flowers trek? For the Valley of Flowers trek, carry an original government photo ID with a photocopy and travel insurance with emergency evacuation cover, which is mandatory. - **ID:** Aadhaar, passport, voter ID or driving licence - **International trekkers:** passport and visa, needed for forest entry permits and any medical evacuation - **Medical:** a medical fitness certificate signed by a doctor (mandatory) - **Forms:** the disclaimer form and your Trekkaro booking confirmation ### Do I need a permit for the Valley of Flowers trek? Yes, entry to the Valley of Flowers National Park needs a Forest Department permit, which is checked at Ghangaria and again at the valley gate. The Day 1 briefing explains the valley permits, and international trekkers need their passport for forest entry. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Valley of Flowers trek? On the Valley of Flowers trek the last ATM is in Joshimath. Mobile signal is mostly reliable up to Govind Ghat; beyond Ghangaria expect little or no connectivity. - **Cash:** carry small notes for your share of transport and small expenses, as cards are not accepted in the mountains - **Power:** bring a power bank for the trek days ### Is Hemkund Sahib part of the Valley of Flowers trek? Yes, the Valley of Flowers trek includes a day climb to Hemkund Sahib (4,329 m / 14,200 ft) on Day 4, returning to Ghangaria the same day: about 12 km in 6–7 hours. - **The lake:** a glacial lake, partly frozen, ringed by seven snow peaks - **The gurudwara:** a Sikh pilgrimage site with a langar open to all visitors - **Timing:** start early, before the afternoon weather sets in ### What happens if bad weather delays the Valley of Flowers trek? Mountain weather is unpredictable, so the Valley of Flowers itinerary may change if conditions demand it. Keep a buffer day in your own travel plans to be safe. Monsoon roads between Rishikesh and Joshimath can also be slow, so book onward travel for late night or the next day. ### What is the minimum age for the Valley of Flowers trek? The minimum age for the Valley of Flowers trek is 9 years. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 3 Jul 2027 to 8 Jul 2027 - 4 Jul 2027 to 9 Jul 2027 - 10 Jul 2027 to 15 Jul 2027 - 11 Jul 2027 to 16 Jul 2027 - 17 Jul 2027 to 22 Jul 2027 - 18 Jul 2027 to 23 Jul 2027 - 24 Jul 2027 to 29 Jul 2027 - 25 Jul 2027 to 30 Jul 2027 - 31 Jul 2027 to 5 Aug 2027 - 1 Aug 2027 to 6 Aug 2027 - 7 Aug 2027 to 12 Aug 2027 - 8 Aug 2027 to 13 Aug 2027 - … 12 more on the trek page --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/valley-of-flowers · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 # Vasuki Tal Trek > Vasuki Tal Trek is a 9-day difficult trek in Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand, reaching 4,880 m (16,010 ft). It covers about 71 km on foot and starts and ends at Gangotri. Best time: May to June and September to October. Trekkaro price: ₹28,500 per person + 5% GST, with Free Trekking Gear (Decathlon shoes, -10°C jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing). Next batch: 24 Oct 2026 (10 upcoming batches). Source: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/vasuki-tal-trek (Trekkaro Adventures Pvt. Ltd.). Last updated: 2026-10-14. Batch dates and prices are updated through the season: confirm them on the trek page before you book. ## Key facts - **Duration:** 9 days - **Difficulty:** Difficult - **Highest point:** 4,880 m / 16,010 ft - **Trekking distance:** 71 km - **Region:** Uttarkashi, Uttarakhand - **Start / end:** Gangotri - **Best time:** May to June and September to October - **Temperature:** Summer (May-Jun): Day 5°C to 12°C, Night -3°C to 3°C | Autumn (Sep-Oct): Day 2°C to 7°C, Night -15°C to -5°C - **Price:** ₹28,500 per person + 5% GST - **Gear from Trekkaro:** Free Trekking Gear included (Decathlon trekking shoes, -10°C jacket, trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes; ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing) - **Next batch:** 24 Oct 2026 (10 upcoming) ## Overview The Ganga begins in ice. At Gaumukh, the snout of the Gangotri Glacier, blocks of it break away and crash into the river below. On the Vasuki Tal trek, that is where the real climb begins: up steep moraine to a meadow at the foot of Shivling, across the boulders and ice of the glacier itself, and on to a still lake at 4,880 metres where the summits of the Gangotri group look down at their own reflection. Nine days, one river, and a slow walk from a temple town to the edge of the ice. The Vasuki Tal trek follows the Bhagirathi upstream from Gangotri, through the pine forest of Chirbasa and the riverside camp at Bhojbasa, to Gaumukh, the mythological and geographical source of the Ganga. Above the snout it leaves the pilgrim path and climbs to Tapovan, the high meadow where Shivling (6,543 m / 21,467 ft) rises like a needle over your tent, with Meru beside it. From there it crosses the Gangotri Glacier to Nandanvan, a green meadow at the base of the Bhagirathi massif, and ends at Vasuki Tal, a glacial lake ringed by rugged ridges and steep banks of alpine vegetation. Sudarshan, Kharchakund, Kedar Dome, Satopanth and the three Bhagirathi peaks complete the circle around you. The Vasuki Tal trek is a 9-day, 71 km high-altitude trek in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalayas. It starts and ends at Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft), the temple town where, by tradition, the Ganga descended to Earth, and it climbs to Vasuki Tal at 4,880 m (16,010 ft), the highest point of the route. On the way it camps at Bhojbasa (3,775 m), Tapovan (4,463 m) and Nandanvan (4,340 m). It is graded Difficult because of its moraine climbs, its glacier crossing and its nights above 4,000 metres, and it is as much a pilgrimage as a trek, passing through some of the holiest landscapes of the Garhwal region. In our experience, few treks in Uttarakhand put you this close to so many big peaks for so many days in a row. ### Beneath Shivling, Across the Ice – What Makes the Vasuki Tal Trek Unmissable On many treks, the big peaks are a view across a valley. On Vasuki Tal you walk among them. The day that changes everything starts at Bhojbasa. You leave camp early and follow the river for two to three hours to Gaumukh, where the glacier snout stands in front of you and ice breaks off into the water that becomes the Ganga. Then the trail turns uphill. You climb over glacial moraine, rocky patches and steep ridges, about 675 metres of height in a 6–7 hour day, with short stops to breathe in the thin air. And then the ground levels out into Tapovan: a wide meadow at 4,463 metres with streams running through it and wildflowers in the grass, and Shivling, known as the “Matterhorn of the Himalayas”, standing straight above it. In the evening the last light turns the snow on Shivling and the Bhagirathi peaks gold. Tapovan has long been known as a retreat for sages, and it is still a meeting place for sadhus and mountaineers. Sitting there at dusk, it is easy to understand why. The next day asks something different of you. You descend steeply onto the Gangotri Glacier and spend the day crossing its uneven surface of moraine, boulders and icy patches, with crevasses in the ice and Himalayan giants on every side: Shivling, the elegant Meru, Kedar Dome and the imposing Bhagirathi peaks. The height change is small, a loss of about 120 metres, yet the 7 km takes 5–6 hours, because every step needs thought. It is real glacier travel, slow and absorbing, and it shows you the raw shape of a Himalayan glacier from the inside. Nandanvan, when you reach it, is green grass beneath the Bhagirathi massif, and after a day of grey stone and ice the contrast feels almost unreal. Then comes the lake. Vasuki Tal lies at 4,880 metres, encircled by rugged ridges and steep banks dotted with alpine vegetation. On a calm day its clear water holds the snow summits around it, and the view takes in Shivling, the Bhagirathi peaks, Meru and Satopanth together. You stand at the water’s edge, far above the last tree and a long way from the nearest road, and watch the mountains settle into the surface. The river you followed out of Gangotri is far below now. Up here there is only still water, stone and snow, and for a while that is enough. ### The Bhagirathi Valley Itself Few routes change character as completely as this one. The first day on foot from Gangotri climbs gently along the Bhagirathi through coniferous forest, with snowy peaks appearing between the tall trees. Chirbasa, at 3,600 metres, is known as the home of pines, and beyond it the forest gives way to alpine meadow and rocky paths. Here the first close views of the Bhagirathi peaks and Shivling open up, and the air turns cooler and thinner. Bhojbasa, at 3,775 metres, takes its name from the bhoj, or birch, trees that once flourished there; today it is an open riverbank camp with wide meadows and an unbroken view of the high peaks, where the sunset turns their snow gold. Above Gaumukh the trees are gone. The land becomes moraine, rock and ice, broken by two islands of green: Tapovan, with its streams and wildflowers, and Nandanvan, under the Bhagirathi massif. Herds of bharal, the blue sheep of the Himalayas, are seen moving along the ridgelines on many days above the trail. Over a few days you walk from pine shade to bare glacier and on to a lake beyond the last of the meadows, and watching that change unfold one step at a time is one of the quiet rewards of this route. ### Who Is This Trek For? The Vasuki Tal trek is graded Difficult, and we recommend it for trekkers with prior Himalayan experience and good fitness. It is not a first high-altitude trek. Walking days run 7–14 km and take 5–7 hours, with long hours on steep ascents, moraine and glacier. The hardest stretch is the climb from Gaumukh to Tapovan, about 675 metres of height on steep, loose ground in a day that starts by 6 am, followed by the slow crossing of the Gangotri Glacier to Nandanvan. You spend several nights camping above 4,000 metres, and in May and June snow still lies on parts of the trail. An acclimatisation day at Gangotri is built in before the trek begins to climb. We suggest at least eight weeks of steady preparation before departure, so that the moraine days feel controlled rather than exhausting. Season: May to June and September to October. ### Key Highlights of the Vasuki Tal Trek - **Gaumukh, the source of the Ganga** – the snout of the Gangotri Glacier at 3,892 m (12,770 ft), whose name means “cow’s mouth”, where blocks of ice break off into the river. - **Tapovan beneath Shivling** – a high meadow at 4,463 m (14,640 ft), with Shivling (6,543 m / 21,467 ft) rising straight above camp. - **Crossing the Gangotri Glacier** – a full day on moraine, boulders and icy patches, with big peaks on every side. - **Nandanvan under the Bhagirathi massif** – a green meadow at 4,340 m (14,240 ft), in sharp contrast to the ice around it. - **Vasuki Tal at 4,880 m (16,010 ft)** – the highest point of the trek, a glacial lake with views of Shivling, the Bhagirathi peaks, Meru and Satopanth. - **A circle of Garhwal giants** – Shivling, Meru, Sudarshan, Kharchakund, Kedar Dome, Satopanth and Bhagirathi I, II and III. - **Gangotri, a Char Dham shrine** – the temple town at the start, with its evening aarti and short acclimatisation walks to Surya Kund and Pandava Gufa. - **From pine forest to bare ice** – the pines of Chirbasa, the riverside camp of Bhojbasa and then glacier country, with bharal on the ridgelines. ### Best Time to Do the Vasuki Tal Trek The Vasuki Tal trek runs in two windows: May to June, before the monsoon, and September to October, after it. Both reach the same lake beneath the same peaks, but they feel like different treks. The early window brings lingering snow and milder nights; the later one brings clear skies and serious cold. #### May to June – Snow on the Upper Trail The early season opens with the high trail still holding on to winter. Snow lingers in patches near Gaumukh and around Vasuki Tal, so the upper days ask more of you, and conditions are challenging yet rewarding. Lower down, high-altitude flora begins to bloom, and the days are cool and bright for walking. Nights at camp are cold but far gentler than in autumn. For trekkers who want snow underfoot on the high trail without the deepest cold of the year, this is a strong window. - **Temperatures:** Day: 5°C to 12°C | Night at camp: -3°C to 3°C - **Trail conditions:** Snow patches near Gaumukh and Vasuki Tal; lingering snow on parts of the upper trail. - **Best for:** Snow on the high trail, early high-altitude flora and milder nights at camp. #### September to October – Post-Monsoon Clarity Once the monsoon passes, the skies over the upper Bhagirathi valley clear, and this is the best time of year for wide, sharp views of the big peaks. Shivling stands crisp above Tapovan, and from Vasuki Tal the Bhagirathi peaks, Meru and Satopanth line up under clear skies. The trade-off is cold. Days are crisp rather than warm, and nights at the high camps fall far below freezing. For trekkers who come for the mountains above all else, the clarity is worth the cold. - **Temperatures:** Day: 2°C to 7°C | Night at camp: -15°C to -5°C - **Trail conditions:** Clear post-monsoon skies; cold days and very cold nights at the upper camps. - **Best for:** The clearest views of Shivling and the Gangotri peaks, and snow summits mirrored in Vasuki Tal on calm days. #### Trekkaro Recommendation For the grandest, clearest views of Shivling and the Gangotri group, we recommend a September to October batch, provided you are ready for nights far below freezing. If you would rather walk with snow on the upper trail and milder nights at camp, choose May to June. In either window, give yourself enough time to prepare properly; the trek rewards trekkers who arrive strong. ## Itinerary ### Day 1: Drive from Dehradun to Gangotri **Route Details:** **Pickup: Dehradun Railway Station, 6:30 AM | Drive: Dehradun → Gangotri (~241 km, 10–11 hrs) | Altitude: 655 m → 3,065 m (10,050 ft) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay (triple or quad sharing)** The Vasuki Tal journey starts on the road. It is a long drive of about 241 km, and the cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM so you reach Gangotri by evening with time left for the temple. The route climbs through Mussoorie and then follows the Bhagirathi River up the valley: Uttarkashi with its temples and ashrams, the small town of Bhatwari, and then the apple-laden valleys of Harshil and Dharali. As you gain height, the views open to snow-dusted ridges, streams tumbling down the hillsides and thick pine and deodar forest. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs, paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM before Gangotri, so withdraw enough cash there for the whole trip. Gangotri is the last place with a steady mobile signal, on BSNL, Jio and Airtel. Once you cross Bhojwasa on Day 3, expect to be completely off-grid until you return. Gangotri, at 3,065 m (10,050 ft), is the base for the Gaumukh, Tapovan and Vasuki Tal route and a sacred pilgrimage town. It is believed to be the place where the Ganga descended to Earth, sanctified by Lord Shiva. After you check in, visit the Gangotri temple, stroll through the market, meet the sadhus or simply sit by the river for a while. The day ends with a group introduction and trek briefing after dinner. What to Expect: - ~241 km drive (10–11 hrs) via Mussoorie, Uttarkashi, Bhatwari, Harshil and Dharali - Early start from Dehradun around 6:30 AM; shared cab not included in the trek fee - Last ATM at Bhatwari; last stable mobile signal at Gangotri - Evening at the Gangotri temple and market - Group introduction and trek briefing after dinner - Overnight: Gangotri guesthouse / homestay (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) ### Day 2: Acclimatisation Day at Gangotri **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,065 m (10,050 ft) | Activity: optional short hikes to Surya Kund and Pandava Gufa, 4–6 km, 3–4 hrs | Altitude gain: minimal (~100–200 m) | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay** Day 2 is an acclimatisation day, and on a trek that climbs to 4,880 m it is one of the most important days of the itinerary. You stay at Gangotri, 3,065 m (10,050 ft), and give your body time to adjust before the trail begins. Light activity helps you adapt far better than complete rest, so the plan is a few easy walks rather than a day in bed. After breakfast, take short hikes to Surya Kund and Pandava Gufa, 4–6 km in all over 3–4 hours, with only 100–200 m of gain. The trails pass pine and deodar forest and run along the Bhagirathi River, with snow-clad peaks in the distance, and they give you a first feel of the terrain. Walk at an easy pace, avoid overexertion and drink 3–4 litres of water spread through the day. In the afternoon, visit the Gangotri temple, one of the four Char Dham shrines. Stay for the evening aarti if you can; it is a moving way to close the day. You can also walk the riverbank or browse the market. The rest of the time is kept light to save energy. Later, the trek leader runs a briefing on the route, safety tips and acclimatisation guidelines for the days ahead. What to Expect: - Rest and acclimatisation at Gangotri before going higher - Optional short hikes to Surya Kund and Pandava Gufa (4–6 km, 3–4 hrs) - Easy walks along the Bhagirathi with views of snow-capped peaks - Evening aarti at the Gangotri temple - Trek leader’s briefing on route, safety and acclimatisation - Overnight: Gangotri guesthouse / homestay (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) ### Day 3: Gangotri to Bhojwasa via Chirbasa **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,065 m → 3,775 m (12,385 ft) | Distance: 14 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: gradual riverside trail through pine forest, then rocky paths and meadow | Stay: Tents at Bhojwasa** Day 3 is the first trekking day, and at 14 km it is a long one. After an early breakfast you leave Gangotri and follow the Bhagirathi River upstream. The ascent is gentle at the start and the trail stays mostly gradual, but you gain about 735 m by afternoon. That is a significant jump, so walk at a steady pace and resist the urge to rush, even on the easy sections. In our experience, the trekkers who feel best at Bhojwasa tonight are the ones who walked the first half slower than they needed to. The early part of the day runs through coniferous pine forest, with snowy peaks showing between the tall trunks. Within a few hours you reach Chirbasa (3,600 m), whose name means the home of pines. It is a natural rest stop. Drink well here and eat something; the second half of the day is higher and more exposed. Beyond Chirbasa the forest falls away and the trail changes character. The path turns rockier and crosses open stretches of alpine meadow. There is no single hard section today; the challenge is the length of the walk and the height you gain. Now the big views arrive: Sudarshan, the Bhagirathi peaks (I, II and III) and the sharp outline of Mount Shivling ahead. The air becomes cooler and noticeably thinner as you approach Bhojwasa. By afternoon you reach Bhojwasa (also written Bhojbasa) at 3,775 m (12,385 ft), named after the bhoj (birch) trees that once flourished here. The campsite sits on the riverbank among wide, open meadows, with clear views of the high Himalaya. Once your tent is up, take a short acclimatisation walk around camp; it helps your body settle at the new height. Evening snacks and a hot dinner follow at camp. At sunset, golden light catches the snow peaks above the valley. From here on there is no mobile network. What to Expect: - First trekking day: 14 km, 5–6 hrs, ~735 m gain on a mostly gradual trail - Pine forest along the Bhagirathi to Chirbasa (3,600 m), the home of pines - Views of Sudarshan, Bhagirathi I, II and III, and Shivling beyond Chirbasa - Rocky paths and open meadow as the forest thins - Short acclimatisation walk and sunset over the peaks at camp - Overnight: Bhojwasa riverside camp (3,775 m / 12,385 ft) ### Day 4: Bhojwasa to Tapovan via Gaumukh **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,775 m → 3,892 m (Gaumukh) → 4,463 m (14,640 ft) | Distance: 9 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: riverside trail, then steep glacial moraine, rocky patches and ridges | Stay: Tents at Tapovan** Day 4 is long and challenging, and we recommend starting by 6:00 AM. From Bhojwasa the trail follows the Bhagirathi River upstream for 2–3 hours to Gaumukh, at 3,892 m (12,770 ft). Gaumukh means cow’s mouth. It is the snout of the Gangotri Glacier and both the mythological and the geographical source of the Ganga. Standing in front of it is humbling: a wall of ice where blocks break away and crash into the river below. Take time here for prayers or simply to watch. Then the real work of the day begins. The climb from Gaumukh to Tapovan is steep, crossing glacial moraine, rocky patches and steep ridges. The moraine is loose and uneven, so place your feet deliberately, use your poles and follow the guide’s line rather than picking your own. Short steps and frequent pauses are normal on this climb, and nobody should feel rushed. Carry enough water and snacks for the full day, and keep your sun protection on; the light off rock and ice is harsh at this height. The reward comes all at once. Tapovan, at 4,463 m (14,640 ft), is a vast alpine meadow with streams and wildflowers, set directly beneath Mount Shivling (6,543 m / 21,467 ft). Known as the Matterhorn of the Himalayas, Shivling rises like a needle into the sky above camp. Around you stand the Bhagirathi peaks (I, II and III), Meru and Sudarshan Parbat, closer than you have seen them so far. Tapovan is a place of both pilgrimage and climbing, a hub for sadhus and mountaineers alike. In the evening the sky turns gold and the last light lingers on Shivling and the Bhagirathi peaks. This is your highest camp so far, so eat well at dinner, keep sipping water through the evening and get into your sleeping bag early. What to Expect: - Early start by 6:00 AM; 9 km, 6–7 hrs, ~675 m gain - Gaumukh (3,892 m), snout of the Gangotri Glacier and source of the Ganga - Steep climb over glacial moraine, rocky patches and ridges to Tapovan - Close views of Shivling (6,543 m), Bhagirathi I–III, Meru and Sudarshan Parbat - Carry water, snacks and sun protection for the whole day - Overnight: Tapovan meadow camp (4,463 m / 14,640 ft) ### Day 5: Tapovan to Nandanvan across the Gangotri Glacier **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,463 m → 4,340 m (14,240 ft) | Distance: 7 km | Duration: 5–6 hrs | Terrain: steep descent onto the Gangotri Glacier, moraine, crevasses and boulders, then a gradual climb to meadow | Stay: Tents at Nandanvan** Day 5 takes you across the Gangotri Glacier, one of the most adventurous sections of the trek. On paper it looks easy, 7 km with a net drop of about 120 m. In practice the ground decides your pace, and you should expect 5–6 hours of careful walking. Wear sturdy trekking shoes and gaiters today. The small drop in altitude is useful too: it gives your body a slightly easier night before the highest day of the trek. After breakfast at Tapovan, the trail drops steeply onto the glacier. The descent needs careful footing on rock and icy patches. Once you are on the ice, the surface is an uneven mix of moraine, crevasses and boulders. Stay close behind the guide, step where they step, and test loose rocks before you trust them. This is not ground to hurry on; a steady, unbroken pace is safer than bursts of speed followed by long stops. If any section makes you uneasy, tell the guide; it is always better to slow the group down than to take a chance on the ice. The setting is the reason this crossing stays with people. You walk with Himalayan giants on every side: Mount Shivling (6,543 m), the elegant Meru, the imposing Bhagirathi peaks and Kedar Dome. Many trekkers find this the most exciting stretch of the whole route, because it combines real high-altitude terrain with close-up views of the peaks at the same time. After the glacier, the trail climbs gradually to Nandanvan, at 4,340 m (14,240 ft), an open meadow at the foot of the Bhagirathi massif. The soft grassland feels very different from the icy, rugged world you crossed to reach it. Rest your legs, and as evening sets in, watch Shivling glow gold in the last of the sun. Nandanvan is your base for the next two nights, and tomorrow is the climb to Vasuki Tal. What to Expect: - Steep descent from Tapovan onto the Gangotri Glacier - Glacier crossing over moraine, crevasses and boulders – gaiters and sturdy shoes needed - 7 km, 5–6 hrs, ~120 m net descent - Close views of Shivling, Meru, the Bhagirathi peaks and Kedar Dome - Gradual climb to the open grassland of Nandanvan at the foot of the Bhagirathi massif - Overnight: Nandanvan meadow camp (4,340 m / 14,240 ft) ### Day 6: Nandanvan to Vasuki Tal and back to Nandanvan **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,340 m → 4,880 m (16,010 ft) → 4,340 m | Distance: 12 km (round trip) | Duration: 7–8 hrs | Terrain: rocky moraine and rugged glacial ground | Stay: Tents at Nandanvan** Day 6 is the day the trek is named for. You climb about 540 m from Nandanvan to Vasuki Tal, the highest point of the trek at 4,880 m (16,010 ft), and then walk back down to the same camp. Start early, straight after breakfast. Water sources on the trail to the lake are limited, so fill every bottle at Nandanvan before you set off. We recommend packing your day bag the night before, with warm layers, sun protection, snacks and water, so you can leave without a rush. The climb is gradual but steady, across rocky moraine and rugged glacial terrain. The gradient itself is not severe; the altitude is what makes it hard. Above 4,500 m your breathing sets the pace, and that is fine. Take short, regular breaks rather than long ones, and keep eating small amounts even if you do not feel hungry. The ascent takes 3–4 hours. As you climb, the skyline fills with the giants of the region. Mount Shivling (6,543 m), Bhagirathi I to III and Meru stand around you, while Vasuki Parbat (6,792 m) towers close above the trail. Then the lake appears: Vasuki Tal, a glacial lake set among stark mountain cliffs, its water clear and turquoise, ringed by rugged ridges and steep banks dotted with alpine vegetation. On a calm day the snow-clad summits reflect on its surface. The lake is held sacred, and it is worth sitting quietly by the shore for a while before you turn back. The return follows the same route to Nandanvan, and walking down gives you a fresh view of the glacier and the meadows you crossed yesterday. Take the descent slowly over the moraine; tired legs make loose rock harder to judge. Back at camp, rest, rehydrate and enjoy having reached the high point of the trek. What to Expect: - Early start; 12 km round trip, 7–8 hrs, ~540 m up and down - Steady climb over rocky moraine and glacial terrain (3–4 hrs to the lake) - Vasuki Parbat (6,792 m) close above the trail, with Shivling, the Bhagirathi peaks and Meru around you - Vasuki Tal (4,880 m / 16,010 ft), the highest point of the trek - Limited water on the trail – fill all bottles at camp - Overnight: Nandanvan meadow camp (4,340 m / 14,240 ft) ### Day 7: Nandanvan to Bhojwasa **Route Details:** **Altitude: 4,340 m → 3,775 m (12,385 ft) | Distance: 15 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: glacial moraine along the Gangotri Glacier, then birch and pine trail | Stay: Tents at Bhojwasa** Day 7 is a long descent, 15 km over 6–7 hours, losing about 575 m. You leave the glacial meadow of Nandanvan with Mount Shivling and the Bhagirathi peaks standing tall behind you. Turn around on the first stretch; these are your last close views of them on this trek. The day is mostly downhill, so the effort shifts from your lungs to your knees and thighs. Keep your poles adjusted a little longer for the descent and drink regularly, even though you will not feel as thirsty as on the climbs. The first section is the trickiest. You navigate glacial moraine and rocky stretches along the edge of the Gangotri Glacier, and the footing needs balance and attention. Use your trekking poles for stability, keep your weight over your feet and take the loose sections one step at a time. It is easy to lose focus on a descent after the high point is behind you, and this is exactly the stretch where you need it most. Once the moraine is behind you, the walking becomes noticeably easier. The trail then eases onto more familiar paths lined with birch and pine, leading back towards the valley floor. Keep an eye on the slopes as you go. This is Bharal country, and herds of blue sheep are seen moving on many days along the ridgelines. With every hour the landscape shifts from rugged alpine ground back to green valley. You reach Bhojwasa, at 3,775 m (12,385 ft), by afternoon. The Bhagirathi River flows gently past camp, and after the rugged days higher up the place feels calm and soft. Enjoy a hot meal, rest your legs and look back on the days at Gaumukh, Tapovan, Nandanvan and Vasuki Tal. It is a good night to sleep well; one more day on foot takes you back to Gangotri. What to Expect: - Long descent: 15 km, 6–7 hrs, ~575 m loss - Careful start over glacial moraine along the edge of the Gangotri Glacier; poles recommended - Last close views of Shivling, the Bhagirathi peaks and Meru - Chance to spot Bharal (blue sheep) on the ridgelines - Easier birch and pine trail down to the valley floor - Overnight: Bhojwasa riverside camp (3,775 m / 12,385 ft) ### Day 8: Bhojwasa to Gangotri **Route Details:** **Altitude: 3,775 m → 3,065 m (10,050 ft) | Distance: 14 km | Duration: 6–7 hrs | Terrain: riverside descent through pine, birch and deodar forest | Stay: Guesthouse / homestay in Gangotri** Day 8 is your last morning in the high-altitude silence of the Gangotri National Park. After breakfast you begin the 14 km descent to Gangotri, dropping about 710 m over 6–7 hours. The route retraces the trail you climbed on Day 3, but going down you notice details you missed on the way up: the forests, the flowing streams and the mountain views now laid out in front of you. We recommend an early start so you reach Gangotri by afternoon, with time for darshan and a relaxed evening. The trail first follows the river, with several good spots to pause. After around 2 hours you pass Chirbasa again, among its dense pine and birch trees. From here the walk becomes gentler, winding through the valley past grazing meadows and cascading waterfalls. A full day of downhill is tiring on the knees, so keep your stride short and lean on your poles where the path steepens. The trail is familiar now, which makes it easier to relax into the walk and enjoy the forest. At Devdarshini Point, the first views of Gangotri town and its surrounding forests appear, a welcome sight after days in the wilderness. Take a last look back at the Bhagirathi massif before the trail drops away. From here it is downhill all the way to the Gangotri temple, where the trek ends. Keep your focus on this final stretch; the last hour of a long descent is when tired legs are most likely to slip. Spend the evening as you like. Walk through the local market, return to the temple for darshan, or simply enjoy a hot meal and the comfort of a guesthouse bed after five nights under canvas. Gangotri also has a mobile signal again, so this is the moment to call home and let your family know you are down safely. What to Expect: - 14 km, 6–7 hrs, ~710 m descent along the Bhagirathi - Pine, birch and deodar forest; pass Chirbasa after about 2 hours - First view of Gangotri town from Devdarshini Point - Final views of the Bhagirathi massif - Evening darshan at the Gangotri temple - Overnight: Gangotri guesthouse / homestay (3,065 m / 10,050 ft) ### Day 9: Drive from Gangotri to Dehradun **Route Details:** **Drive: Gangotri → Dehradun (~241 km, 10–11 hrs) | Altitude: 3,065 m → 655 m (2,150 ft) | End: Dehradun by evening** The final day is the drive back to Dehradun. Leave Gangotri early, around 6:30 AM, so you reach the city by evening without delays. The road follows the Bhagirathi downstream through villages, forests and valleys, past Dharali and Harshil with their apple orchards. Lower down you pass Uttarkashi, a hub for mountaineering and river rafting, and then Mussoorie, a popular hill station, before the road descends into the Doon Valley. The Garhwal Himalaya slip away behind you over the course of the day, and the air grows warmer as you drop about 2,410 m in a single day. Food on the road is not included, so plan your meal stops along the way. The shared cab reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 07:00 PM. When you plan onward travel, we advise keeping at least one buffer day in hand, since weather or glacier conditions can hold a group up on the trail. What to Expect: - Early 6:30 AM departure from Gangotri - Drive past Dharali, Harshil, Uttarkashi and Mussoorie into the Doon Valley - ~241 km, 10–11 hrs; meals in transit are on your own - Last views of the Garhwal Himalaya - Drop at Dehradun Railway Station (655 m / 2,150 ft) by about 07:00 PM ## Inclusions #### 1. Free Trekking Gear (FTG) - Decathlon trekking shoes - Decathlon jacket rated to -10°C - Trekking poles, gaiters and microspikes - No rental fee: ₹3,000 refundable deposit + ₹200 washing charge #### 2. Accommodation - Day 1, Day 2 and Day 8: guesthouse or homestay in Gangotri, on a triple/quad sharing basis - Day 3 to Day 7: camping in 3-person tents at Bhojwasa, Tapovan and Nandanvan #### 3. Meals - All meals from Day 1 dinner to Day 8 dinner - Freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food - Tea, coffee, soups and snacks during the trek #### 4. Permits & Camping Fees - All necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees #### 5. Camping & Safety Equipment - Tents and sleeping bags - Large mess tents with tables - All technical equipment needed on the trek, including ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes - First-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders at every camp - Stretchers at each campsite for emergency evacuation #### 6. Trek Team - Experienced trek leaders, supported by local certified mountain guides ## Exclusions #### 1. Transport - Transport (Dehradun to Gangotri and back) is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹8,000 one way per 6-seater vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. #### 2. Food During Transit - Meals on the drive between Dehradun and Gangotri #### 3. Backpack Offloading (optional) - ₹4,300 + 5% GST for the entire trek - Maximum weight: 9 kg; no suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - Charges may be higher for last-minute requests made at Gangotri #### 4. Single Tent Occupancy (optional) - ₹2,000 + 5% GST per tent for the entire trek #### 5. Personal Equipment - Your backpack, clothing and other personal gear (trekking shoes, jacket, poles, gaiters and microspikes come with Free Trekking Gear) #### 6. Trek Insurance - Travel insurance is mandatory and not included. It must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation. #### 7. Anything Not Mentioned Under Inclusions - If an item is not listed under inclusions, it is not part of the package; ask in advance if you are unsure ## How to reach ### By air **Nearest airport:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city, with direct flights from Delhi and other metros. The drive to Gangotri takes 10–11 hours, so fly in the day before and stay in Dehradun. **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** about 241 km, a 10–11 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Gangotri at 06:30 AM. **Return:** on the last day the cab leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and is expected to reach Dehradun Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book onward travel for late night or the next day, and keep one buffer day free in case weather or glacier conditions delay the trek. ### By train **Nearest railway station:** Dehradun (DDN), with direct trains from Delhi. The overnight Nanda Devi Express reaches Dehradun early in the morning, but with a 10–11 hour drive ahead, arriving a day early is the safer plan; check current timings and book early in peak season. - **Nanda Devi Express** – overnight from New Delhi - **Dehradun Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi or Vande Bharat** – day trains; take one the day before and stay in Dehradun **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** about 241 km, a 10–11 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Gangotri at 06:30 AM. **Return:** on the last day the cab leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and is expected to reach Dehradun Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book onward travel for late night or the next day, and keep one buffer day free in case weather or glacier conditions delay the trek. ### By road **Bus route:** Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT takes about 6–7 hours, and Uttarakhand Roadways Volvo and ordinary buses run through the night. From Dehradun ISBT, an app cab, auto or shared three-wheeler gets you around the city, including to Dehradun Railway Station for the 06:30 AM pickup. - **Choose government buses** – board them inside ISBT Kashmere Gate for safety and reliability - **Avoid private buses** – those that leave from outside the ISBT premises are unreliable **From Dehradun to Gangotri:** about 241 km, a 10–11 hour drive. Transport is not included in the trek fee: we help the group book shared cabs (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. The cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station for Gangotri at 06:30 AM. **Return:** on the last day the cab leaves Gangotri at 06:30 AM and is expected to reach Dehradun Railway Station by 07:00 PM. Book onward travel for late night or the next day, and keep one buffer day free in case weather or glacier conditions delay the trek. ## ATM and mobile network #### 1. Last ATM - Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM before Gangotri - There is no ATM on the trail - Carry small notes: cards are not accepted on the trail #### 2. Mobile Network - Gangotri is the last place with a stable signal; BSNL, Jio and Airtel work there - There is no reliable signal after Gangotri - Make your important calls and tell your family about the limited connectivity before you leave the base ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is the Vasuki Tal trek, and where does it start? The Vasuki Tal trek is in Uttarkashi district, Uttarakhand, in the Garhwal Himalayas. It starts from Gangotri (3,065 m / 10,050 ft), about 241 km (10–11 hours) by road from Dehradun. From Gangotri the trail follows the Bhagirathi past Chirbasa and Bhojwasa to Gaumukh and Tapovan, crosses the Gangotri Glacier to Nandanvan and climbs to the glacial lake of Vasuki Tal at 4,880 m (16,010 ft). ### How many days is the Vasuki Tal trek? The Vasuki Tal trek takes 9 days from Dehradun to Dehradun, with 6 trekking days covering about 71 km. - **Day 1 and Day 9:** drive between Dehradun and Gangotri (241 km, 10–11 hours) - **Day 2:** acclimatisation day at Gangotri, with optional short hikes - **Days 3–8:** trekking, 7–15 km a day - **Longest day:** Day 7, Nandanvan to Bhojwasa, 15 km in 6–7 hours ### What is the altitude of the Vasuki Tal trek? The highest point of the Vasuki Tal trek is the lake itself at 4,880 m (16,010 ft). From Gangotri (3,065 m) you climb about 1,800 m and spend three nights above 4,300 m. - **Bhojwasa camp:** 3,775 m (12,385 ft) - **Gaumukh:** 3,892 m (12,770 ft) - **Tapovan camp:** 4,463 m (14,640 ft) - **Nandanvan camp:** 4,340 m (14,240 ft) ### What is the difficulty level of the Vasuki Tal trek? The Vasuki Tal trek is graded Difficult, with long walking hours, steep ascents, moraine and glacier crossings and high-altitude camping. It is best suited to trekkers with prior Himalayan experience and good fitness. - **Day 4:** steep climb over glacial moraine from Gaumukh to Tapovan - **Day 5:** crossing the Gangotri Glacier over moraine, crevasses and boulders - **Day 6:** 12 km round trip to the lake in 7–8 hours over rocky moraine ### Is the Vasuki Tal trek good for beginners? No, the Vasuki Tal trek is not suitable for beginners. It is a 9-day Difficult trek over moraine and glacier ground to 4,880 m, best suited to trekkers with prior Himalayan experience. If you are new to trekking, gain experience on an easier high-altitude trek first. ### What fitness level do I need for the Vasuki Tal trek? The Vasuki Tal trek needs a high level of fitness: you walk 5–8 hours a day for six days on rocky trail, glacial moraine and glacier. - **Daily distance:** 7–15 km, with the longest day at 15 km - **Summit day:** about 540 m up and down over 12 km - **Train before the trek:** regular cardio and uphill walks with a loaded backpack ### What is the best time for the Vasuki Tal trek? The best time for the Vasuki Tal trek is May–June and September–October. From November onwards heavy snowfall makes the region inaccessible. - **May–June:** snow patches near Gaumukh and Vasuki Tal, especially in May - **September–October:** clear views after the monsoon, with much colder nights ### Is there snow on the Vasuki Tal trek? Yes, May brings snow patches near Gaumukh and Vasuki Tal on the Vasuki Tal trek, and gaiters and microspikes are provided free. - **Winter:** from November heavy snowfall makes the region inaccessible - **Glare:** sun reflecting off the glacier and snow is harsh, so wear UV sunglasses - **Gloves:** carry a waterproof pair for snow ### What are the day and night temperatures on the Vasuki Tal trek? Nights on the Vasuki Tal trek are -3°C to 3°C in May–June and fall to -15°C to -5°C in September–October. Days are 5–12°C in May–June and 2–7°C in September–October. - **Layers:** pack 4 warm layers in both seasons, as Tapovan and Nandanvan are high, cold camps - **Jacket:** a -10°C padded jacket comes free with Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear - **Wind:** a balaclava or buff for the cold wind at Tapovan and Vasuki Tal ### Which mountains can you see on the Vasuki Tal trek? On the Vasuki Tal trek Vasuki Parbat (6,792 m) rises close above the trail to the lake, with Shivling (6,543 m), the Bhagirathi peaks, Meru and Satopanth in view. - **Beyond Chirbasa:** Sudarshan, Bhagirathi I, II and III, and Shivling - **Tapovan:** close views of Shivling, Meru and Sudarshan Parbat - **Nandanvan:** Kedar Dome and the Bhagirathi massif - **Wildlife:** a chance to spot bharal (blue sheep) on the ridgelines ### What is the terrain like on the Vasuki Tal trek? The Vasuki Tal trek starts on a gradual riverside trail through pine forest and turns into rocky glacial moraine above Gaumukh, including a crossing of the Gangotri Glacier. - **Gangotri to Bhojwasa:** gradual trail through pine forest, then rocky paths and meadow - **Gaumukh to Tapovan:** steep glacial moraine, rocky patches and ridges - **Tapovan to Nandanvan:** moraine, crevasses and boulders on the glacier - **Nandanvan to Vasuki Tal:** rocky moraine and rugged glacial ground ### Is there a risk of altitude sickness on the Vasuki Tal trek? Yes, the Vasuki Tal trek crosses 4,500 m, so acclimatisation is crucial; the itinerary includes a rest day at Gangotri (Day 2) to reduce the risk of AMS. - **Step by step:** Bhojwasa (3,775 m) on Day 3 before Tapovan (4,463 m) on Day 4 - **High camps:** one night at Tapovan and two at Nandanvan (4,340 m) - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support, oxygen cylinders and a stretcher - **Buffer day:** keep one spare day in case acclimatisation or weather needs it ### Can trekkers above 60 do the Vasuki Tal trek? Trekkers above 60 can consider the Vasuki Tal trek only if they have very good fitness and prior Himalayan experience, as it is a 9-day Difficult trek over glacier ground to 4,880 m. - **Medical certificate:** carry one signed by a registered doctor - **Doctor’s advice:** consult your doctor before the trek - **Acclimatisation:** the rest day at Gangotri helps your body adjust ### How do I reach the Vasuki Tal trek base camp? The Vasuki Tal trek starts from Gangotri, about 241 km (10–11 hours) by road from Dehradun. Reach Dehradun the day before, as the cab leaves Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM on Day 1. - **By air:** Jolly Grant Airport (DED), about 25 km and 45–60 minutes from Dehradun city - **By train:** Dehradun (DDN), with the overnight Nanda Devi Express and day trains such as the Shatabdi, Jan Shatabdi and Vande Bharat - **By bus:** government buses from Delhi ISBT Kashmere Gate to Dehradun ISBT (6–7 hours) - **Return:** the cab leaves Gangotri at 6:30 AM and reaches Dehradun Railway Station by about 7:00 PM; keep one buffer day free ### Is transport included in the Vasuki Tal trek fee? No, transport is not included in the Vasuki Tal trek fee. We help the group book shared cabs between Dehradun and Gangotri (about ₹8,000 one way per 5–6 seat vehicle), paid directly to the driver and split among trekkers. - **Pickup:** Dehradun Railway Station at 6:30 AM on Day 1 - **Payment:** paid directly to the driver and split among the trekkers - **Route:** via Mussoorie, Uttarkashi, Bhatwari, Harshil and Dharali - **Meals in transit:** not included on the drive days ### Where do we stay on the Vasuki Tal trek? On the Vasuki Tal trek you stay 3 nights in a guesthouse or homestay at Gangotri and 5 nights in tents at Bhojwasa, Tapovan and Nandanvan. - **Gangotri (Days 1, 2 and 8):** guesthouse or homestay, triple or quad sharing - **Bhojwasa (Days 3 and 7):** riverside camp - **Tapovan (Day 4) and Nandanvan (Days 5–6):** high meadow camps - **Tents:** 3-person tents with mess tents; a single tent costs ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the whole trek ### Who leads the Vasuki Tal trek, and are local guides included? The Vasuki Tal trek is led by experienced trek leaders supported by local certified mountain guides, combining safety with local expertise. All technical equipment for the trek is included, from tents and sleeping bags to ice axes, microspikes, gaiters and ropes. ### Is the Vasuki Tal trek safe for women trekking alone? Yes, women can join the Vasuki Tal trek on their own: you trek in a group led by experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides. - **Tents:** shared 3-person tents, or a single tent for ₹2,000 + 5% GST for the whole trek - **Stay at Gangotri:** guesthouse or homestay on a triple or quad sharing basis - **Connectivity:** tell your family before you leave Gangotri, as you are off-grid after Bhojwasa ### What food is served on the Vasuki Tal trek? Meals on the Vasuki Tal trek are included from Day 1 dinner to Day 8 dinner: freshly prepared, simple vegetarian food with breakfast, lunch, evening snacks, soup and dinner. - **Hot drinks:** tea, coffee and soups are served regularly to keep you warm at altitude - **On the trail:** packed lunches, so carry a reusable lunch box - **Not included:** meals during the drive between Dehradun and Gangotri ### Is drinking water available on the Vasuki Tal trek? Water is limited on the high sections of the Vasuki Tal trek, so carry two 1 L bottles and fill them at camp before you set out. - **Day 4:** carry water, snacks and sun protection for the whole day to Tapovan - **Day 6:** limited water on the way to the lake, so fill all bottles at Nandanvan - **Bottles:** make one insulated for the high camps ### Is Free Trekking Gear included on the Vasuki Tal trek? Yes, the Vasuki Tal trek includes Trekkaro’s Free Trekking Gear: trekking shoes, a -10°C padded jacket and trekking poles, plus gaiters and microspikes, at no rental fee. - **Deposit:** one refundable deposit of ₹3,000 + ₹200 washing charge covers the whole kit - **Value:** shoes worth ₹6,999 and a jacket worth ₹3,299 - **Snow gear:** gaiters and microspikes for snow patches near Gaumukh and Vasuki Tal, especially in May ### Is backpack offloading available on the Vasuki Tal trek? Yes, backpack offloading on the Vasuki Tal trek costs ₹4,300 + 5% GST for the full trek, for a bag of up to 9 kg. - **Not allowed:** suitcases, trolleys or duffel bags - **Late requests:** charges may be higher if you ask for offloading at Gangotri - **Day pack:** a 20–30 L day pack is needed if you offload ### Is there a doctor on the Vasuki Tal trek? No, a doctor is not part of the Vasuki Tal trek package. Safety is handled by experienced trek leaders and local certified mountain guides, with emergency support at every camp. - **At every camp:** first-aid kit, medical support and oxygen cylinders - **Evacuation:** stretchers at each campsite; your travel insurance must cover emergency evacuation - **Your part:** carry a personal medical kit and consult your doctor before the trek ### What documents do I need for the Vasuki Tal trek? For the Vasuki Tal trek you need a government photo ID, a medical certificate signed by a registered doctor and a copy of your travel insurance policy. - **Photo ID:** original and a photocopy (passport, Aadhaar, driving licence or voter ID) - **Medical certificate:** signed by a registered doctor - **Travel insurance:** mandatory and not included; it must cover high-altitude trekking and emergency evacuation ### Do I need a permit for the Vasuki Tal trek? Yes, but all necessary trekking permits and forest camping fees are included in the Vasuki Tal trek fee, so you do not need to arrange them. Just carry your original government photo ID and a photocopy on the trek. ### Is there mobile network and an ATM on the Vasuki Tal trek? No, there is no ATM or reliable mobile network on the Vasuki Tal trail. Gangotri is the last place with a stable signal (BSNL, Jio and Airtel), and Bhatwari has the last reliable ATM. - **Network:** very limited after Gangotri, and you are completely off-grid after Bhojwasa - **Power bank:** charge it fully before you leave Gangotri - **Cash:** enough for your share of the cab, offloading if needed and a possible buffer day ### Does the Vasuki Tal trek go through Gaumukh and Tapovan? Yes, the Vasuki Tal trek passes Gaumukh (3,892 m), the snout of the Gangotri Glacier and the source of the Ganga, on Day 4 and camps at Tapovan (4,463 m) that night. - **Tapovan:** a meadow camp with close views of Shivling (6,543 m) - **Gangotri Glacier:** crossed on Day 5 over moraine, crevasses and boulders - **Nandanvan:** open grassland at the foot of the Bhagirathi massif ### Do I need a buffer day for the Vasuki Tal trek? Yes, keep at least 1 buffer day for the Vasuki Tal trek in case weather, glacier conditions or acclimatisation cause a delay. If it is used, it costs ₹3,000 per person per day. If the buffer day is not needed, you can return earlier, so plan your onward travel with this spare day in mind. ### What is the minimum age for the Vasuki Tal trek? The minimum age for the Vasuki Tal trek is 16 years, because it is a 9-day Difficult trek over glacier ground to 4,880 m. Trekkers under 18 must come with a parent or guardian. Prior Himalayan experience is recommended. There is no upper age limit. Trekkers above 60 are welcome if they are fit and in good cardiovascular health; along with the medical certificate signed by a doctor that every trekker brings, we recommend an ECG or TMT report. ## Upcoming batches - 24 Oct 2026 to 1 Nov 2026 - 15 May 2027 to 23 May 2027 - 22 May 2027 to 30 May 2027 - 29 May 2027 to 6 Jun 2027 - 5 Jun 2027 to 13 Jun 2027 - 12 Jun 2027 to 20 Jun 2027 - 19 Jun 2027 to 27 Jun 2027 - 26 Jun 2027 to 4 Jul 2027 - 18 Sep 2027 to 26 Sep 2027 - 25 Sep 2027 to 3 Oct 2027 --- Book or ask questions: https://www.trekkaro.com/trek/vasuki-tal-trek · WhatsApp +91 75056 26675 · Calls +91 80576 54321 (main), +91 75056 26675 --- 36 treks listed.